OptiSystem Component Library PDF

OptiSystem
Component Library
Optical Communication System Design Software
Version 11
OptiSystem
Component Library
Optical Communication System Design Software
Copyright © 2012 Optiwave

All rights reserved.
All OptiSystem documents, including this one, and the information contained therein, is copyright material.
No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means whatsoever,
including recording, photocopying, or faxing, without prior written approval of Optiwave.
Disclaimer
Optiwave makes no representation or warranty with respect to the adequacy of this documentation or the programs which it
describes for any particular purpose or with respect to its adequacy to produce any particular result. In no event shall Optiwave, its
employees, its contractors or the authors of this documentation, be liable for special, direct, indirect, or consequential damages,
losses, costs, charges, claims, demands, or claim for lost profits, fees, or expenses of any nature or kind.
Technical Support
If you purchased Optiwave software from a distributor that is not listed here, please send technical
questions to your distributor.
Optiwave Canada/US
Tel (613) 224-4700 E-mail support@optiwave.com
Fax (613) 224-4706 URL www.optiwave.com
Cybernet Systems Co., Ltd. Japan

Tel +81 (03) 5297-3342 E-mail owtech@cybernet.co.jp
Fax +81 (03) 5297-3646 URL www.cybernet.co.jp
Optiwave Europe Europe

Tel +33 (0) 494 08 27 97 E-mail support@optiwave.com
Fax +33 (0) 494 33 65 76 URL www.optiwave.eu
Table of contents
Transmitters Library ........................................................................................ 1
Pulse Generators ...................................................................................................... 1

Electrical ..............................................................................................................................1
Duobinary Pulse Generator........................................................................................3
Electrical Jitter............................................................................................................5
Noise Source..............................................................................................................7
RZ Pulse Generator ...................................................................................................9
NRZ Pulse Generator...............................................................................................13
Gaussian Pulse Generator.......................................................................................17
Hyperbolic-Secant Pulse Generator.........................................................................19
Sine Generator.........................................................................................................21
Triangle Pulse Generator .........................................................................................23
Saw-Up Pulse Generator .........................................................................................25
Saw-Down Pulse Generator.....................................................................................27
Impulse Generator ...................................................................................................29
Raised Cosine Pulse Generator...............................................................................31
Sine Pulse Generator...............................................................................................33
Measured Pulse .......................................................................................................35
Measured Pulse Sequence ......................................................................................37
Bias Generator .........................................................................................................39
M-ary Pulse Generator.............................................................................................41
M-ary Raised Cosine Pulse Generator ....................................................................43
Predistortion .............................................................................................................45
Optical................................................................................................................................47
Optical Gaussian Pulse Generator...........................................................................49
Optical Sech Pulse Generator..................................................................................53
Optical Impulse Generator .......................................................................................57
Measured Optical Pulse ...........................................................................................61
Measured Optical Pulse Sequence..........................................................................65
Time Resolve Chirp (TRC) Measurement Data .......................................................69
Spatial Optical Gaussian Pulse Generator...............................................................73
Spatial Optical Sech Pulse Generator......................................................................77
Spatial Optical Impulse Generator ...........................................................................81
Optical Sources....................................................................................................... 85
CW Laser .................................................................................................................87
Laser Rate Equations...............................................................................................91
Laser Measured .......................................................................................................97
Fabry Perot Laser ..................................................................................................105
LED ........................................................................................................................111
White Light Source.................................................................................................113
Pump Laser............................................................................................................115
Pump Laser Array ..................................................................................................117
Controlled Pump Laser ..........................................................................................121
CW Laser Array......................................................................................................123
CW Laser Array ES................................................................................................127
CW Laser Measured ..............................................................................................131
Directly Modulated Laser Measured ......................................................................137
VCSEL Laser .........................................................................................................145
Spatial CW Laser ...................................................................................................157
Spatiotemporal VCSEL ..........................................................................................161
Spatial VCSEL .......................................................................................................169
Spatial Laser Rate Equations.................................................................................177
Spatial LED ............................................................................................................181
Optical Transmitters ............................................................................................. 185
WDM Transmitter ...................................................................................................187
Optical Transmitter.................................................................................................195
Optical Duobinary Transmitter ...............................................................................201
Optical DPSK Transmitter ......................................................................................207
Optical CSRZ Transmitter ......................................................................................213
Optical QPSK Transmitter......................................................................................217
Optical DP-QPSK Transmitter................................................................................221
Spatial Optical Transmitter.....................................................................................225
Modulators............................................................................................................. 233
Optical..............................................................................................................................233
Mach-Zehnder Modulator.......................................................................................235
Electroabsorption Modulator ..................................................................................237
Amplitude Modulator ..............................................................................................239
Phase Modulator ....................................................................................................241
Frequency Modulator .............................................................................................243
Dual Drive Mach-Zehnder Modulator Measured ....................................................245
Electroabsorption Modulator Measured .................................................................249
Single Drive Mach-Zehnder Modulator Measured .................................................253
Dual Port Dual Drive Mach-Zehnder Modulator Measured ....................................257
Lithium Niobate Mach-Zehnder Modulator.............................................................261
Bit Sequence Generators ..................................................................................... 265
Pseudo-Random Bit Sequence Generator.............................................................267
User-Defined Bit Sequence Generator ..................................................................271
Multimode Library........................................................................................ 273
Donut Transverse Mode Generator .......................................................................275

Hermite Transverse Mode Generator ....................................................................279
Laguerre Transverse Mode Generator...................................................................283
Multimode Generator .............................................................................................287
Measured Transverse Mode ..................................................................................291
Mode ID Modifier....................................................................................................295
Optical Fibers Library.................................................................................. 297
Optical fiber ............................................................................................................299

Optical fiber CWDM ...............................................................................................337
Bidirectional Optical Fiber ......................................................................................361
Nonlinear Dispersive Fiber (Obsolete) ...................................................................383
Linear Multimode Fiber ..........................................................................................399
Parabolic-Index Multimode Fiber ...........................................................................405
Measured-Index Multimode Fiber ..........................................................................413
Free Space Optics Library .......................................................................... 425
FSO Channel .........................................................................................................427

OWC Channel ........................................................................................................433
Receivers Library......................................................................................... 439
Multimode .............................................................................................................. 439

Mode Combiner......................................................................................................441
Mode Selector ........................................................................................................443
Regenerators ......................................................................................................... 445
Clock Recovery ......................................................................................................447
Data Recovery .......................................................................................................449
3R Regenerator......................................................................................................453
Electronic Equalizer ...............................................................................................457
MLSE Equalizer .....................................................................................................463
Integrate And Dump ...............................................................................................467
Voltage-Controlled Oscillator .................................................................................469
Detectors................................................................................................................ 471
Optical Chirp Detector............................................................................................473
Optical Phase Detector ..........................................................................................477
Optical Power Detector ..........................................................................................481
Optical Receivers .................................................................................................. 485
Optical Receiver.....................................................................................................487
Optical DPSK Receiver ..........................................................................................491
Optical Coherent QPSK Receiver ..........................................................................495
Optical Coherent DP-QPSK Receiver....................................................................499
Spatial Optical Receiver.........................................................................................505
Photodetectors...................................................................................................... 509
Photodetector PIN..................................................................................................511
Photodetector APD ................................................................................................517
Spatial PIN Photodetector......................................................................................523
Spatial APD Photodetector ....................................................................................527
Amplifiers Library ........................................................................................ 531
Optical .................................................................................................................... 531

EDFA Black Box.....................................................................................................533
EDFA......................................................................................................................545
Optical Amplifier ....................................................................................................553
Optical Amplifier Measured ....................................................................................559
Optical Fiber Amplifier............................................................................................565
Raman ..............................................................................................................................579
Raman Amplifier Component (Obsolete) ...............................................................581
Raman Amplifier-Average Power Model ................................................................597
Raman Amplifier-Dynamic Model...........................................................................607
Doped Fibers ...................................................................................................................617
Er Doped Fiber Dynamic........................................................................................619
Er Doped Fiber Dynamic Analytical .......................................................................627
Er Doped Fiber.......................................................................................................635
Er Doped Multimode Fiber .....................................................................................675
Er-Yb Codoped Fiber .............................................................................................693
Er-Yb Codoped Fiber Dynamic ..............................................................................707
Er-Yb Codoped Waveguide ..................................................................................717
Pr Doped Fiber.......................................................................................................737
Yb-Doped Fiber......................................................................................................749
Yb-Doped Fiber Dynamic.......................................................................................763
Yb Doped Multimode Fiber ....................................................................................775
Tm Doped Fiber .....................................................................................................791
SOA ..................................................................................................................................805
Traveling Wave SOA .............................................................................................807
Wideband Traveling Wave SOA ............................................................................813
Reflective SOA.......................................................................................................821
Electrical ................................................................................................................ 827
Limiting Amplifier....................................................................................................829
Electrical Amplifier..................................................................................................833
Transimpedance Amplifier .....................................................................................835
AGC Amplifier ........................................................................................................837
Filters Library ............................................................................................... 839
Optical .................................................................................................................... 839

Optical IIR Filter (Obsolete)....................................................................................841
Optical Digital Filter ................................................................................................845
Measured Optical Filter ..........................................................................................849
Measured Group Delay Optical Filter.....................................................................853
Rectangle Optical Filter..........................................................................................859
Trapezoidal Optical Filter .......................................................................................861
Gaussian Optical Filter...........................................................................................863
Butterworth Optical Filter........................................................................................865
Bessel Optical Filter ...............................................................................................867
Fabry Perot Optical Filter .......................................................................................871
Acousto Optical Filter .............................................................................................873
Mach-Zehnder Interferometer ................................................................................877
Inverted Optical IIR Filter (Obsolete)......................................................................879
Inverted Optical Digital Filter ..................................................................................883
Inverted Rectangle Optical Filter............................................................................887
Inverted Trapezoidal Optical Filter .........................................................................889
Inverted Gaussian Optical Filter.............................................................................891
Inverted Butterworth Optical Filter..........................................................................893
Inverted Bessel Optical Filter .................................................................................895
Gain Flattening Filter..............................................................................................897
Delay Interferometer ..............................................................................................901
Transmission Filter Bidirectional ............................................................................903
Reflective Filter Bidirectional..................................................................................907
3-Port Filter Bidirectional........................................................................................911
Periodic Optical Filter .............................................................................................915
FBG ..................................................................................................................................919
Fiber Bragg Grating (FBG).....................................................................................921
Uniform Fiber Bragg Grating ..................................................................................927
Ideal Dispersion Compensation FBG.....................................................................929
Electrical ................................................................................................................ 935
IIR Filter (Obsolete)................................................................................................937
Digital Filter ............................................................................................................941
Low Pass Rectangle Filter .....................................................................................945
Low Pass Gaussian Filter ......................................................................................947
Low Pass Butterworth Filter ...................................................................................949
Low Pass Bessel Filter...........................................................................................951
Low Pass Chebyshev Filter....................................................................................955
Low Pass RC Filter ................................................................................................957
Low Pass Raised Cosine Filter ..............................................................................959
Low Pass Cosine Roll Off Filter .............................................................................961
Low Pass Squared Cosine Roll Off Filter...............................................................963
Band Pass IIR Filter (Obsolete) .............................................................................965
Measured Filter ......................................................................................................969
Band Pass Rectangle Filter....................................................................................973
Band Pass Gaussian Filter.....................................................................................975
Band Pass Butterworth Filter .................................................................................977
Band Pass Bessel Filter .........................................................................................979
Band Pass Chebyshev Filter..................................................................................983
Band Pass RC Filter...............................................................................................985
Band Pass Raised Cosine Filter ............................................................................987
Band Pass Cosine Roll Off Filter............................................................................989
Band Pass Squared Cosine Roll Off Filter .............................................................991
S Parameters Measured Filter ...............................................................................993
WDM Multiplexers Library........................................................................... 997
Add and Drop ........................................................................................................ 997

WDM Add...............................................................................................................999
WDM Drop ...........................................................................................................1003
WDM Add and Drop .............................................................................................1007
Demultiplexers .................................................................................................... 1011
WDM Demux 1x2 .................................................................................................1013
WDM Demux 1x4 .................................................................................................1017
WDM Demux 1x8 .................................................................................................1021
WDM Demux........................................................................................................1025
WDM Demux ES ..................................................................................................1029
WDM Interleaver Demux......................................................................................1031
Ideal Demux .........................................................................................................1033
Multiplexers ......................................................................................................... 1035
WDM Mux 2x1......................................................................................................1037
WDM Mux 4x1......................................................................................................1041
WDM Mux 8x1......................................................................................................1045
WDM Mux ............................................................................................................1049
WDM Mux ES.......................................................................................................1053
Ideal Mux..............................................................................................................1055
Nx1 Mux Bidirectional ..........................................................................................1057
AWG ..................................................................................................................... 1061
AWG NxN.............................................................................................................1063
AWG NxN Bidirectional ........................................................................................1065
Network Library.......................................................................................... 1071
Optical Switches ................................................................................................. 1071

Dynamic Y Select Nx1 Measured ........................................................................1073
Dynamic Y Switch 1xN Measured........................................................................1077
Dynamic Y Switch 1xN.........................................................................................1081
Dynamic Y Select Nx1 .........................................................................................1085
Dynamic Space Switch Matrix NxM Measured ....................................................1089
Dynamic Space Switch Matrix NxM .....................................................................1093
Optical Switch ......................................................................................................1097
Digital Optical Switch ...........................................................................................1099
Optical Y Switch ...................................................................................................1101
Optical Y Select....................................................................................................1103
Ideal Switch 2x2 ...................................................................................................1105
Ideal Y Switch ......................................................................................................1107
Ideal Y Select .......................................................................................................1109
Ideal Y Switch 1x4................................................................................................1111
Ideal Y Select 4x1 ................................................................................................1113
Ideal Y Switch 1x8................................................................................................1115
Ideal Y Select 8x1 ................................................................................................1117
Ideal Y Select Nx1................................................................................................1119
Ideal Y Switch 1xN ...............................................................................................1121
2x2 Switch Bidirectional .......................................................................................1123
Frequency Conversion ....................................................................................... 1125
Ideal Frequency Converter...................................................................................1127
Passives Library ........................................................................................ 1129
Electrical .............................................................................................................. 1129

Electrical Phase Shift ...........................................................................................1131
Electrical Signal Time Delay ................................................................................1133
Attenuators....................................................................................................................1135
Electrical Attenuator .............................................................................................1137
Couplers ........................................................................................................................1139
90 Degree Hybrid Coupler ...................................................................................1141
180 Degree Hybrid Coupler .................................................................................1143
DC Blockers...................................................................................................................1145
DC Block ..............................................................................................................1147
Splitters..........................................................................................................................1149
Splitter 1x2 ...........................................................................................................1151
Splitter 1xN...........................................................................................................1153
Combiners .....................................................................................................................1155
Combiner 2x1.......................................................................................................1157
Combiner Nx1 ......................................................................................................1159
Measured Components ................................................................................................1161
1 Port S Parameters.............................................................................................1163
Transmission Lines ......................................................................................................1173
Coaxial Cable.......................................................................................................1175
Transmission Line ................................................................................................1181
Two Wire Cable....................................................................................................1185
RLCG Transmission Line .....................................................................................1191
Parallel Plate Transmission Line..........................................................................1195
Optical .................................................................................................................. 1201
Phase Shift...........................................................................................................1203
Time Delay ...........................................................................................................1207
Attenuators....................................................................................................................1211
Optical Attenuator ................................................................................................1213
Attenuator Bidirectional ........................................................................................1215
Connectors ....................................................................................................................1219
Connector.............................................................................................................1221
Connector Bidirectional ........................................................................................1223
Spatial Connector.................................................................................................1227
Reflectors ......................................................................................................................1231
Reflector Bidirectional ..........................................................................................1233
Saturable Absorber ..............................................................................................1237
Taps................................................................................................................................1239
Tap Bidirectional ..................................................................................................1241
Measured Components ................................................................................................1245
Luna Technologies OVA Measurement ...............................................................1247
Measured Component..........................................................................................1251
Multimode ......................................................................................................................1255
Spatial Aperture ...................................................................................................1257
Thin Lens .............................................................................................................1259
Vortex Lens ..........................................................................................................1261
Couplers ........................................................................................................................1263
X Coupler .............................................................................................................1265
Pump Coupler Co-Propagating ............................................................................1267
Pump Coupler Counter-Propagating....................................................................1269
Coupler Bidirectional ............................................................................................1271
Pump Coupler Bidirectional..................................................................................1277
Power Splitters..............................................................................................................1283
Power Splitter 1x2 ................................................................................................1285
Power Splitter 1x4 ................................................................................................1287
Power Splitter 1x8 ................................................................................................1289
Power Splitter.......................................................................................................1291
1xN Splitter Bidirectional ......................................................................................1293
Power Combiners .........................................................................................................1297
Power Combiner 2x1............................................................................................1299
Power Combiner 4x1............................................................................................1301
Power Combiner 8x1............................................................................................1303
Power Combiner ..................................................................................................1305
Polarization....................................................................................................................1307
Linear Polarizer ....................................................................................................1309
Circular Polarizer..................................................................................................1311
Polarization Attenuator.........................................................................................1313
Polarization Delay ................................................................................................1315
Polarization Phase Shift .......................................................................................1317
Polarization Combiner..........................................................................................1319
Polarization Controller..........................................................................................1321
Polarization Rotator..............................................................................................1323
Polarization Splitter ..............................................................................................1325
PMD Emulator......................................................................................................1327
Polarization Combiner Bidirectional .....................................................................1331
Polarization Waveplate ........................................................................................1335
Polarization Filter .................................................................................................1337
Isolators .........................................................................................................................1339
Isolator .................................................................................................................1341
Ideal Isolator.........................................................................................................1343
Isolator Bidirectional.............................................................................................1345
Circulators .....................................................................................................................1349
Circulator..............................................................................................................1351
Ideal Circulator .....................................................................................................1353
Circulator Bidirectional .........................................................................................1355
Signal Processing Library......................................................................... 1359
Arithmetic ............................................................................................................ 1359

Electrical ........................................................................................................................1359
Electrical Gain ......................................................................................................1361
Electrical Adder ....................................................................................................1363
Electrical Subtractor .............................................................................................1365
Electrical Multiplier ...............................................................................................1367
Electrical Bias.......................................................................................................1369
Electrical Norm.....................................................................................................1371
Electrical Differentiator .........................................................................................1373
Electrical Integrator ..............................................................................................1375
Electrical Rescale.................................................................................................1377
Electrical Reciprocal.............................................................................................1379
Electrical Abs .......................................................................................................1381
Electrical Sgn .......................................................................................................1383
Optical............................................................................................................................1385
Optical Gain .........................................................................................................1387
Optical Adder .......................................................................................................1389
Optical Subtractor ................................................................................................1391
Optical Bias ..........................................................................................................1393
Optical Multiplier...................................................................................................1395
Optical Hard Limiter .............................................................................................1397
Tools..................................................................................................................... 1399
Electrical ........................................................................................................................1399
Convert To Electrical Individual Samples.............................................................1401
Convert From Electrical Individual Samples ........................................................1403
Electrical Downsampler........................................................................................1405
Optical............................................................................................................................1407
Merge Optical Signal Bands.................................................................................1409
Convert to Parameterized ....................................................................................1411
Convert to Noise Bins ..........................................................................................1413
Convert To Optical Individual Samples ................................................................1415
Convert From Optical Individual Samples............................................................1417
Optical Downsampler ...........................................................................................1419
Signal Type Selector ............................................................................................1421
Convert To Sampled Signals ...............................................................................1423
Channel Attacher .................................................................................................1425
Binary.............................................................................................................................1427
Convert To Individual Bits ....................................................................................1429
Convert From Individual Bits ................................................................................1431
Serial To Parallel Converter .................................................................................1433
Serial To Parallel Converter 1xN..........................................................................1435
Parallel To Serial Converter .................................................................................1437
Parallel To Serial Converter Nx1..........................................................................1439
Logic..................................................................................................................... 1441
Binary.............................................................................................................................1441
Binary NOT ..........................................................................................................1443
Binary AND ..........................................................................................................1445
Binary OR.............................................................................................................1447
Binary XOR ..........................................................................................................1449
Binary NAND........................................................................................................1451
Binary NOR ..........................................................................................................1453
Binary XNOR........................................................................................................1455
Delay ....................................................................................................................1457
Duobinary Precoder .............................................................................................1459
4-DPSK Precoder.................................................................................................1461
Electrical ........................................................................................................................1463
Electrical NOT ......................................................................................................1465
Electrical AND ......................................................................................................1467
Electrical OR ........................................................................................................1469
Electrical XOR......................................................................................................1471
Electrical NAND ...................................................................................................1473
Electrical NOR......................................................................................................1475
Electrical XNOR ...................................................................................................1477
T Flip-Flop ............................................................................................................1479
D Flip-Flop............................................................................................................1481
JK Flip-Flop ..........................................................................................................1483
RS Flip-Flop .........................................................................................................1485
RS NOR Latch .....................................................................................................1487
RS NAND Latch ...................................................................................................1489
Clocked RS NAND Latch .....................................................................................1491
Tools Library .............................................................................................. 1493

Switch...................................................................................................................1495
Select ...................................................................................................................1497
Fork 1x2 ...............................................................................................................1499
Loop Control.........................................................................................................1501
Ground .................................................................................................................1503
Buffer Selector .....................................................................................................1505
Fork 1xN...............................................................................................................1507
Binary Null............................................................................................................1509
Optical Null...........................................................................................................1511
Electrical Null .......................................................................................................1513
Binary Delay.........................................................................................................1515
Optical Delay........................................................................................................1517
Electrical Delay ....................................................................................................1519
Optical Ring Controller .........................................................................................1521
Electrical Ring Controller......................................................................................1523
Duplicator .............................................................................................................1525
Limiter ..................................................................................................................1527
Initializer ...............................................................................................................1529
Save to file ...........................................................................................................1531
Load from file .......................................................................................................1533
Command Line Application ..................................................................................1535
Swap Horiz...........................................................................................................1541
Optiwave Software Tools .......................................................................... 1543
OptiAmplifier.........................................................................................................1545
OptiGrating...........................................................................................................1553
WDM_Phasar Demux 1xN ...................................................................................1557
WDM_Phasar Mux Nx1........................................................................................1559
OptiBPM Component NxM...................................................................................1563
Save Transverse Mode ........................................................................................1567
OptiSPICE Output ................................................................................................1571
OptiSPICE NetList................................................................................................1573
MATLAB Library......................................................................................... 1575
MATLAB Filter Component ..................................................................................1577

MATLAB Optical Filter Component ......................................................................1581
MATLAB Component ...........................................................................................1585
Scilab Library ............................................................................................. 1599
Scilab Component................................................................................................1601
EDA Cosimulation Library ........................................................................ 1605
Save ADS File......................................................................................................1607

Load ADS File ......................................................................................................1611
Save Spice Stimulus File .....................................................................................1615
Load Spice CSDF File..........................................................................................1621
Triggered Save Spice Stimulus File .....................................................................1625
Triggered Load Spice CSDF File .........................................................................1631
Analog/Digital Library................................................................................ 1635
Carrier Generators .............................................................................................. 1635

Carrier Generator .................................................................................................1637
Carrier Generator Measured ................................................................................1641
Transmitters ........................................................................................................ 1643
Modulators.....................................................................................................................1643
Electrical Amplitude Modulator (AM)....................................................................1645
Electrical Frequency Modulator (FM) ...................................................................1647
Electrical Phase Modulator (PM)..........................................................................1649
Quadrature Modulator ..........................................................................................1651
PAM Modulator ....................................................................................................1653
QAM Modulator ....................................................................................................1655
PSK Modulator .....................................................................................................1657
DPSK Modulator ..................................................................................................1659
OQPSK Modulator ...............................................................................................1661
MSK Modulator ....................................................................................................1663
FSK Modulator .....................................................................................................1665
CPFSK Modulator ................................................................................................1667
OFDM Modulator..................................................................................................1669
OFDM Modulator Measured.................................................................................1677
Burst Modulator....................................................................................................1685
Pulse generators...........................................................................................................1687
PAM Pulse Generator ..........................................................................................1689
QAM Pulse Generator..........................................................................................1691
PSK Pulse Generator...........................................................................................1695
DPSK Pulse Generator ........................................................................................1697
OQPSK Pulse Generator .....................................................................................1699
MSK Pulse Generator ..........................................................................................1701
Sequence generators ...................................................................................................1705
PAM Sequence Generator ...................................................................................1707
QAM Sequence Generator...................................................................................1711
PSK Sequence Generator....................................................................................1715
DPSK Sequence Generator .................................................................................1719
PPM Sequence Generator ...................................................................................1723
DPIM Sequence Generator..................................................................................1725
4B5B Sequence Generator ..................................................................................1727
NRZI Sequence Generator ..................................................................................1729
AMI Sequence Generator ....................................................................................1731
Manchester Sequence Generator ........................................................................1735
4B3T Sequence Generator ..................................................................................1737
8B10B Sequence Generator ................................................................................1739
Receivers ............................................................................................................. 1741
Demodulators................................................................................................................1741
Electrical Amplitude Demodulator ........................................................................1743
Electrical Phase Demodulator..............................................................................1745
Electrical Frequency Demodulator .......................................................................1747
Quadrature Demodulator .....................................................................................1749
OFDM Demodulator .............................................................................................1751
OFDM Demodulator Measured ............................................................................1755
Burst Demodulator ...............................................................................................1759
Decoders........................................................................................................................1761
PAM Sequence Decoder......................................................................................1763
QAM Sequence Decoder .....................................................................................1767
PSK Sequence Decoder ......................................................................................1771
DPSK Sequence Decoder....................................................................................1775
PPM Sequence Decoder......................................................................................1779
DPIM Sequence Decoder ....................................................................................1781
4B5B Sequence Decoder.....................................................................................1783
NRZI Sequence Decoder .....................................................................................1785
AMI Sequence Decoder .......................................................................................1787
Manchester Sequence Decoder...........................................................................1791
4B3T Sequence Decoder.....................................................................................1793
8B10B Sequence Decoder...................................................................................1795
Detectors .......................................................................................................................1797
M-Ary Threshold Detector ....................................................................................1799
Visualizer Library ....................................................................................... 1801
Optical .................................................................................................................. 1801

Optical Spectrum Analyzer (OSA)........................................................................1803
Optical Time Domain Visualizer (OTDV)..............................................................1809
Optical Power Meter.............................................................................................1817
Polarization Meter ................................................................................................1821
Polarization Analyzer ...........................................................................................1827
WDM Analyzer (WDMA) ......................................................................................1835
Dual Port WDM Analyzer (DPWDMA) .................................................................1841
Differential Mode Delay Analyzer.........................................................................1849
Spatial Visualizer..................................................................................................1853
Encircled Flux Analyzer........................................................................................1861
Test Sets ........................................................................................................................1865
Optical Filter Analyzer ..........................................................................................1867
Photonic All-parameter Analyzer..........................................................................1871
Convergence Monitor...........................................................................................1875
Electrical .............................................................................................................. 1879
Oscilloscope Visualizer ........................................................................................1881
RF Spectrum Analyzer (RFSA) ...........................................................................1885
Eye Diagram Analyzer .........................................................................................1889
BER Analyzer.......................................................................................................1907
Electrical Power Meter .........................................................................................1925
Electrical Carrier Analyzer (ECAN) ......................................................................1929
Dual Port Electrical Carrier Analyzer....................................................................1935
Electrical Constellation Visualizer ........................................................................1941
Test Sets ........................................................................................................................1949
Electrical Filter Analyzer.......................................................................................1951
S Parameter Extractor..........................................................................................1953
Binary ................................................................................................................... 1957
Binary Sequence Visualizer .................................................................................1959
M-ary Sequence Visualizer ..................................................................................1963
Test Sets ........................................................................................................................1967
BER Test Set .......................................................................................................1969
Transmitters Library
Pulse Generators
Electrical
• Duobinary Pulse Generator

• Electrical Jitter
• Noise Source
• RZ Pulse Generator
• NRZ Pulse Generator
• Gaussian Pulse Generator
• Hyperbolic-Secant Pulse Generator
• Sine Generator
• Triangle Pulse Generator
• Saw-Up Pulse Generator
• Saw-Down Pulse Generator
• Impulse Generator
• Raised Cosine Pulse Generator
• Sine Pulse Generator
• Measured Pulse
• Measured Pulse Sequence
• Bias Generator
• M-ary Pulse Generator
• M-ary Raised Cosine Pulse Generator
• Predistortion
1
Notes:
2
DUOBINARY PULSE GENERATOR
Duobinary Pulse Generator
Used for duobinary modulation schemes. It is equivalent to a subsystem based on an

electrical delay and adder. It can be used together with any electrical pulse generator.
Ports
Name and description Port type Signal type

Input Input Electrical
Clock Input Binary
Output Output Electrical
Parameters
Simulation
Name and description Default value Units Value range

Enabled True — True, False
Determines whether or not the component is enabled
3
DUOBINARY PULSE GENERATOR
Technical background
The equivalent subsystem is:
Figure 1 Duobinary Pulse Generator subsystem
4
ELECTRICAL JITTER
Electrical Jitter
Inserts jitter in the input signal.
Ports

Clock Input Binary
Parameters
Main
Name and description Default Default unit Units Value

value range
Frequency 100 MHz Hz, MHz, GHz, [0,+INF[
THz
Jitter frequency
Jitter amplitude 0.1 UI - [0,+INF[
Jitter amplitude range
Random jitter amplitude 0 UI - [0,+INF[
rms Random jitter
Simulation
Name and description Default Units Value

value range
Enabled True - True, False
5
ELECTRICAL JITTER
The jitter is a short-term, non-cumulative variation of the significant instants of a digital
signal from their positions in time. Jitter amplitude is measured in unit intervals (UI),
where 1 UI is the phase deviation of one clock period. The peak-to-peak UI deviation
of the phase function with respect to time is referred as jitter amplitude. The output
signal is:
A
out ( t ) = E in ⎛⎝ t + tr + ------- sin ( 2πft )⎞⎠
2B
where A is the deterministic jitter amplitude, B is the signal bit rate, and f is the jitter
frequency. And tr is the random jitter that has a Gaussian probability distribution with
zero mean and standard deviation defined by the parameter Random jitter amplitude
(rms value).
6
NOISE SOURCE
Noise Source
Source of thermal noise.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
—
PSD True — True, False
Determines whether the power is defined as PSD

or as the average power in time
Noise Power –60 dBm W, mW, dBm ]-INF,+INF[
Value of the PSD or the average power
Simulation

value range
Enabled True — — True, False
Determines whether or not the component is

enabled
Iterations Iterations — — [1,+INF[

Number of times to repeat the calculation
Sample rate Sample rate Hz Hz, GHz, THz ]0,+INF[
Frequency simulation window
7
NOISE SOURCE
Noise

value range
Add noise to signal False — True, False
Determines whether the noise will propagate separately from the

signal or will be added to the signal
Random numbers

value range
Generate random seed True — True, False
Determines if the seed is automatically defined and unique
Random seed index 0 — [0, 4999]
User-defined seed index for noise generation
The average output Power or Power spectral density are parameters that you specify.
This model generates electrical sampled signals or electrical sampled noise
according to:
E out = [ x ( t ) + jy ( t ) ] P ⁄ 2
A Gaussian distribution describes the probability density function for the real and
imaginary part of E. P is the average power when PSD parameter is false, if PSD is
true then P is calculated from the power spectral density multiplied by the Sample
rate.
8
RZ PULSE GENERATOR
RZ Pulse Generator
Generates a Return to Zero (RZ) coded signal.
Ports

Bit sequence Input Binary
Parameters
Main
Name and description Default Default unit Value

value range
Rectangle shape Exponential — Exponential,
Gaussian,
Determines the shape for the edges of the pulse Linear, Sine
Amplitude 1 a.u. ]-INF,+INF[
Peak-to-peak amplitude of the pulse
Bias 0 a.u. ]-INF,+INF[
DC Offset of the pulse
Duty cycle 0.5 bit [0,1]

Duration of the high level bit
Position 0 bit
Rise time 0.05 bit [0,1]
Defined as the time from when the rising edge reaches 10% of the
amplitude to the time it reaches 90% of the amplitude
Fall time 0.05 bit [0,1]
Defined as the time from when the falling edge reaches 90% of the
9
RZ PULSE GENERATOR
Simulation
Name and description Default Default Unit Value

value units range

enabled
According to the parameter Rectangle shape, this model can produce pulses with
different edge shapes:
Exponential
⎧ – ( t ⁄ cr )
⎪1 – e ,0 ≤ t < t 1
⎪
⎪ 1, t 1 ≤ t < t 2
E(t ) = ⎨
⎪ e – ( t ⁄ cf ) ,t ≤ t < t
⎪ 2 c
⎪ 0, t c ≤ t < T
⎩
Gaussian
⎧
2
–( t ⁄ cr )
⎪1 – e ,0 ≤ t < t 1
⎪
⎪ 1, t 1 ≤ t < t 2
E(t) = ⎨ 2
⎪ e – ( t ⁄ c f ) ,t ≤ t < t
⎪ 2 c
⎪ 0, t c ≤ t < T
⎩
10
RZ PULSE GENERATOR
Linear
⎧ t ⁄ c r ,0 ≤ t < t 1
⎪
⎪ 1, t 1 ≤ t < t 2
E(t) = ⎨
⎪ t ⁄ c f ,t 2 ≤ t < t c
⎪
⎩ 0, t c ≤ t < T
Sine
⎧ sin ( π.t ⁄ c r ) ,0 ≤ t < t 1
⎪
⎪ 1 ,t 1 ≤ t < t 2
E(t ) = ⎨
⎪ sin ( π.t ⁄ c f ) ,t 2 ≤ t < t c
⎪
⎩ 0 ,t c ≤ t < T
where cr is the rise time coefficient and cf is the fall time coefficient. t1 and t2, together
with cr and cf, are numerically determinate to generate pulses with the exact values
of the parameters Rise time and Fall time. tc is the duty cycle duration, and T is the
bit period.
11
RZ PULSE GENERATOR
Notes:
12
NRZ PULSE GENERATOR
NRZ Pulse Generator
Generates a Non Return to Zero (NRZ) coded signal.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Rectangle shape Exponential — Exponential,
Gaussian,
Determines the shape for the edges of the pulse Linear, Sine
Position 0 bit
Rise time 0.05 bit [0,1]
Defined as the time from when the rising edge reaches 10% of the
Fall time 0.05 bit [0,1]

Defined as the time from when the falling edge reaches 90% of the
13
NRZ PULSE GENERATOR
Simulation

value units range

enabled
14
NRZ PULSE GENERATOR
According to the parameter Rectangle shape, this model can produce pulses with
different edge shapes:
Exponential
⎧ – ( t ⁄ cr )
⎪1 – e ,0 ≤ t < t 1
⎪
E(t ) = ⎨ 1 ,t 1 ≤ t < t 2
⎪ –( t ⁄ c )
⎪ e f
,t 2 ≤ t < T
⎩
Gaussian
⎧ –( t ⁄ cr )2
⎪ e ,0 ≤ t < t 1
⎪
E(t) = ⎨ 1 ,t 1 ≤ t < t 2
⎪ 2
⎪ e –( t ⁄ c f ) ,( t ≤ t < T )
⎩ 2
15
NRZ PULSE GENERATOR
Linear
⎧ t ⁄ c r ,0 ≤ t < t 1
⎪
E ( t ) = ⎨ 1, t 1 ≤ t < t 2
⎪
⎩ t ⁄ c f ,t 2 ≤ t < T
Sine
⎧ sin ( π.t ⁄ c r ) ,0 ≤ t < t 1

⎪
E(t) = ⎨ 1 ,t 1 ≤ t < t 2
⎪
⎩ sin ( π.t ⁄ c f ) ,t 2 ≤ t < T
where cr is the rise time coefficient and cf is the fall time coefficient. t1 and t2, together
with cr and cf, are numerically determined to generate pulses with the exact values of
the parameters Rise time and Fall time, and T is the bit period.
16
GAUSSIAN PULSE GENERATOR
Gaussian Pulse Generator
Generates an electrical Gaussian-pulsed signal.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Width 0.5 bit [0,1]
FWHM of the pulse amplitude
Position 0 bit
Order 1 — [1,100]
Order of the function
Truncated False — True, False
Determines whether or not the pulses overlap with each other
17
GAUSSIAN PULSE GENERATOR
Simulation

value units range

enabled
This model generates Gaussian or super-Gaussian electrical pulses according to the
bit sequence at the input. For each bit
2N
1 t.k
⎛ – --- ⎛⎝ ----------------⎞⎠ ⎞
2 T FWHM
⎜
E ( t ) = B. ⎜ A p .e + A bias⎟⎟
⎝ ⎠
where Ap is the parameter peak-to-peak Amplitude, and Abias is the parameter Bias.
B is the bit value (1 or 0) and depends on the input bit sequence. k is the fitting
coefficient determined numerically to generate pulses with the exact values of the
parameter Width TFWHM, and N is the Order of the Gaussian (N=1) or super-Gaussian
pulses (N>1).
18
HYPERBOLIC-SECANT PULSE GENERATOR
Hyperbolic-Secant Pulse Generator
Generates a hyperbolic-secant pulsed signal.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Width 0.5 bit [0,1]
Position 0 bit

Defines whether or not the pulses overlap with each other
19
HYPERBOLIC-SECANT PULSE GENERATOR
Simulation

value units range

enabled
This model generates electrical pulses according to the bit sequence at the input. For
each bit:
t.k 2
E ( t ) = B. ⎛ A p ⁄ cosh ⎛ -----------------⎞ + A bias⎞
⎝ ⎝ T FWHM⎠ ⎠
parameter Width, TFWHM.
20
SINE GENERATOR
Sine Generator
Generates an electrical sine waveform signal.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Frequency 32 GHz Hz, MHz, GHz, ]0,+INF[
THz
Amplitude 1 a.u. — ]-INF,+INF[
Bias 0 a.u. — ]-INF,+INF[

Phase 0 deg — ]-INF,+INF[
Initial phase of the signal
21
SINE GENERATOR
Simulation

value range

enabled
22
TRIANGLE PULSE GENERATOR
Triangle Pulse Generator
Generates an electrical triangle-pulsed signal.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Width 0.5 bit [0,1]
Position 0 bit

23
TRIANGLE PULSE GENERATOR
Simulation

value units range

enabled
24
SAW-UP PULSE GENERATOR
Saw-Up Pulse Generator
Generates a saw-up signal.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Width 0.5 bit [0,1]
Position 0 bit

25
SAW-UP PULSE GENERATOR
Simulation

value units range

enabled
26
SAW-DOWN PULSE GENERATOR
Saw-Down Pulse Generator
Generates a saw-down pulsed signal.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Width 0.5 bit [0,1]
Position 0 bit [-1, 1]

27
SAW-DOWN PULSE GENERATOR
Simulation

value units range

enabled
28
IMPULSE GENERATOR
Impulse Generator
Generates an electrical signal composed by a sequence of Impulses.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Position 0.5 bit [0,1]
Relative position of the impulse
Simulation

value units range

enabled
29
IMPULSE GENERATOR
Notes:
30
RAISED COSINE PULSE GENERATOR
Raised Cosine Pulse Generator
Generates a raised-cosine pulsed signal.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Width 0.5 bit [0,1]
Position 0 bit

31
RAISED COSINE PULSE GENERATOR
Simulation
Name and description Default Default unit Unit Value

value range

enabled
each bit:
t.k 2
E ( t ) = B. ⎛ A p . cos ⎛ -----------------⎞ + A bias⎞
⎝ ⎝ T FWHM⎠ ⎠
parameter Width, TFWHM.
32
SINE PULSE GENERATOR
Sine Pulse Generator
Generates a sine-pulsed signal.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Width 0.5 bit [0,1]
Position 0 bit

33
SINE PULSE GENERATOR
Simulation

value units range

enabled
each bit:
t.k
E ( t ) = B. ⎛ A p . cos ⎛ -----------------⎞ + A bias⎞
⎝ ⎝ T FWHM⎠ ⎠
coefficient numerically determinate to generate pulses with the exact values of the
parameter Width TFWHM.
34
MEASURED PULSE
Measured Pulse
Generates an electrical pulse based on measurements according to the bit sequence

at the input port.
Ports

Parameters
Main
Name and description Default value Default unit Value range

Position 0 bit
Filename Pulse.dat — —
Filename with the measured data
Numerical

Interpolation Linear — Linear, Cubic
Determines the interpolation algorithm for the measured data
35
MEASURED PULSE
Simulation

value units range

enabled
Graphs
Name and description X Title Y Title

Measured data Time period (a.u.) Amplitude (a.u.)
This model generates electrical signal loading measurements from a file. The input
file is formatted containing two values per line, the time in seconds and signal
amplitude in arbitrary units. The time scale is normalized to fit in one bit period - the
duration of the pulse. For example, the file representing one measurement has the
following form:
0 0
1e-6 0.5
2e-6 0.5
3e-6 0
...
36
MEASURED PULSE SEQUENCE
Measured Pulse Sequence
Generates an electrical signal based on measurements.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Scale 1 a.u. ]-INF,+INF[
Factor to scale the signal amplitude
Start time 0 s [0,+INF[
Initial part of the signal to be skipped
Filename Sequence.dat — —
Numerical

37
MEASURED PULSE SEQUENCE
Simulation
Name and description Default Default Units Value

value unit range

enabled
Graphs

Measured data Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
This model generates electrical signal loading measurements from a file. The input
file is formatted containing two values per line, the time in seconds and signal
amplitude in arbitrary units. For example, the file representing one measurement has
the following form:
0 0
1e-6 0.5
2e-6 0.5
3e-6 0
...
38
BIAS GENERATOR
Bias Generator
A d.c. source.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Amplitude of the signal output
Simulation

value range

enabled
39
BIAS GENERATOR
Notes:
40
M-ARY PULSE GENERATOR
M-ary Pulse Generator
Generates multilevel pulses according to the M-ary signal input.
Ports

Input Input M-ary
Parameters
Main

value range
Gain 0 ]-INF,+INF[
Linear gain to be applied to the signal input
Duty cycle 1 bit [0,1]
Position 0 bit
Simulation

value units range
enabled
41
M-ARY PULSE GENERATOR
This model generates pulses according to:
⎧
⎪ b, 0 ≤ t < t 1
⎪
v out ( t ) = ⎨ av in ( t ) + b, t 1 ≤ t < t 1 + t c
⎪
⎪ b, t 1 + t c ≤ t < T
⎩
where v in is the input M-ary signal, a is the linear gain, and b is the parameter Bias.
T is the bit period, t c is the duty cycle, and t 1 is the pulse position.
42
M-ARY RAISED COSINE PULSE GENERATOR
M-ary Raised Cosine Pulse Generator
Generates multilevel raised cosine pulses according to the M-ary signal input.
Ports

Input Input M-ary
Parameters
Main

value range
Gain 0 ]-INF,+INF[
DC offset of the pulse
Width 1 bit [0,1]
Position 0 bit
Roll off factor 1 [0,1]

The raised cosine roll off factor
Square root False True, False
Determines whether or not the square root is enabled
43
M-ARY RAISED COSINE PULSE GENERATOR
Simulation

value units range

enabled
⎧
⎪ b, 0 ≤ t < t 1
⎪
v out ( t ) = ⎨ ah ( t ) + b, t 1 ≤ t < t 1 + w
⎪
⎪ b, t 1 + w ≤ t < T
⎩
where v in is the input M-ary signal, a is the linear gain, and b is the parameter Bias.
T is the bit period, w is the pulse width, and t 1 is the pulse position. h is given by:
⎛ sin ⎛ πt -----⎞ cos ⎛ απt ---------⎞ ⎞

⎜ ⎝ T⎠ ⎝ T ⎠⎟
h ( t ) = ⎜ ------------------------------------------
2
-⎟
⎜ πt ⎛ ⎛ 2αt ⎞ ⎞ ⎟
⎝ ----T⎝
- 1 – ---------
⎝ T ⎠ ⎠ ⎠
If parameter Square root is enable, h is given by:
πt
sin ⎛ ----- ( 1 + α )⎞
πt ⎝ T ⎠
cos ⎛ ----- ( 1 + α )⎞ + -------------------------------------
⎝T ⎠ 4αt
---------
T
h ( t ) = 4α ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2
-
4αt
π T ⎛ 1 – ⎛⎝ ---------⎞⎠ ⎞
⎝ T ⎠
44
PREDISTORTION
Predistortion
Apply predistortion to electrical signals. The component can inversely model an

optical modulator's amplitude and phase characteristics.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Predistortion Arcsin Arcsin,
Polynomial
Predistortion type
Coefficients 1 a.u. ]-INF,+INF[

Coefficients for Polynomial predistortion type
Gain 1 ]-INF,+INF[
Linear gain to be applied to the signal
DC Offset of the signal
Simulation

value units range
enabled
45
PREDISTORTION
If parameter Predistortion is Arcsin, the function applied to the input signal is:
1
v out ( t ) = --- arc sin ( v in ( t ) ) ⋅ a + b
π
where v in is the input signal, a is the linear gain, and b is the bias.
If parameter Predistortion is Polynomial, the function applied to the input signal is:
2 N
v out ( t ) = ( c 0 + c 1 v in ( t ) + c 2 v ( t ) in + … + c N v ( t ) in ) ⋅ a + b
where c i is the polynomial coefficient of index i.
46
PREDISTORTION
Pulse Generators
Optical
• Optical Gaussian Pulse Generator

• Optical Sech Pulse Generator
• Optical Impulse Generator
• Measured Optical Pulse
• Measured Optical Pulse Sequence
• Time Resolve Chirp (TRC) Measurement Data
• Spatial Optical Gaussian Pulse Generator
• Spatial Optical Sech Pulse Generator
• Spatial Optical Impulse Generator
47
PREDISTORTION
Notes:
48
OPTICAL GAUSSIAN PULSE GENERATOR
Optical Gaussian Pulse Generator
Generates a Gaussian-pulsed optical signal.
Ports

Output Output Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Frequency 193.1 THz Hz, THz, nm [0,+INF[
Emission frequency
Power 0 dBm W, mW, dBm ]-INF,+INF[
Peak-to-peak power of the pulse
Bias –100 dBm W, mW, dBm ]-INF,+INF[
Width 0.5 bit — [0,1]
Position 0 bit —
Order 1 — — [1,100]
Truncated False — — True, False
Determines whether or not the pulses overlap with

each other
49
Chirp

value range
Chirp definition Linear — Linear,
Measured
Chirp factor 0 rad/s
Alpha parameter 0 rad/W
Adiabatic chirp 0 1/s [0,1]
Results from changes in the steady state carrier densities
Polarization

value range
Azimuth 0 deg ]-90,90]
Azimuth angle of output polarization
Ellipticity 0 deg [-45,45]
Ellipticity angle of output polarization
Simulation

value range

enabled
Parameterized Parameterized — —
50
This model generates Gaussian or super-Gaussian optical pulses according to the bit
sequence at the input. For each bit, the output optical power is:
2N
1 t.k
⎛ – --- ⎛ ----------------⎞ ⎞
2 ⎝ T FWHM⎠
⎜
P ( t ) = B. A p .e + A bias⎟
⎜ ⎟
⎝ ⎠
where Ap is the parameter peak-to-peak Power, and Abias is the parameter Bias. B is
the bit value (1 or 0) and depends on the input bit sequence. k is the fitting coefficient
determined numerically to generate pulses with the exact values of the parameter
Width, TFWHM, and N is Order of the Gaussian (N=1) or super-Gaussian pulses (N>1).
The chirp is modeled using:
dϕ α d
------ = -----e- ----
- ln P ( t ) + κP ( t )
dt 2 dt
where ϕ is the signal phase, αe is the parameter Linewidth enhancement factor, and
κ is the parameter Adiabatic chirp.
The output is multiplied with a complex vector considering the state of polarization:
⎛ E X ( t )⎞ = ⎛⎜ 1 – k⎞⎟ ⋅ P ( t )
⎝ E Y ( t )⎠ ⎝ ke jθ ⎠
where the power splitting k and the phase difference θ are related to the parameters
Azimuth α and Ellipticity ε as:
k ( 1 – k ) cos ( θ )
tan ( 2α ) = 2 -----------------------------------------
1 – 2.k
sin ( 2ε ) = 2 k ( 1 – k ) sin ( θ )
51
Notes:
52
OPTICAL SECH PULSE GENERATOR
Optical Sech Pulse Generator
Generates a hyperbolic-secant pulsed optical signal.
Ports

Bit sequences Input Binary
Parameters
Main

value range
Emission frequency
Width 0.5 bit — [0,1]
Position 0 bit —
Truncated False — — True, False

each other
53
Chirp

value range
Chirp definition Linear — Linear,
Measured
Chirp factor 0 rad/s
Polarization

value range
Simulation

value range

enabled
54
This model generates optical pulses according to the bit sequence at the input. For
each bit, the output optical power is:
t.k
P ( t ) = B. ⎛ A p ⁄ cosh ⎛ -------------⎞ + A bias⎞
⎝ ⎝ T FWHM⎠ ⎠
the bit value (1 or 0) and depends on the input bit sequence. k is the fitting coefficient
determined numerically to generate pulses with the exact values of the parameter
Width, TFWHM.
dϕ α d
------ = -----e- ----
- ln P ( t ) + κP ( t )
dt 2 dt
⎛ E X ( t )⎞ = ⎛⎜ 1 – k⎞⎟ ⋅ P ( t )
⎝ E Y ( t )⎠ ⎝ ke jθ ⎠
The power splitting k and the phase difference θ are related to the parameters
k ( 1 – k ) cos ( θ )
tan ( 2α ) = 2 -----------------------------------------
1 – 2.k
sin ( 2ε ) = 2 k ( 1 – k ) sin ( θ )
55
Notes:
56
OPTICAL IMPULSE GENERATOR
Optical Impulse Generator
Generates an optical signal composed by a sequence of Impulses.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Emission frequency
Position 0 bit [0,1]
Chirp

value range
57
Polarization

value range

Simulation

value range

enabled
58
P ( t ) = B. ( A p δ ( t – t p ) + A bias )
the bit value (1 or 0) and depends on the input bit sequence. δ is the impulse function
and tP is the parameter Pulse position.
dϕ α d
------ = -----e- ----
- ln P ( t ) + κP ( t )
dt 2 dt
⎛ E X ( t )⎞ = ⎛⎜ 1 – k⎞⎟ ⋅ P ( t )
⎝ E Y ( t )⎠ ⎝ ke jθ ⎠
k ( 1 – k ) cos ( θ )
tan ( 2α ) = 2 -----------------------------------------
1 – 2.k
sin ( 2ε ) = 2 k ( 1 – k ) sin ( θ )
59
Notes:
60
MEASURED OPTICAL PULSE
Measured Optical Pulse
Generates a pulse based on measurements.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Emission frequency
Position 0 bit —
Filename Optical — — —
pulse.dat
File format Power — — Power, Power

Phase, Real
Determines the format of the file with the
Imag, Phase
measurements
61
Polarization

value range

Numerical

value range
Simulation

value range

enabled
Graphs

Measured magnitude data Time period (a.u.) Amplitude (V)
Measured phase data Time period (a.u.) Phase (rad)
62
The input file is formatted containing two items per line — the time in seconds and the
signal measurement (Power in watts, Phase in radians, Real and Imag in Volts). The
time scale is normalized to fit in one bit period - the duration of the pulse. According
to the parameter File format, the second item can be one value (Power or Phase), or
two values (Power and Phase or Real and Imag).
Power (Phase will be set to zero)
0 0
1e-6 0.5
2e-6 0.5
3e-6 0
...
Power Phase
0 0 0
1e-6 0.5 3.14
2e-6 0.5 3.14
3e-6 0 0
...
Real Imag
0 0 0
1e-6 –0.5 7.9e-4
2e-6 –0.5 7.9e-4
3e-6 0 0
...
63
Phase (Power will be set to one)
0 0
1e-6 3.14
2e-6 3.14
3e-6 0
...
P ( t ) = B. ( A p M ( t ) + A bias )
the bit value (1 or 0) and depends on the input bit sequence. M is the measured data.
⎛ E X ( t )⎞ = ⎛⎜ 1 – k⎞⎟ ⋅ P ( t )
⎝ E Y ( t )⎠ ⎝ ke jθ ⎠
k ( 1 – k ) cos ( θ )
tan ( 2α ) = 2 -----------------------------------------
1 – 2.k
sin ( 2ε ) = 2 k ( 1 – k ) sin ( θ )
64
MEASURED OPTICAL PULSE SEQUENCE
Measured Optical Pulse Sequence
Generates an optical signal based on measurements.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Emission frequency
Scale 1 a.u. — ]-INF,+INF[
Start time 0 s — [0,+INF[

Filename Sequence.dat — — —
File format Power — — Power, Power

Phase, Real
Determines the format of the file with the Imag, Phase
measurements
Polarization

value range
65

value range
Numerical

value range
Simulation

value range

enabled
Parameterized Parameterized — — Sampled,

Parameterized
Graphs

Measured magnitude data Time (s) Amplitude (V)
Measured phase data Time (s) Phase (rad)
66
This model generates optical signal loading measurements from a file.
The input file is formatted containing two items per line — the time in seconds and
signal measurement (Power in watts, Phase in radians, Real and Imag in Volts).
According to the parameter File format, the second item can be one value (Power or
Phase) or two values (Power and Phase or Real and Imag).
Power (Phase will be set to zero)
0 0
1e-6 0.5
2e-6 0.5
3e-6 0
...
Power Phase
0 0 0
1e-6 0.5 3.14
2e-6 0.5 3.14
3e-6 0 0
...
Real Imag
0 0 0
1e-6 –0.5 7.9e-4
2e-6 –0.5 7.9e-4
3e-6 0 0
...
67
Phase (Power will be set to one)
0 0
1e-6 3.14
2e-6 3.14
3e-6 0
...
⎛ E X ( t )⎞ = ⎛⎜ 1 – k⎞⎟ ⋅ P ( t )
⎝ E Y ( t )⎠ ⎝ ke jθ ⎠
k ( 1 – k ) cos ( θ )
tan ( 2α ) = 2 -----------------------------------------
1 – 2.k
sin ( 2ε ) = 2 k ( 1 – k ) sin ( θ )
68
TIME RESOLVE CHIRP (TRC) MEASUREMENT DATA
Time Resolve Chirp (TRC) Measurement Data
This component is an interface between OptiSystem and time resolve chirp (TRC) [1]
measurement instruments, such as the OSA Agilent 86146B with TRC option.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Emission frequency
Scale 1 a.u. — ]-INF,+INF[
Start time 0 s — [0,+INF[

Filename Sequence.dat — — —
Polarization

value range

69
Numerical

value range
Simulation

value range
enabled

Parameterized
Graphs

Measured power data Time (s) Power (W)
BER measured chirp data Time (s) Chirp (Hz)
This component generates optical signal loading measurements from a file. These
measurements are TRC data that describe the power and chirp evolution of the
optical signal in time [1].
TRC provides frequency vs. time information about a modulated lightwave signal.
Also called dynamic chirp, the TRC graph provides useful information on the ability of
a modulated signal to propagate over long distances in optical fiber.
Using measurement equipment such as the Agilent 86146B, with the filter mode
capability, Agilent 86100 Infinium Digital Communications Analyzer (DCA) dedicated
software (86146B Option TRL), and a personal computer, the time resolved chirp
(TRC) of a modulated laser can be calculated.
From the measurement, a file with the TRC data is generated. OptiSystem can load
this file and the effect of laser chirp on a wide variety of system performance metrics
70
- such as the effect on the performance of a long-haul dense wavelength division

multiplexed (DWDM) system with EDFA and Raman optical amplification and
dispersion compensation - can be studied across an unlimited range of system
designs.
The input file is formatted containing three items per line - the time in seconds, the
signal power is Watt (Linear scale) or dBm, and the signal chirp (Hz).
Time Signal power (W or dBm) Signal chirp

0 1.27617e-006 -7.80425e+009
6.25e-012 1.139e-006 -4.94806e+009
1.25e-011 1.46161e-006 -6.57706e+009
1.875e-011 1.33136e-006 -6.10874e+009
2.5e-011 1.54705e-006 -2.89844e+009
3.125e-011 1.03595e-006 -7.38826e+009
... ... ...
⎛ E X ( t )⎞ = ⎛⎜ 1 – k⎞⎟ ⋅ P ( t )
⎝ E Y ( t )⎠ ⎝ ke jθ ⎠
k ( 1 – k ) cos ( θ )
tan ( 2α ) = 2 -----------------------------------------
1 – 2.k
sin ( 2ε ) = 2 k ( 1 – k ) sin ( θ )
71
References
[1] Agilent Technologies, “Making Time-Resolved Chirp Measurements Using the Optical
Spectrum Analyzer and Digital Communications Analyzer”, Agilent Application Note 1550-7,
2002.
72
SPATIAL OPTICAL GAUSSIAN PULSE GENERATOR
Spatial Optical Gaussian Pulse Generator
This component is Gaussian pulse generator that includes transverse mode profiles
in the optical output. It is a subsystem built using the Optical Gaussian Pulse and the
Multimode Generators.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Frequency 850 nm Hz, THz, nm [10, 10000]
Emission frequency
Power 0 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1000, 1000]

Bias –100 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1000, 1000]
Width 0.5 bit [0, 1]
Position 0 bit [-1,1]

Order 1 [1, 100]
Truncated NO [YES, NO]

each other
73
Chirp
Name and description Default value Default unit Units Value range
Chirp definition Linear [Linear,
Measured]
Chirp factor 0 rad/s [-1000, 1000]
Alpha parameter 0 rad/W [-1000, 1000]
Adiabatic chirp 0 1/s [-1000, 1000]
Results from changes in the steady-

state carrier densities
Polarization

Azimuth 0 deg ]-90, 90]
Ellipticity 0 deg [-45, 45]
Spatial Effects
Power ratio array 1
List of power values that describe the

power distribution between multiple
modes
Mode type Laguerre- Laguerre-

Gaussian Gaussian,
Defines the output signal mode types Hermite-
Gaussian
Mode polarization X=Y X = Y, X and Y, X,

Y
Defines how the spatial modes are
attached to the output signal
Pol. X m,n index array 00
List of mode indexes 'm,n' for X

polarization
Pol. X spot size 5 um [1e-100, 1e+100]
Spot size for X polarization
74
Pol. X inv. radius of curvature 0 1/um [0, 1e+100]
Inverse radius of curvature for X

polarization
Pol. Y m,n index array 00
List of mode indexes 'm,n' for Y

polarization
Pol. Y spot size 5 um [1e-100, 1e+100]
Spot size for Y polarization
Pol. Y inv. radius of curvature 0 1/um [0, 1e+100]
Inverse radius of curvature for

polarization
Simulation

value range
Enabled YES [YES, NOT]

enabled
Sample rate Sample rate Hz Hz, GHz, THz [1, 1e+100]
Space width X Space width X um [1e-100,

1e+100]
Horizontal spatial simulation window
Space width Y Space width Y um [1e-100,

1e+100]
Vertical spatial simulation window
Technical Background
The layout of the Spatial Optical Gaussian Pulse Generator is presented in Figure 1.
Refer to Optical Gaussian Pulse Generator and Multimode Generator component
documentation for the technical background of the models.
75
Figure 1 Spatial Optical Gaussian Pulse Generator subsystem
76
SPATIAL OPTICAL SECH PULSE GENERATOR
Spatial Optical Sech Pulse Generator
This component is sech pulse generator that includes transverse mode profiles in the
optical output. It is a subsystem built using a the Optical Sech Pulse and the
Multimode Generators.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Emission frequency
Power 0 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1000, 1000]

Bias –100 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1000, 1000]
Width 0.5 bit [0, 1]

Truncated NO [YES, NO]

each other
77
Chirp
Chirp definition Linear [Linear,
Measured]
Chirp factor 0 rad/s [-1000, 1000]

Polarization

value range
Azimuth 0 deg [-90, 90]
Spatial Effects
Power ratio array 1
List of power values which describe the

modes

Gaussian Gaussian,
Gaussian

Y

polarization
78

polarization

polarization
Inverse radius of curvature for Y

polarization
Simulation

value range

enabled

1e+100]

1e+100]
The layout of the Spatial Optical Sech Pulse Generator is presented in Figure 1. Refer
to Optical Sech Pulse Generator and Multimode Generator component
documentation for the technical background of the models.
79
Figure 1 Spatial Optical Sech Pulse Generator subsystem
80
SPATIAL OPTICAL IMPULSE GENERATOR
Spatial Optical Impulse Generator
This component is impulse generator that includes transverse mode profiles in the
optical output. It is a subsystem built using a the Impulse and the Multimode
Generators.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Frequency 193.1 nm Hz, THz, nm [10, 10000]
Emission frequency
Power 0 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1000, 1000]

Bias –100 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1000, 1000]
Chirp
81

Polarization

value range

Spatial Effects
Power ratio array 1

modes

Gaussian Gaussian,
Gaussian

Y

polarization

polarization

polarization
82

polarization
Simulation

value range

enabled

1e+100]

1e+100]
The layout of the Spatial Optical Impulse Generator is presented in Figure 1. Refer to
Optical Impulse Generator and Multimode Generator component documentation for
the technical background of the models.
Figure 1 Spatial Optical Impulse Generator subsystem
83
Notes:
84
Optical Sources
• CW Laser
• Laser Rate Equations
• Laser Measured
• Fabry Perot Laser
• LED
• White Light Source
• Pump Laser
• Pump Laser Array
• Controlled Pump Laser
• CW Laser Array
• CW Laser Array ES
• CW Laser Measured
• Directly Modulated Laser Measured
• VCSEL Laser
• Spatiotemporal VCSEL
• Spatial CW Laser
• Spatial VCSEL
• Spatial Laser Rate Equations
• Spatial LED
85
Notes:
86
CW LASER
CW Laser
Generates a continuous wave (CW) optical signal.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Frequency 193.1 THz Hz,THz, nm [0,+INF[
Emission frequency
Linewidth 10 MHz — [0,+INF[
Initial phase 0 deg — ]-INF,+INF[
Polarization

value range

87
CW LASER
Simulation

value range

enabled

Parameterized

Noise

value range
Noise bandwidth 0 THz Hz, THz, nm [0,+INF[
Bandwidth to create noise bins
Noise threshold –100 dB — ]-INF,+INF[
Minimum value for adaptation of noise bins
Noise dynamic 3 dB — ]-INF,+INF[
Threshold ratio for adaptation of noise bins
Random numbers

value range
Random seed index 0 — [0,4999]
88
CW LASER
In the CW case, the average output Power is a parameter that you specify. Laser
phase noise is modeled using the probability density function:
2
Δϕ
1 – -----------------
4πΔfdt
-
f ( Δϕ ) = ---------------------- ⋅ e
2π Δfdt
where Δϕ is the phase difference between two successive time instants and dt is the
time discretization. A Gaussian random variable for the phase difference between two
successive time instants with zero mean and a variance equal to 2 π Δ f has been
assumed, with Δf as the laser Linewidth.
⎛ E X ( t )⎞ = ⎛⎜ 1 – k⎞⎟ ⋅ P ( t )
⎝ E Y ( t )⎠ ⎝ ke jθ ⎠
Azimuth α and Ellipticity ε as follows:
2 k ( 1 – k ) cos ( θ )
tan ( 2α ) = --------------------------------------------
1 – 2.k
sin ( 2ε ) = 2 k ( 1 – k ) sin ( θ )
89
CW LASER
Notes:
90
LASER RATE EQUATIONS
Laser Rate Equations
Utilizes the rate equations to simulate the modulation dynamics of a laser.
Ports

Modulation Input Electrical
Parameters
Main

value range
Frequency 193.1 THz Hz, THz, nm [30,3e5]
Emission frequency of the laser
Calculate current True — — True, False
Defines whether to estimate the input bias and

peak current to achieve the user defined steady
Power 10 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1e100, 1e100]
Steady state power at the peak current
Power at bias current 0 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1e100, 1e100]

Steady state power at the bias current
Bias current 38 mA — [0, 1000]
Input bias current
91

value range
Modulation peak current 23 mA — [0, 1000]
Input modulation peak current
Threshold current 33.4572 mA — [0, 1000]

The threshold current, calculated from the laser
physical parameters
Threshold power 0.0155558 mW — [0, 1000]
The threshold power, calculated from the laser

physical parameters
Physical

value range
Active layer volume 1.5e-010 cm3 0, 1e-3
Quantum efficiency 0.4 — 0, 1
Group velocity 8.5e+009 cm/s 0, 100e9
Differential gain coefficient 2.5e-016 cm2 0, 50e-16
Carrier density at transparency 1e+018 cm-3 0, 100e18
Mode confinement factor 0.4 — 0, 1
Recombination model Lifetime — Lifetime,

Coefficients
Carrier lifetime 1e-009 s 0, 50e-9
Recombination coefficient A 100000000 1/s 0, 1e15
Linear recombination coefficient
Recombination coefficient B 3e-029 cm^3/s 0, 1e-7
Bimolecular recombination coefficient
Recombination coefficient C 1e-009 cm^6/s 0, 1e-7
Auger recombination coefficient
Photon lifetime 3e-012 s 0, 50e-9
Differential gain coefficient 2.5e-016 cm2 0, 50e-16
Photon lifetime 3e-012 — 0, 50e-9
Spontaneous emission factor 3e-005 — 2e-5, 20e-5
Gain compression coefficient 1e-017 cm3 0.5e-17, 10e-

17
92

value range
Linewidth enhancement factor 5 — –20, 20
Mode confinement factor 0.4 — 0, 1
Carrier lifetime 1e-009 s 0, 50e-9
Photon lifetime 3e-012 s 0, 50e-9
Numerical

value range
Adaptive step False — True, False
Defines whether to use adaptive step or not
Max. number of steps 1000000 — [1e3,10e6]
The maximum number of steps
Relative error 0.0001 — —
Relative integration error
Graphs

value range
Calculate graphs False True, False
Defines whether to calculate graphs or not
Number of points 20 [5, 100e6]
Number of points for the graphs
From 0 mA [0, +INF]
Current lower limit for the graphs
To 40 mA [0, +INF]
Current upper limit for the graphs
Simulation

value range
93
Noise

value range
Include noise True — True, False
Include phase noise True — True, False
Random numbers

value range
The modulation dynamics of the laser are modeled by coupled rate equations which
describe the relation between the carrier density N ( t ) , photon density S ( t ) , and
optical phase φ ( t ) :
dN ( t )- I(t) N(t ) 1
------------- = ----------- – ---------- – g o ⋅ ( N ( t ) – N t ) ⋅ ------------------------------- ⋅ S ( t ) (2)
dt q⋅V τn (1 + ε ⋅ S(t))
dS ( t )- 1 S(t) Γ ⋅ β ⋅ N(t)
------------ = Γ ⋅ g o ⋅ ( N ( t ) – N t ) ⋅ ------------------------------- ⋅ S ( t ) – --------- + -------------------------- (3)
dt (1 + ε ⋅ S(t)) τp τn
dφ ( t )- 1 1
------------ = --- ⋅ α ⋅ Γ ⋅ g o ⋅ ( N ( t ) – N t ) – ----- (4)
dt 2 τp
where go is the gain slope constant, g o = v g ⋅ a o
a0 is the active layer coefficient
vg is the group velocity
ε is the gain compression factor
Nt is the carrier density at transparency
is the fraction of spontaneous emission coupled into the lasing

β mode
94
Γ is the mode confinement factor
V is the active layer volume
τp is the photon lifetime
τn is the electron lifetime
α is the linewidth enhancement factor
The optical power and chirp response of the semiconductor laser to a current
waveform I ( t ) is determined by the above equations. Parameters Bias current and
Modulation peak current are scale factors applied to the input electrical signal.
The internal current I ( t ) is given by:
I ( t ) = I DC + I in ( t ) × I Pk (5)
Where I in ( t ) is the input signal current, I DC is the parameter Bias Current and
I Pk is the parameter Modulation peak current. If parameter Bias Current and
Modulation peak current have zero values, the internal current is given by I in ( t ) only.
A Runge-Kutta algorithm is used to numerically integrate the coupled first order

differential equations (2-4). If parameters Include noise and Include phase noise are
disabled, these equations apply to a noiseless laser oscillating in a single longitudinal
mode above threshold. The photon and electron densities within the active region of
the laser are assumed to be uniform. If parameter Include noise is enabled, the
Langevin noise terms for photon and electron densities are included in the model[2].
If Include phase noise is enabled, the Langevin noise term for the phase is included
in the model. The linewidth enhancement factor and the nonlinear gain compression
parameter are taken to be constant for a given structure.
The time variations for the optical and laser chirp are:
S ⋅ V ⋅ ηo ⋅ h ⋅ v (6)
P = ------------------------------------
2 ⋅ Γτ p
1 dφ
Δv = ---------- ⋅ ------ (7)
2 ⋅ π dt
95
where η o is the differential quantum efficiency
v is the optical frequency
h is the Planck’s constant
The Laser Rate Equations supports individual samples for time-driven simulation.
References
[1] J. C. Cartledge and G. S. Burley, “The Effect of the Laser Chirping on Lightwave System
Performance”, J. Lightwave Technology, vol. 7, pp. 568-573, March 1989.
[2] Agrawal GP, Dutta NK. Semiconductor lasers, 2nd ed. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1993.
96
LASER MEASURED
Laser Measured
Extracts values of the rate equation parameters using measurements and simulates
the modulation dynamics of a laser.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range

Defines whether to estimate the input bias and
peak current to achieve the user defined steady

Input bias current
97
LASER MEASURED
Measurements

value range
Frequency response data type Parameters — — Parameters,
From file
Defines whether the frequency response data is
provided by the damping factor and resonance
frequency factor parameters or by the subtracted
IM response curve
Damping factor 10.28 1e9 s-1 — ]0, 1000]

The measured damping factor of the laser
Resonance frequency factor 6.43 1e20 Hz2 — ]0, 1000]
The measured resonance frequency factor of the

laser
Subtracted IM response filename 6.43 1e20 Hz2 — ]0, 1000]
File containning the subtracted IM response curve
Threshold current 18 mA — [0, 1000]
The measured threshold current of the laser
Reference current 23 mA — [0, 1000]
The reference current used to estimate the

measured output power
Slope efficiency data True — — True, False
Defines whether to use slope efficiency or power

to estimate the LI curve
Slope efficiency 0.3 mW/mA — [1e-100, 1e100]
The measured slope efficiency of the laser
Power at reference current 1.5 mW W, mW, dBm [1e-100, 1e100]

The laser power at the reference current
Linewidth data False — — True, False
Determines whether the linewidth will be part of

the parameter extraction procedure
Linewidth 10 MHz — [1,200]

Specifies the laser linewidth for the steady-state
condition
Turn-on delay data False — — True, False
Determines whether the turn-on delay will be part

of the parameter extraction procedure
Turn-on delay 0.5 ns — [1e-5, 100]
Specifies the laser turn-on delay
98
LASER MEASURED

value range
Average RIN data False — — True, False
Determines whether the average RIN in a

specified bandwidth will be part of the parameter
extraction procedure
RIN start 0.2 GHz — [0.01,20]
Specifies the initial frequency of the frequency

range where the average RIN is calculated
RIN stop 15 GHz — [0.01,20]
Specifies the final frequency of the frequency

range where the average RIN is calculated
Average RIN -140 dB/Hz — [-500, -50]

Specifies the average RIN value for the steady-
state condition over the frequency bandwidth
defined by the values of RIN start and stop.
Initial estimate

Group velocity 8.5e+009 cm/s 0, 100e9
Calculate parameters True —
Defines whether to optimize the laser physical parameters to

achieve the target measurement or not.
Linewidth enhancement factor 5 — –20, 20
Active layer volume estimation 2e-011 cm3 0, 1e-3
Quantum efficiency estimation 0.2 — 0, 1
Carrier density at transparency estimation 1e+018 cm-3 0, 100e18
Differential gain coefficient estimation 1.765e-016 cm2 0, 50e-16
Mode confinement factor estimation 0.2 — 0, 1

Coefficients
Recombination coefficient A estimation 1e-009 s 0, 50e-9
Recombination coefficient B estimation 100000000 1/s 0, 50e-9
Recombination coefficient C estimation 3e-029 cm^3/s 0, 50e-9
99
LASER MEASURED

Auger recombination coefficient estimation 1e-009 cm^6/s 0, 50e-9
Photon lifetime estimation 1e-012 s 0, 50e-9
Spontaneous emission factor estimation 0.0001 — 2e-5, 20e-5
Gain compression coefficient estimation 1.5e-017 cm3 0.5e-17, 10e-17
Numerical

value range
Graphs

value range
From 0 mA [0, +INF]
To 40 mA [0, +INF]
Simulation

100
LASER MEASURED
Noise

Random numbers

The laser measured model extracts values of the rate equation parameters using
measurements of the threshold current, optical power, resonance frequency, and
damping factor to simulate a DFB laser.
Based on the results featured in [1], the values of the rate equation parameters are
calculated in a way that parameters simultaneously yield the measured values of Y
(damping factor), Z (resonance frequency factor), Ith (threshold current), and P
(Power bias). The parameter extraction procedure is based on minimization of the
sum of squared errors between the measured values of (Y, Z, Ith, P) and values
calculated from rate equation parameters. The minimization is over the values of the
rate equation parameters which are:
Damping factor
S 1 1 1
Y = g 0 ------------------------ + ----- – Γ ⋅ g 0 ( N – N t ) --------------------------2 + -----
( 1 + ε ⋅ S ) τn (1 + ε ⋅ S) τp
Resonance frequency factor
S 1 g0 1 1
Z = g 0 ------------------------ ⋅ ----- + ( β – 1 ) ⋅ Γ ⋅ ----- ( N – N t ) --------------------------2 + --------------
( 1 + ε ⋅ S ) τp τn (1 + ε ⋅ S) τp ⋅ τn
Threshold current
q ⋅ V 1 + Nt ⋅ Γ ⋅ go ⋅ τp
I th = ----------- ⋅ ------------------------------------------
τn Γ ⋅ go ⋅ τp
101
LASER MEASURED
Power bias
S ⋅ V ⋅ η0 ⋅ h ⋅ v
P = ------------------------------------
2 ⋅ Γτ p
where go is the gain slope constant, g o = v g ⋅ a o
a0 is the active layer coefficient
β is the fraction of spontaneous emission coupled into the lasing

mode
η0 is the differential quantum efficiency
τp is the photon lifetime
τn is the electron lifetime
NandS are the steady-state values of the carrier and photon densities
corresponding to the bias current of the laser
v is the unmodulated optical frequency
The minimization routine finds a local minimum for the equation

2 2 2 2
Func = ( Y mea – Y cal ) + ( z mea – z cal ) + ( P mea – P cal ) + ( I mea – I cal )
where ( Y mea, Z mea ,P mea ,I mea ) are the measured values and ( Y cal, Z cal ,P cal ,I cal ) are the
calculated values using the initial estimates of the rate equation parameters.
The parameters available in the main tab allow the user to enter the values for current,
or for power in steady state. Using these numbers, the model will estimate the values
of the current.
Note: It is recommended to enter the values for current, rather than power, when
using the measured laser (as this is the realistic case).
The parameters in the measured tab are used to extract the physical/geometrical
properties of the laser. This extraction is completely independent of the parameters in
the main tab (current/power).
After finding the rate equation parameters, the laser measured works similarly to the
laser rate equations model. RIN is calculated according to [2][3].
102
LASER MEASURED
I ( t ) = I DC + I in ( t ) × I Pk (1)
The user can also calculate the subtracted IM response from the measured IM
response curves (Figure1) and load a file with this information into the component.
This will allow a pre-optimization step, where the component fits the parameters Z and
Y to the measured results.
Figure 1 Measured IM responses
The file format for the subtracted IM response data is the following:
Frequency0 SubtractedIM0
103
LASER MEASURED
...
FrequencyN SubtractedIMN
The units are GHz and dB respectively.
The laser measured can also include the turn-on delay parameter in the optimization
process. In this case, the turn-on delay value specified defines the time needed for
the carrier density to reach the threshold carrier density when the laser current rises
to the reference current. The calculation of the turn-on delay is based on the definition
find in [1].The laser linewidth parameter can be included in the optimization process
by defining the linewidth value for the laser when the bias current is the reference
current parameter [4]. The RIN is calculated according to [2][3] and the user has to
define the average RIN value in the defined frequency range.
If parameter Include noise is enabled, the Langevin noise terms for photon and
electron densities are included in the model[4]. If Include phase noise is enabled, the
Langevin noise term for the phase is included in the model. The Laser Measured
supports individual samples for time-driven simulation.
References
[1] Cartledge, J. C. and Srinivasan, R. C. “Extraction of DFB laser rate equation parameters for
system simulation purposes”, J. Light. Techn., 15, 852-860, (1997).
[2] Yamada, M. "Variation of intensity noise and frequency noise with the spontaneous emission
factor in semiconductor lasers". IEEE Journal of Quantum Electronics. Volume 30, Issue 7, July
1994 Page(s):1511 - 1519.
[3] Agrawal, G.P., Fiber-Optic Communication Systems, Second edition. John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
N.Y., (1997).
[4] Agrawal GP, Dutta NK. Semiconductor lasers, 2nd ed. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold,
1993.
[5] K.Petermann, Laser Diode Modulation and Noise, Kluwer Academic Publishers,1988
104
FABRY PEROT LASER
Fabry Perot Laser
This component simulates the modulation dynamics of a Fabry-Perot laser using

multimode rate equations.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Input bias current
Front facet reflectivity 0.01 — — [0, 1]

The threshold current, calculated from the laser
physical parameters
Rear facet reflectivity 0.3 — — [0, 1]
The threshold power, calculated from the laser

physical parameters
105
FABRY PEROT LASER
Physical

value range
Active length 0.06 cm3 ]0, 1000]
Active layer width 0.00015 cm3 ]0,1000]
Active layer depth 20e-006 cm3 ]0, 1000]
Group index 3.5 — [1, 5]
Quantum efficiency 0.4 — [0, 1]
Gain constant 1e-016 cm2 [0, 50e-16]
Gain bandwidth 5 THz [0.1, 20]
Carrier density at transparency 1e+018 cm-3 [0, 100e18]
Mode confinement factor 0.4 — [0, 1]

Coefficients
Carrier lifetime 1.86e-009 s [0, 50e-9]
Recombination coefficient A 100e+006 1/s [0, 1e15]
Recombination coefficient B 0.2e-009 cm3/s [0, 1e-7]
Recombination coefficient C 40e-030 cm6/s [0, 1e-7]
Spontaneous emission factor 0.004 — [2e-5, 20e-5]
Gain compression coefficient 36e-018 cm3 [0.5e-17, 10e-

17]
Linewidth enhancement factor 5 — [–20, 20]
Loss 10 cm-1 [0, 1e10]
Side Mode

value range
Number of side modes 1 [1,10]
Separation 71.4 GHz [0.01, 500]
106
FABRY PEROT LASER
Numerical

value range

Simulation

value range
Noise

value range
Random numbers

value range

The modulation dynamics of the FP laser are modeled by the coupled rate equations
which describe the relation between the carrier density N(t), photon densities Si(t),
and optical phases φi(t):
107
FABRY PEROT LASER
dN ( t )- I(t) N(t) ⎛ 1 ⎞ (1)

------------- = ----------- – ---------- – ⎜ G i ⋅ ( N ( t ) – N t ) ⋅ --------------------------------------- ⋅ S i ( t )⎟
dt q⋅V τn ⎝ (1 + ε ⋅ S (t)) ∑ i
⎠
dS i ( t ) 1 ΓβN ( t ) (2)
-------------- = G i ⋅ ( N ( t ) – N t ) ⋅ --------------------------------------- ⋅ S i ( t ) – ( γ p ⋅ S i ( t ) ) + ------------------
dt τn
(1 + ε ⋅ S (t)) ∑ i
dφ i ( t ) (3)
-------------- = 1--- ⋅ α [ Γ ⋅ G i ⋅ ( N ( t ) – N t ) – γ p ]
dt 2
where Gi is the gain of mode i, defined by
1
G i = v g ⋅ a o ⋅ ---------------------------------------------
-
⎛ 1 + ⎛ 2i ( f i – f o )⎞ 2⎞
-----------------------
⎝ ⎝ Δf ⎠ ⎠
a0 is the active layer gain coefficient
fi is the frequency of the ith laser mode
fo is the laser central frequency
Δf is the 3dB gain bandwidth
is the fraction of spontaneous emission coupled into the lasing

β mode
γp is the cavity loss
τn is the carrier lifetime
108
FABRY PEROT LASER
The response of the multimode laser to a current waveform I ( t ) is determined by

the above equations. Parameters Bias current and Modulation peak current are scale
factors applied to the input electrical signal.
I ( t ) = I DC + I in ( t ) × I Pk (6)
A Runge-Kutta algorithm is used to numerically integrate the coupled first order

differential equations (2-4). If parameters Include noise and Include phase noise are
disabled, these equations apply to a noiseless laser oscillating in a multi longitudinal
modes above threshold. The photon and carrier densities within the active region of
the laser are assumed to be uniform. If parameter Include noise is enabled, the
Langevin noise terms for photon and carrier densities are included in the model[2]. If
Include phase noise is enabled, the Langevin noise term for the phase is included in
the model. The linewidth enhancement factor and the nonlinear gain compression
parameter are taken to be constant for a given structure.
The number of longitudinal modes considered in the simulation is defined by the

parameter Number of side modes (number of modes = 2*Number of side modes + 1)
The electrical field at the laser output is given by:
E(t ) = ∑ P i exp ( j ⋅ Δω i ⋅ t + φ i )
i
with
ηo ⋅ h ⋅ vi ⋅ αm ⋅ V ⋅ Si
P i = ---------------------------------------------------
Γ
where η o is the differential quantum efficiency
αm is the mirror loss
109
FABRY PEROT LASER
The component also allows injection of external light coupled to the longitudinal
modes. The coupling constant is given by:
vg
K c = -----------------
L ⋅ Rf
where L is the cavity length.
References
[1] Agrawal GP, Dutta NK. Semiconductor lasers, 2nd ed. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1993.
110
LED
LED
Simulates a modulated LED.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Electron lifetime 1e-009 s — ]0, 1]
RC constant 1e-009 s — ]0, 1]
Quantum efficiency 0.05 — — ]0, 1]
Bandwidth 6 THz Hz, THz, nm ]0, INF]
Simulation

value range
Iterations Iterations — [1, 1e+009]
111
LED
Random numbers

value range
Generate random seed Yes — True, False

In this model, the mean of the optical power is a function of the modulation current
(input signal). The conversion of the current into optical power is described by the
responsivity of the LED:
i(t)
P = η ⋅ h ⋅ f ⋅ --------
q
where η is the quantum efficiency
f is the emission frequency
q is the electron charge
i( t) is the modulation current signal
The modulated characteristics depend of the electron lifetime and the device of the
diode, and are modeled by the transfer function applied to the current:
1
H ( f ) = ------------------------------------------------------------
1 + j ⋅ 2 ⋅ π ⋅ f ⋅ ( τ n + τ rc )
where τ n is the Electron life time and τ rc is the RC constant.
If the parameter Parameterized is selected, the output consist of a single value

representing the average LED output at the frequency output.
Note: The noise bins signals are not produced by this modulator.
112
WHITE LIGHT SOURCE
White Light Source
Generates a gaussian distributed optical white noise.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Emission frequency
PSD True — — True, False
Determines whether the Power is the PSD (/Hz)

or the average power
Power –30 dBm W, mW, dBm ]-INF,+INF[
Average output powers
Simulation

value range

enabled
113
WHITE LIGHT SOURCE
Noise

value range
Noise bins spacing 10 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, [1, 100000]
nm
Convert noise bins Convert noise — — —

bins
Determines if the generated noise bins are
incorporated into the signal
Random numbers

value range
The average output Power or Power spectral density and Frequency are parameters
that you specify. This model generates noise bins or sampled signals at the output
according to:
·
Ex ( t ) x x ( t ) + j·y x ( t )
= ⋅ P⁄4
Ey ( t ) r v
x y ( t ) + j yy ( t )
A Gaussian distribution has been assumed to describe the probability density function
for the real and imaginary part of Ex and Ey. P is the average power when PSD
parameter is false. If PSD is true, then P is calculated from the power spectral density
multiplied by the Sample rate.
114
PUMP LASER
Pump Laser
Generates an optical parameterized signal to be used for optical amplifier pumping.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Frequency 980 nm Hz, THz, nm [0,+INF[
Emission frequency
Power 100 mW W, mW, dBm [0,+INF[
Average output powers
Polarization

value range
115
PUMP LASER
Simulation

value range

In the CW Laser case, average output Power is a parameter that you specify. This
model generates only parameterized signal at the output.
⎛ E X ( t )⎞ = ⎛⎜ 1 – k⎞⎟ ⋅ P
⎝ E Y ( t )⎠ ⎝ ke jθ ⎠
Azimuth α and Ellipticity ε as follows:
2 k ( 1 – k ) cos ( θ )
tan ( 2α ) = --------------------------------------------
1 – 2.k
sin ( 2ε ) = 2 k ( 1 – k ) sin ( θ )
116
PUMP LASER ARRAY
Pump Laser Array
An array of pump lasers.
Ports

Output 1 Output Optical
Parameters
Main

Number of output ports 8 — [1, 1000]
Frequency

value range
Frequency[0] 1405 nm Hz, THz, nm [100, 2000]
Center frequency for pump 0
Frequency[1] 1412.5 nm Hz, THz, nm [100, 2000]
117
PUMP LASER ARRAY

value range


Power

value range
Power[0] 100 mW W, mW, dBm [0,+INF[
Output power for pump 0


118
PUMP LASER ARRAY
Polarization


Simulation

119
PUMP LASER ARRAY
Notes:
120
CONTROLLED PUMP LASER
Controlled Pump Laser
This component is a pump laser that can be controlled by an electrical analog signal.
It allows the design and simulation of automatic gain control schemes for optical
amplifiers, such as control loops for the pump laser current.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Frequency 980 nm Hz, THz, nm [0,+INF[
Emission frequency
Threshold current 20 mA — [0,+INF[

Lasing begins and optical output sharply rises
when current supplied exceeds the threshold
current
Slope efficiency 0.5 W/A — [0,+INF[

The increase in optical output power divided by
the increase in electrical input current
Maximum current 300 mA — [0,1000]
If the input current is above this value the output

power is constant
Laser initial phase
121
CONTROLLED PUMP LASER
Control

value range
Gain 1 — ]-INF,+INF[
The electrical signal is multiplied by this parameter before the laser

stage
Bias 0 — ]-INF,+INF[
The electrical signal is biased by this parameter before the laser

stage
Polarization

value range
Simulation

value range
Parameterized Parameterized — True, False
Determines whether the output signal is parameterized or not
The controlled pump laser designed for analog control of the output pump power. The
input signal is first scaled by the parameters Gain and Bias. If the value of the scaled
signal is less than the Maximum input current and greater than the Threshold current
the current is multiplied by the Slope efficiency. The model supports individual
samples for time driven simulation
122
CW LASER ARRAY
CW Laser Array
This component is an array of CW lasers.
Ports

Parameters
Main
Name and description Default value Default Unit Value range

Linewidth 10 MHz [0, 1e+009[
Initial phase 0 deg [-1e+100,1e+100]
123
CW LASER ARRAY
Frequency

value range
Frequency[0] 193.1 THz Hz, THz, nm [30, 300000]
Center frequency for laser 0

Power

value range
Power[0] 0 dBm W, mW, dBm ]-INF,+INF[
Output power for laser 0

124
CW LASER ARRAY

value range

Polarization

value range
Simulation

value range

enabled
Parameterized Parameterized — — —
Noise

value range

125
CW LASER ARRAY
Random numbers

value range

126
CW LASER ARRAY ES
CW Laser Array ES
This component is an array of CW lasers. The emission frequencies are equally

spaced (ES).
Ports

Parameters
Main

Frequency 193.1 THz, Hz, nm [30,+INF[

Emission frequency of the first laser
Frequency spacing 100 GHz, THZ, Hz, ]-INF,+INF[

nm
Frequency spacing between adjacent lasers
127
CW LASER ARRAY ES
Power

value range

Polarization

value range
128
CW LASER ARRAY ES
Simulation

value range

enabled
Noise

value range
Random numbers

value range

The CW Laser Array ES is equivalent to the conventional CW Laser Array
component. However, The CW Laser Array ES model is easier to set up for WDM
systems, because it only requires the initial laser emission frequency and the spacing.
The signal output power is the same for all the output signals.
129
CW LASER ARRAY ES
Notes:
130
CW LASER MEASURED
CW Laser Measured
Generates a continuous wave (CW) optical signal based on measurements. You can
enter parameters such as linewidth, side mode suppression, and relative intensity
noise (RIN).
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Emission frequency
131
CW LASER MEASURED
Side Mode

value range
Calculate side mode False — — —
Determines if the signal output will have one side

mode
Number of side modes 1 — — [1, 100000]
Number of side modes if running as a Fabry-Perot

laser.
Separation 75 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, [0,+INF[

nm
Mode frequency separation from the laser center
frequency
Suppression ratio 30 dB — [0,+INF[
Attenuation of the side mode relative to the output

power
Independent side mode False — — —
When enabled, the side mode has an

independent power value that can change the
total average power
RIN

value range
RIN –130 dB/Hz — ]-INF,+INF[
Relative intensity noise value
Include RIN False — — True, False
Determines if the RIN will be added to the output

signal
Measured power 10 dBm W. mW, dBm ]-INF,+INF[
Value of the power during the measurement of

RIN
132
CW LASER MEASURED
Polarization

value range

Polarization filter None — None,

Polarization X,
Determines the polarization of the filter
Polarization Y
Simulation

value range

enabled
Noise

value range
Noise bandwidth 1 THz Hz, THz, nm [1e-100, 1e-
100]
Bandwidth to increase noise bins
nm
Determines noise bins spacing
Convert noise bins Convert noise — — [0, 0]

bins
133
CW LASER MEASURED
Random numbers

value range

134
CW LASER MEASURED
This model is similar to the CW Laser — however, it includes additional effects, such
as multiple side modes and RIN.
If the you enable the parameter Calculate side mode, the side mode will be generated
according to:
jϕ
E out ( t ) = P [ 1 + s cos ( 2πΔ f t ) + s cos ( – 2πΔ f t )e ]
where P is laser output power, s is the parameter Suppression ratio in linear scale,
and Δ f is defined by the parameter Separation.
If the parameter Independent side mode is enabled, the average signal power will be
greater than P, since it includes the contribution from the side mode. If this parameter
is disabled, the output power will be P. This means that the signal will be scaled in
order to give the same average power. The signal phase and polarization is calculated
in the same way as the CW laser.
The model can also works as a Fabry-Perot laser; in this case, the parameter Number
of side modes defines the number of modes of the laser. The normalized power for
each mode is calculated based on the power of the central mode and the power of the
first side mode [1], according to:
1
P n = ------------------------------------------2-
1 n
1 + ⎛ ----- – 1⎞ ⎛ -----⎞
⎝ P s ⎠ ⎝ M⎠
where M is the parameter Number of side modes, n is the index of each side mode
pair, and P s is calculated from the power of the first side mode:
1
P s = ----------------------------------
⎛ 1--- – 1⎞ M 2 + 1
⎝s ⎠
If the parameter Include RIN is enabled, the model generates noise bins with
bandwidth and spacing that you define. The parameter RIN is the ratio of the mean-
square optical intensity noise to the square of the average power [2][3]:
2
〈 ΔP 〉
RIN = ---------------
2
dB ⁄ Hz
Pm
2
where 〈 ΔP 〉 is the mean-square optical intensity fluctuation at a specific frequency
2 2
and P m is the parameter Measured power. This models estimates 〈 ΔP 〉 based on the
parameters RIN and Measured power.
The signal phase and polarization is calculated in the same way as the CW laser,
where the laser phase noise is modeled using a Gaussian random variable for the
135
CW LASER MEASURED
phase difference between two successive time instants with zero mean and a
variance equal to 2π Δf , where Δf is the laser Linewidth.
The probability density function is:

2
Δϕ
1 – ------------------
4πΔfdt
f ( Δϕ ) = ---------------------- ⋅ e
2π Δfdt
time discretization.
⎛ E X ( t )⎞ = ⎛ 1 – k⎞ ⋅ P ( t )
⎝ E Y ( t )⎠ ⎝ ke jθ ⎠
The power splitting k and the phase difference θ are calculated from the parameters
Azimuth α and Ellipticity ε :
k ( 1 – k ) cos ( θ )
tan ( 2α ) = 2 -----------------------------------------
1 – 2.k
sin ( 2ε ) = 2 k ( 1 – k ) sin ( θ )
References
[1] Agrawal, G.P. and Dutta, N.K., “Semiconductor Laser”, 2nd Edition, Van Nostrand Reinhold,
New York, N.Y., (1993).
[2] Lau, K. Y. and Yariv, A., "Ultra-High Speed Semiconductor Laser", J. Quant. Elect., 21, 121-136,
(1985).
N.Y., (1997).
136
DIRECTLY MODULATED LASER MEASURED
Directly Modulated Laser Measured
Directly modulated laser that allows you to specify the dynamic of the laser based on
measured parameters. You can also enter parameters such as linewidth, chirp, side
mode, suppression and relative intensity noise (RIN).
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Emission frequency
Configuration Digital — — Digital, Analog

Defines whether the laser will work in analog or
digital configuration
Laser output power
Extinction ratio 10 dB — [0,+INF[

Steady state power ratio between marks and
spaces
Threshold current 20 mA — [0,+INF[
Lasing begins and optical output sharply rises

when current supplied exceeds the threshold
current
137

value range
Slope efficiency 0.4 W/A — [0,+INF[
The increase in optical output power divided by

the increase in electrical input current
Measurements

value unit range
Overshoot 30 % — [0,+INF[
Percentage of overshoot during the transition

from 0 to 1 relative to the steady state power
Undershoot 30 % — [0,+INF[
Percentage of undershoot during the transition

from 0 to 1 relative to the steady state power
Rise time 1/(Bit rate) * 0.05 s s, ms, ns, ps [0,+INF[
Defined as the time from when the rising edges

reaches 0% of the amplitude to the time it reaches
100% of the amplitude
Fall time 1/(Bit rate) * 0.05 s s, ms, ns, ps [0,+INF[
Defined as the time from when the falling edges

reaches 100% of the amplitude to the time it
reaches 0% of the amplitude
Damping time leading edge 1/(Bit rate) * 0.5 s s, ms, ns, ps [0,+INF[
Relaxation time when the signal overshoot

reaches 1/e of the max value during the transition
from 0 to 1
Damping time trailing edge 1/(Bit rate) * 0.5 s s, ms, ns, ps [0,+INF[
Relaxation time when the signal undershoot

reaches 1/e of the min value during the transition
from 1 to 0
Resonant frequency leading edge (Bit rate) * 5 Hz Hz, MHz, GHz, [0,+INF[
THz
Frequency of the oscillations in the transition from
0 to 1
Resonant frequency trailing edge (Bit rate) * 5 Hz Hz, MHz, GHz, [0,+INF[
THz
Frequency of the oscillations in the transition from
1 to 0
138
Side Mode

value range
Calculate side mode False — — True, False

mode
Number of side modes 1 — — [1, 100000]

laser.

nm
frequency
Suppression ratio 30 dB — [0,+INF[

power
RIN

value range
RIN –130 dB/Hz — ]-INF,+INF[
Include RIN False — — —

signal
Measured power 10 dBm W, mW, dBm ]-INF,+INF[

RIN
Chirp

value range
Alpha parameter 0 — [-100, 100]
Adiabatic chirp 0 1/(W.s) ]-INF,+INF[

139
Polarization

value range


Polarization X,
Polarization Y
Simulation

value range
Parameterized Parameterized — [1,+INF[
Noise

value range
Noise bandwidth 1 THz Hz, THz, nm [1e-100, 1e-
100]
nm

bins
Random numbers

value range

140
This model is a different from the Laser Measured, where you can enter measured
parameters and the model calculates the rate equation parameter by using
sophisticated optimization routines. Here you can enter measured parameters that
describe the laser dynamics by building the laser output signal.
If the parameter Configuration is Digital, the range of the amplitude of the signal input
is normalized between 0 and 1. This means that this model converts the input signal
to a sequence of squared pulses.
The parameter Power is the steady state value of the output power at the 1 level. The
steady-state value for the power at the 0 level is calculated from the parameter
Extinction ratio:
Er = 10 log ( P 1 ⁄ P 0 )
where P1 is the parameter Power, Er is the parameter Extinction ratio, and P0 is the
steady-state power at the 0 level.
The measured parameters will be used to build P(t) (see Figure 1).
Figure 1 Measured parameters used to build P(t)
141
If you enable the parameter Calculate side mode, the side mode is generated
according to:
jϕ
E out ( t ) = P ( t ) [ 1 + s cos ( 2πΔ f t ) + s cos ( – 2πΔ f t )e ]
where P is laser output power, s is the parameter Suppression ratio in linear scale,
and Δf is defined by the parameter Separation.
The model can also works as a Fabry-Perot laser; in this case, the parameter Number
of side modes defines the number of modes of the laser. The normalized power for
each mode is calculated based on the power of the central mode and the power of the
first side mode [1], according to:
1
P n = ------------------------------------------2-
1 n
1 + ⎛ ----- – 1⎞ ⎛ -----⎞
⎝ P s ⎠ ⎝ M⎠
where M is the parameter Number of side modes, n is the index of each side mode
pair, and P s is calculated from the power of the first side mode:
1
P s = ----------------------------------
⎛ 1--- – 1⎞ M 2 + 1
⎝s ⎠
If the parameter Configuration is Analog, the model will use the parameters Threshold
current and Slope efficiency to scale the input signal, without normalization.Different
from the Digital, the Analog configuration supports individual samples for time driven
simulation.
If the parameter Include RIN is enabled, the model will generate noise bins with
bandwidth and spacing that you define. The parameter RIN is the ratio of the mean-
square optical intensity noise to the square of the average power [2][3]:
2
〈 ΔP 〉
RIN = ---------------
2
dB ⁄ Hz
Pm
2
where 〈 ΔP 〉 is the mean-square optical intensity fluctuation at a specific frequency
2
and P m is the parameter Measured power.
2
This model estimates 〈 ΔP 〉 based on the parameters RIN and Measured power.
142
dϕ α d
------ = -----e- ----- InP ( t ) + κP ( t )
dt 2 dt
where ϕ is the signal phase, α e is the parameter Alpha parameter or linewidth

enhancement factor, and κ is the parameter Adiabatic chirp.
The signal phase and polarization is calculated in the same way as the CW laser,
where the laser phase noise is modeled using a Gaussian random variable for the
phase difference between two successive time instants with zero mean and a
variance equal to 2π Δf , where Δf is the laser Linewidth. The probability density
function is:
2
Δϕ
1 – ------------------
4πΔfdt
f ( Δϕ ) = ---------------------- ⋅ e
2π Δfdt
time discretization.
⎛ E X ( t )⎞ = ⎛ 1 – k⎞ ⋅ P ( t )
⎝ E Y ( t )⎠ ⎝ ke jθ ⎠
The power splitting k and the phase difference θ is calculated from the parameters
Azimuth α and Ellipticity ε :
k ( 1 – k ) cos ( θ )
tan ( 2α ) = 2 -----------------------------------------
1 – 2.k
sin ( 2ε ) = 2 k ( 1 – k ) sin ( θ )
References
[1] Agrawal, G.P. and Dutta, N.K., “Semiconductor Laser”, 2nd Edition, Van Nostrand Reinhold,
New York, N.Y., (1993).
[2] Lau, K. Y. and Yariv, A., "Ultra-High Speed Semiconductor Laser", J. Quant. Elect., 21, 121-136,
(1985).
N.Y., (1997).
143
Notes:
144
VCSEL LASER
VCSEL Laser
This component is a vertical-cavity surface emitting laser (VCSEL). It includes thermal

effects and parameter fitting based on measured LI and IV curves.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Frequency 193.1 THz Hz, THz, nm [30, 3e5]
Laser emission frequency
Bias current 38 mA [0, 1000]
Input bias current
Modulation peak current 28 mA [0, 1000]
Thermal

Thermal effects True [True, False]
Defines whether thermal effects are included in the calculation
Temperature 20 C, K [-INF, +INF]
The ambient temperature
Thermal impedance 2600 C/W [0, +INF]
Related to the temperature changes to the power dissipated

as heat
145
VCSEL LASER

Thermal time constant 1e-6 s [0, +INF]
Response time of the device temperature
Physical

Reduce parameters True [True, False]
Defines if the user can enter a reduced number of physical

parameters
Active layer volume 1.5e-010 cm3 [0, 1e-3]
Group velocity 8.5e+009 cm/s [0, 100e9]
Quantum efficiency 0.4 [0, 1]
Differential gain coefficient 2.5e-016 cm2 [0, 50e-16]
Carrier density at transparency 1e+018 cm-3 [0, 100e18]
Mode confinement factor 0.4 [0, 1]
Scaling factor 2.6e-008 W [0, +INF]
Factor accounting for the output coupling efficiency
Gain coefficient 16000 1/s [0, +INF]
Coefficient in 1/s
Carrier number at transparency 19400000 [0, +INF]
Carrier lifetime 1e-009 s [0, 50e-9]
Photon lifetime 3e-012 s [0, 50e-9]
Spontaneous emission factor 3e-005 [2e-5, 20e-5]
Gain compression coefficient 1e-017 cm3 [0.5e-17, 10e-17]
Linewidth enhancement factor 5 [-20, 20]
Injection efficiency 1 [0, +INF]

Current injection efficiency
Meaurements

Max input current 40 mA [0, +INF]
The maximum value for the signal input current. It should

match the maximum value of the measurements
146
VCSEL LASER

a- Ioff(T) 1.246e-3 - a0=A, [-INF, +INF]
Coefficients for the polynomial function of temperature for the 2.545e-5 a1=A/C,
offset current curve
2.908e-7 - a2=A/C2,
2.531e-10 a3=A/C3…
1.022e-12
b- V(T) 1 b0=V1/2, [-INF, +INF]
Coefficients for the polynomial function of temperature for the b1= V1/2/C,
current-voltage curve
b2= V1/2/C2,
b3= V1/2/C3…
c- V(I) 1.721 275 - c0=V1/2, [-INF, +INF]

1/2
Coefficients for the polynomial function of current for the 2.439e4 c1= V /A,
current-voltage curve
1.338e6 - c2= V1/2/A2,
4.154e7 c3= V1/2/A3…
6.683e8 -
4.296e9
Parameter fitting True [True, False]
Defines if the component will fit the parameters using the

measurements
LI curves filename LI
Temperature.dat
The filename with the measurements of the LI curves,
including the temperature dependence
IV curves filename IV
Temperature.dat
The filename with the measurements of the IV curves,
including the temperature dependence
LI curves at different temperatures (ACW) 183x3 array Col 1: A Col 1: [0,+INF]
The values loaded from the LI curves filename Col 2: C Col 2: [-INF,+INF]
Col 3: W Col 3: [0,+INF]
IV curves at different temperatures (ACV) 78x3 array Col 1: A Col 1: [0,+INF]
The values loaded from the IV curves filename Col 2: C Col 2: [-INF,+INF]
Col 3: V Col 3: [0,+INF]
147
VCSEL LASER
Numerical

value range

Graphs

From 0 mA [0, +INF]
To 40 mA [0, +INF]
Simulation

value range
Enabled True [True, False]
Parameterized Parameterized
Noise

value range
Include noise True [True, False]
Include phase noise True [True, False]
148
VCSEL LASER
Random numbers

value range
Generate random seed True [True, False]
Random seed index 0 [0, 4999]

149
VCSEL LASER
Graphs

IV curve Current (A) Voltage (V)
LI curve Current (A) Power (W)
Measured IV curve Current (A) Voltage (V)
Measured LI curve Current (A) Power (W)
Results
Name and description Units

Output power W
Voltage V
Thermal impedance C/W
Active layer volume cm^3
Quantum efficiency
Gain coefficient 1/s
Scaling factor W
Carrier number at transparency
Current at max. voltage A
a0 A
a1 A/C
a2 A/C^2
a3 A/C^3
a4 A/C^4
a5 A/C^5
a6 A/C^6
a7 A/C^7
a8 A/C^8
a9 A/C^9
b0 V^.5
b1 V^.5/C
b2 V^.5/C^2
150
VCSEL LASER

b3 V^.5/C^3
b4 V^.5/C^4
b5 V^.5/C^5
b6 V^.5/C^6
b7 V^.5/C^7
b8 V^.5/C^8
b9 V^.5/C^9
c0 V^.5
c1 V^.5/A
c2 V^.5/A^2
c3 V^.5/A^3
c4 V^.5/A^4
c5 V^.5/A^5
c6 V^.5/A^6
c7 V^.5/A^7
c8 V^.5/A^8
c9 V^.5/A^9
The modulation dynamics of the laser are modeled by coupled rate equations that
describe the relationship between the carrier density N(t), photon density S(t), and
between the optical phase Φ ( t ) and temperature T(t)[1][2].
dN ( t )- η i ( I ( t ) – I off ( t ) ) N ( t ) 1
------------- = ------------------------------------- – ---------- – g 0 ⋅ ( N ( t ) – N t ) ⋅ ------------------------------- ⋅ S ( t ) (1)
dt q⋅V τn (1 + ε ⋅ S(t))
dS ( t )- 1 S(t) Γ ⋅ β ⋅ N(t)
------------ = Γ ⋅ g 0 ⋅ ( N ( t ) – N t ) ⋅ ------------------------------- ⋅ S ( t ) – --------- + -------------------------- (2)
dt (1 + ε ⋅ S(t)) τp τn
dφ ( t )- 1 1
------------ = --- ⋅ α ⋅ Γ ⋅ g 0 ⋅ ( Nt – N t ) – ----- (3)
dt 2 τp
dT ( t )- 1
------------ = ------ ( T 0 + ( IV (I,T) – P 0 )R th – T ) (4)
dt τ th
151
VCSEL LASER
where g 0 is the gain slope constant, g 0 = v g × a 0 ,

a 0 is the active layer gain coefficient
v g is the group velocity
N t is the carrier density at transparency
β is the fraction of spontaneous emission coupled into the lasing mode
τ p is the photon lifetime

τ n is the electron lifetime
η i is the injection efficiency
T 0 is the ambient temperature
P O is the output power
R th is the thermal impedance
τ th is the thermal time constant
The time variations for the optical and laser chips are given by [1]
S ⋅ V ⋅ η0 ⋅ h ⋅ v
P 0 = ------------------------------------ (5)
2 ⋅ Γτ p
1 dφ
Δv = ---------- ⋅ ------ (6)
2 ⋅ π dt
where
η o is the differential quantum efficiency

h is Planck’s constant
152
VCSEL LASER
By enabling the parameter Reduce parameters, the user can enter the alternative
parameters that will be used to calculate N t , η o and a o according to:
N0
N t = ------ (7)
V
G0 V
a 0 = ---------- (8)
vg
2kτ p
η o = ----------- (9)
hv
where
N o is the carrier number at transparency

G 0 is the gain coefficient
k is the scaling factor, with P O = kSV
The offset current is given by a polynomial function of temperature [2].
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
I off ( T ) = a 0 + a 1 T + a 2 T + a 3 T + a 4 T + a 5 T + a 6 T + a 7 T + a 8 T + a 9 T
where the coefficients a 0 to a 9 are given by the parameter a – Ioff ( T ) .

The current-voltage (IV) relationship is modeled using a polynomial function of
temperature and current [2]:
· 9 9
V (T,I) = ( b 0 + b 1 T + … + b 9 T ) ⋅ ( c 0 + c 1 I + … + c 9 I )
where
· 9
( b 0 + b 1 T + … + b 9 T ) is
2 3 4
· 5 6 7 8 9
( b0 + b1 T + b2 T + b3 T + b4 T + b5 T + b6 T + b7 T + b8 T + b9 T )
9
( c 0 + c 1 I + … + c 9 I ) is
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
( c0 + c1 I + c2 I + c3 I + c4 I + c5 I + c6 I + c7 I + c8 I + c9 I )
where the coefficients b 0 to b 9 and c 0 to c 9 are given by the parameter b – V ( T )
and c – V ( I ) .
When the parameter Parameter fitting is disabled, the component will calculate using
user-defined parameters. In this case, the user should provide all the parameters,
including the coefficient for the polynomial functions. The measured LI and IV curves
will not be used in the calculation.
153
VCSEL LASER
When the parameter Parameter fitting is enabled, the component will calculate new
parameters using the current parameters as a first guess, including the number and
the initial values for the polynomial coefficients.
The new parameters can be seen in the component results.
First the component will calculate the coefficients for the IV curve, and then it will
calculate the coefficients for the offset current, the thermal impedance and the new
slope efficiency.
The maximum value of the input current is calculated from the current derivative of
the IV curve. However, the user should provide this value as an input parameter.
The parameters will be adjusted to reflect the new slope efficiency. The affected
parameters are the active layer volume and the quantum efficiency.
For each calculation, the component will also generate the peak power and voltage
results based on the bias and modulation peak current. These values can be used for
external parameter fitting if the user intends to use a different fitting engine.
The file format for the LI curve data is the following:
Current0 Temperature0 Power0
The units are ampere, Celsius and watt.
The file format for the IV curve data is the following:
Current0 Temperature0 Voltage0
Current1 Temperature1 Voltage 1
Current2 Temperature2 Voltage 2
The units are ampere, Celsius and volt.
The range for the current value should be the same for both files. If the range is not
the same, the parameter-fitting engine will not converge to an optimum fitting.
For example, if the LI curve is provided from 0 to 40 mA, the IV curve must be also
provided from 0 to 40 mA.
The default parameters of the VCSEL are the same as in [2]. If the parameter Thermal
effects is disabled, the calculation will perform using the same equations as in [1],
without the thermal effects and the parameter fitting.
Parameters Bias current and Modulation peak current are scale factors applied to the
input electrical signal.
154
VCSEL LASER
I ( t ) = I DC + I in ( t ) × I Pk (4)
The VCSEL Laser supports individual samples for time-driven simulation.
References
[1] J. C. Cartledge and G. S. Burley, "The Effect of the Laser Chirping on Lightwave System
Performance", J. Lightwave Technology, vol. 7, pp. 568-573, March 1989.
[2] P. V. Mena, J. J. Morikuni, S. M. Kang, A. V. Harton and K. W. Wyatt, "A Simple Rate-Equation-
Based Thermal VCSEL Model", J. Lightwave Technology, vol. 17, pp. 865-872, May 1999.
155
VCSEL LASER
Notes:
156
SPATIAL CW LASER
Spatial CW Laser
This component is CW laser that includes transverse mode profiles in the optical
output. It is a subsystem built using the CW Laser and the Multimode Generator.
Ports

Parameters
Main
Frequency 850 nm Hz, THZ, nm [10, 10000]
Emission frequency
Power 0 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1000, 1000]
Output power
Linewidth 10 MHz [0, 1e+009]
Laser linewidth
Initial phase 0 deg [-1E+100,

1E+100]
Defines the initial phase of the output
signal
Polarization
157
SPATIAL CW LASER
Spatial effects
Power ratio array 1

modes

Gaussian Gaussian,
Gaussian

Y

polarization

polarization

polarization

polarization
Simulation
Enabled YES [YES, NO]
Determines whether or not the

component is enabled
Iterations Iterations [1, 1e+009]
Number of times to repeat the

calculation
158
SPATIAL CW LASER
Space width X Space width X um [1e-100, 1e+100]
Space width Y Space width Y um [1e-100, 1e+100]
Random Numbers

value range
Generate random seed YES [YES, NO]
The layout of the Spatial CW Laser is presented in Figure 1. Refer to CW Laser and
Multimode Generator component documentation for the technical background of the
models.
Figure 1 Spatial CW Laser subsystem
159
SPATIAL CW LASER
Notes:
160
SPATIOTEMPORAL VCSEL
Spatiotemporal VCSEL
This component is VCSEL laser model based on 2D spatially-dependent rate

equations that account dynamically for the spatial interactions between the optical
field and carrier distributions in the active layer.
Ports
Name and description Port type Signal type Supported

Modes
Modulation Input Electrical Sample signals
Parameters
Main
Laser emission frequency
Input bias current
161
Thermal
Thermal effects NO [YES, NO]
Define whether thermal effects are

included in the calculation
Temperature 300 K K, C [-1000, 1000]
Diode voltage 2600 [0, 1e+100]
Thermal impedance 3000 K/W K/W, C/W [0, 1e+100]
Thermal capacitance 9.053e-012 J/K J/K, J/C [0, 1e+100]
Coefficient of emission 0.06 nm/K nm/K,nm/C [0, 1e+100]

wavelength
Gain peak wavelength 848 nm [0, 1e+100]
Reference temperature 250 K K, C [-1000, 1000]
Coefficient of gain peak 0.27 nm/K nm/K, nm/C [0, 1e+100]

wavelength
Gain profile FWHM 40 nm [0, 1e+100]
Reference leakage current 0.0006 A [0, 1e+100]
Leakage current coefficients -700 5.4e-17 S [-1e+100,

2.4e-19 -3.4e21 1e+100]
162
Geometrical
Cavity length 9e-005 cm [0, 1e+100]
Single QW thickness 0.008 um [0, 1e+100]
Number of quantum wells 3 [0, 1e+06]
SCH thickness 0.04 um [0, 1e+100]
Cavity radius 8 um [0, 1e+100]
Oxide aperture radius 2.25 um [0, 1e+100]
Core radius 2.25 um [0, 1e+100]
Core refractive index 3.6 [0, 1e+100]
Refractive index change 0.6944 % [0, 1e+100]
Physical
Group velocity 7137915666.667 cm/s [0, 1e+100]
Gain coefficient 1500 1/cm [0, 1e+100]
Carrier number at transparency 1.85e+018 [0, 1e+100]
Optical confinement factor 0.03, 0.03, 0.03, [0, 1]

0.03, 0.03, 0.03,
0.03
Carrier lifetime 2.5e-009 s [0, 1e+100]
Gain compression coefficient 3e-017 cm^3 [1e-050, 1
Linewidth enhancement factor 2 [-1e+100, 1e+100]
Top mirror reflectivity for cosine 0.997, 0.997, [0, 1]

modes 0.997, 0.997,
0.997, 0.997,
0.997
Top mirror reflectivity for sine 0.997, 0.997, [0, 1]

modes 0.997, 0.997,
0.997, 0.997,
0.997
Bottom mirror reflectivity for 0.9985, 0.9985, [0, 1]

cosine modes 0.9985, 0.9985,
0.9985, 0.9985,
0.9985
163
Bottom mirror reflectivity for sine 0.9985, 0.9985, [0, 1]
modes 0.9985, 0.9985,
0.9985, 0.9985,
0.9985
Internal loss for cosine modes 40, 40, 40, 40, 40, 1/cm [0, 1e+100]
40, 40
Internal loss for sine modes 40, 40, 40, 40, 40, 1/cm [0, 1e+100]
40, 40
Thermionic emission lifetime 5e-010 s [0, 1e+100]
Ambipolar diffusion time 2.5e-011 s [0, 1e+100]
Current spreading coefficient 0.0001 cm [0, 1e+100]
Ambipolar diffusion coefficient 12 cm^2 [0, 1e+100]
Injection efficiency 1 [0, 1]
Enhanced
Parasitic effects NO [YES, NO]
Current source resistance 1 Ohm Ohm, kOhm, [0, 1e+100]

MOhm
Current source capacitance 0.5 pF F, tF, pF, nF [0, 1e+100]
Bond wire resistance 0.4 Ohm Ohm, kOhm, [0, 1e+100]

MOhm
Bond wire inductance 1 nH H, nH, uH, mH [0, 1e+100]
Pad source capacitance 0.5 pF F, tF, pF, nF [0, 1e+100]
Bragg reflector resistance 20 Ohm Ohm, kOhm, [0, 1e+100]

MOhm
Cavity resistance 30 Ohm Ohm, kOhm, [0, 1e+100]

MOhm
Cavity capacitance 0.5 pF F, tF, pF, nF [0, 1e+100]
Feedback effects NO [YES, NO]
External cavity length 30 cm [0, 1e+100]
External power reflectance 0.03496595941 [0, 1]
164
Numerical

value range
Minimum time step 1e-012 s [1e-100, 1]
If this value is lower than the sampling period, the signal is resampled
using the minimum time step as the new sampling period.
Radial steps 7 — [4, 1e+10]

Resolution along the radial direction (finite differences parameter)
Mode solver tolerance 1e-014 — [1e-100, 0.1]

The LP mode solver error tolerance
Maximum number of modes 9 — [1, 28]

The upper limit for the number of modes to be used in the calculation
Time to reach steady state 4e-009 s [0, 1]

User estimation of the time required to reach steady-state. Steady-
state values are used to initialize the internal state of the model before
calculation starts.
Graphs
Calculate graphs NO [YES, NO]
Define whether to calculate graphs or

not
Number of points 20 [5, 1e+008]
From 0 mA [0, 1e+100]
Lower limit value for the graphs
To 40 mA [0, 1e+100]
Upper limit value for the graphs
Simulation

Parameterized Parameterized [YES, NO]
Determines whether or not the signal

output is parameterized
165
Noise
Include noise YES [YES, NO]
Defines whether RIN will be included in

the signal
Random Numbers

value range
Graphs

This module simulates a spatiotemporal model of a VCSEL and is based on the
publications of Jungo et al [1][2][3][4]. It is an improved version, since it includes an
LP mode solver and parameters to control whether temperature, parasitic and
feedback effects are included in the calculation or not.
Parameters Bias current and Modulation peak current are scale factors applied to the
input electrical signal.
166
I ( t ) = I DC + I in ( t ) × I Pk (3)
Due to the complexity of this component, we only give the list of parameters. For
further information about the spatiotemporal model refer to the work of Jungo [1],
where the exact mathematical derivation and formulation of the core model as well as
of the advanced mechanisms can be found.
References
[1] Jungo, M., "Spatiotemporal VCSEL Model for Advanced Simulations of Optical Links,"in Series
in Quantum Electronics, vol. 30, edited by H. Baltes, P. Günter, U. Keller, F. K. Kneubühl, W.
Lukosz, H. Mechior, and M. W. Sigrist, 1st ed.Konstanz: Hartung-Gorre Verlag, 2003
[2] Jungo, M.X.; Erni, D.; Bachtold, W., "VISTAS: a comprehensive system-oriented
spatiotemporal VCSEL model", IEEE Journal of Selected Topics in Quantum Electronics, pp.
939 - 948. Volume 9, Issue 3, May-June 2003
[3] G. Sialm, D. Lenz, D. Erni, G. -L. Bona, C. Kromer, M. X. Jungo, T. Morf, F. Ellinger, and H.
Jäckel, "Comparison of Simulation and Measurement of Dynamic Fiber-Coupling Effects for
High-Speed Multimode VCSELs," J. Lightwave Technol. 23, 2318- (2005)
[4] M. Jungo; D. Erni; W. Baechtold, "-D VCSEL model for investigation of dynamic fiber coupling
and spatially filtered noise”, IEEE Photonics Technology Letters, pp. 3 - 5, Volume 15, Issue 1,
Jan. 2003
167
Notes:
168
SPATIAL VCSEL
Spatial VCSEL
This component is VCSEL laser that includes transverse mode profiles in the optical
output. It is a subsystem built using the VCSEL laser and the Multimode Generator.
Ports

Modes
Parameters
Main
Emission frequency
Thermal
Thermal effects YES [YES, NO]
Define whether thermal effects are

included in the calculation
Temperature 20 C C, K [-1000, 1000]
Thermal impedance 2600 C/W [0, 1e+100]
Related to the temperature changes to

the power dissipated as heat
169
SPATIAL VCSEL
Thermal time constant 1e-006 S [0, 1e+100]
Response time of the device

temperature
Physical
Reduce parameters YES [YES, NO]
Active layer volume 1e-011 cm^3 [[0, 0.001]
Group velocity 8.5e+009 cm/s [0, 1e+011]
Differential gain coefficient 2.5e-016 cm^2 [0, 5e-015]
Carrier density at transparency 1e+018 cm^3 [0, 1e+020
Mode confinement factor 1 [0, 1]
Scaling factor 2.6e-008 W [0, 1e+100]
Gain coefficient 16000 1/s [0, 1e+100]
Carrier number at transparency 1.94e+007 [0, 1e+100]
Photon lifetime 2.28e-012 s [0, 5e-008]
Spontaneous emission factor 1e-006 [1e-100, 1]
Gain compression coefficient 1e-017 cm^3 [1e-050, 1
Injection efficiency 1 [0, 1]
Measurements
Max input current 40 mA [0, 1e+100]
The maximum value for the signal input
current, it should match the maximum
value of the measurements
170
SPATIAL VCSEL
a - Ioff(T) 1.246e-3
Coefficients for the polynomial function -2.545e-5

of temperature for the offset current
curve 2.908e-7
-2.531e-10
1.022e-12
b - V(T) 1
Coefficients for the polynomial function

of temperature for the current-voltage
curve
c - V(I) 1.721 275
Coefficients for the polynomial function -2.439e4

of current for the current-voltage curve
1.338e6
-4.154e7
6.683e8
-4.296e9
Parameter fitting YES [YES, NO]
Defines whether the component will fit

the parameters using the
measurements
LI curves filename LI
Temperature.dat
The filename with the measurements of
the LI curves, including the temperature
dependence
IV curves filename IV
Temperature.dat
The filename with the measurements of
the IV curves, including the temperature
dependence
LI curves at different
temperatures (A C W)
The values loaded from the LI curves
filename
IV curves at different
temperatures (A C V)
The values loaded from the IV curves
filename
171
SPATIAL VCSEL
Spatial Effects
Power ratio array 1

modes

Gaussian Gaussian,
Gaussian

Y

polarization

polarization

polarization

polarization
172
SPATIAL VCSEL
Numerical

value range

Graphs
Define whether to calculate graphs or

not
Number of points 20 [5, 1e+008]
From 0 mA [0, 1e+100]
Lower limit value for the graphs
To 40 mA [0, 1e+100]
Upper limit value for the graphs
Simulation

173
SPATIAL VCSEL
Noise

the signal
Include phase noise YES [YES, NO]
Defines whether the laser linewidth will

be affected by the noise
Random Numbers

value range
Graphs

IV curve Current (A) Voltage (V)
Measure LI curve Current (A) Power (W)
Measured IV curve Current (A) Voltage (V)
Results
Name and description

Output power (W)
Voltage (V)
Thermal impedance (C/W)
Active layer volume (cm^3)
Quantum efficiency
Scaling factor (W)
Gain coefficient (1/s)
174
SPATIAL VCSEL

Carrier number at transparency
Current at max. voltage (A)
a0 (A)
a1 (A/C)
a2 (A/C^2)
a3 (A/C^3)
a4 (A/C^4
a5 (A/C^5)
a6 (A/C^6)
a7 (A/C^7)
a8 (A/C^8)
a9 (A/C^9)
b0 (V^0.5)
b1 (V^0.5/C)
b2 (V^0.5/C^2)
b3 (V^0.5/C^3)
b4 (V^0.5/C^4)
b5 (V^0.5/C^5)
b6 (V^0.5/C^6)
b7 (V^0.5/C^7)
b8 (V^0.5/C^8)
b9 (V^0.5/C^9)
c0 (V^0.5)
c1 (V^0.5/A)
c2 (V^0.5/A^2)
c3 (V^0.5/A^3)
c4 (V^0.5/A^4)
c5 (V^0.5/A^5)
c6 (V^0.5/A^6)
c7 (V^0.5/A^7)
c8 (V^0.5/A^8)
175
SPATIAL VCSEL

c9 (V^0.5/A^9)
The layout of the Spatial VCSEL is presented in Figure 1. Refer to VCSEL Laser and
Multimode Generator component documentation for the technical background of the
models.
Figure 1 Spatial VCSEL subsystem
176
SPATIAL LASER RATE EQUATIONS
Spatial Laser Rate Equations
This component is laser based on rate equations that includes transverse mode
profiles in the optical output. It is a subsystem built using the Laser Rate Equations
component and the Multimode Generator.
Ports

Modes
Modulation Input Electrical Sample signals,
Individual
samples
Parameters
Main
Frequency 850 nm Hz, THz, nm [10,10000]
Defines whether to estimate the input

bias and peak current to achieve the
user defined steady

Input bias current
177
Threshold current 33.4572 mA — [0, 1000]
The threshold current, calculated from

the laser physical parameters
Threshold power 0.02841 mW — [0, 1000]
The threshold power, calculated from

the laser physical parameters
Physical
Active layer volume 1.5e-010 cm^3 [0, 0.001]
Spontaneous emission factor 3e-005 [2e-005, 0.0002]
Gain compression coefficient 1e-017 cm^3 [5e-018, 1e-016]
Carrier density at transparency 1e+018 cm^-3 [0, 1e+020]
Differential gain coefficient 2.5e-016 cm^2 [0, 5e-015]
Group velocity 8.5e+009 cm/s [0, 1e+011]
Mode confinement factor 0.4 [0, 1]
Photon lifetime 3e-012 s [0, 5e-008]
Spatial effects
Power ratio array 1

modes

Gaussian Gaussian,
Gaussian

Y
178

polarization

polarization

polarization

polarization
Numerical

value range
Simulation

179
Noise

the signal
Include phase noise YES [YES, NO]
Defines whether the laser linewidth will

be affected by the noise
Random Numbers

value range
The layout of the Spatial Laser Rate Equations is presented in Figure 1. Refer to Laser
Rate Equations and Multimode Generator component documentation for the technical
background of the models.
Figure 1 Spatial Laser Rate Equations subsystem
180
SPATIAL LED
Spatial LED
This component is an LED that includes transverse mode profiles in the optical output.
It is a subsystem built using the LED component and the Multimode Generator.
Ports

Modes
Parameters
Main
Emission frequency
Electron lifetime 1e-009 s [0, 1]
RC constant 1e-009 s [0, 1]
Bandwidth 6 THz Hz, THz, nm [0, 1e+100]
Spatial Effects
Power ratio array 1

modes
181
SPATIAL LED
Gaussian Gaussian,
Gaussian

Y

polarization

polarization

polarization

polarization
Simulation

182
SPATIAL LED
Random numbers

value range

The layout of the Spatial LED is presented in Figure 1. Refer to LED and Multimode
Generator component documentation for the technical background of the models.
Figure 1 Spatial LED subsystem
183
SPATIAL LED
Notes:
184
SPATIAL LED
Optical Transmitters
• WDM Transmitter
• Optical Transmitter
• Optical Duobinary Transmitter
• Optical DPSK Transmitter
• Optical CSRZ Transmitter
• Optical QPSK Transmitter
• Optical DP-QPSK Transmitter
• Spatial Optical Transmitter
185
SPATIAL LED
Notes:
186
WDM TRANSMITTER
WDM Transmitter
This component is a WDM transmitter.
Ports

Parameters
Main


Emission frequency of the first laser
Frequency spacing 100 GHz, THZ, Hz, ]-INF,+INF[

nm
Frequency spacing between adjacent lasers
Power 0 dBm W, mW, dBm
Extinction ratio 10 dB [0,1000]
187
WDM TRANSMITTER
PRBS

Bit rate Bit rate Bits/s [0, 1e+012]
MBits/s
GBits/s
Order log(Sequence length)/log(2) - [2,30]

Order of the PRBS generator
Number of leading zeros 1 - [0,+INF[
Number of trailing zeros 1 - [0,+INF[
Coding

Modulation type NRZ - Off, NRZ, RZ
Defines the signal modulation type
Duty cycle 0.5 bit [0, 1]
The relative position of the bit
Rise time 1 / (Bit rate) * 0.05 s, ms, ns, ps [0, 1e100]
Defined as the time from when the rising

edge reaches 10% of the amplitude to the
time it reaches 90% of the amplitude
Fall time 1 / (Bit rate) * 0.05 s, ms, ns, ps [0, 1e100]
Defined as the time from when the falling

edge reaches 90% of the amplitude to the
time it reaches 10% of the amplitude
188
WDM TRANSMITTER
Enhanced

Transmitter type EML - EML, DML
Overshoot 30 % -
Percentage of overshoot during the
transition from 0 to 1 relative to the steady
state power
Undershoot 30 % -
Percentage of undershoot during the
transition from 1 to 0 relative to the steady
state power
Damping time leading edge 1/(Bit rate) * 0.5 s s, ms, ns, ps

Relaxation time when the signal overshoot
reaches 1/e of the max value during the
transition from 0 to 1
Damping time trailing edge 1/(Bit rate) * 0.5 s s, ms, ns, ps
Relaxation time when the signal undershoot

reaches 1/e of the min value during the
transition from 1 to 0
Resonant frequency leading edge (Bit rate) * 5 Hz Hz, MHz, GHz,

THz
Frequency of the oscillations in the transition
from 0 to 1
Resonant frequency trailing edge (Bit rate) * 5 Hz Hz, MHz, GHz,

THz
Frequency of the oscillations in the transition
from 1 to 0
Side Mode

value range
Calculate side mode False - - True, False
mode
Number of side modes 1 - - [1, 100000]

laser.

nm
frequency
Suppression ratio 30 dB - [0,+INF[

power
189
WDM TRANSMITTER
RIN

value range
RIN -130 dB/Hz - ]-INF,+INF[
Include RIN False - - True, False

signal
Measured power 10 dBm W, mW, dBm ]-INF,+INF[

RIN
Chirp

value range
Adiabatic chirp 0 1/(W.s) [-1000, 1000]
Polarization

value range
Azimuth 0 deg [-90,90]

Polarization filter None - None,

Polarization X,
Polarization Y
190
WDM TRANSMITTER
Simulation

value range
Enabled True - - True, False

enabled
Iterations Iterations - - [1, +INF[
Parameterized Parameterized - - True, False
Sample rate Sample rate Hz Hz, GHz, THz ]0, +INF[

Noise

value range
Noise bandwidth Sample rate Hz, GHz, THz, -
nm
Bandwidth of the noise bins
Noise bins spacing Sample rate Hz, GHz, THz, -

nm
Convert noise bins Convert noise - True, False

bins
Determines if the generated noise bins are incorporated into the
signal
Random numbers

value range
Generate random seed True - True, False
Random seed index 0 - [0,4999]
Different each iteration False - True, False

Determines if the seed is automatically defined and unique for each
calculation iteration
191
WDM TRANSMITTER
WDM systems require multiple transmitters and different parameters for each one of
them. In addition, they also require different modulation schemes and formats. By
using multiple components, users can customize designs, but it is time consuming.
The WDM Transmitter encapsulates different components, allowing users to select
different modulation formats and schemes for multiple channels in one single
component. It is a transmitter array that allows for different modulation types and
schemes.
The block diagram for each WDM channel transmitter is shown below:
The first stage is the PRBS; the same engine used in the Pseudo-Random Bit
Sequence Generator component is used in this stage. Parameters Bit rate, Order,
Number of leading and trailing zeros are used in the internal Pseudo-Random Bit
Sequence Generator. A different seed will be used for each bit sequence for each
WDM channel. The operation and parameters of the PRBS component is described
in the technical background of the Pseudo-Random Bit Sequence Generator.
The second stage is the Coding/Modulation; the parameter Modulation type has three
options: RZ, NRZ and Off. RZ and NRZ coding is generated by the engines of the RZ
Pulse Generator and NRZ Pulse Generator respectively. A CW operation of the
192
WDM TRANSMITTER
transmitter is possible by selecting Off as modulation type. The Duty cycle parameter
is used when modulation type RZ is selected. The operations and parameters of the
electrical pulse generators are described in the technical background of the RZ and
NRZ Pulse Generators.
The last stage is the optical source and modulation scheme; by using the parameter
Transmitter type the user can select between a external modulated laser scheme
(EML) or a directly modulated laser scheme (DML). The laser engine used in this
stage is the same used in the Directly Modulated Laser Measured component. The
operation and parameters of this component are described in the technical
background of the Directly Modulated Laser Measured.
By using 3R regenerators, it is possible to recover the original bit sequence and

electrical signals for all the WDM channels:
193
WDM TRANSMITTER
Notes:
194
OPTICAL TRANSMITTER
Optical Transmitter
The optical transmitter is a single channel version of the WDM Transmitter

component.
Ports

Parameters
Main
Frequency 193.1 THz Hz, THz, nm [1, 10000]
Emission frequency
Power 0 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1000, 1000]
Output power
Extinction ratio 10 dB - [0, 1000]
Steady-state power ratio between high

and low level bits
Linewidth 10 MHz - [0, 1e+009]
Laser linewidth
Initial phase 0 deg [-1e+100,

1e+100]
signal
195
OPTICAL TRANSMITTER
PRBS
External PRBS False - - True, False
Determines whether or not the PRBS

signal is defined by an external PRBS
generator.
Bit rate Bit rate Bits/s Bits/s, MBits/s, [0, 1e+012]

GBits/s
Order log(Sequence - - [0, 30]

length)/log(2)
Order of the PRBS
Number of leading zeros 1 - - [0, 1000]
Number of trailing zeros 1 - - [0, 1000]
Coding
Modulation type NRZ - - [Off, NRZ, RZ]
Defines the modulation type
Duty cycle 0.5 bit - [0, 1]
Position 0 bit - [-1, 1]
Rise time 1/(Bit rate)*0.05 s s, ms, ns, ps [0, 1e+100]

edge reaches 10% of the amplitude to
the time it reaches 90% of the amplitude
Fall time 1/(Bit rate)*0.05 - s, ms, ns, ps [0, 1e+100]

Enhanced
Transmitter type EML - - EML, DML
Defines whether the transmitter uses an

external modulated laser (EML) or a
directly modulated laser (DML)
196
OPTICAL TRANSMITTER
Overshoot 30 % - [0, 100]

transition from low level to high level
relative to the steady-state power
Undershoot 30 % - [0, 100]

transition from high level to low level
Damping time leading edge 1/(Bit rate)*0.5 s s, ms, ns, ps [0, 1e+100]
Relaxation time when the signal

overshoot reaches 1/e of the max. value
during the transition from low level to
high level
Damping time trailing edge 1/(Bit rate)*0.5 s s, ms, ns, ps [0, 1e+100]

undershoot reaches 1/e of the max.
value during the transition from high
level to low level
Resonant frequency leading (Bit rate)*5 Hz Hz, MHz, GHz, [0, 3e+015]
edge THz
Frequency of the oscillations in the

Resonant frequency trailing edge (Bit rate)*5 Hz Hz, MHz, GHz, [0, 3e+015]
THz
Side Mode
Determines if the signal output will have

side modes
Number of side modes if running as a

Fabry-Perot laser
Separation 75 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, nm [0, 3e+012]
Mode frequency separation from the

laser center frequency
Suppression ratio 30 dB - [0, 1e+009]
Attenuation of the side modes relative to

the output power
197
OPTICAL TRANSMITTER
RIN
Determines if RIN will be added to the

output signal
RIN -130 dB/Hz - [-1e+100, 0]
Measured power 10 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1000, 1000]
Value of power during the measurement

of RIN
Chirp
Alpha parameter 0 - - [-100, 100]
Adiabatic chirp 0 1/(W.s) - [-1e+100,

1e+100]
Polarization
Azimuth 0 deg - [-90, 90]
Ellipticity 0 deg - [-45, 45]
Polarization filter None - - [None,

Polarization X,
Determines the type of polarization filter Polarization Y]
Simulation

Iterations Iterations - - [1, 1e+009]

calculation
198
OPTICAL TRANSMITTER
Defines whether or not the output signal

is parameterized
Noise
Noise bandwidth Sample rate Hz Hz, GHz, THz, nm [0, 1e+100]
Determines the noise bandwidth
Noise bins spacing Sample rate Hz Hz, GHz, THz, nm [0, 1e+100]
Convert noise bins Convert noise - - -

bins
Determines if the generated noise bins
are incorporated into the signal
Random numbers

value range
Random seed index 0 - [0, 4999]
Random seed index PRBS 0 - [0, 4999]
User-defined seed index for the internal PRBS generator

Refer to WDM Transmitter for the technical background.
199
OPTICAL TRANSMITTER
Notes:
200
OPTICAL DUOBINARY TRANSMITTER
Optical Duobinary Transmitter
This component simulates a single channel optical transmitter with a duobinary

modulated signal.
Ports

Parameters
Main
Emission frequency
Power 0 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1000, 1000]
Output power
Laser linewidth
Initial phase 0 deg - [-1e+100,

1e+100]
signal
PRBS

generator.

GBits/s
201
length)/log(2)
Order of the PRBS
Coding
Amplitude 2 a.u. - [-1e+100,
1e+100]
Peak-to-peak amplitude of the NRZ
pulse generator
Bias -2 a.u. - [-1e+100,

1e+100]
DC offset of the NRZ pulse generator
Rise time 0.05 bit - [0, 1]

Fall time 0.05 bit - [0, 1]

Filter
Filter type Bessel - - [Butterworth,
Bessel]
Defines the filter type
Cutoff frequency 0.25 * Bit rate Hz - -
3 dB cutoff frequency of the filter
Filter insertion loss 0 dB - [0, 1e+100]
Insertion loss of the filter
Depth 100 dB - [0, 1e+100]
Maximum attenuation value of the filter
202
Order 4 - - [1, 100]
Modulator

Extinction ratio 20 dB [0,+INF[
Switching bias voltage 4 V [0,+INF[
DC voltage required to turn the modulator from the OFF state

to the ON state, or vice versa
Switching RF voltage 4 V ]-INF,+INF[
RF voltage required to turn the modulator from the OFF state

Insertion loss 0 dB [0,+INF[
Bias voltage1 0 V ]-INF,+INF[
Polarization
Simulation


calculation
Determines whether the output signal is

parameterized or not
203
Random numbers

value range

The layout representing the duobinary transmitter component is shown in Figure 1.
To generate the optical duobinary signal a CW laser source, a Mach-Zehnder
modulator driven in a push-pull configuration to get a chirp free transmission, and a
NRZ pulse pattern generator were used. The NRZ duobinary signal was created
using a low pass Bessel/Butterworth filter; this signal then drives the MZ modulator.
In order to avoid recursive decoding in the receiver, a duobinary precoder was also
used. The duobinary precoder was composed of an exclusive-or gate with a delayed
feedback path.
204
Figure 1 Duobinary optical transmitter equivalent layout.
205
Notes:
206
OPTICAL DPSK TRANSMITTER
Optical DPSK Transmitter
This component simulates a single channel optical transmitter with Differential Phase-
Shift Keying modulation.
Ports

Bit Sequence Output Binary
Parameters
Main
Emission frequency
Power 0 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1000, 1000]
Output power

and low level bits
Laser linewidth

1e+100]
signal
207
PRBS

generator.

GBits/s

length)/log(2)
Order of the PRBS
Coding
Duty cycle RZ-33% - - RZ-33%, RZ-
50%, RZ-66%,
Duration of the high level bit NRZ
Polarization
Simulation


calculation
208

Random numbers

value range

The layout representing the Differential Phase-Shift Keying transmitter component is
shown at Figure 1. The RZ-DPSK transmitter includes two modulators: one for phase
modulation of the data and one for amplitude modulation of the clock for RZ pulse
carving.
209
Figure 1 DPSK optical transmitter equivalent layout.
The transmitter can simulate 3 DPSK signals: with 33%-duty-cycle RZ pulses, with
50%-duty-cycle RZ pulses, and with 66%-duty-cycle RZ pulses. Figure 2 (a), (b) and
(c) shows the correspondent spectra and time domain pulses respectively.
Figure 2 Spectra and time domain DPSK signals for (a) 33%-duty-cycle, (b) 50%-duty-cycle and (c)
66%duty-cycle.
(a)
210
(b)
(c)
211
Notes:
212
OPTICAL CSRZ TRANSMITTER
Optical CSRZ Transmitter
This component simulates a single channel optical transmitter with an optical carrier-
suppressed RZ signal.
Ports

Parameters
Main
Emission frequency
Power 0 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1000, 1000]
Output power
Laser linewidth

1e+100]
signal
PRBS

generator.

GBits/s
213
length)/log(2)
Order of the PRBS
Coding
Amplitude 1 a.u. - [-1e+100,
1e+100]
Peak-to-peak amplitude of the RZ pulse
generator
Bias -1 a.u. - [-1e+100,

1e+100]
DC offset of the RZ pulse generator
Position 0.25 bit - [-1, 1]
Rise time 0.05 bit - [0, 1]

Fall time 0.05 bit - [0, 1]

Modulator



214

Modulator insertion loss
Polarization
Simulation


calculation

Random numbers

value range
215

value range

The layout representing the CSRZ transmitter component is shown at the figure
below. The CSRZ signal is generated using a MZ modulator concatenated with a
phase modulator. The first modulator generates a RZ optical signal, and then a NRZ
electrical signal is applied to the phase modulator to generate an alternated phase in
the RZ signal.
Figure 1 CSRZ optical transmitter equivalent layout.
216
OPTICAL QPSK TRANSMITTER
Optical QPSK Transmitter
This component simulates a single channel optical coherent transmitter with an

optical QPSK signal.
Ports

Bit sequence Output Binary
Parameters
Main
External laser False - - True, False
Determines whether or not the local

oscillator laser is defined by an external
source
Emission frequency
Power 0 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1000, 1000]
Output power
Linewidth 0.01 MHz [0, 1e+009]
Laser linewidth
Initial phase 0 deg [-1e+100,

1e+100]
signal
217
PRBS

generator.

GBits/s

length)/log(2)
Order of the PRBS
Coding
Gray code False - - True, False
Defines whether or not to use Gray code
Polarization
Simulation


calculation
218

Random numbers

value range
Generate random seed True True, False

The layout representing the optical coherent QPSK transmitter component is shown
in the figure below. The QPSK signal is generated by using MZ modulators to encode
the QPSK symbols onto an optical carrier. Each modulator branch modulates the in-
phase (I) and quadrature components (Q) of a carrier.
219
Figure 1 Coherent optical QPSK transmitter equivalent layout.
220
OPTICAL DP-QPSK TRANSMITTER
Optical DP-QPSK Transmitter
This component simulates a single channel optical coherent transmitter with an

optical dual-polarization QPSK signal.
Ports

Parameters
Main
External laser False - - True, False
Determines whether or not the local

oscillator laser is defined by an external
source
Emission frequency
Power 0 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1000, 1000]
Output power
Linewidth 0.01 MHz - [0, 1e+009]
Laser linewidth

1e+100]
signal
221
PRBS

generator.

GBits/s

length)/log(2)
Order of the PRBS
Coding
Gray code False - - True, False
Simulation


calculation

222
Random numbers

value range
Generate random seed True - [True, False]


The layout representing the optical coherent dual-polarization QPSK transmitter
component is shown in the figure below. In this case, polarization multiplexing is used,
the laser output is split into two othogonal polarization components, which are
modulated separately by QPSK modulators (similar to the one shown in the QPSK
transmitter layout) and then combined using a polarization beam splitter (PBS).
223
Figure 1 Optical dual-polarization QPSK transmitter equivalent layout.
224
SPATIAL OPTICAL TRANSMITTER
Spatial Optical Transmitter
This component is Optical transmitter that includes transverse mode profiles in the
optical output. It is a subsystem built using the WDM Transmitter Optical and the
Multimode Generator.
Ports

Parameters
Main
Emission frequency
Power 0 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1000, 1000]
Output power

and low level bits
Laser linewidth

1e+100]
signal
225
PRBS

generator.

GBits/s

length)/log(2)
Order of the PRBS
Coding
Modulation type NRZ - - [Off, NRZ, RZ]
Defines the modulation type
Rise time 1/(Bit rate)*0.05 s s, ms, ns, ps [0, 1e+100]

Fall time 1/(Bit rate)*0.05 s s, ms, ns, ps [0, 1e+100]

Enhanced
Transmitter type EML - - EML, DML
Defines whether the transmitter uses an

external modulated laser (EML) or a
directly modulated laser (DML)
226
Overshoot 30 % - [0, 100]

Undershoot 30 % - [0, 100]

Damping time leading edge 1/(Bit rate)*0.5 s s, ms, ns, ps [0, 1e+100]

overshoot reaches 1/e of the max. value
during the transition from low level to
high level
Damping time trailing edge 1/(Bit rate)*0.5 s s, ms, ns, ps [0, 1e+100]

undershoot reaches 1/e of the max.
value during the transition from high
level to low level
Resonant frequency leading (Bit rate)*5 Hz Hz, MHz, GHz, [0, 3e+015]
edge THz

Resonant frequency trailing edge (Bit rate)*5 Hz Hz, MHz, GHz, [0, 3e+015]
THz
Side Mode
Determines if the signal output will have

side modes
Number of side modes if running as a

Fabry-Perot laser
Separation 75 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, nm [0, 3e+012]
Mode frequency separation from the

laser center frequency
Suppression ratio 30 dB - [0, 1e+009]
Attenuation of the side modes relative to

the output power
227
RIN
Determines if RIN will be added to the

output signal
RIN -130 dB/Hz - [-1e+100, 0]
The relative intensity noise value
Measured power 10 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1000, 1000]
Value of power during the measurement

of RIN
Chirp
Alpha parameter 0 - - [-100, 100]
Adiabatic chirp 0 1/(W.s) - [-1e+100,

1e+100]
Polarization
Polarization filter None - - [None,

Polarization X,
Determines the type of polarization filter Polarization Y]
Spatial Effects
Power ratio array 1 - -

modes
228
Mode type Laguerre- - - Laguerre-
Gaussian Gaussian,
Gaussian
Mode polarization X=Y - - X = Y, X and Y, X,

Y
Pol. X m,n index array 00 - - -

polarization
Pol. X spot size 5 um - [1e-100, 1e+100]
Pol. X inv. radius of curvature 0 1/um - [0, 1e+100]

polarization
Pol. Y m,n index array 00 - - -

polarization
Pol. Y spot size 5 um - [1e-100, 1e+100]
Pol. Y inv. radius of curvature 0 1/um - [0, 1e+100]

polarization
Simulation


calculation
Space width X Space width X um - [1e-100, 1e+100]
229
Space width Y Space width Y um - [1e-100, 1e+100]
Noise
Noise bandwidth Sample rate Hz Hz, GHz, THz, nm [0, 1e+100]
Determines the noise bandwidth
Random numbers

value range

The layout of the Spatial Optical Transmitter is presented in Figure 1. Refer to WDM
Transmitter and Multimode Generator component documentation for the Technical
Background of the models.
230
Figure 1 Spatial Optical Transmitter subsystem
231
Notes:
232
Modulators
Optical
• Mach-Zehnder Modulator
• Electroabsorption Modulator
• Amplitude Modulator
• Phase Modulator
• Frequency Modulator
• Dual Drive Mach-Zehnder Modulator Measured
• Electroabsorption Modulator Measured
• Single Drive Mach-Zehnder Modulator Measured
• Dual Port Dual Drive Mach-Zehnder Modulator Measured
• Lithium Niobate Mach-Zehnder Modulator
233
Notes:
234
MACH-ZEHNDER MODULATOR
Mach-Zehnder Modulator
Simulates a Mach-Zehnder modulator using an analytical model.
Ports

Carrier Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Negative signal chirp False — True, False
Symmetry factor –1 — [-1,1[
Simulation

The Mach-Zehnder modulator is an intensity modulator based on an interferometric
principle. It consists of two 3 dB couplers which are connected by two waveguides of
equal length (see Figure 1). By means of an electro-optic effect, an externally applied
voltage can be used to vary the refractive indices in the waveguide branches.
235
MACH-ZEHNDER MODULATOR
The different paths can lead to constructive and destructive interference at the output,
depending on the applied voltage. Then the output intensity can be modulated
according to the voltage.
Figure 1 Mach-Zehnder modulator
The equations that describe the behavior of the MZ modulator are:
E out ( t ) = E in ( t ) ⋅ cos ( Δθ ( t ) ) ⋅ exp ( j ⋅ Δφ ( t ) )
where Δθ is the phase difference between the two branches and is defined as:
π
Δθ ( t ) = --- ⋅ ( 0.5 – ER ⋅ ( Modulation ( t ) – 0.5 ) )
2
with
4 1
ER = 1 – --- ⋅ arc tan ⎛ -------------------⎞
π ⎝ extrat⎠
and
Δφ is the signal phase change defined as:

Δφ ( t ) = SC ⋅ Δθ ( t ) ⋅ ( 1 + SF ) ⁄ ( 1 – SF )
where the parameter SC is –1 if negative signal chirp is true, or 1 if negative signal
chirp is false. extract is the extinction ratio, SF is the symmetry factor, and
modulation(t) is the electrical input signal. The electrical input signal is normalized
between 0 and 1.
For parameterized and noise bins signals, the average power is calculated according
to the above.
236
ELECTROABSORPTION MODULATOR
Electroabsorption Modulator
Simulates an Electro-absorption modulator using an analytical model.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Modulation index 0.95 — [0,1[
Chirp factor 0 — ]-INF, +INF[
Simulation

237
ELECTROABSORPTION MODULATOR
In this model, the optical carrier is modulated externally by the electrical modulation
signal, (see Figure 1).
Figure 1 EA modulator
Assuming that the optical input signal is Ein, the following equation describes the
behavior of the model:
α
E out ( t ) = E in ( t ) ⋅ Mod ( t ) ⋅ exp ⎛ j --- ⋅ ln ( Mod ( t ) )⎞
⎝ 2 ⎠
where Eout(t) is the output optical signal, α is the chirp factor, and Mod(t) is defined as
Mod ( t ) = ( 1 – MI ) + MI ⋅ modulation ( t )
where MI is the modulation index and modulation(t) is the electrical input signal. The
electrical input signal is normalized between 0 and 1.
to the above.
238
AMPLITUDE MODULATOR
Amplitude Modulator
Simulates an ideal amplitude modulator.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Modulation index 1 — [0,1]
Simulation

Enabled Yes — True, False
239
AMPLITUDE MODULATOR
In this model, the optical carrier is modulated externally by the electrical modulation
signal. Assuming that the optical input signal is Ein, the following equations describe
the behavior of the model:
E out ( t ) = E in ( t ) ⋅ Mod ( t )
where Eout(t) is the output optical signal and Mod(t) is defined as
Mod ( t ) = ( 1 – MI ) + MI ⋅ modulation ( t )
where MI is the modulation index and modulation(t) is the electrical input signal. The
electrical input signal is normalized between 0 and 1.
to the above.
240
PHASE MODULATOR
Phase Modulator
Simulates an ideal phase modulator.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Normalize electrical signal True — True, False
Defines if the electrical input signal will be normalized

between 0 and 1
Phase deviation 90 deg ]-INF,+INF[
Simulation

241
PHASE MODULATOR
In this model, the electrical modulation signal imposes a phase modulation on an
optical carrier. Assuming that the optical input signal is Ein, the following equation
describes the behavior of the model.
E out ( t ) = E in ( t ) ⋅ exp ( j ⋅ Δφ ⋅ modulation ( t ) )
where Eout(t) is the output optical signal, Δφ is the phase deviation, and modulation(t)
is the electrical input signal. The electrical input signal is normalized between 0 and 1.
The parameterized and noise bins signals are not affected by this modulator.
242
FREQUENCY MODULATOR
Frequency Modulator
Simulates an ideal frequency modulator.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Frequency deviation 10 GHz Hz, GHz, THz [0,+INF[
Simulation

value range
243
FREQUENCY MODULATOR
In this model, the electrical modulation signal imposes a frequency modulation on an
optical carrier. Assuming that the optical input signal is Ein, the following equation
describes the behavior of the model:
t
⎛ ⎞
E out ( t ) = E in ( t ) ⋅ exp ⎜ j ⋅ 2π ∫ Δf ⋅ ( modulation ( τ ) – 0.5 ) dτ⎟
⎝ ⎠
0
where Eout(t) is the output optical signal, Δf is the frequency deviation, and
modulation ( τ ) is the electrical input signal. The electrical input signal is normalized
between 0 and 1.
The parameterized and noise bins signals are not affected by this modulator.
244
DUAL DRIVE MACH-ZEHNDER MODULATOR MEASURED
Dual Drive Mach-Zehnder Modulator Measured
Simulates a Mach-Zehnder modulator with dual-drive modulation using measured

parameters.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Splitting Ratio 1.3 — [0,10000]
Modulator Type Phase-Shift — Conventional,

Phase-Shift
Bias Voltage 1 –2.8 V ]-INF, +INF[
Modulation Voltage12 1.2 V [0, +INF[
Absorption / Phase Filename AbsorptionPhase. — —

dat
File with the measured absorption and phase
Simulation

245
Graphs

Measured absorption Voltage (V) Absorption (dB)
Measured phase Voltage (V) Phase (radians)
In this model, you can specify the dependence of the measured absorption and phase
on applied voltage for a Mach-Zehnder modulator. You can use the default
characteristics curves or choose to load from Filename.
For a modulator with the same input and output Y-branch splitting ratios, the output
signal is:
E0 Δα a ( V 1 ) Δα a ( V 2 )
E ( V 1 ,V 2 ) = ---------------- SR ⋅ exp ⎛⎝ – ⎛⎝ --------------------- + j ⋅ Δβ ( V 1 )⎞⎠ L⎞⎠ + exp ⎛⎝ – ⎛⎝ --------------------- + j ⋅ Δβ ( V 2 )⎞⎠ L – j ⋅ φ 0⎞⎠
1 + SR 2 2
E ( V 1 ,V 2 ) ≡ I ( V 1 ,V 2 ) ⋅ exp ( j ⋅ Φ ( V 1 ,V 2 ) )
where SR = P1/P2 is the Y-branch power splitting ratio
Δα a ⁄ 2 is the attenuation constant
Δβ is the phase constant
L is the interaction length of the modulator arm
φ0 is 0 radians for a conventional modulator and π radians for

phase-shift modulator
V1 , V2 are voltages applied to arms 1 and 2, respectively
I is the intensity of the optical signal
Φ is the phase
V i ( i = 1, 2 ) is defined as:
V i ( t ) = V bi + V mod12 ⋅ v ( t ) for the normalized case
where V bi is the bias voltage, V mod12 is the peak-to-peak voltage, and v ( t ) is the
normalized modulation waveform with a peak-to-peak amplitude of 1 and an average
value of 0. The electrical input signal can be normalized between 0.5 and -0.5.
V i ( t ) = V bi ± V mod ( t ) for the non-normalized case.

The model utilizes a Dual drive (push and pull) modulation ( ΔV 1 = – ΔV 2 .
246
The model has stored default curves characteristics of a Mach-Zehnder modulator.

The dependence of the measured absorption and phase of the optical signal on
applied voltage for each arm of a modulator is illustrated in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Default characteristics of absorption and phase in the Dual Mach-Zehnder model
247
References
[1] Cartledge, J. C., “Combining self-phase modulation and optimum modulation conditions to
improve performance of 10 Gb/s transmission systems using MQW Mach-Zehnder
modulators”, J. Light. Techn., 18, 647-654, (2000).
248
ELECTROABSORPTION MODULATOR MEASURED
Electroabsorption Modulator Measured
Simulates an Electro-absorption modulator using measured parameters.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Bias voltage –1 V ]-INF, +INF[
Modulation voltage (peak-to-peak) 2 V [0, +INF[
Absorption / Alpha Filename AbsorptionAlpha.dat — —

File with the measured absorption and α-parameter αm
Simulation

249
Graphs

Measured alpha-parameter Voltage (V) Alpha-parameter
Calculated alpha-parameter Voltage (V) Alpha-parameter
In this model, you can specify the dependence of the measured absorption and α -
parameter- α m on the applied voltage for an EA modulator. You can use the default
characteristic curves or choose to load from file. In this case, the parameter Filename
is enabled.
In the case of the EA modulator, the output signal response to an applied voltage is:
1
E( V) = I ( V ) exp ⎛⎝ j --- ∫ α m ( V ) d ln ( I ( V ) )⎞⎠ (1)
2
where IV is the voltage-dependent intensity of the signal.
While Equation 1 is an accurate result, it is not in the most convenient form for
simulation purposes when empirical equations for α m ( V ) and I ( V ) are obtained
from a fitting to measured results. The determination of the argument of the
exponential function in Equation 1 requires function evaluation and integration.
The modulator output signal given by Equation 1 can also be written in the convenient
( 1 + jα ) ⁄ 2
form I using a voltage-dependent parameter α r ( V ) as:
( 1 + jα r ( V ) ) ⁄ 2 (2)
E(V ) = I(V)
A comparison of the phase terms in Equation and Equation 2 yields
1
α r ( V ) = ----------- ∫ α m ( V ) ⋅ dγ ( V ) (3)
γ(V)
Equation 3 shows how the attenuation constant γ ( V ) and α-parameter- α m ( V )

jointly combine to determine α r ( V ) . Using Equation 2, with α r ( V ) determined from
measurements of α m ( V ) and I ( V ) , the evaluation of the argument of the exponent
only requires function evaluation.
250
The default characteristics curves stored in the component, the dependence of the
measured absorption, and α-parameter- α m ( V ) on applied voltage, is illustrated in
Figure 1.
Figure 1 Dependence of the absorption and αm on the applied voltage for an MQW-EAM
For this component, the electrical input signal can be normalized between 0.5 and
-0.5. Then, the voltage applied to the modulator is given by:
(4)
V ( t ) = V b + V mod ⋅ v ( t )
where Vb is the bias voltage, Vmod is the peak-to-peak voltage, and v(t) is the
normalized modulation waveform (electrical input signal) with a peak-to-peak
amplitude of 1 and an average value of 0.
251
Notes:
252
SINGLE DRIVE MACH-ZEHNDER MODULATOR MEASURED
Single Drive Mach-Zehnder Modulator Measured
Simulates a Mach-Zehnder modulator with single drive modulation using measured

parameters.
Ports

Parameters
Main


Phase-Shift
Modulation Voltage 1.5 V [0, +INF[
Operation mode Change in V2 = 0 — Change in V1 = 0,

Change in V2 = 0
Absorption / Phase Filename AbsorptionPhase.dat — —
253
Simulation

Graphs

signal is:
E0 Δα a ( V 1 ) Δα a ( V 2 )
E ( V 1 ,V 2 ) = ---------------- SR ⋅ exp ⎛⎝ – ⎛⎝ --------------------- + j ⋅ Δβ ( V 1 )⎞⎠ L⎞⎠ + exp ⎛⎝ – ⎛⎝ --------------------- + j ⋅ Δβ ( V 2 )⎞⎠ L – j ⋅ φ 0⎞⎠
1 + SR 2 2
E ( V 1 ,V 2 ) ≡ I ( V 1 ,V 2 ) ⋅ exp ( j ⋅ Φ ( V 1 ,V 2 ) )
where SR = P1/P2 is the Y-branch power splitting ratio

Φ is the phase
Vi(i=1,2) is defined as:
V i ( t ) = V bi + V modi ⋅ v ( t ) for the normalized case

where Vbi is the bias voltage, Vmodi is the peak-to-peak voltage, v(t) is the normalized
modulation waveform with a peak-to-peak amplitude of 1 and an average value of 0.
The electrical input signal is normalized between 0.5 and -0.5.
254
V i ( t ) = V bi ± V mod ( t ) for the non-normalized case

The model utilizes a single drive modulation, i.e., V mod is 0 in one of the arms.
Figure 1 Default characteristics of absorption and phase in the Single Mach-Zehnder mode
255
References
256
DUAL PORT DUAL DRIVE MACH-ZEHNDER MODULATOR MEASURED
Dual Port Dual Drive Mach-Zehnder Modulator

Measured
Simulates a Mach-Zehnder modulator with dual-drive modulation using two ports with
measured parameters.
Ports

Modulation 1 Input Electrical
Modulation 1 Input Electrical
Parameters
Main


Phase-Shift,
Modulation Voltage12 1.2 V [0, +INF[
Absorption / Phase Filename AbsorptionPhase.dat — —

257
Simulation

Graphs

signal is:
E0 Δα a ( V 1 ) Δα a ( V 2 )
E ( V 1 ,V 2 ) = ---------------- SR ⋅ exp ⎛ – ⎛ --------------------- + j ⋅ Δβ ( V 1 )⎞ L⎞ + exp ⎛ – ⎛ --------------------- + j ⋅ Δβ ( V 2 )⎞ L – j ⋅ φ 0⎞
1 + SR ⎝ ⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎠ ⎝ ⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎠
E ( V 1 ,V 2 ) ≡ I ( V 1 ,V 2 ) ⋅ exp ( j ⋅ Φ ( V 1 ,V 2 ) )
where SR = P 1 ⁄ P 2 is the Y-branch power splitting ratio

Φ is the phase
V i ( i = 1, 2 ) is defined as:
V i ( t ) = V bi ± V modi ⋅ v ( t ) for the normalized case
where V bi is the bias voltage, V modi is the peak-to-peak voltage, and v ( t ) is the
normalized modulation waveform with a peak-to-peak amplitude of 1 and an average
value of 0. The electrical input signal is normalized between 0.5 and -0.5.
258
V i ( t ) = V bi ± V modi ( t ) for the non-normalized case.

The model utilizes a Dual drive (push and pull) modulation ( ΔV 1 = – ΔV 2 .

Figure 1 Default characteristics of absorption and phase in the Dual Mach-Zehnder model
259
References
260
LITHIUM NIOBATE MACH-ZEHNDER MODULATOR
Lithium Niobate Mach-Zehnder Modulator
This component simulates a Lithium Niobate Mach-Zehnder modulator based on

measured parameters.
Ports

Input 1 Input Optical
Input 2 Input Electrical
Parameters
Main



Modulation voltage1 0 V ]-INF,+INF[
Modulation voltage2 4 V ]-INF,+INF[
261
Bandwidth Response

Load transfer function False — True, False
Determines whether you want to load a modulator transfer

function or use an ideal one.
File frequency unit Hz — Hz, THz
Determines the frequency unit of the file.
File format Power — Power; Phase;

Power Phase;
Determines the format of the file. Real, Imag.
Linear scale True — True, False
Determines whether or not the data is in linear scale.
HF filename Filter.dat — —
File with the transfer function (S21)
Simulation

The Mach-Zehnder structure consists of an input optical branch, which splits the
incoming light into two arms, followed by two independent optical arms, which are
subsequently recombined by the output optical branch. Application of an electrical
signal to one of the optical arms controls the degree of interference at the output
optical branch and therefore controls the output intensity.
The optical field at the output of the modulator is given by:
E in ( t ) ( j ⋅ π ⋅ v 2 ( t ) ⁄ V πRF + j ⋅ π ⋅ v bias2 ⁄ V πDC ) ( j ⋅ π ⋅ v 1 ( t ) ⁄ V πRF + j ⋅ π ⋅ v bias1 ⁄ V πDC )

E O ( t ) = ---------------------------------------------
( insertionloss ⁄ 20 )
⋅ (γ ⋅ e + (1 – γ) ⋅ e )
10
where E in ( t ) is the input signal

v 1 ( t ) and v 2 ( t ) are the RF modulating electrical voltage
v bias1 and v bias2 are the DC bias voltage applied to arm one and two, respectively
262
γ denotes the power splinting (combining) ration of arm two for the input (output,
respectively) Y-branch waveguide, and is given by:
1
γ = ⎛ 1 – --------⎞ ⁄ 2
⎝ ε⎠ r
ExtRatio ⁄ 10
where ε r = 10 .
v bias1 and v bias2 , the DC bias voltages, are included separately as parameters due
to the possibility of the V πDC (Switching Bias Voltage) to be different from the
Switching RF Voltage.
If the Switching Bias Voltage is equal to the Switching RF Voltage, and the
Normalize Electrical Signal parameter is False, the bias voltage can be included in
the electrical signal.
The optical power and phase of the modulator output are determined in response to
the modulating voltage waveforms. The modulator transfer function relates the
effective drive voltage to the applied drive voltage. This component can also load the
modulator transfer function data from file or consider an ideal transfer function.
The file is formatted containing two items per line, the frequency and filter
measurement. The parameter File frequency unit determines the frequency unit of
the first item; it can be Hz or THz.
Phase) or two values (Power and Phase or Real and Imag):
Power (Phase is set to zero, assuming frequency units THz)
193.10 0
193.11 0.5
193.12 0.5
193.13 0
Power Phase
193.14 0 0
193.15 0.5 3.14
193.16 0.5 3.14
193.17 0 0
263
Real Imag
193.18 0 0
193.19 -0.5 7.9-e-4
193.20 -0.5 7.9-e-4
193.21 0 0
Phase (Power is set to one)
193.22 0
193.23 3.14
193.24 3.14
193.253 0
When the Normalize electrical signal parameter is True, the electrical signals of
port1 and port2 are normalized between -0.5 and 0.5. In this case, the amplitude of
each RF electrical signal considered in v 1 ( t ) and v 2 ( t ) will be the values in the
modulation voltage parameters divided by 2.
References
[1] Cartledge, J. C., Rolland, C., Lemerle, S., and Solheim, A., “Theoretical performance of 10 Gb/s
lightwave systems using a III-V semiconductor Mach-Zehnder modulator.”, IEEE Phot. Techn.
Letters., 6, 282-284, (1994).
[2] Cartledge, J.C., "Performance of 10 Gb/s lightwave systems based on lithium niobate Mach-
Zehnder modulators with asymmetric Y-branch waveguides". IEEE Phot. Techn. Letters., 7,
1090 -1092, (1995).
264
Bit Sequence Generators
• Pseudo-Random Bit Sequence Generator
• User-Defined Bit Sequence Generator
265
Notes:
266
PSEUDO-RANDOM BIT SEQUENCE GENERATOR
Pseudo-Random Bit Sequence Generator
Generates a Pseudo Random Binary Sequence (PRBS) according to different

operation modes. The bit sequence is designed to approximate the characteristics of
random data.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Bit rate Bit rate Bits/s [0, 1e+012]
MBits/s
GBits/s
Operation mode Order — Probability, Order,

Alternate, Ones,
Zeros
Order log(Sequence length)/log(2) — [2,30]
Mark probability 0.5 — [0,1]
Probability of ones in the sequence
Number of leading zeros (Time window * 3 / 100) * Bit rate — [0,+INF[
Number of trailing zeros (Time window * 3 / 100) * Bit rate — [0,+INF[
267
Simulation
Name and description Default Units Value range

value

Random numbers

value
User-defined seed index for bit generation
Different each iteration False — True, False
Determines if the seed is automatically defined and unique for

each calculation iteration
This model generates a sequence of N bits:
where N = T w B r
NG = N – nl – nt
Tw is the global parameter Time window and Br is the parameter Bit rate.
The number of bits generated is N G . n l and n t are the Number of leading zeros and
the Number of trailing zeros.
Operation mode controls the algorithm used to generate the bit sequence:
• Probability: Random number generator is used, with parameter Mark probability
specifying the probability of ones in the sequence
• Order: PRBS generator[1] with Order k is used to generate a sequence with
period of 2k-1
• Alternate: Alternate sequence of ones and zeros is generated
• Ones: A sequence of ones is generated
• Zeros: A sequence of zeros is generated
268
References
[1] Press, W. H., Flannery, B. P., Teukolsky, S. A., and Vetterling, W. T., Numerical Recipes in C.
Cambridge University Press, (1991).
269
Notes:
270
USER-DEFINED BIT SEQUENCE GENERATOR
User-Defined Bit Sequence Generator
Generates a bit sequence that is user-defined.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Bit rate Bit rate Bits/s [0,+INF[
MBits/s
GBits/s
Load from file False — True, False
Determines whether or not the component

will load the bit sequence from the file
Filename Sequence.dat — Filename
File with the bit sequence
Bit sequence 0101101110 — String
User-defined bit sequence
Number of leading zeros (Time window * 3 / 100) * Bit rate — [0, 1000]
Number of trailing zeros (Time window * 3 / 100) * Bit rate — [0, 1000]
271
USER-DEFINED BIT SEQUENCE GENERATOR
Simulation

value
Iterations 1 — [1, 1e+009]

You can enter the string Bit sequence or choose Load from file. In this, case the
parameter Filename is enabled.
All bit files are formatted containing one bit per line, e.g. the bit file representing the
sequence "01011..." has the following form:
The sequence length is defined by:
N = TwBr
Tw is the global parameter Time window and Br is the parameter Bit rate. If the user-
defined sequence is shorter than the N, the sequence will be repeated until the length
is equal to N.
272
Multimode Library
• Donut Transverse Mode Generator
• Hermite Transverse Mode Generator
• Laguerre Transverse Mode Generator
• Multimode Generator
• Measured Transverse Mode
• Mode ID Modifier
273
Notes:
274
DONUT TRANSVERSE MODE GENERATOR
Donut Transverse Mode Generator
This component attaches Donut transverse mode profiles to the input signal. It also
converts single-mode signals into multimode signals.
Ports

Modes
Input Input Optical Sample signals
Parameters
Main
Power ratio array 1

modes

Y
Pol. X m index array 0
List of mode indexes ‘m’ for X

polarization
Pol. X outer radius 5 um [1e-100, 1e+100]
Outer radius for X polarized mode
Pol. X inner radius 0 um [0, 1e+100]
Inner radius for X polarized mode
Pol. Y m index array 0
List of mode indexes ‘m’ for Y

polarization
275
Pol. Y outer radius 5 um [1e-100, 1e+100]
Outer radius for Y polarized mode
Pol. Y inner radius 0 um [0, 1e+100]
Inner radius for Y polarized mode
Simulation

The Donut [1] Transverse Mode Generator attaches mode profiles to the input signal
X and Y polarizations. A donut profile is attached to each polarization. Additionally,
single-mode inputs can be converted to a multimode signal scaled by a user-defined
power distribution.
The parameter Power ratio array is used to convert a single-mode signal into a
multimode signal. The size of the list is the number of signal modes, with time-domain
waveforms identical except for the power ratio factor. The sum of the power values is
normalized to “1” and used to scale the time-domain signals.
A Power ratio parameter of “1 2 3” will generate “3” modes. Each mode will have
power ratio equal to 1/6, 2/6 and 3/6, respectively.
The parameter Mode polarization defines how the spatial modes are attached to the
signal polarization. The user can select whether the mode profile is attached to only
one polarization (X or Y), or to both polarizations. If attached to both polarizations, it
can be the same for both (X=Y) or unique (X and Y).
The user can provide the list of mode indexes for each polarization, as well as the
inner and outer radius for the modes.
276
The donut modes is described as:
⎧ ⎧ cos ( m φ ), n ≥ 0
⎪⎨ r inner ≤ r ≤ r outer
ψ m ( r, φ ) = ⎨ ⎩ sin ( m φ ), n < 0 (1)
⎪
⎩ 0, r < r inner, r > r outer
where m is the azimuthal index, rinner is the inner radius and router is the outer radius
for each mode.
References
[1] Mahmoud, S.W.Z.; Wiedenmann, D.; Kicherer, M.; Unold, H.; Jager, R.; Michalzik, R.; Ebeling,
K.J. "Spatial investigation of transverse mode turn-on dynamics in VCSELs", IEEE Photonics
Technology Letters, Volume: 13, Issue: 11, Nov. 2001 Pages: 1152 - 1154.
277
Notes:
278
HERMITE TRANSVERSE MODE GENERATOR
Hermite Transverse Mode Generator
This component attaches Hermite-Gaussian transverse mode profiles to the input

signal. It also converts single-mode signals into multimode signals.
Ports

Modes
Parameters
Main
Power ratio array 1

modes

Y
List of mode indexes ‘m,n’ for X

polarization
Pol. X spot size X 5 um [1e-100, 1e+100]
X-axis spot size for X polarization
Pol. X spot size Y 5 um [1e-100, 1e+100]
Y-axis spot size for X polarization
Pol. X inv. radius of curvature X 0 1/um [0, 1e+100]
X-axis inverse radius of curvature for X

polarization
279
Pol. X inv. radius of curvature Y 0 1/um [0, 1e+100]
Y-axis inverse radius of curvature for X

polarization
List of mode indexes ‘m,n’ for Y

polarization
Pol. Y spot size X 5 um [1e-100, 1e+100]
X-axis spot size for Y polarization
Pol. Y spot size Y 1 um [1e-100, 1e+100]
Y-axis spot size for Y polarization
Pol. Y inv. radius of curvature X 0 1/um [0, 1e+100]
X-axis inverse radius of curvature for Y

polarization
Pol. Y inv. radius of curvature Y 0 1/um [0, 1e+100]
Y-axis inverse radius of curvature for Y

polarization
Simulation

The Hermite Transverse Mode Generator attaches mode profiles to the input signal X
and Y polarizations. A Hermite-Gaussian profile [1][2] is attached to each polarization.
Additionally, single-mode inputs can be converted to a multimode signal scaled by a
user-defined power distribution.
280
A Power ratio parameter of “1 2 3” will generate “3” modes. Each mode will have
The user can provide the list of mode indexes for each polarization, as well as the spot
size and the inverse of the radius of curvature for each mode for both X and Y-axis.
The Hermite-Gaussian mode is described as:
2x ⎛ x2 ⎞ ⎛ πx 2 ⎞ 2y ⎛ y2 ⎞ ⎛ πy 2 ⎞
ψ m, n ( r, ϕ ) = H m ⎛ ----------⎞ exp ⎜ – ----------2-⎟ exp ⎜ j ------------⎟ H n ⎛ ----------⎞ exp ⎜ – ----------2-⎟ exp ⎜ j ------------⎟
(1)
⎝ w ox ⎠ ⎝ w ox ⎠ ⎝ λR ox⎠ ⎝ w oy ⎠ ⎝ w oy ⎠ ⎝ λR oy⎠
where m and n represent the X and Y index that describe the mode dependencies for
the X and Y-axis. R is the radius of curvature and w0 is the spot size. Hm and Hn are
the Hermite polynomials.
References
[1] A. E. Siegman, Lasers, University Science Books, Sausalito, CA, 1986.
[2] A. Ghatak, K. Thyagarajan, Introduction to Fiber Optics, Cambridge University Press, New
York, NY, 1998.
281
Notes:
282
LAGUERRE TRANSVERSE MODE GENERATOR
Laguerre Transverse Mode Generator
This component attaches Laguerre-Gaussian transverse mode profiles to the input

signal. It also converts single-mode signals into multimode signals.
Ports

Modes
Parameters
Main
Power ratio array 1

modes
Complex No [YES, NO]
Determines whether to generate

complex or real modes

Y

polarization
283

polarization
List of mode indexes ‘m,n’ for Y

polarization

polarization
Simulation

The Laguerre Transverse Mode Generator attaches mode profiles to the input signal
X and Y polarizations. A Laguerre-Gaussian profile [1][2] is attached to each
polarization. Additionally, single-mode inputs can be converted to a multimode signal
scaled by a user-defined power distribution.
A Power ratio parameter of “1 2 3” will generate “3” modes, each mode will have
284
size and the inverse of the radius of curvature for each mode.
The Laguerre-Gaussian mode is described as:
n---
⎛ 2r 2 ⎞ 2 n ⎛ 2r 2 ⎞ ⎛ r2 ⎞ ⎛ πr 2 ⎞ ⎧ sin ( n ϕ ), n ≥ 0 (1)
ψ m, n ( r, ϕ ) = ⎜ --------2⎟ L m ⎜ --------2⎟ exp ⎜ --------2⎟ exp ⎜ j ---------⎟ ⎨
⎝ wo ⎠ ⎝ wo ⎠ ⎝ wo ⎠ ⎝ λR o⎠ ⎩ cos ( n ϕ ), n < 0
where m and n represent the X and Y index that describe the azimuthal and radial
indexes, respectively. R is the radius of curvature and w0 is the spot size. Ln,m is the
Laguerre polynomial. If parameter Complex is enabled, a complex mode with sin and
cos terms will be created, otherwise the output is real and depends on the signal of
parameter n.
References
[1] A. E. Siegman, Lasers, University Science Books, Sausalito, CA, 1986.
[2] A. Ghatak, K. Thyagarajan, “Introduction to Fiber Optics”, Cambridge University Press, New
York, NY, 1998.
285
Notes:
286
MULTIMODE GENERATOR
Multimode Generator
This component attaches transverse mode profiles to the input signal. It also converts
single-mode signals into multimode signals.
Ports

Modes
Parameters
Spatial effects
Power ratio array 1

modes

Gaussian Gaussian,
Gaussian

Y

polarization
Pol. X spot size 5 um [1e-100], 1e+100]
287
MULTIMODE GENERATOR

polarization

polarization

polarization
Simulation

The Multimode Generator attaches mode profiles to the input signal X and Y
polarizations. A Hermite-Gaussian or a Laguerre-Gaussian profile [1][2] is attached to
each polarization. Additionally, single-mode inputs can be converted to a multimode
signal scaled by a user-defined power distribution.
288
MULTIMODE GENERATOR
size and the inverse of the radius of curvature for each mode.
Refer to the Laguerre Transverse Mode Generator component for the analytical
representation of the Laguerre-Gaussian profile.
For the Hermite-Gaussian profile, the Multimode Generator assumes the same
values for the spot size and radius of curvature for the X and Y-axis.
Refer to the Hermite Transverse Mode Generator component for the analytical
representation of the Hermite-Gaussian profile.
References
[1] A. E. Siegman, “Lasers”, University Science Books, Sausalito, CA, 1986.
York, NY, 1998.
289
MULTIMODE GENERATOR
Notes:
290
MEASURED TRANSVERSE MODE
Measured Transverse Mode
This component attaches measured transverse mode profiles to the input signal. The
measured profiles are loaded from a file using the BCF3DCX format. It also converts
single-mode signals into multimode signals
Ports

Modes
Parameters
Spatial effects
Power ratio array 1

modes

Y
Pol. X files ““
List of files for X polarization
Pol. Y files ““
List of files for Y polarization
291
Simulation

The measured transverse mode generator attaches mode profiles to the input signal
X and Y polarizations. A transverse mesh from a file is attached to each polarization,
additionally; single-mode inputs can be converted to a multimode signal scaled by a
user defined power distribution.
The user can provide the list of filed for each polarization using the parameters Pol. X
files and Pol. Y files. For each power ratio a filename must be provided. Different from
other OptiSystem components, the measured transverse mode generator will reload
the files every time it calculates. This means the files must exist or an error message
will be generated during loading.
A Power ratio parameter of '1 2 3' will generate '3' modes and the parameter Pol. X
files should have three lines; each line will have the file name of a mode. For example:
Mode_X_1_1.f3d
Mode_X_2_1.f3d
Mode_X_3_1.f3d
The files should have the complex data file format BCF3DCX. Files that follow this
format are generated from the Save Transverse Mode component from OptiSystem
or the output files in BPM 3D.
292
Complex Data 3D File Format: BCF3DCX

This format applies to input and output files that contain complex data as text. The file
contains the file header, number of x and y data points, mesh widths in x and y, and
the complex z (x,y) data points. The data points are presented in one column with the
order determined by scanning the x and y coordinates.
BCF3DCX - file header
NX NY - number of x and y data points
WX WY - mesh widths in x and y
Z1 - complex number z data point with coordinates (xmin, ymin)
Z2 - complex number z data point with coordinates (xmin+dx,

ymin)
Z3 - complex number z data point with coordinates (xmin+2dx,

ymin)
. . .
ZNX - complex number z data point with coordinates (xmax, ymin)
ZNX+1 - complex number z data point with coordinates (xmin,

ymin+dy)
. . .
ZN - last complex number z data point with coordinates (xmax,

ymax), N=NXxNY
where dx = (xmax-xmin)/(nx-1) and dy = (ymax-ymin)/(ny-1).
293
Example: Complex field (end of propagation) in BPM 3D [*.f3d]

In this example, the number of data points is 100 and equals to the number of mesh
points. The transverse mesh extends from -5.000000E+000 to 5.000000E+000
microns giving the mesh width 1.000000E+001 microns.
BCF3DCX
100 100
1.000000E+001 1.100000E+001
-4.582487025358980E-004, -2.411965546811583E-002
1.813879122411751E-004, -2.322439514101689E-002
8.864140535377826E-004, -2.245463661588051E-002
. . .
-1.004141897700716E-002, 7.709994296904761E-003
-9.736326254112302E-003, 8.732395427319460E-003
-9.270032367315658E-003, 9.686774052240091E-003
294
MODE ID MODIFIER
Mode ID Modifier
This component changes the label identifier of a transverse mode. Transverse modes
with different labels identifiers are considered orthogonal.
Ports

Modes
Parameters
Main
User defined label NO [YES, NO]
Defines whether to attach to the label ID

a user defined string or generate a
unique ID automatically
Label ID ““
The user defined string to be attached to

the current label ID.
Simulation

This component changes the label identifier of a transverse mode. Transverse modes
with different labels identifiers are considered orthogonal. Multimode signals with
295
MODE ID MODIFIER
transverse modes with the same label identifier are not considered orthogonal. By
using this component to change the label identifier the modes are then considered
orthogonal.
296
Optical Fibers Library
• Optical fiber
• Optical fiber CWDM
• Bidirectional Optical Fiber
• Nonlinear Dispersive Fiber (Obsolete)
• Linear Multimode Fiber
• Parabolic-Index Multimode Fiber
• Measured-Index Multimode Fiber
297
Notes:
298
OPTICAL FIBER
Optical fiber
The optical fiber component simulates the propagation of an optical field in a single-
mode fiber with the dispersive and nonlinear effects taken into account by a direct
numerical integration of the modified nonlinear Schrödinger (NLS) equation (when the
scalar case is considered) and a system of two, coupled NLS equations when the
polarization state of the signal is arbitrary. The optical sampled signals reside in a
single frequency band, hence the name total field [1]. The parameterized signals and
noise bins are only attenuated.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main
Name and description Symbol Default value Default Value range

unit
User defined reference wavelength TRUE — TRUE/FALSE
If TRUE, frequency value of “Reference wavelength” is

used internally as ‘zero’ (or reference) frequency in
spectrum of signal envelope. Values of parameters
(attenuation, dispersion) are assumed to correspond to
this frequency. If parameters are wavelength-
dependent (from files), they are evaluated at this
frequency. If FALSE, central frequency of simulated
band is used.
Reference wavelength λ0 1550 nm [100, 2000]
Value of user defined/specified reference wavelength.
Length L 50 km [0, 100,000]
Fiber length
Attenuation effect — TRUE — TRUE/FALSE

If TRUE, attenuation effect is enabled.
299
OPTICAL FIBER

unit
Attenuation data type — Constant — Constant/ From
File
Defines the attenuation as a fixed constant value or as
a wavelength dependent curve taken from a file. If
‘constant’, value from “Attenuation” tab in component is
used.
Attenuation α 0.2 dB/km [0, 1010]

Specified value is used if “Attenuation data type” is set
to ‘constant’. If ‘from file’, the value is ignored.
Attenuation vs. wavelength — — — —
Defines the attenuation as a wavelength dependent

curve in a file.
Dispersion

unit
Group velocity dispersion — TRUE — TRUE/FALSE
If TRUE, the GVD effect is enabled.
Third order dispersion — TRUE — TRUE/FALSE
If TRUE, the TOD effect is enabled.
Frequency domain parameters

Defines domain in which dispersion parameters are
specified. If TRUE, frequency domain is used and
dispersion effect is specified in terms of β 2 and β 3 .
Otherwise, wavelength domain is used ( D and S ).
Dispersion data type Constant — Constant/ From

File
Defines if dispersion parameter values are read from
component tabs, or taken from a file
Beta 2 β2 -20 ps2/km [-10100, 10100]
Value of the GVD parameter in the frequency domain
Beta 3 β3 -20 ps3/km [-10100, 10100]
Dispersion D 16.75 — [-10100, 10100]

ps -
Value of the GVD parameter in the wavelength ------------------------
( nm ) ( km )
domain
Dispersion slope — 0.075 [-10100, 10100]

ps
--------------------------
-
Value of dispersion slope parameter. 2
( nm ) ( km )
300
OPTICAL FIBER

unit
Dispersion file format — Dispersion vs — Dispersion vs
wavelengtht wavelength/
Determines contents of dispersion file: group delay or Group delay vs
dispersion vs. wavelength. If “Dispersion vs.
wavelength
wavelength” and “Frequency domain parameters” are
selected, it is assumed that file contains β 2 ( λ ) . If
“Frequency domain parameters” is disabled,
component assumes that file contains D ( λ ) . If
“Group delay vs wavelength”, the file contains
β1 ( λ ) .
Dispersion file name — — — —
Specifies file containing dispersion data
The parameter “Frequency domain parameters” refers to the alternative definitions:
∂β 1 ∂D
D = ---------, S = ------- (wavelength domain definition)
∂λ ∂λ
and
∂β 1 ∂β 2
β 2 = ---------, β 3 = --------- (frequency domain definition)
∂ω ∂ω
of the dispersion parameters, but not to the argument of these functions, which is
always assumed to be the wavelength. All the parameters in the component
(including β 2 and β 3 ) are given as functions of wavelength (not frequency). This is
also the case when β 1 or β 2 are specified from a file - the first column of the file
contains wavelength values ( λ ) and the second column - the corresponding values
of β 1 ( λ ) or β 2 ( λ ) .
PMD

unit
Birefringence type — Deterministic — Deterministic/
Stochastic
Defines the birefringence. If “Deterministic”, both the
strength of birefringence and principal axes are assumed
constant, hence random mode coupling is disabled. If
“Stochastic”, random mode coupling is enabled.
Differential group delay 0.2 ps- [-10100, 10100]

d- ------
------ ( Δβ )
If Birefringence type is “Deterministic”, this is the value of dω km
the differential group delay. If “Stochastic”, parameter is
disabled.
301
OPTICAL FIBER

unit
PMD coefficient 0.5 ps - [0,10100]
Dp ----------
Polarization mode dispersion coefficient. If Birefringence
type is “Stochastic”, this is the value of the PMD
km
parameter. If “Deterministic”, parameter is disabled.
Mean scattering section length 500 [0,10100]

L scatt m
Averaged value of fiber length at which the polarization
state of the signal is randomized by applying the
scattering matrix.
Scattering section dispersion σ scatt 100 [0,10100]

m
Dispersion of the scattering section length.
Nonlinearities

unit
Self-phase modulation — TRUE — TRUE/FALSE
Determines if the self-phase modulation (SPM) effect will

be taken into account. If FALSE all the nonlinear effects -
self-steepening, SRS - are disabled. In the vector case
enabling this effect enables also the cross-phase
modulation between the orthogonal polarization
components.
Effective area data type Constant — Constant/ From

File
Defines is effective area parameter value is read from the
component tab or from a file. If “Constant”, the value from
the component is used.
Effective area 80 [0,1010]

A eff μm
2
Defines the value of the effective area parameter. This
value is used if “Effective area data type” is set to
“Constant”. Otherwise, the value is ignored.
Effective area vs. wavelength — — — —
If “Effective area data type” is “From file”, this tab specifies

the file containing the effective area data.
n2 data type — Constant — Constant/ From

File
Determines if n 2 parameter (nonlinear index of refraction) value
is read from the component tab or from a file. If “Constant”, value
is taken from component.
n2 2.6 X 10-20 [0,10100]

n2 m
2
------
The value of the n 2 parameter (nonlinear index of refraction). If W
data type is set to “Constant”, this value is used, otherwise the
value is ignored.
302
OPTICAL FIBER

unit
Self-steepening — FALSE — FALSE/TRUE
Specifies whether self-steepening effect is taken into

account. Can be enabled only after enabling the SPM, and
is taken into account only in the scalar case (if Model type
is set to Scalar), and if Full Raman response parameter is
FALSE.
Full Raman response — FALSE — FALSE/TRUE
Defines the stimulated Raman scattering (SRS) effect

representation in the model. If TRUE, SRS is represented
through the convolution integrals of the fields with the
Raman susceptibilities [6, 18-21]. Intrapulse Raman
scattering is disabled.
Intrapulse Raman scattering — FALSE — FALSE/TRUE
Defines the stimulated Raman scattering (SRS) for [19-

21]. Can be enabled if Full Raman response is FALSE. If
both Full Raman response and Intrapulse Raman
scattering are FALSE, SRS effect is not taken into account
in the simulation.
Raman self-shift time 1 [0,10100]

τ R1 14.2
fs
Value of the Raman self-shift time parameter associated
with the parallel SRS effect
t
τ R1 = ( dImχ 1111 ( ω ) ⁄ dω ) ω = 0
Units are such that Re ( χ 1111 ( ω = 0 ) ) = 1 [19-21].
Raman self-shift time 2 [0,10100]

τ R2 3
fs
τ R2 = ( dImχ 1122 ( ω ) ⁄ dω ) ω = 0
Units are such that Re ( χ 1111 ( ω = 0 ) ) = 1 [18, 20, 21].
Fractional Raman contribution ρ 0.18 — [0, 1]
Fraction of the nonlinear polarization, related to the

stimulated Raman scattering effect [2].
Orthogonal Raman factor αf 0.75 — [0, 1]
α f = Re ( χ 1122 ( ω = 0 ) )
Units are such that Re ( χ 1111 ( ω = 0 ) ) = 1 .
303
OPTICAL FIBER
Numerical
Name and description Symbol Default value Default Value

unit range
Model type — Scalar — Scalar/Vect
or
Defines model type used for simulation. Depends on
polarization state of signal. If “Vector” selected, signal can
have arbitrary polarization state and a system of two
coupled equations (17) is solved. If “Scalar” selected, the
signal preserves its polarization state and a single equation
is solved (1). In the following cases, vector simulation is
performed regardless of value of model type parameter:
• Two polarization components are detected at fiber input
• PMD effect is “Stochastic”.
Propagator type Exponential — Exponential

Runge-
Method used to apply nonlinear propagator in the split-step
Kutta 4th
Fourier method. “Exponential” corresponds to standard order
implementation [2], “Runge-Kutta 4th (2nd) order” uses
Runge-Kutta 4th (2nd) order (see [3]) to apply nonlinearity Exponential
operator. Exponential cannot be used when Model type is Runge-
set to Vector, and SRS effect is enabled. The default Kutta 2nd
selection is Runge-Kutta 2nd order. order
Calculation type — Iterative — Iterative/

Noniterative
Specifies implementation of split-step Fourier method [2, 4]
when Propagator type is “Exponential”.
Number of iterations 2 — [2, 1010]
Switch On/Off the dispersion slope (the third-order

dispersion)
Step Size — Variable — Variable/

Constant
Specifies whether variable or fixed step-size simulation is
used. If “Variable”, step size is adaptively changed
depending on value of “Max. nonlinear phase shift”
parameter, and solution itself. If “Constant”, step size is
evaluated once at the beginning of simulation. In some
cases, the fixed step size calculation executes faster, due to
the smaller number of calculations per step, but the variable
step size calculation is more flexible and can be faster if the
peak power of the waveform varies considerably in z (for
example, in the presence of strong attenuation).
Max. Nonlinear phase shift 3.14 [0,10100]

NL
ϕ max mrad
Maximum (over the time window) phase shift induced by the
self-phase modulation effect per step.
304
OPTICAL FIBER

unit range
Boundary conditions — Periodic — Periodic/
Absorbing
Specifies type of boundary conditions used in simulation.
Filter steepness — 0.5 — [0,10100]

If “Boundary conditions” option is set to “Absorbing”, the
“Filter steepness” parameter determines the
absorption/reflection properties of the time window
boundaries.
Lower/Upper calculation limit — [1400, 1700]

nm [100, 2000]
Set the spectral range in which the simulation is performed.

Any spectral components outside the range is ignored.
Graphs
Name and description Symbol Default value Default unit Value

range
Calculate graph — FALSE — FALSE/TRUE
Enables/disables 3D graphs. If disabled, no graphs

are plotted and no data are stored.
Number of distance steps — 200 — [1, 100000000]
Number of snapshots used to construct a 3D plot. If

this value is increased, the fidelity of the plot is
improved only if the value is below the number of
actual steps in z . The number of snapshots stored
cannot be bigger than the number of steps in z
taken by the simulation to obtain the solution. The
latter is determined by the maximum nonlinear
phase-shift parameter (numerical tab).
Number of wavelength/time steps — 200 — [1, 100000000]
Number of stored points per snapshot. If this value

is increased, the fidelity of the plot is improved only
if the value is below the actual number of points in
the time (frequency) domain used by the simulation
to obtain the solution. The latter is related to the
number of samples, which is a global parameter.
Linear scale — TRUE — TRUE/FALSE
Determines axis type (linear or logarithmic) for the

dependent variable. If TRUE, the axis type is linear.
Note: The rest of the parameters in the Graphs tab of the component determine
which graphs are plotted after the simulation is complete.
305
OPTICAL FIBER
Simulation

range
Enabled — TRUE — TRUE/FALSE

enabled. If FALSE, all input signals reach the output
port of the component without any changes.
Noise

range
Convert noise bins — FALSE — FALSE/TRUE
If TRUE, each noise bin within the bandwidth of the

signal is converted to a Gaussian white noise, with
the correct power spectral density, and the noise is
added to the signal.
Random numbers

range
Generate random seed — TRUE — TRUE/FALSE
Determines how random number generator is

initialized (seeded). If TRUE, the seed index used
for the initialization is the random number itself.
Otherwise, a user specified number is used.
Random seed index — 0 — [0, 4999]
If “Generate random seed” is FALSE, this value

specifies the seed index. The generated pseudo-
random sequence is the same if the seed index is
not changed. The value of the “Random seed index”
is ignored if “Generate random seed” is TRUE.
306
OPTICAL FIBER
Scalar approach
Basic equation
When the optical field is assumed to maintain its polarization along the fiber length,
the evolution of a slowly varying electric field envelope can be described by a single
nonlinear Schrödinger (NLS) [2] equation (the scalar approach, Model type parameter
from the "Numerical" tab is set to "Scalar") of the form:
∂E β2 ( ω0 ) ∂2 E β3 ( ω0 ) ∂3 E ⎛ i ∂ ∂E ⎞
2
- --------- – ----------------- --------- = iγ ⎜ E 2 E + ------ ------ ( E 2 E ) – ρτ R1 E ------------⎟
(1)
------ + αE + i ----------------
∂z 2 ∂T 2 6 ∂T 3 ⎝ ω 0 ∂T ∂T ⎠
In Equation 2, E = E ( z, T ) is the electric field envelope. A frame moving at the

group velocity ( T = t – z ⁄ v g ≡ t – β 1 z ) is assumed.
The derivatives of the propagation constant of the fiber mode β ( ω ) , ( ( β ( ω )c ) ⁄ ω

is the mode effective index), with respect to frequency
n
∂ β (ω 0 )
β n = --------------------
n
, n = 1, 2, 3 .
∂ω
( β 2 ) and ( β 3 ) are the first and the second group velocity dispersion (GVD)
parameters, respectively, and ω 0 is the reference frequency of the signal, related to
the parameter "Reference wavelength" ("Main" category of the components tool-box)
2πc
through ω 0 = --------- with c being the light speed in vacuum.
λ0
The physical meaning of the terms in Equation 2 is the following. The first term takes
into account the slow changes of the electric field along the fiber length. The second
term takes into account the linear losses of optical fiber. The third term represents the
(first-order) group velocity dispersion. This is the effect responsible for the pulse
broadening. (See "Group velocity dispersion" in the Tutorials). The next term is the
second-order GVD, known also as third-order dispersion (TOD). This effect becomes
important for a signal with a broad spectrum (e.g. femtosecond pulses or WDM
systems with many channels). The pulse shape becomes asymmetric due to the
effect of TOD. (See "Third order dispersion" from the Tutorials). The parameters ( β2 )
and ( β 3 ) are denoted as "frequency domain parameters" in the interface of the
component (see the "Dispersion" category in the Parameters table). The following
307
OPTICAL FIBER
relations are used internally to convert between them and the commonly used
wavelength domain parameters D (dispersion) and S (dispersion slope).
dβ 1 2πc-
D = --------- = – --------
2 2
β
dλ λ (2)
λ 2 2 dD
β 3 = ⎛ ---------⎞ ( λ S + 2λD ), S = -------
⎝ 2πc⎠ dλ
The parameter γ is given by:
ω0 n2
γ = ------------ (3)
cA eff
In Equation 3, n 2 is the nonlinear refractive index coefficient and A eff is the fiber
effective area. The first term in the right-hand side in Equation 1 accounts for the self-
phase modulation effect. It is responsible for the broadening of the pulse spectra and,
in the presence of anomalous GVD, for the formation of optical solitons (See "Self-
phase modulation" and "Self-phase modulation and group velocity dispersion" from
the Tutorials). The second term in the right-hand side of Equation 1 takes into account
the self-steepening effect. It leads to an asymmetry in the SPM-broadened spectra of
ultrashort (femtosecond) pulses [2] and is responsible for the formation of optical
shocks (see "Self-steepening" in the Tutorials). This effect will be taken into account
only if the "Full Raman response" parameter is set to False. The last term in
Equation 1 accounts for the intra-pulse Raman scattering effect with the parameter
τ R1 being the parallel Raman self-shift time. The intra-pulse Raman scattering is an
approximation to the actual Raman response of the material which is valid provided
that signal spectrum is narrow compared to the Raman-gain spectrum. The τ R
parameter is related to the slope of the imaginary part of the Raman susceptibility
Im ( χ 1111 ( ω ) ) at zero frequency offset [2]. The parameter ρ is the fractional
contribution of the delayed response of the material to the total nonlinearity [2]. The
intra-pulse Raman scattering effect is responsible for the self-frequency shift i.e.
energy transfer from higher to lower spectral components. It leads to a decay of higher
order solitons into its constituents (see "Intrapulse Raman scattering" in the Tutorials).
The intra-pulse Raman scattering plays the most important role among the higher
order nonlinear effects [2].
In a WDM system, the stimulated Raman scattering is responsible for an energy

transfer from higher to lower frequency channels (crosstalk). The Raman induced
crosstalk can be neglected when the following relation is satisfied [5]:
(4)
P TOT B TOT L E < 9mWTHzMm ,
308
OPTICAL FIBER
where L E ≈ z ⁄ ( L amp α ) is the total effective length, α is the fiber loss, L amp is the
amplifier spacing, z the link length, P TOT is the total optical power, and B TOT is the
total optical bandwidth.
Full Raman response

By selecting the option "Full Raman response" from the Numerical tab, the
component can simulate the SRS effect even if the signal spectrum is much narrower
than the Raman gain spectrum. In this case Equation 1 is replaced by:
⎛ ∞ ⎞
∂E iβ 2 ( ω 0 ) ∂ 2 E β 3 ( ω 0 ) ∂ 3 E ⎜ 2 2 ⎟ (4a)
------ + αE + ------------------- --------- – ----------------- --------- = iγ ( 1 – ρ ) E E + ρE ∫ h 1111 ( s ) E ( T – s ) ds
∂z 2 2 6 ∂T 3 ⎜ ⎟
∂T ⎝ ⎠
0
Contained within Equation (4a) is h 1111 ( t ) which is the (time-domain) Raman

response function [2], [20]. It is the Fourier-transform of the of the Raman
susceptibility χ 1111 ( ω ) . In this case the self-steeping effect is neglected.
Numerical solution
In dimensionless form, Equation 1 reduces to:
2 3 2
∂U ∂ U- 2 ∂ U- ∂U ∂ 2 (5)
i ------- + D 2 --------- + N 1 U U = iD 3 --------- + N 2 U ------------- – iN 3 ---- ( U U ) – iAU ,
∂ξ ∂t
2
∂t
3 ∂t ∂t
where the coefficients are given by:
sign ( β 2 ) L D sign ( β 3 ) LD LD LD (6)

D 2 = ----------------------, D 3 = -----------------------------, N 1 = ------ , N 2 = ------ τ R' , N 3 = --------- s .
2 L D' L NL L NL L NL
The new quantities are introduced according to:
2 3
T0 1 T0 1 τR (7)
LD = --------, L NL = --------, L D' = --------, s = ------------, τ R' = -----, E = P 0 U, T = T 0 t, z = ξL D
β2 γP 0 β3 ω0 T0 To
In Equation 7,T 0 is the time window size and P 0 is the maximum (over the time
2
window) of the electric field intensity E ( z = 0, T ) .
309
OPTICAL FIBER
The symmetrized split-step Fourier method [2, 4] is used to solve Equation 5. The
solution is advanced from ξ to ξ + h ( h is the step-size, related to the value of the
NL 2
Max. nonlinear phase shift parameter ϕ max = max ( U h ) ) according to:
⎛ (ξ + h) ⎞
h--- ⎞ h
⎛
U ( ξ + h, t ) = exp ⎝ D̂⎠ exp ∫ N̂ ( ξ' ) dξ'⎟ exp ⎛ --- D̂⎞ U ( ξ, t ) ,
⎜ (8)
2 ⎜ ⎟ ⎝ 2 ⎠
⎝ ξ ⎠
where the dispersion D̂ and nonlinearity N̂ operators are given by:
2 3
∂ ∂ (9)
D̂ = iD 2 ------2- + D 3 ------3- – A
∂t ∂t
and
2 2
∂U ∂U ∂U
N̂ = iN 1 U – iN 2 ------------- – N 3 ⎛ ------------- + U∗ ------- ⎞
2 (10)
∂t ⎝ ∂t ∂t ⎠
The different options available from the "Numerical" tab specify the details of the
implementation of Equation 8 and Equation 10 (see Figure 1). The simplest (and the
fastest) implementation corresponds to "Propagator type" set to "Exponential" and
"Calculation type" set to "Noniterative". In this case, the following approximation is
used:
ξ+h
∫
(11)
N̂ ( ξ' ) dz' ≈ hN̂ ( exp [ ( h ⁄ 2 )D̂ ] U ( ξ, t ) ) .
ξ
310
OPTICAL FIBER
Figure 1 Component “Numerical" tab
According to Equation 11, the half-step propagated field, with the nonlinear effects
ignored, is used in turn to evaluate the nonlinearity operator. The dispersion operator
is evaluated in the frequency domain according to:
h h
Ũ D ⎛ ξ + ---⎞ = FFT exp ⎛ --- D̂ ( iω )⎞ FFT [ U ( ξ, t ) ] ,
–1 (12)
⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎝ 2 ⎠
where FFT means fast Fourier transform. If, in addition the "Step size" option is set
to "Constant" ("Propagator type", "Exponential", and "Calculation type" are set to
"Noniterative"), the number of operations per step decreases because the first and
the last Fourier transform for each step cancels each other out (dispersion operators
combine) (see Equation 13).
⎛(ξ + h) ⎞ ⎛ (ξ + h) ⎞
h h h h
U ( ξ + 2h, t ) = exp ⎛ --- D̂⎞ exp ⎜ ∫ N̂ ( ξ' ) dξ'⎟ exp ⎛ --- D̂⎞ exp ⎛ --- D̂⎞ exp ⎜ ∫ N̂ ( ξ' ) dξ'⎟ exp ⎛ --- D̂⎞ U ( ξ, t ) =
⎝2 ⎠ ⎜ ⎟ ⎝2 ⎠ ⎝2 ⎠ ⎜ ⎟ ⎝2 ⎠
⎝ ξ ⎠ ⎝ ξ ⎠
(13)
(ξ + h) (ξ + h)
⎛ ⎞ ⎛ ⎞
h h
exp ⎛ --- D̂⎞ exp ⎜⎜ ∫ N̂ ( ξ' ) dξ'⎟⎟ exp ( hD̂ ) exp ⎜⎜ ∫ N̂ ( ξ' ) dξ'⎟⎟ exp ⎛⎝ --- D̂⎞⎠ U ( ξ, t )
⎝2 ⎠ 2
⎝ ξ ⎠ ⎝ ξ ⎠
311
OPTICAL FIBER
When the "Propagator Type" is set to "Runge-Kutta 4th order" (or "Runge-Kutta 2nd
order") (RK4 or RK2), the exponent with the nonlinearity operator in Equation 8 is
replaced by the direct integration of the following system of coupled ordinary
differential equations:
⎛ ∂U
-------⎞ = N̂U (14)
⎝ ∂z ⎠ NL
by means of the standard RK4 (or RK2) routine (see example in [3]). The application
of the dispersion operator is the same.
Note: The Runge-Kutta (2nd or 4th order) implementations in the fiber

component enable modeling the stimulated Raman scattering effect with the
optical signal having an arbitrary polarization ("Model type" parameter set to
"Vector"). However, due to the larger number of operations per step, they are
executed slower and are not recommended otherwise (in "scalar" simulations or
when the Raman effect is not included in a vector simulation) because the
"Exponential" implementation of the nonlinearity provides faster execution.
If the "Propagator type" is set to "Exponential" and "Calculation type" to "Iterative",

Equation 11 is replaced by [2], [4]:
ξ+h
h
∫
(15)
N̂ ( ξ' ) dξ' ≈ --- ( N ( ξ ) + N ( ξ + h ) )
2
ξ
The symbol N̂ ( ξ ) means N̂ ( E ( ξ ) ) . Since N̂ ( ξ + h ) is unknown at ξ + h ⁄ 2 , it is

necessary to follow an iterative procedure that is initiated by replacing N̂ ( ξ + h ) by
N̂ ( ξ ) (see [2], [4] for the details). Working with two iterations gives a reasonable
combination between accuracy and speed, as recommended in [2].
312
OPTICAL FIBER
2
Figure 2 Evolution of E ( ξ, t = 0 ) for N=3 soliton over 15 soliton periods with different calculation
modes
NL
Note: In the three cases presented, ϕ max = 27.6mrad , constant step size.
A comparison between the "Iterative" and "Noniterative" approaches is presented in
Figure 2. Evolution of N=3 soliton over 15 soliton periods is presented. The "Step
size" is kept "Constant" with the "Max. nonlinear phase shift" parameter is equal to
27.6. mrad. The noniterative approach is the fastest but not accurate enough at this
step size. The development of spurious, numerical instability, which breaks the
periodicity of the soliton evolution [2], is evident at the end of the run. For the same
step size the iterative implementation of the split-step Fourier method suppresses the
instability, thus improving the quality of the results, however this improvement is at the
expense of increased computation time.
The step size h in the component is determined through the value of the parameter
NL 2
ϕ max = γmax ( E )h . In the case of the constant step size calculation, it is
calculated once, using the input signal to obtain the maximum value of the intensity.
In the case of variable step size calculation such an evaluation is performed at each
step.
313
OPTICAL FIBER
NL NL
Figure 3 Variable step size, value of ϕ max is ϕ max = 50mrad
In Figure 3, the calculation presented in Figure 2 is repeated using variable step size.
This calculation takes longer in comparison to the "Noniterative" case presented in
Figure 2, but less than in the case where two iterations are used. Depending on the
behavior of the solution, variable step size calculation can take less time compared to
the constant step size, although the fixed step size calculation performs a smaller
number of operations per step (see Equation 13). In the presence of considerable
attenuation, the importance of nonlinear effects decreases along the fiber length,
which would permit the use of a larger step size. In this case, the use of variable step
size will reduce the computation time. The variable step size calculation is more
NL
flexible, because different tasks can be handled keeping the value of ϕ max constant.
For the case presented in Figure 3, this value is double the size of the one used in
Figure 2, but the results are even better (refer to compare with Figure 2,
"Noniterative").
The split-step scheme used in the model is locally second order accurate which
3
means that the local error is proportional to the h . However, the global error (after N
3 2
steps) is proportional to Nh = Lh [22]. Thus, increasing the fiber length might
require decrease of the step size to maintain the same accuracy.
The use of FFT implies periodic boundary conditions. In some cases a part of the
pulse energy may spread eventually hitting the time window boundaries. When the
energy reaches one of the edges of the time window it automatically reenters from the
other edge perturbing the solution. This can be avoided using the absorbing type of
boundary conditions. To achieve this at each step the optical field is multiplied in the
time domain [10] by:
Γ ( t ) = 1 – sech ( FilterSteepnes ( t – t edge ) ) , (16)
where t edge indicates the nearest edge. The effect of periodic and absorbing
boundary conditions is shown in Figure 4 where the results presented in Figure 3 from
314
OPTICAL FIBER
"Birefringence and solitons" (propagation distance is equal to 1262.34km) are

displayed. However here the time window is reduced to show the effect of the periodic
boundary conditions. The oscillatory tail developed by the solution in the case when
periodic boundary conditions are used is an unphysical effect, resulting from the
interference of the radiation that has reentered the time window and the solution. In
the case when absorbing boundary conditions are used the radiation that has
separated from the solution is removed. The smaller the value of the filter steepness
parameter the better the time window boundaries absorb (and do not reflect),
however the larger part of the time window becomes absorbing (see Equation 16.
Figure 4 Periodic (left plot) and absorbing with filter steepness 0.05 (right plot) boundary conditions
315
OPTICAL FIBER
Vector approach
When the polarization state of the incident light is not preserved during its propagation
inside an optical fiber the scalar approach is no longer applicable and Equation 1 is
replaced by [2], [6] - [10]:
2 3
∂E X ∂E iβ ∂ E β ∂ E
--------- + β 1X ---------X + ------2- -----------X- – ----3- -----------X- = iγ ( 1 – ρ ) ⎛ E X 2 + 2--- E Y 2⎞ E X
∂z ∂t 2 ∂t 2 6 ∂t 3 ⎝ 3 ⎠
∞ ∞
2 2
+ iγρE X ∫ h1111 ( s ) EX ( t – s ) ds + ∫ h 1122 ( s ) E Y ( t – s ) ds
0 0
∞
+ iγρE Y ∫ h 1212 ( s )E X ( t – s )E Y∗ ( t – s )ds

0 (17)
2 3
∂E Y ∂E iβ ∂ E β ∂ E
--------- + β 1X --------Y- + -------2 -----------Y- – ----3- -----------Y- = iγ ( 1 – ρ ) ⎛ E Y 2 + 2--- E X 2⎞ E Y
∂z ∂t 2 ∂t 2 6 ∂t 3 ⎝ 3 ⎠
∞ ∞
2 2
+ iγρE Y ∫ h1111 ( s ) Eγ ( t – s ) ds + ∫ h 1122 ( s ) E X ( t – s ) ds
0 0
∞
+ iγρE X ∫ h 1212 ( s )E γ t – s E∗ X ( t – s ) ds
0
Equation 17, h ijkl ( t ) contains the Raman response functions [6], [18]. Their Fourier
transformations and Raman susceptibilities χ ijkl ( v ) , are shown in Figure 4.1. The
convolution integrals in Equation 17 are evaluated in the frequency domain, by
multiplying the spectra of the electric fields with the Raman susceptibilities and then
performing the inverse FFT.
316
OPTICAL FIBER
Figure 4.1 Raman susceptibilities for fused quartz [6, 18]
The SRS effect is represented by "Intrapulse Raman scattering" (Equation 17) is

replaced by [20]:
2 3
∂E ∂E iβ ∂ E β ∂ E
---------X + β 1X ---------X + -------2 -----------X- – ----3- -----------X- =
∂z ∂t 2 ∂t 2 6 ∂t 3
2 2
2 1 + αf ∂ EX ∂ EY
+ ⎛⎝ ---( 1 – ρ ) + ρ --------------⎞⎠ E Y – ρτ R1 --------------- – ρτ R2 --------------- E X
2 2
iγ E X
3 2 ∂t ∂t
τ R1 – τ R2 ∂ ( E X E Y∗ )
– iγρ ---------------------- ------------------------ E Y
2 ∂t
(17a)
2 3
∂E ∂E iβ ∂ E β ∂ E
--------Y- + β 1Y --------Y- + ------2- -----------Y- – ----3- -----------Y- =
∂z ∂t 2 ∂t 2 6 ∂t 3
2 2
2 1 + αf 2 ∂ EY ∂ EX
+ ⎛⎝ ---( 1 – ρ ) + σ --------------⎞⎠ E X – στ R1 --------------- – ρ τ R2 --------------- E Y
2
iγ E Y
3 2 ∂t ∂t
τ R1 – τ R2 ∂ ( E Y E X∗ )
– iγρ ---------------------- ------------------------ E X
2 ∂t
Note: In the case of Equation 17 or Equation 17a, due to the orthogonal Raman
gain terms (the last sections in Equation 17 or Equation 17a), the "Exponential"
option for the "Propagator type" is not applicable. The component automatically
selects "Runge Kutta 2nd order" when the model type is set to "Vector", and the
Raman effect ("Intrapulse Raman scattering" or "Full Raman response" options
317
OPTICAL FIBER
are selected. Due to the increased number of convolutions performed at each

step the fiber component can be slow when solving Equation 17.
In normalized units and when the SRS effect is neglected ( ρ = 0 ) Equation 17

reads as:
2 3
∂u ∂u ∂ u ∂ u 2 2 2
i ⎛⎝ ------ + δ ------⎞⎠ + D 2 --------2 – iD 3 -------3- + N 1 ⎛⎝ u + --- v ⎞⎠ u = 0
∂ξ ∂t ∂τ ∂τ 3
(18)
2 3
∂v ∂v ∂ v ∂ v 2 2 2
i ⎛⎝ ------ + δ -----⎞⎠ + D 2 -------2- – iD 3 -------3- + N 1 ⎛⎝ v + --- u ⎞⎠ v = 0
∂ξ ∂t ∂τ ∂τ 3
The quantities β 1X and β 1Y are the inverse group velocities for the X and Y
polarization components respectively.
Figure 5 Optical fiber as a concatenation of trunks
Note: The arrows represent the principal axes.
The parameter δ is given by δ = ( β 1X – β 1Y )T 0 ⁄ ( 2 β 2 ), where β 1X – β 1Y is the

value of the differential group delay parameter entered from the "PMD" tab, in the
case where "Deterministic" mode is selected for the birefringence effect (see
"Birefringence and solitons" from the Tutorials). The effects of four-wave mixing
between the orthogonal polarization components are not taken into account due to
their negligible contribution for typical values of the birefringence [9], [10]. The
normalized time τ is introduced according to τ = ( t – β 1 z ) ⁄ T 0 where
β 1 = ( β 1X + β 1Y ) ⁄ 2 . All the other parameters have the same meaning as in the
scalar case.
The "coarse-step method" [11] is used to simulate the PMD effects in the "Stochastic"
mode. The fiber is represented by a concatenation of trunks and the propagation of
light in each trunk is simulated by the split-step Fourier method described in the
previous section. The lengths of the trunks are random numbers with a Gaussian
318
OPTICAL FIBER
distribution [12]. The average and the dispersion of this distribution are the "Scattering
section length" L scatt and "Scattering section dispersion" σ scatt parameters:
i 2
i 1 – ( L scatt – L scatt ) (19)
f ( L scatt ) = ------------------------ exp ------------------------------------------
2πσ scatt 2
2σ scatt
It is recommended [12] that the dispersion is 20% of the average value. The
birefringence of each trunk is given by [11] (see the related PMD examples in the
tutorials):
d- DP
------ ( Δβ ) = ----------------- (20)
dω i
L scatt
where D PMD is the PMD coefficient. The principal axes of the trunks are randomly
oriented with respect to each other (see Figure 4). To simulate the random mode
coupling at the end of each trunk the following transformation is applied [11], [13]:
E X' cos α sin α exp ( iϕ ) E X (21)

=
E Y' – sin α exp ( – i ϕ ) cosα EY
In Equation 20, α and ϕ are random numbers uniformly distributed in the interval
[ 0, 2π ] .
Wavelength dependent parameters
The file that specifies the wavelength dependence of the parameters consists of two
columns with the left column being the wavelength in nanometers and the right
column containing the corresponding values of the parameters (see Table 1 ). The
sampling interval is not necessarily be constant. The parameter values must be given
in the units specified in the "Units" tab of the table.
319
OPTICAL FIBER
Table 1 Wavelength dependence of the attenuation parameter
λ [ nm ] α [ dB ⁄ km ]
1400 0.31405
1402.5 0.30246
1405 0.29276
1407.5 0.28457
1410 0.27757
1412.5 0.27153
The values of the parameters in Equation 1 and Equation 17 are evaluated at the
reference wavelength.
Note: The reference wavelength must be within the wavelength interval covered
by the files for all the wavelength dependent parameters specified.
The reference wavelength can be either user-specified or "automatic". In the last case
the wavelength corresponding to the central frequency of the spectrum of the signal
is assumed by the component to be the reference wavelength. Linear interpolation is
used to calculate the values of the attenuation, effective area and n 2 parameters at
this wavelength. For the dispersion parameters the following procedure is used. The
wavelength dependence specified by the file is fitted internally using the five-term
Sellmeier formula [14]. The higher-order dispersion parameters are then obtained by
analytically differentiating this expression. If the option frequency domain parameter
is unchecked, the file may give either the group delay β 1 ( λ ) or dispersion D ( λ )
(depending on the choice made in the "Dispersion file format" tab), and if the
frequency domain parameters option is selected, either β 1 ( λ ) or β 2 ( λ ) can be
supplied, again determined by the value of the "Dispersion file format" parameter. If
the wavelength dependence of the group delay is given by the user, two successive
differentiations are applied to its Sellmeier fit. Differentiating the analytical fit instead
of using a direct numerical differentiation of the data provides the advantage of being
able to produce reasonable results even in the case where the supplied data is noisy
(see Appendix 1).
Note: The accuracy of the Sellmeier fit depends on the type of the fiber. This is
shown in Figure 6, where the results obtained for dispersion flattened and
dispersion shifted fibers are shown.
320
OPTICAL FIBER
Figure 6 Comparison between the original dispersion data and their fits for two fiber types
Guidelines for using the component for WDM simulations

Periodic boundary conditions are required for simulating the propagation of long bit
sequences at different carrier wavelengths, which is the case when WDM systems are
designed.
To avoid the aliasing phenomena (see e.g. [3]), the sample rate is chosen to be at
least three times bigger (Figure 7) than the bandwidth occupied by the simulated
channels (see e.g. [15]).
Figure 7 WDM channels and their four-wave mixing products
Any frequency component outside the frequency range (Fc-SR/2, Fc+SR/2), where
SR is the sample rate and Fc is the reference frequency is falsely translated (aliased)
into that range by the very act of discrete sampling [3]. If the sample rate is bigger than
the bandwidth occupied by the WDM channels (so it can accommodate all the
channels) but less than three times that value in the presence of nonlinear effect the
four-wave mixing products resulting from the nonlinear interaction between the
channels (spurious waves [16]) will be aliased. In [16], to minimize the amount of
321
OPTICAL FIBER
aliased power the requirement that the value of the power spectrum at the boundary
of the available spectral range be -40 dB of its peak value is used.
The longitudinal step size depends on the importance of the nonlinear effects for the
particular simulation. If all the nonlinear effects are disabled step size equal to the
fiber length will be used. The increase of the impact of nonlinearity will require
decrease of the step size (decrease of the value of the max. nonlinear phase shift
parameter) to maintain the same accuracy.
NL NL
Figure 8 Output spectra corresponding to ϕ max = 50mrad and ϕ max = 3mrad
Note: The propagation distance is 100km. Input configuration is given in "Cross-

phase modulation" in the Tutorials.
Values in the order of a few milliradians (one [15] and three [17])) are used with this
parameter in a WDM system simulation. The effect of an improperly chosen step size
is shown in Figure 8, where the output spectra corresponding to an interaction of two
Gaussian pulses with carrier wavelengths one nm spaced are shown (see "Cross-
phase modulation" from the Tutorials). While the correct result that the four-wave
mixing products (or spurious waves) should disappear when the pulses are no longer
over-lapped (in the absence of any loss and gain [16]) is reached when the step-size
is small enough, in the opposite case, the spurious frequencies present in the output
spectra are still evident. The improperly chosen step size (too big) tends to
exaggerate the four wave mixing products (see [22] and references therein).
To increase the accuracy, you can switch from a "Noniterative" to an "Iterative"

calculation type, keeping the step size the same (with the same step size, the
"Iterative" implementation is more accurate, (see Figure 2), or alternatively, to keep
working in the "Noniterative" mode and decrease the step size, or the value of the
"Max. nonlinear phase shift" parameter. With respect to saving computational time,
the latter strategy is better. It should be noted that computational time will not be
saved by simultaneously increasing the number of iterations and the step size.
322
OPTICAL FIBER
Appendix 1
Dispersion fitting according to the Sellmeier formula
When the option "Dispersion from file” is selected, the dispersion data are internally
fitted according to the five-term Sellmeier formula [14], namely:
–4 –2 2 4 (1)A
τ = c1 λ + c2 λ + c3 + c4 λ + c5 λ
where τ is the group delay (per unit fiber length) or, respectively:
dτ –5 –3 3 (2)A
D = ------ = c 1'λ + c 2'λ + c 4'λ + c 5'λ
dλ
where D is the dispersion [ps/nm/km]. The user supplies data either for the
dispersion or the group delay that are then fitted according to Equation 2A or
Equation 1A, and the slope and/or dispersion are calculated by differentiating
Equation 1A and Equation 2A analytically.
The least-square fitting associated with Equation 2A amounts to minimizing:
N
–5 –3 3 2
∑ ( c1λ i + c 2λ i + c 4λ i + c 5λ i – D i ) = min (3)A
Q =
i=1
where N is the number of points. Using:
∂Q
------- = 0, i = 1…4 , (4)A
∂c i
323
OPTICAL FIBER
the following linear system is obtained:
– 10 –8 –4 –2 –5
∑ λi ∑ λi ∑ λi ∑ λi C1 ∑ Diλ i
–8 –6 –2 –3
∑ λi ∑ λi ∑ λi N C2
=
∑ Diλ i (5)A
–4 –2 2 4 C4
∑ λi ∑ λi ∑ λi ∑ λi ∑ Diλ i
–2 4 6 C5 3
∑ λi N ∑ λi ∑ λi ∑ Diλ i
which is solved by LU-decomposition [3].
In the case when the user supplies a group delay data file, Equation 1A is used and
Equation 5A transforms into Equation 6A.
The fitting procedure is useful when/if noisy data is supplied by the user, as the
following example shows. Figure 1A shows dispersion-versus-wavelength
dependence of SMF-28 and the corresponding "exact" results for dispersion
parameters are displayed below the graph.
–8 –6 –4 –2 –4
∑ λi ∑ λi ∑ λi ∑ λi N
C1
∑ τiλ i
–6 –4 –2 2 –2
∑ λi ∑ λi ∑ λi N ∑ λi C2 ∑ τiλ i
–4 –2 2 4 (6)A
∑ λi ∑ λi N ∑ λi ∑ λi C3 = ∑ τi
–2 2 4 6 C4 2
∑ λi N ∑ λi ∑ λi ∑ λi C5
∑ τiλ i
2 4 6 8 4
N ∑ λi ∑ λi ∑ λi ∑ λi ∑ τiλ i
324
OPTICAL FIBER
Figure 1A Lambda = 1550.75nm beta2=-2.08625e-026 s2/m beta3=1.27246e-040 s3/m
D= 1.63411e-005 s/m2 S= 56.9931 s/m3
To assess the influence of noise on the results from the calculation some noise is
added to the data presented in Figure 1A with the resulting graph presented in Figure
2A. Supplying the data from Figure 2A to the Nonlinear Dispersive Fiber Total Field
component gives the results for the dispersion parameters presented under Figure
2A.
325
OPTICAL FIBER
Figure 2A Lambda = 1550.75nm beta2=-2.10115e-026 s2/m beta3=1.32966e-040 s3/m
D= 1.64578e-005 s/m2 S= 60.3521 s/m3
326
OPTICAL FIBER
Appendix 2
Optical fiber data
SMF-28
The SMF-28 model used in OptiSystem has the following characteristics:
Figure 1 Attenuation
Figure 2 Group Velocity Dispersion
327
OPTICAL FIBER
Figure 3 Effective Area
Figure 4 Group Delay
Attenuation curve shows a minimum of 0.185 dBm for a wavelength of 1550 nm .

GVD curve reveals a dispersion of
2
16.5 ps/nm/km at 1550 nm with a dispersion
slope of 0.05 ps/nm ⁄ km .
2
Effective area at 1550 nm is 76.5 μm .
Group delay is 4897650 ps/km .
This model can be varied in any way because you have the ability to change any
particular parameter. Create a new file and then load it into the appropriate section,
or just set the parameter to 'Constant' and enter a value. The Nonlinear Fiber model
is very flexible, because it has the ability to model practically every manufactured fiber
that exists on the market today.
328
OPTICAL FIBER
+D NZDSF model
The +D NZDSF model used in OptiSystem has the following characteristics:
329
OPTICAL FIBER

2
4.5 ps/nm/km at 1550 nm with a dispersion
2
The effective area at 1550 nm is 71.5 μm .
330
OPTICAL FIBER
-D NZDSF model
The -D NZDSF model used in OptiSystem has the following characteristics:
331
OPTICAL FIBER

2
– 7.5 ps/nm/km at 1550 nm with a dispersion
2
Effective area at 1550 nm is 92 μm .
332
OPTICAL FIBER
CDF (Standard)
The DCF model used in OptiSystem has the following characteristics:
333
OPTICAL FIBER

2
– 82 ps/nm/km at 1550 nm with a dispersion
2
Effective area at 1550 nm is 32 μm .
334
OPTICAL FIBER
References
[1] G. P. Agrawal, "Applications of nonlinear fiber optics", Academic press, 3rd edition, 2001.
[2] G. P. Agrawal, "Nonlinear fiber optics", Academic press, 3rd edition, 2001.
[3] W. H. Press, et al., "Numerical Recipes: The Art of Scientific Computing", 2nd Edition,
Cambridge University Press, 1992.
[4] M. Lax, J. H. Batteh and G. P. Agrawal, Journ. Appl. Phys. 52 , 109, (1981).
[5] F. Matera and M. Settembre, Journ. Lightwave Technol. 14, 1 (1996).
[6] R. W. Hellwarth, Prog. Quant. Electr. 5, 1 (1977).
[7] E. A. Golovchenko and A. N. Pilipetskii, JOSA B, 11, 92 (1994).
[8] P. T. Dinda, G. Millot, and S. Wabnitz JOSA B, 15, 1433 (1998).
[9] C. R. Menyuk, Opt. Lett., 12, p. 614 (1987).
[10] C. R. Menyuk, JOSA B, 5, p. 392(1988).
[11] D. Marcuse, C. R. Menyuk and P. K. A. Wai JLT, vol. 15, No. 9, pp. 1735 (1997).
[12] C. H. Prola Jr., J. A. Pereira da Silva, A. O. Dal Forno, R. Passy, J. P. Von der Weid, and N.
Gisin IEEE Phot. Technol. Letters, 9, No. 6, 842 (1997).
[13] P. K. A. Wai, C. R. Menyuk, and H. H. Chen , Opt. Lett. 16 1231 (1991).
[14] L. G. Cohen, Journ. Lightwave Technol. 3, 958, (1985).
[15] M. I. Hayee and A. E. Willner, IEEE Phot. Technol. Lett. 11, No. 8, (1999).
[16] D. Marcuse, A. R. Chraplyvy, and R. W. Tkach, Journ. Lightwave Technol, 9, 121 (1991).
[17] R. W. Tkach, A. R. Chraplyvy, F. Forghieri, A. H. Gnauck, and R. M. Derosier, Journ. Lightwave
Technol, 13, 841 (1995).
[18] P. Tchofo Dinda, G. Millot, and S. Wabnitz, JOSA B, 15, 1433, (1998).
[19] R.H.Stolen, J.P.Gordon, W.J. Tomlinson and H.A. Haus, JOSA B, 6, 1159 (1989).
[20] C.R.Menyuk, M.N.Islam and J.P.Gordon, Optics Letters, 16 566, (1991).
[21] K.J. Blow and D. Wood, IEEE J. Quant. Electr., 25, 2665, (1989).
[22] O. Sinkin, R. Holzlohner, J. Zweck and C. R. Menyuk, Journ Lightwave Technol. 21, 61 (2003).
335
OPTICAL FIBER
Notes:
336
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM
Optical fiber CWDM
The component simulates the propagation of arbitrary configuration of optical signals

in a single-mode fiber. Dispersive - first and second order group velocity dispersion
(GVD) effects - and non- self-phase modulation (SPM), cross-phase modulation
(XPM) and stimulated Raman scattering (SRS) effects - are taken into account. The
evolution of each sampled signal is governed by a modified nonlinear Schrödinger
(NLS) equation (when the signal is assumed to maintain its state of polarizing) or a
system of two, coupled NLS equations (arbitrary polarization state of the signal).
Raman interaction for an arbitrary configuration of sampled and parameterized

signals is also considered. Noise bins also participate in the SRS effects, however
their power is assumed much smaller than that of the parameterized and sampled
signals, which means that the SRS interaction between noise bins and
parameterized/sampled signals is considered as a pump-probe interaction. The
component provides most of the functionality of the total field approach fiber model
(excepting the simulation of the Raman effect in birefringent fibers) while at the same
time, it can handle different signal representation to give more flexibility and speed up
the calculations.
Ports

Input Input Optical
337
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM
Parameters
Main
Name and description Symbol Default Units Value

value range
Merge sample bands — False — False, True
If TRUE all the sampled signals will be re-sampled

and a single frequency band confining all the
sampled signals will be formed. As a result the
"Total field approach" (see the technical
description of the total field fiber model for the
details) will be implemented in the simulation. This
will include the effects of four-wave mixing in the
simulation and, besides the SRS effect will be
represented through the convolution integral of
the Raman response function and the field
intensity. If FALSE all the channels will be treated
separately - FWM effects will be disabled and
SRS effects will be approximated through inter
band Raman scattering [1, 2].
User defined reference wavelength — True — True, False
If TRUE the frequency corresponding to the value

entered under "Reference wavelength" is used
internally as reference frequency.. The system of
modified NLS equations governing the evolution
of the signals is solved in a frame moving with the
group velocity corresponding to that frequency. If
FALSE the value of the reference frequency is
calculated as the averaged of the central
frequencies of all the sampled and parameterized
signals.
The value of the user specified reference

wavelength.
Length L 50 km [0, 100 000]
Fiber length
Attenuation effect — True — True, False

If TRUE the attenuation effect is enabled, and vice
versa.
Attenuation data type — Constant — Constant, From

File
Defines if the attenuation value will be read from
the "Attenuation" tab or from a file. If "Constant"
the value specified in the "attenuation" tab will be
used for all sampled, parameterized signals and
noise bins. If "From file" a separate value will be
calculated for each noise bin, parameterized or
sampled signal by interpolating the data file.
338
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM

value range
The specified value will be used for all signals if

"Attenuation data type" is set to "Constant". If
"Attenuation data type" is set to "From file" the
value will be ignored.
Attenuation vs wavelength — — — —
If "Attenuation data type" is set to "From file" this
field specifies the file containing the attenuation
data. In this case the attenuation effect is
wavelength dependent for all types of signals -
values corresponding to the central frequency of
each signal will be calculated by linear
interpolation and used internally.
Dispersion

value range
Group velocity dispersion — True — True, False
If TRUE the GVD effect is enabled.
Third order dispersion — True — True, False
If TRUE the TOD effect is enabled.
Dispersion data type — False — True, False
Defines if the dispersion parameter values will be

read from the tabs or from a file. If "Constant" the
values from the tabs will be used to calculate the
relative group delay, and first order GVD for each
sampled signal by Taylor expansion around the
reference wavelength. Otherwise (parameter set
to "From file") group delay, first- and second order
GVD parameters corresponding to each sampled
signal will be calculated from the user-specified
file by Sellmeier fitting. While "Frequency domain
parameters" is TRUE, "Dispersion data type" will
remain "Constant" and cannot be changed. This is
done since the only acceptable format for the file
specifying the dispersion is group delay vs.
wavelength.
Frequency domain parameters — Constant — Constant /

FromFile
Defines the domain in which the dispersion
parameters are specified. If TRUE frequency
domain is used and the dispersion effect is
specified in terms of Beta2 and Beta3. Otherwise
the wavelength domain is used (D and S). This
parameter is meaningful (and, hence, enabled)
only if "Dispersion data type" is set to "Constant".
339
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM

value range
Dispersion β2 -20 2 [-10100, 10100]
ps
--------
The value of the GVD parameter in the
wavelength domain. km
Dispersion slope β3 0 3 [-10100, 10100]
ps
The value of the dispersion slope parameter in the --------
wavelength. km
Beta 2 D 16.75 [-10100, 10100]
ps -
The value of the GVD parameter in the frequency ------------------------
domain. ( nm ) ( km )
Beta 3 0.075 ps - [-10100, 10100]
--------------------------
The value of the TOD parameter in the frequency 2
domain. ( nm ) ( km )
Dispersion file name — — — —
Specifies the file with the dispersion data.
PMD
The notation "Frequency domain parameters" refers to the alternative definitions
∂β 1 ∂D
D = ---------, S = ------- (wavelength domain definition) and
∂λ ∂λ
∂β 1 ∂β 2
β 2 = ---------, β 3 = --------- (frequency domain definition).
∂ω ∂ω
However, the format of the file specifying the wavelength dependence of the
dispersion is the following: the first column of the file contains wavelength values (λ) ,
and the second column, the corresponding values of β 1 ( λ ) . Consequently,
"Frequency domain parameters" is meaningless when the dispersion is specified
from a file.

value range
Birefringence type — Deterministic — Deterministic
/Stochastic
Determines the type of birefringence. If
"Deterministic" is selected both the strength of
birefringence and principal axes are assumed
constant, hence random mode coupling is
disabled. If "Stochastic" is selected the random
mode coupling is enabled.
340
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM

value range
Differential group delay 0.2 [-10100, 10100]
d- ps-
If "Birefringence type" is set to "Deterministic" this ------ ( Δβ ) ------
is the value of the differential group delay. If dω km
"Birefringence type" is set to "Stochastic" the
parameter is disabled.
PMD Coefficient 0.5 [0, 10100]

Dp
ps -
----------
km
Mean scattering section length 500 [0, 10100]
L scatt
The averaged value of the fiber length at which m
the polarization state of the signal is randomized
by applying the scattering matrix.
Scattering section dispersion [0, 10100]

σ scatt 100
The dispersion of the scattering section length. m
In the case when more than one sampled signal (separated channels) is propagating
in the fiber, the PMD-induced penalties will be the same for all channels. Different
penalties (and Q-factors) will be obtained if all the channels are merged (total field
approach). Birefringence and random mode coupling does not affect parameterized
signals and noise bins.
Nonlinearities

value range
Self-phase modulation — True — True, False
Determines if the self-phase modulation (SPM) effect

will be taken into account. If FALSE, all the nonlinear
effects - XPM, SRS - will be disabled.
Cross-phase modulation — True — True, False
Determines if the XPM effects are taken into account.

The parameter is active provided that the SPM effects
are enabled. In the scalar case XPM includes the
interactions among all parameterized and sampled
signals. In the vector case only interactions between
sampled signals are considered and the XPM
between orthogonal polarization components is also
included.
341
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM

value range
Effective area data type — Constant — Constant/
FromFile
Defines if the effective area parameter value will be
read from the tab or from a file. If "Constant" the value
from the tab will be used. Otherwise the parameter is
treated as wavelength dependent and a separate
value corresponding to the center frequency of each
sampled signal, parameterized signal and noise bin is
calculated and used.
Effective area 80 [0, 1010]

A eff μm
2
The value of the effective area parameter. This value
will be used if "Effective area data type" is set to
"Constant". Otherwise the value will be ignored.
Effective area vs wavelength — — — —
If the "Effective area data type" is set to "From file"

then this tab specifies the file containing the effective
area data.
n2 data type — — — Constant/

FromFile
Defines if the n2 parameter (nonlinear index of
refraction) value will be read from the tab or from a
file. If "Constant" the value from the tab will be used.
n2 2.6x10-20 2 [0, 10100]

n2 m
The value of the n2 parameter. If "n2 data type" is set ------
to "Constant" this value will be used. Otherwise it will
W
be ignored.
n2 vs wavelength — — — —
If the "n2 data type" is set to "From file" then this tab
specifies the file containing the nonlinear index of
refraction wavelength data.
Inter-band Raman scattering — False — True/False
One of the two possible alternative representations of

the SRS effect in the model that leads to energy
exchange between different frequency bands.
Interactions among all sampled signals,
parameterized signals and noise bins are considered.
Noise bins are treated as a weak probe with respect
to the sampled signals and parameterized signals -
the latter are treated as pumps. Inter-band Raman
scattering [1-7] is an approximation to the full
expression of the Raman polarization valid provided
that the frequency separation of the interacting
signals is much larger than their individual spectral
bandwidths. SRS effect can be enabled only in the
scalar case (fixed polarization state, "Model type"
from the numerical tab should be set to "Scalar" to
enable SRS). If this representation for the SRS effect
is used the model runs faster.
342
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM

value range
Complete Raman response — False — True/False
The other alternative representations for the SRS

effect, leading to coupling of signals occupying
different frequency bands. In this case no assumption
about the ratio between the bandwidth of the sampled
signals and their frequency separation is made.
Convolution integrals are calculated to represent the
interaction of sampled signals with sampled signals,
with noise bins and parameterized signals and vice
versa. This is a more accurate description however
the speed of the calculations in this case is lower. The
interaction of noise bins with parameterized signals is
always represented through inter-band Raman
scattering i.e. the individual bandwidth of noise bins
and parameterized signals is always considered zero.
The parameter "Complete Raman response" is
responsible only for this part of the Raman
polarization that leads to energy exchange between
different frequency bands. It does not include the
Raman contribution to XPM and SPM. In case only
one sampled signal and zero noise bins and
parameterized signals propagate in the fiber, the two
alternative descriptions of the SRS effect become
completely equivalent. This is the case when the
model works in the "Total filed approach" mode.
However if "Complete Raman response" is selected,
the "Molecular SPM and XPM" should be set to TRUE
to achieve this equivalence while this is done
automatically if "Inter-band Raman scattering" is
selected to represent the SRS effect and only one
sampled signal propagates in the fiber. Both
parameters "Molecular XPM and SPM" and
"Complete Raman response" are enabled if "Model
type" is set to Scalar.
Molecular XPM and SPM — False True/False
The contribution to SPM and XPM stemming from the

delayed (Raman) nonlinear response. This effect is
meaningful for sampled signals only, since no phase
is considered for Noise bins and Parameterized
signals. In the presence of one sampled signal only
molecular XPM is zero and the effect is reduced to
molecular SPM. Molecular SPM might me important
(and should not be neglected) despite that the energy
transfer between different frequency components of
the only sampled band present due to SRS is
negligible. The parameter "Molecular XPM and SPM"
is disabled if "Inter-band Raman scattering" is
selected to represent the SRS, since the delayed part
of the SPM and XPM is automatically included in this
case. Both parameters "Molecular XPM and SPM"
and "Complete Raman response" are enabled if
"Model type" is set to Scalar.
343
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM

value range
Fractional Raman contribution 0.18 — [0,1]
The fraction of the nonlinear polarization, related to ρ

the stimulated Raman scattering effect [1].
Numerical

value range
Model type — Scalar — Scalar/Vector
Defines the model type used for the simulation
depending on the polarization state of the signal. If
"Vector" is selected the signal can have arbitrary
polarization state and a system of two coupled
equations, corresponding to each polarization
component (x or y) of every sampled signal is solved.
If "Scalar" is selected it means that all the signals
preserve their polarization state and a single equation
(1) is solved for each sampled band. Vector simulation
will be performed, regardless of the value of the model
type parameter, in the following two cases1)Two
polarization components are detected at the fiber
input. This will work for sampled noise, since the noise
is unpolarized and x- and y-polarization components
are stored independently in the memory. Sampled
signals with well defined polarization state however
might use a different method of storage in the memory
and, consequently, this parameter should be set to
"Vector" manually if the polarization evolution is to be
considered. 2)The PMD effect is set to
stochastic.Turning the "vector" on will disable SRS.
Step size — Variable — Variable/

Constant
Specifies whether variable or fixed step-size
simulation will be used. If "Variable" is selected the
step size is adaptively changed depending on the
value of the "Max. nonlinear phase shift" parameter
and the behavior of solutions itself. Otherwise the step
size is evaluated only once, at the beginning of the
simulation. In some cases the fixed step size
calculation executes faster, due to the smaller number
of calculations per step, but the variable step size
calculation is more flexible and can be faster in the
presence of strong attenuation.
344
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM

value range
Max. nonlinear phase shift NL 3 [0,10100]
ϕ max mrad
Maximum (over the time window) phase shift induced
by the self-phase modulation effect per step is
calculated for each sampled signal. SPM induced
phase shifts are then calculated for each
parameterized signal. Then the step size is calculated
in such a way that the maximum (over the entire set of
signals) SPM-induced phase shift is equal to the
specified value.
Boundary conditions — Periodic — Periodic/

Absorbing
Specifies the type of boundary conditions used for the
simulation.
Filter steepness — 0.5 — [0,10100]
In case "Boundary conditions" option is set to

"Absorbing" the "Filter steepness" parameter
determines the absorption/reflection properties of the
time window boundaries. The same absorbing
boundary conditions are used for all sampled signals.
Graphs.

value range
Calculate graphs — False — True/False
Enable / disable the 3D graphs. If disabled, no graphs

will be plotted and no data is stored. Graphs are
plotted for sampled signals only.
Number of distance steps — 200 — [1, 100000000]

The number of longitudinal (or in z) snapshots (slices)
that will be used to construct a 3D plot. Increasing this
value will make the 3D graph to look better. The
number of snapshots that are stored cannot be bigger
than the number of steps in z taken by the simulation
to obtain the solution. The latter is determined by the
maximum nonlinear phase-shift parameter (numerical
tab).
Number of wavelength/time steps — 200 — [1, 100000000]
The number of stored points (in t) per snapshot.

Increasing this value will make the 3D graph to look
better.
Linear scale — False — True/False
Determines the axis-type (linear or logarithmic) for the

dependent variable. If TRUE the axis type is linear.
345
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM

value range
The next six parameters in this tab
determine which graphs will be plotted after
the simulation is finished.
Plot type — Wavelength — Wavelength

range range/One
Determines the type of the plot that will be created in
sampled signal
either frequency or time domain. If the parameter is
set to "Wavelength range" than a copy of each
sampled signal residing in the specified wavelength
range will be created, this copies will be up-sampled
and merged in a single frequency band. This single
frequency band, containing all the signals will be
plotted in either frequency or time domain. The
merging does not affect the signals but their copies
only, so multiple sampled signals will be involved in
the simulation. If the parameter is set to "Plot one
sampled signal" a 3D graph presenting the sampled
signal with central frequency given by "Signal center
frequency" will be created.
Simulation

value range
Enabled — True — True/False
Determines whether the component is enabled. If

FALSE, all the input signals reach the output port of the
component without any change.
Noise

value range
Convert noise bins — False — True/False
If TRUE each noise bin within the bandwidth of the

signal will be converted to a Gaussian white noise,
with the correct power spectral density, and this noise
will be added to the signal.
346
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM
Random numbers

value range
Generate random seed — False — True/False
Determines how the random number generator is

initialized (seeded). If TRUE the seed index used for
this initialization is a random number itself. Otherwise
user specified number is used for this purpose.
Random seed index — 0 — [0, 4999]

If "Generate random seed" is set to TRUE this value
random sequence is one and same provided the seed
index is not changed. The value of "Random seed
index" will be ignored if "Generate random seed" is set
to TRUE.
Scalar approach
Signal propagation equations with Inter-band Raman scattering
When the optical field is assumed to maintain its polarization along the fiber length (so
called scalar approach, Model type parameter from the "Numerical" tab is set to
"Scalar") the evolution of the slowly varying electric field envelopes { E i } of a set of
sampled signals (SS), powers { P l } of another set of parameterized signals (PS) and
powers { N m } of a third set of noise bins (NB) is governed by the set (1) of equations.
The subsystem (1a) consists of Number of SS (the total count of sampled signals)
coupled nonlinear Schrödinger (NLS) [1], [2], (1b) contains Number of PS equations
(the total count of PS) and (1c) - Number of NB (the total count of NB) equations.
347
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM
2 3
∂E i ∂E iβ 2 ( ω i ) ∂ E i β 3 ( ω i ) ∂ E i
-------- + ( β l ( ω i ) – β l ( ω 0 ) ) --------i + α ( ω i )E i + -----------------
- ---------- – ---------------- ---------- =
∂z ∂T 2 ∂T
2 6 ∂T 3
Number of SS Number of PS
2 2
∑ ∑
(1a)
(2 – ρ) Ek – ( 1 – ρ ) Ei + ( 2 – ρ ) +
iγ i k=1 l=1 Ei
( SS ) 2 ( PS )
ρ ∑ R ik Ek + ρ ∑ R il Pl
k=1 l=1
⎛ Number of PS ⎞
⎜ ( PP ) ⎟
⎜ ∑ Rlh Ph + ⎟
dP l ⎜ h=1 ⎟ (1b)
-------- = – 2α l P l + 2ργ l P l Im ⎜ ⎟
dz ⎜ Number of SS Time window
⎟
1
⎜ -------------------------------- ( SP ) 2 ⎟
⎜ Time window
- ∑ Rli ∫ Ei t dt⎟
⎝ i=l 0 ⎠
⎛ Number of PS ⎞
⎜ ( PP ) ⎟
⎜ ∑ Rmh Ph + ⎟
dN m ⎜ h=1 ⎟ (1c)
--------- = – 2α m N m + 2ργ m N m Im ⎜ ⎟
dz ⎜ Number of SS Time window
⎟
1
⎜ --------------------------------- ( SN ) 2 ⎟
⎜ Time window ∑ R mi ∫ i E t d t
⎟
⎝ i=l 0 ⎠
348
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM
The Raman matrices are defined according to:
⎧
⎪ R
= ⎨ χ 1111 ( f i – f k ), i ≠ k 1 ≤ i ≤ Number of SS, 1 ≤ k ≤ Number of SS
( SS ) (2a)
R ik
⎪ 0, i=k
⎩
⎧ R
( PS ) ⎪ χ ( f – f ), f ≠ f
R il = ⎨ 1111 i l i l 1 ≤ i ≤ Number of SS, 1 ≤ l ≤ Number of PS (2b)
⎪ 0, fi = fl
⎩
⎧
⎪ R
= ⎨ χ 1111 ( f l – f h ), l ≠ h 1 ≤ l ≤ Number of PS, 1 ≤ h ≤ Number of PS
( PP ) (2c)
R lh
⎪ 0, l=h
⎩
⎧ R
( SP ) ⎪ χ ( f – f ), f ≠ f
R li = ⎨ 1111 l i l i 1 ≤ l ≤ Number of PS, 1 ≤ i ≤ Number of SS (2d)
⎪ 0, fl = fi
⎩
⎧ R
( PN ) ⎪ χ ( f – f ), f m ≠ f h
R mh = ⎨ 1111 m h 1 ≤ m ≤ Number of NB, 1 ≤ h ≤ Number of PS (2e)
⎪ 0, fm = fh
⎩
349
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM
⎧ R
( SN ) ⎪ χ ( f – f ), f ≠ f
R mi = ⎨ 1111 m i m i 1 ≤ m ≤ Number of NB, 1 ≤ h ≤ Number of SS (2f)
⎪ 0, fm = fi
⎩
Raman susceptibility for fused quartz is shown in Figure 1. It should be noted that
R R ∗
χ 1111 ( – ω ) = ( χ 1111 ( ω ) ) , where "*" means complex conjugation.
Figure 1 Raman susceptibilities for fused silica [3, 4]
In Equation (1a), E i = E i ( z, T ) is the electric field envelope of the i -th sampled

signal. A frame moving at the group velocity ( T = t – z ⁄ v g ≡ t – β 1 ( ω 0 )z )
corresponding to the reference frequency ω 0 is assumed.
The reference frequency is related to the parameter "Reference wavelength" ("Main"

category of the component tool-box) through
2πc
ω 0 = --------- with c being the light speed in vacuum.
λ0
The derivatives of the propagation constant of the fiber mode β ( ω ) ( ( β ( ω )c ) ⁄ ω
is the mode effective index).
n
∂ β(ω)
With respect to frequency, β n = ------------------ n = 1, 2
n
∂ω
are the first ( β 2 ) and second order ( β 3 ) group velocity dispersion (GVD) parameters
and are evaluated at the center frequencies { ω i } of the sampled signals.
350
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM
The nonlinear coefficients for every SS, NB, or PS in (1) are defined according to:
ωj n2 ( ωj )
γ j = ---------------------- (3)
cA eff ( ω j )
The meaning of the terms on the left-hand side of the subsystem (1a) is the same as
in the total field approach fiber model (see the technical description of this
component). The first two terms in the right hand side of (1a) give the SPM and XPM
contributions of the remaining sampled signals. The third term is the XPM contribution
of the PS. The fourth and the fifth term describe the SRS induced interactions
between the i -th sampled signal and rest of the sampled signals and with the
parameterized signals, respectively.
Subsystems (1b) and (1c) describe the power balance of the set of PS and NB
respectively. These are obtained by replacing the NLS equations for NB and PS with
the time-averaged versions of their power conservation laws. In the absence of
attenuation the total number of photons is conserved as (1) shows. The first terms in
the right-hand sides of (1b) and (1c) take into account the attenuation effects. The
second and the third terms in the right-hand side of (1b) describe the SRS induced
power transfer between the l -th PS and the rest of the PS and between the l -th PS
and the SS respectively. The second and the third terms in the right-hand side of (1c)
are responsible for the SRS-induced interactions between noise bins and PS and
noise bins and SS. Note that in describing the interactions through SRS between NB
and SS and NB and PS the power of the noise bins is neglected with respect to that
of PS and SS - i.e. all the NB are treated as a weak "probe". They change their power
due to the interactions with SS and PS, however the amount of power transferred from
SS and PS to NB is neglected with respect to the power of SS and NB. This
approximation is valid, provided the power of NB remains much smaller compared to
that of SS and NB. With multiple SS present in the fiber the SRS effect is represented
through inter-band Raman scattering. This is an approximation to the full expression
for the Raman polarization [1],[2] that is valid provided that the frequency separation
between the interacting signals is large enough compared to their individual
bandwidths.
In the opposite case (frequency separation between the signals comparable with their
individual spectral bandwidth) total field approach can be implemented by turning on
the option "Merge sampled bands". In this case the system (1a) is replaced by the
following single NLS Equation 4 and (1b) and (1c) remain unchanged. In Equation 4,
the Raman response function h 1111 ( t ) is the Fourier transform of the Raman
susceptibilities shown in Figure 1. Total field approach however should be used with
some care. At first, in this case, (single sampled band) XPM and four wave mixing
351
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM
effects are included automatically in the simulation and turning on or off the "XPM"
parameter in the "Nonlinearities" tab will have no effect on the results.
2
∂E iβ 2 ( ω 0 ) ∂ E i β 3 ( ω 0 ) ∂ 3 E
------ + αE + ------------------
- ---------- – ----------------- --------- =
∂z 2 ∂T
2 6 ∂T 3
⎛ ∞ ⎞
⎜(1 – ρ) E + ρ h
2 2
+⎟⎟
⎜ ∫ 1111 ( s ) E ( T – τ ) ds (4)
⎜ 0 ⎟
iγ ⎜ ⎟E
Number of PS
⎜ ⎟
⎜ ( PS ) ⎟
⎜
+ρ ∑ R 1l Pl ⎟
⎝ l=1 ⎠
Figure 2
352
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM
Figure 3 Total field approach implemented with improper choice of sample rate. The output probe power is
0.931 mW.
Figure 4 The correct result is obtained when the bandwidth is high enough. Output probe power is
1.377mW. The slight difference in the output probe power could be attributed to FWM.
The following example shows the importance of the proper choice of numerical
parameters. Figure 2 shows the layout. The input consists of a strong (1 W power)
pump wave at 193 THz and a weak (1 mW) probe wave at 192.5 THz. "Merge
sampled bands" parameter of the optical fiber component is enabled, which means
that total field approach will be used. Attenuation effect is disabled and we use
"Constant" step size with the "Maximum nonlinear phase shift" parameter equal to
5 mrad. Raman effect is enabled The rest of the set-up of the optical fiber component
is the default one. Since total field approach will be used enabling or disabling the
"XPM" parameter will have no effect on the results.
Figure 3 and Figure 4 show the obtained results together with the global parameters
of the layout in each case. Figure 5 gives the result treating the two waves as
separated channels - "Merge sampled bands" parameter is set to FALSE in the optical
fiber component. In the case presented in Figure 3 the simulated bandwidth is too
353
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM
small to accommodate the FWM mixing products of both waves and hence they are
aliased (see e.g. [8]). This false translation of the frequency of the wave (known as
aliasing) can put the a weak FWM product in the closed spectral vicinity of the pump
which will trigger a strong FWM (or modulation instability since the signal wavelengths
are in the anomalous GVD regime, which is also a kind of FWM) if the frequency
separation is small, and consequently, the coherence length is large. The result is an
entirely unphysical generation of new frequency components. Note that probe
attenuation is obtained instead of probe amplification. Figure 4 gives the correct result
since no aliasing occurs. This is achieved by having the simulated bandwidth (or
equivalently the sample rate) high enough to accommodate the three times the input
signal bandwidth.
Figure 5 Simulation in which both signals are treated as separated channels. Output probe power is
1.371 mW.
A comparison with Figure 5 (obtained treating the pump and the probe wave as two
separate sampled bands) which gives the same output power for the probe wave as
the total field approach with the sample rate correctly chosen shows that in this case
FWM effects are quite small. Besides, treating the signals as separate frequency
bands leads a significant reduction of the simulation time.
It should be kept in mind however that while in the case of total field approach, all the
parameters (dispersion, attenuation, etc.) are evaluated just once - at the reference
frequency, here (when multiple SS are considered) a set of parameters is evaluated
for each sampled signal - at the center frequency of the corresponding signal. The
meaning of the reference frequency (and reference wavelength) is the following: The
subsystem (1a) is written in a frame moving with group velocity corresponding to the
reference wavelength - no other signal parameters are evaluated at this frequency.
The reference wavelength can be either user-specified or "automatic", which
corresponds to the averaged frequency of the center frequencies of all SS and PS.
354
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM
If "Dispersion data type" is set to "Constant" the dispersion parameters specified in

the tabs (D and S) or, respectively, β 2 and β 3 , are assumed to correspond to the
reference wavelength. Hence, Taylor expansion is used in this case:
1 2 (5)
β 1 ( ω ) – β 1 ( ω 0 ) = β 2 ( ω 0 ) ( ω – ω 0 ) + --- β 3 ( ω 0 ) ( ω – ω 0 )
2
Evaluating Equation 5 and its first and second derivatives with respect to ω at the
signal frequencies { ω 1 } gives the sets of parameters:
{ β 2 ( ω 1 ) – β 1 ( ω 0 ) }, { β 2 ( ω i ) } and { β 3 ( ω i ) } .
It should be kept in mind however that with multiple sampled signals present,
specifying nonzero β 2 and β 3 (or D and S) and disabling in the same time the
"Group velocity dispersion" and "Third order dispersion" will result in
{ β 2 ( ω i ) = 0, ∀i }, { β 3 ( ω i ) = 0, ∀i } , but { β 1 ( ω i ) ≠ β 1 ( ω j ), if i ≠ j } ,
which means that no GVD induced pulse broadening will be observed but pulses with
different center frequencies will propagate with different group velocities. In contrary,
if all the sampled signals are merged to form a single frequency band disabling the
GVD effects will not only disable pulse broadening, but also will set the group velocity
constant for the entire sampled band considered.
If "Dispersion data type" is set to "From file" the data set specified by the file is
Sellmeier fitted than dispersion parameters are calculated by analytically
differentiating the fit. The file specifying the dispersion data must provide the
dependence of group delay [ps/km] on the wavelength [nm]. For this reason
"Frequency domain parameters" is disabled when "Dispersion data type" is set to
"From file".
355
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM
Signal propagation equations with "Complete Raman response"

When the SRS effect is represented through "Complete Raman response" the system
(1) is replaced by:
2 3
∂E i ∂E iβ 2 ( ω i ) ∂ E i β 3 ( ω i ) ∂ E i
-------- + ( β l ( ω i ) – β l ( ω 0 ) ) --------i + α ( ω i )E i + -----------------
- ---------- – ---------------- ---------- =
∂z ∂T 2 ∂T
2 6 ∂T 3
2 2
i (2 – ρ) ∑ Ek – ( 1 – ρ ) Ei + ( 2 – ρ ) ∑ Pl Ei
k=1 l=1
Number of SS ∞
– i ( ω i – ω k )τ
+ iγ i ρ ∑ E k ( T ) ∫ h 1111 ( τ )E i ( T – τ )E k∗ ( T – τ )e dτ (6a)
k = 1, k ≠ i 0
Number of PS ∞
– i ( ω i – ω l )τ
+ iγ i ρ ∑ ∫ h1111 ( τ )Ei ( T – τ )e dτ
l=1 0
∞ Number of SS
2
+ iγ i ρE i ( T ) ∫ h 1111 ( τ ) ∑ E k ( T – τ ) dτ
0 k=1
dP l ⎛ Number of PS ⎞
-------- = – 2α l P l + 2ργ l P l Im ⎜ ∑ R
( PP ) ⎟
P h⎟ +
dz ⎜ lh
⎝ h=1 ⎠
(6b)
Number of SS T.W. ⎧ ∞ ∗⎫
2ργ l P l ⎪ – i ( ω i – ω l )τ ⎪
---------------
T.W.
- ∑ ∫ Im ⎨ E i ( t )
⎪
∫ h1111 ( τ )Ei ( t – τ ) ( e dτ ) ⎬dt
⎪
i=1 0 ⎩ 0 ⎭
356
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM
dN m ⎛ Number of PS ⎞
---------- = – 2α m N m + 2ργ m N m Im ⎜ ( PN ) ⎟
∑ Rmh Ph⎟ +
dz ⎜
⎝ h=1 ⎠
(6c)
Number of SS T.W. ⎧ ∞ ∗⎫
2ργ m N m ⎪ – i ( ω i – ω m )τ ⎪
--------------------
T.W. ∑ ∫ Im ⎨⎪ Ei ( t ) ∫ h1111 ( τ )Ei ( t – τ ) ( e dτ ) ⎬dt
⎪
i=1 0 ⎩ 0 ⎭
In Equation (6), the time window size is denoted by T.W., and the star symbol means
complex conjugation. The first three terms in the R.H.S of Equation (6a) are the SPM
and XPM caused by the rest of the sampled signals and the parameterized signals on
the i -th sampled signal. The fourth term is responsible for the SRS induced energy
exchange between the i -th sampled signal and all the other sampled signals. The
fifth term takes into account the energy exchange between the i -th sampled signal
and all the parameterized signals. The last (sixth) term describes the SPM and XPM
stemming from the delayed nonlinear response of the material. This effects can be
turned on and off by the "Molecular SPM and XPM" parameter. The fourth and fifth
terms (responsible for the SRS induced energy exchange between the sampled
signals and the parameterized signals, respectively, are simultaneously switched on
by setting the "Complete Raman response" parameter to TRUE.
The sets contained in Equations (6b) and (6c) describe the evolution with propagation
of the parameterized signals powers and noise bins powers respectively. The physical
meaning of the terms in the RHS of Equations (6b) and (6c) is the following: The first
terms take into account the attenuation. The second terms describe the energy
exchange with parameterized signals due to SRS effect. These two terms are
included in the simulation by switching on the "Complete Raman response"
parameter. The last terms in the sets of Equations (6b) and (6c) describe the
interaction of parameterized signals with sampled signals and of that of noise bins
with sampled signals respectively.
{ E i } do not change significantly over the characteristic

In case the field envelopes
Raman response time of the medium, E i ( t – τ ) can be replaced with E i ( t ) in the
integrands in Equations (6a), (6b) and (6c).
Using
∞
– i 〈 ω i – ω m〉 τ
h 1111 ( ω i – ω m ) = ∫ h1111 ( τ )e dτ ,
0
the set of Equations (6) reduces to its simplified version, the set of Equations (1).
357
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM
Vector approach
Signal propagation equations
When the polarization state of the incident sampled signals is not preserved during its
propagation inside the optical fiber the scalar approach is no longer applicable and (1)
is replaced by ("Model type" parameter must set to "Vector").
2
∂E iX ∂E iX iβ 2 ( ω i ) ∂ E iX _
----------- + ( β 1X ( ω i ) – β 1 ( ω 0 ) ) ----------
- + α ( ω i )E iX + -----------------
- -------------
∂z ∂T 2 ∂T
2
(7a)
Number of SS Number of SS
β 3 ( ω i ) ∂ 3 E iX 2 2 2 2
6
- ------------- = iγ i 2
---------------
∂T
3 ∑ E kX – E iX + ---
3 ∑ E kY E iX
k=1 k=1
2
∂E iY ∂E iY iβ 2 ( ω i ) ∂ E iY _
- + ( β 1Y ( ω i ) – β 1 ( ω 0 ) ) ----------
---------- - + α ( ω i )E iY + -----------------
- -------------
∂z ∂T 2 ∂T
2
(7b)
3 Number of SS Number of SS
β 3 ( ω i ) ∂ E iY 2 2 2 2
---------------
6
- ------------- = iγ i 2
∂T
3 ∑ E kY – E iY + ---
3 ∑ E kX E iY
k=1 k=1
SRS is disabled automatically when the vector model is selected and noise bins and
PS are just attenuated. The nonlinear terms in (7a) and (7b) contain SPM, XPM
between parallel polarization components, and XPM between orthogonal polarization
components. If the parameter "XPM" is set to TRUE, both XPM contributions
(between parallel and between orthogonal polarization components) will be included.
If "XPM" is set to FALSE, only the nonlinear contributions of SPM will included in the
model. Note that the group delays are different for the two polarization components of
the same sampled band which takes into account the birefringence. The birefringence
can be two types: "Deterministic" and "Stochastic". In the first case, the birefringence
is assumed constant and no energy exchange between the two polarization
components occurs. In the second case, ("Stochastic" birefringence) random mode
coupling is also enabled, which gives the possibility to simulate PMD (see the
technical description of Nonlinear Dispersive Fiber Total Field for the details of the
358
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM
PMD simulator). It should be kept in mind however that when the signals are
represented as multiple sampled bands PMD impairments will be identical for all
WDM channels. To obtain the frequency dependence of the penalties (or Q-factors)
total field approach must be implemented by setting "Merge sample bands" to true.
Numerical solution
The symmetrized non-iterative split-step Fourier method [1] (see the technical
description of Nonlinear Dispersive Fiber Total Field) is used to solve Equations (1a),
(6a), and (7a, b).
These equations are first rewritten in normalized (dimensionless) quantities in the

following way: The time variable is divided by the time window size. "Averaged" GVD
coefficient is introduced by averaging over the entire set of sampled signals. This
averaged GVD coefficient and the actual time window size are then used to define the
characteristic dispersion length [1] and this value normalizes the longitudinal variable
(z). The maximum peak power for SS is determined as the global maximum over the
time window and the entire set of SS. This value is compared with the maximum
power over the set of PS. The quantity that is bigger is used to normalize the
waveforms of the SS and the powers of the PS. The characteristic nonlinear length is
defined by the averaging the nonlinear lengths of all PS and SS.
The solution is advanced from z to z + h . h is the step-size, determined from the

value of the Max. nonlinear phase shift parameter according to:
⎛z + h ⎞
h--- ⎞ h
E ( z + h, T ) = exp D̂ exp ⎜ ∫ N̂ ( z' ) dz'⎟ exp ⎛ --- D̂⎞ E ( z, t )
⎛ (8)
⎝2 ⎠ ⎜ ⎟ ⎝2 ⎠
⎝ z ⎠
where the D̂ is the dispersion and N̂ are the nonlinearity operators [1],[9]. Dispersion
operator is applied in the frequency domain using FFT. The approximation:
z+h
∫
(9)
N̂ ( z' ) dz' ≈ hN̂ ( exp [ ( h ⁄ 2 )D̂ ]E ( z, t ) )
z
359
OPTICAL FIBER CWDM
is used. When the "Step size" parameter is set to "Constant" (7) can be simplified
according to:
⎛z + h ⎞ ⎛z + h ⎞
h--- ⎞ h--- ⎞ h--- ⎞ ⎜ h
E ( z + 2h, t ) = exp ⎝ D̂⎠ exp ⎜ ∫ N̂ ( z' ) dz'⎟ exp ⎝ D̂⎠ exp ⎝ D̂⎠ ⎜ ∫ N̂ ( z' ) dz'⎟⎟ exp ⎛⎝ --- D̂⎞⎠ E ( z, t ) =
⎛ ⎜ ⎟ ⎛ ⎛
2 2 2 2
⎝ z ⎠ ⎝ z ⎠
(10)
z+h z+h
⎛ ⎞ ⎛ ⎞
h h
exp ⎛⎝ --- D̂⎞⎠ exp ⎜⎜ ∫ N̂ ( z' ) dz'⎟ exp ( hD̂ ) exp ⎜ ∫ N̂ ( z' ) dz'⎟⎟ exp ⎛⎝ --- D̂⎞⎠ E ( z, t )
2 ⎟ ⎜ 2
⎝ z ⎠ ⎝ z ⎠
which is executed faster. In the presence of attenuation, however, the role of

nonlinearity will decrease along the fiber length and "Variable" step size will be
advantageous.
When the system (6) is solved (the parameter "Complete Raman response" is set to
TRUE), the second order Runge-Kutta scheme is used to apply the nonlinearity
operator.
References
[5] R.H.Stolen, J.P.Gordon, W.J. Tomlinson and H.A. Haus, JOSA B, 6, 1159 (1989).
[7] K.J. Blow and D. Wood, IEEE J. Quant. Electr., 25, 2665, (1989).
[9] M. Lax, J. H. Batteh and G. P. Agrawal, Journ. Appl. Phys. 52 , 109, (1981).
360
BIDIRECTIONAL OPTICAL FIBER
Bidirectional Optical Fiber
The component simulates the bidirectional propagation of arbitrary configuration of

optical signals in a single-mode fiber. Dispersive and nonlinear - self-phase
modulation (SPM), cross-phase modulation (XPM), stimulated Raman (SRS) and
Brillouin (SBS) scattering effects - are taken into account.
Raman interaction for an arbitrary configuration of sampled and parameterized

signals is also considered. The component provides most of the functionality of the
total field approach fiber model (except for the simulation of the Raman effect in
birefringent fibers). The four-wave mixing effect between multiple sampled signals is
not considered.
361
Ports

Input1 Input Optical
Parameters
Main
Name and description Symbol Default value Units Value range

User-defined reference True [True, False]
wavelength
If True, the frequency corresponding to
the value entered under "Reference
wavelength" is used internally as
reference frequency. The system of
modified NLS equations governing the
evolution of the signals is solved in a
frame moving with the group velocity
corresponding to that frequency. If
False, the value of the reference
frequency is calculated as the averaged
of the central frequencies of all the
sampled and parameterized signals.
The value of the user-specified

reference wavelength
Length L 50 km [0, 100000]
Fiber length
Attenuation effect True [True, False]
If True, the attenuation effect is enabled
Attenuation data type Constant [Constant, From

file]
Defines if the attenuation value will be
read from the "Attenuation" tab or from a
file. If "Constant", the value specified in
the "attenuation" tab will be used for all
sampled, parameterized signals and
noise bins. If "From file", a separate
value will be calculated for each noise
bin, parameterized or sampled signal by
interpolating the data file.
362

The specified value will be used for all

signals if "Attenuation data type" is set to
"Constant". If "Attenuation data type" is
set to "From file", the value will be
ignored.
Attenuation vs. wavelength

If "Attenuation data type" is set to "From
file", this field specifies the file
containing the attenuation data. In this
case the attenuation effect is
wavelength dependent for all types of
signals. Values corresponding to the
central frequency of each signal will be
calculated by linear interpolation and
used internally.
Dispersion

Group velocity dispersion True [True, False]
If True, the GVD effect is enabled
Third order dispersion True [True, False]
If True, the TOD effect is enabled
Dispersion data type Constant [Constant, From

file]
Defines if the dispersion parameter
values will be read from the tabs or from
a file. If "Constant", the values from the
tabs will be used to calculate the relative
group delay and the first-order GVD for
each sampled signal by Taylor
expansion around the reference
wavelength. If the parameter is set to
"From file", the group delay, and the
first- and second-order GVD parameters
corresponding to each sampled signal
will be calculated from the user-
specified file by Sellmeier fitting. When
"Frequency domain parameters" is
True, "Dispersion data type" will remain
"Constant" and cannot be changed. This
is done because the only acceptable
format for the file specifying the
dispersion is group delay vs.
wavelength.
363

Frequency domain parameters False [True, False]
Defines the domain in which the

dispersion parameters are specified. If
True, the frequency domain is used and
the dispersion effect is specified in terms
of β 2 and β 3 . Otherwise the
wavelength domain is used (D and S).
This parameter is meaningful (that is,
enabled) only if "Dispersion data type" is
set to "Constant".
Beta 2 D 16.75 ps/[(nm)(km)] [-10100, 10100]

frequency domain
Beta 3 0.75 ps/[(nm)2(km)] [-10100, 10100]
The value of the TOD parameter in the

frequency domain
Dispersion β2 -20 ps2/km [-10100, 10100]

wavelength domain
Dispersion slope β3 0 ps3/km [-10100, 10100]
The value of the dispersion slope

parameter in the wavelength
Dispersion file name

Specifies the file with the dispersion
data
Note: The notation "Frequency domain parameters" refers to these alternative

definitions:
Wavelength domain definition:

∂β 1 ∂D
D = --------- , S = -------
∂λ ∂λ
Frequency domain definition:
∂β 1 ∂β 2
β 2 = --------- , β 3 = ---------
∂ω ∂ω
However, the format of the file specifying the wavelength dependence of the
dispersion is the following:
• (λ)
the first column of the file contains wavelength values
• the second column contains the corresponding values of ( λ )
Consequently, the "Frequency domain parameters" is meaningless when the

dispersion is specified from a file.
364
PMD

Birefringence type Deterministic [Deterministic,
Stochastic]
Determines the type of birefringence. If
"Deterministic" is selected, both the
strength of birefringence and principal
axes are assumed constant. Therefore,
the random mode coupling is disabled. If
"Stochastic" is selected, the random
mode coupling is enabled.
Differential group delay 0 ps/km [-10100, 10100]

d-
------ ( Δβ )
If "Birefringence type" is set to dω
"Deterministic", this is the value of the
differential group delay. If "Birefringence
type" is set to "Stochastic", the
parameter is disabled.
PMD coefficient DP 0, 5 ps - [0, 10100]

----------
If "Birefringence type" is set to km
"Stochastic", this is the value of the PMD
parameter. If "Birefringence type" is set
to "Deterministic", the parameter is
disabled.
Mean scattering section length L scatt 500 m [0, 10100]
The averaged value of the fiber length at

which the polarization states of the
signal is randomized by applying the
scattering matrix.
Scattering section dispersion σ scatt 100 m [0, 10100]
The dispersion of the scattering section

length
In the case when more than one sampled signal (separated channels) is propagating
in the fiber, the PMD-induced penalties will be the same for all channels.
Different penalties (and Q-factors) will be obtained if all the channels are merged (total
filed approach). Birefringence and random mode coupling do not affect parameterized
signals and noise bins.
Nonlinearities

Self-phase modulation True [True, False]
Determines if the self-phase modulation

(SPM) effect will be taken into account.
If False, all the nonlinear effects (XPM,
SRS) will be disabled.
365

Cross-phase modulation True [True, False]
Determines if the XPM effects are taken

into account. The parameter is active if
the SPM effects are enabled. In the
scalar case, XPM includes the
interactions among all parameterized
and sampled signals. In the vector case,
only interactions between sampled
signals are considered. The XPM
between orthogonal polarization
components is included.
Effective area data type Constant [Constant, From

file]
Defines if the effective area parameter
value will be read from the tab or from a
file. If "Constant", the value from the tab
will be used. Otherwise, the parameter
is treated as wavelength dependent and
a separate value corresponding to the
center frequency of each sampled
signal. The parameterized signal and
noise bin are calculated and used.
Effective area A eff 80 2 [0, 1010]

μm
The value of the effective area
parameter. This value will be used if
"Effective area data type" is set to
"Constant". Otherwise the value will be
ignored.
Effective area vs. wavelength

If the "Effective area data type" is set to
"From file", this tab specifies the file
containing the effective area data.
n2 data type Constant [Constant, From

file]
Defines if the n2 parameter value
(nonlinear index of refraction) will be
read from the tab or from a file. If
"Constant", the value from the tab will be
used.
n2 n2 2.6 x 10-20 m2/W [0, 10100]
The value of the n2 parameter. If "n2

data type" is set to "Constant", this value
will be used. Otherwise it will be ignored.
n2 vs. wavelength
If the "n2 data type" is set to "From file",
this tab specifies the file containing the
nonlinear index of refraction wavelength
data.
366

Raman scattering False [True, False]
Interactions among all sampled signals,

parameterized signals and noise bins
are considered. Noise bins are treated
as a weak probe with respect to the
sampled signals and parameterized
signals - the latter are treated as pumps.
Inter-band Raman scattering [1-7] is an
approximation to the full expression of
the Raman polarization valid provided
that the frequency separation of the
interacting signals is much larger than
their individual spectral bandwidths.
SRS effect can be enabled only in the
scalar case (fixed polarization state,
"Model type" from the numerical tab
should be set to "Scalar" to enable SRS)
Fractional Raman contribution ρ 0.18 [0, 1]
The fraction of the nonlinear

polarization, related to the stimulated
Raman scattering effect [1]
Raman gain type Raman gain [Raman gain,

Raman gain
Defines type of Raman gain. If Raman efficiency,
gain efficiency is selected, then its value Calculate]
is gr/Aeff, otherwise, it is normalized gr
multiplied by Raman gain peak. There is
the option to calculated the Raman gain
based on fiber parameters
Raman gain peak 1e-013 [0, +INF]
Normalized Raman gain is multiplied by

Raman gain peak.
Raman gain reference pump 1000 nm [0, +INF]
Value used in the Raman gain

calculation
Gain X frequency gr RG.dat THz - normalized

Raman Gain or
File that defines the Raman gain or the THz - Raman
Raman gain efficiency. Gain
Temperature T 300 K [0, 500]
Absolute temperature at which the fiber

is operating. Used for noise
consideration.
367

Polarization factor Keff 2 [1, 2]
The value depends on the relative

polarization of the fields. The value is 1
if the fields have aligned polarizations,
and 2 if they have scrambled
polarization.
Enhanced

Rayleigh scattering False True, False
Defines if the Rayleigh scattering effect

is enabled
Rayleigh data type Constant [Constant, From

file]
Defines if the Rayleigh parameter value
will be read from the tab or from a file. If
"Constant", the value from the tab will be
used
Rayleigh backscattering γ 5.0e-005 1/km [0, +INF]
The value of the γ parameter. If

"Rayleigh data type" is set to "Constant",
this value will be used. Otherwise it will
be ignored
Rayleigh vs. wavelength Rayleigh.dat nm - 1/km
If the "Rayleigh data type" is set to "From

file", this tab specifies the file containing
the Rayleigh wavelength data
Include Brillouin scattering False True, False
Determines if the Brillouin scattering

effect will be taken into account
Brillouin gain data type Constant [Constant, From

file]
Defines if the Brillouin gain is constant or
loaded from a file
Brillouin gain constant gB 4.6e-11 m/W [0, 1e10]
Brillouin gain value
Brillouin gain file name Brillouin.dat
Specifies the Brillouin gain file name
Brillouin linewidth Δv 31.7 MHz [-INF, +INF]
Specifies the Brillouin linewidth
368

Frequency shift vs 11 GHz [-INF, +INF]
Specifies the Brillouin frequency shift
Numerical

Model type Scalar [Scalar, Vector]
Defines the model type used for the

simulation depending on the polarization
state of the signal. If "Vector" is selected,
the signal can have arbitrary polarization
state and a system of two coupled
equations, corresponding to each
polarization component (x or y) of every
sampled signal that is solved. If "Scalar"
is selected, all the signals preserve their
polarization state and a single equation
(1) is solved for each sampled band.
Vector simulation will be performed,
regardless of the value of the model type
parameter, in the following two cases
1)Two polarization components are

detected at the fiber input. This will work
for sampled noise because the noise is
unpolarized and x- and y-polarization
components are stored independently in
the memory. However, sampled signals
with well defined polarization state might
use a different method of storage in the
memory. Consequently, this parameter
should be manually set to "Vector" if the
polarization evolution is to be
considered.
2)The PMD effect is set to Stochastic.

Turning the "vector" on will disable SRS.
Step size Variable [Variable,

Constant]
Specifies whether variable or fixed step-
size simulation will be used. If "Variable"
is selected, the step size is adaptively
changed depending on the value of the
"Max. nonlinear phase shift" parameter
and the behavior of solutions itself.
Otherwise the step size is evaluated
only once, at the beginning of the
simulation. In some cases, the fixed step
size calculation executes faster, due to
the smaller number of calculations per
step. However, the variable step size
calculation is more flexible and can be
faster in the presence of strong
attenuation.
369

Max. nonlinear phase shift 3 [0, 10100]
NL
Maximum phase shift (over the time ϕ max
window) induced by the self-phase
modulation effect per step is calculated
for each sampled signal. SPM-induced
phase shifts are then calculated for each
parameterized signal. Next, the step
size is calculated in such a way that the
maximum SPM-induced phase shift
(over the entire set of signals) is equal to
the specified value.
Boundary conditions Periodic [Periodic,

Absorbing]
Specifies the type of boundary
conditions used for the simulation
Filter steepness 0.5 [0, 10100]
When "Boundary conditions" option is

set to "Absorbing", the "Filter steepness"
parameter determines the absorption
and reflection properties of the time
window boundaries. The same
absorbing boundary conditions are used
for all sampled signals.
P. A. number of iterations 50 [1, 1000]
Maximum number of iterations executed

in the Power Analysis. If convergence is
not reached in this number of iterations,
model returns the calculated values
anyway
P. A. number of steps 40 [1, 1000]
Number of divisions (in space) of the

fiber
P. A. relative tolerance 1e-3 [1e-10, 1]
Used to check the convergence of the

signal
Discretize sampled signal False — — True, False
Defines whether to use a user defined

discretization for sampled signals or not
Frequency resolution 100 GHz Hz, GHz, THz [1e9,1e12]
Frequency spacing that will discretize

the sampled signal
P. A. step accuracy 0.001 — — [1e-100, 1e100]
370
Graphs
Name and description Symbol Default value Units Value

range
Calculate graphs False [True, False]
Defines whether to enable the 3D graphs. If

disabled, no graphs will be plotted and no data is
stored. Graphs are plotted for sampled signals
only.
Number of distance steps 200 [1, 100000000]
The number of longitudinal (or in z) snapshots

(slices) that will be used to construct a 3D plot.
Increasing this value will make the 3D graph look
better. The number of snapshots that are stored
cannot be larger than the number of steps in z
Number of wavelength/time steps 200 [1, 100000000]
The number of stored points (in t) per snapshot.

Increasing this value will make the 3D graph look
better.
Linear scale True [True, False]
Determines the axis-type (linear or logarithmic) for

the dependent variable. If True, the axis type is
linear.
The next six parameters in this tab

determine which graphs will be plotted
after the simulation is finished.
Plot type Wavelength [Wavelength

range range, One
Determines the type of the plot that will be created sampled signal]
in either frequency or time domain. If the
parameter is set to "Wavelength range", a copy of
each sampled signal residing in the specified
wavelength range will be created. These copies
will be up-sampled and merged in a single
frequency band. This single frequency band,
containing all the signals, will be plotted in either
frequency or time domain. The merging does not
affect the original signals but affects their copies.
Therefore, multiple sampled signals will be
involved in the simulation. If the parameter is set
to "Plot one sampled signal", a 3D graph
presenting the sampled signal with central
frequency given by "Signal center frequency" will
be created.
371
Simulation
Name and description Default Default value Units Value

value range
Determines whether the component is enabled. If

False, all the input signals reach the output port of
the component without any change.
Noise
Name and description Default value Default value Units Value range
Convert noise bins False [True, False]
If True, each noise bin in the bandwidth

of the signal will be converted to a
Gaussian white noise, with the correct
power spectral density, This noise will
be added to the signal.
Random numbers
Name and description Default value Default value Units Value range
Determines how the random number

generator is initialized (seeded). If True,
the seed index used for this initialization
is a random number. Otherwise, a user-
specified number is used for this
purpose.
If "Generate random seed" is set to

True, this value specifies the seed
index. The generated pseudo-random
sequence is the same one if the seed
index is not changed. The value of
"Random seed index" will be ignored if
"Generate random seed" is set to True.
Numerical Solution
To model the bidirectional signal propagation in a fiber, an algorithm that takes two
numerical steps is used [1].
• In the first step, the equations describing the signal propagation in the forward
and backward direction are solved by an iterative method (Power analysis) and
the power distribution along the fiber is calculated.
372
• In the second step, the signals are propagated using the nonlinear Schrödinger
equation to describe the dynamic interactions between the co-propagating
signals.
Power Analysis
The equations that describe the interactions between signals propagating in the
forward direction and backward direction and describe the generation of optical noise
due the Raman and Rayleigh scattering are defined by [2]:
373
where
v i, v j are frequencies
α( v) is the fiber attenuation
γ(v) is the Rayleigh backscattering coefficient
g γ ( v i – v j ) is the Raman gain coefficient for frequency difference ( v i – v j )

P b (Z,v) is the backward propagating power. It includes sampled, parameterized,
and noise bins signals.
A eff is the effective core area
K eff is the polarization factor
Δv is the frequency interval
h is Plank's constant
k is the Boltzmann’s constant
T is the absolute temperature.
In these equations, the following physical effects were taken into account:
a) pump-to-pump, signal-to-signal and pump-to-signal Raman interactions
b) spontaneous Raman emission and its temperature dependency
c) stimulated Raman scattering
d) pump depletions due to Raman energy transfer
e) high-order stokes generation
f) multiple Rayleigh backscattering
g) fiber loss
h) spontaneous emission noise
In the first solution step in this component, the equations (1) (forward and backward)
are solved through direct integration. In direct integration, the signal launch
configuration defines the boundary conditions in both ends of the fiber.
The convergence of the model is checked in two directions: forward and backward.
An iterative forward and backward integration of propagation equations must be used

due to the backward propagating ASE powers and counter-directional pumping
scheme that may be defined, as well as the possibility of counter directional signal
propagation [2].
The forward direction is from input port 1 to output port 1. The backward direction is
from input port 2 to output port 2.
The convergence is checked after the integration in both directions is performed. If

the variance in the gain is lesser than the tolerance desired ("Numerical" tab page),
the simulation is considered finished. Otherwise, the component runs for the
maximum number of iterations set by the user.
374
When a file with the normalized Raman gain is entered, it must be given values for
the Raman gain peak and Raman gain reference pump. These values are used to
calculate the Raman gain used in the simulation according the following formula:
where
gR is the Raman gain
pR is the Raman gain peak
λP is the gain reference pump
gN is the normalized Raman Gain.
The unit of Raman Gain is given in m⁄W .

If the user chooses the option to let the component calculate the Raman gain, the
component will calculate the coefficients using the following equation:
where
γ is the nonlinear coefficient (6)
ρ is the fractional Raman contribution

R
X 1111 ( ω P – ω S ) is the Raman susceptibility for fused silica
Stimulated Brillouin scattering

When the stimulated Brillouin scattering (SBS) effect is included in the simulation.
New terms and equations are added to the set of coupled equations, and they are
related to the stokes signals introduced in the system.
The modeling of SBS used here is based on reference [7] and it can not be used
together with Raman amplification.
After the calculation of the power distribution along the fiber for the signals,
spontaneous emission and Rayleigh scattering, the dynamic interaction between the
co-propagating signals are analyzed using the nonlinear Schrödinger equations
375
Nonlinear Schrödinger Equation

In this step, the coupled nonlinear Schrödinger equations are solved by using the
symmetrized non-iterative split-step Fourier method. See the Optical Fiber WDM
Technical Background.
Scalar approach
Signal propagation equations with Raman scattering
In the scalar approach, the optical field maintains its polarization along the fiber
length. The Model type parameter from the "Numerical" tab is set to Scalar.
In this case, the following set (4) of equations governs the evolution of the slowly
varying electric field envelopes (Ei).
These envelopes are a set of sampled signals (SS), powers (Pl) of another set of
parameterized signals (PS), and powers (Nm) of a third set of noise bins (NB).
The subsystem (4a) consists of

• Number of SS, the total count of sampled signals
• coupled nonlinear Schrödinger (NLS) [3, 4],
The subsystem (4b) contains

• Number of PS equations (the total count of PS)
376
The subsystem (4c) contains

• Number of NB (the total count of NB) equations.
The Raman matrices are defined according to:
377
Raman susceptibility for fused quartz is shown in Figure 1. It should be noted that "*"
means complex conjugation.
Figure 1 Raman susceptibilities for fused silica [5, 6]
In Equation (4a), E i = E i (z,T) is the electric field envelope of the i-th sampled
signal.
A frame moving at the group velocity ( T = t – z ⁄ v g ≡ t – β 1 ( ω 0 )z ) corresponding to

the reference frequency ω 0 is assumed.
378
The reference frequency is related to the parameter Reference wavelength through

ω 0 = 2πc ⁄ λ 0 , with c being the light speed in vacuum. The parameter Reference
wavelength is in the "Main" category of the component tool-box.
The derivatives of the propagation constant of the fiber mode β ( ω ) , with respect to
n n
frequency β n = ∂ β ( ω ) ⁄ ( ∂ω ) n = 1, 2 are the first order β 2 and second order
β 3 group velocity dispersion (GVD) parameters and are evaluated at the center
frequencies { ω i } of the sampled signals.
The nonlinear coefficients for every SS, NB or PS in (4) are defined according to
The meaning of the terms in the left-hand side of the subsystem (4a) is the same as
in the total field approach fiber model (see the technical description of this
component).
The first two terms in the right side of (4a) give the SPM and XPM contributions of the
remaining sampled signals. The third term is the XPM contribution of the PS. The
fourth and the fifth terms describe the SRS-induced interactions between the i-th
sampled signal and rest of the sampled signals and with the parameterized signals,
respectively.
Subsystems (4b) and (4c) describe the power balance of the set of PS and NB,
respectively. These are obtained by replacing the NLS equations for NB and PS with
the time-averaged versions of their power conservation laws.
In the absence of attenuation, the total number of photons is conserved as (4) shows.
The first terms in the right sides of (4b) and (4c) take into account the attenuation
effects. The second and the third terms in the right side of (4b) describe the SRS
induced power transfer between the l-th PS and the rest of the PS and between the l-
th PS and the SS, respectively.
The second and the third terms in the right side of (4c) are responsible for the SRS-
induced interactions between noise bins and PS and noise bins and SS. With multiple
SS present in the fiber, the SRS effect is represented through inter-band Raman
scattering.
This is an approximation of the full expression for the Raman polarization [3,4] that is
valid if the frequency separation between the interacting signals is large enough
compared to their individual bandwidths.
When the frequency separation between the signals is comparable with their
individual spectral bandwidth, the total field approach can be implemented by turning
on the option "Merge sampled bands".
In this case, the system (4a) is replaced by the following single NLS equation (7) and
(4b) and (4c) remain unchanged.
379
In equation (7), the Raman response function h 1111 ( t ) is the Fourier transform of
the Raman susceptibilities shown in Figure 1.
Total field approach however should be used with some care. At first in this case
(single sampled band), XPM and four wave mixing effects are included automatically
in the simulation and turning on or off the XPM parameter in the "Nonlinearities" tab
will have no effect on the results.
Keep in mind that in the total field approach, all the parameters (such as dispersion
and attenuation) are evaluated just once - at the reference frequency.
In this case, when multiple SS are considered, a set of parameters is evaluated for
each sampled signal - at the center frequency of the corresponding signal.
The meaning of the reference frequency (and reference wavelength) is the following:
The subsystem (4a) is written in a frame moving with group velocity corresponding to
the reference wavelength. That is, no other signal parameters are evaluated at this
frequency.
The reference wavelength can be either user specified or automatic, which

corresponds to the averaged frequency of the center frequencies of all SS and PS.
If "Dispersion data type" is set to "Constant", the dispersion parameters specified in

the tabs (D and S) or, respectively, β 2 and β 3 , are assumed to correspond to the
reference wavelength. Hence, Taylor expansion is used in this case
Evaluating (8) and its first and second derivatives with respect to ω at the signal
frequencies { ω i } gives the sets of parameters β 1 ( ω ) – β 1 ( ω 0 ) }, { β 2 ( ω i ) }
and { β 3 ( ω i ) } .
It should be kept in mind, however, that with multiple sampled signals present,
specifying nonzero β 2 and β 3 (or D and S) and at the same time disabling the
"Group velocity dispersion" and "Third order dispersion", will result in
{ β 2 ( ω i ) = 0 ,∀i } , { β 3 ( ω i ) = 0 ,∀i } but { β 1 ( ω i ) ≠ β 1 ( ω j ), ifi ≠ j } .
This means that no GVD-induced pulse broadening will be observed but pulses with
different center frequencies will propagate with different group velocities.
380
To the contrary, if all the sampled signals are merged to form a single frequency band,
disabling the GVD effects will not only disable pulse broadening, but it also will set the
group velocity constant for the entire sampled band considered.
If "Dispersion data type" is set to "From file", the data set specified by the file is
Sellmeier fitted. The dispersion parameters are calculated by analytically
differentiating the fit.
The file specifying the dispersion data must provide the dependence of group delay
[ps/km] on the wavelength [nm]. For this reason, "Frequency domain parameters" is
disabled when "Dispersion data type" is set to "From file".
Vector approach
When the polarization state of the incident sampled signals is not preserved during its
propagation inside the optical fiber, the scalar approach is no longer applicable. A
vector model is then selected and solved.
The vector model is similar to the model presented in the Optical Fiber WDM (see
Optical Fiber WDM Technical Background). In the same way, Raman scattering is not
applied.
References
[1] J. Ko; S. Kim; J. Lee; S. Won; Y. S. Kim; J. Jeong, "Estimation of performance degradation of
bidirectional WDM transmission systems due to Rayleigh backscattering and ASE noises using
numerical and analytical models", IEEE J. of Lightwave Technology, Vol.: 21 , Issue: 4 , April
2003, Pag.:938 - 946
[2] M. Karasek, M. Menif, "Protection of surviving channels in pump-controlled gain-locked Raman
fibre amplifier", Optics Communications 210 (2002) 57-65.
[7] A. backa, G. Jacobsen, and B. Tromborg, "Dynamic Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Analysis,"
J. Lightwave Technol. 18, 416- (2000)
381
Notes:
382
NONLINEAR DISPERSIVE FIBER (OBSOLETE)
Nonlinear Dispersive Fiber (Obsolete)
This component is an obsolete version that is included with OptiSystem for backwards
compatibility purposes - It was replaced by the Optical Fiber component.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Length 50 km [0, INF]
Fiber length
Attenuation data type Constant — Constant,

Wavelength
Defines the attenuation as a fixed constant value or as a
Dependent/ From
wavelength dependent curve taken from a file
File
Attenuation – constant 0.25 dB/km [0, INF]

Defines the attenuation as a fixed constant value, the same for
all channels
Attenuation vs. wavelength AtnVsLambda.dat — [0, INF]
Defines the attenuation as a wavelength dependent curve in a

file
Input coupling loss -1 dB [-INF,0]
Overall input coupling loss resulting from mode mismatch,

Fresnel reflections, etc.
Output coupling loss -0.022 dB [-INF,0]

Overall output coupling loss resulting from mode mismatch,
Fresnel reflections, etc.
383
Dispersion

Group delay data type Constant — Constant,
Wavelength
Defines the group delay as a fixed constant value, or as a Dependent/ From
wavelength dependent curve taken from a file
File
Group delay – constant 4.9e+006 ps/km [-INF,INF]
Defines the group delay as a fixed constant value, the

same for all channels
Group delay vs. wavelength GroupVs Lambda.dat — [-INF,INF]
Defines the group delay as a wavelength dependent curve

in a file
GVD data type Constant — Constant,

Wavelength
Defines the group-velocity dispersion as a fixed constant
Dependent/ From
value, or as a wavelength dependent curve taken from a
File
file
GVD – constant 4.5 ps/nm/km [-INF,INF]
Defines the group-velocity dispersion as a fixed constant

value, the same for all channels
GVD vs. wavelength GVDvsLambda.dat — [-INF,INF]
Defines the group-velocity dispersion as a wavelength

dependent curve in a file
Dispersion slope data type Constant — Constant,

Wavelength
Defines the dispersion slope as a fixed constant value, or
Dependent/ From
as a wavelength dependent curve taken from a file
File
Dispersion slope – constant 0.11 ps/nm2/km [-INF,INF]
Defines the dispersion slope as a fixed constant value, the

Dispersion slope vs. wavelength DispSlope vs. — [-INF,INF]

Lambda.dat
Defines the dispersion slope as a wavelength dependent
curve in a file
Effective refractive index vs. wavelength EffRIVsLambda.dat — [0,INF]
Defines the effective refractive index as a dispersive curve

vs. the wavelength in a file
384
Birefringence

Birefringence data type Constant — Constant,
Wavelength
Defines the birefringence (the mismatch between the Dependent/ From
propagation constants of the two orthogonal polarization
File
modes) as a fixed constant value, or as a wavelength
dependent curve taken from a file
Birefringence – constant 6.2832e-005 rad/m [-1,1]

Defines the birefringence as a fixed constant value, the
Birefringence vs. wavelength BirefringenceVs — [-1,1]

Lambda.dat
Defines the birefringence as a wavelength dependent
curve in a file
Coupling length of polarization mixing 0.1 km [0,INF]
Coupling length of polarization scrambling
PMD coefficient 0.07 ps/km1/2 [0,INF]
Polarization mode dispersion coefficient
DGD data type Constant — Constant,

Wavelength
Defines the differential group delay between the two Dependent/ From
orthogonal polarization modes as a fixed constant value,
File
or as a wavelength dependent curve taken from a file
DGD – constant 3 ps/km [-INF,INF]
Defines the differential group delay as a fixed constant

value, the same for all channels
DGD vs. wavelength DGDVsLambda.dat — [-INF,INF]
Defines the differential group delay as a wavelength

dependent curve in a file
385
Nonlinearities

Effective area data type Constant — Constant,
Wavelength
Defines the effective area of the fiber as a fixed constant Dependent/ From
File
file.
Effective area – constant 72 μ2 [0,INF]
Defines the effective area as a fixed constant value, the

same for all channels.
Effective area vs. wavelength EffAreaVsLambda.dat — [0,INF]
Defines the effective area as a wavelength dependent

curve in a file.
n2 data type Constant — Constant,

Wavelength
Defines the nonlinear refractive index as a fixed constant
Dependent/ From
File
file.
n2 – constant 2.6e-020 m2/W [-INF,INF]
Define the nonlinear refractive index as a fixed constant

value, the same for all channels.
n2 vs. wavelength N2VsLambda.dat — [-INF,INF]
Defines the nonlinear refractive index as a fixed constant

file.
Raman-resonant n2 dispersion RamanResN2Vs — [-INF,INF]

Freq.dat
Defines the Raman-resonant dispersion of the third-
order nonlinear susceptibility as a frequency dependent
curve in a file
Peak Raman gain coeff 9.9e-014 m/W [0,INF]
The peak Raman gain coefficient at certain pump

wavelength
Pump Wavelength of Peak Raman gain coeff 1000 nm [0,INF]

The pump wavelength corresponding to the above peak
Raman gain coefficient
Raman Gain Spectrum RamanGainVsFreq.dat — [0,INF]
Defines the Raman gain spectrum vs. frequency in a file
Raman self-shift Time 5 fsec [0,INF]
The characteristic Raman self-frequency shifting time
386
Effects On/Off; Model Details

Attenuation ON — [ON, OFF]
Switch On/Off the attenuation
Group velocities mismatch ON — [ON, OFF]

Switch On/Off the group velocities mismatch
GVD (Group velocity dispersion) ON — [ON, OFF]
Switch On/Off the group velocity dispersion
GVD Slope (third-order dispersion) ON — [ON, OFF]
Switch On/Off the dispersion slope (the third-order dispersion)
Polarization evolution Hi-Bi PM fiber, no — Hi-Bi PM fiber, no

PMD, fixed DGD PMD, fixed DGD,
Specify the polarization maintaining capabilities of the fiber
Non-PM fiber,
and the polarization evolution models to use
PMD, stochastic
DGD, Averaged
polarizations
Independent pol. mode mixing of WDM channels OFF [ON, OFF]
In the case of non-PM fiber, determines whether the

polarization scrambling follows the same pattern for all the
channels or is completely independent
n2 polarization factor 1 dimensionless [0.5, 1]
Raman Gain polarization factor 1 dimensionless [0.5, 1]
Birefringence ON — [ON, OFF]
Switch On/Off the birefringence
SPM (Self-phase modulation) ON — [ON, OFF]
Switch On/Off the SPM (Self-phase modulation)
XPM (Cross-phase modulation) ON — [ON, OFF]
Switch On/Off the XPM (Cross-phase modulation)
XPM of orthogonally polarized modes ON — [ON, OFF]

Switch On/Off the XPM of orthogonally polarized modes
FWM (four-wave mixing) OFF — [ON, OFF]
Switch On/Off the FWM (four-wave mixing)
FWM of orthogonally polarized modes OFF — [ON, OFF]
Switch On/Off the XPM of orthogonally polarized modes
Maximal phase-mismatch 100 radian [-1e+100,

1e+100]
FWM generated waves with phase-mismatches larger than
this value are neglected
387

SRS (stimulated Raman scattering) ON — [ON, OFF]
SRS with pump wave depletion ON — [ON, OFF]

Switch On/Off the effect of pump wave depletion in SRS
RSFS (Raman self-frequency shifting) OFF — [ON, OFF]
Switch On/Off the RSFS (Raman self-frequency shifting)
Simulation

Enabled ON — [ON, OFF]
Enable the calculations
Number of steps 25 — [0,INF]
Number of longitudinal steps
Step defined as: Fixed = Main — Fixed = Full

Channel Initial length/Number of
Choose one of the three alternative ways of defining the step Nonlinear Steps
size
length/Number of
Steps Fixed = Main
Channel Initial
Nonlinear
length/Number of
Steps
Variable = Main
Channel Current
Nonlinear
length/Number of
Steps
Time-window boundaries Absorbing — Periodic,

Absorbing
Choose the type of the time-window boundary conditions
Random Phases OFF — [ON,OFF]
Randomize the phase offsets of the channels at input
Random Phases Seed 1 — [0, 65535]

The seed of the random phases
388
3D graphics selection

Power spectrum of channels OFF — [ON,OFF]
Displays the average power spectrum of the channels
Unit of power spectra dBm — mW, dBm

Displays the average power spectrum of channels or the
PSD of a selected channel in [mW] or [dBm]
Bandwidth spectrum of channels OFF — [ON,OFF]
Displays the rms bandwidths of the channels
Monitor central sampled channel ON — [ON,OFF]

Monitors the center most channel if described as a sampled
waveform
Wavelength of sampled channel to monitor 0 nm [0,INF]
Monitors an arbitrary sampled channel, defined by its

central wavelength
Waveform ON — [ON,OFF]
Displays the waveform of the selected sampled channel
Chirp OFF — [ON,OFF]
Displays the chirp of the selected sampled channel
PSD OFF — [ON,OFF]
Displays the PSD of the selected sampled channel
Spectral Delay OFF — [ON,OFF]
Displays the spectral delay of the selected sampled channel
Number of 2D snapshots in the 3D graphics 50 — [2, 1000]
Defines the number of 2D snapshots forming the selected

3D graphics
Graphs

Fiber 3D Graph EmptyX EmptyY
389
Parameters—Detailed descriptions
In the following section, the parameters descriptions are further elaborated. There are
descriptions of features pertaining to multiple parameters, and also extended
descriptions of individual parameters.
Note: Many parameters pertaining to the NDF can be defined as either constant
or wavelength dependent/from file values. The first option is used usually for rapid
development of simple designs. If a parameter is wavelength dependent
(arb. curve ) you have to prepare a text file with (Wavelength
ParameterValue) data pairs, and create the parameter in the appropriate
Component properties dialog box. This option is recommended for detailed,
quantitatively precise designs. Many parameters of the NDF, such as losses,
dispersion, and effective fiber area, can be defined in both ways - as constants or
curves loaded from a file. When a parameter is defined as a curve, the format of
the text file is as follows:
Wavelength_1 ParameterValue_1
......
Wavelength_N ParameterValue_N
The units of wavelength are nanometers ( nm ). The units and the value ranges of the
parameter values are the same as those of the respective 'constant' parameters.
For example, when a loss spectrum is loaded from file it might look like:
1500 1.99E-01
1525 1.92E-01
1550 1.89E-01
1575 1.93E-01
1600 2.05E-01
or:
1500 0.199
1525 0.192
1550 0.189
1575 0.193
1600 0.205
390
An arbitrary number of points (file lines) are permitted, except 0 (empty file). The
column separator can be an arbitrary number (except 0) of either spaces or tabs. The
files are opened using the standard Windows "File Open" dialog box.
Origin of the nonlinearity
At high optical intensities for intense electromagnetic fields, the dielectric medium
behaves as a nonlinear medium. This is also the case for the fiber material. Under the
influence of intense electromagnetic fields, the motion of bound electrons becomes
an harmonic and, as a result, the induced polarization P from the electric dipoles
becomes nonlinear function of the electric field E:
(1) (2) (3)

P = ε0 [ x .E+x :EE+x :EEE+... ]
where χ(j) (j =1,2,3, …) denotes the jth order of susceptibility. The lowest order nonlinearity
in optical fibers originates from the third order susceptibility χ(3).
Nonlinear effects in optical fibers

The following nonlinear effects in optical fibers are caused by the third-order nonlinear
susceptibility and are included in the numerical engine of the component:
• Self-phase modulation (SPM)
• Cross-phase modulation (XPM)
• Cross-phase modulation between the orthogonal modes of a birefringent fiber
(PXPM)
• Four-wave mixing (FWM)
• Four-wave mixing between the orthogonal modes of a birefringent fiber (PFWM)
• Interchannel Stimulated Raman scattering (SRS) and intrachannel Raman self-
shifting (RSS)
OptiSystem currently supports several different models specialized for different signal
representations and/or combinations of parameters.
Model Ia
This model has been derived for the separated channels signal representation. It
also accounts explicitly for the nonlinear interactions and mixing of the orthogonal
polarization modes in an SM fiber. It is a system of 2N coupled modified nonlinear
Schrödinger equations (NLSE).
This model accounts for:

• background loss and linear dispersion up to third order
• birefringence and PMD
• nonlinearities — SPM, XPM, FWM, SRS, RSS, PXPM, and PFWM
391
For Sampled signals, the following effects are accounted for: XPM, XPM of
orthogonally polarized modes, Raman, FWM, and SSFS.
Whereas, for Parameterized signals and ASE noise bins, we account for Raman and
FWM.
There are 3 types of polarization evolution that could be taken into account:
Hi-Bi PM fiber, no PMD, fixed DGD

In the case of polarization maintaining fiber, we have to specify the birefringence and
DGD of the fiber.
Non PM fiber, PMD, stochastic DGD

In this case the correlation length Lcorr and PMD coefficient have to be specified. The
component allows the calculation for PMD of any order. To see the effect of PMD, the
following effects must also be selected under the Effects tab: Birefringence and Group
velocity mismatch
Averaged polarizations
In this case, the effect of the Kerr nonlinearity is averaged over the Poincaré sphere,
and is taken into account with a coefficient value of 8/9. The effect of nonlinear PMD
[2] is not taken into account.
The intrapulse Raman scattering (or Raman Self Shifting) effect, which leads to
soliton self frequency shift, has to be considered for very short optical pulses with
duration ~ picosecond or smaller.
The model has the following form:
2 3
∂A ix ∂A ∂ A ix 1 ∂ A ix 1
---------- ± β 1 ---------ix- + --i- β 2 ------------
- – --- β 3 ------------- + --- α i A ix =
∂z ix ∂t 2 i ∂t 2 6 i ∂t 3 2
N
f ijkl
i ∑ Mγ x, μ, v, ρ δ ( ω k + ω l – ω j – ω i ) -------- A jμ∗ A kv A lρ exp ( iΔβz ) +
f ii
j, k, l = 1
j, k, l ≠i
μ = x
v, ρ = x , y
1
--- iγA iy 2 A ix∗ exp ( – 2iΔβ xy z ) –
3
N N
j n f ij 2 i n f ij 2
i ∑ gR gR ( ωj – ω i ) ---- A jx A ix – ig R
f ii ∑ g R ( ω i – ω j ) ---- A jx A ix
f ii
j = 1 j = 1
j ≠1 j ≠1
ωj > ωi ωj < ωi
392
N
2 f ij 2
iγ A ix A ix + 21γ ∑ ---fii- Ajx Aix +
j = 1
j ≠1
N
1--- 2 2 f ij 2
3
iγ A iy A ix + --- iγ
3 ∑ ---fii- Ajy A ix +
j = 1
j ≠1
2
∂ A ix
iγT R ---------------- A ix
∂t
(1)
where Aix, Aiy are the slowly varying complex electric field amplitudes of the radiation in the
respective x/y polarization mode of the i’th WDM channel,
β 1 = ( 1 ⁄ v g ) ix and β 1 = ( 1 ⁄ v g ) iy are the inverses of the group velocities of the pol.

ix iy
modes,
evaluated at the respective carrier frequency of the channels. β 2i is the GVD

coefficient, related to the dispersion parameter as:
2πcβ 2i
D = – ----------------
2
-
λ
β 3i is the third-order dispersion coefficient, related to the dispersion slope as:

2πc⎞ 2
- β 3i + ⎛ 4πc
S = ⎛ -------- ---------⎞
⎝ 2⎠ ⎝ 3 ⎠ β 2i
λ λ
(2)
αi is the loss coefficient for the respective carrier frequency of the channel
n
g R is the normalized Raman gain function taken from reference [1], Figure 8.1 on
page 300.
γ = ωi n2 / c Aeff is the nonlinear coefficient ( ≈ 1-10 W-1km-1 )
393
n2 is the nonlinear refractive index equal to 3 χxxxx / 8 neff ( ≈ 3.10-16 cm2/ W )

γ xμνρ = ωi (3 χxμνρ /8 neff )/ (c Aeff ) is the nonlinear coefficient of the four-wave
interactions and is proportional to the relevant component of the χ tensor.
Aeff is the effective area:
∞ ∞
2
∫ ∫ ( F ( x ,y ) ) dx dy
–∞ –∞
-------------------------------------------------------
∞ ∞
-
Aeff =
4
∫ ∫ F ( x ,y ) dx dy
–∞ –∞
(3)
where F(x,y) is the modal field distribution of the fiber mode.
The overlap integrals fij are defined by:
∞ ∞
2 2
∫ ∫ F i ( x ,y ) F j ( x ,y ) dx dy
–∞ –∞
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
fii = ∞ ∞ ∞ ∞
2 2
∫ ∫ F i ( x ,y ) dx dy ∫ ∫ F j ( x ,y ) dx dy
–∞ –∞ –∞ –∞
(4)
M is the multiplicity factor. Its value is 2 if all three waves are different — otherwise,
its value is 1.
The overlap integral fijkl is:
〈 F i∗ F j∗ F k F l〉
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
2 2 2 2 1⁄2
[ 〈 Fi 〉 〈 Fj 〉 〈 Fk 〉 〈 Fl 〉 ]
fijkl=
394
(5)
where the angle brackets denote integration over the transverse coordinates x and y.
Also
Δβ = ( ω k n k + ω l n l – ω j n j – ω i n i ) ⁄ c
(6)
where
Δβ xy = β y – β x
(7)
are the propagation constant mismatches of the processes of FWM and (PFWM) and TR ~ 5
fsec is the slope of the Raman gain curve.
Model Ib
Similar to Model Ia, but disregards the polarization evolution of the signal and uses
the average power of the two polarization modes. It consists of a system of only N
coupled modified nonlinear Schrödinger equations (NLSE) with correspondingly
adjusted nonlinear coefficients.
Model I
Derived for the case of the total field signal representation. All sampled signals are
in a single frequency band. This is the basic method used for modeling WDM
systems.
It also accounts explicitly for the mixing of the orthogonal polarization modes in an SM
fiber. It is a system of two coupled modified nonlinear Schrödinger equations (NLSE).
This model accounts for:

• background loss and linear dispersion up to third order
• birefringence and PMD
• nonlinearities - SPM, XPM, FWM, SRS, RSS, PXPM
It works with all types of signals: Sampled, Parameterized and ASE noise bins. For
parameterized and ASE noise bins, only linear losses are taken into account.
'Total field approach' automatically accounts the XPM and FWM effects. There is no
possibility to switch off these effects.
'Total field approach for both polarizations' will additionally account for PXPM of
orthogonally polarized signals' and PFWM of orthogonally polarized signals'.
The model for the case of one polarization has the following form:
2 3 2
∂A
------ ± β 1 ∂A
------ + --i- β 2 ∂--------
A- 1--- ∂--------
A 1 2 ∂A
– β 3 3- + --- αA x = iγ A A – iγT R ------------ A
∂z ∂t 2 ∂t 2 6 ∂t 2 ∂t
(8)
395
All the parameters in the above equation have been explained, along with the
Model Ia.
Numerical Methods
The three models (Model la, Model lb, and Model l) are solved by a scalar or
vectorial version of the split-step Fourier transform method:
∂A
------ = [ D + N ]A
∂z
(9)
with symmetrized step size [1].
In addition, the step size can be controlled along the propagation.
Step size selection rules

The user can choose one of the following three ways to calculate the step size:
• Fixed
• Initial Nonlinear Length / Number of Steps
• Current Nonlinear Length / Number of Steps
Fixed
In this case the step size is simply Δz = L ⁄ N , where L is the length of the fiber
and N is the user defined number of steps.
Initial Nonlinear Length / Number of Steps

One of the well known strategies for guaranteeing accurate split-step calculations is
to limit the value of the accumulated nonlinear phase-shift per step.
This is equivalent to set Δz = L NL ⁄ N LNL

where L NL = 1 ⁄ γP ( 0 ) is the nonlinear length at the input of the fiber (a measure
of the distance needed for considerable nonlinear distortions to occur), and
N LNL is the user specified number of steps per L NL .

Another limitation imposed is that the maximum temporal displacement of the
channels due to group-velocity mismatch per step is less than 1% of the bit period.
396
Current Nonlinear Length / Number of Steps

In this case, the nonlinear length is periodically recalculated along the fiber:
L NL ( z ) = 1 ⁄ γP ( z ) .
In this way, the possible changes in L NL ( z ) due to loss or gain are taken into
account.
The term indicates the channel used in the calculations above. When the separate
channels signal representation is used, it is either the channel with the highest power
or the central channel. If we use only one continuous spectral band, as in the total field
signal representation, there can be only one main channel.
References
[1] Agrawal, G.P., “Nonlinear Fiber Optics, 3rd Edition”, Academic Press, 2001.
[2] Marcuse, D., Menyuk, C.R., and Wai, P.K.H., "Application of the Manakov - PMD Equation to
Studies of Signal Propagation in Optical Fibers with Randomly Varying Birefringence", Journ.
Light. Technol.,15, 1735-1746 (1997).
[3] Tchofo Dinda, P., Milot, G., and Wabnitz, S. "Polarization Switching and Suppression of
Stimulated Raman Scattering in Birefringent Optical Fibers", JOSA B, 15, 1433-1441 (1998).
397
Notes:
398
LINEAR MULTIMODE FIBER
Linear Multimode Fiber
This component is a multimode fiber. The component has two modes of operation.
The fist one assumes the fiber has sufficient mode mixing due to imperfections or
splices; in this case the modal transfer function approaches a Gaussian function. The
second one allows the user to load measured modal delays and power-coupling
coefficients. The component also includes first- and second-order chromatic
dispersion.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Frequency 850 nm, Hz, THz [100, 2000]
Reference center frequency
Length 1 km,m [0,+INF[

Fiber length
Attenuation 2.61 dB/km [0,+INF[
Fiber attenuation
Measured modal delays False - True, False
Defines whether to use measured modal delays (Cambridge

Model) or not
Modal bandwidth 1324 MHz.km [0,+INF[
Fiber modal bandwidth
Cutback factor 1 - [0,+INF[
Cutback factor
399

Filename CamMMFi.txt - -
The name of the file that containing the measured power

coupling coefficients and modal delays
Reference length 300 m, km ]0,+INF[
The fiber length used for the measurement
Frequency response False - True, False
Defines whether to use the calculated frequency response

from the measurement or not
Propagation delay 0 s/km [0,+INF[
Propagation delay
Delay skew 0 s/km [0,+INF[
Delay skew
Chromatic dispersion

Include chromatic dispersion False nmHz, THz True, False
Defines whether the model includes chromatic dispersion

effects
Use Sellmeier approximations True — True, False
Defines whether the user enters data sheet parameters for

zero dispersion wavelength or at the reference wavelength
Zero dispersion wavelength 1354 nm [100, 2000]
Wavelength at zero dispersion
Zero dispersion slope 0.097 ps / (nm2.km) ]-INF,+INF[

Dispersion slope at zero dispersion
Dispersion –100 ps / (nm.km) ]-INF,+INF[
Dispersion at reference frequency
Dispersion slope 0.5 ps / (nm2.km) ]-INF,+INF[
Dispersion slope at reference frequency
Spectral width 0.4 nm [0, 2000]

Source spectral width
400
Simulation

value range

enabled
Resample False — — True, False
Determines if the filter will down sample the signal

bandwidth to the filter sample rate
Sample rate 500 GHz Hz, GHz, THz ]0,+INF[

New output signal sample rate
Discrete delay True — — True, False
If the parameter Discrete delay is true, the delay

is rounded to a multiple of the sampling period,
otherwise the time shift property of the Fourier
transform is applied using the exact delay value
Noise

value range
Noise threshold –100 dB ]-INF,+INF[
Noise dynamic 3 dB ]-INF,+INF[
The optical fiber has three dominant dispersion mechanisms, modal, and first-order
chromatic and second-order chromatic. We can assume that modal dispersion and
chromatic dispersion mechanisms act independently and can be treated
separately[1][2]. Propagation delay and Delay skew parameters are applied to the
signal output after the dispersion effects.
Modal dispersion
Personick has shown that if a multimode fiber has sufficient mode mixing due to
imperfections or splices, in this case the modal transfer function approaches a
Gaussian function [3][4][5]
2 2
ω σ
– ------------ (1)
2
HM ( ω ) = e
401
where ω is the angular baseband frequency and σ is the RMS impulse response
width.
In this model, the modal dispersion is characterized by the 6 dB half of the optical
power frequency:
2 ⋅ 1n ( 2 ) 1 γ
B 6dB = -------------------------- = B M ⎛ ---⎞
(2)
2⋅π⋅σ ⎝ L⎠
where B M is defined by the parameter Modal bandwidth and L is the fiber parameter
Length. γ is the cutback factor, that takes into account the mode coupling, mixing and
concatenation effects.
Rewriting Equation 1 and Equation 2 in terms of frequency and bandwidth:
⎛ ⎞
⎜ 1n ( 2 ) ⋅ f
2 ⎟
⎜ – -------------------------------
γ 2⎟
- (3)
⎜ ⎛ B ⋅ ⎛ --1-⎞ ⎞ ⎟
⎝ ⎝ M ⎝ L⎠ ⎠ ⎠
HM ( f ) = e
If the Measured modal delays is enable, the modal dispersion is calculated from
measured modal delays and power coupling coefficients from parameter Filename.
The file format for the modal delay and power coupling coefficients file is the following:
Each file contains three columns. The first column contains the order of each mode
group supported by the fiber. The second column contains the average modal delay
of each mode group, in ns. The third column contains the power-coupling coefficients,
which indicate the relative excitation of each mode group. The modal delay is relative
to the parameter Reference length. The output signal is calculated from the impulse
response of the fiber in time domain. If the parameter Frequency response is enabled,
the output signal will be calculated in the frequency domain, in this case, the transfer
function of the fiber is calculated according to
– j2πfτ m (4)
HM ( f ) = ∑ ( Pm e )
m
Where P m is the power coupling coefficient and the τ m is the modal delay for mode
m. The principle of this model is described in detail in [8].
402
Chromatic dispersion
Since most of the injection-lasers used in optical fiber communications have a
Gaussian line shape [1][2][6][7], we can use the solution for the chromatic transfer
function for a perfect Gaussian linewidth case:
2
( ω ⁄ ω1 )
– ---------------------------------
-
1 2 ( 1 + iω ⁄ ω 2 ) (5)
H D ( ω ) = -------------------------------------
1⁄2
-e
( 1 + iω ⁄ ω 2 )
where ω 1 and ω 2 are abbreviations for
2 –1
ω 1 = [ σ λ ( S + 2 D ⁄ λ r )L ]
(6)
–1
ω1 = –( σλ D L )
where the parameter σ λ is defined by Spectral width, S is the parameter Dispersion

slope, D is the Dispersion, λr is the reference center wavelength calculated from the
parameter Frequency, and L is the fiber length.
The parameter Use Sellmeier approximations defines whether you will enter D and
S directly, or if they will be calculated from the Sellmeier approximations [2]:
4
S0 ⎛ λ 0⎞
D = ----- ⎜ λ r – ----3-⎟
4⎝ λ ⎠ r (7)
4
S0 ⎛ λ 0⎞
S = ----- ⎜ 1 + 3 ----4-⎟
4⎝ λr ⎠
403
References
[1] C. Yabre, "Comprehensive Theory of Dispersion in Graded-Index Optical Fibers", Journal of
Lightwave Technology, Vol. 18, No. 2, pp. 166-176, February 2000.
[2] G.D. Brown, "Bandwidth and Rise Time Calculations for Digital multimode Fiber-Optical Data
Links", Journal of Lightwave Technology, Vol. 10, No. 5, pp. 672-678, May 1992.
[3] S.D.Personick "Baseband Linearity and Equalization in Fiber Optic Digital Communication
Systems", The Bell System Technical Journal, pp. 1174-1194, September 1973.
[4] D.G.Duff, "Computer-Aided Design Of Digital Lightwave Systems", IEEE Journal on Selected
Areas in Communications, Vol. SAC-2, No. 1, pp. 171-185, January 1984.
[5] D.O.Harris, J.R. Jones "Baud Rate Response: Characterizing Modal Dispersion for Digital Fiber
Optic Systems", Journal of Lightwave Technology, Vol. 6, No. 5, pp. 668-677, May 1988.
[6] J.L.Gimlett, N,K,Cheung "Dispersion Penalty Analysis for LED/Single-Mode Fiber
Transmission Systems", Journal of Lightwave Technology, Vol. LT-4, No. 9, pp. 1381-1391,
September 1986.
[7] T. Pfeiffer, M. Witte, B. Deppisch "High-Speed Transmission of Broad-Band Thermal Light
Pulses Over Dispersion Fibers", IEEE Photonic Technology Letters, Vol. 11, No. 3, pp. 385-387,
March 1999.
[8] M. Webster et al., “A statistical analysis of conditioned launch for Gigabit Ethernet links using
multimode fiber”, Journal of Lightwave Technology, Vol. 17, No. 9, pp. 1532-1541, September
1999.
404
PARABOLIC-INDEX MULTIMODE FIBER
Parabolic-Index Multimode Fiber
This component is a multimode fiber with a parabolic refractive index. It is a spatially

dependent component that models the transverse field profiles and propagation
constants for each mode supported by the fiber.
Ports

Modes
Input Input Optical Sampled signals
Parameters
Main
Length 1 km m, km [0, 100000]
Defines the fiber length
Attenuation 2.61 dB/km [0, 1e+010]
Defines the fiber attenuation
Fiber Profile
Core radius 25 um [1, 100]
Defines the fiber core radius
Clad radius 10 um [1, 10000]
Defines the fiber clad radius
Refractive index peak 1.4142 [1, 2]
The peak value of the refractive index for

the parabolic profile
405
Refractive index step 1 % [0.01, 10]
The delta parameter of the refractive

index for the parabolic profile
Number of radial steps 1000 [10, 100000]
The number of steps for the parabolic

profile
Chromatic Dispersion
Include chromatic dispersion NO [YES, NO]
Defines whether chromatic dispersion

effects are included or not
Reference wavelength 820 nm [100, 2000]
Dispersion and dispersion slope are

provided at this reference wavelength
Use Sellmeier approximations YES [YES, NO]
Defines whether Sellmeier

approximations are used or not
The wavelength where the dispersion is

zero. The zero dispersion slope is also
provided for this wavelength.
Zero dispersion slope 0.097 ps/(nm^2.km) [-1e+100,

1e+100]
The dispersion slope at the zero
dispersion wavelength
Dispersion –100 ps/(nm.km) [-1e+100,

1e+100]
Dispersion at the reference wavelength
Dispersion slope 0.5 ps/(nm^2.km) [-1e+100,

1e+100]
Dispersion slope at the reference
wavelength
Numerical
User defined wavelength NO [YES, NO]
Defines whether to calculate the mode

solver at a user defined wavelength or
not
406
Solver wavelength 820 nm [100, 2000]
Mode solver is calculated at this

wavelength
Modal attenuation NO [YES, NO]
Defines whether to load a file with modal

attenuations or no
Attenuation filename Attenuation.dat
The filename with the refractive index

profile
Relative delay YES [YES, NO]
Defines whether the differential mode

delay is absolute or relative
Const. mode power dist. NO [YES, NO]
Defines whether to generate a constant

mode power distribution (MDP) or not
LP(m,n) max. 20, 10
The maximum LP mode index value

when the mode solver is searching for
modes
Min. signal power -100 dBm [-1e+100, 0]
The minimum signal power for a given

mode. Modes will not be attached to
signals with power lower than this value.
Generate overfilled launch NO [YES, NO]
Defines whether to generate an

overfilled fiber launch or not
Generate report YES [YES, NO]
Defines whether to generate a report

with the attributes of the fiber
Report
The summary of fiber attributes,
including number of modes, coupling
coefficients and delays
407
Graphs
Defines whether to calculate graphs or

not
Format Power Phase [Power Phase,

Real Imag]
Defines whether to calculate the graphs
using rectangular or polar format
Wavelength 820 nm [100, 2000]
The reference wavelength for the

graphs
LP(m,n) 0, 1
The LP mode index for the individual

radial and mode profile graphs
Radial graphs YES [YES, NO]
Defines whether to calculate the radial

graphs
Mode number graphs YES [YES, NO]

number graphs
Spatial profile graphs NO [YES, NO]
Defines whether to calculate the spatial

profile graphs
Spatial overfilled graphs NO [YES, NO]

overfilled graphs
Simulation

Graphs

Refractive index profile Radius (m) Refractive index
LP[m,n] index array - m Mode number m
408

LP[m,n] index array - n Mode number n
Group delay Mode number Group delay (ps/km)
Effective index Mode number Effective index
Radial profile - individual a Radius (m) Intensity
Radial profile - individual b Radius (m) Phase (rad)
Spatial profile - individual a X (m) Y (m)
Spatial profile - individual b X (m) Y (m)
Spatial profile - overfilled a X (m) Y (m)
Spatial profile - overfilled b X (m) Y (m)
Power coupling and modal delay Modal delay (s) Power coupling
This component is a multimode fiber with parabolic refractive index (Figure 1). The
parabolic profile is described analytically as [1]:
where n1 is the parameter Refractive peak index at the fiber center, n2 is the refractive
index in the cladding, Δ is the parameter Refractive index step, a is the parameter
Core radius and (b-a) is the parameter Clad radius.
The radial distance from the fiber center r is discretized using the parameter Number
of radial steps.
409
Figure 1 Parabolic refractive index profile
The main result of the fiber calculation is the spatial profile, coupling coefficients and
the time delay for each mode.The signal center frequency for the mode solver
depends on the center frequency of the input signal. The user can force the mode
solver to work at a user defined wavelength by enabling parameter User defined
wavelength.
Additionally, the user can provide a file with the modal attenuation. The modal
attenuation file format is a list with the m and n mode index and the attenuation in
dB/km for polarizations X and Y:
Figure 2 Modal attenuation file
For illustration purposes, in the file above, 4 modes will be attenuated: LP 0, 1 ,

LP 0, 2 , LP 1, 1 and LP –1, 1 . The first mode will be attenuated by 0 dB/km for
both polarizations. The next mode will be attenuated by 500000 dB/Km. The
remaining two modes will be attenuated by 2000 dB/km.
The final solution for the output field of the combined temporal and spatial properties
of the fiber for N number of modes is shown below:
where Ein is the signal input field, ci is the coupling coefficient between the fiber
modes and the spatial profile if the input field and Ei is the fiber mode for each index i.
410
If the power of (ci.Ein) is below the parameter Min. signal power, the signal i is
discarded.
The component has an analytical mode solver that will calculate the LP(m,n) modes.
The parameter LP(m,n) max. defines the maximum order for the radial and azimuthal
indexes m and n when searching for fiber modes. The analytical solution for the field
in the core, for each m and n index is [1]:
where Ea,0 is a scaling factor for the boundary conditions in the core/clad fiber
interface. L is the Laguerre polynomial function, and k0 and ρ are given by:
where λ 0 is the center wavelength. The solution in the clad is given by:
where Eb,0 is a scaling factor for the boundary conditions in the clad/core fiber
interface, K is the modified Bessel function. The propagation constant β m, n is
calculated accordingly to:
There are two main results of this calculation. They are the time delay associated with
each mode and the coupling coefficient between the input spatial fields and each of
the spatial fiber modes. The propagation constant β is used to calculate the time
delay per mode:
411
where L is the fiber length. The coupling coefficient is calculated according to:
where Ei is the spatial profile for each m,n mode, including the sin and cosine factors,
and Ein is the spatial input field.
The user can also generate a constant mode power distribution (MPD). In this case
the coefficients will be constant. Enabling the parameter Generate overfilled launch
can generate an overfilled launch mode.
After the calculation, the parameter Report will have a list of the modes, coupling
coefficients and delays for each mode and polarization.
Another advanced feature of this model is the graph calculations.
By enabling the parameter Calculate graphs, the user can see the results from the
analytical mode solver. The results can include the mode index number for the
calculated modes, the effective index, delays, power coupling, refractive index
profiles, and spatial and radial profiles for the individual and overfilled mode.
The fiber model also includes the chromatic dispersion effects. If chromatic dispersion
is enabled, the user can specify the value of the dispersion and dispersion slope, as
well as Sellmeier.
The parameter Use Sellmeier approximations defines whether to calculate dispersion

and slope from the Sellmeier approximations[2]:
References
York, NY, 1998.
[2] G.D. Brown, "Bandwidth and Rise Time Calculations for Digital multimode Fiber-Optic Data
Links", Journal of Lightwave Technology, VOL. 10, NO 5, May 1992, pp. 672-678.
412
MEASURED-INDEX MULTIMODE FIBER
Measured-Index Multimode Fiber
This component is a general-purpose multimode fiber with user-defined refractive

index profile. It is a spatially dependent component that models the transverse field
profiles and propagation constants for each mode supported by the fiber.
Ports

Modes
Parameters
Main
Length 1 km m, km [0, 100000]
Defines the fiber length
Attenuation 2.61 dB/km [0, 1e+101]
Defines the fiber attenuation
Fiber Profile
OptiFiber file format NO [YES, NO]
Defines whether to load a file generated

by OptiFiber or not
Filename Index.txt

profile
413
Material Properties
Include material properties NO [YES, NO]
Defines whether material properties are

take into consideration in the delay
calculationt
Host material Pure silica Pure silica,
Defines the fiber host material 1.0% fluoride-

doped silica,
3.0% B2O3-
doped silica,
3.1% germania-
doped silica,
9.1% P2O5-
doped silica,
Pure fused GeO2,
Pure P2O5,
Pure silica,
ZBLAN
Host filename HostIndex.txt
File containing the Sellmeier coefficients
Dopant+ material 3.1% germania- Pure silica,

doped silica
Defines the fiber material that has higher 1.0% fluoride-
index due to an index-rising dopant. doped silica,
3.0% B2O3-
doped silica,
3.1% germania-
doped silica,
9.1% P2O5-
doped silica,
Pure fused GeO2,
Pure P2O5,
Pure silica,
ZBLAN
Dopant+ filename DopantIndex.txt
414
Dopant- material 1.0% fluoride- Pure silica,
doped silica
Defines the fiber material that has lower 1.0% fluoride-
index due to an index decreasing doped silica,
dopant.
3.0% B2O3-
doped silica,
3.1% germania-
doped silica,
9.1% P2O5-
doped silica,
Pure fused GeO2,
Pure P2O5,
Pure silica,
ZBLAN
Dopant- filename DopantIndex.txt
Chromatic Dispersion
Include chromatic dispersion NO [YES, NO]
Defines whether chromatic dispersion

effects are included or not
Reference wavelength 820 nm [100, 2000]
Dispersion and dispersion slope are

provided at this reference wavelength
Use Sellmeier approximations YES [YES, NO]
Defines whether Sellmeier

approximations are used or not
The wavelength where the dispersion is

zero. The zero dispersion slope is also
provided at this wavelength.
Zero dispersion slope 0.097 ps/(nm^2.km) [-1e+100,

1e+100]
The dispersion slope at the zero
dispersion wavelength
Dispersion –100 ps/(nm.km) [-1e+100,

1e+100]
Dispersion at the reference wavelength
415
Dispersion slope 0.5 ps/(nm^2.km) [-1e+100,
1e+100]
Dispersion slope at the reference
wavelength
Numerical
User defined wavelength NO [YES, NO]

solver at a user defined wavelength or
not
Solver wavelength 820 nm [100, 2000]
Mode solver is calculated at this

wavelength
Modal attenuation NO [YES, NO]
Defines whether to load a file with modal

attenuations or no
Attenuation filename Attenuation.dat

profile
Relative delay YES [YES, NO]
Defines whether the differential mode

delay is absolute or relative
Const. mode power dist. NO [YES, NO]

mode power distribution (MDP) or not
Modal delay Effective index [Effective index

diff.* diff., Wentzel-
Defines whether to calculate the Kramers-Brillouin,
differential mode delay using Wentzel- Variation
Kramers-Brillouin (WKB) or not principle]
LP(m,n) max. 20, 10 [0, 1000]
The maximum LP mode index value

when the mode solver is searching for
modes
Min. signal power -100 dBm [-1e+100, 0]
The minimum signal power for a given

mode. Modes will not be attached to
signals with power lower than this value.
416
Mode solver LP LP, OptiFiber
Solver tolerance 1e-014 [1e-100, 0.1]
Solver step size 1.5e-005 [1e-100, 1]
Solver sample rate 25 1/um [10, 1000]
Generate overfilled launch NO [YES, NO]
Defines whether to generate an

overfilled fiber launch or not
Generate report YES [YES, NO]
Defines whether to generate a report

with the attributes of the fiber
Report
The summary of fiber attributes,
including number of modes, coupling
coefficients and delays
Graphs
Defines whether to calculate graphs or

not
Format Power Phase [Power Phase,

Real Imag]
Defines whether to calculate the graphs
Wavelength 820 nm [100, 2000]
The reference wavelength for the

graphs
LP(m,n) 0, 1 [0, 1000]
The LP mode index for the individual

radial and mode profile graphs
Radial graphs YES [YES, NO]
Defines whether to calculate the radial

graphs
Mode number graphs YES [YES, NO]

number graphs
417
Spatial profile graphs NO [YES, NO]

profile graphs
Spatial overfilled graphs NO [YES, NO]

overfilled graphs
Simulation

Graphs

Refractive index profile Radius (m) Refractive index
LP[m,n] index array - m Mode number m
LP[m,n] index array - n Mode number n
Group delay Mode number Group delay (ps/km)
Effective index Mode number Effective index
Radial profile - individual a Radius (m) Intensity
Radial profile - individual b Radius (m) Phase (rad)
Spatial profile - individual a X (m) Y (m)
Spatial profile - individual b X (m) Y (m)
Spatial profile - overfilled a X (m) Y (m)
Spatial profile - overfilled b X (m) Y (m)
Power coupling and modal delay Modal delay (s) Power coupling
This component is a general-purpose multimode fiber with a user-defined index
profile. The user should provide the fiber refractive index as an input file.
418
The main result of the fiber calculation is the spatial profile, coupling coefficients and
the time delay for each mode. The final solution for the output field of the combined
temporal and spatial properties of the fiber for N number of modes is:
where Ein is the signal input field, ci is the coupling coefficient between the fiber
modes and the spatial profile if the input field and Ei is the fiber mode for each index
i. If the power of (ci.Ein) is below the parameter Min. signal power, the signal i is
discarded.
The component has a numerical mode solver that will calculate the LP(m,n) modes
and the propagation constants. The parameter LP(m,n) max. defines the maximum
order for the radial and azimuthal indexes m and n when searching for fiber modes.
The signal center frequency for the mode solver depends on the center frequency of
the input signal. The user can force the mode solver to work at a user defined
wavelength by enabling parameter User defined wavelength.
The parameter OptiFiber file format defined whether the refractive index file was
generated by Optiwave OptiFiber[2] (or Fiber_CAD) software tool. The refractive
index file format is a list with the radial position from the center of the fiber to the clad,
and the real value of the refractive index. The radial position should be provided in
microns:
Figure 1 File with fiber profile, radius (first column) should be given in microns
419
IMPORTANT: the first radial position should be different from zero.
If the OptiFiber format is enabled, the file should also include the header and the
number of radial points (Figure 2).
Figure 2 File with fiber profile using OptiFiber format, radius (first column) should be given in microns
There are two main results of this calculation, the time delay associated with each
mode, and the coupling coefficient between the input spatial fields and each of the
spatial fiber modes. Additionally, the user can provide a file with the modal
attenuation. The modal attenuation file format is a list with the m and n mode index
and the attenuation in dB/km for polarizations X and Y:
Figure 3 Modal attenuation file
For illustration purposes, in the file above, 4 modes will be attenuated: LP 0, 1 ,

LP 0, 2 , LP 1, 1 and LP –1, 1 . The first mode will be attenuated by 0 dB/km for
both polarizations. The next mode will be attenuated by 500000 dB/Km. The
remaining two modes will be attenuated by 2000 dB/km.
420
The propagation constant β is used to calculate the time delay per mode. There are
three options to calculate the delay. The first option uses the Wentzel-Kramers-
Brillouin method:
where n1 is the peak value of the refractive index, L is the fiber length, c is the speed
of light and λ 0 is the center wavelength.
The second method is to apply the derivative of the effective index directly to calculate
the delay:
The derivative method includes the material dispersion in the calculation if the
material properties is enabled.
The third method is to apply the variation principle to calculate the delay, avoiding the
numerical errors of the derivative:
The coupling coefficient is calculated according to:
where Ei is the spatial profile for each m,n mode, including the sin and cosine factors,
and Ein is the spatial input field.
421
The user can also generate a constant mode power distribution (MPD). In this case
the coefficients will be constant. Enabling the parameter Generate overfilled launch
can generate an overfilled launch mode.
After the calculation, the parameter Report will have a list of the modes, coupling
coefficients, and delays for each mode and polarization.
Another advanced feature of this model is the graph calculations.
By enabling the parameter Calculate graphs, the user can see the results from the
analytical mode solver. The results can include the mode index number for the
calculated modes, the effective index, delays, power coupling, the refractive index
profile, and spatial and radial profiles for the individual and overfilled mode.
The fiber model also includes the chromatic dispersion effects. If chromatic dispersion
is enabled, the user can specify the value of the dispersion and dispersion slope, as
well as Sellmeier approximations.
The parameter Use Sellmeier approximations defines whether to calculate dispersion

and slope from the Sellmeier approximations[3]:
Material parameters
The Material Properties tab allows the specification of the material dispersion model
based on the Sellmeier theory. The fiber uses six Sellmeier coefficients, three
wavelengths and three amplitudes, to define the dispersion curve.
Sellmeier formula
The Sellmeier formula reads:
422
2 2 2
2 A1 ⋅ λ A2 ⋅ λ A3 ⋅ λ
n ( λ ) – 1 = ----------------
2
- + ----------------
2 2
- + ----------------
2 2
-
2
λ – λ1 λ – λ2 λ – λ3
Where n is the wavelength-dependent refractive index, A1, A2, and A3 are the
Sellmeier amplitudes, and λ1, λ2 and λ3 are the Sellmeier resonance wavelengths.
The material properties can be defined by a file containing the Sellmeier coefficients
for that materia. The file format must be similar to the following example
Figure 4 Material properties file
Where thefirst column presents the wavelength Sellmeier coefficients, while the
second one has the Sellmeier amplitude coefficients.
References
[1] A. Ghatak, K. Thyagarajan, Introduction to Fiber Optics, Cambridge University Press, New
York, NY, 1998.
[2] OptiFiber 1.5 documentation, Optiwave Corporation, www.optiwave.com.
[3] G.D. Brown, "Bandwidth and Rise Time Calculations for Digital Multimode Fiber-Optic Data
Links", Journal of Lightwave Technology, VOL. 10, NO 5, May 1992, pp. 672-678.
423
Notes:
424
Free Space Optics Library
• FSO Channel
• OWC Channel
425
Notes:
426
FSO CHANNEL
FSO Channel
This component models a free space optics (FSO) channel. It is a subsystem of two
telescopes and the free space channel between them.
Ports

Modes
Output Output Optical Sample signals
Parameters
Main
Range 1 km m, km [0, 1e+100]
The distance between the transmitter

and the receiver telescopes
Attenuation 25 dB/km - [0, 1e+100]
The attenuation caused by atmospheric

effects
Geometrical loss True - - True, False
Define whether calculate the

geometrical loss or not
Transmitter aperture diameter 5 cm mm, cm, m [0, 1e+100]
The aperture diameter of the transmitter

telescope
Receiver aperture diameter 20 cm mm, cm, m [0, 1e+100]
The aperture diameter of the receiver

telescope
427
FSO CHANNEL
Beam divergence 2 mrad - [0, 1e+100]
1/e for Gaussian beams, FWHM for flat

top beams
Transmitter loss 0 dB - [0, 1e+100]
Fiber-telescope coupling and transmitter

efficiency losses
Receiver loss 0 dB - [0, 1e+100]
Telescope-fiber coupling and receiver

efficiency losses
Additional losses 0 dB - [0, 1e+100]
Losses due to scintillation, mispointing,

etc.
Propagation delay 0 ps/km - [0, 1e+100]
Signal propagation delay
Enhanced
Intensity scintillation False - - True, False
Determines whether or not to add

scintillation to the channel
Frequency 1550 nm - -
Index refraction structure 5e-015 m^-2/3 m^-2/3 [0, 1e+100]
Parameter for optical propagation in the

atmosphere
Coherence time Time window s s, ms, ns [0, 1e+100]
The duration of the quasi-static channel
Simulation

428
FSO CHANNEL
Discrete delay True - - True, False
If the parameter Discrete delay is true,

the delay is rounded to a multiple of the
sampling period, otherwise the time shift
property of the Fourier transform is
applied using the exact delay value
Random Numbers
Generate random seed True - - True, False
Determines if the seed is automatically
defined and unique
Random seed index 0 - - [0, 4999]
User-defined seed index for noise

generation
This component allows for simulation of free space optical links [1][2][3]. The
component is a subsystem of transmitter telescope, free space and receiver
telescope. Parameter Range defines the propagation distance between transmitter
and receiver telescope. The attenuation of the laser power in depends on two main
parameters: Attenuation and Geometrical loss. The first parameter describes the
attenuation of the laser power in the atmosphere. The second parameter, Geometrical
loss, occurs due to the spreading of the transmitted beam between the transmitter
and the receiver.
The link equation is [1]:
2 R
dR – α ------
10 (1)
P Received = P Transmitted -------------------------2- 10
( d T + θR )
Where:
dR : Receiver aperture diameter (m)
dT : Transmitter aperture diameter (m)
θ: Beam divergence (mrad)

R : Range (km)
α: Atmospheric attenuation (dB/km)

The user can also specify the transmitter and receiver losses due to fiber-telescope
interface and coupling efficiencies (parameters Transmitter loss and Receiver loss).
429
FSO CHANNEL
Additional losses due to scintillation, mispointing, and others can be specified by the
parameter Additional losses. Parameter Propagation delay allows for calculation of
the delay between transmitter and receiver.
If parameter Intensity scintillation is enabled, a Gamma-Gamma distribution[4][5][6] is

used to model atmospheric fading. In this case the probability of a given intensity I
is:
(α + β) ⁄ 2
2 ( αβ ) (α + β) ⁄ 2 – 1 (2)
P ( I ) = ---------------------------------- I K α – β ( 2 αβI )
Γ ( α )Γ ( β )
where 1 ⁄ α and 1 ⁄ β are the variances of the small and large scale eddies,
respectively [4], Γ ( … ) is the Gamma function and K α – β ( … ) is the modified
Bessel function of the second kind.
2
0.49σ R (3)
α = exp ---------------------------------------------
- –1
12 ⁄ 5 5 ⁄ 6
( 1 + 1.11σ R )
2
0.51σ R (4)
β = exp ---------------------------------------------
- –1
12 ⁄ 5 5 ⁄ 6
( 1 + 0.69σ R )
The Rytov variance is calculated from:
2 2 7 ⁄ 6 11 ⁄ 6 (5)
σ R = 1.23C n k z
2
where C n is the parameter Index refraction structure, k is the optical wavenumber
and z is the parameter Range. Channel time variations are considered according to
the theoretical quasi-static model, also called the frozen channel model. By this
model, channel fading is considered to be constant over the duration of a frame of
symbols (Coherence time), changing to a new independent value from one frame to
next.
430
FSO CHANNEL
References
[1] S. Bloom, E. Korevaar, J. Schuster, H. Willebrand, 'Understanding the performance of free-
space optics', Journal of Optical Networking. Vol. 2, No. 6, pp. 178-200, June 2003.
[2] D. Killinger, 'Free Space Optics for Laser Communication through the Air', Optics and Photonics
News , pp. 36-42, October 2002
[3] I. I. Kim et al, "Wireless optical transmission of fast Ethernet, FDDI, ATM and ESCON protocol
data using the TerraLink laser communication system" Optical Engineering, vol. 37, no. 12, pp.
3143-3155, December 1998
[4] Larry C. Andrews, Ronald L. Phillips, Laser Beam Propagation Through Random Media, 2nd
edition, SPIE Press Book, 2005
[5] Larry C. Andrews, Ronald L. Phillips, Cynthia Y. Hopen, Laser Beam Scintillation with
Applications, SPIE Press Book, 2001
[6] Farid, A.A., Hranilovic, S, "Outage Capacity Optimization for Free-Space Optical Links With
Pointing Errors", Journal of Lightwave Technology, vol. 25, no. 7, pp. 1702-1710, July 2007
431
FSO CHANNEL
Notes:
432
OWC CHANNEL
OWC Channel
This component models an optical wireless communication (OWC) channel. It is a

subsystem of two telescopes and the wireless communication channel between them.
Ports

Modes
Output Output Optical Sample signals
Parameters
Main
Range 200 km m, km [0, 1e+100]
The distance between the transmitter

and the receiver telescopes
Free space path loss True - - True, False
Define whether to include free space

path loss or not
Geometrical gain True - - True, False
Define whether to calculate the

geometrical gain or not
Transmitter aperture diameter 15 cm mm, cm, m [0, 1e+100]
The aperture diameter of the transmitter

telescope
Receiver aperture diameter 15 cm mm, cm, m [0, 1e+100]
The aperture diameter of the receiver

telescope
433
OWC CHANNEL
Transmitter gain 0 dB - [0, 1e+100]
Fiber-telescope transmitter gain
Receiver gain 0 dB - [0, 1e+100]
Telescope-fiber receiver gain
Transmitter optics efficiency 1 - - [0, 1]
Fiber-telescope transmitter efficiency
Receiver optics efficiency 1 - - [0, 1]
Telescope-fiber receiver efficiency
Transmitter pointing error angle 0 urad urad, mrad, rad [0, 1e+100]
Telescope transmitter pointing error
Receiver pointing error angle 0 urad urad, mrad, rad [0, 1e+100]
Receiver telescope pointing error
Attenuation 0 dB/km - [0, 1e+100]
The attenuation caused by atmospheric

effects
Additional losses 0 dB - [0, 1e+100]
Losses due to scintillation, mispointing,

etc.
Propagation delay 0 ps/km - [0, 1e+100]
Signal propagation delay
Enhanced
Intensity scintillation False - - True, False
Determines whether or not to add

scintillation to the channel
Index refraction structure 5e-015 m^-2/3 m^-2/3 [0, 1e+100]
Parameter for optical propagation in the

atmosphere
Coherence time Time window s s, ms, ns [0, 1e+100]
The duration of the quasi-static channel
434
OWC CHANNEL
Simulation

Discrete delay True - - True, False

If the parameter Discrete delay is true,
the delay is rounded to a multiple of the
sampling period, otherwise the time shift
property of the Fourier transform is
applied using the exact delay value
Random Numbers

defined and unique
Random seed index 0 - - [0, 4999]

generation
This component allows for simulation of free space optical links [1][2]. The component
is a subsystem of transmitter telescope, optical wireless communication channel and
receiver telescope. The optical signal received at the receiver is given by:
λ 2
P R = P T η T η R ⎛⎝ ----------⎞⎠ G T G R L T L R
(1)
4πZ
where P T is the transmitter optical power; η T is the optics efficiency of the

transmitter; η R is the optics efficiency of the receiver; λ is the wavelength; Z is
the distance between the transmitter and the receiver, given by the parameter Range;
G T is the transmitter telescope gain; G R is the receiver telescope gain; and L T ,
L R are the transmitter and the receiver pointing loss factor, respectively.
The term in parentheses is the free-space loss and it can be removed from the
equation if parameter Free space path loss is disabled. Parameter Geometrical gain
435
OWC CHANNEL
defines whether the user will enter the transmitter and receiver gain directly or
estimate the gain for a diffraction-limited beam. The gain that can be expressed by:
πD T 2
G T ≈ ⎛ ----------⎞
(2)
⎝ λ ⎠
where D T is the transmitter telescope diameter. Similarly, the receiver telescope gain
that can be expressed by:
πD R 2
G R ≈ ⎛ ----------⎞
(3)
⎝ λ ⎠
where D R is the receiver telescope diameter.
Most systems use a narrow-beam-divergence angle laser transmitter and narrow field
of view receiver; hence small mispointing can cause signal loss. The approximation
transmitter pointing loss factor is given by:
2 (4)
L T = exp ( – G T θ T )
where θ T is transmitter azimuth pointing error angle, and the approximation receiver
pointing loss factor by:
2 (5)
L R = exp ( – G R θ R )
where θ R is receiver azimuth pointing error angle.
Additional losses due to scintillation, mispointing, and others can be specified by the
parameter Additional losses. Parameter Propagation delay allows for calculation of
the delay between transmitter and receiver.
If parameter Intensity scintillation is enabled, a Gamma-Gamma distribution [3][4][5]

is used to model atmospheric fading. In this case the probability of a given intensity
I is:
(α + β) ⁄ 2
2 ( αβ ) (α + β) ⁄ 2 – 1 (6)
P ( I ) = ---------------------------------- I K α – β ( 2 αβI )
Γ ( α )Γ ( β )
436
OWC CHANNEL
where 1 ⁄ α and 1 ⁄ β are the variances of the small and large scale eddies,
respectively [3], Γ ( … ) is the Gamma function and K α – β ( … ) is the modified
Bessel function of the second kind.
2
0.49σ R (7)
α = exp ---------------------------------------------
- –1
12 ⁄ 5 5 ⁄ 6
( 1 + 1.11σ R )
2
0.51σ R (8)
β = exp ---------------------------------------------
- –1
12 ⁄ 5 5 ⁄ 6
( 1 + 0.69σ R )
The Rytov variance is calculated from:
2 2 7 ⁄ 6 11 ⁄ 6 (9)
σ R = 1.23C n k z
2
where C n is the parameter Index refraction structure, k is the optical wavenumber
and z is the parameter Range. Channel time variations are considered according to
the theoretical quasi-static model, also called the frozen channel model. By this
model, channel fading is considered to be constant over the duration of a frame of
symbols (Coherence time), changing to a new independent value from one frame to
next.
References
[1] A. Polishuk, S. Arnon, 'Optimization of a laser satellite communication system with an optical
preamplifier', J. Optical Society of America. Vol. 21, No. 7, pp 1307-1315, July 2004..
[2] S. Arnon, 'Performance of a laser satellite network with an optical preamplifier', J. Optical
Society of America. Vol. 22, No. 4, pp 708-715, April 2005.
[3] Larry C. Andrews, Ronald L. Phillips, Laser Beam Propagation Through Random Media, 2nd
edition, SPIE Press Book, 2005
[4] Larry C. Andrews, Ronald L. Phillips, Cynthia Y. Hopen, Laser Beam Scintillation with
Applications, SPIE Press Book, 2001
[5] Farid, A.A., Hranilovic, S, "Outage Capacity Optimization for Free-Space Optical Links With
Pointing Errors", Journal of Lightwave Technology, vol. 25, no. 7, pp. 1702-1710, July 2007
437
OWC CHANNEL
Notes:
438
Receivers Library
Multimode
• Mode Combiner
• Mode Selector
439
Notes:
440
MODE COMBINER
Mode Combiner
This component combines multiple signals with transverse mode profiles into one
single-mode signal.
Ports

Modes
Parameters
Simulation

This component combined the time-dependent waveform of multiple modes into one
single-mode signal. It assumes that the spatial fields attached to each waveform are
orthogonal.
441
MODE COMBINER
Notes:
442
MODE SELECTOR
Mode Selector
This new component extracts a single mode from a multimode signal.
Ports

Modes
Parameters
Simulation
Individual mode number 0 [0,+INF[
Specifies the individual mode number
Centered at max power YES [YES, NO]
Determines whether the internal filter

will be centered at the maximum
amplitude of the signal or if it will be
user-defined
Center wavelength 820 nm Hz, THz, nm [100, 2000]
User-defined center frequency for the

internal filter
Simulation

443
MODE SELECTOR
This new component extracts a single mode from a multimode signal. The user can
select the mode index and the mode wavelength.
444
MODE SELECTOR
Receivers Library
Regenerators
• Clock Recovery
• Data Recovery
• 3R Regenerator
• Electronic Equalizer
• MLSE Equalizer
• Integrate And Dump
• Voltage-Controlled Oscillator
445
MODE SELECTOR
Notes:
446
CLOCK RECOVERY
Clock Recovery
Compensates the time delay between the original signal at the reference port and the
signal that is received at the input port.
Ports

Reference Input Electrical
Parameters
Simulation

Results

Signal delay s
Signal delay samples
The time delay is calculated from cross-correlation of the reference signal and the
received signal. The signal is then shifted in time.
447
CLOCK RECOVERY
Notes:
448
DATA RECOVERY
Data Recovery
This component recovers the binary data from the electrical signal. It can be used in
3R generators for the data recovery stage.
Ports

Parameters
Main
Reference bit rate Bit rate Bits/s Bits/s [0,+INF[
Reference bit rate to use for the decision MBits/s

instant calculation
GBits/s
User defined delay False — — True, false

Defines whether the user can define the
delay compensation or not
Delay compensation 0 s s, ms, ns ]-INF,+INF[
Delay to apply to the signal input
User defined decision False — — True, false

Defines whether the component will
automatically calculate the decision
instant or it will be defined by the user
Decision instant 0.5 Bit — [0,1]

Value for the decision instant to use
when recovering the bit sequence
449
DATA RECOVERY
User defined threshold False — — True, false
Defines whether the component will be

automatically calculated or will be user-
defined
Absolute threshold 0.5 a.u. — ]-INF,+INF[
Value for the threshold to use when

recovering the bit sequence
Export

value range
Export mode None — None, All,
Marks, Spaces
Determines the type and if the values at decision instant will be
exported or not
Filename Export.dat — —
The destination file name for the data exported
Random numbers

value range
This component allows the user to recover a bit sequence from an electrical signal. In
order to recover the bit sequence, the user should provide the signal bit rate, given by
the parameter Reference bit rate. The decision instant and the threshold level can be
defined by the user or automatically calculated by this component. If the parameter
User defined decision is disabled, the model automatically estimates the decision
instant by generating internally an eye diagram and searching for the maximum
opening for the eye amplitude. The time instant with the maximum opening is the
decision instant, this method is valid for RZ and NRZ modulation types. The user can
disable the searching and enter directly the value of the decision instant by disabling
User defined decision and entering the instant using the parameter Decision instant.
If the parameter User defined threshold is disabled, the threshold is calculated at the
decision instant, by searching for the maximum eye opening. The threshold value will
be at the center of the maximum eye opening. The user can disable the searching and
450
DATA RECOVERY
enter directly the value of the threshold by disabling User defined threshold and
entering the threshold using the parameter Absolute threshold.
The parameter Delay compensation allows the user to compensate the propagation
delays of the input signal by enabling the parameter User defined delay. If the
parameter User defined delay is disable, the delay will be estimated by comparing the
input signal with a signal generated by the internal clock.
If parameter Export mode is different from None the value at each decision instant is
exported to a file. The user can select to save all values (All), Marks or only Spaces.
451
DATA RECOVERY
452
3R REGENERATOR
3R Regenerator
This component regenerates an electrical signal.
Ports

Reference signal Output Electrical
Parameters
Main

instant calculation
GBits/s
User defined delay False — — True, false

delay compensation or not
User defined decision False — — True, false


453
3R REGENERATOR
User defined threshold False — — True, false
Defines whether the component will be

automatically calculated or will be user-
defined
Absolute threshold 0.5 a.u. — ]-INF,+INF[

This component regenerates an electrical signal. It generates the original bit
sequence, and a modulated electrical signal to be used for BER analysis. It is a
subsystem based on the Data Recovery component and a NRZ Pulse Generator.
This first output port is the bit sequence, the second one is a modulated NRZ signal
and the last output is a copy of the input signal. These three signals can be connected
directly to the BER Analyzer, avoiding additional connections between transmitter and
the receiver stage.
The following system shows a conventional connection between the BER Analyzer in
the receiver stage with the transmitter stage, 2 additional connections are required
between the transmitter and the BER Analyzer.
454
3R REGENERATOR
By using the 3R Regenerator, there is no need for connections between the

transmitter and the BER Analyzer. This is especially important for WDM systems,
where you have with multiple transmitters, receivers and BER Analyzers. For more
information, see “Spatial CW Laser”.
455
3R REGENERATOR
Notes:
456
ELECTRONIC EQUALIZER
Electronic Equalizer
This component is an electronic equalizer. It can work as a fractionally or spaced feed-

forward equalizer (FFE), decision-feedback equalizer (DFE) or the combination of
both. A least mean square (LMS) algorithm is used to update the filter tap coefficients
Ports

Modes
Input Input Electrical Sampled signals
Training Input Electrical Sampled signals
Output Output Electrical Sampled signals
Parameters
Main
instant calculation and tap delays
GBits/s
Update taps coefficients False True, False
Define whether update the tap

coefficients using the LMS algorithm
Linear feedback True True, False
Define whether use the decision or

linear output as the DFE input
Decision output False True, False
Define whether use the decision or

linear output as the equalizer output
457
LMS
Limit training sequence length False [True, False
Define whether calculate the sequence

length from the training input signal of
limit to a user defined value
Training sequence length 100 [0, 1e+100]
User defined sequence length
Step size 0.03 [0, 1e+100]
Step size for the LMS algorithm
Leakage factor 1 [0, 1e+100]
Leakage factor for the LMS algorithm
Report
The summary of filter tap coefficients
before and after training and calculation
Decision stage
High level input 1 (a.u) [-1e+100,1e+100]
(HLI) Value for the high level input in the

decision stage
Low level input 0 (a.u) [-1e+100,1e+100]
(LVI) Value for the low level input in the

decision stage
Absolute threshold 0.5 (a.u) [-1e+100,1e+100]

recovering the bit sequence. Typically
(HLI + LVI) / 2
Decision instant 0.5 Bit [0,1]

Forward taps
Forward taps space 1 [1, 100]
The inverse of the tap delay ratio. It is a

spaced equalizer if value is equal to one
or a fractionally spaced otherwise
458
Forward taps coefficients 3 [0, 10000]
Number of forward taps coefficients
Forward[0].real 1 [-1e+100,1e+100]
Real part of the first tap coefficient
Forward[0].imag 0 [-1e+100,1e+100]
Imaginary part of the first tap coefficient
... [-1e+100,1e+100]
Feedback taps
Feedback taps coefficients 3 [0, 10000]
Number of feedback taps coefficients
Feedback[0].real 1 [-1e+100,1e+100]
Real part of the first tap coefficient
Feedback[0].imag 0 [-1e+100,1e+100]
Imaginary part of the first tap coefficient
... [-1e+100,1e+100]
Graphs
Calculate graphs YES [YES, NO]
Determines whether calculate the error

level graphs for the output and training
signal
Simulation
Enable YES [YES, NO]

459
Graphs

Training error Bits Error level (a.u.)
Calculation error Bits Error level (a.u.)
An electronic equalizer attempts to mitigate intersymbol interference (ISI) caused by
time-dispersive channels, such as chromatic dispersion and polarization mode
dispersion (PMD) in single mode fibers [1], or differential mode delay (DMD) in
multimode fibers [2].
This component can work as a fractionally or spaced feed-forward equalizer (FFE),

decision-feedback equalizer (DFE) or the combination of both. A least mean square
(LMS) algorithm is used to update the filter tap coefficients.
The signal input x(t) is filtered by a forward filter, or a linear equalizer. Parameter
Forward taps coefficients define the number of forward tap coefficients for the filter.
Forward taps space defines the tap spaces, or the K parameter in the schematic
bellow. If K is greater than one the filter is fractionally spaced.
Figure 1 Equalizer schematic
460
At the output of the forward filter, the output signal y'(t) goes to a decision stage where
the signal is detected based on the parameters Threshold and Decision instant. The
detected signal will have values of high and low level depending on parameters High
level and Low level.
Parameter Decision output defines if the output signal y(t) is y'(t) or the detected
signal yd(t). The user can also select whether the input to the feedback filter stage is
the detected signal yd(t) or the linear signal y'(t) (parameter Linear feedback).
The training input signal is used to calculate the filter coefficients, based on the LMS
algorithm, where the error is calculated according to:
e k = y' k – d k (1)
The filter taps (w) coefficients are updated according to
w k + 1 = w k l + Δu k∗ e k (2)
Where l is the parameter Leakage factor and Δ is the parameter Step size. The user
can disable the filter updates by setting parameter Update taps coefficients to false.
By default, the equalizer will estimate the filter coefficients using the training
sequence. The user can limit the training sequence to a value defined by the
parameter Training sequence length. If the user wants to disable the training simply
set this parameter to zero or connect the training input to a electrical null component.
The values for the error level ek are available in two graphs. The first graphs plots the
error values versus for the training sequence, the second graph plots the error values
for the detected signal.
The user can provide the tap coefficients as an initial value for the equalizer, or the
component can also be used as a linear FIR filter by disabling Update tap coefficients
and limiting the training sequence length to zero. Alternatively, setting the Step size
to zero also disables the updating of the tap coefficients and the initial values will not
change during the calculation.
Parameter Report presents the values of the filter coefficients before and after the
training, and at the end of the calculation.
References
[1] J. Wang and J. M. Kahn, 'Performance of electrical equalizers in optically amplified OOK and
DPSK systems', IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett. 16, 5, pp. 1397-1399, May 2004
[2] H. Wu et al, "Integrated transversal equalizers in high-speed fiber-optic systems," IEEE J. Solid-
State Circuits, vol. 38, no. 12, pp. 2131-2137, Dec. 2002.
461
Notes:
462
MLSE EQUALIZER
MLSE Equalizer
This component is a MLSE (maximum likelihood sequence estimate) electronic

equalizer. The component uses the Viterbi algorithm to equalize the input signal
through a dispersive channel. The channel estimation is implemented as a FIR filter,
with the initial tap coefficients provided by the user.
Ports

Modes
Input Input Electrical Sampled signals
Output Output Electrical Sampled signals
Parameters
Main
Reference bit rate Bit rate Bits/s Bits/s [0, 1e100]

instant calculation and tap delays
GBits/s
Samples per bit 8 — — [1, 1e100]

The number of samples per bit used by
the equalizer
Traceback length True — — [1, 1000000]
The number of bits, or trellis branches

used in the Viterbi algorithm
High level input 1 a.u. — [-1e100, 1e100]
(HLI) Value for the high level input

modulation
Low level input 0 a.u. — [-1e100, 1e100]
(LVI) Value for the low level input

modulation
463
MLSE EQUALIZER
FIR channel estimates
Number of coefficients 8 — — [0, 10000]
Number of FIR coefficients that will be

used in the calculation
Coefficients real imag 1x2 — — [-1e+100,1e+100]
Table with real and imaginary part of

complex coefficients
Filename FIR.dat — — —
Filename with list of coefficients
Preample
Preamble vector — — —
Specifies the preamble that is expect to

precede the data in the input signal
Postamble vector — — —
Specifies the postamble that is expect to

follow the data in the input signal
Simulation
Enable True True, False

An electronic equalizer attempts to mitigate intersymbol interference (ISI) caused by
time-dispersive channels, such as chromatic dispersion and polarization mode
dispersion (PMD) in single mode fibers [1].
This component is a MLSE (maximum likelihood sequence estimate) electronic

equalizer [2]. The component uses the Viterbi algorithm to equalize the input signal
through a dispersive channel. The channel estimation is implemented as a FIR filter,
with the initial tap coefficients provided by the user
The signal input x(t) is resampled based on the parameters Reference bit rate and
Samples per bit. The resampled signal is then filtered by the FIR filter using the
channel coefficients. The number of coefficients must be a multiple of the number of
samples per bit. If the number of coefficients is not a multiple the component will add
464
MLSE EQUALIZER
zero value coefficients to the FIR filter until the number of coefficients is a multiple of
the number of samples per bit.
Figure 1 Equalizer schematic
Parameters Low and High level input defines the constellation of the signal
modulation.
The user can provide the filter coefficients directly by using the parameter Coefficients
real imag; alternatively the measurements can be loaded from a file using the
parameter Filename. The real and imaginary part of the complex coefficients, or only
the real part, must be provided in the file containing one column (real part only), or two
columns, where the first one refers to the real part and the second one to the
imaginary part of the complex coefficient.
References
[1] F. Buchali, G. Thielecke, and H. Bulow, "Viterbi equalizer for mitigation of distortions from
chromatic dispersion and PMD at 10 Gb/s," OFC'2004, vol.1, Paper MF-85, Feb. 2004.
[2] J. G. Proakis, Digital Communications, 3rd ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1995.
465
MLSE EQUALIZER
Notes:
466
INTEGRATE AND DUMP
Integrate And Dump
This component creates a cumulative sum of the discrete-time input signal. It also
resets the sum to zero according to a user defined time period.
Ports

Reset Input Electrical
Parameters
Main
Reset threshold 0 a.u. — [-1e100, 1e100]
The reset signal amplitude that resets

the integrator
Feedback gain 1 — — [-1e100, 1e100]
Gain of the feedback loop
Initial state 0 — — [-1e100, 1e100]
The initial value of the integrator before

the calculation begins
Limiter False — — True, False
Determines whether or not the internal

limiter is enabled
Saturate True — — True, False
Determines whether or not to saturate

the signal
Minimum amplitude 0 a.u. — [-1e100, 1e100]
Limiter’s minimum value
467
INTEGRATE AND DUMP
Maximum amplitude 1 a.u. — [-1e100, 1e100]
Limiter’s maximum value
Simulation

The Integrate and Dump component integrates the input signal in the specified time
window. The following equation describes the integration process:
(1)
S Out ( i ) = K ⋅ S Out ( i – 1 ) + S In ( i )
Where S Out is the output signal, S In is the input signal, K is the Feedback gain
parameter. The initial state of the integrator is defined by the Initial state parameter.
The integration can be reset by the control signal, where the reset threshold
parameter defines in which control signal value the integration will be reset. At each
reset time, the component sends the result to the output port, and then clears the
internal state for the next step of integration.
There is the option to introduce limits to the output signal, which are defined by the
parameters Minimum amplitude and Maximum amplitude. To introduce these limits
the Limiter parameter has to be set to TRUE. In this case the output signal can be
saturated or not when it reaches the limits. When the Saturation parameter is FALSE
the component is reset every time the limit is reached.
468
VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR
Voltage-Controlled Oscillator
The component simulates an electronic oscillator designed to be controlled in

oscillation frequency by a voltage input.
Ports

Control Input Electrical
Parameters
Main
Amplitude 2 V. V [1e-12, +INF]
Amplitude of the signal at the VCO

output
VCO sensitivity 100 MHz/V MHz/V [1e-12, +INF]
Defines the VCO average tuning

sensitivity
Minimum frequency 500 MHz Hz,MHz,GHz,THz [1e-12, 1e6]
Defines the oscillator minimum

frequency
Maximum Frequency 1000 MHz Hz,MHz,GHz,THz [1e-12, 1e6]
Defines the oscillator maximum

frequency
VCO Frequency 750 MHz Hz,MHz,GHz,THz [1e-12, 10e6]
Defines the carrier frequency
469
Simulation

Sample rate Sample rate Hz Hz, GHz, THz [0,+INF[
The VCO component creates a signal that oscillates at a frequency determined by the
input voltage. The instantaneous frequency is defined by:
(1)
F ( t ) = S ⋅ V ( t ) + FC
Where V ( t ) is the input signal, F ( t ) is the frequency of the output signal, S is

the VCO sensitivity parameter and F C is the carrier frequency. F min and
F max are the parameters Minimum and Maximum frequency respectively.
470
Receivers Library
Detectors
• Optical Chirp Detector
• Optical Phase Detector
• Optical Power Detector
471
Notes:
472
OPTICAL CHIRP DETECTOR
Optical Chirp Detector
Converts the received optical signal chirp into electrical signal amplitude.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Rescale True - True, False
Determines whether the output signal will be scaled or not
Min. amplitude 0 a.u. ]-INF,+INF[
Minimum electrical signal amplitude at the output port
Max. amplitude 1 a.u. ]-INF,+INF[
Maximum electrical signal amplitude at the output port
Downsampling

value range
Centered at max power True - - True, False
Determines whether the internal filter will be

centered at the maximum amplitude of the signal
or if it will be user-defined
Center frequency 193.1 THz Hz, THz, nm [30, 3e5]
User-defined center frequency for the internal

filter
473

value range
Sample rate 5*(Sample rate) Hz Hz, GHz, THz, [0,+INF[
nm
Internal filter bandwidth
Polarization

value range
Polarization X - X, Y
Determines if the chirp from the polarization X or Y of the optical

signal will be converted to amplitude
Random numbers

value range
The incoming optical signal and noise bins are filtered by an ideal rectangle filter to
reduce the number of samples in the electrical signal. The new sample rate is defined
by the parameter Sample rate. You can define the center frequency, or it can be
calculated automatically by centering the filter at the optical channels with maximum
power.
Optical noise bins are converted to gaussian noise inside the signal bandwidth. You
must supply the polarization for the chirp extraction. The signal frequency (chirp) is
then normalized in the range between the parameters Min. and Max. amplitude if
parameter Rescale is enabled.
474
Figure 1 Filtered signal
The converter resamples the signal and converts the noise bins. They are added in
time domain.
Figure 2 shows the chirp detection of the X polarization component of the input optical
signal when the Rescale parameter is not enabled.
Figure 2 Optical chirp detection
475
Notes:
476
OPTICAL PHASE DETECTOR
Optical Phase Detector
Converts the received optical signal phase into electrical signal amplitude.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Min. amplitude 0 a.u. [-1e+100, -

1e+100]
Max. amplitude 1 a.u. [-1e+100, -

1e+100]
Downsampling

value unit range
Determines whether the internal filter will be centered

at the maximum amplitude of the signal or if it will be
user-defined
User-defined center frequency for the internal filter
477

value unit range
Sample rate 5*(Sample rate) Hz Hz, GHz, [0,+INF[
THz, nm
Polarization

value range
Determines if the phase from the polarization X or Y of the optical

Random numbers

value range
power.
must supply the polarization for the phase extraction. The signal phase is then
normalized in the range between the parameters Min. and Max. amplitude if
478
Figure 1 Converted noise bins enabled
time domain.
Figure 2 shows the phase detection of the X polarization component of the input
optical signal when the Rescale parameter is not enabled.
Figure 2 Optical phase detection
479
Notes:
480
OPTICAL POWER DETECTOR
Optical Power Detector
Converts the received optical signal power into electrical signal amplitude.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Min. amplitude 0 a.u. [-1e+100, -

1e+100]
Max. amplitude 1 a.u. [-1e+100, -

1e+100]
Downsampling

value unit range

user-defined
481

value unit range
Sample rate 5*(Sample rate) Hz Hz, GHz, [0,+INF[
THz, nm
Polarization

value range
Determines if the power from the polarization X or Y of the optical

Random numbers

value range
power.
must supply the polarization for the power extraction. The signal power is then
normalized in the range between the parameters Min. and Max. amplitude if
482
Figure 1 Converted noise bins enabled
time domain.
Figure 2 shows the power detection of the X polarization component of the input
optical signal when the Rescale parameter is not enabled.
Figure 2 Optical signal detection
483
Notes:
484
Receivers Library
Optical Receivers
• Optical Receiver
• Optical DPSK Receiver
• Optical Coherent QPSK Receiver
• Optical Coherent DP-QPSK Receiver
• Spatial Optical Receiver
485
Notes:
486
OPTICAL RECEIVER
Optical Receiver
This component is an optical receiver subsystem built using a PIN or APD

photodetector, a Bessel filter and a 3R regenerator.
Ports

Modes
Input Input Optical Sampled signals,
Noise bins
Reference Output Electrical
Parameters
Main
Photodetector PIN [PIN, APD]
Select the photodetector type: PIN or

APD
Gain 3 [0, 1e+100]
The avalanche gain for the

photodetector APD
Ionization ratio 0.9 [1e-100, 1]
The ionization ratio for the photodetector

APD
Responsivity 1 A/W [0, 100]
The responsivity of the photodetector
Dark current 10 nA [0, 1e+100]
The photodetector dark current
487
OPTICAL RECEIVER
Low Pass Filter
Cutoff frequency 0.75* bit rate Hz Hz, MHz, GHz [0, 1e+100]
3-dB cutoff frequency of the filter
Insertion loss 0 dB [0, 1e+100]
Depth 100 dB [0, 1e+100]
Maximum attenuation value for the filter
Order 4 [1, 100]
3R Regenerator
Reference bit rate Bit rate Bits/s Bits/s, MBits/s, [0, 1e+012]
GBits/s
Reference bit rate to use for the decision
instant calculation
User defined delay NO [YES, NO]

delay compensation
Delay compensation 0 s s, ms, ns [-1e+100,

1e+100]
User defined decision NO [YES, NO]

Decision instant 0.5 Bit [0, 1]

User defined threshold NO [YES, NO]
Defines whether the threshold will be

automatically calculated or it will be user
defined
Absolute threshold 0.5 a.u [-1e+100,

1e+100]
488
OPTICAL RECEIVER
Downsampling

amplitude of the signal or it will be user
defined
Center frequency 193.1 THz Hz, THz, nm [30, 300000]
User-defined center frequency of the

internal filter
Sample rate 5* (Sample rate) Hz Hz, GHz, THz, nm [1, 1e+100]
Sample rate of the signal output
Noise
Noise calculation type Numerical Analytical,
Numerical,
Numerical -
convert noise bins
Add signal-ASE noise YES [YES, NO]
Add ASE-ASE noise YES [YES, NO]
Add shot noise YES [YES, NO]
Determines if shot noise is added to the

signal
Add thermal noise YES [YES, NO]
Estimate receiver noise NO [YES, NO]
Determines whether the receiver should

estimate the thermal noise or not
Thermal noise 1e-22 W/Hz W/Hz, A/Hz^.5 [0, 1e+100]
Approximate sensitivity -18 dBm [-1e+100,0]
The receiver sensitivity parameter
Reference extinction ratio 10 dB [0, 1e+100]
Reference extinction ratio used to

measured the sensitivity
Reference Q factor 6.4624 [0, 1000]
Target Q factor for the current sensitivity
489
OPTICAL RECEIVER
Random Numbers

defined and unique

generation
This component is an optical receiver subsystem. The subsystem was built using two
different types of photodetectors, one Bessel filter and the 3R regenerator.
The component properties allow the user to select the internal component
parameters. Depending on the choice between PIN and APD, the Switch/Select
components will redirect the signal into the proper photodetector type.
Figure 1 Optical receiver example
490
OPTICAL DPSK RECEIVER
Optical DPSK Receiver
The component simulates a differential phase-shift keying receiver.
Ports

Modes
Noise bins
Output Output Electrical -
Parameters
MZI
Delay 1 / Bit rate s s, ms, ns [ 0, 1e100]
Time delay applied in one of the

interferometer arms
Reference Wavelength 1550 nm Hz, THz, nm [1300, 1800]
Wavelength that will be referenced for

the time delay
Photodetector
Photodetector PIN - - [PIN, APD]
Select the photodetectors type: PIN or
APD
Gain 3 - - [0, 1e+100]

photodetector APD
491
Ionization ratio 0.9 - - [1e-100, 1]

APD
Responsivity 1 A/W - [0, 100]
Dark current 10 nA - [0, 1e+100]
Downsampling

amplitude of the signal or will it be user
defined

internal filter
Noise
Noise calculation type Numerical - - Analytical,
Numerical,
Numerical -
convert noise bins
Add signal-ASE noise True - - True, False
Add ASE-ASE noise True - - True, False
Add thermal noise True - - True, False
Add shot noise True - - True, False

signal
Shot noise distribution Gaussian - - Poisson,

Gaussian
Determines the distribution used to
generate the shot noise
492
Random Numbers

defined and unique
Random seed index PD 1 0 - - [0, 4999]

generation for photodetector 1

The DPSK receiver consists of a Mach-Zehnder interferometer (MZI) for delay
demodulation and followed by balanced detection. Figure below shows the layout
representing the receiver.
Figure 1 DPSK receiver layout
493
Notes:
494
OPTICAL COHERENT QPSK RECEIVER
Optical Coherent QPSK Receiver
The component simulates an optical coherent receiver for QPSK signals based on a
homodyne design.
Ports

Modes
Noise bins
External oscillator Input Optical Sampled signals,

Noise bins
Output - I Output Electrical -
Output - Q Output Electrical -
Parameters
Local oscillatorI
External oscillator False - - True, False
Defines if the local oscillator will have

the input signal generated internally or
will it be generated by an external
source
Emission frequency
Linewidth 0.01 MHz - [0,+INF[
Initial phase 0 deg - ]-INF,+INF[
LO sample rate Sample rate Hz Hz, GHz, THz, nm [1, 1e+100]
Sample rate of the local oscillator
495
Photodetector
Photodetector PIN - - PIN, APD

APD
Gain 3 - - [0, 1e+100]

photodetector APD

APD
Downsampling

defined

internal filter
Noise
Numerical,
Numerical -
convert noise bins
496

signal

Gaussian
Simulation

value range
Iterations Iterations - - [1,+INF[
Random Numbers

defined and unique




Random seed index LO 0 - - [0, 4999]

generation for local oscillator
497
The optical coherent QPSK receiver consists of a homodyne receiver design. The
component is formed by a set of 3 dB fiber couplers, a LO laser, and balanced
detection. Figure below shows the layout representing the receiver.
Figure 1 QPSK receiver layout
498
OPTICAL COHERENT DP-QPSK RECEIVER
Optical Coherent DP-QPSK Receiver
The component simulates an optical dual-polarization coherent receiver for QPSK

signals based on a homodyne design.
Ports

Modes
Noise bins
External oscillator Input Optical Sampled signals,

Noise bins
Output X- I Output Electrical -
Output X- Q Output Electrical -
Output Y- I Output Electrical -
Output Y- Q Output Electrical -
Parameters
Local oscillatorI
External oscillator False - - True, False
Defines if the local oscillator will have
the input signal generated internally or
will it be generated by an external
source
Emission frequency
Linewidth 0.01 MHz - [0,+INF[
Initial phase 0 deg - ]-INF,+INF[
499
LO sample rate Sample rate Hz Hz, GHz, THz, nm [1, 1e+100]
Sample rate of the local oscillator
Photodetector
Photodetector PIN - - [PIN, APD]

APD
Gain 3 - - [0, 1e+100]

photodetector APD

APD
Downsampling

defined

internal filter
500
Noise
Numerical,
Numerical -
convert noise bins

signal

Gaussian
Simulation

value range
Iterations Iterations - - [1,+INF[
Random Numbers

defined and unique



501

Random seed index LO 0 - - [0, 4999]

generation for local oscillator
The optical coherent dual-polarization QPSK receiver consists of a homodyne
receiver design. The component has a LO laser polarized at 45o relative to the
polarization beam splitter, and the received signal is separately demodulated by each
LO component using two single polarization QPSK receivers. Figure below shows the
layout representing the receiver.
502
Figure 1 DP-QPSK receiver layout
503
Notes:
504
SPATIAL OPTICAL RECEIVER
Spatial Optical Receiver
This component is an optical receiver subsystem built using the Spatial Aperture and
the Optical Receiver components. The Optical receiver has a PIN or APD
photodetector, a Bessel filter and a 3R regenerator.
Ports

Modes
Noise bins
Reference Output Electrical
Parameter
Main
Aperture type Circular [Circular, Square]
Defines the aperture type
Width 10 um [0, 1e+100]
Defines the width of the square aperture

or the diameter of the circular aperture
Photodetector PIN [PIN, APD]
Select the photodetector type: PIN or

APD
Gain 3 [0, 1e+100]

photodetector APD
505
The Ionization ratio for the

photodetector APD
Low Pass Filter
Cutoff frequency 0.75* Bit rate Hz Hz, MHz, GHz [0, 1e+100]
3-dB cutoff frequency of the filter
Depth 100 dB [0, 1e+100]
Order 4 [1, 100]
3R Regenerator
Reference bit rate Bit rate Bits/s Bits/s, MBits/s, [0, 1e+012]
GBits/s
Reference bit rate to use for the decision
instant calculation
User defined delay NO [YES, NO]

delay compensation
Delay compensation 0 s s, ms, ns [-1e+100,

1e+100]
User defined decision NO [YES, NO]

506

User defined threshold NO [YES, NO]
Defines whether the threshold will be

automatically calculated or it will be user
defined
Absolute threshold 0.5 (a, u) [-1e+100,

1e+100]
value for the threshold to use when
Downsampling

value range

or if it will be user defined
User-defined center frequency for the internal

filter
Sample rate 5*(Sample rate) Hz Hz, GHz, THz, [0, 1e+100[

nm
Noise
Numerical,
Numerical -
convert noise bins

signal
507
Estimate receiver noise NO [YES, NO]
Determines whether the receiver should

estimate the thermal noise or not
Approximate sensitivity -18 dBm [-1e+100,0]
The receiver sensitivity parameter
Reference extinction ratio 10 dB [0, 1e+100]
Reference extinction ratio used to

measured the sensitivity
Reference Q factor 6.4624 [0, 1000]
Target Q factor for the current sensitivity
Random Numbers

defined and unique
Random see index 0 [0, 4999]

generation
The layout of the Spatial Optical Receiver is presented in Figure 1. Refer to Spatial
Aperture and Optical Receiver component documentation for the technical
Figure 1 Spatial Optical Receiver subsystem
508
Receivers Library
Photodetectors
• Photodetector PIN
• Photodetector APD
• Spatial PIN Photodetector
• Spatial APD Photodetector
509
Notes:
510
PHOTODETECTOR PIN
Photodetector PIN
PIN photodiode.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Responsivity 1 A/W [0,100]
Dark current 10 nA [0,+INF[
Downsampling

value unit range
Centered at max power True — — True, False

user-defined
Center frequency 193.1 THz Hz, THz, nm [30,3e5]
Sample rate 5*(Sample rate) Hz Hz, GHz, [1e-3,+INF[

THz, nm
511
PHOTODETECTOR PIN
Noise

value range
Noise calculation type Numerical — — Analytical,
Numerical,
Numerical -
Convert noise
bins
Add signal-ASE noise True — — True, False
Add ASE-ASE noise True — — True, False
Add thermal noise True — — True, False
Thermal noise 0 W/Hz — [0,+INF[
Add shot noise True — — True, False
Determines if shot noise is added to the signal
Shot noise distribution Gaussian — — Poisson,

Gaussian
Determines the distribution used to generate the
shot noise
Random numbers

value range
512
PHOTODETECTOR PIN
calculated automatically by centering the filter at the optical channel with maximum
power.
If the noise calculation type in Numerical:
Optical noise bins are converted to Gaussian noise inside of the signal bandwidth.
The combined optical field is then converted to optical power. If the option Numerical
— Convert Noise Bins is selected, the output noise and signal are combined. This
means that you cannot see the separate contributions of the noise. However, if you
select Numerical only, the signal and noise are separated and you can select the
different contributions of the noise.
Figure 1 Convert noise bins enabled
The PIN resamples the signal and converts the noise bins when Convert Noise Bins
is enabled.
Gaussian shot noise distribution

If the parameter Add shot noise is enabled and the Shot noise distribution parameter
is Gaussian, the optical power is converted to electrical current by:
(1)
i ( t ) = i s ( t ) + i th ( t ) + i d + i sh ( t )
where is(t) is the optical signal calculated from the responsivity r:
(2)
i s ( t ) = rP s ( t )
where ith(t) is the thermal noise current calculated from the power spectral density
defined by the parameter Thermal noise, and id is the dark current.
513
PHOTODETECTOR PIN
The shot noise current ish(t) is calculated according to the power spectral density [1]:
(3)
N sh = q ( i s + i d )
Poisson shot noise distribution

If the parameter Add shot noise is enabled and Shot noise distribution parameter is
Poisson, the electrical current is calculated according to [2]:
qn e (4)
i ( t ) = -------- + i th ( t )
Δt
where ne denotes the number of electrons generated in the time instant Δt. The
average number of generated electrons 〈 n e〉 (equal to the average number of
detected photons) within the time interval Δt is given by:
is ( t ) id (5)
〈 n e〉 = ---------- Δt + ---- Δt .
q q
The number of generated electrons n e is the Poisson random variable with mean and
variance equal 〈 n e〉 .
If the noise calculation type is Analytical:
In this case, the signal and the noise components are calculated independently. The
noise components are the variance and the noise PSD.
Figure 2 Convert noise bins disabled
In Figure 2, the PIN resamples the signal and does not convert the noise bins if
Convert Noise Bins is disabled.
514
PHOTODETECTOR PIN
The output electrical signal is:
(6)
i ( t ) = rP ( t ) + i d
Note: This signal does not include the noise components. The noise components
are calculated by the noise variance and by the power spectral density.
For the noise variances:
2 2 2 (7)
σ ( t ) = σ sh ( t ) + σ s – ASE ( t )
2
where σ sh ( t ) is the signal shot noise:
2
σ sh ( t ) = 2qi s ( t )B e (8)
where B e is the electrical bandwidth.

2
and σ s – ASE ( t ) is the signal ASE beating:
2 2 (9)
σ s – ASE ( t ) = 4r P ASE ( t )P s ( t )
For the noise PSD components:
P ( f ) = P TH ( f ) + P ASE – ASE ( f ) + P ASEsh ( f ) (10)
where PTH(f) is the thermal noise and PASE-ASE(f) is the beating of ASE-ASE:
2
P ASE – ASE ( f ) = r ( P ASE ( f )∗ P ASE ( f ) ) (11)
and the ASE shot noise is:
(12)
P ASEsh ( f ) = qrP ASE ( f )B e
Defining sensitivity
The sensitivity of a receiver can be defined by optimizing the receiver parameters.
A typical way of doing this is to optimize the thermal noise in your receiver, to obtain
–9
a specific BER ( 1 × 10 ) .
515
PHOTODETECTOR PIN
References
[1] Agrawal, G.P., Fiber-Optic Communication Systems. John Wiley & Sons, New York, (1997).
[2] Jeruchim, M.C., Balaban, P., Shanmugan, K., Simulation of Communication
Systems: Modeling, Methodology, and Techniques. Plenum Press, New York, (1997).
516
PHOTODETECTOR APD
Photodetector APD
Filter with a square cosine roll off frequency transfer function.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value unit range
Gain 3 — — [0,+INF[
Avalanche multiplication factor
Responsivity 1 A/W — [0,100]
Ionization ratio 0.9 — — ]0,1]
Ionization factor
Dark current 10 nA — [0,+INF[
Dark current amplified by the avalanche effect
Downsampling

value unit range
user-defined

517
PHOTODETECTOR APD

value unit range
Sample rate 5*(Sample rate) Hz Hz, GHz, [1e-3,+INF[
THz, nm
Noise

value range
Noise calculation type Numerical — — Analytical,
Numerical,
Numerical -
Convert noise
bins
Add signal-ASE noise True — — True, False
Add ASE-ASE noise True — — True, False
Add thermal noise True — — True, False
Thermal noise 0 W/Hz — [0,+INF[
Add shot noise True — — True, False
Shot noise distribution Gaussian — — [WMC,

Gaussian]
Determines the distribution used to generate the
shot noise
Random numbers

value range
calculated automatically by centering the filter at the optical channel with maximum
power.
518
PHOTODETECTOR APD
If the noise calculation type in Numerical:
Optical noise bins are converted to Gaussian noise inside of the signal bandwidth.
The combined optical field is then converted to optical power. If the option Numerical
— Convert Noise Bins is selected, the output noise and signal are combined. This
means that you cannot see the separate contributions of the noise. However, if you
select Numerical only, the signal and noise are separated and you can select the
different contributions of the noise.
Figure 1 Convert noise bins enabled
The APD resamples the signal and converts the noise bins when Convert Noise Bins
is enabled.
If the parameter Add shot noise is enabled and Shot noise distribution parameter is
Gaussian, the optical power is converted to electrical current:
(1)
i ( t ) = i s ( t ) + i th ( t ) + i d + i sh ( t )
where is(t) is the optical signal calculated from the responsivity r and the gain M as:
(2)
i s ( t ) = MrP s ( t )
and ith(t) is the thermal noise current calculated from the power spectral density
defined by the parameter Thermal noise and id is the additive dark current.
The shot noise current ish(t) is calculated according to the power spectral density:
2 (3)
N sh ( t ) = qM F ( rP s ( t ) + i dm )
where idm is the dark current and F depends on M:

(4)
F ( M ) = kM + ( 2 – 1 ⁄ M ) ( 1 – k )
where k is the Ionization ratio.
519
PHOTODETECTOR APD
If the noise calculation type is Analytical:
In this case, the signal and the noise components are calculated independently. The
noise components are the variance in time and the noise PSD.
Figure 2 Convert noise bins disabled
The PIN resamples the signal and does not convert the noise bins if Convert Noise
Bins is disabled.
The output electrical signal is:
(5)
i ( t ) = rP ( t ) + i d
The noise variances are:
2 2 2
σ ( t ) = σ sh ( t ) + σ s – ASE ( t ) (6)
2
where σ sh ( t ) is the signal shot noise:
2 2 (7)
σ sh ( t ) = 2qM Fi s ( t )B e
where B e is the electrical bandwidth.

2
and σ s – ASE ( t ) is the signal ASE beating:
2 2 2 (8)
σ s – ASE ( t ) = 4r M P ASE ( t )P s ( t )
520
PHOTODETECTOR APD
The noise PSD components are:
P ( f ) = P TH ( f ) + P ASE – ASE ( f ) + P ASEsh ( f ) (9)
where PTH(f) is the thermal noise and PASE-ASE(f) is the beating of ASE-ASE:
2 2
P ASE – ASE ( f ) = r M ( P ASE ( f )∗ P ASE ( f ) ) (10)
and the ASE shot noise is:
2 (11)
P ASEsh ( f ) = qM FrP ASE ( f )B e
References
521
PHOTODETECTOR APD
Notes:
522
SPATIAL PIN PHOTODETECTOR
Spatial PIN Photodetector
This component is PIN photodetector that include spatial effects. It is a subsystem

built using the Spatial Aperture component followed by the PIN photodetector.
Ports

Modes
Noise bins
Parameters
Main

value unit range
Aperture type Circular [Circular,
Square]
Width 10 um [0, 1e+100]

Defines the width of the square aperture or the
diameter of the circular aperture

523
Downsampling

value unit range

user defined
User-defined center frequency of the internal filter
Sample rate 5* (Sample Hz Hz, GHz, [1, 1e+100]

rate) THz, nm
Noise

value range
Numerical,
Numerical -
Convert noise
bins
Shot noise distribution Gaussian [Poisson,

Gaussian]
524
Random numbers

value range
The layout of the Spatial PIN Photodetector is presented in Figure 1. Refer to Spatial
Aperture and Photodetector PIN component documentation for the technical
Figure 1 Spatial PIN Photodetector subsystem
525
Notes:
526
SPATIAL APD PHOTODETECTOR
Spatial APD Photodetector
This component is APD photodetector that include spatial effects. It is a subsystem

built using the Spatial Aperture component followed by the APD photodetector.
Ports

Modes
Noise bins
Parameters
Main

value unit range
Aperture type Circular [Circular,
Square]
Width 10 um [0, 1e+100]

Defines the width of the square aperture or the
diameter of the circular aperture
Gain 3 [0, 1e+100]
The avalanche gain

The ionization ratio
527
Downsampling

value unit range

user-defined
Sample rate 5* (Sample Hz Hz, GHz, [1, 1e+100]

rate) THz, nm
Noise

value range
Numerical,
Numerical -
Convert noise
bins
Shot noise distribution Gaussian [WMC,

Gaussian]
528
Random numbers

value range
The layout of the Spatial APD Photodetector is presented in Figure 1. Refer to Spatial
Aperture and Photodetector APD component documentation for the technical
Figure 1 Spatial APD Photodetector subsystem
529
Notes:
530
Amplifiers Library
Optical
• EDFA Black Box
• EDFA
• Optical Amplifier
• Optical Amplifier Measured
• Optical Fiber Amplifier
531
Notes:
532
EDFA BLACK BOX
EDFA Black Box
Designs erbium doped fiber amplifiers (EDFAs) pumped by 980 nm or 1480 nm. Requires just the
experimental characterization of a practical device such as the gain spectrum and noise figure under non-
saturated and saturated conditions. Details about erbium-doped fiber specifications and elements in the
layout are not required to perform the simulations.
The amplifier is specified to operate under conditions required by wavelength division multiplex (WDM)
systems.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Operation mode Saturation — — Gain control,
Power control,
Amplifier operation mode
Saturation
Gain 20 dB — [0,100]
Determines the signal gain
Power 5 dBm W, mW, dBm [-100,100]

Determines the signal output power
533
EDFA BLACK BOX
Measurements

value range
File wavelength unit m — nm, m, Hz, THz
Determines the wavelength unit
First gain spectrum file name Gain1.dat — —

Filename with the gain spectra measurements
Second gain spectrum file name Gain2.dat — —
Filename with the gain spectra measurements
OSA bandwidth 0.1 nm [0.0001,10]
Set the bandwidth of the Optical Spectrum Analyzer
Noise type Power dBm Power,

Spectral
Select the noise type
density, Noise
figure
Noise True — True, False
Determines if ASE is included in the calculation or not
Noise spectrum file name Noise.dat — —
Filename concerning the noise spectra
Saturation wavelength 1540 nm [800,1700]
Determines the saturation wavelength
Saturation file name Saturation.dat — —
Filename concerning the saturation spectra
Numerical

value range
Relative error 0.1 dB ]0,100]
Determines the relative error acceptable in each calculation
Interpolation algorithm Cubic — Linear, Cubic
534
EDFA BLACK BOX
Polarization

value range
Polarization X,
Determines the polarization of the filter Polarization Y
Simulation

value range
Noise

value range
Noise bins spacing 125 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, [1,1000]
nm
Specifies the noise bins spacing
Noise threshold –100 dB — ]-INF,0[
Noise dynamic 3 dB — [0,+INF]
Convert noise bins Convert noise — — True, False

bins
Random numbers

value range
535
EDFA BLACK BOX
Graphs

First gain spectrum Wavelength (m) Gain (dB)
Second gain spectrum Wavelength (m) Gain (dB)
Noise spectrum Wavelength (m) Power (dBm)
Saturation Input power (dBm) Gain (dB)
Using input parameters as the characterization of the gain spectrum and noise figure
under non-saturated and saturated conditions measured to a practical device is
sufficient for designing the amplifier performance using this black box model.
Additional information concerning fiber specifications, such as absorption and
emission cross-sections, erbium doping, core radius, or details related to the amplifier
layout, is not required in this case. Curves containing the amplifier characterization
are available internally as a default in the software, which makes it possible for you to
perform simulations.
Three different control modes are available that allow you to perform the amplifier
analysis under distinct points of view. Each mode control – gain, power control, and
saturation – defines a different amplifier operating condition.
The black box model enables passive components, such as optical isolators,
equalizer filters, and several types of couplers, to be included in the amplifier design
while considering an additional loss variation along the amplifier due to the active and
passive components. The gain and the noise characterization measured to distinct
states of operation are provided as input files that enable the complete modelling of
the amplifier performance.
Operation Modes
Fiber amplifiers used in WDM systems usually make use of control systems as power
or gain. It is useful to include the option in the EDFA Black Box to select one of three
operation modes:
• Gain mode: Based on a control of the amplifier gain (Gain Control) relating the
input and output signals (with or without the generated amplified spontaneous
emission (ASE).
• Power Control mode: Considers the value of the output power to control the
amplifier performance (Power Control).
• Saturation mode: Considers the amplifier operating in a saturated condition
(Saturation).
536
EDFA BLACK BOX
Gain Control mode

In this mode, you set the gain amplifier (Gain in dB units). The gain calculation is
performed using Equation 1, where the total input (Pin) and the output (Pout) power
spectra are considered. The specified amplifier gain (Gspeci) is given by the ratio of
the total output power and input total power, with or without the generated ASE.
+∞
∑ Pout ( λ ) + ∫ S ASE ( f ) df
(1)
λ –∞
G speci = --------------------------------------------------------------------
∑P in ( λ )
λ
SASE(f) represents the spectral density of the amplified spontaneous emission

integrated on the optical frequency f.
Note: You can include the noise by selecting the noise type as power, spectral
density, or noise figure in the EDFA Black Box Properties dialog box.
Power Control mode

The value that you define in the power control mode is the desired amplifier output
power (Power in dBm units). The specified amplifier output power (Pspeci) that
includes the spectral ASE is:
+∞
∑ Pin( λ ) – ∫
(2)
P speci = G × S ASE ( f ) df
λ –∞
where G is the amplifier gain.
The option to select the noise type that will be included in the simulations is also
available in this control mode.
Saturation mode
In the saturation mode, the gain is the specified parameter. The noise type can be
selected in this mode, and two experimental gain curves are inserted as input files
considering two different saturation conditions. The gain curve in a saturated
condition is provided in a file format containing two columns. The first column refers
to the signal output power given in [dBm] units. The second column gives the gain in
[dB] units.
537
EDFA BLACK BOX
An example of the saturated gain input file is:
Signal output power (dBm) Gain (dB)
–40 28.82
–30 28.83
–20 28.82
–10 28.81
0 28.72
...
where the signal output power is given in [dBm] units and the gain is in [dB] units.
There is no limit of rows or power spacing previously defined.
Basic equations
The black box model considers a two-level Er3+ system assumption that is usually
adopted to model erbium-doped fiber amplifiers [1]. The propagating equation written
as a function of the absorption and emission coefficients, α(λ) and γ(λ) respectively,
is [2]:
dP ( λ ,z )- eq (3)
------------------ = { [ α ( λ ) + γ ( λ ) ]I ( z ) – α ( λ ) }P ( λ ,z ) + γI ( z )P ASE ( λ )
dz
I(z) represents the fraction of active ions in the excited state, P(λ,z) describes the
propagating power at a specific wavelength and fiber position, and PASEeq is the term
that includes the amplified spontaneous emission (ASE) as an equivalent ASE power.
The solution to Equation 3 is:
eq (4)
P ( λ ,L ) = G ( λ ) [ P ( λ ,0 ) + P ASE ( λ ) ]
where L is the total Er-doped fiber length and P(λ,0) represents the power at the
wavelength λ and at the fiber input. Considering the scope of this approximation,
PASEeq(λ) works as an independent source of amplified spontaneous emission.
The total gain along the erbium-doped fiber is:
(5)
G z ( λ ) = exp { { α ( λ ) + γ ( λ ) }I z – α ( λ ) × z }
where I z is the updated term that represents the detailed evolution of the population
inversion along the erbium-doped fiber.
The black box model takes into account a multiple-stage amplifier, where all amplifier
stages use the same type of erbium-doped fiber (the same absorption and emission
538
EDFA BLACK BOX
coefficients are considered). Figure 1 shows a sketch of an amplifier set up in two

sections, containing passive elements such as optical isolators, couplers, taps and
one filter. The total Er-doped fiber length and the total gain are L and G ( λ )
respectively.
Figure 1 Erbium doped amplifier set up in multiple stages, where the black box parameters G ( λ ) , IL ( λ ) ,
ILin ( λ ) are indicated
If the insertion loss is included in the analysis, the gain G ( λ ) is written as:
G ( λ ) = [GA ( λ ) + GB ( λ ) ]/ IL ( λ ) .
Amplifier gain
In order to model the gain of the amplifier, two different states of operation are
considered where each state has a characteristic population inversion. The amplifier
gain expression is given as a function of a reference gain value, (for example, [2]):
ref ref
log G ( λ ) = T λ ( λ ) [ log G ( λ ref ) – log G ( λ ref ) ] + log G (λ) (6)
ref
ref
where λ ref and G ( λ ref ) specifies the wavelength and the gain at a reference
amplifier operating point.
The term T λref ( λ ) is named tilt function and is obtained by the ratio of the gain curves
measured in the two states of operation. One acts as a reference curve (for example,
ref
G ( λ ) ).
The tilt function is given by the analytical expression:
log G 1 ( λ ) – log G 2 ( λ ) (7)

T ( λ ) = -------------------------------------------------------------------
log G 1 ( λ ref ) – log G 2 ( λ ref )
539
EDFA BLACK BOX
where G 1 ( λ ) and G 2 ( λ ) are the gain measured to the state1 and state2 respectively
of the amplifier operation. The experimental gain, measured at these two states of
operation, is provided as input file in the black box model.
It is convenient to introduce this concept of tilt function in the model, since it considers
the interdependence between the ratio of the characteristic gain and the absorption
and emission coefficients. On the other side, as the internal losses IL(λ) caused by
passive elements modify both G1(λ) and G2(λ) in the same manner, the tilt function
isn’t affected by optical circuitry variations.
By choosing G2(λ) equal to G(λ), the expression for the amplifier at the operation point
is:
ref (8)
log G ( λ ) = log G 1 ( λ ) – T λ ( λ ) × [ log G 1 ( λ ref ) – log G ( λ ref ) ]
ref
(9)
log G ( λ ) = log G 2 ( λ ) + T λ ( λ ) × log ΔG
ref
ref
where log Δ G specifies the gain difference between log G ( λ ref ) – log G 2 ( λ ref ) or
log G 1 ( λ ref ) – log G 2 ( λ ref ) . The term log Δ G is a free parameter and may be altered to
adjust the gain.
Gain measurement
The gain curves are critical to the black box model operation. The best way to obtain
these values used as input files in the model is by measuring them in a practical
amplifier. It is important to note that the precision of these measurements defines the
accuracy of the simulated results. However, the model alternatively accepts curves
generated by a simulated amplifier that supplies gain and ASE curves as the output
files.
Obtaining Gain Curve G1

The first gain profile is acquired with the amplifier operating in a constant saturated
regime that assures a specific population inversion. This condition can be obtained by
coupling a large signal input power to the amplifier, typically −10 dBm, at the
wavelength λref (e.g., 1540 nm), which is maintained constantly.
A small signal with power equal to −30 dBm (for instance) is added to the amplifier
input as a probe signal. Its frequency (probe signal) is scanned through the range
defined by the two-limit frequencies, which is written in terms of signal wavelength
and usually varies from 1530 nm to 1570 nm. This scan over the probe signal allows
you to obtain the spectral gain for one specific saturated condition.
This method was checked by analyzing a series of gain curves measured at the same
saturated conditions, and a nominally identical population inversion was recorded [2].
540
EDFA BLACK BOX
Obtaining Gain Curve G2

Analogous measurement procedure is repeated to obtain the second gain profile.
However, in this case, the probe signal input is enlarged to –20 dBm, and the
reference signal at a selected wavelength (1540 nm) can be varied. This new signal
input combination results in a different population inversion condition, which
characterizes the gain G 2 ( λ ) .
The difference is that the added signal test presents larger potency, typically −20
dBm, which causes a change in the gain curve profile by saturating the amplifier. With
the value obtained for the gain in each wavelength, the gain curve profile is obtained.
The high signal power, with the same λref, can also be altered, since the total sum of
the power is larger than the sum of the power to generate the curve G1.
The experimental gain curves must be provided in files containing two columns. The
first column refers to the wavelength specified in [nm], [m], [Hz] or [THz] units. The
second column gives the gain in [dB] units.
As an example of the gain input file is:
Wavelength [nm] G [dB]
1535.58 38.17
1538.95 34.09
1542.11 33.35
1545.26 33.17
...
where the wavelength is given in [nm] units and the gain is in [dB] units. There is no
limit of rows or wavelength spacing previously defined.
Amplifier noise figure

The noise figure is the figure of merit that usually describes the amplifier noise
performance. In order to evaluate the noise figure, three different options are
available. You can select the input format of noise that will be considered to perform
the calculations.
The first option is to select the noise input in terms of ASE power. In this case, the
ASE noise spectral density is written as:
P(λ) (10)
S power ( λ ) = ------------
Δf
where P(λ) is the ASE power measured at each wavelength range and Δf is the
bandwidth considered in the ASE spectrum acquisition.
541
EDFA BLACK BOX
Another option to evaluate the amplifier noise performance is to select the ASE
spectral density. In this case, the spectral density S(λ) is required as input file and is
written as:
NF ( λ ) ⁄ 10 (11)
S ( λ ) = hf [ 10 × G(λ) – 1]
where h is the Planck constant, f is the optical frequency, and the exponent NF(λ) is
the noise figure as a function of the signal wavelength.
The model will internally calculate the noise figure considering the noise curve
provided as input file. Rewriting Equation 11 in terms of noise figure produces [3]:
S ( λ ) + hf (12)
NF ( λ ) = 10 log ------------------------
hf × G ( λ )
The third option is to select the noise figure value given as a function of the signal
wavelength. In this case, the ASE spectrum is modeled considering the provided
noise figure value.
It is also possible to evaluate the noise figure considering different amplifier state
operation that means to consider distinct gain values. In this case, the spectral density
given by Equation 11 is rewritten including the gain variation (ΔG in linear units or
logΔG in dB units).
The new spectral noise density is dependent on the amplifier gain and is:
NF ( λ ) ⁄ 10 (13)
S ( λ ,log ΔG ) = hf 10 × G ( λ ,log ΔG ) – 1
where log Δ G can be calculated from Equation 8 and Equation 9.
Equivalent ASE noise measurement

The experimental ASE noise curves complement the measured parameters required
by the black box model.
Obtaining equivalent ASE noise

The third input to obtain (experimental) is the amplified spontaneous emission. In the
ASE acquisition curve, only the saturating signal must be maintained turned-on and
operating with a constant power at a specified signal wavelength (1540 nm as
suggested in the previous measurement descriptions). This is sufficient to produce
population inversion along the Er-doped fiber.
The spectrum obtained at the fiber output registers the amplified spontaneous
emission observed along the whole wavelength range considered (1530 nm to
1570 nm, typically).
542
EDFA BLACK BOX
The experimental gain curves must be provided in files containing two columns. The
first column refers to the wavelength specified in [nm], [m], [Hz] or [THz] units. The
second column gives the ASE noise curve in [dBm] units.
An example of input file:
Wavelength [nm] ASE [dBm]
1543 –25.13
1544 –25.20
1546 –25.42
1551 –26.43
where the wavelength is in [nm] units and the gain is in [dB] units. There is no limit of
rows or wavelength spacing previously defined.
543
EDFA BLACK BOX
References
[1] E. Desurvire, “Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers – Principles and Applications”, John Wiley &
Sons, Inc., USA, 1994.
[2] J. Burgmeier, A. Cords, R. März, C. Schäffer, B. Stummer “A black box model of EDFA’s
operating in WDM systems”, J. Lightwave Technol., Vol. 16, N. 7, pp. 1271-1275, 1998.
[3] S. P. Bastien, H. R. D. Sunak, B. Sridhar, V. E. Kalomiris “Temporal, spatial and spectral
modeling of erbium doped fiber amplifiers”, SPIE – Physic and Simulations of Optoelectronic
Devices, pp. 2-11, 1992.
544
EDFA
EDFA
Designs Er-doped fiber amplifiers by considering numerical solutions of the rate and the propagation
equations under stationary conditions. The model includes amplified spontaneous emission (ASE) as
observed in the amplifier Erbium Doped Fiber. However, this module allows you to select forward and/or
backward pump, as well as the pump power values.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value unit range
Core radius 2.2 µm — [0.1,10]
Determines the Er-doped fiber core radius
Er doping radius 2.2 µm — [0.1,10]

Specifies the Er-doped radius
Er metastable lifetime 10 ms — [0.01,100]
Determines the Er metastable lifetime
Numerical aperture 0.24 — — [0.1,1]
Specifies the numerical aperture of the Er-doped fiber
Er ion density 1e+025 m–3 m–3~ppm- [1,+INF[

wt~wt%
Specifies the Er doping in the Er-doped fiber
Loss at 1550 nm 0.1 dB/cm — [0,100]
Determines the fiber loss at 1550 nm
Loss at 980 nm 0.15 dB/cm — [0,100]
545
EDFA

value unit range
Length 5 m — [0,10000]
Determines the Er-doped fiber length
Pumping

value range
Forward pump power 100 mW W, mW, dBm [0,+INF[
Determines the co-propagating pump power
Backward pump power 0 mW W, mW, dBm [0,+INF[

Determines the counter-propagating pump power
Forward pump wavelength 980 nm — [700,1600]
Determines the co-propagating pump wavelength
Backward pump wavelength 980 nm — [700,1600]
Determines the counter-propagating pump

wavelength
Cross-sections

value range
File frequency unit nm — nm, m, Hz, THz
Determines the frequency unit of the file with the measurements
OptiAmplifier format False — True, False
Determines the format of the OptiAmplifier file
cross-section file name Erbium.dat — —
Determines the cross-section file
Numerical

value range
Relative error 0.0001 — ]0,1]
Determines the relative error acceptable in each calculation
Max. number of iterations 50 — [10,10000]
Specifies the maximum number of times to repeat the calculation
546
EDFA

value range
Longitudinal steps 100 — [10,10000]
Determines the number of longitudinal steps in the calculation
Polarization

value
Polarization X,
Simulation

value
Enabled Yes — [0, 0]
Noise
Name and description Default Default unit Units Value range

value
Noise center frequency 193.4 THz Hz, THz, nm [30, 30]
Determines the noise center frequency
Noise bandwidth 13 THz Hz, Thz, nm [1e-100, 1e-100]
Noise bins spacing 125 GHz Hz, GHz, [1,1]

THz, nm
Noise threshold –100 dB — [-1e+100, -1e+100]
Noise dynamic 3 dB — [0, 0]

bins
547
EDFA
Random numbers

value range
Generate random seed Yes — [0, 0]

Graphs

Absorption parameters Wavelength (m) Cross-section (m2)
Emission parameters Wavelength (m) Cross-section (m2)
The routines in EDFA numerically solve the rate equations coupled with propagating
equations under stationary conditions. It is assumed a two-level Er system
approximation and the rate equations are based on the energy level diagram. The
same expressions described in the module Er Doped Fiber are adopted by this model.
The main difference is related to the amplifier pump scheme selection. You can
choose co-propagating, counter-propagating, or bi-directional pump schemes with
the option to set wavelength and pump power. Geometrical Er-doped fiber
parameters and cross-section curves are required as input files. As output files, you
can access gain, output power values, and noise figure determined in the ASE
bandwidth set as noise input data.
Er Doped Fiber rate and propagation equations

The lifetime transition from level 4I11/2 is of the order of microseconds for silicate
hosts. Therefore, it is reasonable to neglect the population density N3 in the rate
equations description. A two-level system approximation is used in this case. Under
the assumption of the normalized population densities N1 and N2 at the ground and
metastable energy level, 4I15/2 and 4I13/2 populations are calculated by numerically
solving the rate and propagation equations[1]:
N
∂N 2 ( z ,t ) N 2 ( z ,t ) 1 ⎧ e a a ⎫ + –
--------------------- = – -----------------
∂t τ
- – --------
A eff ∑ ⎨⎩ Γn [ ( σn + σn )N2 ( z ,t ) – σn ] ⎬⎭[ Pn ( z ,t ) + P n ( z ,t ) ]
n=1
(1)
548
EDFA
N2 + N1 = 1
(2)
±
∂P n ( z ,t ) ⎧ e a a ⎫ ± e
------------------------ = u n ⎨ ρΓ n [ ( σ n + σ n )N 2 ( z ,t ) – σ n – α ] ⎬P n ( z ,t ) + 2ρΔνN 2 Γ n σ n
∂z ⎩ ⎭
(3)
where the optical powers are expressed in units of number of photons per unit time,
τ is the metastable spontaneous emission lifetime, N is the number of channels taken
into account in the simulation (including signals, pumps, and ASE bins), ρ is the
number density of the active erbium ions, α is the attenuation coefficient (which takes
into account the background loss of the fiber), Δν is the frequency step used in the
simulation to resolve the ASE spectrum, and Aeff is the effective doped area given
2
by π × b , where b is the Er doping radius (it is considered a uniform distribution of
erbium ions in the area given by the Er doping radius region).
The nth channel of wavelength λ n has optical power Pn(z,t) at location z and time t,
e a
with emission and absorption cross-section σ n and σ n respectively, and confinement
factor Γ n . The superscript symbols + and – are used to indicate channels traveling in
forward (from 0 to L) and backward (from L to 0) directions, respectively. For beams
traveling in the forward direction u n = 1 and for beams in the opposite direction
u n = – 1 . The overlap integrals Γ n between the LP01 mode intensity (which is used
in this program) distribution doped
b
region area are given by:
2
∫ E ( r ,ν ) r dr
Γ n ( ν ) = ----------------------------------
0
∞
2
∫ E ( r ,ν ) r dr
0
(4)
where E(r, ν ) gives the electric density field.
Solving Equation 1, Equation 2, and Equation 3 under stationary conditions allows

you to determine the amplifier performance features. The fiber parameters such as
core and Er doping radius, Er metastable lifetime, numerical aperture, Er ion density,
loss at 980 nm and 1550 nm, and the fiber length are required as input values. The
absorption and emission cross-section are also required as input files.
549
EDFA
Absorption and Emission cross-sections

There are two options available to you to prepare the cross-section file, which is
specified in an ASCII file. The first option is to provide the cross-section input file in
three columns. The first column refers to the wavelength in [m], [nm], [Hz] or [THz]
units. The second column gives the absorption cross- section in [m2] units. The third
column gives the emission cross-section in [m2] units. In this case, the cross-section
file format is:
λ (nm) a 2
σ [m ]
e
σ [m ]
2
929.982 9.28e-27 0
930.172 7.05e-27 0
1029.972 2.85e-27 0
1030.072 3.59e-27 0
1450.6 2.086e-26 1.726e-27
1450.8 2.186e-26 1.823e-27
1649.8 1.540e-26 8.228e-26
1650.0 1.540e-26 8.280e-26
The second option is to consider the absorption and emission coefficients (or Giles
parameters) as input parameters that are converted to cross-section by internal
routines in the software. This is especially interesting when only Giles parameters are
measured to the Er-doped fiber. The file format in this case contains three columns.
The first column refers to the wavelength in [m], [nm], [Hz] or [THz] units. The second
column gives the absorption coefficient in [dB/m] units. The third column gives the
emission coefficient in [dB/m] units. An example of this input file is:
λ (nm) α (dB/m) g* (dB/m)
929.982 0.39168 0
930.172 0.2856 0
1029.972 –0.05508 0
550
EDFA
λ (nm) α (dB/m) g* (dB/m)
1030.072 –0.14484 0
1450.6 1.8075 0.35599973
1450.8 1.815 0.360619883
1649.8 0.005 0.484116259
1650.0 –0.0175 0.477803876
where the wavelength is given in [nm] units, absorption and emission coefficients are
in [dB/m].
551
EDFA
References
[1] C.R. Giles and E. Desurvire, “Modeling erbium-doped fiber amplifiers,” Journal of Lightwave
Technology, Vol. 9, N. 2, pp. 271-283, 1991.
552
OPTICAL AMPLIFIER
Optical Amplifier
Enables the design of amplifiers, including EDFAs, that consider pre-defined operational conditions. This
means that expected gain, noise figure, and amplifier output power can be previously specified. The
amplifier presents the same facilities as a black box model, which enables you to select the operation
mode with gain control, power control, or to perform simulations under saturated conditions, as well as
define the expected amplifier performance. It is specially suited to perform prompt performance analysis
of one or cascaded amplifiers in a long-haul system.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Operation mode Gain control — — Gain control,
Power control,
Amplifier operation mode Signal power
control,
Saturation
Gain 20 dB — [0,100]
Determines the signal gain
Determines the signal output power
Saturation power 10 dBm — [-100,100]
Specifies the optical power at the gain

compressed by 3 dB
Saturation port Output — — Input, Output
Determines the amplifier saturation port
553
OPTICAL AMPLIFIER

value range
Include noise YES — — —
Noise figure 4 dB — [3,100]

Determines the amplifier noise figure
Polarization

value
Polarization X,
Polarization Y
Simulation

value
Noise
Name and description Default Default unit Units Value range

value
Noise center frequency 193.4 THz Hz, THz, nm [30, 3e+006]
Noise bandwidth 13 THz Hz, THz, nm [1e-100, 1e+100]
Noise bins spacing 125 GHz Hz, GHz, [1,1000]

THz, nm

bins
Random numbers

value
554
OPTICAL AMPLIFIER

value
The simulation of the flat gain amplifier is performed in the opposite way than that
used by the previous described models. In this case, the desired amplifier
performance given by the gain, the output power, the saturated output power, and the
noise figure values are used as input parameters to design the amplifier.
The input data are related by the propagation equation written in terms of the
parameter required in each mode selected. There are three different mode controls
— Gain control, Power Control, and Saturation. Large and small input signal can be
considered in this amplifier model. The concept of the flat gain amplifier enabling you
to define the device performance makes this model flexible to design amplifiers
considering different applications in a system such as booster, in-line, and pre-
amplifier.
The amplified spontaneous emission is included in the model of the Flat Gain EDFA
and it is built from the noise figure input value.
Operation Modes
The Flat Gain EDFA subsystem enables three operation modes, which you can select
in the Flat Gain EDFA Properties dialog box by clicking on Main/Operation
Mode/Value. The first option is the Gain Control that maintains the gain constant and
allows you to include (or not include) the amplified spontaneous emission in the
calculations. In the second operation mode option, Power Control, the value of the
output power is maintained constantly. The third operation mode, Saturation,
considers the amplifier operating in a saturated condition — operating in an output
signal power correspondent to a gain 3 dB lower than the saturated gain.
Gain Control mode

In this mode, you set the desired amplifier gain (in dB units), which is given by the ratio
of the total output power (Pout) and total input power (Psin), including (or not including)
the generated ASE (PASE), as given by Equation 1. There are no additional iterations
or complicated equation solutions in this mode. The set amplifier input parameters as
gain and noise figure give the performance of this sub-system to be inserted in the
global system.
( P out – P ASE )
G = ------------------------------------
P sin
(1)
Power Control mode
555
OPTICAL AMPLIFIER
The value that you define in the power control mode is the desired amplifier output
power (in dBm units), which is maintained constantly. If the gain required to keep the
desired output power is higher than the value of the parameter Gain, the amplifier will
saturate, and the maximum power will be determined by the input power amplified by
the parameter Gain. Analogous with the gain-controlled mode, there is no additional
calculation involved in the designed amplifier. The output power set as input
parameter defines the amplifier performance to be considered in the system where
this amplifier is inserted. The ASE, which basically computes the noise introduced by
the amplifier into the system, can be included (or not included) in the amplifier
performance. Note that the specified output power is not degraded by the ASE noise
included in the amplifier subsystems — however, this noise source is computed in the
global system analysis. Signal power control mode will not include the input noise into
the calculated input power.
Saturation mode
In the saturation mode, it is assumed that the pump power is constant, causing the
amplifier to operate in a saturated regime. The saturation power, gain, and noise
figure are the parameters required by this mode. The saturation power is the input
parameter maintained constant in this mode selection, and in an ASE-free model can
be related with the gain (G), output power (Pout), and intrinsic saturation power
(Psatint) by the expression:
G – 1 P out
G = G 0 exp – ------------- -----------
G int
P sat
(2)
where G0 is the small-signal gain or unsaturated gain.
The intrinsic saturation power is written as:
int Ahv
P sat = ----------
σa τ
(3)
where A is the mode-field area, h is the Planck’s constant, ν is the frequency at the
propagating signal, σa is the absorption cross-section, and τ is the Er metastable
lifetime in silica.
These fiber specifications are not required in this amplifier module, since the intrinsic
saturation power will be related to the amplifier saturation power under the gain
compression condition.
Under the 3 dB gain compression, the output power is proportional to the intrinsic
saturation power. This relation is:
3dB int
P out = In ( 2 )P sat
Compressed
(4)
556
OPTICAL AMPLIFIER
ASE calculation
The ASE noise spectrum is built in this model from the noise figure provided as input
parameter, considering the expression that relates spectral ASE noise with noise
figure. The noise figure (NF) evaluated at a specific signal wavelength is:
1 S out
NF = ---- + ----------
G Ghv
(5)
The term 1/G corresponds to the shot noise, Sout is the output ASE spectral density
at the signal wavelength, and hν is the photon energy. In practical cases, there is ASE
present at the input of the doped fiber so that the amplified input ASE must be added
to the output ASE spectral density. The output ASE can be written as:
S out = S amp + S in × G
(6)
where Samp is the spectral density ASE generated by the doped fiber.
Correcting for the input ASE gives the signal-spontaneous beat noise limited noise
figure as a function of the signal gain, and input and output ASE spectral densities:
1 S out S in
NF = ---- + ---------- – -------
G Ghv hv
(7)
In the signal-spontaneous beat noise limited regime, with high gain and negligible
input coupling, the noise figure of the optical preamplifier approaches a theoretical
limit of [1]:
2
σ sig – sp
NF opt = --------------------------------------- = 2n sp
2 2
σ sig – sh ( in )G
(8)
where the spontaneous emission factor, nsp, is defined as:

N2( z )
n sp ( v ,z ) = ---------------------------------------------
N 2 ( z ) – N 1 ( z )ε ( v )
(9)
where
σa ( v )
ε ( v ) = --------------
σe ( v )
(10)
Since nsp ≥ 1, an EDFA at high gain has a minimum noise figure of 3 dB. This is
derived by assuming that the input signal is shot noise limited and the output noise is
signal-spontaneous beat noise limited. In practical situations, the noise figure is
degraded by the amplifier input coupling loss.
557
OPTICAL AMPLIFIER
Noise figure
This lists the signal-spontaneous beat noise limited noise figure. For each signal
wavelength, the noise figure is:
1 S out ( λ s ) S in ( λ s )
NoiseFigure ( dB ) = 10 × log 10 ---- + --------------------- – ------------------
G Ghv hv
(11)
where S out ( λ s ) is the output ASE spectral density (W/Hz) at the signal wavelength,
and S in ( λ s ) is the input ASE spectral density at the signal wavelength.
Rewriting the ASE spectral density as a function of noise figure value, the noise
spectrum can be generated considering the noise figure input parameter. Therefore,
the ASE spectrum is obtained from the expression:
NoiseFigure ( dB )
-------------------------------------
10 1 S in ( λ s )
S out ( λ s ) = G × hv 10 – ---- + ------------------
G hv
(12)
References
[1] T. Okoshi, "Exact Noise-Figure Formulas for Optical Amplifiers and Amplifier-Fiber Cascaded
Chains," IEEE/OSA Topical Meeting on Optical Amplifiers and their Applications, Monterrey,
PDP11, 1990.
558
OPTICAL AMPLIFIER MEASURED
Optical Amplifier Measured
Enables you to design EDFAs considering pre-defined operation conditions that mean to specify
previously the measured gain, noise figure, and amplifier output power. It is specially indicated for the
prompt performance analysis of one or cascaded amplifiers present in a long-haul system. It can be also
used for flat gain amplifiers.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Measured gain and noise figure (nm dB dB) — — —
Wavelength, gain, and NF table with the

measured data
Gain and noise figure file name GainAndNF.dat — — —
Max. output power 25 dBm W, mW, dBm [-100,+100]
Determines the total signal output power
Include noise True — — True, False

Determines if the component add noise to the
output signal
559
Polarization

value range
Polarization X,
Simulation

value range
Enabled Yes — [0, 0]
Noise

value range
Noise center frequency 193.4 THz Hz, THz, nm [30, 30]
Noise bandwidth 13 THz Hz, Thz, nm [1e-100, 1e-

100]

nm
Noise threshold –100 dB — [-1e+100, -

1e+100]
Noise dynamic 3 dB — [0, 0]

bins
Random numbers

value range
Generate random seed Yes — [0, 0]
560

value range
The simulation of the EDFA Measured is performed in similar way to the Flat Gain
EDFA. In this case, the desired amplifier performance given by the measured gain,
noise figure, and maximum output power. Large and small input signals can be
considered in this amplifier model. The concept of the measured amplifier enabling
you to define the device performance makes this model flexible to design amplifiers
for different applications in a system such as booster, in-line, pre-amplifier, gain flat,
and noise flat. It can also load measurements from other software tools such as
Optiwave's OptiAmplifier.
This maximum output power can be limited when the total output power is greater
then the parameter Max. output power. The calculation engine reduces the amplifier
gain in order to have the total output power equal to the parameter Max. output power.
ASE calculation
The ASE noise spectrum is built in this model from the noise figure provided as input
parameter, considering the expression that relates spectral ASE noise with noise
figure. The noise figure (NF) evaluated at a specific signal wavelength is:
1 S out
NF = ---- + ----------
G Ghv
(1)
The term 1/G corresponds to the shot noise, Sout is the output ASE spectral density
at the signal wavelength, and hν is the photon energy.
In practical cases, there is ASE present at the input of the doped fiber so that the
amplified input ASE must be added to the output ASE spectral density. Therefore, the
output ASE can be written as:
S out = S amp + S in × G
(2)
where Samp is the spectral density ASE generated by the doped fiber.
Correcting for the input ASE gives the signal-spontaneous beat noise limited noise
figure as a function of the signal gain, and input and output ASE spectral densities:
1 S out S in
NF = ---- + ---------- – -------
G Ghv hv
561
(3)
In the signal-spontaneous beat noise limited regime, with high gain and negligible
input coupling, the noise figure of the optical preamplifier approaches a theoretical
limit of [1]:
2
σ sig – sp
NF opt = --------------------------------------- = 2n sp
2 2
σ sig – sh ( in )G
(4)
where the spontaneous emission factor, nsp, is defined as:

N2( z )
n sp ( v ,z ) = ---------------------------------------------
N 2 ( z ) – N 1 ( z )ε ( v )
(5)
where
σa ( v )
ε ( v ) = --------------
σe ( v )
(6)
Since nsp ≥ 1, an EDFA at high gain has a minimum noise figure of 3 dB. This is
derived by assuming that the input signal is shot noise limited and the output noise is
signal-spontaneous beat noise limited.
In practical situations, the noise figure is degraded by the amplifier input coupling loss.
Noise figure
This lists the signal-spontaneous beat noise limited noise figure. For each signal
wavelength, the noise figure is:
1 S out ( λ s ) S in ( λ s )
NoiseFigure ( dB ) = 10 × log 10 ---- + --------------------- – ------------------
G Ghv hv
(7)
where S out ( λ s ) is the output ASE spectral density (W/Hz) at the signal
wavelength, S in ( λ s ) is the input ASE spectral density at the signal wavelength.
Rewriting the ASE spectral density as a function of noise figure value, the noise
spectrum can be generated considering the noise figure input parameter. Therefore,
the ASE spectrum is obtained from the expression:
NoiseFigure ( dB )
-------------------------------------
10 1 S in ( λ s )
S out ( λ s ) = G × hv 10 – ---- – ------------------
G hv
(8)
562
Measurements
You can provide the measurements in the parameter Measured gain and noise figure.
Alternatively, the measurements can be loaded from a file using the parameter Gain
and noise figure file name. The gain and noise figure curves must be provided in the
file containing three columns. The first column refers to the wavelength specified in
[nm] units. The second column gives the gain noise curve in [dB] units. The third
column gives the noise figure in [dB] units.
Example of input file:
Wavelength ([nm] Gain [dB] NF [dB]
1500.00 20.00 4.00
1510.00 20.00 4.00
1520.00 20.00 4.00
1530.00 20.00 4.00
1540.00 20.00 4.00
1550.00 20.00 4.00
References
[1] T. Okoshi, "Exact Noise-Figure Formulas for Optical Amplifiers and Amplifier-Fiber Cascaded
Chains," IEEE/OSA Topical Meeting on Optical Amplifiers and their Applications, Monterrey,
PDP11, 1990.
563
Notes:
564
OPTICAL FIBER AMPLIFIER
Optical Fiber Amplifier
This component simulates the propagation and amplification of optical pulses in a single-mode doped
fiber amplifier.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

unit
User defined reference wavelength - True - True, False
If TRUE, frequency value of “Reference wavelength” is

used internally as ‘zero’ (or reference) frequency in
spectrum of signal envelope. Values of parameters
(attenuation, dispersion) are assumed to correspond to
this frequency. If parameters are wavelength-
dependent (from files), they are evaluated at this
frequency. If FALSE, central frequency of simulated
band is used.
Value of user defined/specified reference wavelength.
Length L 5 m [0, 500]
Fiber length
Attenuation effect - True - True, False

If True, attenuation effect is enabled.
Attenuation data type - Constant - Constant, From

File
Defines the attenuation as a fixed constant value or as
a wavelength dependent curve taken from a file. If
‘constant’, value from “Attenuation” tab is used.
565

unit
Specified value is used if “Attenuation data type” is set

to ‘constant’. If ‘from file’, the value is ignored.
Attenuation vs. wavelength - - - -
Defines the attenuation as a wavelength dependent

curve in a file.
Gain

unit
Gain effect - True - True, False
If True, gain effect is enabled.
Gain profile - Constant - Constant,

Lorentzian,
Defines the gain profile as a fixed constant value or as Parabolic, From
a wavelength dependent curve taken from a file, or
file
based on a Lorentzian, or parabolic profile.
Gain g0 0 dB/m [0, 1010]
Defines the small signal gain value.
Gain peak wavelength - 1550 nm [400, 2200]
Defines the wavelength for the gain peak (for parabolic

and Lorentzian shape).
Gain bandwidth - 50 nm [0.5, 800]
Defines the gain bandwidth for parabolic and

Lorentzian shapes
Gain vs. wavelength - gain.dat - -
Specifies the file containing the gain shape
Saturation energy Es 1e-6 J [0, 10]
Defines the saturation energy due to limited pumping.
Pulse repetition rate - Bit rate Hz [103, 10100]

Defines the pulse repetition rate.
566
Dispersion

unit
Group velocity dispersion - True - True, False
If True, the GVD effect is enabled.
Third order dispersion - True - True, False

If True, the TOD effect is enabled.
Frequency domain parameters - False - True, False
Defines domain in which dispersion parameters are

specified. If True, frequency domain is used and
dispersion effect is specified in terms of β 2 and β 3 .
Otherwise, wavelength domain is used ( D and S ).
Dispersion data type - Constant - Constant, From

File
Defines if dispersion parameter values are read from
component tabs, or taken from a file
Beta 2 β2 -20 ps2/km [-10100, 10100]
Beta 3 β3 0 ps3/km [-10100, 10100]
Dispersion D 16.75 — [-10100, 10100]

ps -
Value of the GVD parameter in the wavelength ------------------------
( nm ) ( km )
domain
Dispersion slope - 0.075 [-10100, 10100]

ps
--------------------------
-
Value of dispersion slope parameter. 2
( nm ) ( km )
Dispersion file format - Dispersion vs - Dispersion vs

wavelengtht wavelength,
Determines contents of dispersion file: group delay or
Group delay vs
dispersion vs. wavelength. If “Dispersion vs. wavelength
wavelength” and “Frequency domain parameters” are
selected, it is assumed that file contains β 2 ( λ ) . If
“Frequency domain parameters” is disabled,
component assumes that file contains D ( λ ) . If
“Group delay vs wavelength”, the file contains
β (λ) .
1
Dispersion file name - Dispersion.dat - -
Specifies file containing dispersion data
The parameter “Frequency domain parameters” refers to the alternative definitions:
∂β 1 ∂D
D = ---------, S = ------- (wavelength domain definition)
∂λ ∂λ
567
and
∂β 1 ∂β 2
β 2 = ---------, β 3 = --------- (frequency domain definition)
∂ω ∂ω
of the dispersion parameters, but not to the argument of these functions, which is
always assumed to be the wavelength. All the parameters in the component
(including β 2 and β 3 ) are given as functions of wavelength (not frequency). This is
also the case when β 1 or β 2 are specified from a file - the first column of the file
contains wavelength values ( λ ) and the second column - the corresponding values
of β 1 ( λ ) or β 2 ( λ ) .
PMD

unit
Birefringence type - Deterministic - Deterministic,
Stochastic
Defines the birefringence. If “Deterministic”, both the
strength of birefringence and principal axes are assumed
constant, hence random mode coupling is disabled. If
“Stochastic”, random mode coupling is enabled.
Differential group delay 0 [-10100, 10100]

d- ps
------ ( Δβ ) -------
If Birefringence type is “Deterministic”, this is the value of dω km
the differential group delay. If “Stochastic”, parameter is
disabled.
PMD coefficient 0.5 [0,10100]

Dp ps
-----------
Polarization mode dispersion coefficient. If Birefringence km
type is “Stochastic”, this is the value of the PMD
parameter. If “Deterministic”, parameter is disabled.
Mean scattering section length 500 [0,10100]

L scatt m
Averaged value of fiber length at which the polarization
state of the signal is randomized by applying the
scattering matrix.
Scattering section dispersion σ scatt 100 [0,10100]

m
Dispersion of the scattering section length.
568
Nonlinearities

unit
Self-phase modulation - True - True, False
Determines if the self-phase modulation (SPM) effect will

be taken into account. If FALSE all the nonlinear effects -
self-steepening, SRS - are disabled. In the vector case
enabling this effect enables also the cross-phase
modulation between the orthogonal polarization
components.
Effective area data type - Constant - Constant, From

File
Defines whether effective area parameter value is read
from the component tab or from a file. If “Constant”, the
value from the component is used.
Effective area 80 [0,1010]

A eff μm
2
Defines the value of the effective area parameter. This
value is used if “Effective area data type” is set to
“Constant”. Otherwise, the value is ignored.
Effective area vs. wavelength - EffectiveArea.dat - -
If “Effective area data type” is “From file”, this tab specifies

the file containing the effective area data.
n2 data type - Constant - Constant, From

File
Determines if n 2 parameter (nonlinear index of refraction) value
is read from the component tab or from a file. If “Constant”, value
is taken from component.
n2 2.6 X 10-20 [0,10100]

n2 m
2
------
The value of the n 2 parameter (nonlinear index of refraction). If W
data type is set to “Constant”, this value is used, otherwise the
value is ignored.
Nonlinear coefficient γ 0.001317 -

1-
--------
Displays the nonlinearity parameter. Wm
Self-steepening - False - True, False
Specifies whether self-steepening effect is taken into

account. Can be enabled only after enabling the SPM, and
is taken into account only in the scalar case (if Model type
is set to Scalar), and if Full Raman response parameter is
FALSE.
Full Raman response - False - True, False
Defines the stimulated Raman scattering (SRS) effect

representation in the model. If TRUE, SRS is represented
through the convolution integrals of the fields with the
Raman susceptibilities. Intrapulse Raman scattering is
disabled.
569

unit
Intrapulse Raman scattering - False - True, False
Defines the stimulated Raman scattering (SRS) for. Can

be enabled if Full Raman response is FALSE. If both Full
Raman response and Intrapulse Raman scattering are
FALSE, SRS effect is not taken into account in the
simulation.
Raman self-shift time 1 14.2 [0,10100]

τ R1 fs
Value of the Raman self-shift time parameter associated
with the parallel SRS effect
τ R1 = ( dImχ 1111 ( ω ) ⁄ dω ) ω = 0
Raman self-shift time 2 3 [0,10100]

τ R2 fs
τ R2 = ( dImχ 1122 ( ω ) ⁄ dω ) ω = 0
Fractional Raman contribution ρ 0.18 - [0, 1]
Fraction of the nonlinear polarization, related to the

stimulated Raman scattering effect.
Orthogonal Raman factor αf 0.75 - [0, 1]
α f = Re ( χ 1122 ( ω = 0 ) )
570
Numerical

unit range
Model type - Scalar - Scalar,
Vector
Defines model type used for simulation. Depends on
polarization state of signal. If “Vector” selected, signal can
have arbitrary polarization state and a system of two
coupled equations (Equation 7) is solved. If “Scalar”
selected, the signal preserves its polarization state and a
single equation is solved (1). In the following cases, vector
simulation is performed regardless of value of model type
parameter:
• Two polarization components are detected at fiber input
• PMD effect is “Stochastic”.
Propagator type - Exponential - Exponential,

Runge-
Method used to apply nonlinear propagator in the split-step Kutta 4th
Fourier method. “Exponential” corresponds to standard
order,
implementation, “Runge-Kutta 4th (2nd) order” uses Runge-
Runge-
Kutta 4th (2nd) order to apply nonlinearity operator.
Kutta 2nd
Exponential cannot be used when Model type is set to order
Vector, and SRS effect is enabled. The default selection is
Runge-Kutta 2nd order.
Calculation type - Iterative - Iterative,

Noniterative
Specifies implementation of split-step Fourier method when
Propagator type is “Exponential”.
Number of iterations - 2 - [2, 1010]
Step Size - Variable - Variable,

Constant
Specifies whether variable or fixed step-size simulation is
used. If “Variable”, step size is adaptively changed
depending on value of “Max. nonlinear phase shift”
parameter, and solution itself. If “Constant”, step size is
evaluated once at the beginning of simulation. In some
cases, the fixed step size calculation executes faster, due to
the smaller number of calculations per step, but the variable
step size calculation is more flexible and can be faster if the
peak power of the waveform varies considerably in z (for
example, in the presence of strong attenuation).
Max. Nonlinear phase shift NL 3 [0,10100]

ϕ max mrad
Maximum (over the time window) phase shift induced by the
self-phase modulation effect per step.
571

unit range
Boundary conditions - Periodic - Periodic,
Absorbing
Specifies type of boundary conditions used in simulation.
Filter steepness - 0.05 - [0,10100]

If “Boundary conditions” option is set to “Absorbing”, the
“Filter steepness” parameter determines the
absorption/reflection properties of the time window
boundaries.
Lower/Upper calculation limit - [500, 2500]

nm [100, 3000]
Set the spectral range in which the simulation is performed.

Any spectral components outside the range is ignored.
Graphs

range
Calculate graph - False - True, False
Enables/disables 3D graphs. If disabled, no graphs

are plotted and no data are stored.
Number of distance steps - 200 - [1, 100000000]
Number of snapshots used to construct a 3D plot. If

this value is increased, the fidelity of the plot is
improved only if the value is below the number of
actual steps in z . The number of snapshots stored
cannot be bigger than the number of steps in z
Number of wavelength/time steps - 200 - [1, 100000000]
Number of stored points per snapshot. If this value

is increased, the fidelity of the plot is improved only
if the value is below the actual number of points in
the time (frequency) domain used by the simulation
to obtain the solution. The latter is related to the
number of samples, which is a global parameter.
Linear scale - True - True, False
Determines axis type (linear or logarithmic) for the

dependent variable. If TRUE, the axis type is linear.
Note: The rest of the parameters in the Graphs tab of the component determine
which graphs are plotted after the simulation is completed.
572
Simulation

range
Enabled - True - True, False

enabled. If FALSE, all input signals reach the output
port of the component without any changes.
Noise

range
Convert noise bins - False - True, False
If TRUE, each noise bin within the bandwidth of the

signal is converted to a Gaussian white noise, with
the correct power spectral density, and the noise is
added to the signal.
Random numbers

range
Generate random seed - True - True, False
Determines how random number generator is

initialized (seeded). If TRUE, the seed index used
for the initialization is the random number itself.
Otherwise, a user specified number is used.
Random seed index - 0 - [0, 4999]
If “Generate random seed” is FALSE, this value

random sequence is the same if the seed index is
not changed. The value of the “Random seed index”
is ignored if “Generate random seed” is TRUE.
Scalar approach
Basic equation
When the pulses propagating in the SMF gain fiber, it is assumed that the polarization
is unchanged along the fiber length, and the evolution of the slowly varying electric
573
field envelope can be described by the following equation (the scalar approach, Model
type parameter from the "Numerical" tab is set to "Scalar") of the form:
2 3 2
∂E ∂ E β3 ( ω0 ) ∂ E g ⎛ 2 i ∂ 2 ∂E ⎞ (1)
------ + αE + iβ 2 ( ω 0 ) --------- – -----------------
- --------- – --- E = iγ ⎜ E E + ------- ------ ( E E ) – ρτ R1 E ------------⎟
∂z 2 6 3 2 ⎝ ω 0 ∂T ∂T ⎠
∂T ∂T
In Equation 1, E = E ( z, T ) is the electric field envelope. A frame moving at the group

velocity ( T = t – z ⁄ v g ≡ t – β 1 z ) is assumed.
The derivatives of the propagation constant of the fiber mode β ( ω ) , ( ( β ( ω )c ) ⁄ ω is

the mode effective index), with respect to frequency
n
∂ β (ω 0 )
β n = ---------------------, n = 1, 2, 3 .
n
∂ω
( β 2 ) and ( β 3 ) are the first and the second group velocity dispersion (GVD)
parameters, respectively, and ω 0 is the reference frequency of the signal, related to
the parameter "Reference wavelength" ("Main" category of the component properties)
2πc
through ω 0 = --------- with c being the light speed in vacuum.
λ0
The physical meaning of the terms in Equation 1 is the following. The first term takes
into account the slow changes of the electric field along the fiber length. The second
term takes into account the linear losses of optical fiber. The third term represents the
(first-order) group velocity dispersion. This is the effect responsible for the pulse
broadening. (See "Group velocity dispersion" in the Tutorials). The next term is the
second-order GVD, known also as third-order dispersion (TOD). This effect becomes
important for a signal with a broad spectrum (e.g. femtosecond pulses or WDM
systems with many channels). The pulse shape becomes asymmetric due to the
effect of TOD. (See "Third order dispersion" from the Tutorials). The parameters ( β 2 )
and ( β 3 ) are denoted as "frequency domain parameters" in the interface of the
component (see the "Dispersion" category in the Parameters table). The following
relations are used internally to convert between them and the commonly used
wavelength domain parameters D (dispersion) and S (dispersion slope).
dβ 1 2πc
D = --------- = – --------- β 2
dλ 2
λ (2)
λ 2 2 dD
β 3 = ⎛ ---------⎞ ( λ S + 2λD ), S = -------
⎝ 2πc⎠ dλ
574
For gain fiber, the gain is defined by
2
⎛ d E⎞
g = g ( t ) ⋅ ⎜ 1 + T 22 ⋅ ⎟ (3)
⎝ 2
dt ⎠
where T2 is the dipole relaxation time and g(t) is saturated gain according to
g0
g ( t ) = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- (4)
2 2
1 + ⎛ ( ( E x + E y ) ⋅ dt )⎞ ⁄ E s
∫
⎝ ⎠
where g0 is the small signal gain and Es is the saturable energy.
The parameter γ is given by:
ω0 n2
γ = ------------- (5)
cA eff
In Equation 5, n 2 is the nonlinear refractive index coefficient and A eff is the fiber
effective area. The first term in the right-hand side in Equation 1 accounts for the self-
phase modulation effect. It is responsible for the broadening of the pulse spectra and,
in the presence of anomalous GVD, for the formation of optical solitons (See "Self-
phase modulation" and "Self-phase modulation and group velocity dispersion" from
the Tutorials). The second term in the right-hand side of Equation 1 takes into account
the self-steepening effect. It leads to an asymmetry in the SPM-broadened spectra of
ultrashort (femtosecond) pulses [1] and is responsible for the formation of optical
shocks (see "Self-steepening" in the Tutorials). This effect will be taken into account
only if the "Full Raman response" parameter is set to False. The last term in
Equation 1 accounts for the intra-pulse Raman scattering effect with the parameter
τ R1 being the parallel Raman self-shift time. The intra-pulse Raman scattering is an
approximation to the actual Raman response of the material which is valid provided
that signal spectrum is narrow compared to the Raman-gain spectrum. The τ R
parameter is related to the slope of the imaginary part of the Raman susceptibility
Im ( χ 1111 ( ω ) ) at zero frequency offset [1]. The parameter ρ is the fractional
contribution of the delayed response of the material to the total nonlinearity [1]. The
intra-pulse Raman scattering effect is responsible for the self-frequency shift i.e.
energy transfer from higher to lower spectral components. It leads to a decay of higher
order solitons into its constituents (see "Intrapulse Raman scattering" in the Tutorials).
The intra-pulse Raman scattering plays the most important role among the higher
order nonlinear effects [1].
Full Raman response
The component can simulate the SRS effect without the requirement that the signal
spectrum is much narrower compared to the Raman gain spectrum. Selecting the
575
option "Full Raman response" from the Numerical tab can do this. In this case
Equation 1 is replaced by:
2 ∞
iβ 2 ( ω 0 )∂ E ∂ 2 E β 3 ( ω 0 ) ∂ 3 E g ⎛ ⎞
∂E 2 2
------ + αE + ------------------------------ --------- – ------------------ --------- – --- E = iγ ( 1 – ρ ) E E + ρE h 1111 ( s ) E ( T – s ) ds⎟
⎜
∫ (6)
∂z 2 2 6 3 2 ⎜ ⎟
∂T ∂T ⎝ ⎠
0
In Equation 6, h1111(t) is the (time-domain) Raman response function [1][2]. It is the

Fourier-transform of the of the Raman susceptibility χ 1111 ( ω ) . In this case the self-
steeping effect is neglected.
Vector approach
When the polarization state of the incident light is not preserved during its propagation
inside an optical fiber the scalar approach is no longer applicable and Equation 1 is
replaced by [1]:
2 3
∂E X ∂E iβ ∂ E g β ∂ E 2 2 2
---------- + β 1X ---------X- + -------2- ------------X- – --- E X – -----3- ------------X- = iγ ( 1 – ρ ) ⎛ E X + --- E Y ⎞ E X
∂z ∂t 2 2 2 6 3 ⎝ 3 ⎠
∂t ∂t
∞ ∞
2 2
+ iγρE X ∫ h1111 ( s ) EX ( t – s ) ∫
ds + h 1122 ( s ) E Y ( t – s ) ds
0 0
∞
∫
+ iγρE Y h 1212 ( s )E X ( t – s )E Y∗ ( t – s )ds
0
(7)
2 3
∂E ∂E iβ ∂ E g β ∂ E 2 2 2
---------Y- + β 1X ---------Y- + -------2- ------------Y- – --- E Y – -----3- ------------Y- = iγ ( 1 – ρ ) ⎛ E Y + --- E X ⎞ E Y
∂z ∂t 2 2 2 6 3 ⎝ 3 ⎠
∂t ∂t
∞ ∞
2 2
+ iγρE Y ∫ h1111 ( s ) Eγ ( t – s ) ∫
ds + h 1122 ( s ) E X ( t – s ) ds
0 0
∞
∫
+ iγρE X h 1212 ( s )E γ t – s E∗ X ( t – s ) ds
0
In Equation 7, hijkl(t) are the Raman response functions. The convolution integrals in
Equation 7 are evaluated in the frequency domain, by multiplying the spectra of the
electric fields with the Raman susceptibilities and then performing the inverse FFT.
576
In case the SRS effect is represented by "Intrapulse Raman scattering", Equation 7

is replaced by [2]:
2 3
∂E X ∂E iβ ∂ E gE β ∂ E
---------- + β 1X ---------X- + -------2- ------------X- – ---------X- – -----3- ------------X- =
∂z ∂t 2 2 2 6 3
∂t ∂t
2 2
2 2 1 +αf 2 ∂ EX ∂ EY
iγ E X + ⎛ ---( 1 – ρ ) + ρ --------------⎞ E Y – ρτ R1 ---------------- – ρτ R2 ---------------- E X
⎝3 2 ⎠ ∂t ∂t
τ R1 – τ R2 ∂ ( E X E Y∗ )
– iγρ ------------------------ ------------------------- E Y
2 ∂t
(8)
2 3
∂E Y ∂E iβ ∂ E gE β ∂ E
---------- + β 1Y ---------Y- + -------2- ------------Y- – ---------Y- – -----3- ------------Y- =
∂z ∂t 2 2 2 6 3
∂t ∂t
2 2
2 2 1 +αf 2 ∂ EY ∂ EX
iγ E Y + ⎛ ---( 1 – ρ ) + σ --------------⎞ E X – στ R1 ---------------- – ρ τ R2 ---------------- E Y
⎝3 2 ⎠ ∂t ∂t
τ R1 – τ R2 ∂ ( E Y E X∗ )
– iγρ ------------------------ ------------------------- E X
2 ∂t
In the case of Equation 7 or Equation 8, due to the orthogonal Raman gain (the last
terms in Equation 7 and Equation 8), the "Exponential" option for the "Propagator
type" is not applicable. The component automatically selects "Runge Kutta 2nd order"
when the model type is set to "Vector" and the Raman effect ("Intrapulse Raman
scattering" or "Full Raman response" options are selected. Due to the increased
number of convolutions performed at each step the fiber component can be slow
when solving Equation 7 and Equation 8. For information, check the Optical fiber
component technical background.
577
Numerical solution
For information about the numerical solution, check the Optical fiber component
technical background.
References
578
Amplifiers Library
Optical
Raman
• Raman Amplifier-Average Power Model

• Raman Amplifier-Dynamic Model
579
Notes:
580
RAMAN AMPLIFIER COMPONENT (OBSOLETE)
Raman Amplifier Component (Obsolete)
This component is an obsolete version that is included with OptiSystem for backwards compatibility
purposes - It was replaced by the Bidirectional Optical Fiber component.
Ports

Parameters
Fiber

Fiber length 10 km [0, INF]
Attenuation data type Constant — Constant, Wavelength

Dependent /From File
Attenuation – constant 0.25 dB/km [0, INF]
Attenuation vs. wavelength AtnVsLambda.dat — [0, INF]
Forward Input Coupling Loss 1 dB [0, 106]
Forward Output Coupling Loss 0.022 dB [0, 106]
Backward Input Coupling Loss 1 dB [0, 106]
Backward Output Coupling 0.022 dB [0, 106]

Loss
Effective area data type Constant — Constant, Wavelength

Dependent/From File
Effective area – constant 72 µm2 [0, INF]
Effective area vs. wavelength EffAreaVsLambda.dat — [0, INF]
581
Raman effect

Peak Raman gain coef 9.9e-14 m/W [0, INF]
Pump wavelength of peak 1000 nm [0, INF]

Raman gain coef
Raman gain spectrum vs. freq. RamanGainVsFreq.dat — —
Raman gain polarization factor 0.5 — [0, INF]
Temperature 300 K [0, INF]
Rayleigh effect
Name and description Default value Unit Value range

Rayleigh coef. data type Constant — Constant, Wavelength
Dependent/From File
Rayleigh coef. — constant 5e-005 1/km [0, INF]
Rayleigh coef. vs. wavelength RayleighGainvsLambda.dat — [0, INF]
Reflections

Left end reflection data type Constant — Constant, Wavelength
Dependent/From File
Left end reflection — constant –30 dB [-INF, 0]
Left end reflection vs. NearEndReflVsLambda.dat — [-INF, 0]

wavelength
Right end reflection data type Constant — Constant, Wavelength

Dependent/From File
Right end reflection — –30 dB [-INF, 0]

constant
Right end reflection vs. FarEndReflVsLambda. dat — [-INF, 0]

wavelength
582
Other nonlinearities

Brillouin gain coef 5e-011 m/W [0, INF]
Brillouin bandwidth data type Constant — Constant, Wavelength

Dependent/From File
Brillouin bandwidth — 40 MHz [0, INF]

constant
Brillouin bandwidth vs. FarEndReflVsLambda.dat — [0, INF]

wavelength
Brillouin Stokes shift 11 GHz [0, INF]
Nonlinear refr. index data type Constant — Constant, Wavelength

Dependent/From File
Nonlinear refr. index — 3e-020 m2/W [0, INF]

constant
Nonlinear refr. index vs. N2VsLambda.dat — [0, INF]

wavelength
Raman-resonant n2 dispersion RealHiRezVsLambda.dat — [–INF, INF]
Eff. refr. index vs. wavelength EffRIVsLambda.dat — [0, INF]
Group velocity dispersion 5 ps/nm/km [0, INF]
Dispersion slope 0.1 ps/nm2/km [0, INF]
Effects on/off
Name and description Value range Dependence

Attenuation ON [ON, OFF]
Rayleigh backscattering gain ON [ON, OFF]
SRS gain ON [ON, OFF]

(Stimulated Raman scattering gain)
SpRS gain OFF [ON, OFF]
Spontaneous Raman scattering gain)
Pump depletion in SRS ON [ON, OFF]
Double Rayleigh scattering OFF [ON, OFF]
Left end reflection OFF [ON, OFF]
Right end reflection OFF [ON, OFF]
Polarisation maintaining fiber OFF [ON, OFF]
583
Simulation details

Enable ON — [ON, OFF]
Parameter set Default — Default, Auto, User
Upper Pump wavelength 1450 nm [0, INF]
Power accuracy 0.001 — [0, INF]
Max. number of iterations 100 — [1, 10000]
Number of power iterations 4 — [1, 10000]
ODE integration method 5th-order Runge-Kutta with — 5th-order Runge-Kutta

step size control with step size control,
Gear's stiff eq. solver with
step size control
ODE integrator accuracy 1e-006 — [0, 1]
Max. number of steps per 100000 — [1, 10000]

iteration
Number of longitudinal points 256 — [10, 100000]
Background noise PSD level 1e-100 W/Hz [0, 10000]
Inphase noise ratio 0 — [0, 1]
Calculate 3D graphics ON — [ON,OFF]
3D graphics resolution 10 — [1, 100]
Noises
Name and description Default value Default unit Unit Value range
Noise center frequency 193.1 THz Hz, THz, nm [30, 3e+006]
Noise bandwidth 30 THz Hz, THz, nm [0, INF]
Noise bins spacing 1000 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, nm [0, INF]
Noise threshold –100 dB — [-INF,+INF]
Noise dynamic 3 dB — [0, INF]
Convert noise bins Convert noise bins — — [ON, OFF]
584
Random numbers
Name and description Default Unit Value

value range
Generate random seed ON — [ON,OFF]

Results

value range
Lower limit of Region of Interest 1550 nm [0, INF]
Upper limit of Region of Interest 1600 nm [0, INF]
585
Graphs

Forward Output Power Spectrum [dBm] Wavelength [nm] Power [dBm]
Forward Output Gain [dB] Wavelength [nm] Gain [dB]
Forward Output OSNR [dB] Wavelength [nm] OSNR [dB]
Forward Output Multiple Rayleigh Scattering Spectrum Wavelength [nm] Power [dBm]
[dBm]
Backward Output Power Spectrum [dBm] Wavelength [nm] Power [dBm]
Backward Output Gain [dB] Wavelength [nm] Gain [dB]
Backward Output OSNR [dB] Wavelength [nm] OSNR [dB]
Backward Output Multiple Rayleigh Scattering Spectrum Wavelength [nm] Power [dBm]
[dBm]
Forward Power Spectrum [dBm] Wavelength [nm] Fiber Length [km]
Forward Gain [dB] Wavelength [nm] Fiber Length [km]
Forward Gain Coefficient [dB/km] Wavelength [nm] Fiber Length [km]
Forward OSNR [dB] Wavelength [nm] Fiber Length [km]
Forward Double Rayleigh Scatt. Spectrum [dBm] Wavelength [nm] Fiber Length [km]
Backward Power Spectrum [dBm] Wavelength [nm] Fiber Length [km]
Backward Gain [dB] Wavelength [nm] Fiber Length [km]
Backward Gain Coefficient [dB/km] Wavelength [nm] Fiber Length [km]
Backward OSNR [dB] Wavelength [nm] Fiber Length [km]
Backward Double Rayleigh Scatt. Spectrum [dBm] Wavelength [nm] Fiber Length [km]
When a parameter is defined as a curve loaded from a file, the format of the file is:
......
Wavelength_N ParameterValue_N
The unit of the wavelengths is always [nm]. The units of the parameter values are
given in the table above, and are the same as the units of the respective Constant
parameter. Arbitrary number of points (file lines) are allowed, except 0 (empty file).
586
Results
The component produces the following results:
• Maximum Forward Gain [dB]
• Maximum Forward On/Off Gain [dB]
• Forward Gain Flatness [dB]
• Maximum Forward Power [dB]
• Wavelength of Maximum Forward Power [dB]
• Minimum Forward Effective Noise Figure [dB]
• Forward Effective Noise Figure Flatness [dB]
• Maximum Backward Gain [dB]
• Maximum Backward On/Off Gain [dB]
• Backward Gain Flatness [dB]
• Maximum Backward Power [dB]
• Wavelength of Maximum Backward Power [dB]
• Minimum Backward Effective Noise Figure [dB]
• Backward Effective Noise Figure Flatness [dB]
These results are calculated for the wavelength range defined in the Results tab of
the Component Properties dialog box.
Forward and Backward are names used to distinguish the characteristics pertaining
to the left and right ends of the fiber respectively. They have nothing to do with the
frequently used terms forward / (backward) Raman amplification, meaning amplifier
configuration having co-propagating / (counter-propagating) pump and signals.
Graphics
The Raman Amplifier presents the results of the calculations in a variety of both 2D
and 3D graphics.
2D graphics
The following 2D graphs are available:
• Forward Output Power Spectrum [dBm]
• Forward Output Gain [dB]
• Forward Output On/Off Gain [dB]
• Forward Output OSNR [dB]
• Forward Double Rayleigh Scattering Spectrum [dBm]
• Forward Eff. Noise Figure Spectrum [dB]
• Backward Output Power Spectrum [dBm]
587
• Backward Output Gain [dB]

• Backward Output On/Off Gain [dB]
• Backward Output OSNR [dB]
• Backward Double Rayleigh Scattering Spectrum [dBm]
• Backward Eff. Noise Figure Spectrum [dB]
3D graphics
The following 3D graphs are available:
• Forward Power Spectrum [dBm]
• Forward Gain [dB]
• Forward Gain Coefficient [dB/km]
• Forward OSNR [dB]
• Forward Double Rayleigh Scattering Spectrum [dBm]
• Backward Power Spectrum [dBm]
• Backward Gain [dB]
• Backward Gain Coefficient [dB/km]
• Backward OSNR [dB]
• Backward Double Rayleigh Scattering Spectrum [dBm]
2D/3D graphics
The following 2D/3D graphics are available:
• Forward Power Spectrum [dBm]
• Forward On/Off Gain [dB]
• Forward Gain [dB]
• Forward Gain Coefficient [dB/km]
• Forward OSNR [dB]
• Forward Double Rayleigh Scattering Spectrum Power [dBm]
• Forward Eff. Noise Figure [dB]
• Backward Power Spectrum [dBm]
• Backward On/Off Gain [dB]
• Backward Gain [dB]
• Backward Gain Coefficient [dB/km]
• Backward OSNR [dB]
• Backward Double Rayleigh Scattering Spectrum Power [dBm]
• Backward Eff. Noise Figure [dB]
Forward and Backward are names used to distinguish the characteristics pertaining
to the overall optical spectra propagating from the left end to the right end of the fiber
respectively, and vice-versa. They have nothing to do with the frequently used terms
588
forward / (backward) Raman amplification, meaning amplifier configuration having

co-propagating / (counter-propagating) pump and signals.
Introduction
The most promising technology to support almost unlimited bandwidth employs the
nonlinear effect of stimulated Raman scattering (SRS) in hybrid EDFA + Raman fiber
amplifiers (HRA) or purely Raman fiber amplifiers (RFA) [1,2]. The most important
advantage of this effect is that the pump wavelength λp does not need to be tied to a
particular energy level/absorption band, as it is in EDFAs. Raman amplification is
readily obtainable in any spectral region and in any type of fiber, provided a practical
pump source with wavelength 80-100 nm shorter than that of the signal and with
sufficiently high power is available. Given the progress in the manufacturing of high-
power pump lasers in the infrared [3] along with the seemingly limitless demand for
amplification bandwidth, Raman amplification will play an increasingly important role
in WDM networks.
SRS is among the best-understood third-order nonlinear processes, observed

experimentally for the first time in 1962 in bulk media [4] and in 1972 in optical fibers
[5]. It manifests itself as an exponential growth of a signal (Stokes) wave in the field
of a shorter wavelength-intensive pump. As mentioned above, SRS is a non-resonant
effect with respect to pump wavelength, which may lie anywhere in the transparency
windows of the medium. On the other hand, the frequency difference ωp-ωs between
the pump and signal waves should be resonant with one of the vibrational modes ωR
of the host. SRS does not require phase-matching, and for CW pumps, it allows both
forward (pump and signal co-propagating) and backward (counter-propagating)
pumping configurations. The most important characteristics of SRS in telecom-grade
fibers are [6 (and references)]:
• The SRS gain spectrum peaks at 13.2 THz (≈ 100 nm at λp =1.55 μm), but
extends up to 30 THz.
• The 3dB bandwidth of the gain spectrum is 6-7 THz (≈ 50 nm at λp =1.55 μm).
• The peak gain gRpeak (λ) coefficient is 6.4x10-13 m/W for λp = 1.55 [μm], and is
inversely proportional to λp.
• Both the shape of the spectrum and the value of gRpeak (λ) depend on the
concentration of the dopants; the peak gain coefficient of pure GeO2 is 8 times
larger than that of fused silica. Figure 1 shows the zero temperature Raman gain
coefficient spectra of pure fused silica, pure fused GeO2, and silica doped with 25
mol.% GeO2. The spectra are scaled to the peak gain coefficient of silica.
• The SRS effect is in principle highly polarization-dependent. Raman gain is
negligible for orthogonal polarizations of the pump and signal. However, in non-
polarization maintaining fibers, the gain becomes polarization independent due to
mode-scrambling. In this case gRpeak(λ) is reduced by a factor of 2.
589
Figure 1 Zero temperature Raman coefficient spectra
The arbitrary choice of pump(s) wavelength(s) allows for a key new feature in all types
of hybrid and Raman fiber amplifiers: the possibility to arrange several pumps in a
finite pump band and to amplify the WDM signals in their extended aggregate gain
spectrum. Gain-equalization is achieved by a proper choice of the wavelengths and
powers of the individual pumps.
On the device level, the HRA and FRA come in a variety of configurations: backward-,
forward- and bidirectionally pumped, discrete or distributed, single- or multi-stage.
The ubiquitous nature of the Raman effect allows numerous types of fibers to be used
as the SRS–active media — from standard transmission fibers in distributed FRA to
short (5-8 km) DCFs or highly nonlinear heavily-doped fibers with small effective
areas [9]. Typically, several hundred milliwatts of pump power are required.
The challenges in modeling and optimizing FRAs are related mainly to the nonlinear,
inefficient nature of SRS, requiring high pump powers and long fibers, and to the
different pump mechanism.
• All participating optical waves interact with each other. The shorter wavelengths
transfer power to the longer wavelengths (all long wavelengths deplete all short
wavelengths), resulting in a complex longitudinal distribution of gain coefficients
and noise powers.
• Other third-order nonlinear processes among the pumps take place — SPM and
XPM, FWM, and stimulated Brillouin scattering (SBS).
• Considerable noise powers and crosstalk are generated by multi-path Rayleigh
scattering.
An additional challenge is the requirement to build a model that is both quantitatively

and qualitatively precise. While the general features of any of the effects above are
well known [6], it is the complex interplay of the details that matters if such a model is
590
to be used as a versatile design tool by the photonics industry. As a result, some of

the simplifications (usually found in the literature) should be rejected:
• The Raman spectrum of pure fused silica must be used with care. For discrete
FRAs, the magnitude and the spectrum of the Raman gain coefficient must
always be defined in dependence on the concentration of the dopants [14]. The
dispersion of the real part of the Raman-resonant nonlinear susceptibility must
also be accounted for [15].
• The assumption that the fiber parameters, such as effective areas/overlap
integrals, losses, and Brillouin gain bandwidth, are constants. In the wavelength
region of 1.4-1.65 [μm], the effective areas of SMF-28TM and a typical DSF vary
by 25% and 50% respectively.
The comprehensive model described here uses the unified spectral signal
representation illustrated in Figure 2. It features arbitrary number and location of
pumps, signals and ASE bands, and complete forward / backward symmetry. Each
forward propagating wave has a backward counterpart at the same wavelength and
vice-versa.
Figure 2 Unified spectral signal representation
591
Formulation of the model

As an example, the power and the phase change of any type of wave (pump, signal,
or ASE) with central carrier frequency ωk as PF,B(z, ωk) and θF,B (z, ωk) respectively,
where the subscripts F and B discriminate against the forward and backward
propagating waves at the same wavelength. The system of coupled differential
equations describing the operation of a FRA or the Raman sub-unit of a HRA has the
form:
dP F ( z ,ω k )
- = – α ( ω k )P F ( z ,ω k )
-------------------------
dz
+ ρ ( ω k )P B ( z ,ω k )
N
R sp
+ ∑ g ( ω k ,ω 1 ) [ P F ( z ,ω 1 ) + P B ( z ,ω 1 ) ] [ P F ( z ,ω k ) + P ( ω 1 ,ω k ,T ,B k ) ]
l = k+1
k–1
R
–
∑g ( ω l ,ω k ) [ P F ( z ,ω l ) + P B ( z ,ω l ) ]P F ( z ,ω k )
l=1
sp
– 2F total ( ω k ,T )P F ( z ,ω k )
Br
B Br Br sp Br
+ --------------------------- g P B ( z ,ω k + Δω ) [ P F ( z ,ω k ) + P ( ω k + Δω ,ω k ,T ,B k ) ]
Br
( B + Bk )
Br
B Br Br sp Br
– --------------------------- g [ P B ( z ,ω k – Δω ) + P ( ω k ,ω k – Δω ,T ,B k ) ]P F ( z ,ω k )
Br
( B + Bk )
N N N
⎧ R ⎫
+
∑ ∑ ∑ ⎨⎩ g ( ω k ,ω l ,ω m ,ω n ) cos [ Ψ ( z ) ] – 4γ ( ω k ,ω l ,ω m ,ω n ) sin [ Ψ ( z ) ] ⎬
⎭
l = 1m = 1n = 1
ωk = ωl + ωm – ωn
x ( P F ( z ,ω k )P F ( z ,ω l ) )P F ( z ,ω m )P F ( z ,ω n )
592
N
dθ F ( z ,ω k )
-------------------------- =
dz ∑ γ ( ωk ,ωl ,ωk ,ωl ) [ ( 2 – δkl )PF ( z ,ωl ) + 2PB ( z ,ωl ) ]
l=1
N N ⎧ N R ⎫
⎪ g ( ω k ,ω l ,ω m ,ω n ) ⎪
+
∑∑∑ ⎨ 2γ ( ω k ,ω l ,ω m ,ω n ) cos [ Ψ ( z ) ] + --------------------------------------------
⎪ 2
- sin [ Ψ ( z ) ] ⎬
⎪
l = 1m = 1n = 1⎩ ⎭
ω
k
= ωl + ωm – ωn
P F ( z ,ω l )P F ( z ,ω m )P F ( z ,ω n )
X ----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
P F ( z ,ω k )
The equations describing the evolution of P B ( z ,ωk ) and θ B ( z ,ωk ) are obtained by
alternative interchanging of subscripts F and B.
The notations are explained in Table 1.
Table 1 Description of notations
Notation Description
N Number or pumps+signals+ASE bands in each direction
2N Total number of interacting waves
α ( ωk ) Total losses
ρ ( ωk ) Rayleigh scattering coefficient

R R R
g ( ω k ,ω 1 ) = f ( ω k ,ω 1 )g peak ( ω 1 )g norm ( ω 1 – ω k ) Raman gain coefficient
R
g peak ( ω 1 ) Peak Raman gain coefficient, depending on the frequency of
the current pump wave. In fused silica, it is downshifted by
Δω = ω R = 13.2 THz from the respective pump.
R
g norm ( Δω ) Normalized Raman gain spectrum of the fiber, as dependent
on the type and concentration of the dopant.
f ( ω l ,ω k ) ;f ( ω k ,ω l ,ω m ,ω n ) Mode overlap integrals; for definitions see, for example [6]

(chap. 7 and 10)
593
Notation Description
sp
P ( ω l ,ω k ,T ,B ) = Power generated by spontaneous Raman and Brillouin
scattering of the wave with carrier frequency ω 1 into the
bandwidth of the wave with carrier ω k . Although the forms of
these terms are identical, their values are different:
sp
h ( ω1 – ωk )
P ( ω 1 ,ω k ,T ,B ) ≈ 2hω k B for SpRS, while
⎧ ---------------------------
⎫ sp
P ( ω 1 ,ω k ,T ,B ) » 2hω k B for SpBS.
⎪ KT ⎪
= 2hω k B ⎨ 1 + 1 ⁄ e –1 ⎬
⎪ ⎪
⎩ ⎭
sp
F total ( ω k ,T ) = A factor (with dimension of length) determining the integrated
total power lost by the current wave via spontaneous Raman
scattering into all possible lower frequencies, as depending on
the Raman spectrum and the temperature.
ωk ⎧ h ( ωk – ω )
------------------------
-
⎫
R ⎪ KT ⎪
2πhω k ∫ g ( ω ,ω k ) ⎨ 1 + 1 ⁄ e – 1 ⎬dω
0
⎪ ⎪
⎩ ⎭
B Bandwidth of the respective wave.
h, K, T Planck bar constant, Boltzmann constant, Temperature.
gBr, BBr, Δω Br Brillouin gain coefficient, line width, and Stokes shift.
Ψ ( z ) = θ 1 ( z ) + θ m ( z ) – θ n ( z ) – θ k ( z ) – Δk .z Total phase difference between the nonlinearly mixed waves
Δk Input phase mismatch
δ lm Kroneker delta
594
References
[1] H. Masuda, S. Kawai, IEEE Photonics Technology Letters, Vol. 11, p. 647, 1999.
[2] T. Nielsen, P. Hansen, A. Stentz, M. Aquaro, J. Pedrazzani, A. Abramov, and R. Espindola,
IEEE Photonics Technology Letters, Vol. 10, p. 1492, 1998.
[3] Laser Focus World, January 2000; SDL Press Release,
http://www.sdli.com/investor/releases/19990630_BROADENS.html
[4] E. Woodbury and W. Ng, Proc. IRE, Vol. 50, p. 2347, 1962.
[5] R. Stolen, E. Ippen, and A. Tynes, Applied Physics Letters, Vol. 20, p. 62, 1972.
[6] G. Agrawal, “Nonlinear Fiber Optics,” 2nd Edition, Academic Press Inc., San Diego, California,
1995.
[7] F.L. Galeener, J.C. Mikkelsen Jr., R.H. Geils, and W.J. Mosby, Applied Physics Letters, Vol. 32,
p. 34, 1978.
[8] Y. Emori, K. Tanaka, and S. Namiki, Electronics Letters, Vol. 35, p. 1355, 1999.
[9] T. Hosaka, S. Sudo, H. Itoh, and K. Okamoto, Electronics Letters, Vol. 24, p. 770, 1988.
[10] H. Kidorf, K. Rottwitt, M. Nissov, M. Ma, and E. Rabarijaona, IEEE Photonics Technology
Letters, Vol. 11, p. 530, 1999.
[11] M. Nissov, K. Rottwitt, H. Kidorf, and M. Ma, Electronics Letters, Vol. 35, p. 997, 1999.
[12] Y. Chen, Journal of the Optical Society of America, Vol. B7, p. 43, 1990.
[13] B. Foley, M. Dakss, R. Davies, and P. Melman, Journal of Lightwave Technology, Vol. 7, p.
2024, 1989.
[14] S. Davey, D. Williams, B. Ainslie, W. Rothwell, and B. Wakefield, IEE Proceedings, Vol. 136, p.
301, 1989.
[15] R. Hellwarth, Progress of Quantum Electronics, Vol.5 , p. 1, 1977.
[16] Y. Shen, “The Principles of Nonlinear optics,” J. Wiley & Sons Inc., 1984.
[17] A. Uchida, M. Takeoka, T. Nakata, and F. Kannari, Journal of Lightwave Technology, Vol. 16, p.
92, 1998.
[18] S. Evangelides, L. Mollenauer, J. Gordon, and N. Bergano, Journal of Lightwave Technology,
Vol. 10, p. 28, 1992.
595
Notes:
596
RAMAN AMPLIFIER-AVERAGE POWER MODEL
Raman Amplifier-Average Power Model
This component simulates a Raman amplifier based on the average power approach [1], [2].
Ports

Parameters
Main
Name and description Symbo Default value Default unit Value range
l
Length L 10 km ]0; 1,000,000[
Amplifier length.
Attenuation data type Constant — Constant, From File
Defines if attenuation is entered as

scalar, used for all wavelengths, or if
it is wavelength dependent /
downloaded from a file.
Attenuation α 0.2 dB/km [0,+INF[

Constant attenuation value
Attenuation file - FiberLoss.dat nm - dB/km -
Attenuation value dependent on

wavelength.
Effective area data type - Constant — Constant, From File

Defines if effective area is entered as
it is wavelength dependent/
597
l
Effective interaction area A eff 72 µm2 [0, INF[
Constant effective area.
Effective interaction area file - EffectiveArea.dat nm - µm2 -

Effective area dependent on
wavelength.
Raman gain type - Raman gain - Raman gain, Raman gain

efficiency
Defines type of Raman gain. If
Raman gain efficiency is selected,
effective area is disabled, and value is
g r / A eff . Otherwise, it is normalized
g r multiplied by Raman gain peak
(see below).
Raman gain peak - 1e-013 - [0,+INF[
Normalized Raman gain is multiplied

by Raman gain peak. Formula is
detailed later in this section.
Raman gain reference pump - 1000 nm [0,+INF[
Value used for Raman gain

calculation. Formula is detailed later
in this section.
Gain X frequency gr RG.dat THZ - -

normalized
File that defines Raman gain or the
Raman gain
Raman gain efficiency.
Enhanced
l
Temperature T 300 K [0,500]
Absolute temperature at which fiber is

operating. Used for noise
consideration.
Polarization factor K eff 2 - [1,2]
Actual value depends on relative

polarization of fields of channels i
and j. Equals 1 if fields of both
channels are polarization-aligned,
and 2 for totally scrambled
polarization [4].
598
l
Rayleigh back scattering data - Constant - Constant, From File
type
Defines whether Rayleigh back
scattering coefficient is entered as
scalar, used for all wavelengths, or
wavelength dependent/downloaded
from a file.
Rayleigh back scattering γ- 5.0e-005 1/km [0, INF[
Constant Rayleigh back scattering.
Rayleigh back scattering file - Rayleigh.dat nm - 1/km -
Rayleigh back scattering dependent

on wavelength.
Upper pump reference - 1450 nm [0,3000]
Used for convergence test. All

wavelengths below this value are
considered pump, and are not taken
into account for the convergence test.
Enable dispersion - False - True, False
Enables the linear chromatic

dispersion application for the signals.
Dispersion - 16.75 ps/nm/km ]-INF,+INF[
Value of the GVD (Group Velocity

Dispersion) parameter in wavelength
domain.
Dispersion slope - 0.075 ps/nm2/km ]-INF,+INF[
Value of the dispersion slope

parameter.
Reference wavelength - 1550 nm [100,2000]
Used internally as “zero” (or

reference) frequency in spectrum of
signal envelope. Attenuation value is
assumed to correspond to this
frequency.
Numerical

Tolerance 0.01 - ]0,+INF[
Used to check convergence of the

model. Based on gain of the signals.
599

Number of divisions 50 - [1;50,000]

fiber.
Number of iterations 50 - [1;50,000]
Maximum number of iterations

executed. If convergence is not
reached in this number of iterations,
anyway.
Check convergence using: All signals - All signals, First signal

Defines if convergence is checked
using “All signals” or “First signal”.
Graphs

value range
Calculate graphs False - True, False
Defines if graphs are calculated or not. If False, component graphs

are not represented.
Number of distance steps 20 - [1,1e8]
Number of distance steps considered for graph generation.
Number of wavelength steps 20 - [1,1e8]
Number of wavelength steps considered for graph generation.
Linear scale True - True, False
Defines if a linear scale (Watt) or logarithmic one (dBm) is used.
Minimum value -50 dBm ]-INF,+INF[
If a logarithmic scale is used, this parameter defines the minimum

value for the power that is displayed on the graph.
Simulation

Defines whether the component is

enabled or not.
600
Noise
Noise center frequency 193.4 THz Hz, THz, nm [30, 30e5]
Determines noise center frequency.
Noise bandwidth 13 THz Hz, THz, nm ]0,+INF[

Bandwidth to create noise bins.
Noise bins spacing 125 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, nm [1,1000[
Specifies the noise bins spacing.
Noise threshold -100 dB — ]-INF,0[
Minimum value for adaptation of

noise bins.
Noise dynamic 3 dB — [0,+INF[
Threshold ratio for adaptation of noise

bins.
Convert noise bins Convert noise bins — — True, False
Determines if generated noise bins

are incorporated into the signal.
Random numbers

value range
In recent years, Raman amplifiers have become one of the most promising
technologies for the next generation of fiber amplifiers, mostly due to their flexibility in
bandwidth design.
Nevertheless, the simulation techniques that are commonly used for RA's have
demanded exhaustive computational time, mainly due to the use of direct integration
of the coupled differential equations that describe the RA behavior [3].
The coupled differential equations have the shape observed in Equation 1. A similar
set of equations, describing the backward propagation, is solved at the same time we
solve the forward equations written below.
601
dP f ( z, υ )
---------------------- = α ( υ )P f ( z, υ ) + γ ( υ )P b ( z, υ ) +
dz
gr ( υ – ζ )
P f ( z, υ )
∑ ---------------------- [ P f ( z, ζ ) + P b ( z, ζ ) ] +
K eff A eff
v<ζ
gr ( υ – ζ ) –1
hΔυ
∑ ---------------------- [ P f + P b ] [ 1 + exp ( [ h ( ζ – υ ) ⁄ kT ] – 1 ) ] –
A eff
(1)
v<ζ
gr ( υ – ζ ) υ
P f ( z, υ )
∑ ----------------------
K eff A eff ζ f
--- [ P ( z, ζ ) + P b ( z, ζ ) ] –
v>ζ
gr ( υ – ζ ) –1
2hυΔυP f ( z, υ )
∑ ----------------------
A eff
[ 1 + ( exp ( [ h ( υ – ζ ) ⁄ kT ] – 1 ) ]
v>ζ
where
Symbol Definition
υ, ζ frequencies (Hz)
α(υ) fiber attenuation [N/m]
γ(υ) Rayleigh back scattering

coefficient [N/m]
gr ( υ – ζ ) Raman gain coefficient for

frequency difference ( ( υ – ζ ) )
[m/W]
P b ( z, υ ) backward propagating power

[W]
A eff effective core area [m2]
K eff polarization factor
δυ frequency interval
h Plank’s constant
k Boltzmann’s constant
602
T temperature [K]
In the equations, the following physical effects were taken into account:
• pump-to-pump, signal-to-signal, and pump-to-signal Raman interactions
• spontaneous Raman emission and its temperature dependency
• stimulated Raman scattering
• pump depletions due to Raman energy transfer
• high-order Stokes generation
• multiple Rayleigh back scattering
• fiber loss
• spontaneous emission noise
A very interesting approach that considerably reduces the computational time for
simulating RA is the one used for this component. The idea behind this technique is
first to split the amplifier into a concatenation of small segments, and then to use the
small-signal-traveling wave solution in each section (see Equation 3). In order to
eliminate the z dependence in a small segment length, average powers in each
section are introduced (see Equation 4). So, basically, we rearrange some terms of
the original Equation 1 and reduce the propagation equations to a simpler form.
This new form, suitable for the purpose of average power analyses, can be written as
[2]:
dP f ( z, v )
⎛ --------------------
- = A ( z, v )P f ( z, v ) + B ( z, v )⎞ (2)
⎝ dz ⎠
where
gr ( υ – ζ ) υ gr ( υ – ζ )
A ( z, v ) = – α ( υ ) + ∑ ---------------------
K eff A eff f
- [ P ( z, ζ ) + P b ( z, ζ ) ] – ∑ --- ---------------------- [ P f ( z, ζ ) + P b ( z, ζ ) ]
ζ K eff A eff
v<ζ v>ζ
gr ( υ – ζ ) 1
– 2 hυΔυ ∑ ---------------------- 1 + ----------------------------------------------------------
- (2a)
A eff exp [ h ( υ – ζ ) ⁄ kT ] – 1
–1
v>ζ
gr ( υ – ζ ) 1
B ( z, υ ) = γ ( υ )P b ( z, υ ) + hυΔυ ∑ ---------------------- [ P f ( z, ζ ) + P b ( z, ζ ) ] 1 + ----------------------------------------------------------
- (2b)
A eff exp [ h ( υ – ζ ) ⁄ kT ] – 1
–1
v<ζ
if we substitute P f ( z, ζ ) , P b ( z, ζ ) , in (2a), (2b) in each lump by average powers in the

lump,
coefficients A ( z, v ) , B ( z, v ) are independent of z (within the lump, A ( υ ) , B ( υ ) and

the solution of Equation 2 can be written as:
B(υ) (3)
P f ( z 0 + H, υ ) = P f ( z 0, υ ) exp ( A ( υ )H ) + ------------ [ exp ( ( A ( υ )H ) – 1 ) ]
A(υ)
603
where H is the length of the lumps.
Within each lump, powers P f ( z, ζ ) , P b ( z, ζ ) must be replaced by average powers
in G – 1 B ( v ) G – 1 (4)
〈 P f, b ( v )〉 = P f, b ------------- + ----------- ------------- – 1
1nG A ( v ) 1nG
in
where P f, b are forward and backward propagating input powers to the lump,
G = exp ( A ( υ )H ) .
The user is responsible to guarantee that the term A ( v ) does not become zero. For
example, it is impossible to simulate the chromatic dispersion of just one signal if the
attenuation is not considered, once the term A ( v ) will become zero.
Numerical approach
The relaxation method is used in order to satisfy the boundary conditions of the two-
point boundary problem with given accuracy.
There are two different iteration procedures, for both forward and backward
directions. Forward direction is from Input port 1 to Output port 1, and backward is
from Input port 2 to Output port 2.
The first procedure, the innermost one, is intended to evaluate the self-consistent
convergence for the average powers used in Equation 4 for every amplified segment.
When a certain tolerance is reached (10-12), the average powers are considered
good enough to be used as an approximation of the desired functions.
In the outermost one, or second procedure, the convergence is checked after the
integration in forward direction is performed. If the variance in the gain is less than the
tolerance desired (see “Numerical” on page 599), the simulation is considered
finished. Otherwise, the component runs for the maximum number of iterations set by
the user.
The reason for the reduction in computational time is that direct numerical integration
of Equation 1 is replaced by algebraic operations.
The user can choose the signals that will be used in the convergence checking. There
are two available choices: All signals and First signal. When the First signal option
is chosen, just the signal with the smallest wavelength is used in checking the
convergence by the given tolerance. Otherwise, if the All signals option is chosen,
all signals are used in the checking. In the case where there a signal has not been
transmitted, the convergence test is performed based on the pumps.
604
Files
Some data necessary for this model may be downloaded from a file. In general, these
files are in the ASCII format and follow Optiwave's standard format. For clarity, the
units of each column in the files are listed in the following table.
Field First column Second column

Attenuation Wavelength (nm) Attenuation (dB/km)
Effective area Wavelength (nm) Effective area (µm2)
Raman gain X frequency Frequency shift (THz) Normalized Raman gain

2
m
------
W
Raman gain efficiency X Frequency shift (THz) Raman gain efficiency

frequency 1
-------------
W⋅m
Rayleigh back scattering Wavelength (nm) Back scattering (1/km)
When a file with the normalized Raman gain is used, it must be provided values for
the Raman gain peak and Raman gain reference pump to use in the calculation of the
Raman gain used in the simulation. The following formula is used:
PR
g R = ------- g N
λp
where g R is the Raman gain, P R is the Raman gain peak, λ p is the gain reference
pump and g N is the normalized Raman Gain.
m
The unit of Raman gain is given in ----- .
W
Comparison
As stressed in the beginning of the technical description, the average power model is
intended to decrease the computational time required to solve the Raman Amplifier
differential equations by simplifying the way the equations are written.
In fact, the model shows a reduction in computation time of over two orders of
magnitude [2] compared to the model using direct integration approach (fourth-order
Runge-Kutta). However, in some cases, it is known that the model fails in converging
(for example, when the total pump becomes very high).
Therefore, based on the characteristics presented, this model is very useful in getting
a first approximation for a network under certain limits. Once the rough estimation is
reached, the system could be generalized using the full steady state model.
A validation example for this model is presented in Lesson: "Raman amplifier -

Average power model" in the tutorials section.
605
References
[2] B. Min, W. J. Lee, N. Park, "Efficient Formulation of Raman Amplifier Propagation Equations
with Average Power Analysis", IEEE Photonics Technology Letters, Vol. 12, No. 11, November
2000.
[3] E. Desurvire, "Erbium-doped fiber amplifiers: principles and applications", Wiley-Interscience,
1994.
[4] S. Tariq, J.C. Palais, "A Computer Model of Non-Dispersion-Limited Stimulated Raman
Scattering in Optical Fiber Multiple-Channel Communications", IEEE Journal of Lightwave
Technology, Vol. 11, No. 12, December 1993.
606
RAMAN AMPLIFIER-DYNAMIC MODEL
Raman Amplifier-Dynamic Model
This component simulates a Raman amplifier using a dynamic model based on direct integration of the
differential equations that describe it.
Ports

Parameters
Main
l
Length L 10 km ]0; 1,000,000[
Amplifier length.
Attenuation data type — Constant — Constant, From file
Defines if attenuation is entered as

it is wavelength dependent /

Constant attenuation value
Attenuation file — FiberLoss.dat nm - dB/km —
Attenuation value dependent on

wavelength.
607
l
Effective area data type — Constant — Constant, From file
Defines if effective area is entered as

it wavelength dependent/downloaded
from a file.
Effective interaction area A eff 72 µm2 ]0, +INF[

Constant effective area.
Effective interaction area file — EffectiveArea.dat nm - µm2 —
Effective area dependent on

wavelength.
Raman gain type — Raman gain — Raman gain, Raman gain

efficiency
Defines type of Raman gain. If
Raman gain efficiency is selected,
effective area is disabled, and value is
g r / A eff . Otherwise, is normalized
g r multiplied by Raman gain peak
(see below).
Raman gain peak — 1e-013 — [0,+INF[
Normalized Raman gain is multiplied

by Raman gain peak. Formula is
detailed later in this section.
Raman gain reference pump — 1000 nm [0,+INF[
Value used for Raman gain

calculation. Formula is detailed later
in this section.
Gain X frequency gr RG.dat THZ - —

normalized
File that defines Raman gain or the Raman gain
Raman gain efficiency.
Enhanced
l
Temperature T 300 K [0,500]
Absolute temperature at which fiber is
operating. Used for noise
consideration.
608
l
Polarization factor K eff 2 — [1,2]
Actual value depends on relative

polarization of fields of channels i
and j. Equals 1 if fields of both
channels are polarization-aligned,
and 2 for totally scrambled
polarization [4].
Rayleigh back scattering data — Constant — Constant, From file

type
Defines whether Rayleigh back
scattering coefficient is entered as
scalar, used for all wavelengths, or
wavelength dependent/downloaded
from a file.
Rayleigh back scattering γ- 5.0e-005 1/km [0, +INF[
Constant Rayleigh back scattering.
Rayleigh back scattering file — Rayleigh.dat nm - 1/km —
Rayleigh back scattering dependent

on wavelength.
Upper pump reference — 1450 nm [0,3000]
Used for convergence test. All

wavelengths below this value are
considered pump, and are not taken
into account for the convergence test.
Enable dispersion — False — True, False
Enables the linear chromatic

dispersion application for the signals.
Dispersion — 16.75 ps/nm/km ]-INF, +INF[
The value of the GVD (Group Velocity

Dispersion) parameter in the
wavelength domain.
Dispersion slope — 0.075 ps/nm2/km -INF, +INF[
The value of the dispersion slope

parameter.
Reference wavelength — 1550 nm [100, 2000]
This value is used internally as a

“zero” or reference frequency in the
spectrum of the signal envelope. The
attenuation value is assumed to
correspond to this frequency.
609
l
Group delay data type — Constant — Constant, From file
Defines if the group delay is entered

as a scalar used for all wavelengths,
or if it wavelength dependent/entered
from a file.
Group delay 1/Vg(v) 4900000 ps/km [0, 1010]
Constant group delay
Group delay file — GroupDelay.dat ns—ps/km —
Numerical

Tolerance 0.01 — ]0,+INF[
Used to check convergence of the

model. Based on gain of the signals.
Number of divisions 50 — [1;50,000]

fiber.
Number of iterations 50 — [1;50,000]
Maximum number of iterations to be

executed. If convergence is not
reached in this number of iterations,
regardless.
Check convergence using: All signals - All signals, First signal
Defines if convergence is checked

using “All signals” or “First signal”.
Reference time
Determines the instant of time used to
take the powers to use as input
powers in the fiber to solve the
steady-state regime that will
determine the initial values.
Graphs

value range
Calculate graphs False - True, False
Defines if graphs are calculated or not. If False, component graphs

are not represented.
610

value range
Number of distance steps 20 - [1,1e8]
Number of distance steps considered for graph generation.
Number of wavelength steps 20 - [1,1e8]
Number of wavelength steps considered for graph generation.
Linear scale True - True, False
Defines if a linear scale (Watt) or logarithmic one (dBm) is used.
If a logarithmic scale is used, this parameter defines the minimum

value for the power that is displayed on the graph.
Simulation

Defines whether the component is

enabled or not.
Noise
Determines noise center frequency.
Bandwidth to create noise bins.
Noise bins spacing 125 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, nm [1,1000[
Specifies the noise bins spacing.
Noise threshold -100 dB — ]-INF,0[
Minimum value for adaptation of

noise bins.

bins.

611
Random numbers

value range

It is widely believed that Raman Amplifier (RA) will play an increasing role in future
optical fiber communication (OFC) systems [1]. They have already been widely
utilized due to their fundamental advantages [1]:
• there is amplification at any wavelength, provided the appropriate pump sources
are available.
• a fiber itself can be used as an active medium.
• a pump spectrum determines a gain spectrum.
The equations that describe a Raman amplifier are [2]:
± ± −
∂P ( z, t, υ )- − 1 -----------------------------
∂P ( z, t, υ )- − ± +
----------------------------- + --------------- = + α ( υ )P ( z, t, υ ) ± γ ( υ )P ( z, t, υ ) ±
∂z Vg ( υ ) ∂t
± gr ( υ – ζ ) ± −
---------------------- [ P ( z, t, ζ ) + P + ( z, t, ζ ) ] ±
P ( z, t, υ )
∑ K eff A eff
v<ζ
gr ( υ – ζ ) ± −
+ –1 −
hΔυ ∑ ----------------------
A eff
[P ( z, t, ζ ) + P ( z, t, ζ ) ] [ 1 + ( exp [ h ( ζ – υ ) ⁄ kT ] – 1 ) ]+ (1)
v<ζ
± gr ( υ – ζ ) υ ± +−
P ( z, t, ζ )
∑ ----------------------
K eff A eff ζ
--- [ P ( z, t, ζ ) + P ( z, t, ζ ) ] −
+
v>ζ
± gr ( υ – ζ ) –1
2hυΔυP ( z, t, ζ ) ∑ ----------------------
A eff
[ 1 + ( exp ( [ h ( υ – ζ ) ⁄ kT ] – 1 ) ]
v>ζ
612
where
Symbol Definition
υ, ζ frequencies (Hz)
Vg ( υ ) frequency-dependent group
velocity
α(υ) fiber attenuation [N/m]
γ(υ) Rayleigh back scattering

coefficient [N/m]
gr ( υ – ζ ) Raman gain coefficient for

frequency difference ( ( υ – ζ ) )
[m/W]
P b ( z, υ ) backward propagating power

[W]
A eff effective core area [m2]
K eff polarization factor
δυ frequency interval
h Plank’s constant
k Boltzmann’s constant
T temperature [K]
In these equations, the following physical effects were taken into account:
• pump-to-pump, signal-to-signal and pump-to-signal Raman interactions;
• spontaneous Raman emission and its temperature dependency;
• stimulated Raman scattering;
• pump depletions due to Raman energy transfer;
• high-order stokes generation;
• multiple Rayleigh backscattering;
• fiber loss;
• spontaneous emission noise.
In this component, the equations in Equation 1 (forward and backward) are solved
spatially through direct integration using a standard classical fourth-order Runge-
Kutta formula without adaptive step size [3].
Numerical approach
The convergence of the model is checked in two directions: forward and backward.
An iterative forward and backward integration of propagation equations must be
applied because backward propagating ASE powers and a counter-directional
pumping scheme may be defined, and the possibility of counter directional signal
613
propagation [2]. The forward direction is from Input Port 1 to Output Port 1 and
backward is from Input Port 2 to Output Port 2.
The iterative scheme is started with a forward integration of forward signals,

propagating ASE spectral components, and pumps. The backward pumps and
backward ASE powers are set to zero. At each backward integration, the final results
+
P ( z = L, υ ) of the previous forward integration, together with the boundary
conditions for the backward pump, backward ASE powers, and backward signals, are
used as starting conditions.
_
Similarly, the results of the previous backward integration P ( z = 0, υ ) together
with the boundary conditions for forward signal channels, pumps, and forward ASE,
are used as starting conditions for each forward integration [2].
The convergence checking is done after integration in the forward direction is

complete. If the variance in the gain is less than the tolerance desired
(see “Numerical” on page 610) , the simulation is considered complete. Otherwise,
the component runs for the maximum number of iterations set by the user.
The user can choose the signals that will be used in the convergence checking. There
are two available choices: All signals and First signal. When the First signal option
is chosen, just the signal with the smallest wavelength is used in checking the
convergence by the given tolerance. Otherwise, if the All signals option is chosen,
all signals are used in the checking. In the case where there a signal has not been
transmitted, the convergence test is performed based on the pumps.
After the spatial integration is complete, the time evolution of pumps, signals, and
amplified spontaneous emission waves is performed by direct integration with
Equation 1, starting with the steady-state solution for longitudinal distribution of
individual powers along the Raman fiber. To avoid possible oscillations of the solution
in time domain, care must be taken in the selection of bin widths used in space ( Δz ),
and time ( Δt ) discretization schemes. Stable solutions has been obtained when the
time bin ( Δt ) is equal to or less than the propagation time through a space
bin Δt ≤ Δz ⁄ V g .
In order to determine the rise/fall times of the surviving channel power transients with
–9
sufficient resolution, the ratio of time and space bins Δt ⁄ Δz = 4 × 10 [ s ⁄ m ] should
be independently kept for the Raman fiber length, as in the examples.
Some data necessary for this model may be downloaded from a file. In general, these
files are in the ASCII format and follow Optiwave's standard format.
614
For clarity, the units of each column in the files are listed in the following table.
Field First column Second column

Attenuation Wavelength (nm) Attenuation (dB/km)
Effective area Wavelength (nm) Effective area (µm2)
Raman gain X frequency Frequency shift (THz) Normalized Raman gain

2
m
------
W
Raman gain efficiency X Frequency shift (THz) Raman gain efficiency

frequency 1
-------------
W⋅m
Rayleigh back scattering Wavelength (nm) Back scattering (1/km)
When a file with the normalized Raman gain is used, it must be provided values for
the Raman gain peak and Raman gain reference pump to use in the calculation of the
Raman gain used in the simulation. The following formula is used.
PR
g R = ------- g N
λp
where g R is the Raman gain, P R is the Raman gain peak, λ p is the gain reference
pump and g N is the normalized Raman Gain.
m
The unit of Raman gain is given in ----- .
W
615
References
[1] E. M. Dianov, "Advances in Raman Fibers", Journal of Lightwave Technology, Vol. 20, No. 8,
August 2002.
[4] S. Tariq, J.C. Palais, "A Computer Model of Non-Dispersion-Limited Stimulated Raman
Scattering in Optical Fiber Multiple-Channel Communications", IEEE Journal of Lightwave
Technology, Vol. 11, No. 12, December 1993.
616
Amplifiers Library
Optical
Doped Fibers
• Er Doped Fiber Dynamic

• Er Doped Fiber Dynamic Analytical
• Er Doped Fiber
• Er Doped Multimode Fiber
• Er-Yb Codoped Fiber
• Er-Yb Codoped Fiber Dynamic
• Er-Yb Codoped Waveguide
• Pr Doped Fiber
• Yb-Doped Fiber
• Yb-Doped Fiber Dynamic
• Yb Doped Multimode Fiber
• Tm Doped Fiber
617
Notes:
618
ER DOPED FIBER DYNAMIC
Er Doped Fiber Dynamic
Incorporates time-varying input signal and pump powers that enable simulating dynamic effects
presented by erbium-doped amplifiers inserted in a fiber link. This powerful tool solves the full rate and
propagation equations in the time and spatial domain. The powers and population densities are
calculated as a function of the time variation at each point of the z fiber. This model is specifically
designed to simulate cascaded amplifiers in a long fiber link, considering multiple signal input.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Length 5 m — [0, 1e4]
Specifies the doped fiber length
Er metastable lifetime 10 ms — ]0, +INF[
Specifies the Erbium metastable lifetime
Loss at 1550 nm 0.01 dB/m — [0,100]

Loss at 980 nm 0.015 dB/m — [0,100]
Input data Fiber — — Fiber

specification specification,
Determines if saturation parameter is used or not Saturation
parameter
619

value range
Saturation parameter 4.4e+015 1/(s.m) — [1e-10, +INF[
Specifies value of saturation parameter

Specifies the numerical aperture of the Er-doped
fiber
Er ion density 1e+025 m–3 m–3~ppm-wt [1,+INF[

~wt%
Core radius 2.2 μm — [0,1, 10]

Specifies the fiber core radius
Er doping radius 2.2 μm — [0.1, 10]
Species the Erbium doped radius
Cross-sections

value range
cross-section file name Erbium.dat — —
Numerical

value range
Determines the relative error acceptable in each calculation for the
steady-state solution used as initial condition for the dynamic
behavior

Specifies the maximum number of times to repeat the longitudinal
integrations for the powers when solving the steady-state equations
used as initial condition for the dynamic behavior

620

value range
Overlap factor data Calculate Calculate, Load
from file
Determines whether the overlap factor values will be calculated by
the component or it will be loaded from a file
Geometrical model LP01 Marcuse

Gaussian,
Determines whether the component will calculate the overlap factor
Whitley
using one of the gaussian approximations, or the LP01 mode Gaussian,
Desurvire
Gaussian,
Myslinski
Gaussian,
LP01
Overlap factor file name OverlapFactor.

dat
Specifies the overlap factor file name
Reference time 0.5 / (Bit rate) s [0,1e10]
Determines the instant of time used to take the powers to use as input
powers in the fiber to solve the steady-state regime that will determine
the initial values
Simulation

value range
Noise

value range
Noise center frequency 193.4 THz Hz, THz, nm [30,30e5]

nm

621

value range
bins
Random numbers

value range
Graphs

Average population density N2 Time (s) N2
622
Different solutions to the problem of transient fluctuations due to gain cross-saturation
observed in EDFAs inserted in multi-wavelength networks have been suggested.
Gain cross-saturation in fiber amplifiers induces transients in the surviving channels
remaining as a consequence of the process of adding or removing channels in the
network reconfiguration. Although this perturbation will be small in a single amplifier,
it becomes considerable along cascaded amplifiers. As a result, a tool that enables
analyzing the effects of addition and/or dropping wavelength channels in a multi-
wavelength optical network containing EDFAs is important.
In opposition to the steady-state model (EDF module), the EDF Dynamic enables you
to calculate the variation of signals and pumps power with the time when sampled
channels are present in the layout. The dynamic behavior of cascaded EDFAs can be
simulated as well. The results will help you design cascaded amplifier systems with
suppression of both transient and steady state signal power fluctuations due to
channel addition/removal.
The numerical EDF Dynamic uses a two-level system approximation and is based on
the solution of the propagation and rate equations for transitions between the upper
and lower levels. These equations are given by Equation 1, Equation 2, and
Equation 3, which are also in the technical background for the Er Doped Fiber [1]:
N
∂N 2 ( z ,t ) N 2 ( z ,t ) 1 ⎧ e a a ⎫ + –
--------------------- = – -----------------
∂t τ
- – --------
A eff ∑ ⎨⎩ Γn [ ( σn + σn )N2 ( z ,t ) – σn ] ⎬⎭[ Pn ( z ,t ) + P n ( z ,t ) ]
n=1
(1)
N2 + N1 = 1
(2)
±
∂P n ( z ,t ) ⎧ e a a ⎫ ± e
------------------------ = u n ⎨ ρΓ n [ ( σ n + σ n )N 2 ( z ,t ) – σ n – α ] ⎬P n ( z ,t ) + 2ρΔνN 2 Γ n σ n
∂z ⎩ ⎭
(3)
where the optical powers are expressed in units of number of photons per unit time,
τ is the metastable spontaneous emission lifetime, N is the number of channels taken
into account in the simulation (including signals, pumps, and ASE bins), ρ is the
number density of the active erbium ions, α is the attenuation coefficient (which takes
into account the background loss of the fiber), Δν is the frequency step used in the
simulation to resolve the ASE spectrum, and Aeff is the effective doped area given
623
2
by π × b , where b is the Er doping radius (it is considered a uniform distribution of
erbium ions in the area given by the Er doping radius region).
The nth channel of wavelength λ n has optical power Pn(z,t) at location z and time t,
e a
with emission and absorption cross-section σ n and σ n respectively, and confinement
factor Γ n . The superscript symbols + and – are used to indicate channels traveling in
forward (from 0 to L) and backward (from L to 0) directions, respectively. For beams
traveling in the forward direction u n = 1 and for beams in the opposite direction
u n = – 1 . The overlap integrals Γ n between the LP01 mode intensity (which is used in
this program) distribution doped region area are given by:
b
2
∫ E ( r ,ν ) r dr
Γ n ( ν ) = ----------------------------------
0
∞
2
∫ E ( r ,ν ) r dr
0
(4)
where E(r, ν ) gives the electric field intensity.
This model assumes that the signal and pump powers change slowly compared to the
optical transit time in the fiber. This assumption is valid since the typical time that the
light takes to pass by one 100 m fiber (one EDFA does not use fibers larger than that)
is 500 ns. The time scales we deal with are always on the order of microseconds or
longer.
Numerical solution
The solution of the time-dependent rate equations and the propagation equations is
based on the assumption that the atomic populations remain constant during a time
step δt , typically microseconds. This assumption is acceptable since the metastable
lifetime is relatively long (around 10 ms) and the transit time of photons through the
Er3+-doped fiber is short.
Initial values for the population of the upper level in each point of the fiber of the
program first solves the steady-state case. The parameter reference time determines
the instant of time used to take the powers that will be used as input powers in the
fiber to solve the steady-state regime that will determine the initial values for the
population levels. When the calculation of the dynamic behavior for the sampled
signal and pump channels starts at t=0, the program assumes that the population
inversion is already different from zero, and the value of the population of the upper
level at each point of the fiber (N2(z)) is given as t=0 by the powers at the reference
time.
Generally speaking, you will be interested in the behavior of the amplifier in scales of
times that go from a few microseconds to some tens of milliseconds. It is important to
set the bit rate and the sequence length of the simulations in such a way that the time
windows obey this requirement. If the time windows in your simulation are too short
(for example, by a few nanoseconds), the gain of the EDF Dynamic amplifier will be
624
given at almost all instants by the gain that one amplifier operating in the steady-state
regime with the input powers given by the reference time would have, because the
time response scales in EDFA are always on the order of microseconds or longer.
The parameterized channels and noise bins input powers are considered constant in
time. The output powers for these channels are average in time. This means that
during the calculation, the program saves the output powers that each one of these
channels would have at each sample point, and then gives as output power the sum
of the power at each sample divided by the total number of samples.
References
[1] C.R. Giles and E. Desurvire, “Modeling erbium-doped fiber amplifiers,” Journal of Lightwave
Technology, Vol. 9, N. 2, pp. 271-283, 1991.
625
Notes:
626
ER DOPED FIBER DYNAMIC ANALYTICAL
Er Doped Fiber Dynamic Analytical
Enables you to simulate the dynamic response of an EDF for input powers that vary in time. In opposition
to the EDFA component, it doesn't solve the full rate and propagation equation. Neglecting ASE these
equations can be solved analytically, which is described in this module. An additional approximation
which considers the population of the upper level constant for the propagation equations is used to
include the ASE effects on the behavior of the amplifier. The results using analytical solutions are
achieved faster than using the EDFA, but the results are less accurate. The model which you use
depends on the trade off between time and accuracy.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Length 5 m — [0, 1e4]
Er metastable lifetime 10 ms — ]0, +INF[
Loss at 1550 nm 0.01 dB/m — [0,100]

Loss at 980 nm 0.015 dB/m — [0,100]
627

value range
Input data Fiber — — Fiber
specification specification,
Determines if saturation parameter is used or not Saturation
parameter
Saturation parameter 4.4e+015 1/(s.m) — [1e-10, +INF[

Specifies the numerical aperture of the Er-doped
fiber
Er ion density 1e+025 m–3 m–3~ppm-wt [1,+INF[

~wt%
Core radius 2.2 μm — [0,1, 10]
Er doping radius 2.2 μm — [0.1, 10]
Cross-sections

value range
Cross-section file name Erbium.dat — —
Numerical

value range
Determines the relative error acceptable in each calculation for the
steady-state solution used as initial condition for the dynamic
behavior

Specifies the maximum number of times to repeat the longitudinal
integrations for the powers when solving the steady-state equations
used as initial condition for the dynamic behavior
628

value range
Overlap factor data Calculate Calculate, Load

from file
Determines whether the overlap factor values will be calculated by
the component or it will be loaded from a file
Geometrical model LP01 Marcuse

Gaussian,
Determines whether the component will calculate the overlap factor Whitley
using one of the gaussian approximations, or the LP01 mode
Gaussian,
Desurvire
Gaussian,
Myslinski
Gaussian,
LP01
Overlap factor file name OverlapFactor.

dat
Reference time 0.5 / (Bit rate) s [0,1e10]
Determines the instant of time used to take the powers to use as input
powers in the fiber to solve the steady-state regime that will determine
the initial values
Simulation

value range
Noise

value range

nm
629

value range

bins
Random numbers

value range
Graphs

Average population density N2 Time (s) N2
This model uses analytical solutions for the same rate and propagation as [1],
Equation 2, and Equation 3 described in Er Doped Fiber. These equations consider a
two-level system interacting with light. As with the EDFA, it's assumed in this
analytical model that the signal and pump powers change slowly compared to the
optical transit time along the fiber.
Neglecting the ASE and the background loss in Equation 1, Equation 2, and
Equation 3 for the Er Doped Fiber [1]:
N ±
∂N 2 ( z ,t ) N 2 ( z ,t ) 1 - ∂P n ( z ,t )
∂t τ
- – -----------
--------------------- = – -----------------
ρA eff ∑ u j ------------------------
∂z
n=1
(1)
630
and
∂P n ( z ,t ) ⎧ e a a ⎫
-------------------- = u n ⎨ ρΓ n [ ( σ n + σ n )N 2 ( z ,t ) – σ n ] ⎬P n ( z ,t )
∂z ⎩ ⎭
(2)
where all the parameters were defined in Er Doped Fiber. Integrating Equation 1 and
Equation 2 over z from 0 to L and defining N 2 as the total number of erbium ions in the
upper state:
L
∫
N 2 ( t ) = ρA eff N 2 ( z ,t ) dz
0
(3)
we have
N
dN 2 ( t ) –N2 ( t ) ± out ± in
----------------- = ----------------
dt τ
-–
∑ Pn ( t ) – Pn ( t )
n=1
(4)
and
± out ± in
Pn ( t ) – Pn ( Gn – 1 )
(5)
where
⎧ e a a ⎫
G n = exp ⎨ Γ n [ ( σ n + σ n )N 2 ( z ,t ) – ρσ n ]L ⎬
⎩ ⎭
(6)
A further approximation enables us to estimate the ASE effects on this model.

Considering N2(z) constant at each instant of time (which is a good approximation for
strongly inverted EDFA), the propagation equations have an analytical solution which
gives [2]:
± out ± in ± in sp
Pn ( t ) – P n ( t ) = P n ( t ) [ G n ( t ) – 1 ] + 2n n [ G n ( t ) – 1 ]Δν ASE
(7)
631
where
e
sp N 2 ( t )σ n
n n = -----------------------------------------------
e a a
( σ n + σ n )N 2 – σ n ρ
(8)
is called the spontaneous emission factor. Substituting Equation 8 for Equation 4, we

finally obtain:
N N
dN 2 ( t ) –N2 ( t ) ± in sp
----------------- = ----------------
dt τ
-–
∑ Pn ( t ) [ Gn ( t ) – 1 ] +
∑ 4nn [ Gn ( t ) – 1 ]ΔνASE
n=1 n
(9)
This module uses Equation 5 and Equation 9 to simulate the dynamic behavior of the
amplifier. Once given an initial value for the total number of excited ions, that is, N 2
(t=0), and the input powers at each time, these coupled equations can be solved with
an interactive loop between them.
Numerical solution
As initial values for the total population of the upper level, the program solves the
steady-state case. The parameter reference time determines the instant of time used
to take the powers that will be used as input powers in the fiber in order to solve the
equations in the steady-state regime. The obtained results will determine the initial
value for the total number of excited erbium ions at t=0 ( N 2 (t=0)). In this way, when
the calculation of the dynamic behavior to the sampled signal and pump channels
starts at t=0, the program assumes that the population inversion is already different
from zero, and the value of the upper level population is given at t=0 by the powers at
the reference time.
Generally speaking, it is interesting to determine the behavior of the amplifier in

scales of time that go from a few microseconds to tens of milliseconds. It is important
to set the bit rate and the sequence length of the simulations in such a way that the
time windows obey this requirement. If the time windows in your simulations are too
short (for example, by a few nanoseconds), the gain of the EDF Dynamic amplifier will
be given at almost all instants by the gain that one amplifier operating in the steady-
state regime with the inputs powers given by the reference time would have, because
the time response scales in EDFA are always in the order of microseconds or longer.
The parameterized channels and noise bins input powers are considered constant in
time. The output powers for these channels are calculated averaging in time N 2 . This
means that during the calculation, the program saves the values of N 2 at each instant
of time and then calculates the medium value 〈 N 2〉 . Equation 4 and 〈 N 2〉 are then
used to calculate the output powers of the parameterized and noise channels.
632
References
[1] Y. Sun, J.L. Zyskind, and A.K. Srivastava, "Average Inversion Level, Modeling, and Physics of
Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers," Journal of Selected Topics in Quantum Electronics, Vol. 3, N.
4, pp. 991-1006, 1997.
[2] T. Georges and E. Delevaque, "Analytical Modeling of High-Gain Erbium-Doped Fiber
Amplifiers," Optics Letters, Vol. 17, N. 16, pp. 1113-1115, 1992.
633
Notes:
634
ER DOPED FIBER
Er Doped Fiber
This component simulates a bidirectional Erbium doped fiber considering ESA, Raleigh scattering, ion-
ion interactions, and temperature dependence effects. The component solves numerically the rate and
propagation equations in the steady-state case, assuming a two-level Erbium system for an
inhomogeneous and homogeneous approach.
Ports

Output1 Output Optical
Parameters
Main
Name and description Symbol Default value Default Units Value range
unit
Length L 5 m — [0, 1e4]
Er metastable lifetime τ 10 ms — ]0, +INF[
Specifies the Erbium metastable

lifetime
Input data — Fiber specification — — Fiber specification,

Saturation parameter
Determines if saturation parameter is
used or not
Saturation parameter ζ 4.4e+015 1/(s.m) — [1e-10, +INF[

Core radius a 2.2 μm — [0,1, 10]
635
ER DOPED FIBER
unit
Er doping radius b 2.2 μm — [0.1, 10]
Er ion density nt 1e+25 m-3 m-3 , [1e23, +INF[

~ppm-wt,
Specifies the Erbium doping in the fiber
~wt%
Numerical aperture NA 0.24 — — [0.1,1]
Specifies the numerical aperture of the

fiber
Cross-sections

value range
OptiAmplifier format False — — True, False
Determines if format of cross-section file is an

OptiAmplifier file
File frequency unit nm — — nm, m, Hz, THz
Determines frequency unit of the file with the

cross sections
Cross-section file name Erbium.dat — — —
Specifies Erbium cross-section file name
Enhanced
unit
Background loss data type l(λ) Constant — — Constant, From file
Determines if the loss will be calculated

from the loss at 1310nm (constant) or it
will be loaded from a file
Loss at 1310 nm l 1310 3 dB/Km [0, +INF[
Specifies the fiber loss at 1310nm
Background loss file name — Loss.dat — — —
Specifies loss file name
Include Rayleigh backscattering False — — True, False
Determines if Rayleigh scattering effect

is included or not
636
ER DOPED FIBER
unit
Rayleigh Constant KR 150 — dB/Km [0, 1000]
Specifies the value of the Rayleigh

constant
Backscattering capture fraction C(λ) Calculate — — Calculate, From file
Determines if capture fraction values

are calculated by the component or
loaded from a file
Rayleigh capture file name Capture.dat — — —
Specifies the capture file name

—
Double-clad fiber — False — True, False
Specifies if the fiber is double-clad

nm
Pump reference — 1200 - [500, 1500]
If the fiber is double-clad, then

reference wavelength that define the
pump has to be specified.
Double-clad data type — Calculate -— — Calculate, From file
Specify if the pump multimode

absorption will be calculated by using
the inner clad area or it will be loaded
from a file
Cladding area — 3000 um2 — [1, 1e12]
Specifies the inner clad section
Pump absorption filename — PumpAbsorption.d — — —

at
Specifies the pump absorption file
name
—
Includes ion-ion interaction — False — True, False
effects
Determines whether Er-Er ion
interaction effects are included or not
Ion-Ion interaction effect — Homogeneous — — Homogeneous,

Inhomogeneous,
Determines which kind of Er-Er ion Combined
interaction is considered
3
Upconversion coefficient Uc 1e-022 m ⁄s [0, 1000]
Specifies the two-particle upconversion

coefficient
Ions per cluster mk 2 — — [0, 500]

Specifies number of ions in a cluster
637
ER DOPED FIBER
unit
Relative number of clusters K 12 — % [0, 100]
Specifies the relative number of

clusters
Include Temperature Effects — False — — True, False
Determines if temperature dependence

is taken into account
Temperature T 20 — C [-273, 500]

Specifies the current temperature
Cross-section Temperature Tm 20 — C [-273, 500]
Specifies the temperature when the

cross-section was measured
Include ESA Effect — False — — True, False
Determines if excited stated absorption

ESA Cross-section file name — ESAErbium.dat — — —
Specifies the ESA cross-section file

name
Extract ESA from emission — True — — True, False
Determines if the component has to

extract the ESA cross-section from the
loaded file
Numerical
unit
Calculation algorithm — Giles — Saleh, Jopson,
Giles,
Determines algorithm to be used in Inhomogeneous
simulation
Relative error ζ 0.0001 — — [1e-100, 1]
Specifies maximum acceptable

difference between two consecutive
iterations to complete the iteration
process
Max. number of iterations N max 100 — — [1, 1e8]
Specifies the maximum number of

iterations executed
Number of longitudinal steps 50 [1, 1e8]
Specifies the minimum number of

longitudinal steps in the fiber
638
ER DOPED FIBER
unit
Overlap factor data Γ Calculate — — Calculate, From file
Determines whether overlap factor

values are calculated by the
component or loaded from a file
Geometrical model — LP01 — — Marcuse Gaussian,

Whitley Gaussian,
Determines whether the component Desurvire Gaussian,
calculates the overlap factor using one
Myslinski Gaussian,
of the Gaussian approximations, or the
LP01
LP01 mode
Overlap factor — Power — — Power independent,

independent Power dependent
Determines if overlap factor
calculations takes into account the
signal and pump power
Nr. of transverse integrations — 2 — — [1, 50]
If PowerDependent is selected for

Overlap factor, specifies the number
of times that the overlap factor is
calculated over the fiber length
Overlap factor file name — Confinement.dat — — —
Generate homogeneous cr. — False — — True, False
Generate the homogeneous cross-

sections
Inhomogeneous accuracy — 0.001 — — [1E-10, 0.1]
If the inhomogeneous model is

selected, this parameter specifies the
accuracy in the convolution integrals
Inhomogeneous linewidth Δλ inh 11.5 nm — ]0, 100]

Specifies the Erbium-doped fiber
inhomogeneous linewidth
Number of gaussians nG 17 — — [8, 28]
Determines number of gaussians used

in generation of the homogeneous
cross-sections
Discretize sampled signal False — — True, False

discretization for sampled signals or
not
Frequency resolution 10 GHz — [8, 28]

the sampled signal
639
ER DOPED FIBER
Graphs

value range
Calculate graphs False — — True, False
Number of distance steps 20 — — [1,1e8]
Number of wavelength steps 20 — — [1,1e8]
Linear scale True — — True, False
Minimum value -50 — dBm ]1e-100, 1e100[
Pump reference wavelength 1400 nm [100, 1900]
Simulation

value range
Enable reflections False — True, False
Determines whether or not the component launches reflections due

to backscattering in the output
Noise

value range
Noise bins spacing 125 THz Hz, GHz, THz, [1,1000]

nm

bins
640
ER DOPED FIBER
Random numbers

value range
641
ER DOPED FIBER
This module presents a rapid numerical solver for the EDF rate and propagation
equations for signals, pumps and amplified spontaneous emission (ASE) considering
the steady-state case. The propagation and rate equations of a two level system are
used to model the Erbium-doped fiber. Several effects are considered, including
+3 -3
Er – Er interactions, excited state absorption, temperature dependence, and
background loss. Furthermore, the component assumes the possibility of considering
the inhomogeneous broadening in the EDF.
Propagation and rate equations

The Erbium Doped Fiber component is based on the solution of the rate and
propagation equations assuming a two-level model. The use of a two-level model for
the amplifier is justified, as for pumping into the 980nm absorption band, the lifetime
transition from level 4 is of the order of microseconds for silicate hosts and is
11 ⁄ 2
reasonable to neglect the population density N 3 in the rate equations description. At
1480nm, the pumping is direct to the upper sub-levels of the metastable manifold.
Rate equations are based on energy levels and describe the effects of absorption,
stimulated emission, and spontaneous emission on the populations of the ground
( n 1 ) and metastable ( n 2 ) states.
For a two-level system with k optical beams, the rate equations are given by:
dn 1 dn 2 σa ( vk ) σe ( vk ) 1
– -------- = -------- =
dt dt ∑ ---------------
hv k
- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n 1 ( r, φ, z ) – ∑ ---------------- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n 2 ( r, φ, z ) – --- ⋅ n 2 ( r, φ, z )
hv k τ
(1)a
k k
n 1 ( r, φ, z ) + n 2 ( r, φ, z ) = n t ( r, φ, z ) (1)b
where h is the Planck constant, τ is the metastable lifetime parameter, v k is the

frequency, and P k is the power of the k th beam. The absorption and emission cross-
section of the k th beam are σ a ( v k ) and σ e ( v k ) , respectively, and n t is the local
erbium ion density. The normalized optical intensity i k ( r, φ ) is defined as
i k ( r, φ ) = I k ( r, φ, z ) ⁄ P k ( z ) , where I k ( r, φ, z ) is light intensity distribution of the k th
beam.
642
ER DOPED FIBER
The propagation equations describe the propagation of the beams through the doped
fiber, and are given by:
2π ∞
dP k
--------- = u k ⋅ σ e ( v k ) ⋅ ( P k ( z ) + P 0k ) ⋅
dt ∫ ∫ n2 ( r, φ, z ) ⋅ ik ( r, φ ) ⋅ r ⋅ dr ⋅ dφ – u k ⋅ σa ( vk ) ⋅ P k ( z ) .
0 0 (2)
2π ∞
. ∫ ∫ n 1 ( r, φ, z ) ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ r ⋅ dr ⋅ dφ
0 0
where each beam propagates in the forward ( u k = 1 ) or backward ( u k = – 1 )

direction, and P 0k means the spontaneous emission contribution from the local
metastable population n 2 . P 0k = m ⋅ h ⋅ v k ⋅ Δv k , where the normalized number of
modes m is normally 2, and Δv k is the noise bandwidth.
Setting the time derivative in Equation 1a to zero and using Equation 1b, the problem
is reduced to the steady-state case and the metastable population is defined as:
n
σa ( vk ) ⋅ τ
∑ ------------------------ ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z )
hv k
k=1
n 2 ( r, φ, z ) = n t ⋅ ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ (3)
n
( σa ( vk ) + σe ( vk ) ) ⋅ τ
∑
---------------------------------------------------- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) + 1
hv k
k=1
With the specified boundary conditions at z = 0 and z = L , Equation 2 and

Equation 3 can be integrated over space and frequency.
643
ER DOPED FIBER
Figure 1 Example of absorption and emission cross-sections
It is important realize to that the transverse shape of the optical mode and its overlap
with the erbium ion distribution profile are very important. It can be parameterized by
a factor known as overlap integral factor.
Considering a steady-state case, and substituting Equation 1b in Equation 1a, the

rate equation becomes:
σa ( vk ) σa ( vk ) 1
∑ ---------------
hv k
- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n t ( r, φ, z ) – ∑ ---------------- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n 2 ( r, φ, z ) – --- ⋅ n 2 ( r, φ, z ) –
hv k τ
k k
(4)
σe ( vk ) 1
– ∑ ---------------
hv k
- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n 2 ( r, φ, z ) – --- ⋅ n 2 ( r, φ, z )
τ
k
Integrating Equation 4 over space:

2π ∞
∫ ∫ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ nt ( r, φ ) ⋅ r ⋅ dr ⋅ dφ n
1--- 2 σa ( vk ) σa ( vk )
∑ --------------- ∑ ---------------
0 0 - ⋅ Pk ( z ) ⋅ n2 .
⋅ n ( r, φ ) ⋅ π ⋅ b eff = - ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n t ⋅ ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-–
τ 2 hv k n hv k
k t
k=1
2π ∞ 2π ∞
∫ ∫ ik ( r, φ ) ⋅ n2 ( r, φ ) ⋅ r ⋅ dr ⋅ dφ n ∫ ∫ ik ( r, φ ) ⋅ n2 ( r, φ ) ⋅ r ⋅ dr ⋅ dφ
σe ( vk )
∑
. 0 0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
- 0 0
---------------- ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n 2 . -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
–
n2 hv k n 2
k=1
644
ER DOPED FIBER
where n i is considered the average density, and is given by:
2π ∞
∫ ∫ ni ( r, φ ) ⋅ r ⋅ dr ⋅ dφ (5)
0 0
n i ( z ) = -------------------------------------------------------
-
2
π ⋅ b eff
and b eff is the equivalent radius of the doped region:
1---
⎛ π n (r) ⎞2
b eff = = ⎜ 2 ------------ ⋅ r ⋅ dr⎟
t
⎜ n (0) ∫ ⎟
⎝ 0 t ⎠
when the ion density population is uniform, the effective radius is equal to the doped
radius, b .
For an effective doped radius b eff , the effective cross-sectional area is

2
A eff = π ⋅ b eff .
th
Then, the overlap integral or confinement factor for the i level can be defined as:
2π ∞
∫ ∫ ik ( r, φ ) ⋅ ni ( r, φ ) ⋅ r ⋅ dr ⋅ dφ (6)
0 0
Γ kj ( z ) = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
ni
If the erbium ions are well confined to the center of the optical modes, then Γ k, 1 and
Γ k, 2 are nearly equal, and can be replaced with the single constant Γ k .
645
ER DOPED FIBER
Therefore, using the definition of overlap integral, the average population density for
the level 2 is given by:
n
σa ( vk )
∑ ----------------- ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n t ⋅ Γ k
hv k
k=1 (7)
n 2 ( z ) = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
n
1 σ a k( v ) + σ e k( v )
--- ⋅ A eff –
τ ∑ - ⋅ Pk ( z ) ⋅ Γk
---------------------------------------
hv k
k=1
and the propagation equation becomes:
dP k (8)
--------- = ( σ e ( v k ) + σ a ( v k ) ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n 2 ⋅ Γ k – σ a ( v k ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n t ⋅ Γ k + P 0k ⋅ σ e ( v k ) ⋅ n 2 ⋅ Γ k
dz
Basically, Equation 7 and Equation 8 are the equations solved in the homogeneous
case. Slight modifications are made to these equations in order to include other
effects.
646
ER DOPED FIBER
Giles-Desurvire Propagation and Rate equations

A simpler method of fiber characterization can be done by writing the amplifier
+3
equations in terms of Er absorption coefficient ( α k ), gain coefficient ( g k ), and a
fiber saturation parameter ( ζ ). These parameters can be obtained by conventional
fiber measurement techniques [1].
The saturation parameter ζ can be defined theoretically as:

2
ζ = π ⋅ b eff ⋅ n t ⁄ τ
and the absorption and gain coefficients are expressed in terms of distributions of the
ions and optical modes:
2π ∞
αk ( λk ) = σa ( λk ) ⋅ ∫ ∫ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ n t ( r, φ , z ) ⋅ r ⋅ d r ⋅ d φ
0 0
2π ∞
gk ( λk ) = σe ( λk ) ⋅ ∫ ∫ ik ( r, φ ) ⋅ nt ( r, φ, z ) ⋅ r ⋅ dr ⋅ dφ
0 0
For a uniform ion distribution the absorption and gain coefficients can be simplified as:
αk ( λk ) = Γ ( λk ) ⋅ nt ⋅ σa ( λk )
gk ( λk ) = Γ ( λk ) ⋅ nt ⋅ σe ( λk )
Giles and Desurvire in [1] rewrote the propagation Equation 8 in terms of saturation
parameter, and absorption and emission coefficients:
dP k ( z ) ⎛ n ⎞ n
----------------- = u k ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ ⎜ g k ( ( v k ) + α k ( v k ) ) ⋅ -----2 – α k ( v k ) – l k⎟ + u k ⋅ P ⋅ g k ( v k ) ⋅ -----2 (9)
dz ⎝ n ⎠ 0k n
t t
where l k is the background loss.
647
ER DOPED FIBER
In the same way, the steady-state solution of rate Equation 7 was rewritten as:
n
Pk ( z ) ⋅ αk vk
n2
∑ -----------------------------
h ⋅ vk ⋅ ζ
-
k=1
----- ( z ) = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ (10)
nt n
Pk ( z ) ⋅ ( αk ( vk ) + gk ( vk ) )
1+
∑ --------------------------------------------------------------
h ⋅ vk ⋅ ζ
k=1
Note: The equation for n 2 ( z ) sums over all forward and backward beams,
including ASE.
Equation 9 and Equation 10 are referenced further as a Giles model. These equations
are solved in the homogeneous line broadening case.
The Giles model provides a full spectral solution. The propagation Equation 9 is
integrated back and forth along the fiber, in an iterative numerical process, until the
solution converges, or the maximum number of iterations ( N max ) is reached.
The propagation equation solved by the Giles model can be slightly different from
Equation 9, depending on which effects the user has considered in the simulation,
such as ESA and Rayleigh scattering. Equation 10 can be different depending on
+3 +3
whether the user takes into account the Er – Er interactions.
Overlap Integrals
The value of the overlap integral can be calculated using Equation 6. The transverse
optical modes distributions are described by their normalized optical intensity.
For a single-mode fiber, the optical mode can be approximated by the LP 01 mode
distribution:
2
1 vJ 0 ( ur ⁄ a )
- r<a
--- -------------------------
π aVJ 1 ( u )
(11)
i ( r, φ ) =
2
1 uK 0 ( vr ⁄ a )
--- --------------------------- r≥a
π aVK 1 ( v )
648
ER DOPED FIBER
where a is the fiber core radius, the fiber number V is

2 2
V = 2 ⋅ π ⋅ a ⋅ ( n core – n clad ) ⁄ λ , u and v are the eigenvalues found by matching the
solutions at r = a , J 0 is the Bessel function of the first kind of order 0, J 1 is the
Bessel function of the first kind of order 1, K 0 is the modified Bessel function of the
second kind of order 0, and K 1 is the modified Bessel function of the second kind of
order 1.
The LP 01 mode distribution can also be approximated with a Gaussian function:
2 ⎛ 2 ⋅ r 2⎞ (12)
i ( r, φ ) = ---------- exp ⎜ – ------------⎟
2 ⎝ w2 ⎠
πw
where the Gaussian mode radius, w Gauss , has been given by various authors as:
1.619 2.879
w Gauss = a ⎛ 0.65 + ------------- + -------------⎞ Marcuse (13)
⎝ 1.5 6 ⎠
V V
1.66 0.987
w Gauss = a ⎛ 0.616 + ---------- + -------------⎞ Whitley (14)
⎝ 1.5 6 ⎠
V V
1.289 1.041
w Gauss = a ⎛ 0.759 + ------------- + -------------⎞ Desurvire (15)
⎝ 1.5 6 ⎠
V V
1.237 1.429
w Gauss = a ⎛ 0.761 + ------------- + -------------⎞ Myslinski (16)
⎝ 1.5 6 ⎠
V V
The overlap integrals depend on:

• the energy level occupied by the ions, because the distribution is different for
each level
• the power, because the ion dopant distribution is power dependent
• the wavelength, because the optical mode profile is wavelength dependent
In principle, the overlap integrals are also functions of z , due to variations in doping
level along the fiber, and mode coupling (if more than one mode is supported).
649
ER DOPED FIBER
For a fundamental mode approximated by a Gaussian profile and a uniformly doped

fiber with doped radius b , the overlap of the mode with the total ion profile n t ( r, φ, z )
is given by:
2
– 2b
-----------
2
(17)
w
Γt = 1 – e
In the low-power limit, all excited-state overlap integrals with the Gaussian
approximation reduce to:
2
4b
– -------2-
w
b2 1 – e
Γ 1, 2, 3, 4 ( P → 0 ) ≈ ⎛ ---- ⎞ ---------------------2-
(18)
⎝w ⎠ 2b --------2-
–w
1–e
where Equation 18 is an approximated form of the upper levels (1, 2, 3 and 4).
For the LP 01 mode approximation with a uniformly doped fiber and fiber doped radius
b , the overlap with the total ion distribution is given by:
ub 2 2 2
Γ t = ⎛ --------------------⎞ [ J 0 ( ub ⁄ a ) + J 1 ( ub ⁄ a ) ] (19)
⎝ V J ( u )⎠
a 1
Typically, the fiber doped radius is less than or equal to the core radius ( b ⁄ w ≤ 0.8 ),
and for b ⁄ w ≤ 0.8 , the integrals also have weak power dependence [1]. For most
cases, therefore, it is reasonable to assume that overlap integrals are power
independent and are equal to Γ t for ions in all the energy levels.
Double-clad Fibers
In case of a double-clad fiber, the pump is launched into the multimode inner clad.
Then, the overlapping factor between the pump and the fiber doped area, Γ p , can be
calculated when the pump is spatially homogeneous over the multimode section, by
where
Sclad is the inner clad area. The equation above will be used to calculate the pump
overlap factor if the user select the option Calculate for the Double-clad data type
parameter.
650
ER DOPED FIBER
The other option would be to load a file with the multimode pump absorption. In this
case the user has to provide a file with the pump absorption. This file must have two
columns: The first column contains the pump wavelength in [nm] and the second
column contains the absorption values in [dB/m]. As example:
To consider a double-clad fiber in the simulation, the parameter Double-clad fiber

must be True and the pump reference must be specified to define the multimode
pump. All signals with a wavelength lower than the pump reference will be considered
a multimode pump.
651
ER DOPED FIBER
Additional Effects
Background loss
Background loss in a fiber amplifier or laser is usually negligible compared to
absorption coefficients and discrete losses. However, the background loss may be
significant for lightly-doped fibers, for losses at the signal wavelength of a four level
ion, for wavelengths far from absorption maxima, and for wavelengths beyond the
low-loss region of the host glass. The actual fiber loss is composed of the Rayleigh
backscattering loss, and losses from impurities.
Here, the excess loss, α EL , is assumed to be wavelength-independent, and is given

by:
α EL = l 1310nm – α RS ( 1310nm )
where l 1310nm is the total loss at 1310nm and α RS ( 1310nm ) is the loss due the
Rayleigh scattering effect at 1310nm.
The user specifies the total loss at 1310 nm ( a 1310nm ), from which the component
calculates the excess loss. The loss at any other wavelength then adds an additional
term to the propagation equations as:
+
dP (20)
---------k = ( σ e ( v k ) + σ a ( v k ) ) ⋅ P +k ( z ) ⋅ n 2 ⋅ Γ k – σ a ( v k ) ⋅ P +k ( z ) ⋅ n t ⋅ Γ k + σ e ( v k ) ⋅ P 0k ⋅ n 2 ⋅ Γ k – ( α RS ( v k ) + α EL ) ⋅ P +k
dz
The user has the possibility of considering the excess loss as wavelength dependent.
In this case, a file has to be provided that contains the total loss characteristics for the
band of interest. Then, the wavelength dependent excess loss will be defined as:
α EL ( v k ) = l ( v k ) – α RS ( v k )
Note: The effects of background loss are only considered during the Giles
algorithm calculation.
Rayleigh scattering
652
ER DOPED FIBER
+
Rayleigh Backscattering is incorporated in the model by coupling each forward P k
_ _
and backward P k traveling signal at a wavelength to a backward-traveling P refk and
+
forward-traveling P refk signal at the same wavelength:
+
dP k + + + (21)
--------- = ( σ e ( v k ) + σ a ( v k ) ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n 2 ⋅ Γ k – σ a ( v k ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n t ⋅ Γ k + σ e ( v k ) ⋅ P 0k ⋅ n 2 ⋅ Γ k – α RS ( v k ) ⋅ P k
dz
_
dP refk _ _ + (22)
– --------------- = ( σ e ( v k ) + σ a ( v k ) ) ⋅ P refk ( z ) ⋅ n 2 ⋅ Γ k – σ a ( v k ) ⋅ P refk ( z ) ⋅ n t ⋅ Γ k + C ⋅ α RS ( v k ) ⋅ P k
dz
_
dP k _ _ _ (23)
– --------- = ( σ e ( v k ) + σ a ( v k ) ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n 2 ⋅ Γ k – σ a ( v k ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n t ⋅ Γ k + σ e ( v k ) ⋅ P 0k ⋅ n 2 ⋅ Γ k – α RS ( v k ) ⋅ P k
dz
+
dP refk _ (24)
--------------- = ( σ e ( v k ) + σ a ( v k ) ) ⋅ P +refk ( z ) ⋅ n 2 ⋅ Γ k – σ a ( v k ) ⋅ P +refk ( z ) ⋅ n t ⋅ Γ k + C ⋅ α RS ( v k ) ⋅ P k
dz
where α RS ( v k ) is the background loss caused by Rayleigh scattering, and C is the

backscattering capture fraction. The component has the option of loading the capture
fraction from a file (wavelength dependent) or generating a theoretical capture
fraction using the definition given by [2]:
NA 2 1
C = ⎛ --------⎞ ⋅ ------- (25)
⎝n ⎠ m
o n
Where NA is the fiber numerical aperture, n o is the refractive index of the fiber and
m n depends on the refractive index profile. For single mode fibers a typical value for
m n is 4.55.
The Rayleigh background loss α RS ( v k ) in a fiber is given by [3]:
1000nm 4
α RS ( v k ) = ( 0.63 + K R Δn ) ⎛ --------------------⎞ (26)
⎝ λ ( nm ) ⎠
The first term (0.63 dB/km) is the scattering loss for pure silica fiber at 1000 nm, and
the second term accounts for the material and geometrical dependence. The Raleigh
constant parameter, K R , generally is equal to about 70 dB/km for Ge co-doped fiber,
653
ER DOPED FIBER
and about 150 dB/km for Aluminum co-doped fiber. The index difference Δn can be
derived from the numerical aperture, NA , as:
2
NA
Δn = ----------------
2∗ 1.45
where it is assumed that the fiber refractive index is approximately 1.45.
In accordance with Equation 20 - Equation 23, the equation that gives the density
population in the metastable level, Equation 10, was modified to take into account the
reflected powers in the n 2 calculation for the steady state case.
Double Rayleigh scattering

Double Rayleigh scattering occurs when a portion of the backscattered signal is
reflected again and it is recoupled to the forward direction. It is a problem because it
creates paths of different lengths for signals to travel. It is considered in the model
changing Equation 22 and Equation 24 by:
_
dP refk _ _ + + (27)
– --------------- = ( σ e ( v k ) + σ a ( v k ) ) ⋅ P refk ( z ) ⋅ n 2 ⋅ Γ k – σ a ( v k ) ⋅ P refk ( z ) ⋅ n t ⋅ Γ k + C ⋅ α RS ( v k ) ⋅ ( P k + P refk )
dz
+
dP refk + + _ _ (28)
--------------- = ( σ e ( v k ) + σ a ( v k ) ) ⋅ P refk ( z ) ⋅ n 2 ⋅ Γ k – σ a ( v k ) ⋅ P refk ( z ) ⋅ n t ⋅ Γ k + C ⋅ α RS ( v k ) ⋅ ( P k + P refk )
dz
The buildup of backscattered light is always included in the Giles calculation, but it can
be neglected by setting the capture fraction to zero or not including the Rayleigh
scattering in the simulation. The degradation of EDFA performance from internal
backscattering has been reported in [3] and [4].
654
ER DOPED FIBER
Er3+ - Er3+ Interaction

The Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier component allows the user to consider interactions
between neighboring ions. The exchange of energy between neighboring ions is also
known as "Concentration Quenching". The most important ion-ion interaction for
EDFA is the stepwise up-conversion shown in Figure 2. Initially, there are two ions at
the metastable level. Energy is transferred from the donor ion, which falls back to the
ground level, and the acceptor ion, which returns to the metastable level by phonon
transitions, after being excited to one of the upper levels. The net result is that two
excited ions become one excited ion so that the quantum efficiency is reduced.
Therefore, it has a negative impact on amplifiers.
Figure 2 Stepwise up-conversion
Stepwise up-conversion becomes stronger as the distance between the doped ions
decreases, i.e. as the concentration increases. Depending on the fiber material, it
becomes significant when the concentration is greater than about 1000 ppm. There
are three models to account for stepwise up-conversion.
Homogeneous upconversion
Considering that the ions are independent, i. e., if one ion is excited to the I 13 ⁄ 2 state
this would not prevent a neighboring ion from also being excited to the I 13 ⁄ 2 state.
The upconversion fluorescence intensity can be calculated redefining Equation 1 as

[5]:
dn 2 ( r, φ, z, t ) σa ( vk ) σe ( vk )
-------------------------------- = - ⋅ i k ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n 1 ( r, φ, z ) – ---------------- ⋅ i k ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n 2 ( r, φ, z ) _
∑ ---------------
dt hv k hv k
k (29)
n 2 ( r, φ, z, t )
– ----------------------------- – ( 1 + 1 ⁄ m ) ⋅ U e ⋅ n 2 ( r, φ, z, t )
τ
655
ER DOPED FIBER
Where m is the branching ration between the I 11 ⁄ 2 - I 15 ⁄ 2 transition (980nm) and

the I 11 ⁄ 2 - I 13 ⁄ 2 nonradiative transition; U c is the two-particle upconversion
coefficient ( U c is concentration independent). In [7], the value found for the m and
3
U c parameters were 1e4 and 1e-22 ( m ⁄ s ), respectively. Considering the steady-
state case, the rate equation (29) becomes:
σa ( vk )
∑ ---------------
hv k
- ⋅ i k ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n t ( r, φ, z )
k
n 2 ( r, φ, z, t ) = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- (30)
σa ( vk ) + σe ( vk ) 1
∑ --------------------------------------
hv k
⋅ i k ⋅ P k ( z ) + ( 1 + 1 ⁄ m ) ⋅ U c ⋅ n 2 ( r, φ, z, t ) + --
τ
-
k
Inhomogeneous pair induced quenching

In this model [6] [7], erbium ions exist as two distinct species: single ions (no
interaction with others) and clustered ions. The ions residing in each cluster can
occupy only two energy levels: State 1 - all the ions in the ground state or
State 2 - only one ion per cluster in the excited state. When more than one ion is
excited in the cluster, the excitation energy is rapidly transferred from one ion to
another, and the upconversion continues until all but one ion in the cluster occupies
the metastable excited-state.
Note: It is assumed that all the clusters are of the same size and contain the same
number of ions, m k .
For the total concentration of erbium ions, n t , the concentration of clustered ions is
introduced as n c = m k ⋅ k ⋅ n t , where k is the relative number of clusters and m k ⋅ k
is the percentage of ions in clusters. The concentration of single ions is
ns = ( l – mk ⋅ k ) ⋅ nt .
656
ER DOPED FIBER
For single ions the rate equations is:
dn 2S σa ( vk ) σe ( vk ) 1 (31)
----------
dt
- = ∑ ---------------
hv k
- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n 1S ( r, φ, z ) – ∑ ---------------- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n 2S ( r, φ, z ) – --- ⋅ n 2S ( r, φ, z )
hv k τ
k k
(32)
n 1S + n 2S = 1 – ( m k ⋅ k ) ⋅ n t
For the steady-state case:
σa ( vk )
∑ ---------------
hvk
- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ ( 1 – m k ⋅ k ) ⋅ n t
k
n 2S ( r, φ, z ) = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- (33)
σa ( vk ) + σe ( vk ) 1
∑ --------------------------------------
hv k
⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) + ---
τ
k
For clustered ions, the rate equation is:

dn 2C σa ( vk ) σe ( vk ) 1
------------ =
dt ∑ ---------------
hv k
- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ ( m k ⋅ k ⋅ n t – m k ⋅ n 2C ) – ∑ ---------------
hv k
- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n 2C ( r, φ, z ) – --- ⋅ n 2C ( r, φ, z )
τ
k k
σa ( vk )
∑ ---------------
hv k
- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ m k ⋅ k ⋅ n t
k
n 2C ( r, φ, z ) = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- (34)
σe ( vk ) σa ( vk )
∑ hvk k---------------
- ⋅ i ( r , φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) + ∑ hvk k ---------------
- ⋅ i ( r , φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ m k ⋅ k ⋅ n t
k k
Then, the ion population in the metastable level is:
σa ( vk )
∑ ---------------
hv k
- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ ( 1 – m k ⋅ k ) ⋅ n t
k
n 2 ( r, φ, z, t ) = n 2S ( r, φ, z, t ) + n 2C ( r, φ, z, t ) = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +
σa ( vk ) + σe ( v k ) 1---
∑ --------------------------------------
hv k
⋅ i k ( r , φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) +
τ
k
(35)
σa ( vk )
∑ ---------------
hv k
- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ ( 1 – m k ⋅ k ) ⋅ n t
k
+ ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
σe ( vk ) σa ( vk ) 1
∑ ---------------
hv k
- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) + ∑ ---------------
hv k
- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ m k + ---
τ
k k
657
ER DOPED FIBER
Homogeneous Upconversion and Inhomogeneous Pair Induced Quenching

This case is a combination of the cooperative upconversion and the pair induced
upconversion. The combined model is similar to the inhomogeneous model, except
that the single ions experience concentration quenching at the same rate as for the
homogeneous model. Therefore, the population inversion in the steady-state
becomes:
N 2 ( r, φ, z, t ) = N 2S ( r, φ, z, t ) + Nn 2C ( r, φ, z, t )
σa ( vk )
∑ ---------------
hv k
- ⋅ i k ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ ( 1 – m k ⋅ k ) ⋅ n t ( r, φ , z )
k
N 2 ( r, φ, z, t ) = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-+
σa ( vk ) + σe ( vk ) 1---
∑ --------------------------------------
hv k
⋅ i k ( r , φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) +
τ
k (36)
σa ( vk )
∑ ---------------
hv k
- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ m k ⋅ k ⋅ n t
k
+ ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
σa ( vk ) σa ( vk ) 1
∑ ---------------
hv k
- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) + ∑ ---------------- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ m k + ---
hv k τ
k k
The first term on the right-hand side is for single ions and the second term is for
clustered ions.
Temperature dependence
The temperature dependence exhibited by an erbium doped fiber is mainly attributed
to the variation in the occupation probability density of each manifold with
temperature. In an EDFA, the gain is temperature dependent through the temperature
dependence of the gain and absorption coefficients. Therefore, to represent the
temperature dependence of an EDFA, the model needs properly represent the
temperature dependence of g ( λ ) and α ( λ ) (or σ e ( λ ) and σ a ( λ ) ).
The temperature model in the erbium doped fiber amplifier component is based on
physical intuition and use fitting parameters to generate modeling parameters at any
temperature. It is assumed that the temperature dependence of an EDF is due to the
variation in the occupation probability density. Using the Boltzmann's law for the level
occupation and the definition that the sum of all occupation probabilities for all states
of the manifold must equal unit, integral expressions for g ( λ ) and α ( λ ) were derived
[8]. After a series of approximations, the following equations [8], outline an effective
procedure for calculation of the temperature dependence of absorption and emission
coefficients:
βa ( λ ) ⎞
⎛ -------------
- (37)
⎝ KT ⎠
α ( λ , T ) = α ( λ, ∞ ) ⋅ e
658
ER DOPED FIBER
βe ( λ ) ⎞
⎛ ------------- (38)
⎝ KT ⎠
g ( λ , T ) = g ( λ, ∞ ) ⋅ e
where K is the Boltzmann's constant, and T is the temperature in degrees Kelvin.

The fitting parameters α ( λ, ∞ ) and g ( λ, ∞ ) are both temperature independent and
can be interpreted as the absorption and gain at "infinite" temperature when all energy
levels of each manifolds are equally occupied, according with to Boltzmann statistics.
However, a more appropriate interpretation of α ( λ, ∞ ) and g ( λ, ∞ ) is that they
represent the absorption and gain coefficient when all levels of the relevant manifolds
are uniformly occupied. The parameters β a ( λ ) and β e ( λ ) are expected to capture
the thermal occupation probability of the initial energy level for the transition at a given
wavelength.
In order to calculate functions α ( λ, ∞ ) , g ( λ, ∞ ) , β a ( λ ) , and β e ( λ ) , the component

requires two sets of measurement data for g ( λ ) and α ( λ ) at different temperatures.
One set of measured g ( λ ) and α ( λ ) for "infinite" temperature is provided by the
component. Another set of measured data for g ( λ ) and α ( λ ) (or σ e ( λ ) and σ a ( λ ) )
at a different temperature has to be provided by the user. With these two sets of data
for g ( λ ) and α ( λ ) at different temperatures, the component is able to calculate the
functions β a ( λ ) and β e ( λ ) . The values of g ( λ ) and α ( λ ) , at an arbitrary temperature
defined by the user, will then be generated by the component in accordance to
Equation 37 and Equation 38.
Note that the set of measured data for the gain and absorption coefficients at "infinite"
temperature, α ( λ, ∞ ) and g ( λ, ∞ ) , provided by the component, are expected to
represent accurately the dependence of EDF spectra for fibers with similar
compositions only. However, in [9] is reported that only minor differences for a variety
of silica-based, aluminum-codoped EDFs with a wide range of germanium and
aluminum levels were observed [9][8]. More information about how temperature
dependence can be simulated can be found in the tutorials.
659
ER DOPED FIBER
Figure 3 Absorption α ( λ, ∞ ) and gain g ( λ, ∞ ) coefficients at infinite "temperature"
Excited-State Absorption Effect (ESA)

The excited-state absorption can affect amplifiers in two ways; through parasitic
absorption of pump photons, or signal photons. With pump ESA, the pump light at
frequency v p is not absorbed from the ground level (1) of the rare earth ion, but from
an excited level (2), due to the existence of a third level (3) whose energy gap
ΔE = E 3 – E 2 with level (2) happens to closely match the pump photon energy h ⋅ v p .
This happens only if the ESA cross section overlaps with the ground state absorption
(pump absorption cross-section). In the case of signal ESA, the signal light of energy
h ⋅ v s is absorbed from the metastable level (2) to a level (3), due to the same energy
gap matching relation ΔE = E 3 – ( E 2 ≈ hv s ) . This indicates that both pump and signal
ESA result in an excess loss for the pump or the signal.
The ESA effect has been observed to occur in Er-doped fibers in several wavelength
bands, but our main interest is in the 980 nm pumping band and in 1500-1620 nm
signal band. In the first band, the pump ESA initiated from the metastable level
4
I13 ⁄ 2 , is nonexistent near 980 nm [10]. However, pump ESA can be initiated from
4 4
the energy short-lived I11 ⁄ 2 level; where the terminal level is F7 ⁄ 2 . Nevertheless,
since the level population is rapidly damped by nonradiative decay, ESA from this
level can occur only at high pump power levels [10]. Therefore, the ESA effect in the
second band can be more serious in the degradation of amplifier performance, mainly
in L-band amplifiers (see lesson about ESA in the tutorials) and it is taken into
consideration in the Erbium doped fiber modeling.
660
ER DOPED FIBER
To include the ESA effect in our two-level model, Equation 8 was modified to
introduce the ESA cross-section σ ESA :
dP (39)
--------k- = ( σ e ( v k ) + σ ESA ( v k ) + σ a ( v k ) ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n 2 ⋅ Γ k – σ a ( v k ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n t ⋅ Γ k + P 0k ⋅ σ a ( v k ) ⋅ n 2 ⋅ Γ k
dz
Additional information about the modeling of the ESA effect can be found in [10].
Figure 4 ESA Cross-sections
Inhomogeneous broadening
The previous model considered only homogeneous broadening, which is satisfactory
to predict the gain and noise performance of a majority of erbium doped fiber
amplifiers. However, to accurately describe the saturation behavior of the amplifier
and the effect of spectral-hole burning, inhomogeneous broadening has to be
considered. The main assumption in the modeling of this effect is that the variation of
the stark splitting from site to site due to the change of the ligand fields leads to
randomization of central frequencies of the transition lines; the linewidths, the
absorption and emission cross-sections, and the fluorescence lifetime do not change.
The density distribution for inhomogeneous broadening of central frequencies of the

transition lines is given for a Gaussian function:
ω ⎞2
4 ⋅ 1n ( 2 -) ⋅ exp – 4 ⋅ 1n ( 2 ) ⋅ ⎛ --------- (40)
f(ω) = ---------------------
2 ⎝ Δω ⎠
π ⋅ Δω i i
2
where Δω i = 2 ⋅ π ⋅ c ⋅ Δλ inh ⁄ λ is the inhomogeneous broadening spectral
bandwidth and Δλ inh is the inhomogeneous line width.
661
ER DOPED FIBER
The observed (measured) inhomogeneous absorption and emission cross-sections,

I I
σ a ( v ) and σ e ( v ) , are the convolutions of the homogeneous absorption and emission
H H
cross-sections, σ a ( v ) and σ e ( v ) , with the normalized inhomogeneous broadening
distribution f ( v ) , and can be expressed by:
∞
I H
∫ f ( v – v' ) ⋅ σe ( v ) ⋅ dv'
σe ( v ) = (41)a
–∞
∞
I H (41)b
σa ( v ) = ∫ f ( v – v' ) ⋅ σa ( v ) ⋅ dv'
–∞
The description of the inhomogeneous broadening is based on the following form of

the propagation equation suggested in [10]:
Pm H
dP ( ω k )
∞ H
σe ( ωk – ω )
∑ ---------------------
h ⋅ v ⋅ Am a m
σ (ω – ω) ⋅ τ
H
------------------ = ρ ⋅ Γ k ⋅ P ( ω k ) ⋅ ∫ dω ⋅ f ( ω ) ⋅ σ a ( ω k – ω ) ⋅ ---------------------------- m -_
⋅ -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
dz H
σa ( ωk – ω ) Pm H H
–∞ 1 + ∑ --------------------- ⋅ ( σ a ( ω m – ω ) + σ e ( ω m – ω ) ) ⋅ τ
h ⋅ v ⋅ Am
m
(42)
⎛ Pm H ⎞
⎜ 1 + ∑ ---------------------σ e ( ω m – ω ) ⋅ τ⎟
∞
⎝ h ⋅ v ⋅ A m ⎠
H m
– ρ ⋅ Γ k ⋅ P ( ω k ) ⋅ ∫ dω ⋅ f ( ω ) ⋅ σ a ( ω k – ω ) ⋅ --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pm H H
–∞ 1 + ∑ --------------------- ⋅ ( σ a ( ω m – ω ) + σ e ( ω m – ω ) ) ⋅ τ
h ⋅ v ⋅ Am
m
To include spontaneous emission, a noise source term is introduced in Equation 42.
In order to determine the homogeneous absorption and emission cross-section used

in the propagation equation, a deconvolution procedure to resolve Equation 41 is
applied.
In Homogeneous cross-sections, there is a description of the procedures used in the

component to generate the homogeneous cross-sections.
Homogeneous cross-sections
Homogeneous cross-sections can be derived from the experimental
(inhomogeneous) cross-sections through an inversion Fourier transformation in
Equation 41, (a) and (b). However, a direct deconvolution of Equation 41 has a
I I
unique solution only when the functions σ a ( λ ) , σ e ( λ ) and their evanescent tails are
well defined analytically. This is not the case with experimental line shapes.
662
ER DOPED FIBER
Nevertheless, there is a possibility of fitting the line shapes with a superposition of

Gaussian functions such as
nG 2
⎛ ⎛ ( λ – λi ) ⎞ ⎞
a i ⋅ exp – 4 ⋅ 1n ( 2 ) ⋅ ----------------------⎟ ⎟
⎜ ⎜
I(λ ) =
∑ ⎜
⎝
⎜
⎝
2 ⎟⎟
Δλ i ⎠ ⎠
i
where a i , λ i , and Δλ i are the Gaussian line shapes parameters for the fitting. The
parameter n G is the number of Gaussians.
Using this superposition of Gaussian functions; the deconvolution of Equation 41 can

be calculated analytically. With the Gaussian functions line shapes parameters found
in the numerical fitting, the homogeneous emission and absorption cross-sections
can calculated in accordance with the inhomogeneous line width ( Δλ inh ) provided
by the user using the definition [10]:
nG 2
Δλ i ⎛ ( λ – λi ) ⎞
H a, e
σ a, e ( λ ) = ∑ a i ⋅ ----------------------------------- ⋅ exp – 4 ⋅ 1n ( 2 ) ⋅ ----------------------⎟
⎜ (43)
2 2 ⎜ 2 ⎟
Δλ i – Δλ inh ⎝ Δλ i ⎠
i
The Erbium-doped fiber component is able to do the fitting of the cross-sections

provided by the user using the number of Gaussian functions ( n G ) determined by the
Number of Gaussians parameter.
Figure 5 Homogeneous (a) absorption and (b) emission cross-sections
663
ER DOPED FIBER
Approximations of Giles-Desurvire rate and propagation equations

Saleh model
The Saleh model is an approximation of the propagation and rate equations for a two-
level system in the steady-state case. This allows for an analytical solution of the
equations by means of a transcendental equation, instead of N coupled differential
equations [11]. This model could be successfully applied to the study of the small
signal gain and saturated gain, optimum fiber length, and saturated power. The theory
uses some simplifying assumptions. First, although spontaneous decay is accounted
for, amplified spontaneous emission (ASE) is neglected. This is valid for fiber lasers
above threshold and for fiber amplifiers when the input signal power is significantly
above the equivalent ASE noise input power, as discussed in [11]. Second, it is
assumed that there is no excited state absorption (ESA) at any of the pump or signal
wavelengths. Third, it is assumed that field and ion distributions are independent of
fiber position and power levels. These assumptions are satisfactory in the case of
typical doped fibers that have a doped fiber radius less than the core fiber radius.
Background loss is also neglected, as with three level ions such as erbium, the
absorption by the rare earth ions is typically much greater than other losses.
Using the assumptions, Equation 8 could be integrated analytically from 0 to L [11].

The result is given by the following expression for the output photon flux Q k :
out in ⎧ ( αk + gk ) in out ⎫ (44)

Qk = Q k exp ⎨ – α k L + ----------------------- ⋅ ( Q tot – Q tot ) ⎬
⎩ ζ ⎭
out out
where Q k = Pk ⁄ ( hv k ) is the output photon flux for kth signal,
in in
Q k = P k ⁄ ( hv k ) is the input photon flux for kth signal
out out
Q tot =
∑ Qk is the total output photon flux
k
in in
Q tot = ∑ Qk is the total input photon flux.
k
Summing Equation 44 over all k signals yields:
out in ⎧ ( αk + gk ) in out ⎫
∑ Qk exp ⎨⎩ – αk L + ----------------------
- ⋅ ( Q tot – Q tot ) ⎬ (45)
Q tot =
ζ ⎭
k
out out
which is a implicit equation for the total output photon flux Q tot . Note that Q tot is
completely determined, given the input flux, by the following four fiber parameters;
out
α k, g k, ζ, and L (fiber length). Solving Equation 45 for Q tot allows for the
determination of the output fluxes of each individual signal through Equation 44.
664
ER DOPED FIBER
Since the Saleh model neglects ASE, it becomes less accurate for cases in which
ASE becomes significant, e.g. for low input powers (less than about -20 dBm,
depending on the gain and signal wavelengths). In these cases, the accuracy is
improved by using an equivalent ASE input, which inputs effective input beams at
both ends of the fiber with equivalent input powers:
in (46)
hv k P k = 2n sp ( v, z in )Δv hv k
where z in = 0 for the forward ASE, and z in = L for the backward ASE. Δv is the
spectral width of the noise beams. The spontaneous emission factor is given by:
n 2 ( z in )
n sp ( v, z in ) = ------------------------------------------ ⋅ ε ( v ) (47)
n 2 ( z in ) – n 1 ( z in )
where ε ( v ) = σ a ⁄ σ e is the ratio of cross-sections.
The Saleh model has the advantage that longitudinal integrations are not required, so
it is much faster to solve. Note that unlike literature that typically uses one or two
equivalent ASE beams centered at the spectral peaks near 1532 nm and 1555 nm,
this component has an equivalent ASE beam for each of the bins defined in the Noise
tab.
Jopson model
The Saleh model only estimates the pump and signal powers, and equivalent ASE at
the doped fiber output. These values are used to estimate the population inversion at
the doped fiber ends. However, no information is obtained about the values along the
fiber. Jopson and Saleh extended the Saleh model to obtain estimates of the powers
and inversion levels along the fiber [12]. The photon flux Q k in distance z can be
determined by:
⎧ ( αk + gk ) ⎫ (48)
Q k ( z ) = Q k ( 0 ) exp ⎨ – u k α k z + u k ----------------------- ⋅ ( Q ( 0 ) – Q ( z ) ) ⎬
⎩ ζ ⎭
where Q ( z ) is defined by:
Q(z) =
∑ uk Qk ( z ) (49)
and it is computed from the transcendental equation:
–uk αk a uk (50)
Q(z) =
∑ uk Qk ( z ) e e [ ( Q ( 0 ) – Q ( z ) ) ⋅ ( αk + gk ) ⁄ ζ ]
665
ER DOPED FIBER
In order to obtain the pump, signals, and equivalent ASE powers and population
inversion along the fiber, starting from either end of the fiber, this equation can be
solved for in every user-defined step.
Noise
The spontaneous-emission noise at wavelength λ k , of a single polarization, emitted
in a single direction by a section of amplifier of length dz is given by:
dP = g k ⋅ n 2 ( z ) ⋅ Δv ⋅ dz
where n 2 ( z ) can be determined using Equation 50 and Equation 7.
The amplified spontaneous emission noise (ASE) emitted from the output or input end
of the amplifier at wavelength λ k can be obtained by multiplying the spontaneous
emission from each section of the amplifier by the amplifier gain at λ k from that
section to the desired end of the amplifier. The gain is given by:
–uk αk z uk
G k ( 0, z ) = e e [ ( Q ( 0 ) – Q ( z ) ) ⋅ ( α k + g k ) ⁄ ζ ] , where G k ( 0, z ) is the gain from
the input ( z = 0 ) to the length z
and
–uk αk ( L – z ) uk
G k ( z, L ) = e e [ ( Q ( z ) – Q ( L ) ) ⋅ ( α k + g k ) ⁄ ζ ] , where G k ( z, L ) is the gain
from the length z to the output L .
666
ER DOPED FIBER
Additional input parameters

Most of the input parameters for the component were described in the sections before
and they can be easily linked to a particular effect or equation. However, there are
several parameters that have not been described yet, or they are loaded from files.
Main tab
This tab contains the basic parameters of the Erbium-doped fiber. All of them are well
described in the technical description. However, there is a new parameter (Input data
parameter) that gives the user the choice to enter the saturation parameter or to enter
the fiber parameters (core radius, doped radius, numerical aperture, and erbium
density population).
Cross-sections tab
In this tab the user defines which cross-section file has to be loaded and what
characteristics it has. There are two options available to prepare the cross-section file,
which is specified in an ASCII file. The first option is to provide directly the cross-
section in an input file with three columns. The first column refers to the wavelength
(or frequency) in [m], [nm], [Hz] or [THz] units; the File frequency unit parameter
defines the unit of this column. The second column gives the absorption cross-section
in [m2] units. The third column gives the emission cross-section file in [m2] units. The
unit of the second and third column must be in [m2]. As an example, one possible
cross-section file format is:
2 2
λ λ [ nm ] (nm) σa [ m ] σe [ m ]
975 1.95386E-25 0
976 2.07791E-25 0
977 2.20195E-25 0
978 2.26852E-25 0
979 2.13394E-25 0
980 1.99935E-25 0
981 1.86477E-25 0
982 1.73019E-25 0
983 1.5956E-25 0
1450 5.88956E-26 1.78862E-26
1451 6.19338E-26 1.87881E-26
1452 6.50958E-26 1.97301E-26
1453 6.83832E-26 2.06921E-26
667
ER DOPED FIBER
2 2
λ λ [ nm ] (nm) σa [ m ] σe [ m ]
1454 7.17971E-26 2.16742E-26
1455 7.53386E-26 2.26767E-26
1456 7.90081E-26 2.37003E-26
1457 8.2806E-26 2.4746E-26
1458 8.67324E-26 2.58149E-26
1459 9.07873E-26 2.69085E-26
The second option is to provide the absorption and gain coefficients (or Giles
routines in the software. The file format in this case contains three columns. The first
column refers to the wavelength (or frequency) in [m], [nm], [Hz] or [THz] units; the
File frequency unit parameter defines the unit of this column. The second column
gives the absorption coefficient in [dB/m] units. The third column gives the emission
coefficient in [dB/m] units. The unit of the second and third column must be in [dB/m].
An example of this input file is:
λ λ [ nm ] (nm) α [ dB ⁄ m ] g∗ [ dB ⁄ m ]
977 5 0
978 5 0
979 5 0
980 5 0
981 5 0
1460 1.357 0.29
1461 1.417 0.309
1462 1.464 0.328
1463 1.525 0.35
1464 1.562 0.365
1465 1.562 0.387
1466 1.562 0.411
When the EDF component load the cross-section file, it detects whether the file
contain the Giles parameters ( g ( λ ) and α ( λ ) ) or cross-section parameters ( σ a ( v k )
and σ e ( v k ) ).
668
ER DOPED FIBER
The parameter OptiAmplifier format is used to allow the component load cross-
sections files originated from the software OptiAmplier. Therefore, if the user wants to
load a cross-section under the crs format (format used in the OptiAmplifier software),
the OptiAmplifier format parameter has to be set TRUE.
Enhanced tab
The enhanced tab defines the parameters related to the background loss, Rayleigh
+3 +3
scattering, Er – Er interaction effects, ESA, and temperature dependence. First,
the user can choose the Background loss data type parameter that determines the
background loss through the loss at 1310nm (Loss at 1310 nm parameter) or using a
wavelength dependent background loss loaded from a file. In the second case, the
user has to specify the name of the file contained the losses in the Background loss
file name parameter. The format of this file must be similar to the following example:
λ λ [ nm ] (nm) α [ dB ⁄ km ]
1460 10
1461 10.5
1462 10.2
1463 10.1
1464 10.3
The user can include the Rayleigh scattering effect or not in the simulations through
the parameter Include Rayleigh scattering. If the Include Rayleigh scattering
parameter is TRUE, then the user has to specify the value of the Rayleigh constant.
The Backscattering capture parameter determines if the component will generate the
capture fraction using Equation 25, or the user will provide a file with the capture
fraction - in this case the user should specify the file name in the Rayleigh capture file
name parameter and the file has to be in the format similar to the below:
λ λ [ nm ] (nm) C [ dB ]
1460 -20
1461 -21.5
1462 -21
1463 -20.5
1464 -20.48
+3 +3
In the case of Er – Er interaction effects, the user has to decide to include or not
this effect through the parameter Include ion-ion interaction effects. If the user
chooses to include this effect, the parameter Ion-Ion interaction effect has to specify
+3 +3
which Er – Er interaction effect will be considered in the simulations;
669
ER DOPED FIBER
Homogeneous upconversion, pair-induced quenching, or a combination of both.

When the ion-ion effect is defined, then the parameters necessaries for that effect will
be enabled. Upconversion coefficient, ions per cluster, and relative number of clusters
are the parameters that have to be specified depending on the effect considered.
The user can include the temperature dependence in EDF model setting the
parameter Include temperature dependence to TRUE. After this, the user has to
define in which temperature, the cross-section defined in the cross-sections tab, was
measured (Cross-section temperature parameter). With these parameters and the
cross-section at infinite temperature stored in the component, it is possible to
calculate the parameters β a ( λ ) and β e ( λ ) from Equation 37 and Equation 38. The
other parameter to be defined is the temperature that will be considered in the
simulation (Temperature parameter). For more information, refer to the tutorial about
temperature dependence.
The ESA effect can be included in the EDF simulation. In this case the user has to set
the parameter Include ESA effect to TRUE. After this, the user has to provide the ESA
cross-section. Similar to the cross-sections in the cross-section tab, the ESA cross-
2
section can be in the Giles format [ dB ⁄ m ] or cross-section format [ m ]. The
difference is the ESA cross-section file must have only two columns: (1) wavelength
(or frequency) in [m], [nm], [Hz] or [THz] units and (2) the ESA cross-section. The unit
of the wavelength column has to be the same as defined in the File frequency unit
parameter (Cross-sections tab).
The last parameter is Extract ESA from emission. If this parameter is TRUE, it means
that the second column of the ESA file contains the ESA cross-section and the
emission cross-section together, so the component has to extract the ESA cross-
section from this file. If the Extract ESA from emission parameter is FALSE, the
component assumes that the second column contains only the ESA cross-section. An
example of ESA file is:
λ λ [ nm ] (nm) g∗ [ dB ⁄ m ]
1449.91984 0.32257
1451.30261 0.35195
1452.68537 0.38317
1454.06814 0.4175
1455.4509 0.4571
1571.60321 4.08152
670
ER DOPED FIBER
λ λ [ nm ] (nm) g∗ [ dB ⁄ m ]
1572.98597 3.81553
1574.36874 3.60032
1575.7515 3.37804
1577.13427 3.20419
1578.51703 3.05017
1648.98 1.43477
1649.23 1.4325
1649.48 1.49899
1649.73 1.42809
1649.98 1.42593
1650.23 1.49333
For more information, refer to the tutorial about ESA.
Numerical tab
The numerical tab contains most of the options related to the different models or
approximations used in the EDF model. In the Calculation algorithm parameter, the
user can choose between the four possible models: (1) Saleh, (2) Jopson, (3) Giles,
and (4) Inhomogeneous. These four possible models are described in the technical
background. If a model is selected, for example the model number 3 (Giles model),
the EDF component will start the simulation process from the first model (Saleh) until
the model chose by the user (Giles model). Figure 6 details how the component
works.
671
ER DOPED FIBER
Figure 6 Diagram describing the process order of the algorithm models
The EDF component's preprocessing is done to improve the speed of convergence

in the model selected by the user. This preprocessing is done in accordance with the
complexity of each model.
The user defines the parameter Relative error that indicates the threshold value which
the component uses to decide if the results from the iterative process have
converged. Another parameter is the Max. number of iterations. This parameter
defines the maximum number of iterations allowed for the numerical method to reach
the value determined by the Relative error parameter. The parameter Number of
longitudinal steps defines the minimum number of steps in the fiber to be considered
in the Jopson, Giles, and inhomogeneous method.
If the Inhomogeneous algorithm is chose, then the user has to specify the parameter
Inhomogeneous accuracy. This parameter determines the tolerance of the numerical
integration of Equation 42, and directly influences the simulation time. Some
simulations have shown us that this parameter should be between 0.01 and 0.001 to
obtain accurate results in a reasonable time.
The user can make their selection via the Overlap factor data parameter, by
determining if the component will calculate the overlap integral or the component or
load the overlap factor from a file. For the calculation case, the Geometrical model
parameter has to be defined. The Geometrical model parameter indicates if the
672
ER DOPED FIBER
component will use one of the Gaussian approximations (Equation 13 - Equation 16)
or the LP01 mode to calculate the overlap integral.
Another possible method to calculate the overlap integral is to consider the power
dependence on it. The Overlap factor parameter determines if the power dependence
has to be taken into consideration. In this case, Equation 6 is solved numerically for
the LP01 mode and the number of integrations to be done in the fiber is defined by
the Nr. of transverse integration parameter. In the other way, the confinement factor
is calculated in accordance with the Geometrical model parameter.
If the overlap factor is loaded from a file, the user has to specify the file name in the
Overlap factor file name parameter, and the file has to be the same as the format
below:
λ λ [ nm ] (nm) Γ
1449.91984 0.45
1451.30261 0.44
1452.68537 0.43
1454.06814 0.42
1455.4509 0.41
If the Inhomogeneous algorithm is chose, then the homogeneous absorption and

emission cross-sections are necessary for the inhomogeneous broadening model. In
this case, the component generates the homogeneous cross-sections from the
measured cross-sections, as explained in the technical background. For this purpose,
the user has to specify the number of Gaussians to be used in the fitting and the value
of the inhomogeneous linewidth.
673
ER DOPED FIBER
References
[1] C. Randy Giles, and Emmanuel Desurvire, "Modeling Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers". IEEE
Journal of Lightwave Technology, Volume: 9 Issue: 2, Feb. 1991, Page(s): 271 - 283.
[2] Fiber Optic Test and Measurement, Edited by Dennis Derickson, 1997.
[3] S. L. Hansen, K. Dybdal, and C. C. Larsen. "Gain Limited in Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers Due
to Internal Rayleigh Backscattering". IEEE Photonics Technology Letters, Volume 4, Issue 6,
Jun. 1992.
[4] P. F. Wysocki, G. Jacobovitz-Veselka, D. S. Gasper, S. Kosinski, J. Costelloe, and S. W.
Granlund. "Modeling, Measurement, and a Simple Analytic Approximation for the Return Loss
of Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers". IEEE Photonics Technology Letters, Volume: 7, Issue: 12,
Dec. 1995.
[5] P. Blixt, J. Nilsson, T. Carlnas, and B. Jaskorzynska. "Concentration-Dependent Upconversion
in Er3+-Doped Fiber Amplifiers: Experiments and Modeling". IEEE Photonics Technology
Letters, Volume: 3 Issue: 11, Nov. 1991.
[6] P. Myslink, D. Nguyen, and J. Chrostowski. "Effects of Concentration on the Performance of
Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers". Journal of Lightwave Technology, volume 15, Issue 1, Jan.
1997.
[7] Blixt, P.; Jaskorzynska, B.; Nilsson, J. "Performance reduction and design modification of
erbium-doped fiber amplifiers resulting from pair-induced quenching". IEEE Photonics
Technology Letters , Volume: 5 Issue: 12 , Dec 1993.
[8] M. Bolshtyansky, P. F. Wysocki, N. Conti. "Model of Temperature Dependence for Gain Shape
of Erbium-Doped Fiber". Journal of Lightwave Technology, volume 18, Issue 11, Dec 2000.
[9] P. F. Wysocki, N. Conti, and D. Holcomb. "Simple Modeling Approach for the Temperature
Dependence of the Gain of Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers". SPIE Conference on Optical
Devices for Fiber Communication, Volume 3847, 1999.
[10] Emmanuel Desurvire. "Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier: Principles and Applications", John Wiley
& Sons.
[11] A. A. M. Saleh, R. M. Jopson, J. D. Evankow, and J. Aspell. "Modeling of Gain in Erbium-Doped
Fiber Amplifiers". IEEE Photonics Technology Letters, Volume: 2 Issue: 10, Oct. 1990, Page(s):
714 - 717.
[12] R. M. Jopson, A. A. M Saleh. "Modeling of Gain and Noise in Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers".
Fiber Laser Sources and Amplifiers, SPIE Volume: 1581, 1991, Page(s): 114 - 119.
[13] C. R. Giles, C. A. Burrus, D. J. DiGiovanni, N. K. Dutta, and G. Raybon. "Characterization of
Erbium-Doped Fibers and Application to Modeling 980 nm and 1480 nm Pumped Amplifiers".
IEEE Photonics Technology Letters, Volume: 3 Issue: 4, Apr. 1991, Page(s): 363 -365.
[14] "Rare-Earth-Doped Fiber Laser and Amplifiers", Edited by M. J. F. Digonnet, 2001.
[15] P. C. Becker, N. A. Olsson, and J. R. Simpson. "Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers: Fundamentals
and Technology". Optics and Photonics, 1999.
674
ER DOPED MULTIMODE FIBER
Er Doped Multimode Fiber
This component simulates a bidirectional erbium-doped fiber that supports the consideration of a
multimode regime. The component solves numerically the rate and propagation equations for the steady-
state case.
Ports

Parameters
Main
unit
Length - 5 m - [1e-100, 1e6]
Er metastable lifetime - 10 ms - [1e-100, 1e100]
Specifies the Erbium metastable

lifetime
Refractive index profile - Step index - - Step index, From file
Specifies if the fiber presents a step

index profile or the profile is defined by
a file
Core radius - 2.2 μm - [0.1, 1e100]
Specifies the doped fiber core radius
Core refractive index - 1.45 - - [1, 2]
Specifies the refractive index at the

core
675
unit
Numerical aperture - 0.24 - - [0.01, 1]
Species the numerical aperture of the

fiber
OptiFiber file format - False - - True, False
Defines whether to load a file

generated by OptiFiber software or not
Refractive index file name - Index.dat - - -

Specifies the file name with the
refractive index profile
Er ion density - 1e+025 m-3 - [1, 1e100]
Specifies the erbium doping density

peak in the fiber
Er doping radius - 2.2 μm - [0.1, 1e100]
Specifies the erbium doped radius
Er ion density distribution - Uniform - - Uniform, From file
Specifies if the eibium ion density

distribution is uniform (“flat top”) or is
defined in a file
Er ion density distribution - Erdensity.dat - - -

filename
Specifies the file name with the ion
distribution profile
Cross-sections

value range
File frequency unit nm - - nm, m, Hz, THz
Determines the frequency unit of the file with the

cross-sections
OptiAmplifier format False - - True, False
Determines if the format of the cross-section file is

an OptiAmplifier file
Cross-section file name Erbium.dat - - -

Specifies the Erbium cross-section file name
676
Enhanced
unit
Background loss data type - Constant - - Constant, From file
Determines if the loss will be a constant

value or it will be loaded from a file
Loss - 0 dB/Km - [0, 1e100]
Specifies the fiber loss
Background loss file name - Loss.dat - - -
Double-clad fiber - False - - True, False
Specifies if the doped fiber is double-

clad
Pump reference - 1310 nm - [500, 2000]
If the fiber is double-clad, then a

reference wavelength that defines the
pump has to be specified
Cladding area - 3000 μm2 - [1, 10000000]

-
Include ion-ion interaction - False - True, False
effects
Determines whether Er-Er ion
interaction effects are included or not
-
Ion-ion interaction effect - Homogeneous - Homogeneous,
Inhomogeneous,
Determines which kind of Er-Er ion
Combined
interaction is considered
Upconversion coefficient - 1e-22 m3/s - [0, 1000]

Specifies the two-particle upconversion
coefficient
Ions per cluster - 2 - - [0, 500]
Specifies number of ions in a cluster
Relative number of clusters - 12 % - [0, 100]

Specifies the relative number of
clusters
Include temperature effects - False - - True, False
Determines if temperature dependence

Temperature - 20 C - [-273, 500]
Specifies the current temperature
677
unit
Cross-section temperature - 20 C - [-273, 500]
Specifies the temperature when the

cross-section was measured
Include ESA effect - False - - True, False
Determines if excited stated absorption

ESA Cross-section file name - ESAErbium.dat - - -

Specifies the ESA cross-section file
name
Extract ESA from emission - True - - True, False
Determines if the component has to

extract the ESA cross-section from the
loaded file
Numerical
unit
Relative error - 0.0001 - - [1e-100, 1]
Specifies the maximum difference

acceptable between two consectutives
iterations to finish the iteration process
Max. number of iterations - 100 - - [1, 1e8]

times for the iteration process
Longitudinal steps - 100 0 0 [1, 1e8]
Specifies the number of longitudinal

steps in the fiber
Radial steps - 40 - - [1, 1e8]
Specifies the number of radial steps for

the integration
Azimuthal steps - 18 - - [3, 1e8]

Specifies the number of azimuthal
steps for the integration
Mode solver tolerance - 1e-14 - - [1e-100, 0.1]
Specifies the mode solver tolerance
Parallel computing False True, False

Specifies if the simulation will use a
parallel computation algorithm
678
unit
Max number of modes - 5 - - [1, 7]

modes that will be simulated
Power ratio for each pump mode - Equally excited - - Equally excited,
Calculated
mode power distribution for the pump
or calculate it based on the coupling
coefficients
Load input pump mode from file - False - - True, False
If the mode power distribution for the

pump is specified by coupling
coefficients, then an initial optical
excitation has to be defined. In this
case the user can define the
parameters for a Laguerre-Gaussian
pump mode or load the mode from a
file.
Pump mode file name - - - - -
Defines the file name containing the

initial excitation for the pump modes
Pump m,n index - 00 - - -
Specify the mode indexes ‘m,n’ for the

initial pump excitation.
Pump spot size - 5 μm - -
Specify the spot size for the initial pump

excitation.
Pump inv. radius of curvature - 0 1/μm - -

Specify the inverse radius of curvature
for the initial pump excitation.
Power ratio for each signal - Equally excited - - Equally excited,

mode Calculated
mode power distribution for the signal
coefficients.
Load input signal mode from file - False - - True, False

signal is specified by coupling
signal mode or load the mode from a
file.
679
unit
Signal mode file name - - - - -

initial excitation for the pump modes.
Signal m,n index - 00 - - -

initial signal excitation.
Signal spot size - 5 μm - -

Specify the spot size for the initial
signal excitation.
Signal inv. radius of curvature - 0 1/μm - -

for the initial signal excitation.
Graphs

value range
Calculate graphs False - - True, False
Number of distance steps 20 - - [1,1e8]
Number of wavelength steps 20 - - [1,1e8]
Number of radial steps 40 - - [1, 1e8]
Linear scale True - - True, False
Minimum value -50 dBm - [1e-100, 1e100]
Pump reference wavelength 1400 nm - [100, 1900]
Simulation

value range
Define whether the component is enabled or not
Space width X Space width X μm [1e-100, 1e100]
Space width Y Space width Y μm [1e-100, 1e100]
680
Noise

value range
Noise bandwidth 13 THz Hz, THz, nm [0, +INF]

Noise bins spacing 125 THz Hz, GHz, THz, [1,1000]

nm
Noise threshold –100 dB - [-INF,0]
Noise dynamic 3 dB - [0, +INF]
Convert noise bins Convert noise - - True, False

bins
Random numbers

value range
Graphs
Name and description X Title Y Title Z Title

Absorption parameters Wavelength (m) Absorption coefficient -
(dB/m)
Cross-section (m2)
Backward ASE power Distance (m) Wavelength (nm) Power (W)
Backward pump power Distance (m) Wavelength (nm) Power (W)
Backward signal gain Distance (m) Wavelength (nm) Power (W)
Backward signal power Distance (m) Wavelength (nm) Power (W)
681

Emission parameters Wavelength (m) Emission coefficient -
(dB/m)
Cross-section (m2)
ESA emission parameters Wavelength (m) ESA gain coefficient -

(dB/m)
Forward ASE power Distance (m) Wavelength (nm) Power (W)
Forward pump power Distance (m) Wavelength (nm) Power (W)
Forward signal gain Distance (m) Wavelength (nm) Power (W)
Forward signal power Distance (m) Wavelength (nm) Power (W)
Input pump beam profile X (μm) Y (μm) Power (W)
Input signal beam profile X (μm) Y (μm) Power (W)
Ion density distribution Radius (μm) Ion density -

normalized
Loss Loss (dB/km) Wavelength (nm) -
Normalized population density N1 Distance (m) Normalized -

population density

population density
Output signal beam profile X (μm) Y (μm) Power (W)
Power coupling - Pump Mode number Power coupling -
Power coupling - Signal Mode number Power coupling -
Pump LP [m,n] index array - m Mode number m -
Pump LP [m,n] index array - n Mode number n -
Radial profile - mode 1 Radius (μm) Normalized intensity -
Refractive index profile Radius (μm) Refractive index -
Signal LP [m,n] index array - m Mode number m -
Signal LP [m,n] index array - n Mode number n -
682

Signal power - mode 1 Distance (m) Power (W) -
Total backward ASE power Distance (m) Power (W) -
Total backward pump power Distance (m) Power (W) -
Total backward signal gain Distance (m) Gain (dB) -
Total backward signal power Distance (m) Power (W) -
Total forward ASE power Distance (m) Power (W) -
Total forward pump power Distance (m) Power (W) -
Total forward signal gain Distance (m) Gain (dB) -
Total forward signal power Distance (m) Power (W) -
683
The Erbium-doped multimode fiber component modeling is based on the numerical
solution of the rate and propagation equations assuming a two-level system, and
considering the transverse field profiles and ion transversal distribution.
The rate equations are based on energy levels and describe the effects of absorption,
stimulated emission, and spontaneous emission on the populations of the lower (n1)
and upper (n2) states. For a two-level system with k optical beams, the beam here can
be considered as a specific mode, the rate equations are given by [1].
(1)a
(1)b
Where h is the Planck constant, τ is the metastable lifetime parameter, ν k is the

frequency and P k is the power of the kth beam. The absorption and emission cross-
section of the kth beam are σ a ( ν k ) and σ e ( ν k ) , respectively, and n t is the local erbium
ion density. The normalized optical intensity i k ( r, φ ) is defined as
i k ( r, φ ) = ( I k ( r, φ, z ) ) ⁄ ( P k ( z ) ) , where I k ( r, φ, z ) is light intensity distribution of the kth
beam.
The propagation equations describe the propagation of the beams through the Er-
doped fiber are given by
(2)
Where each beam propagates in the forward ( u k = 1 ) or backward ( u k = – 1 )

modes m is normally 2 and Δv k is the noise bandwidth.
684
is reduced to the steady-state case and the ion upper-population is defined as
(3)
With the specified boundary conditions at z = 0 and z = L , the Equation 2 and

Equation 3 can be integrated over space, and frequency.
Multimode Solution
The Er-doped fiber may support more than one mode at the pump, ASE or signal
frequencies/wavelength. The component has a numerical mode solver that will
calculate the LP(m,n) modes supported by the fiber based on the refractive index
profile defined by the user (it finds the LP modes by an exact method that uses radial
transfer matrices).
The parameter Max number of modes defines the maximum number of modes per
channel that will be considered for each signal, pump and ASE when searching for
supported fiber modes. For now the maximum number of modes (per channel)
supported by this component is 7.
The normalized intensity profiles are obtained from the modal analysis of the
waveguide, in such a way that the intensity distributions of the signal, pump and ASE
can be written as
(4)
It should be noted that the same normalized intensity profile has been used for all
central wavelengths of the intervals used to discretize the ASE, because the
difference between the central wavelengths of the intervals are relatively small. The
same assumption is assumed for any set of signals and for any set of pumps, i.e. each
set will have the same normalized intensity profile. The correlation between the field
distribution of the fundamental mode at 1530 nm and 1650 nm is higher than 95% for
a typical optical fiber/waveguide.
685
The power ratio distribution between the input spatial fields and each of the spatial
fiber modes supported can be defined in two ways:
• The user can assume that each supported mode will be equally
excited by the input signal (pump). In this case the user has to set the
parameter Power ratio for each signal (pump) mode to Equally
excited.
• The power distribution is defined by the coupling coefficients that are
calculated according to
(5)
Where Ei is the spatial profile for each m,n mode, including the sin and cosine factors,
and Ein is the spatial input field. In this case the input field can be defined by loading
it from a file or the user can define the input field as a Laguerre-Gaussian profile by
setting the mode index for the field, as well as the spot size and the inverse of the
radius of curvature.
(6)
Where m and n describes the azimuthal and radial indexes respectively. R is the
radius of curvature and ω0 is the spot size. Ln,m is the Laguerre polynomial.
Double-Clad Fibers
calculated, by assuming the pump is spatially homogeneous over the multimode
section, by [2]
(7)
Where Sclad is the inner clad area and beff is the effective doping radius. Equation 7
will be used to calculate the pump overlap factor.
686
To consider a double clad fiber in the simulation, the parameter Double-clad fiber
should be set to True and the pump reference must be specified to define the
multimode pump (all signals with wavelength lower than the pump reference will be
considered a multimode pump).
Background loss
The Background loss effect can be considered in the model, the equations and
parameters used to represent them are similar to the ones shown at the erbium-doped
fiber component. For more information about how it is included in the numerical
model, see Erbium-doped fiber component's technical background.
Er+3-Er+3 Interaction
In the case of Er+3-Er+3 interaction effects the user has to decide to include or not this
effect through the parameter Include ion-ion interaction effects. If the user chose
include this effect, the parameter Ion-Ion interaction effect has to specify which Er+3-
Er+3 interaction effect will be considered in the simulations; Homogeneous
upconversion, pair-induced quenching or both effects combined. When the ion-ion
effect is defined, then the parameters necessaries for that effect will be enabled.
Upconversion coefficient, ions per cluster, and relative number of cluster are the
parameters that have to be specified depending on the effect considered. For more
information about each model, see Erbium-doped fiber component's technical
background.
Temperature dependence
The user can include the temperature dependence in EDF model by setting the
parameter Include temperature dependence to true. After this, the user has to define
in which temperature, the cross-section defined in the cross-sections tab, was
measured (Cross-section temperature parameter). The other parameter to be defined
is the temperature that will be considered in the simulation (Temperature parameter).
For more information, see Erbium-doped fiber component's technical background.
Excited-State Absorption Effect (ESA)

The ESA effect can be included in the EDF simulation. In this case the user has to set
the parameter Include ESA effect to true. After this, the user has to provide the ESA
cross-section. For more information about the effect, see Erbium-doped fiber
component's technical background.
Cross-section file
687
There are two options available to prepare the cross-section file, which is specified in
an ASCII file. The first option is to provide directly the cross-section in an input file with
three columns. The first column refers to the wavelength (or frequency) in [m], [nm],
[Hz] or [THz] units; the File frequency unit parameter defines the unit of this column.
The second column gives the absorption cross-section in [m2] units. The third column
gives the emission cross-section file in [m2] units. The unit of the second and third
column must be in [m2]. As an example, one possible cross-section file format is:
The second option is to provide the absorption and gain coefficients (or Giles
routines in the software. The file format in this case contains three columns. The first
column refers to the wavelength (or frequency) in [m], [nm], [Hz] or [THz] units; the
File frequency unit parameter defines the unit of this column. The second column
gives the absorption coefficient in [dB/m] units. The third column gives the emission
coefficient in [dB/m] units. The unit of the second and third column must be in [dB/m].
An example of this input file is:
688
When the EDF component load the cross-section file, it automatically detect whether
the file contain the Giles parameters ( g ( λ ) and α ( λ ) ) or cross-section parameters
( σ a ( v k ) and σ e ( v k ) ).
load a cross-section under the crs format (format used in the OptAmplifier software),
ESA file
Similar to the cross-sections in the cross-section tab, the ESA cross-section can be
in the Giles format [dB/km] or cross-section format [m2]. The difference is the ESA
cross-section file must have only two columns: (1) wavelength (or frequency) in [m],
[nm], [Hz] or [THz] units and (2) the ESA cross-section. The unit of the wavelength
column has to be the same as defined in the File frequency unit parameter (cross-
sections tab).
If the parameter Extract ESA from emission is true, it means that the second column
of the ESA file contain the ESA cross-section and the emission cross-section together
and the component has to extract the ESA cross-section from this file. If the Extract
ESA from emission parameter is false the component assumes that the second
column contains only the ESA cross-section. An example of ESA file is:
Background loss file

First, the user can choose the Background loss data type parameter that determines
the background loss through a constant loss or using a wavelength dependent
background loss loaded from a file. In the second case the user has to specify the
689
name of the file contained the losses in the Background loss file name parameter. The
format of this file must be similar to the example below:
Refractive index file

The refractive index profile file is specified in an ASCII file with two columns. The first
column refers to the radial position in μm. The second column gives the refractive
index values. As an example, one possible refractive index file is:
690
The parameter OptiFiber file format is used to allow the component to load refractive
index profiles originated from the software OptiFiber. Therefore, if the user wants to
load a refractive index profile file exported from OptiFiber, the OptiFiber file format
parameter has to be set to TRUE. The following file is an example of such file (it is
equivalent to the refractive index profile from last section)
691
Erbium density distribution file

The erbium density distribution file is specified in an ASCII file with two columns. The
first column refers to the normalized radial position (normalized by the Er doping
radius value). The second column gives the normalized ion density values
(normalized by the Er ion density value). As an example, a "flat-top" file is:
References
[2] A. Hardy, and H. Oron, "Signal Amplification in Strongly Pumped Fiber Amplifiers". IEEE
Journal of Quantum Electronics, Volume: 33 Issue: 3, Mar. 1997, Page(s): 307 - 313.
692
ER-YB CODOPED FIBER
Er-Yb Codoped Fiber
This component simulates a bidirectional Erbium-Ytterbium codoped fiber. The

component solves numerically the rate and propagation equations for the steady-
state case and can take into account nonlinear phase changes caused by SPM and
XPM effects by propagating the signal using the nonlinear Schrödinger equation.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Length 1 m — [0,1000000]
Doped fiber length
Core radius 2 μm — [1,1e100]
Doped fiber core radius
Doping radius 2 μm — [1,1e100]
Doped radius
Specifies numerical aperture of fiber
693
ER-YB CODOPED FIBER
Doping

value range
Er ion density 5.14e+025 m-3 — [1,1e100]
Specifies Erbium doping in the fiber
Yb ion density 6.2e+026 m-3 — [1,1e100]
Specifies Ytterbium doping in the fiber
Er metastable lifetime 10 ms — [1e-100, 1e100]
Yb metastable lifetime 1.5 ms — [1e-100, 1e100]
Specifies the Ytterbium metastable lifetime
Calculate upconversion True — — True, False
Component calculates C16 and C14 based on ion

density
C14 5.2834e-024 m-3/s — [1e-100, 1e100]
Cross relaxation coefficient between level 1 and 4
C16 3.44e-022 m-3/s — [1e-100, 1e100]
Cup 5.2834e-024 m-3/s — [1e-100, 1e100]
Homogeneous upconversion coefficient from

level 2
A32 1000000000 1/s — [1,1e100]
Nonradiative emission rate from level 3 to level 2
A43 1000000000 1/s — [1,1e100]
Cross-sections

value range

OptiAmplifier file

cross sections
694
ER-YB CODOPED FIBER

value range
Er cross-section file name Erbium.dat — — —
Yb cross-section file name Ytterbium.dat — — —
Specifies Ytterbium cross-section file name
Enhanced
Name and description Default Default Unit Units Value

value range
Loss data type Constant Constant,
FromFile
Signal loss 0.10 dB/m — [0,1e100]
Fiber loss at signal range
Pump loss 0.15 dB/m — [0,1e100]
Fiber loss at pump range
Loss vs. wavelength Loss.dat — — —
File containing the background loss
Determines the inclusion or not of the Rayleigh

scattering effect
Rayleigh constant 150 dB/km — [0,1e100]
Specifies the value of the Rayleigh constant
Backscattering capture fraction Calculate — — Calculate,

From file
Determines whether the capture fraction values
will be calculated by the component or it will be
loaded from a file
Rayleigh capture file name Capture.dat — — Constant, From

File
Double-clad fiber False — — True, False

Specifies if the doped fiber is double-clad
Double-clad data type Calculate — — Calculate,

From file
Specify if the pump multimode absorption will be
calculated by using the inner clad area or it will be
loaded
2
Cladding area 3000 μm — [1, 100000]
695
ER-YB CODOPED FIBER

value range
Pump absorption file name PumpAbsorptio — — —
n.dat
Specifies the absorption file name
Temperature 300 K — [0,1000]
Absolute temperature
Include Dispersion False — — True, False
Defines whether to include dispersion effects or

not
Reference wavelength 1550 nm — [500,1900]

Used internally as “zero” (or reference) frequency
in spectrum of signal envelope
Dispersion -20 ps/nm/km — [1e-100, 1e100]
Value of the GVD (Group Velocity Dispersion)

parameter in wavelength domain.
Dispersion slope 0.005 ps/nm2/km — [1e-100, 1e100]
Value of the dispersion slope parameter.
Nonlinear effects

value range
Include SPM False — — True, False
Determines if the self-phase modulation will be

taken into account. If True the optical signal will be
propagated using the nonlinear Shrödinger
equation. This parameter will also enable Cross-
phase modulation and Four-wave mixing effects.
Effective area data type Constant — — Constant, From

file
Defines is the effective area is constant or loaded
from a file
Effective area 50 um2 — [1e-100, 1e100]
Defines value of the effective area
Effective area file name Effective — — —

Area.dat
Specifies the effective area filename
n2 data type Constant — — Constant, From

file
Defines if the nonlinear index is constant or
loaded from a file
696
ER-YB CODOPED FIBER

value range
n2 2.6e-020 m^2/W — [0,1e100]
Nonlinear index value
n2 file name n2.dat — — —
Specifies the nonlinear index area filename
Include Brillouin scattering False — — True, False
Determines if the Brillouin scattering effect will be

taken into account
Brillouin gain data type Constant — — Constant, From

file
Defines if the Brillouin gain is constant or loaded
from a file
Brillouin gain constant 4.6e-011 m/W — Calculate,

From file
Brillouin gain file name Brillouin.dat — — —
Brillouin linewidth 31.7 MHz — [1e-100, 1e100]
Frequency shift 11 GHz — [1e-100, 1e100]
Include Raman scattering False — — True, False
Determines if the Raman scattering effect will be

taken into account
Raman gain data type Raman gain — — Raman gain,

Raman gain
Defines Raman gain type. If Raman gain efficiency
efficiency is selected then the value in the raman
gain file should be Raman gain / Effective area.
Otherwise the file contain the normalized Raman
gain that will be multiplied by the Raman gain
peak
Raman gain peak 1e-013 — — [0, 1e100]
Raman gain peak that will multiply the normalized

Raman gain
Raman gain reference pump 1000 nm — [0, 1e100]
Value used in the Raman gain calculation
Raman gain file name Raman — — —

Gain.dat
Specifies the normalized Raman gain file name or
Raman efficiency file name
697
ER-YB CODOPED FIBER

value range
Polarization factor 2 — — [1,2]
Actual value depends on relative polarization of

the fields. The value is 1 if the fields have aligned
polarizations, and two if they have polarization
scrambled
Numerical

value range
Relative error 0.0001 — — [1e-100,1]
Specifies maximum acceptable difference

between two consecutive iterations to complete
the iteration process
Maximum number of iterations 150 — — [1,1e8]
Specifies the maximum number of times for

iteration process
Longitudinal steps 100 — — [1,1e8]
Specifies the number of longitudinal steps in the

fiber
Radial steps 50 — —

integration
Numerical solver False — — True, False
Defines whether the numerical solver is used

instead of analytical solutions for the rate
equations.
Discretize sampled signal True — — True, False

discretization for sampled signals or not
Frequency resolution 100 GHz Hz, GHz, THz [1e9,1e12]

Frequency spacing that will discretize the
sampled signal
Step tolerance 0.001 — — [1e-100, 1e100]
Used in the Brillouin calculation and defines

tolerance in the definition of length step
698
ER-YB CODOPED FIBER
Graphs

value range
Minimum value -50 dBm — [1e-100, 1e100]
Pump reference wavelength 1400 nm — [100, 1900]
Simulation

value range
Defines whether the component is enabled or not
Longitudinal monitor True — — True, False
Number of monitors 10 — — [1,1000]
Noise

value range
Noise bins space 125 THz Hz, GHz, THz, [1,1000]

nm
Noise threshold -100 dB — ]-INF, 0[
Noise dynamic 3 dB — [0, +INF[
699
ER-YB CODOPED FIBER

value range
bins
Determines if generated noise bins are
incorporated into signal
Random numbers

value range
Generate random seed True — — True, False
Determines if the seed is automatically defined

and unique
Random seed index 0 — — [0, 4999]
700
ER-YB CODOPED FIBER
Er-Yb Codoped Fiber Propagation and Rate Equations
In order to give flexibility to change the waveguide parameters of the Er3+ - Yb3+
codoped fiber for large signal and high pump power applications the extended model
for Er3+ - Yb3+ codoped fiber presented in [1] is used.
Figure 1 Energy levels for Er3+ - Yb3+ system
3+
Population densities of the 4 and 4 levels of Er have been included
11 ⁄ 2 9⁄2
together with the upconversion from the pump level 4 . The model takes into
11 ⁄ 2
account propagation of the forward and backward amplified spontaneous powers for
both the pump and the signal wavelength range.
Depending on the pump wavelength, pump energy can be absorbed by both the Er
3+ 2
ions in the 4 and by the Yb ions in the F7 ⁄ 2 ground levels. Ytterbium ions
152 ⁄ 2
excited to the F5 ⁄ 2 level transfer their energy to neighboring Erbium ions in the
4 ground level, exciting them to the 4 pump level from where they rapidly
15 ⁄ 2 11 ⁄ 2
relax to the metastable 4 level. The backtransfer from the Er pump level to the
13 ⁄ 2
Yb ground level is neglected.
701
ER-YB CODOPED FIBER
3+
Let us denote the 4 ,4 ,4 and the 4 levels of Er as levels 1, 2,
2 15 ⁄ 2 13 ⁄ 2 2 11 ⁄ 2 9
3+⁄ 2
3, and 4, and the F7 ⁄ 2 and the F5 ⁄ 2 levels of Yb as levels 5 and 6, and their
population densities as N1, N2, N3, N4, N5, and N6, respectively. The uniform
upconversion mechanisms from the erbium metastable and pump levels are modeled
by quadratic terms in N2 and N3, with a concentration dependent upconversion
3+ 3+
coefficient. The pair induced energy transfer process from Yb to Er is described
by a cross relaxation coefficient [2]. The rate equations for the above atomic
populations are:
∂N N (1)
---------1 = – W 12 N 1 – W 13 N 1 + ------2- + W 21 N 2 + C up N 22 – C 14 N 1 N 4 + C up N 23 – C cr N 1 N 6
∂t τ Er
∂N 2 N 2
--------- = W 12 N 1 – W 21 N 2 – ------2- + A 32 N 3 – 2C up N 2 + 2C 14 N 1 N 4 (2)
∂t τ Er
∂N (3)
---------3 = W 13 N 1 – A 32 N 3 + A 43 N 4 – 2C up N 23 + C er N 1 N 6
∂t
∂N (4)
---------4 = 2C up N 22 – C 14 N 1 N 4 – A 43 N 4 + C up N 23
∂t
∂N N (5)
---------6 = W 56 N 5 – -------6- – W 65 N 6 – C er N 1 N 6
∂t τ Yb
In these equations, the W ij terms represent the stimulated transition rates between
the i and j levels, τ Er , τ Yb are the spontaneous emission lifetimes for 4 and
2 13 ⁄ 2
F5 ⁄ 2 levels, A 32 , A 43 are the nonradiative relaxation rates, and C up, C 14, C 16 are
the upconversion and cross-relaxation coefficients. The signal absorption, signal
emission, pump absorption, and pump emission rates, W 12, W 21, W 13, W 56, W 65 are
given by:
σ 12 ( v s ) 2 ∞ σ 12 ( v ) + _ 2 (6)
hv s ∫
W 12 ( r, z ) = ------------------- P s ( z ) E ( r, v s ) +
0
----------------- [ P ASE ( z, v ) + P ASE ( z, v ) ] ⋅ E ( r, v ) dv
hv
702
ER-YB CODOPED FIBER
σ 21 ( v s ) 2 ∞ σ 21 ( v ) + _ 2
∫
W 21 ( r, z ) = ------------------- P s ( z ) E ( r, v s ) + ----------------- [ P ASE ( z, v ) + P ASE ( z, v ) ] ⋅ E ( r, v ) dv (7)
hv s 0 hv
σ 13 ( v p ) 2 ∞ σ 13 ( v ) + _ 2
∫
W 13 ( r, z ) = -------------------- P p ( z ) E ( r, v p ) + ----------------- [ P ASE ( z, v ) + P ASE ( z, v ) ] ⋅ E ( r, v ) dv (8)
hv p 0 hv
σ 56 ( v p ) 2 ∞ σ 56 ( v ) + _ 2
∫
hv p 0 hv
σ 65 ( v p ) 2 ∞ σ 65 ( v ) + _ 2
∫
hv p 0 hv
3+
where σ 21 ( v ), σ 65 ( v ), σ 12 ( v ), σ 13 ( v ), and σ 56 ( v ) are the frequency dependent Er
3+
and Yb emission and absorption cross sections, respectively, h is the Planck’s
+ _
constant, P ASE ( z, v ) , P ASE ( z, v ) are the forward and backward propagating optical
powers at frequency v in a frequency interval Δv , and at a longitudinal fiber
coordinate z . They represent the forward and backward ASE powers due to the
4 -4 transition at 1400nm < λ < 1650nm , and also the ASE powers due to
132 ⁄ 2 2⁄2
15
the F5 ⁄ 2 - F7 ⁄ 2 transition at 850nm < λ < 1100nm . P s ( z ) is the signal power,
P p ( z ) the pump power, v s, v p are the signal and pump frequencies, and E ( r, v ) is
the field distribution of the LP 01 mode normalized according to
∞ 2
2π ∫0 E ( r, v ) r dr = 1 (11)
3+ 3+ t t
The total Er and Yb
ion density distributions N Er , N Yb are assumed to be
constant within the whole or a part of the fiber core, and along the fiber length (top hat
shaped with the diameter of 2b).
They satisfy the conservation equations
t (12)
N Er = N 1 ( r, z ) + N 2 ( r, z ) + N 3 ( r, z ) + N 4 ( r, z )
703
ER-YB CODOPED FIBER
t (13)
N Yb = N 5 ( r, z ) + N 6 ( r, z )
Propagation of the pump power along the active fiber is described by the following
differential equation:
∂P p ( z, v p ) b 2 (14)
------------------------- = 2π ∫ [ σ 56 ( v p )N 5 ( r, z ) + σ 13 ( v p )N 1 ( r, z ) – σ 65 ( v p )N 6 ( r, z ) ] E ( r, v p ) rdr + α ( v p ) P p ( z, v p )
∂z 0
3+ 3+
where b is the radius of Er - Yb codoped part of the fiber core. The signal power
and the ASE powers in both the pump and the signal wavelength range are amplified
according to:
∂P s ( z, v s ) (15)
------------------------ = [ g e ( z, v s ) – g a ( z, v s ) – α ( v s ) ]P s ( z, v s )
∂z
±
∂P ASE ( z, v ) ± (16)
- = ± 2hvΔvg e ( z, v s ) ± [ g e ( z, v ) – g a ( z, v ) – α ( v ) ] ( z, v s )P ASE ( z, v )
-----------------------------
∂z
where α ( v ) is the frequency dependent background loss of the active fiber and the
emission and absorption factors g e ( z, v ) , ( z, v ) are determined from the
corresponding emission and absorption cross sections as overlap integrals between
2
the LP 01 intensity distribution and the population densities of the F5 ⁄ 2 , 4 and
2 13 ⁄ 2
F7 ⁄ 2 , 4 levels defined in:
15 ⁄ 2
⎧ b 2
⎪ 2πσ ( v )
⎪ 65 ∫0 N6 ( r, z ) E ( r, v ) r dr…850nm < λ < 1100nm
g e ( z, v ) = ⎨ (17)
⎪ b 2
⎪ 2πσ 21 ( v )
⎩ ∫0 N2 ( r, z ) E ( r, v ) r dr…1400nm < λ < 1650nm
⎧ b 2
⎪ 2πσ ( v )
⎪ 56 ∫0 N5 ( r, z ) E ( r, v ) r dr…850nm < λ < 1100nm
(18)
g a ( z, v ) = ⎨
⎪ b 2
⎪ 2πσ 12 ( v )
⎩ ∫0 N1 ( r, z ) E ( r, v ) r dr…1400nm < λ < 1650nm
704
ER-YB CODOPED FIBER
These equations form a system of coupled differential equations that are solved by
numerical integration along the active fiber, using the Runge-Kutta method.
Population densities N 1 ( r, z ) , N 2 ( r, z ) , N 3 ( r, z ) , N 4 ( r, z ) , N 5 ( r, z ) , and
N 6 ( r, z ) are derived from the steady-state solutions to the rate equations [1] - [5]
together with conservation laws, equations [12] and [13] are substituted. Due to
quadratic terms appearing in the rate equations, it is not possible to eliminate
densities N 1 ( r, z ) , N 2 ( r, z ) , N 5 ( r, z ) , and N 6 ( r, z ) analytically, and so the
numerical approach must be used. It was assumed that C 14 = C up and that the
upconversion coefficient C up and the cross-relaxation coefficient C cr are linearly
1 1
increasing functions of N Er and N Yb respectively.
– 24 – 49 1 25 (19)
C up = 3.5 × 10 + 2.41 × 10 ( N Er – 4.4 × 10 )
– 22 – 49 1 25 (20)
C cr = 1.0 × 10 + 4.0 × 10 ( N Yb – 1.0 × 10 )
Loss x Wavelength file

The user can choose a wavelength dependent background loss loaded from a file. In
this case, the user has to specify the name of the file containing the losses in the Loss
vs. wavelength parameter. The format of this file must be similar to the example below:
λ [ nm ] α [ dB ⁄ km ]
1460 10
1461 10.5
1462 10.2
1463 10.1
1464 10.3
References
[1] M. Karasek, "Optimum Design of Er3+ - Yb3+ Codoped Fibers for Large-Signal High-Pump-
Power Applications", IEEE Journal of Quantum Electronics, vol. 33, pp 1699-1705, 1997.
[2] M. Federighi, F. Di Pasquale, "The Effect of Pair-induced Energy Transfer on the Performance
of Silica Waveguide Amplifiers with High Er3+-Yb3+ Concentrations", IEEE Photon. Technol.
Lett., vol 7, pp. 303-305, 1995.
705
ER-YB CODOPED FIBER
Notes:
706
ER-YB CODOPED FIBER DYNAMIC
Er-Yb Codoped Fiber Dynamic
This component simulates a bidirectional Erbium-Ytterbium codoped fiber

considering the simulation of dynamic effects. The component solves the rate and
propagation equations numerically.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Length 1 m — [0,1000000]
Doped fiber length
Core radius 2 μm — [1,1e100]
Doped fiber core radius
Doping radius 2 μm — [1,1e100]
Doped radius
Specifies numerical aperture of fiber
707
Doping

value range
Er ion density 5.14e+025 m-3 — [1,1e100]
Yb ion density 6.2e+026 m-3 — [1,1e100]
Er metastable lifetime 10 ms — [1e-100, 1e100]
Yb metastable lifetime 1.5 ms — [1e-100, 1e100]
Calculate upconversion True — — True, False
Component calculates C16 and C14 based on ion

density
C14 5.2834e-024 — m-3/s [1e-100, 1e100]
C16 3.44e-022 — m-3/s [1e-100, 1e100]
Cup 5.2834e-024 — m-3/s [1e-100, 1e100]

level 2
A32 1000000000 — 1/s [1,1e100]
A43 1000000000 — 1/s [1,1e100]
Cross-sections

value range

OptiAmplifier file

cross sections
708

value range
Specifies Ytterbium cross-section file name
Enhanced

value range
Loss data type Constant Constant,
FromFile
Signal loss 0.10 dB/m — [0,1e100]
Fiber loss at signal range
Pump loss 0.15 dB/m — [0,1e100]
Fiber loss at pump range
Loss vs. wavelength Loss.dat — — —
File containing the background loss
Double-clad data type Calculate — — Calculate, Load

from file
loaded
2

n.dat
Numerical

value range
Relative error 0.0001 — — [1e-100,1]
Specifies maximum acceptable difference

between two consecutive iterations to complete
the iteration process
709

value range
Maximum number of iterations 150 — — [1,1e8]
Specifies the maximum number of times for

iteration process
Longitudinal steps 100 — — [1,1e8]
Specifies the number of longitudinal steps in the

fiber
Radial steps 50 — —

integration
Reference time 0.5 / (Bit rate) s — [1,1e10]
Specifies the instant of time used to take the

powers in the fiber to solve the steady-state
regime
Graphs

value range
Minimum value -50 — dBm ]1e-100, 1e100[
Simulation

value range
Longitudinal monitor True — — True, False
Number of monitors 10 — — [1,1000]
710
Noise

value range
Noise bins space 125 THz Hz, GHz, THz, [1,1000]

nm

bins
Random numbers

value range
Generate random seed True — — True, False
Determines if the seed is automatically defined

and unique
Random seed index 0 — — [0, 4999]
711
Er-Yb Codoped Fiber Propagation and Rate Equations
In order to give flexibility to change the waveguide parameters of the Er3+ - Yb3+
codoped fiber for large signal and high pump power applications the extended model
for Er3+ - Yb3+ codoped fiber presented in [1] is used.
Figure 1 Energy levels for Er3+ - Yb3+ system
3+
Population densities of the 4 and 4 levels of Er have been included
11 ⁄ 2 9⁄2
together with the upconversion from the pump level 4 . The model takes into
11 ⁄ 2
account propagation of the forward and backward amplified spontaneous powers for
both the pump and the signal wavelength range.
Depending on the pump wavelength, pump energy can be absorbed by both the Er
3+ 2
ions in the 4 and by the Yb ions in the F7 ⁄ 2 ground levels. Ytterbium ions
152 ⁄ 2
excited to the F5 ⁄ 2 level transfer their energy to neighboring Erbium ions in the
4 ground level, exciting them to the 4 pump level from where they rapidly
15 ⁄ 2 11 ⁄ 2
relax to the metastable 4 level. The backtransfer from the Er pump level to the
13 ⁄ 2
Yb ground level is neglected.
712
3+
Let us denote the 4 ,4 ,4 and the 4 levels of Er as levels 1, 2,
2 15 ⁄ 2 13 ⁄ 2 2 11 ⁄ 2 9
3+⁄ 2
3, and 4, and the F7 ⁄ 2 and the F5 ⁄ 2 levels of Yb as levels 5 and 6, and their
population densities as N1, N2, N3, N4, N5, and N6, respectively. The uniform
upconversion mechanisms from the erbium metastable and pump levels are modeled
by quadratic terms in N2 and N3, with a concentration dependent upconversion
3+ 3+
coefficient. The pair induced energy transfer process from Yb to Er is described
by a cross relaxation coefficient [2]. The rate equations for the above atomic
populations are:
∂N N (1)
---------1 = – W 12 N 1 – W 13 N 1 + ------2- + W 21 N 2 + C up N 22 – C 14 N 1 N 4 + C up N 23 – C cr N 1 N 6
∂t τ Er
∂N 2 N 2
--------- = W 12 N 1 – W 21 N 2 – ------2- + A 32 N 3 – 2C up N 2 + 2C 14 N 1 N 4 (2)
∂t τ Er
∂N (3)
---------3 = W 13 N 1 – A 32 N 3 + A 43 N 4 – 2C up N 23 + C er N 1 N 6
∂t
∂N (4)
---------4 = 2C up N 22 – C 14 N 1 N 4 – A 43 N 4 + C up N 23
∂t
∂N N (5)
---------6 = W 56 N 5 – -------6- – W 65 N 6 – C er N 1 N 6
∂t τ Yb
In these equations, the W ij terms represent the stimulated transition rates between
the i and j levels, τ Er , τ Yb are the spontaneous emission lifetimes for 4 and
2 13 ⁄ 2
F5 ⁄ 2 levels, A 32 , A 43 are the nonradiative relaxation rates, and C up, C 14, C 16 are
the upconversion and cross-relaxation coefficients. The signal absorption, signal
emission, pump absorption, and pump emission rates, W 12, W 21, W 13, W 56, W 65 are
given by:
σ 12 ( v s ) 2 ∞ σ 12 ( v ) + _ 2 (6)
hv s ∫
W 12 ( r, z ) = ------------------- P s ( z ) E ( r, v s ) +
0
----------------- [ P ASE ( z, v ) + P ASE ( z, v ) ] ⋅ E ( r, v ) dv
hv
713
σ 21 ( v s ) 2 ∞ σ 21 ( v ) + _ 2
∫
W 21 ( r, z ) = ------------------- P s ( z ) E ( r, v s ) + ----------------- [ P ASE ( z, v ) + P ASE ( z, v ) ] ⋅ E ( r, v ) dv (7)
hv s 0 hv
σ 13 ( v p ) 2 ∞ σ 13 ( v ) + _ 2
∫
hv p 0 hv
σ 56 ( v p ) 2 ∞ σ 56 ( v ) + _ 2
∫
hv p 0 hv
σ 65 ( v p ) 2 ∞ σ 65 ( v ) + _ 2
∫
hv p 0 hv
3+
where σ 21 ( v ), σ 65 ( v ), σ 12 ( v ), σ 13 ( v ), and σ 56 ( v ) are the frequency dependent Er
3+
and Yb emission and absorption cross sections, respectively, h is the Planck’s
+ _
constant, P ASE ( z, v ) , P ASE ( z, v ) are the forward and backward propagating optical
powers at frequency v in a frequency interval Δv , and at a longitudinal fiber
coordinate z . They represent the forward and backward ASE powers due to the
4 -4 transition at 1400nm < λ < 1650nm , and also the ASE powers due to
132 ⁄ 2 2⁄2
15
the F5 ⁄ 2 - F7 ⁄ 2 transition at 850nm < λ < 1100nm . P s ( z ) is the signal power,
P p ( z ) the pump power, v s, v p are the signal and pump frequencies, and E ( r, v ) is
the field distribution of the LP 01 mode normalized according to
∞ 2
2π ∫0 E ( r, v ) r dr = 1 (11)
3+ 3+ t t
The total Er and Yb
ion density distributions N Er , N Yb are assumed to be
constant within the whole or a part of the fiber core, and along the fiber length (top hat
shaped with the diameter of 2b).
They satisfy the conservation equations
t (12)
N Er = N 1 ( r, z ) + N 2 ( r, z ) + N 3 ( r, z ) + N 4 ( r, z )
714
t (13)
N Yb = N 5 ( r, z ) + N 6 ( r, z )
Propagation of the pump power along the active fiber is described by the following
differential equation:
∂P p ( z, v p ) b 2 (14)
------------------------- = 2π ∫ [ σ 56 ( v p )N 5 ( r, z ) + σ 13 ( v p )N 1 ( r, z ) – σ 65 ( v p )N 6 ( r, z ) ] E ( r, v p ) rdr + α ( v p ) P p ( z, v p )
∂z 0
3+ 3+
where b is the radius of Er - Yb codoped part of the fiber core. The signal power
and the ASE powers in both the pump and the signal wavelength range are amplified
according to:
∂P s ( z, v s ) (15)
------------------------ = [ g e ( z, v s ) – g a ( z, v s ) – α ( v s ) ]P s ( z, v s )
∂z
±
∂P ASE ( z, v ) ± (16)
- = ± 2hvΔvg e ( z, v s ) ± [ g e ( z, v ) – g a ( z, v ) – α ( v ) ] ( z, v s )P ASE ( z, v )
-----------------------------
∂z
where α ( v ) is the frequency dependent background loss of the active fiber and the
emission and absorption factors g e ( z, v ) , ( z, v ) are determined from the
corresponding emission and absorption cross sections as overlap integrals between
2
the LP 01 intensity distribution and the population densities of the F5 ⁄ 2 , 4 and
2 13 ⁄ 2
F7 ⁄ 2 , 4 levels defined in:
15 ⁄ 2
⎧ b 2
⎪ 2πσ ( v )
⎪ 65 ∫0 N6 ( r, z ) E ( r, v ) r dr…850nm < λ < 1100nm
g e ( z, v ) = ⎨ (17)
⎪ b 2
⎪ 2πσ 21 ( v )
⎩ ∫0 N2 ( r, z ) E ( r, v ) r dr…1400nm < λ < 1650nm
⎧ b 2
⎪ 2πσ ( v )
⎪ 56 ∫0 N5 ( r, z ) E ( r, v ) r dr…850nm < λ < 1100nm
(18)
g a ( z, v ) = ⎨
⎪ b 2
⎪ 2πσ 12 ( v )
⎩ ∫0 N1 ( r, z ) E ( r, v ) r dr…1400nm < λ < 1650nm
715
These equations form a system of coupled differential equations that are solved by
numerical integration along the active fiber, using the Runge-Kutta method.
Population densities N 1 ( r, z ) , N 2 ( r, z ) , N 3 ( r, z ) , N 4 ( r, z ) , N 5 ( r, z ) , and
N 6 ( r, z ) are derived from the steady-state solutions to the rate equations [1] - [5]
together with conservation laws, equations [12] and [13] are substituted. Due to
quadratic terms appearing in the rate equations, it is not possible to eliminate
densities N 1 ( r, z ) , N 2 ( r, z ) , N 5 ( r, z ) , and N 6 ( r, z ) analytically, and so the
numerical approach must be used. It was assumed that C 14 = C up and that the
upconversion coefficient C up and the cross-relaxation coefficient C cr are linearly
1 1
increasing functions of N Er and N Yb respectively.
– 24 – 49 1 25 (19)
C up = 3.5 × 10 + 2.41 × 10 ( N Er – 4.4 × 10 )
– 22 – 49 1 25 (20)
C cr = 1.0 × 10 + 4.0 × 10 ( N Yb – 1.0 × 10 )
Loss x Wavelength file

The user can choose a wavelength dependent background loss loaded from a file. In
this case, the user has to specify the name of the file containing the losses in the Loss
vs. wavelength parameter. The format of this file must be similar to the example below:
λ [ nm ] α [ dB ⁄ km ]
1460 10
1461 10.5
1462 10.2
1463 10.1
1464 10.3
References
[1] M. Karasek, "Optimum Design of Er3+ - Yb3+ Codoped Fibers for Large-Signal High-Pump-
Power Applications", IEEE Journal of Quantum Electronics, vol. 33, pp 1699-1705, 1997.
[2] M. Federighi, F. Di Pasquale, "The Effect of Pair-induced Energy Transfer on the Performance
of Silica Waveguide Amplifiers with High Er3+-Yb3+ Concentrations", IEEE Photon. Technol.
Lett., vol 7, pp. 303-305, 1995.
716
ER-YB CODOPED WAVEGUIDE
Er-Yb Codoped Waveguide
This component simulates an Er-Yb codoped waveguide amplifier based on basic parameters.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Waveguide length 0.03 — m ]0,+INF[
Signal background loss 0 — db/m [0,+INF[
Represents the intrinsic material losses, given by

the losses at 1300nm.
Pump background loss 0 db/m [0,+INF[
Represents the intrinsic material losses, given by

the losses at 1300nm.
Refractive index data file Index.rid — — —
Same as OptiBPM’s refractive index file. Contains

a uniform refractive index distribution and follows
the format defined in OptiBPM. Also contains the
number of points used to discretize the domain.
Er ion density distribution file Erdensity.dat — — —
Same as Refractive index data file, contains the

Erbium ion density distribution. File must have the
same discretization as the Refractive index data
file, and must be filled with ones and zeros.
717

value range
Yb ion density distribution file Ybdensity.dat — — —
Same as Er ion density distribution file, contains

the Ytterbium ion density distribution. File must
have the same discretization as the Refractive
index data file, and must be filled with ones and
zeros.
Calculate mode in all wavelengths True — — True, False
Identifies if a mode must be calculated for all the

signal wavelengths. If selected, the mode solver is
activated, using the refractive index distribution
defined in a file for all the signal wavelengths.
Wavelength to calculate the mode 1550 nm [1490, 3000]
If Calculate mode in all wavelength is not

selected, a signal mode, calculated at the defined
wavelength, is shared for all signals. This
selections makes the calculation faster after the
part of the execution time is spent calculating the
modes.
Recalculate modes every running False — — False, True
Identifies if all the modes, in the pump and signal

wavelengths, must be recalculated. It is
suggested that this option not be selected, due to
the excessive time spent recalculating the modes.
Polarization for signal mode calculation TE — — TE, TM
Polarization used to calculate the signal modes.
Number of modes at pump wavelength 2 — — [1, 10]
Number of modes that are calculated at the pump

wavelength. Read-only value. To change it, edit
the “Power ratio for each pump mode” option.
Polarization for pump mode calculation TE — — TE, TM

Polarization used to calculate the pump’s modes.
Power ratio for each pump mode 0.5 0.5 — — any string with
numbers
Power ratio for each pump mode. Number of
elements in the list must be equal to the number
of modes at the pump wavelength, and the sum of
the ratios must be 1.
Doping

value range
Er ion density 1e+025 m-3 [0, +INF[
718

value range
Er metastable lifetime 11 ms ]0, +INF[
Er signal excess loss 0 dB/m [0, +INF[

Represents the losses, due to the introduction of
Erbium in the material by diffusion or by another
implantation method, at the signal wavelength.
Backscattering is a typical effect observed in this
case. Note: This isn’t a commonly observed
absorption loss in the 1550nm wavelength range.
Er pump excess loss 0 dB/m [0, +INF[

Erbium in the material by diffusion or by another
implantation method, at the pump wavelength.
Backscattering is a typical effect observed in this
case. Note: This isn’t a commonly observed
absorption loss at 980nm.
Yb ion density 1e+025 m-3 [0, +INF[
Yb metastable lifetime 11 ms ]0, +INF[
Yb signal excess loss 0 dB/m [0, +INF[

Ytterbium in the material by diffusion or by
another implantation method, at the signal
wavelength. Backscattering is a typical effect
observed in this case.
Yb pump excess loss 0 dB/m [0, +INF[

Ytterbium in the material by diffusion or by
another implantation method, at the pump
wavelength. Backscattering is a typical effect
observed in this case.
Cross-sections

value range
EDFA design format False — — True, False
Determines if format of cross-section file uses

EDFA file format

cross sections
719

value range
ESA cross section value at 1480 5.53-026 m2 ]0, +INF[

Specifies Erbium cross-section file name. File
contains erbium absorption and emission cross
sections.

Specifies Ytterbium cross-section file name. File
contains the ytterbium absorption and emission
cross sections.
Enhanced

value range
Number of ASE models 2 — — [1, 1e+008]
Quantity of excited modes by the ASE. Normally

this number is the total number of modes (TE and
TM) present in the waveguide at the signal
wavelength.
A32 1000000000 — 1/s ]0, +INF[
A43 1000000000 — 1/s ]0, +INF[
Fraction of ion in pair 0 — — [0, 1]
Fraction of ion in pair due to the pair-induced

quenching PIQ phenomenon.
Fast nonradiative upconversion lifetime 5e-006 s ]0, +INF[
Calculate upconversion effects True — — True, False
Define whether the upconversion effects are

calculated or just approximated.
Cup 1e-022 — m3/s ]0, +INF[

level 2
C3 1e-022 — m3/s ]0, +INF[

level 3
C14 7e-023 — m3/s ]0, +INF[
720

value range
C16 7e-023 — m3/s ]0, +INF[
Numerical

value range
Relative error 5e-007 — — ]0, 1]
Specifies maximum acceptable error in solving

the propagation equations
Longitudinal steps 130 — — [1,1e+008[
Specifies the number of divisions necessary to

discretize the waveguide length
Graphs

value range
Calculate graphs True — — True, False
Longitudinal power graphs True — — True, False
Normalized population density graphs True — — True, False
Simulation

value range
Noise

value range
721

value range
Noise bins space 125 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, [1,1000[
nm


bins
The Er-Yr codoped waveguide amplifier solves the propagation of electromagnetic
fields on Erbium doped, or on Erbium doped and Ytterbium co-doped waveguides.
The pump wavelength must be in the region of 980 nm or 1480 nm, and can be co-
and counter-propagating. Multiple co- and counter-propagating input signals may be
considered in different wavelengths (DWDM).
In order to run this component, the following data must be provided: the Erbium and
Ytterbium doping profiles, with their respective cross sections (parameters located in
the cross-sections tab); the pump wavelength ( λ p ) with the co- and counter-
1 WDM
propagant pump powers ( P p+, P p _ ); and the WDM signal wavelengths ( λ s …λ s )
with its respective powers. Notice that a signal is characterized by its wavelength, and
i i i
may have different co and counter-propagant powers ( λ s → P s+ and P s- ).
The main characteristics of this component are:

• co- and counter-propagant pump at 980nm region or 1480nm region;
• multiple signals (co- and counter-propagant) at different wavelengths (DWDM);
• multimode operation for the pump and signals;
• co- and counter-propagant ASE noise due to Erbium concentration;
• homogeneous upconversion (HUC) 1 from 4 e4 levels;
13 ⁄ 2 11 ⁄ 2
• pair-induced quenching - PIQ;
• nine energy levels considered.
Model implementation
This model is based on the solution of the propagation equations, using, directly, the
solutions of the involved electromagnetic fields and the exact Erbium and Ytterbium
transversal distributions.
722
Propagation equations
The propagation equations describe the power evolution of the propagating
electromagnetic fields in the optical amplifier and are described as:
dP p +_ ( z ) (1)
----------------------- = − −α P
+ γ p ( z )P p+_ ( z ) + p p+_ ( z )
dz
i i
dP s+_ ( z, v s ) i i i i i i (2)
------------------------------- = −
+ [γ 21 ( z, v s ) – γ 12 ( z, v s )] P s ( z, v s ) −
+ α p P s ( z, v s ), i = 1, …, WDM
dz
j j
dP ASE +_ ( z, v j ) = ± [ γ ( z, v j ) – γ ( z, v j ) ]P ASE +_ ( z, v s ) +
21 12 (3)
j
± mhv j Δv j γ ( z, v j ) ± α s P ASE +_ ( z, v s ), j = 1, …, M
21
This set of equations forms a system of 2+2WDM+2M coupled ones, and must be
solved with the following boundary conditions:
(4)
P p+ ( 0 ) = P p0, P p _ ( L ) = P pL
i i i i i i (5)
P s+ ( 0, v ) = P ( v ) and P s _ ( L, v ) = P ( v ), i = 1, …WDM
s s0 s s sL s
(6)
P ASE + ( 0, v s ) = P ASE _ ( L, v j ) = 0, j = 1, …, M
where
L is the device length

i j
P s+_ , P p _ , e , and P ASE +_ are the signals, pumps and ASE (Amplified
+
Spontaneous Emission) longitudinal power distributions in the direction of
propagation z , with the signs (+) and (-) meaning, respectively, the co- and counter
propagant direction;
α s and α p are the attenuation coefficients in the wavelengths for signal and pumping,
respectively.
i i
The index i in P s+_ refers to the i -th signal, centered in the frequency v s , of a total
number of WDM signals that can propagate simultaneously within the amplifier, as in
systems with Dense Wavelength Division Multiplex - DWDM. The ASE± spectrum is
discretized in M intervals (slots) with spectral width Δv j , centered in the frequencies
j
v j , in such a way, that P ASE +_ (see Equation 3) refers to the j -th spectral
723
component of ASE±. Also in Equation 3, we have m as the total number of modes

present in the waveguide, and h is the Planck constant. In Equation 1 - Equation 3,
the gain coefficients γ p , γ 12 , and γ 21 are given by:
γp ( z ) = ∫ ∫ Ψp ( x, y ) [ σa13 ( N1 ( x, y, z ) + 2N0p ( x, y, z ) + N1p ( x, y, z ) ) (7)a

A
– σ e31 N 3 ( x, y, z ) + σ a56 N 5 ( x, y, z ) – σ e65 N 6 ( x, y, z ) ]dxdy
γp ( z ) = ∫ ∫ Ψp ( x, y ) [ σa13 ( N1 ( x, y, z ) + 2N0p ( x, y, z ) + N1p ( x, y, z ) ) + (7)b

A
– σ e31 ( N 2 ( x, y, z ) + N 3 ( x, y, z ) + 2N 0p ( x, y, z ) + N 1p ( x, y, z ) ) ]dxdy
γ 12 ( z, v i ) = ∫ ∫ Ψ s ( x, y )σa12 ( N1 ( x, y, z ) + 2N0p ( x, y, z ) + N1p ( x, y, z ) ) dx dy (8)

A
γ 21 ( z, v i ) = ∫ ∫ Ψs ( x, y )σe21 ( N2 ( x, y, z ) + 2N2p ( x, y, z ) + N1p ( x, y, z ) ) dx dy (9)
where N 1 , N 2 , and N 3 , are the populations of Erbium ions of the ground ( 4 ),

15 ⁄ 2
meta-stable( 4 ) and pump levels ( 4 if pumped in 1480nm, or 4 if
13 ⁄ 2 13 ⁄ 2 11 ⁄ 22
pumped in 980nm). N 5 and N 6 are the populations of Ytterbium ions of levels F7 ⁄ 2
2
and F5 ⁄ 2 .
The populations of three possible states of an excited pair exist:
N 0p - no ion excited
N 1p - one ion excited
N 2p - two ions excited
due to the phenomenon of pair-induced quenching - PIQ. σ a13 , σ e31 , σ a12 , and
σ e21 are the absorption and emission cross sections of the Erbium doped material,
at the signal (12 and 21) and pump (13 and 31) wavelengths. The parameters σ a56
and σ e65 are the absorption and emission cross sections of the Ytterbium doped/co-
doped material at the pump wavelength in the region of 980nm. When the amplifier is
pumped at 980nm, the level 3 corresponds to the main level 4 of the Stark Split.
11 ⁄ 2
However, when the amplifier is pumped in the 1480nm region, the pump level is
confounded with the main level 4 . Thus, according to Equation 7a or
13 ⁄ 2
724
Equation 7b, the coefficient of gain γ p is taken when the amplifier is pumped at
980nm or 1480nm, respectively. In Equation 7 through to Equation 9, Ψ s ( x, y ) and
Ψ p ( x, y ) are the normalized intensity profiles obtained from the modal analysis of the
waveguide (see the section on "Multimode operation"), in such a way that the intensity
distributions of the signal, pump and ASE± can be written as:
(10)
I s ( x, y, z ) = Ψ s ( x, y )P s ( z )
(11)
I p ( x, y, z ) = Ψ p ( x, y )P p ( z )
j j (12)
I ASE +_ ( x, y, z ) = Ψ s ( x, y )P ASE +_ ( z )
where it should be noted that the same normalized intensity profile has been used for
ASE and signal, because the difference between the central wavelengths of the M
intervals used to discretize the ASE and the signal wavelength is relatively small and
j i
may be considered Ψ ASE ≈ Ψ s . The correlation between the field distribution of the
fundamental mode at 1530nm and 1650nm is higher than 95% for a typical optical
fiber/waveguide.
Rate equations
The populations N 1 → N 6 , and also the population of the three possible states of an
excited pair ( N 0p , N 1p , and N 2p ) in Equation 7 through to Equation 9, are the
solutions of the rate equations for the energetic systems of Figure 1 or Figure 2, when
it is considered the pumping in 980nm or 1480nm, respectively.
725
Figure 1 Coupled Er+3/Yb+3 system, pumped in 980nm region
Note: There are nine relevant energy levels considered (four levels due to the
presence of the Erbium ions, two due to the Ytterbium dopant, and three due to
the formation of Erbium paired-induced ions). R ij 's and W ij 's are the pump and
signal stimulated rates,and the A ij 's are the nonradioactive rate from level i to j.
A21 is the fluorescent rate. Cup and C3 are the homogeneous upconversion
coefficients. C14 and C16 are the cross-relaxation coefficients. Figure 1 also
shows the population densities of the three possible states of an excited pair
( N 0p (no ions excited), N 1p (one ion excited), and N 2p (two ions excited), due
to the PIQ effect.
In Figure 1, for the 980nm-pumping region, we have representations of the 4 ,

15 ⁄ 2
4 ,4 , and 4 energy levels (due to the Erbium dopant), with
13 ⁄ 2 11 ⁄ 2 9⁄2 2
corresponding population densities of N i ( i = 1, 4 ) , respectively. The F7 ⁄ 2 and
2
F5 ⁄ 2 energy levels are also shown, with population densities N i ( i = 5, 6 ) , due to the
Ytterbium dopant. The populations of the three possible states of an excited ion ( N 0p ,
726
N 1p , and N 2p ) are also shown. τ 21p is the fast nonradiative upconversion lifetime,
and can be calculated as:
3
d pair (13)
τ 21p = -------------
C up
with d pair being the distance between two ions in a pair. Experimental
measurements report typical value of the order of few microseconds. We know that
R ij ‘s are pump rates (stimulated absorption and emission) between levels i → j , and
W ij 's are the absorption and emission stimulated rates at the signals wavelength. The
non-radiative rates between levels i → j are represented by A ij . A21 is the
fluorescence rate. Cup and C3 are the homogeneous upconversion coefficients from
levels 2 and 3. The homogeneous upconversion is modeled through the quadratic
terms in N2 and N3 in the rate equations. These terms are dependent on the Erbium
concentration, and can be calculated using reference [1]. C14 and C16 are the cross-
relaxation coefficients between levels 4 → 1 and 6 → 1 . The cross-relaxation
between levels 6 → 1 is the main energy transfer mechanism between the Ytterbium
and Erbium ions, and the approached value of the coefficient can be obtained from
[1]. Due to the short lifetime of level 3 ( 1 ⁄ A 32 ), the back energy transfer process (from
Erbium to Ytterbium ions) is not being considered in this model. However, the fact that
all Erbium ions are surrounded by Ytterbium ions is taken into account. Special
attention should be paid to the Ytterbium concentration in relation to the Erbium
concentration. Geometrically, it is observed that the Ytterbium concentration must be
in the interval 4N Er < N Yb < 20N Er . If the Ytterbium concentration ( N Yb ) is less than
4N Er , the formation of clusters may occur and the energy transference form
+3 +3
Ytterbium ions ( Yb ) to the Erbium ones ( Er ) may not be so efficient. On the other
hand, if the Ytterbium concentration is too high, Ytterbium clusters may form, which
means there won't be any energy transference to the Erbium ions, the pump energy
will be wasted, and consequently, the efficiency of the amplifier device will be
reduced. It is believed that the homogeneous upconversion that occurs from level 3
4
doesn't reach level F7 ⁄ 2 and relaxes very quickly to level 4 ( 4 ).
9⁄2
727
The rate equations for the energy system of Figure 2 is given by:
∂N
---------1- = – W 12 N 1 – R 13 N 1 + R 31 N 3 + A 21 N 2 + W 21 N 2 +
∂t
2 2
+ C up N 2 – C 14 N 1 N 4 + C 3 N 3 – C 16 N 1 N 6
∂N
---------2- = W 12 N 1 – A 21 N 2 – W 21 N 2 + A 22 N 3 +
∂t
2
– 2C up N 2 + 2C 14 N 1 N 4
∂N 2
---------3- = R 13 N 1 – R 31 N 3 – A 32 N 3 + A 43 N 4 – 2C 3 N 3 + C 16 N 1 N 6
∂t
N 1 + N 2 + N 3 + N 4 = ( 1 – 2p )N Er
∂N (14)
---------5- = – R 56 N 5 + A 65 N 6 + R 65 N 6 + C 16 N 1 N 6
∂t
N 5 + N 6 = N Yb
∂N 0p
------------
- = – 2R 13 N 0p + A 21 N 1p – 2W 12 N 0p + W 21 N 1p
∂t
∂N 1p
------------
- = + 2R 13 N 0p – A 21 N 1p + 2 W 12 N 0p – W 21 N 1p + 2A 21 N 2p +
∂t
N 2p
– R13 N 1p – W12 N 1p + 2W 21 N 2p + -----------
τ 21p
N 0p + N 1p + N 2p = pN Er
The presence of the crossed terms N i N j for the solutions of the population
N i ( i = 1 → 6 ) , suggests the use of a special numeric treatment due to its non-linear
nature. However, the system for the paired-induced population is a linear one and can
be solved by a straightforward solution.
728
The solution for the paired-induced population when the amplifier is pumped at
980nm is given by:
N 0p = – ( N 1p – pN Er + 3A 21 N 1p τ 21p + N 1p R 13 τ 21p – 2A 21 pN Er τ 21p + N 1p τ 21p W 12 +
3N 1p τ 21p W 21 – 2pN Er τ 21p W 21 ) ⁄ ( 1 + 2A 21 τ 21p – 2R 13 τ 21p – 2τ 21p W 12 + 2τ 21p W 21 )

(15)
( 2N 0p ( R 13 + W 12 ) )
N 1p = -------------------------------------------------
( A 21 + W 21 )
N 2p = pN Er – N 0p – N 1p
Figure 2 shows the system of energy levels that are being taken into account for the
1480nm pumping wavelength, as well as the numbering of these levels. In this case
the pump energy level belongs to the main level 2 ( 4 ). However, due to the
13 ⁄ 2
presence of the nonradioactive transitions inside the level 4 , we have named
13 ⁄ 2
the pump level as "level 3". Note that it should not be confused with the level 4 ,
11 ⁄ 2
when the system is pumped at 980nm region.
Figure 2 Coupled Er+3/Yb+3 system, pumped at 1480nm region
729
Note: There are nine relevant energy levels considered (four levels due to the
presence of the Erbium ions, two due to the Ytterbium dopant, and three due to
the formation of Erbium paired-induced ions). R ij 's and W ij 's are the pump and
signal stimulated rates,and the A ij 's are the nonradioactive rate from level i to j.
A21 is the fluorescent rate. Cup and C3 are the homogeneous upconversion
coefficients. C14 and C16 are the cross-relaxation coefficients. Figure 2 also
shows the population densities of the three possible states of an excited pair
( N 0p (no ions excited), N 1p (one ion excited), and N 2p (two ions excited), due
to the PIQ effect.
When the system is pumped in the 1480nm region, levels 5 and 6 (Ytterbium levels)
are considered to be empty.
It is known that the effects of ESA cannot be disregarded when the pumping
wavelength is at 1480nm region, because the ESA cross section is approximately
10% of the peak value of the absorption cross section. The non-radioactive rate A 43
embodies the non-radioactive rates between levels 4 →4 and
9⁄2 11 ⁄ 2
4 →4 , in such a way that level 4 is not considered. In this case, the
11 ⁄ 2 13 ⁄ 2 11 ⁄ 2
system of rate equations is then described as:
∂N 2
---------1- = – W 12 N 1 – R 13 N 1 + R 31 N 3 + A 21 N 2 + W 21 N 2 + C up N 2 – C 14 N 1 N 4
∂t
∂N 2 ESA
---------2- = W 12 N 1 – A 21 N 2 – W 21 N 2 + A 32 N 3 – 2C up N 2 + 2C 14 N 1 N 4 – R 24 N 2
∂t
∂N
---------3- = R 13 N 1 – R 31 N 3 – A 32 N 3 + A 43 N 4
∂t
(16)
N 1 + N 2 + N 3 + N 4 = ( 1 – 2p )N Er
∂N 0p
------------
- = – 2R 13 N 0p + A 21 N 1p – 2W 12 N 0p + W 21 N 1p
∂t
∂N 1p
------------
- = + 2R 13 N 0p – R N 1p – A 21 N 1p + 2W 12 N 0p – W N 1p + 2A 21 N 2p +
∂t 31 21
N 2p
– R13 N 1p + 2R 31 N 2p– W 12 N 1p + 2W 21 N 2p + -----------
τ 21p
N 0p + N 1p + N 2p = pN Er
730
R ij and W ij are the simulated rates between levels i → j , at the pump ( R ) and
signals ( W ) wavelengths. A ij are the non-radioactive rates between levels i → j , and
A21 is the fluorescence rate. Cup and C14 are the homogeneous upconversion and the
ESA
cross-relaxation coefficients. R 24 is the ESA rate for level 2 and level 4. The
presence of the crossed terms N i N j in Equation 16 suggests the use of a numeric
solution for the populations N 1 → N 6 . However, the system for the paired-induced
population is a linear one and can be solved by a straightforward solution. The
solution for the paired-induced population when the amplifier is pumped at 1480nm is
given by:
N 0p = – ( pN Er ( 1 + 2A 21 τ 21p + 2R 31 τ 21p + 2τ 21p W 21 ) ) ⁄ ( – 1 – 2A 21 + 2R 13 τ 21p – 2R 31 τ 21p + 2τ 21p W 21 _
2 ( R 13 + W 12 ) ( 1 + 3A 21 τ 21p + R 13 τ 21p + 3R 31 τ 21p + τ 21p W 12 + 3τ 21p W 21 ) ⁄ ( A 21 + R 31 + W 21 ) )

(17)
( 2N 0p ( R 13 + W 12 ) )
N 1p = -----------------------------------------------
( A 21 + R 31 + W 21 )
N 2p = pN Er – N 0p – N 1p
In the stationary state, the solutions of the rate Equation 14 and Equation 16 are
obtained by nullifying the left side of these equations. As we have previously stated,
the systems of Equation 14 and Equation 16 are non-linear due to the presence of the
crossed terms N 1 N 4 and N 1 N 6 , and must be solved numerically. The stimulated
rates W ij and R ij are written as:
WDM i i
σ a12 ( v s ) i i i i
W 12 ( x, y, z, v s ) =
∑
---------------------- ( I s+ ( x, y, z, v s ) + I s _ ( x, y, z, v s ) ) +
hv s
i
i=1 (18)a
M j j
σ a12 ( v ) j j j j
+ ∑ ---------------------
hv
j
( I ASE+ ( x, y, z, v ) + I ASE _ ( x, y, z, v ) )
j=1
731
WDM i i
σ e21 ( v s ) i i i i
W 21 ( x, y, z, v s, v p ) =
∑
---------------------- ( I s+ ( x, y, z, v s ) + I s _ ( x, y, z, v s ) ) +
hv s
i
i=1
σ ep21 ( v p ) (18)b
+ ------------------------- ( I p+ ( x, y, z, v p ) + I p _ ( x, y, z, v p ) ) +
hv p
M j j
σ e21 ( v ) j j j j
+
∑ hv
j
- ( I ASE+ ( x, y, z, v ) + I ASE _ ( x, y, z, v ) )
--------------------
j=1
σ a13 ( v p ) (18)c
R 13 ( x, y, z, v p ) = ----------------------- ( I p+ ( x, y, z, v p ) + I p_ ( x, y, z, v p ) )
hv p
σ e31 ( v p ) (18)d
R 31 ( x, y, z, v p ) = ---------------------- ( I p+ ( x, y, z, v p ) + I p_ ( x, y, z, v p ) )
hv p
σ a56 ( v p )
(18)e
R 56 ( x, y, z, v p ) = ----------------------- ( I p+ ( x, y, z, v p ) + I p_ ( x, y, z, v p ) )
hv p
σ e65 ( v p )
(18)f
R 65 ( x, y, z, v p ) = ---------------------- ( I p+ ( x, y, z, v p ) + I p_ ( x, y, z, v p ) )
hv p
WDM i
ESA σ a24 ( v s ) i i i i
R 24 ( x, y, z, v s, v p ) =
∑ - ( I s+ ( x, y, z, v s ) + I s _ ( x, y, z, v s ) ) +
---------------------
hv s
i
i=1
σ a24 ( v p ) (18)g
+ ----------------------- ( I p+ ( x, y, z, v p ) + I p_ ( x, y, z, v p ) ) +
hv p
M j j
σ a24 ( v ) j j j j
+
∑ ---------------------
hv
j
( I ASE+ ( x, y, z, v ) + I ASE _ ( x, y, z, v ) )
j=1
ESA
where R 24 = σ ep21 = 0 when the pumping wavelength is in the 980nm region.
When the pumping wavelength is in the 1480nm region, we have σ ep21 = σ ep31 and
R 56 = R 65 = 0 . In Equation 18, it is presumed that the propagation of WDM signals
i
with frequencies v s and intensities I + ; pumping intensities I + ; and
s_ p_
ASE(Amplified Spontaneous Emission) with its spectrum discretized in M slots of Δv
732
width with intensity I . The sign "+" refer to the co-propagant waves, and the
ASE +_
sign "-" to the counter-propagant waves. The use of the homogeneous upconversion
and the cross-relaxation coefficients and consideration of the PIQ phenomenon in
Equation 14 and Equation 16 allows for the adequate modeling of Erbium doped and
Ytterbium co-doped waveguides. In general, for Erbium concentrations in the order of
100ppm ("1024 ions/m3) these effects are not important. However, the present
applications of optical amplifiers demand Erbium concentrations higher than
1000ppm, and, therefore, such effects cannot be ignored.
Multimode operation
The doped waveguide may present more than one mode at the pump or at the signal
frequencies/wavelength. This is common in integrated optics, in which the
discontinuity between the refraction index of the core and the cladding is raised on
purpose to provoke a high confinement of the pump field and, thus, obtain higher gain
[1].
We can presume that the device is externally excited by a beam with gaussian field
distribution Φ ( x, y, ω ) , with different spatial widths at the pump and signal
wavelengths. This supposition is experimentally sustained when a beam that it is
being coupled through a set of lenses excites an integrated optical device. Consider
that at the wavelengths λ s and λ p (signal and pump wavelength, respectively), N s
i
and N p modes with fields distributions φ ( x, y, λ s ⁄ p ) can propagate. The input beam
can then be described through a modal expansion of the modes present in the
waveguide, that is:
Nq
∑ c i φ ( x, y, λ s ⁄ p ) i
(19)
Φ ( x, y, λ s ⁄ p ) =
gauss
i=1
where N q can assume N s and N p , and c i represents the coupling coefficient

between the field of the gaussian input beam and the field of the corresponding i -th
mode. Then, the fraction of the total power allocated in each expansion mode for the
pumping and for the signal will be:
c pi c pi∗ c si c si∗
η pi = ----------------------------- η si = ----------------------------
Np Ns
(20)
∑ c pj c pj∗ ∑ c sj c sj∗
j=1 j=1
733
In this way, for multimode waveguides, the normalized intensity profile for the signals
and the pump can be calculated as:
Nq
i
∑ ηsi ⁄ pi Ψs ⁄ p
(21)
Ψs ⁄ p =
i=1
i i
where Ψ s ( x, y ) and Ψ p ( x, y ) are the normalized intensity profiles at the signals and
the pump wavelength, respectively.
The Refractive index file has the following default format:
UPI3DRI 3.0 file header
NPMX NPMY number of points in mesh X and mesh Y
Xmin Xmax Ymin Ymax minimum and maximum mesh points in X and Y
Z1 Number Z data point with coordinates (xmin, ymin)
Z2 Number Z data point with coordinates (xmin+dx, ymin)
ZN Number Z data point with coordaintes (xmax, ymax)
where N is NPMX x NPMY and dx = ( x max – x min ) ⁄ ( NPMX – 1 ) .
The sequence of points Z i is ordered in the following way:
734
Figure 1 Sequence of points
where the initial point is 0 and the final point is 29.
As an example, we have the following waveguide transversal profile:
Figure 2 Waveguide profile
735
It has the following refractive index file:
Figure 3 Refractive index
References
[1] M. Federighi, F. Di Pasquale, "The Effect of Pair-Induced Energy Transfer on the Performance
of Silica Waveguide Amplifiers with High Er+3/Yb+3 Concentration", IEEE Photonics
Technology Letters, Vol.7, No.3, pp.303-305, March 1995.
[2] S. Honkanen, S.I. Najafi e W.J. Wang, "Composite Rare-Earth Doped Glass Waveguides",
IEEE Electronics Letters, Vol.28, No.8, pp.746-747, abril, (1992).
736
PR DOPED FIBER
Pr Doped Fiber
This component simulates a bidirectional Pr-doped fiber. The component solves numerically the rate and
propagation equations for the steady-state case.
Ports

Parameters
Main
unit
Length - 5 m - [1e-100, 1e6]
Core radius - 1 μm - [0.1, 1e100]
Doping radius - 1 μm - [0.1, 1e100]
Specifies the Praseodymium doped

radius
Pr ion density - 1e+025 m-3 - [1, 1e100]
Specifies the Praseodymium doping

density in the fiber

fiber
737
PR DOPED FIBER
Coefficients

value range
Lifetime 3 110e-6 s - [1e-100, 1]
Radiative lifetime of energy level 3
Lifetime 4 350e-6 s - [1e-100, 1]

Radiative lifetime of energy level 4
Ar43 25.71 1/s - [1e-100, 1e100]
Transition rate from level 4 to level 3
Include cooperative upconversion False - - True, False
Defines if cooperative upconversion is taking into

account (G4-D2) - (G4-H5).
Upconversion coefficient 2e-22 m-3/s - [1e-100, 1e100]
Upconversion coefficient
Cross-sections
unit
File frequency unit - nm - - nm, m, Hz, THz
Determines the frequency unit of the

file with the cross-sections
Pr Cross-section file name - Praseodymium.da - - -

t
Specifies the thulium cross-section file
name
Transitions
unit
H4 -> G4 - 900 nm - 1200 nm - - -
Definition of the transition bandwidth

for H4 -> G4
H4 -> F4 - 1300 nm - 1500 nm - - -

for H4 -> F4
G4 -> H5 - 1200 nm - 1400 nm - - -

for G4 -> H5
738
PR DOPED FIBER
unit
G4 -> D2 - 1300 nm - 1500 nm - - -
Definitionof the transition bandwidth for

G4 -> D2
Enhanced
Name and description Default value Default Units Value range

unit
Background loss data type Constant - - Constant,
LoadFromFile
Determines if the loss is a constant
value or it will be loaded from a file.
Loss 0 db/km - [0, 1e100]
Specifies the fiber background loss

constant
Background loss file name Loss.dat - - -
Specifies the loss file name
Double-clad fiber False - - True, False

clad
Double-clad data type Calculate — — Calculate, Load from

file
Specify if the pump multimode
absorption will be calculated by using
the inner clad area or it will be loaded
Pump reference 900 nm - 1100 nm - - [500, 2000]

reference interval that defines the
Cladding area 3000 μ m2 - [1, 1e12]

Pump absorption file name PumpAbsorption.d — — —

at
Include ESA Effect False - - True, False
Defines if signal ESA is taking into

account
ESA cross-section file name ESA.dat — — —
Specifies the excited state absorption

(between leves 3 and 4) file name
739
PR DOPED FIBER
Numerical
unit
Relative error - 0.0005 - - [1e-100, 1]


Longitudinal steps - 100 - - [1, 1e8]

steps in the fiber
Specifies the number of radial steps to

be used in the calculation
Discretize sampled signal - False - - True, False
Define if the sampled signal will

discretized
Frequency resolution - 200 GHz - [1, 1000]

the sampled signal
Graphs

value range
740
PR DOPED FIBER
Simulation

value range
Noise

value range
Noise bandwidth 17.34 THz Hz, THz, nm [0, +INF]
Noise bins spacing 173.37 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, [1,1000]

nm
Noise threshold -100 dB - [-INF, 0]
Noise dynamic 3 dB 0 [0, +INF]

bins
Random numbers

value range

741
PR DOPED FIBER
Graphs

(dB/m)
Cross-section (m2)

(dB/m)
Cross-section (m2)

(dB/m)

population density

population density

population density
742
PR DOPED FIBER
The Pr-doped fiber component is based on the numerical solution of the rate and
propagation equations in accord with the simplified Praseodymium energy level
diagram shown in Figure 1 [1].
Figure 1 Pr energy level diagram
The numerical modeling was designed for the amplification calculation at 1300 nm
band (transition 1G4-3H5) taking into account signal excited-state absorption,
cooperative up-conversion, and amplified spontaneous emission (ASE) along the
active fiber. It considers only LP01 modes of pump and signal waves in a step index
fiber.
The amplification in a Pr-doped fiber is obtained by excitation of the 1G4 level of

praseodymium ion by a pump power around 1000 nm. Pump photon ground state
absorption (GSA) occurs between the 3H4 and 1G4 levels. Signal photons are also
absorbed by the 3H4-3F4 GSA and also by the 1G4-1D2 ESA.
Due to its fast relaxation to the ground state, the ion population at level 1 (3H5) was
neglected.
743
PR DOPED FIBER
For the relevant levels N0, N3, and N4, the rate equations are given by
(1)
Where Ni is the praseodymium ion population density at ith level, Nt is the average
concentration of praseodymium in the core, Wij is the stimulated absorption
(emission) rates, Aij is the nonradiative rates.
Assuming that the praseodymium ions are excited homogeneously across the fiber
cross-section, the transition rates Wij can be defined by
h is the Planck constant, ν is the frequency, σ ij ( ν ) is the transition cross-section and

I is the light intensity distribution. The normalized optical intensity is defined by
i ( r, φ, ν ) and Pk is the power of the kth beam.
The propagation equations that describe the propagation of the beams through the
(2)
744
PR DOPED FIBER
where each beam propagates in the forward (uk = 1) or backward (uk = -1) direction,
and P0k means the spontaneous emission contribution from the local population Ni.
P 0k = m ⋅ h ⋅ ν k ⋅ Δν k , where the normalized number of modes m is normally 2 and Δν k
is the noise bandwidth.
By setting the time derivatives in Equation 1 to zero, the problem is reduced to the
steady-state case. With the specified boundary conditions at z = 0 and z = L the
Equation 1 and Equation 2 can be integrated over space, and frequency.
Transition cross-sections
The default cross-sections presented in the component and other parameters were
taken from references in the literature. Figure 2 displays the ground state absorption
(GSA), and emission.
Figure 2 Praseodymium absorption (black curve), emission (blue curve) cross-sections.
Cooperative Up-conversion Effect

Energy-transfer upconversion mechanism operating when the third level is pumped
directly can be accounted for in the simulation by enabling the up-conversion effect
parameter.
Double-Clad Fibers
745
PR DOPED FIBER

section, by
(3)
Other option would be load a file with the pump absorption. In this case the user has
to provide a file with the pump absorption. This file has two columns: The first column
contains the pump wavelength in [nm] and the second column contains the absorption
in [dB/m]. See example below:
multimode pump (all signals between the reference wavelengths will be considered a
multimode pump).
Cross-section file
The cross-section file is specified in an ASCII file with three columns. The first column
refers to the wavelength (or frequency) in [m], [nm], [Hz] or [THz] units; the File
frequency unit parameter defines the unit of this column. The second column gives
the absorption cross-section in [m2] units. The third column gives the emission cross-
746
PR DOPED FIBER
section file in [m2] units. The unit of the second and third column must be in [m2]. As
an example, one possible cross-section file format is:
ESA cross-section files

The ESA cross-section files must have only two columns: (1) wavelength (or
frequency) in [m], [nm], [Hz] or [THz] units and (2) the ESA cross-section values. The
unit of the wavelength column has to be the same as defined in the File frequency unit
parameter (cross-sections tab).
An example of ESA file is:
Background loss
the background loss through a constant loss value or using a wavelength dependent
name of the file containing the losses in the Background loss file name parameter.
The format of this file must be similar to the example below:
747
PR DOPED FIBER
References
[1] Y. Ohishi, T. Kanamori, T. Nishi, S. Takahashi and E. Snitzer. Concentration Effect on Gain of
Pr3+-Doped Fluoride Fiber for 1.3 um Amplification, IEEE Photonics Technology Letters,
Volume 4, Numbers 12 / December, 1992, 1338-1341.
748
YB-DOPED FIBER
Yb-Doped Fiber
This component simulates a bidirectional Ytterbium-doped fiber. The component

solves numerically the rate and propagation equations for the steady-state case and
can take into account nonlinear phase changes caused by SPM and XPM effects by
propagating the signal using the nonlinear Schrödinger equation..
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Length 5 m — [0,1000000]
Specifies the doped fiber length.
Excited-state lifetime 0.8 ms — [1e-100,1e100]
Fluorescence decay lifetime
Core radius 3.4 μm — [1,1e100]

Yb doping radius 3.4 μm — [1,1e100]
Specifies the doped radius
Yb ion density 1e+025 m-3 m-3, ~ppm-wt, [1,1e100]

~wt%
Specifies the Ytterbium doping in the fiber
Numerical aperture 0.2 1550 nm [0.01, 1]

Specifies the numerical aperture of the fiber
749
YB-DOPED FIBER
Cross-sections

value
Determines frequency unit of the file with the cross sections

Determines if the format of the cross-section file is an
OptiAmplifier file
Cross-section file name Ytterbium.dat — —
Specifies the Ytterbium cross-section file name
Enhanced

value range
Background loss data type Constant — — Constant, From
File
Determines if the loss will be calculated from the
loss at 1310 nm (constant) or loaded from a data
file
Loss at 1310 nm 0 dB/km — [0,1e100]
Specifies the fiber loss at 1310 nm
Background loss file name Loss.dat — — —
Determines the inclusion or not of the Rayleigh

scattering effect
Rayleigh constant 150 dB/km — [0,1e100]

Backscattering capture fraction Calculate — — Calculate,

From file
Determines whether the capture fraction values
will be calculated by the component or it will be
loaded from a file
Rayleigh capture file name Capture.dat — — Constant, From

File
750
YB-DOPED FIBER

value range
Pump reference 1000 nm — [600,1200]
If the fiber is double-clad, then reference

wavelength that define the pump has to be
specified
Double-clad data type Calculate — — Calculate,

From file
loaded
2

n.dat
Temperature 300 K — [0,1000]
Include Dispersion False — — True, False
Defines whether to include dispersion effects or

not
Reference wavelength 1060 nm — [600,1700]
Value of the specified reference wavelength
Dispersion -33.5 ps/nm/km — [1e-100, 1e100]
Value of dispersion parameter at the reference

wavelength
Dispersion slope 0.05 ps/nm2/km — [1e-100, 1e100]
Value of dispersion slope at the reference

wavelength
Nonlinear effects

value range
Include SPM False — — True, False
Determines if the self-phase modulation will be

taken into account. If True the optical signal will be
propagated using the nonlinear Shrödinger
equation. This parameter will also enable Cross-
phase modulation and Four-wave mixing effects.
Effective area data type Constant — — Constant, From

file
Defines is the effective area is constant or loaded
from a file
751
YB-DOPED FIBER

value range
Effective area 50 um2 — [1e-100, 1e100]
Defines value of the effective area
Effective area file name Effective — — —

Area.dat
Specifies the effective area filename
n2 data type Constant — — Constant, From

file
Defines if the nonlinear index is constant or
loaded from a file
n2 2.6e-020 m^2/W — [0,1e100]
Nonlinear index value
n2 file name n2.dat — — —
Specifies the nonlinear index area filename
Include Brillouin scattering False — — True, False
Determines if the Brillouin scattering effect will be

taken into account
Brillouin gain data type Constant — — Constant, From

file
Defines if the Brillouin gain is constant or loaded
from a file
Brillouin gain constant 4.6e-011 m/W — Calculate,

From file
Brillouin gain file name Brillouin.dat — — —
Brillouin linewidth 31.7 MHz — [1e-100, 1e100]
Frequency shift 11 GHz — [1e-100, 1e100]
Include Raman scattering False — — True, False
Determines if the Raman scattering effect will be

taken into account
Raman gain data type Raman gain — — Raman gain,

Raman gain
Defines Raman gain type. If Raman gain efficiency
efficiency is selected then the value in the raman
gain file should be Raman gain / Effective area.
Otherwise the file contain the normalized Raman
gain that will be multiplied by the Raman gain
peak
752
YB-DOPED FIBER

value range
Raman gain peak 1e-013 — — [0, 1e100]
Raman gain peak that will multiply the normalized

Raman gain
Raman gain reference pump 1000 nm — [0, 1e100]
Value used in the Raman gain calculation
Raman gain file name Raman — — —

Gain.dat
Specifies the normalized Raman gain file name or
Raman efficiency file name
Polarization factor 2 — — [1,2]
Actual value depends on relative polarization of

the fields. The value is 1 if the fields have aligned
polarizations, and two if they have polarization
scrambled
Numerical

Relative error 0.0001 — [1e-100, 1]
Specifies the maximum difference acceptable between two

consecutive iterations to complete the iteration process.
Max. number of iterations 150 — [1, 1e8]
Specifies the maximum number of times for the iteration

process.
Longitudinal steps 100 — [1, 1e8]
Specifies the number of longitudinal steps in the fiber.
Overlap factor data Calculate — Calculate,

LoadFromFile
Determines whether the overlap factor values will be calculated
by the component or it will be loaded from a file.
Overlap factor file name Overlapfactor.dat — —

Discretize sampled signal True — —
Defines whether to use a user defined discretization for

sampled signals or not
Frequency resolution 100 GHz Hz, GHz, THz

Frequency spacing that will discretize the sampled signal
Step tolerance 0.001 — —
Used in the Brillouin calculation and defines tolerance in the

definition of length step
753
YB-DOPED FIBER
Simulation

value
Noise

value units range
Noise bandwidth 60 THz Hz, THz, nm ]0, +INF[
Noise bins space 300 THz Hz, GHz, THz, [1, 1000]
nm
Convert noise bins Convert — — True, False

noise bins
incorporated into the signal.
Random numbers

value
Graphs

value
Calculate graphs False — True, False
754
YB-DOPED FIBER

value
Number of distance steps 20 — [1, 1e8]
Number of wavelength steps 20 — [1, 1e8]
Minimum value -50 dBm ]1e-100, 1e100[
755
YB-DOPED FIBER
The Ytterbium-Doped Fiber component is based on the solution of the rate and
propagation equations of a two-level system. Rate equations are based on energy
levels and describe the effects of absorption, stimulated emission, and spontaneous
emission on the populations of the lower (n1) and upper (n2) states. For a two-level
system with k optical beams the rate equations is given by [1][2]:
dn 1 dn 2 σa ( vk ) σe ( vk ) 1
– -------- = -------- =
dt dt ∑ ---------------
hv k
- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n 1 ( r, φ, z ) – ∑ ---------------- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n 2 ( r, φ, z ) – --- ⋅ n 2 ( r, φ, z )
hv k τ (1a)
k k
n 1 ( r, φ, z ) + n 2 ( r, φ, z ) = n t ( r, φ, z ) (1b)
where h is the Planck constant, τ is the excited-state lifetime parameter, v k is the

section of the kth beam are σ a ( v k ) and σ e ( v k ) , respectively, and n t is the local
ytterbium ion density. The normalized optical intensity i k ( r, φ ) is defined as
i k ( r, φ ) = I k ( r, φ, z ) ⁄ P k ( z ) , where I k ( r, φ, z ) is light intensity distribution of the
kth beam.
fiber and are given by:
2π ∞
dP k
--------- = u k ⋅ σ 3 ( v k ) ⋅ ( P k ( z ) + P 0k ) ⋅
dz ∫ ∫ n 2 ( r, φ, z ) ⋅ ik ( r, φ ) ⋅ r ⋅ dr ⋅ dφ – u k ⋅ σa ( v k ) ⋅ Pk ( z ) .
0 0 (2)
2π ∞
∫ ∫ n2 ( r, φ, z ) ⋅ ik ( r, φ ) ⋅ r ⋅ dr ⋅ dφ
0 0
where each beam propagates in the forward ( u k = 1 ) or backward ( u k = – 1 )

756
YB-DOPED FIBER
Setting the time derivative in Equation (1a) to zero and using (1b), the problem is
reduced to the steady-state case and the Yb upper-population is defined as:
n
σa ( vk ) ⋅ τ
∑ ------------------------ ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z )
hv k
k=1 (3)
n 2 ( r, φ, z ) = n t ⋅ ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
n
( σa ( vk ) + σe ( vk ) ) ⋅ τ
∑
---------------------------------------------------- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) + 1
hv k
k=1
With the specified boundary conditions at z = 0 , L , and z = L , Equations (2) and (3)
can be integrated over space and frequency.
Figure 1 Example of ytterbium absorption and emission cross-sections
It is important realize that the transverse shape of the optical mode and its overlap
with the ytterbium ions distribution profile are very important and it can be
parameterized by a factor known as overlap integral factor.
757
YB-DOPED FIBER
Considering a steady-state case and substituting Equation (1b) in (1a), the rate
equation becomes:
σa ( vk ) σa ( vk ) σe ( vk )
∑ ---------------
hv k
- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n t ( r, σ, z ) – ∑ ---------------- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n 2 ( r, σ, z ) – ∑ ---------------- ⋅ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n 2 ( r, σ, z )
hv k hv k (4)
k k k
1
= --- ⋅ n 2 ( r, σ, z )
τ
Integrating Equation (4) over space,
2π ∞
∫ ∫ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ nt ( r, φ ) ⋅ r ⋅ dr ⋅ dφ n
1--- 2 σa ( vk ) σa ( vk )
∑ --------------- ∑ ---------------
- ⋅ Pk ( z ) ⋅ n2 .
0 0
⋅ n ( r, φ ) ⋅ π ⋅ b eff = - ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n t ⋅ ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-–
τ 2 hv k n hv k
k t
k=1
2π ∞ 2π ∞
∫ ∫ i k ( r, φ ) ⋅ n2 ( r, φ ) ⋅ r ⋅ dr ⋅ dφ n ∫ ∫ ik ( r, φ ) ⋅ n2 ( r, φ ) ⋅ r ⋅ dr ⋅ dφ
σe ( vk )
∑
0 0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
- 0 0
---------------- ⋅ P ( z ) ⋅ n 2 ⋅ -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
–
n2 hv k k n 2
k=1
where n i is considered the average density, and is given by:
2π ∞
∫ ∫ ni ( r, φ ) ⋅ r ⋅ dr ⋅ dφ (5)
0 0
n i ( z ) = -------------------------------------------------------
-
2
π ⋅ b eff
and b eff is the equivalent radius of the doped region:

1---
⎛ ∞ n (r) ⎞2
b eff = ⎜ 2 ------------ ⋅ r . dr⎟
t
⎜ n (0) ∫ ⎟
⎝ 0 t ⎠
758
YB-DOPED FIBER
when the ion density population is uniform the effective radius is equal to the doped
radius, b .
For an effective doped radius b eff , the effective cross-sectional area is

2
A eff = π ⋅ b eff .
Then, the overlap integral or confinement factor for the ith level can be defined as:
2π ∞
∫ ∫ ik ( r, φ ) ⋅ ni ( r, φ ) ⋅ r ⋅ dr ⋅ dφ (6)
0 0
Γ k, i ( z ) = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
ni
If the ytterbium ions are well confined to the center of the optical modes, then Γ k, 1
and Γ k, 2 are nearly equal and can be replaced with the single constant Γ k .
Therefore, using the definition of overlap integral, the average population density for
level 2 is given by:
n
σa ( vk )
∑ - ⋅ Pk ( z ) ⋅ nt ⋅ Γk
----------------
hv k
k=1
n 2 ( z ) = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (7)
n
1 σa ( vk ) + σe ( vk )
--- ⋅ A eff +
τ ∑ ---------------------------------------- ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ Γ k
hv k
k=1
and the propagation equation becomes:
dP k (8)
--------- = ( σ e ( v k ) + σ a ( v k ) ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n 2 ⋅ Γ k – σ a ( v k ) ⋅ P k ( z ) ⋅ n t ⋅ Γ k + P 0k ⋅ σ e ( v k ) ⋅ n 2 ⋅ Γ k
dz
759
YB-DOPED FIBER
Double-clad Fibers
[3]
where
parameter.

a multimode pump.
Background loss and Rayleigh scattering

The Background loss and Rayleigh scattering effect can be considered in the
ytterbium-fiber model, the equations and parameters used to represent them are
760
YB-DOPED FIBER
similar to the ones shown at the erbium-doped fiber component. For reference, see
Erbium-doped fiber component's technical background.
Cross-section file
2 2
Column A = λ [ nm ] , Column B = σ a [ m ] , and Column C = σ e [ m ] .
Background loss and Rayleigh files

First, the user can choose the Background loss data type parameter that
determines the background loss through the loss at 1310nm (Loss at 1310 nm
parameter) or using a wavelength dependent background loss loaded from a file. In
the second case, the user has to specify the name of the file containing the losses in
the Background loss file name parameter. The format of this file must be similar to
the example below:
λ [ nm ] α [ dB ⁄ km ]
1460 10
1461 10.5
1462 10.2
1463 10.1
761
YB-DOPED FIBER
1464 10.3
The user can include the Rayleigh scattering effect in the simulations through the
parameter Include Rayleigh scattering. If the Include Rayleigh scattering
parameter is TRUE, then the user has to specify the value of the Rayleigh constant.
The Backscattering capture parameter determines if the component will generate
the capture fraction using the equation (25) or the user will provide a file with the
capture fraction. In this case the user should specify the file name in the Rayleigh
capture file name parameter and the file has to be in the format similar to the below:
λ [ nm ] C [ dB ]
1460 -20
1461 -21.5
1462 -21
1463 -20.5
1464 -20.48
Overlap factor file

In the case of load the overlap factor from a file, the user has to specify the file name
in the Overlap factor file name parameter and the file has to in the format as in the
example below:
λ [ nm ] Γ
1449.91984 0.45
1451.30261 0.44
1452.68537 0.43
1454.06814 0.42
1455.4509 0.41
References
[2] R. Paschotta, J. Nilsson, A. C. Tropper, and D. C. Hanna, "Ytterbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers".
IEEE Journal of Quantum Electronics, Volume: 33 Issue: 7, Jul. 1997, Page(s): 1049 - 1056.
762
YB-DOPED FIBER DYNAMIC
Yb-Doped Fiber Dynamic
This component simulates a bidirectional Ytterbium-doped fiber considering the

simulation of dynamic effects. The component solves the rate and propagation
equations numerically.
Ports

Parameters
Main
Length 5 m [0, 1000000]
Excited-state lifetime 0.8 ms [1e-100, 1e100]
Fluorescence decay lifetime
Core radius 3.4 μm [1, 1e100]
Yb doping radius 3.4 μm [1, 1e100]
Specifies the doped radius
Yb ion density 1e+025 m-3 m-3, ~ppm-wt, [1,1e100]

~wt%
Specifies the Ytterbium doping in the
fiber
763
Numerical aperture 0.2 [0.1, 1]

fiber
Cross Sections

File frequency unit nm [Nm, m, Hz, THz]
Determines the frequency unit of the file with the cross

sections
OptiAmplifier format False [True, False]
Determines if the format of the cross-section file is an

OptiAmplifier file
Cross section file name Ytterbium.dat
Specifies the Ytterbium cross section file name
Enhanced

Background loss data type Constant [Constant,
LoadFromFile]
Determines if the loss will be calculated from the loss at 1310
nm (constant) or if it will be loaded from a file
Loss at 1310 nm 0 dB/Km [0, +INF]
Specifies the fiber loss at 1310 nm
Background loss file name Loss.dat
Include Rayleigh Scattering False [True, False]
Determines the inclusion of the Rayleigh scattering effect
Rayleigh Constant 150 dB/Km [0, 1000]
Backscattering capture fraction Calculate [Calculate,

LoadFromFile]
Determines whether the capture fraction values will be
calculated by the component or if it will be loaded from a file
Rayleigh capture file name Capture.dat
764

Double-clad fiber False [True, False]
Double-clad data type Calculate [Calculate,

LoadFromFile]
Specifies if the pump multimode absorption will be calculated
by using the inner clad area or it will be loaded from a file.
Cladding area 3000 um2 [1, 100000]
Pump absorption file name PumpAbsorption. - -

dat
Pump reference 1000 nm [500, 1500]
If the fiber is double-clad, then reference wavelength that

define the pump has to be specified
Group velocity 2e8 m/s [1, 1e10]
If the fiber is double-clad,then reference wavelength that

define the pump has to be specified
Nonlinear effects

Include Brillouin scattering False [True, False]
Determines if the Brillouin scattering effect will be taking into

account
Brillouin gain constant 5e-11 m/W [0, 1]
Effective area 65 um2 [1e-100, 1e100]
Defines the effective mode area
Acoustic wave velocity 5960 m/s [0.001, 1e9]
Phonon lifetime 4.5e-9 s [1e-15, 1]
Temperature 300 K [0, 1000]
765
Numerical

Relative error 0.0001 [1e-100, 1]

consecutive iterations to finish the iteration process
Maximum number of iterations 150 [1, 1e8]

process
Longitudinal steps 100 [1, 1e8]
Specifies the number of longitudinal steps in the fiber
Overlap factor data Calculate [Calculate,

LoadFromFile]
Determines whether the overlap factor values will be
calculated by the component or if they will be loaded from a file
Overlap factor file name Overlapfactor.dat
Reference time 0.5/Bit rate s [1e-100, 1e100]
Specifies the instant of time used to take the powers in the

fiber to solve the steady-state regime
Numerical solver Implicit RK4 [RK4, Implicit

RK4]
Specifies the numerical solver to be used in the simulation
Simulation

Noise
Noise bins space 300 THz Hz, GHz, THz, nm [1, 1000]
766
Noise threshold -100 dB [-INF, 0]
Minimum value for the adaptation of

noise bins
Noise dynamic 3 dB [0, +INF]
Threshold ratio for the adaptation of

noise bins
Convert noise bins Convert noise [True, False]

bins
Random Numbers

value range
Graphs

Number of distance steps 20 [1, 1e8]
Number of wavelength steps 20 [1, 1e8]
Linear scale True [True, False]
Minimum value -50 dBm [1e-100, 1e100]
The Ytterbium-Doped Fiber Dynamic component is based on the solution of the
simplified two-level rate and propagation equations.
Rate equations are based on energy levels and describe the effects of absorption,
and upper (n2) states.
767
For the two-level system with k optical beams, the rate equations are given by [1][2]
where
h is the Planck constant
τ is the excited-state lifetime parameter
vk is the frequency
Pk is the power of the kth beam.
σ a ( v k ) is the absorption cross-section of the kth beam
σ e ( v k ) is the emission cross-section of the kth beam
nt is the local ytterbium ion density
The normalized optical intensity, i k (r,φ) , is defined as
i k (r,φ) = ( I k (r, φ,z) ) ⁄ ( P k ( z ) )
where
I k (r, φ,z) is the light intensity distribution of the kth beam
fiber and are given by
where each beam propagates in the forward direction ( u k = 1 ) or the backward

direction ( u k = – 1 ) , and P 0k means the spontaneous emission contribution from the
local metastable population n 2 .
P 0k = m ⋅ h ⋅ v k ⋅ Δv k
where
m is the normalized number of modes and is normally 2
768
Δv k is the noise bandwidth
With the specified boundary conditions at z = 0 and z = L , the equations (1) and (2)
can be integrated over space and frequency.
Figure 1 An example of Ytterbium absorption and emission cross sections
Brillouin Scattering Effect

Considering the presence of Brillouin scattering, the transient coupled SBS equations
that describe the pump absorption, signal amplification, first-order and second-order
Stokes generation due to Brillouin scattering, and propagation of the acoustic phonon
waves are numerically solved:
769
where Pp is the pump power, Esig is the signal field, Estokes1 and Estokes2 are the first-
order and second-order Stokes waves, respectively. ρ1(z,t) and ρ2(z,t) are the
acoustic phonon wave amplitudes interacting with the signal and first-order Stokes
wave, and first-order and second-order Stokes waves, respectively. ΓB is the phonon
decay rate, Aeff is the effective mode area, α is the fiber attenuation, gB is the Brillouin
gain constant, vg is the group velocity and g is the time- and space- dependent
amplifier gain. The Brillouin frequency shift for the generate Stokes waves is defined
by
The Langevin noises sources f1 and f2 describes the spontaneous Brillouin scattering
for the acoustic phonon waves. The noise sources are modeled as δ-correlated in
space and time,
With
770
Where B is the Boltzmann constant, T is the temperature, va is the acoustic velocity.
In the setup, the pump waves do not interact directly in the Brillouin process, only the
signal waves participate in the nonlinear process. The ASE generation is also
included in the model, although it is not described in the equations (3). The model also
includes the rate equations describing the ions distribution on the ytterbium levels.
Double-clad Fibers
[3]
where
parameter.
771

a multimode pump.
Background loss and Rayleigh Scattering

The Background loss and Rayleigh scattering effect can be considered in the
Ytterbium-fiber model. The equations and parameters used to represent them are
similar to the ones shown in the erbium-doped fiber component. For reference, see
the Erbium-doped fiber component's technical background.
Numerical Solvers
This component has two numerical solvers for the coupled equations describing the
time-domain propagation and amplification along of the doped fiber. The so called
RK4 solver is the solver used in previous versions, while the implicit RK4 is the new
solver that can take the Brillouin effect into consideration.
Cross-section file
The cross-section file is specified in an ASCII file with three columns.
The first column refers to the wavelength (or frequency) in m, nm, Hz or THz units.
The File frequency unit parameter defines the units of this column.
The second column gives the absorption cross-section in m2 units. The third column
gives the emission cross-section file in m2 units. The unit of the second and third
column must be in m2.
772
As an example, one possible cross-section file format is:
The parameter OptiAmplifier format is used to allow the component to load cross-
sections files originated from the software OptiAmplier.
Therefore, if the user wants to load a cross-section under the crs format (format used
in the OptAmplifier software), the OptiAmplifier format parameter has to be set TRUE.
Background loss and Rayleigh files

First, the user can choose the Background loss data type parameter. This parameter
determines the background loss through the loss at 1310 nm (Loss at 1310 nm
parameter) or by using a wavelength dependent background loss loaded from a file.
In the second case, the user has to specify the name of the file that contains the
losses in the Background loss file name parameter. The format of this file must be
similar to the example below.
The user can choose to include the Rayleigh scattering effect in the simulations
through the parameter Include Rayleigh scattering.
If the Include Rayleigh scattering parameter is TRUE, the user has to specify the
value of the Rayleigh constant.
The Backscattering capture parameter determines if the component will generate the
capture fraction using the equation (25) or if the user will provide a file with the capture
fraction.
773
In the latter case, the user should specify the file name in the Rayleigh capture file
name parameter and the file has to be in the format similar to the example below:
Overlap factor file

In the case of loading the overlap factor from a file, the user has to specify the file
name in the Overlap factor file name parameter and the file has to in the format as
shown in the example below:
References
774
YB DOPED MULTIMODE FIBER
Yb Doped Multimode Fiber
This component simulates a bidirectional ytterbium-doped fiber that supports the consideration of a
multimode regime. The component solves numerically the rate and propagation equations for the steady-
state case.
Ports

Parameters
Main
unit
Length - 5 m - [1e-100, 1e6]
Excited-state lifetime - 0.8 ms - [1e-100, 1e100]
Specifies the ytterbium metastable

lifetime
Refractive index profile - Step index - - Step index, From file
Specifies if the fiber presents a step

index profile or the profile is defined by
a file
Core radius - 3.4 μm - [0.1, 1e100]
775
unit
Core refractive index - 1.45 - - [1, 2]
Specifies the refractive index at the

core
Species the numerical aperture of the

fiber
OptiFiber file format - False - - True, False

Defines whether to load a file
generated by OptiFiber software or not
Refractive index file name - Index.dat - - -
Specifies the file name with the

refractive index profile
Yb ion density - 1e+025 m-3 - [1, 1e100]
Specifies the ytterbium doping density

peak in the fiber
Yb doping radius - 3.4 μm - [0.1, 1e100]
Specifies the ytterbium doped radius
Yb ion density distribution - Uniform - - Uniform, From file
Specifies if the ytterbium ion density

distribution is uniform (“flat top”) or is
defined in a file
Yb ion density distribution - Ybdensity.dat - - -

filename
Specifies the file name with the ion
distribution profile
Cross-sections

value range
File frequency unit nm - - nm, m, Hz, THz
Determines the frequency unit of the file with the

cross-sections
OptiAmplifier format False - - True, False

Determines if the format of the cross-section file is
an OptiAmplifier file
Cross-section file name Ytterbium.dat - - -
Specifies the ytterbium cross-section file name
776
Enhanced
unit
Background loss data type - Constant - - Constant, From file
Determines if the loss will be a constant

value or it will be loaded from a file
Loss - 0 dB/Km - [0, 1e100]

clad
Pump reference - 1010 nm - [500, 2000]
If the fiber is double-clad, then a

reference wavelength that defines the
pump has to be specified
Cladding area - 3000 μm2 - [1, 10000000]
Numerical
unit
Relative error - 0.0001 - - [1e-100, 1]


Longitudinal steps - 100 0 0 [1, 1e8]

steps in the fiber

the integration
Azimuthal steps - 18 - - [3, 1e8]
Specifies the number of azimuthal

steps for the integration
777
unit
Mode solver tolerance - 1e-14 - - [1e-100, 0.1]
Specifies the mode solver tolerance
Parallel computing False True, False
Specifies if the simulation will use a

parallel computation algorithm
Max number of modes - 5 - - [1, 7]

modes that will be simulated
Power ratio for each pump mode - Equally excited - - Equally excited,
Calculated
mode power distribution for the pump
coefficients
Load input pump mode from file - False - - True, False

pump is specified by coupling
pump mode or load the mode from a
file.
Pump mode file name - - - - -

initial excitation for the pump modes
Pump m,n index - 00 - - -

initial pump excitation.
Pump spot size - 5 μm - -
Specify the spot size for the initial pump

excitation.
Pump inv. radius of curvature - 0 1/μm - -

for the initial pump excitation.
Power ratio for each signal - Equally excited - - Equally excited,

mode Calculated
mode power distribution for the signal
coefficients.
778
unit
Load input signal mode from file - False - - True, False

signal is specified by coupling
signal mode or load the mode from a
file.
Signal mode file name - - - - -

initial excitation for the pump modes.
Signal m,n index - 00 - - -

initial signal excitation.
Signal spot size - 5 μm - -
Specify the spot size for the initial

signal excitation.
Signal inv. radius of curvature - 0 1/μm - -

for the initial signal excitation.
Graphs

value range
Number of radial steps 40 - - [1, 1e8]
779
Simulation

value range
Space width X Space width X μm [1e-100, 1e100]

Space width Y Space width Y μm [1e-100, 1e100]
Noise

value range

nm
Noise threshold –100 dB - [-INF,0]
Noise dynamic 3 dB - [0, +INF]

bins
Random numbers

value range

780
Graphs

(dB/m)
Cross-section (m2)

(dB/m)
Cross-section (m2)
Input pump beam profile X (μm) Y (μm) Power (W)
Input signal beam profile X (μm) Y (μm) Power (W)
Ion density distribution Radius (μm) Ion density -

normalized

population density

population density
Output signal beam profile X (μm) Y (μm) Power (W)
Power coupling - Pump Mode number Power coupling -
Power coupling - Signal Mode number Power coupling -
Pump LP [m,n] index array - m Mode number m -
Pump LP [m,n] index array - n Mode number n -
781

Refractive index profile Radius (μm) Refractive index -
Signal LP [m,n] index array - m Mode number m -
Signal LP [m,n] index array - n Mode number n -
782
The Ytterbium-doped multimode fiber component modeling is based on the solution
of the rate and propagation equations assuming a two-level system, and considering
the transverse field profiles and ion transversal distribution.
The rate equations are based on energy levels and describe the effects of absorption,
and upper (n2) states. For a two-level system with k optical beams the rate equations
are given by [1][2].
(1)a
(1)b
Where h is the Planck constant, τ is the excited-state lifetime parameter, ν k is the

section of the kth beam are σ a ( ν k ) and σ e ( ν k ) , respectively, and n t is the local erbium
ion density. The normalized optical intensity i k ( r, φ ) is defined as
i k ( r, φ ) = ( I k ( r, φ, z ) ) ⁄ ( P k ( z ) ) , where I k ( r, φ, z ) is light intensity distribution of the kth
beam.
The propagation equations describe the propagation of the beams through the Yb-
(2)
Where each beam propagates in the forward ( u k = 1 ) or backward ( u k = – 1 )

783
is reduced to the steady-state case and the ion upper-population is defined as
(3)
With the specified boundary conditions at z = 0 and z = L , the Equation 2 and

Equation 3 can be integrated over space, and frequency.
Multimode Solution
The Yb-doped fiber may support more than one mode at the pump, ASE or signal
frequencies/wavelength. The component has a numerical mode solver that will
calculate the LP(m,n) modes supported by the fiber based on the refractive index
profile defined by the user (it finds the LP modes by an exact method that uses radial
transfer matrices).
The parameter Max number of modes defines the maximum number of modes per
channel that will be considered for each signal, pump and ASE when searching for
supported fiber modes. For now the maximum number of modes (per channel)
supported by this component is 7.
The normalized intensity profiles are obtained from the modal analysis of the
waveguide, in such a way that the intensity distributions of the signal, pump and ASE
can be written as
(4)
It should be noted that the same normalized intensity profile has been used for all
central wavelengths of the intervals used to discretize the ASE, because the
difference between the central wavelengths of the intervals are relatively small. The
same assumption is assumed for any set of signals and for any set of pumps, i.e. each
set will have the same normalized intensity profile.
784
The power ratio distribution between the input spatial fields and each of the spatial
fiber modes supported can be defined in two ways:
• The user can assume that each fiber mode will be equally excited by
the input signal (pump). In this case the user has to set the parameter
Power ratio for each signal (pump) mode to Equally excited.
• The power distribution is defined by the coupling coefficients that are
calculated according to
(5)
Where Ei is the spatial profile for each m,n mode, including the sin and cosine factors,
and Ein is the spatial input field. In this case the input field can be defined by loading
it from a file or the user can define the input field as a Laguerre-Gaussian profile by
setting the mode index for the field, as well as the spot size and the inverse of the
radius of curvature.
(6)
Where m and n describes the azimuthal and radial indexes respectively. R is the
radius of curvature and ω0 is the spot size. Ln,m is the Laguerre polynomial.
Double-Clad Fibers
section, by [3]
(7)
785
multimode pump (all signals with wavelength lower than the pump reference will be
considered a multimode pump).
Background loss
The Background loss effect can be considered in the model, the equations and
parameters used to represent them are similar to the ones shown at the erbium-
doped fiber component. For more information about how it is included in the numerical
model, see Erbium-doped fiber component's technical background.
Cross-section file
Background loss file

the background loss through a constant loss or using a wavelength dependent
786
name of the file contained the losses in the Background loss file name parameter. The
format of this file must be similar to the example below:
Refractive index file

The refractive index profile file is specified in an ASCII file with two columns. The first
column refers to the radial position in μm. The second column gives the refractive
index values. As an example, one possible refractive index file is:
787
The parameter OptiFiber file format is used to allow the component to load refractive
index profiles originated from the software OptiFiber. Therefore, if the user wants to
load a refractive index profile file exported from OptiFiber, the OptiFiber file format
parameter has to be set to TRUE. The following file is an example of such file (it is
equivalent to the refractive index profile from last section)
788
Ytterbium density distribution file

The ytterbium density distribution file is specified in an ASCII file with two columns.
The first column refers to the normalized radial position (normalized by the Yb doping
radius value). The second column gives the normalized ion density values
(normalized by the Yb ion density value). As an example, a "flat-top" file is:
References
789
Notes:
790
TM DOPED FIBER
Tm Doped Fiber
This component simulates a bidirectional Thulium-doped fiber. The component solves numerically the
rate and propagation equations for the steady-state case.
Ports

Parameters
Main
unit
Length - 5 m - [1e-100, 1e6]
Core radius - 1.3 μm - [0.1, 1e100]
Doping radius - 1.3 μm - [0.1, 1e100]
Specifies the thulium doped radius
Tm ion density - 1.56e+025 m-3 - [1, 1e100]
Specifies the thulium doping in the fiber

fiber
791
TM DOPED FIBER
Coefficients

value range
Nonradiative lifetime 1 430e-6 s - [1e-100, 1]
Nonradiative lifetime of thulium energy level 1

Ar10 285.7 1/s - [1e-100, 1e100]
Radiative transition rate from level 1 to level 0
Ar30 1353.85 1/s - [1e-100, 1e100]
Ar31 138.46 1/s - [1e-100, 1e100]
Ar32 46.153 1/s - [1e-100, 1e100]
Ar50 581.4 1/s - [1e-100, 1e100]
Ar51 69.767 1/s - [1e-100, 1e100]
Ar52 348.84 1/s - [1e-100, 1e100]
Ar53 127.91 1/s - [1e-100, 1e100]
Ar54 34.883 1/s - [1e-100, 1e100]
Include self-quenching effect False - - True, False
Defines if self-quenching transitions are taking

into account (H4, H6 -> F4, F4).
K3101 coefficient 0.18e-21 m-3/s - [1e-100, 1e100]
Cross-relaxation coefficient
792
TM DOPED FIBER

value range
K1310 coefficient 5.12e-24 m-3/s - [1e-100, 1e100]
Upconversion coefficient
Cross-sections
unit
File frequency unit - nm - - nm, m, Hz, THz
Determines the frequency unit of the

file with the cross-sections
Cross-section file name - Thulium.dat - - -
Specifies the thulium cross-section file

name
ESA13 cross-section file name - ESA13.dat - - -

(between level 1 and 3) file name


Transitions
unit
H6 -> F4 - 1480 nm - 1900 nm - - -

for H6 -> F4
F4 -> H6 - 1550 nm - 2300 nm - - -

for F4 -> H6
H4 -> F4 - 1350 nm - 1549 nm - - -

for H4 -> F4
H6 -> H5 - 1000 nm - 1400 nm - - -

for H6 -> H5
793
TM DOPED FIBER
unit
H6 -> H4 - 710 nm - 900 nm - - -

for H6 -> H4
H4 -> H6 - 710 nm - 900 nm - - -

for H4 -> H6
Enhanced
unit
Background loss data type - Constant - - Constant,
LoadFromFile
Determines if the loss is a constant
value or it will be loaded from a file.
Loss - 0 db/m - [0, 1e100]

clad
Pump reference - 1409 nm - 1411 nm - - [500, 2000]

reference interval that defines the
Cladding area - 3000 μ m2 - [1, 1e12]
Numerical
unit
Relative error - 0.0005 - - [1e-100, 1]


794
TM DOPED FIBER
unit
Longitudinal steps - 100 - - [1, 1e8]

steps in the fiber
Specifies the number of radial steps to

be used in the calculation
Discretize sampled signal - False - - True, False

Define if the sampled signal will
discretized
Frequency resolution - 200 GHz - [1, 1000]

the sampled signal
Graphs

value range
Simulation

value range
Noise

value range
Noise center frequency H6<-F4 161.93 THz Hz, THz, nm [30, 30e5]
Determines the noise center frequency for the
H6<-F4 band
795
TM DOPED FIBER

value range
Noise bandwidth H6<-F4 51 THz Hz, THz, nm [0, +INF]
Bandwidth to create noise bins for the H6<-F4

band
Noise bins spacing H6<-F4 800 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, [1,1000]
nm
Specifies the noise bins spacing for the H6<-F4
band
Noise center frequency F4<-H4 202 THz Hz, THz, nm [30, 30e5]
Determines the noise center frequency for the
F4<-H4 band
Noise bandwidth F4<-H4 27 THz Hz, THz, nm [0, +INF]
Bandwidth to create noise bins for the F4<-H4

band
Noise bins spacing F4<-H4 400 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, [1, 1000]
nm
Specifies the noise bins spacing for the F4<-H4
band
Noise center frequency H6<-H4 376.4 THz Hz, THz, nm [30, 30e5]
Determines the noise center freuency for the H6<-

H4 band
Noise bandwidth H6<-H4 47 THz Hz, THz, nm [0, +INF]
Bandwidth to create noise bins for the H6<-H4

band
Noise bins spacing H6<-H4 1000 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, [1, 1000]
nm
Specifies the noise bins spacing for the H6<-H4
band
Noise threshold -100 dB - [-INF, 0]
Noise dynamic 3 dB 0 [0, +INF]

bins
796
TM DOPED FIBER
Random numbers

value range

Graphs

(dB/m)
Cross-section (m2)

(dB/m)
Cross-section (m2)

(dB/m)

population density

population density
797
TM DOPED FIBER

798
TM DOPED FIBER
The Tm-doped fiber component is based on the numerical solution of the rate and
propagation equations in accord with the thulium energy level diagram shown in
Figure 1 [1].
Figure 1 Tm energy level diagram
Due to their proximity, levels 3F2 and 3F3 are treated as a single level. The rate
equations account for the spectral bands of 800 nm, 1470 nm and 1800 nm, and
describe the effects of absorption, stimulated emission, and spontaneous emission on
the populations of levels 0, 1, 3, and 5 (since nonradiative decay rates from levels 4
and 2 to the underlying level are high, the population of both levels are neglected in
the model).
For the relevant levels No, N1, N3, and N5, the rate equations are given by
(1)
799
TM DOPED FIBER
Where Ni is the thulium ion population density at ith level, Nt is the average
concentration of thulium in the core, Wij is the stimulated absorption (emission) rates,
Aij and Anrj are the radiative and nonradiative decay rates, respectively.
Assuming that the thulium ions are excited homogeneously across the fiber cross-
section, the transition rates Wij can be defined by
h is the Planck constant, ν is the frequency, σ ij ( ν ) is the transition cross-section and

I is the light intensity distribution. The normalized optical intensity is defined by
i ( r, φ, ν ) and Pk is the power of the kth beam.
The propagation equations that describe the propagation of the beams through the
(2)
where each beam propagates in the forward (uk = 1) or backward (uk = -1) direction,
and P0k means the spontaneous emission contribution from the local population Ni.
P 0k = m ⋅ h ⋅ ν k ⋅ Δν k , where the normalized number of modes m is normally 2 and Δν k
is the noise bandwidth.
By setting the time derivatives in Equation 1 to zero, the problem is reduced to the
steady-state case. With the specified boundary conditions at z = 0 and z = L the
Equation 1 and Equation 2 can be integrated over space, and frequency.
Transition cross-sections
The default cross-sections presented in the component and other parameters were
taken from reference [1]. Figure 2 displays the ground state absorption (GSA),
emission and excited state absorption (ESA) cross-section.
800
TM DOPED FIBER
Figure 2 Thulium absorption (black curve), emission (blue curve) and ESA (red curve) cross-sections.
Self-Quenching Effect
Energy-transfer upconversion and cross-relaxation mechanisms operating when the
third level is pumped directly can be accounted for in the simulation by enabling the
self-quenching effect parameter.
Double-Clad Fibers
section, by
(3)
multimode pump (all signals between the reference wavelengths will be considered a
multimode pump).
Cross-section file
801
TM DOPED FIBER
ESA cross-section files

The ESA cross-section files must have only two columns: (1) wavelength (or
frequency) in [m], [nm], [Hz] or [THz] units and (2) the ESA cross-section values. The
unit of the wavelength column has to be the same as defined in the File frequency unit
parameter (cross-sections tab).
An example of ESA file is:
Background loss
the background loss through a constant loss value or using a wavelength dependent
802
TM DOPED FIBER
name of the file containing the losses in the Background loss file name parameter.
The format of this file must be similar to the example below:
References
[1] P. Peterka, B. Faure, W. Blanc, M. Karásek and B. Dussardier. Theoretical modelling of S-band
thulium-doped silica fibre amplifiers, Optical and Quantum Electronics, Volume 36, Numbers 1-
3 / January, 2004, 201-212.
803
TM DOPED FIBER
Notes:
804
TM DOPED FIBER
Amplifiers Library
Optical
SOA
• Traveling Wave SOA

• Wideband Traveling Wave SOA
• Reflective SOA
805
TM DOPED FIBER
806
TRAVELING WAVE SOA
Traveling Wave SOA
Performs lumped amplification with traveling wave semiconductor optical amplifiers (SOA). The rate-
equation approximation has been used in which the electrical field is described by the wave equation and
the carrier density by means of the rate equation. Such model is applicable to describe the amplification
of CW and optical pulsed signals.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Injection current 0.15 A [0,1]
Physical

Length 0.0005 m ]0,1e-3]
Width 3e-006 m ]0,500e-6]
Height 8e-008 m ]0,10e-6]
Optical confinement factor 0.15 — ]0,1]
Loss 4000 1/m [0,10e-4]
Differential gain 2.78e-020 m2 ]0,50e-20]
Carrier density at transparency 1.4e+024 m3 ]0,10e-25]
Linewidth enhancement factor 5 — [–30,30]
Recombination coefficient A 143e+008 1/s ]0,1e-15]
807
TRAVELING WAVE SOA

Recombination coefficient B 1e-016 m3/s ]0,1e-10]
Recombination coefficient C 3e-041 m6/s [0,1e-30]
Initial carrier density 3e+024 m–3 ]0,10e-25]
Numerical
Name and description Value Units Mode

Integration type Runge Kutta 4th order — Normal
Relative tolerance 1e-006 — Normal
Maximum number of steps 100000 — Normal
Interpolation type Polynomial — Normal
Order of polynomial 4 — Normal
Simulation

Enabled True — True, False]
This module performs lumped amplification with traveling wave semiconductor optical
amplifiers (SOA) [AGR, 1993] and [SHI, 1994]. The rate-equation approximation has
been used in which the electrical field is described by the wave equation and the
carrier density by means of the rate equation [1-4]. Such model is applicable to
describe the amplification of CW and optical pulse signals. The pulse widths have to
be much larger than the intraband relaxation time that governs the dynamics of the
induced polarization. Typically, the intraband relaxation time is 0.1 ps. Therefore, the
model can be used for pulse widths larger than 1 ps [3-4].
The basic approximation done in the wave equation for the electrical field in the SOA
is a linear dependence between the carrier induced susceptibility and the carrier
density [6-8]. In the framework of this approximation the material gain coefficient gm
is related to carrier density N(t) by,
gm ( t ) = Ag [ N ( t ) – N0 ]
(1)
where N0 is the carrier density at transparency point and Ag is the differential gain
coefficient [2].
808
TRAVELING WAVE SOA
The net gain coefficient g is related to the material gain gm by,
g ( t ) = Γg m ( t ) – α
(2)
where α is an effective loss coefficient which includes scattering and absorption

losses and Γ is the optical confinement factor defined as a fraction of the mode power
within the active layer.
It is also assumed that the amplifier supports a single wave-guide mode and it does
not change the polarization state during the amplification. Linearly polarized input light
is presumed. The group velocity dispersion in the SOA is neglected. The amplified
spontaneous emission noise is not taken into account. In the framework of these
assumptions, the gain G for a traveling wave SOA for a distance z is:
[ g ( t )z ]
G ( t ,z ) = e
(3)
The carrier density rate equation expresses the conservation of carriers inside the
active layer. It takes into account the current density and the net rate of carrier
generation and recombination averaged over the active layer. The recombination rate
consists of spontaneous and stimulated recombinations. The spontaneous
recombination rate includes the radiative and nonradiative components. The
nonradiative recombination takes into account the Auger recombination, which is
generally the dominant nonradiative process in long wavelength lasers. The
spontaneous recombination rate can be characterized by a quantity known as the
carrier lifetime τ s :
N( t) 2 3
---------- = R A N ( t ) + R B N ( t ) + R c N ( t )
τs
(4)
where RA is the non-radiative coefficient due to recombination at defects and traps,

RB is the spontaneous radiative recombination coefficient, and RC is the Auger
recombination coefficient.
Neglecting the carrier diffusion, the amplified spontaneous emission noise and the
shot noise the equation for the carrier density N(t) is [3-4]:
dN J- ----
N I
------- = ----- – A ( N – N 0 ) -----
dt qd τ s g hf
(5)
where I is the light intensity, J is the injection current density, q is the electron charge,
h is the Planck’s constant, f is the light frequency, t is the time, and d is the active layer
thickness.
Equation 5 can be rewritten as:

(6)
809
TRAVELING WAVE SOA
dN Ip N P ( N ,t )L
- – ---- – ΓA g ( N ( t ) – N 0 ) --------------------
------- = ------
dt qV τ s Vhf
where Ip is the pump current (or injection current), V = L w d is the volume of the active
region, and L and w are the length and the width of the amplifier respectively.
The amplifier power P(N,t), which is the average power over the length of the
amplifier, is by:
L L
P ( N ,z ) P in G ( t ,z ) e
[ g ( t )L ]
–1
P ( N ,t ) = ∫ ----------------- dz =
L ∫ L
- = P in -------------------------
-----------------------
g ( t )
0 0
(7)
The output optical field is:

[ ( 1 + jδ )g ( t )L ]
-----------------------------
-
2
E out ( t ) = E in ( t )e
(8)
where δ is the linewidth enhancement factor.
This parameter takes into account the coupling between the gain and refractive index
of the amplifying medium. The output power to parameterized signals is:
[ g ( t )L ]
P out = P in e
(9)
To include multiple frequency bands, the term P(N,t) / f in Equation 6 should be

substituted with:
P k ( N ,t )
∑ ------------------
fk
-
k
(10)
where fk is the center frequency for each frequency band.
Basic physical effects described by the model for single wavelength channel are gain
saturation, gain-saturation induced self-phase modulation, and gain recovery [3-5].
Gain-saturation induced self-phase modulation is responsible for important changes

in the spectrum of amplified pulses:
• appearance of multi-peak spectral structure
• red shift of the spectrum
810
TRAVELING WAVE SOA
• appearance of the positive chirp
In addition, the shape and the spectral pulse distortions depend on the shape and the
initial frequency pulse modulation.
Gain saturation and gain recovery effects for Gaussian, super Gaussian, and chirped
Gaussian pulses for an SOA are in OptiSystem Tutorials — Introduction to the
basic gain saturation and gain recovery characteristics of the SOA. A strong
agreement with [3-4] can be identified in this section.
Generally, gain saturation effect is a serious obstacle for an SOA as an inline

amplifier. In the case of single-channel transmission, gain saturation effect leads to a
pattern effect. Pattern effect is demonstrated for 10 Gb/s average soliton transmission
over a 500 km SMF optical link in OptiSystem Tutorials — Basic application of the
OSA as an inline amplifier.
In the case of multi-channel transmission, gain saturation effect leads to inter-channel

crosstalk. Independent of the problems connected with applying an SOA as an inline
amplifier, they are used near the 1.3 μm wavelength in SMF. The fundamental reason
for this is the possibility of avoiding the large group velocity dispersion of SMF at
1.55 μm [6-11]. This idea following [11] is demonstrated in OptiSystem Tutorials —
Basic application of the OSA as an inline amplifier.
Some undesirable properties of applying an SOA as an inline amplifier have found

other applications. For example, the positive pulse chirp created during the process
of amplification can be used for pulse compression if you can propagate the pulse in
a dispersive media with a proper sign of the group velocity dispersion. Pulse
compression with the help of SMF following [12] is described in OptiSystem
Tutorials — Applying the gain saturation properties of the SOA to obtain pulse
compression.
SOAs have found new applications as wavelength converters, fast switches for
wavelength routing in WDM networks, and nonlinear elements for clock recovery and
demultiplexing in TDM systems [5, 13-14]. In OptiSystem Tutorials — Application
of the SOA as a wavelength converter, SOA wavelength conversion is
demonstrated based on four-wave mixing and cross-saturation effects.
References
[1] M.J. Adams, H.J. Westlake, M.J. O’Mahony, I.D. Henning, “A Comparison of Active and
Passive Optical Bistability in Semiconductors”, IEEE Journal of Quantum Electronics, Vol. QE-
21, N 9, September 1985.
[2] M.J. O’Mahoney, “Semiconductor Laser Optical Amplifier for use in Fiber Systems,” Journal of
Lightwave Technology, Vol. 6, N 4, April 1988.
[3] G.P. Agrawal and N.A. Olsson, “Self-Phase Modulation and Spectral Broadening of optical
pulses in semiconductor Laser Amplifiers”, IEEE J. of Quantum Electronics, Vol. QE-25, N 11,
pp. 2297-2306, November 1989.
[4] N.A. Olsson and G.P. Agrawal, “Spectral shift and distortion due to self-phase modulation of
picosecond pulses in 1.5 mm optical amplifiers”, Appl. Phys. Lett. 55, N 1, pp. 13-15, July 1989.
811
TRAVELING WAVE SOA
[5] G.P. Agrawal, “Fiber-Optic Communication Systems”, Second edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
1997.
[6] J.J. Reid, C.T.H.F. Liendenbaum, L.F. Tiemeijer, A.J. Boot, P.I. Kuindersma, I. Gabitov, and A.
Mattheus, in Proceedings of the 20th European Conference on Optical Communication
(Instituto Internationale delle Communicaziono, Genova, Italy, 1994).
[7] A. Mecozzi, “Optics Letters,” 20, 1616-1618, 1995.
[8] S. Wabnitz, “Optics Letters,” 20, 1979-1982, 1995.
[9] S.K. Turitsyn, Phys. Rev. E 54, R3125, 1996.
[10] I.M. Uzunov, M. Golles, and F. Lederer, “Optics Letters,” 22, 1406-1408, 1997.
[11] M. Settembre, F. Matera, V. Hagele, I. Gabitov, A.W. Mattheus, and S. Turitsyn, “Journal of
Lightwave Technology,” Vol. 15, pp. 962-967, 1997.
[12] G.P. Agrawal and N.A. Olsson, “Optics Letters,” 14, 500-502, 1989.
[13] T. Durhuus, B. Mikkelsen, and K.E. Stubkjaer, “Journal of Lightwave Technology,” Vol. 10, pp.
1056-1065, 1992.
[14] T. Durhuus, B. Mikkelsen, C. Joergensen, S.L. Danielsen, and K.E. Stubkjaer, “Journal of
Lighwave Technology,” Vol. 14, pp. 942-954, 1992.
Technical references
[AGR, 1993] G.P. Agrawal and N.K. Dutta, “Semiconductor lasers,” Second edition, International Thomson
Publishing, Inc., 1993.
[BAS, 1992] S.P. Bastien, H. R. D. Sunak, B. Sridhar, V. E. Kalomiris “Temporal, spatial and spectral modeling of
erbium doped fiber amplifiers”, SPIE – Physic and Simulations of Optoelectronic Devices, pp. 2-11,
1992
[BUR, 1998] J. Burgmeier, A. Cords, R. März, C. Schäffer, B. Stummer “A black box model of EDFA’s operating in
WDM systems”, Journal of LIghtwave Technology, Vol. 16, N. 7, pp. 1271-1275, 1998
[DES, 1994] E. Desurvire, “Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers – Principles and Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
USA, 1994
[GIL, 1991] C.R. Giles, E. Desurvire, "Modeling erbium-doped fiber amplifiers," Journal of LIghtwave Technology,
Vol. 9, N. 2, pp. 271-283, 1991
[KAR, 1998] J. A. Vallés, “Analysis of channel addition/removal response in all-optical gain-controlled cascade of
erbium-doped fiber amplifiers”, Journal of Lightwave Technology, Vol. 16, N. 10, pp. 1795-1803, 1998
[OKO, 1990] T. Okoshi, "Exact Noise-Figure Formulas for Optical Amplifiers and Amplifier-Fiber Cascaded Chains,"
IEEE/OSA Topical Meeting on Optical Amplifiers and their Applications, Monterrey, PDP11, 1990
[SHI, 1994] S. Shimada, H. Ishio, “Optical Amplifiers and their Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, Chichester, 1994.
812
WIDEBAND TRAVELING WAVE SOA
Wideband Traveling Wave SOA
The component simulates a traveling wave SOA based on a homogeneous buried

ridge stripe SOA.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Injection current l 0.13 A [0, 10]
Input coupling loss η IN 3 dB [0, 100]
Output coupling loss ηo 3 dB [0, 100]
Input facet reflectivity R1 5e-5 [0, 5e-3]
Output facet reflectivity R2 5e-5 [0, 5e-3]
Physical

Length L 700e-6 m [1e-8, 1e-2]
Active region length
813

Cross-section data False True, False
Defines whether the use will enter the

dimensions or the active area of the
device directly
Width w 0.4e-6 m [1e-8, 1e-2]
Active region width
Height h 0.4e-6 m [1e-8, 1e-2]
Active region thickness
Active Area 1.6e-013 m^2 [1e-16, 0.01]
The device’s active area
Optical confinement factor Γ 0.45 [0, 1]
Recombination coefficient A A 360000000 1/s [0, 1e15]
Recombination coefficient B B 5.6e-016 m^3/s [0, 1e-10]
Recombination coefficient C C 3e-041 m^6/s [1e5, 3e8]
Group velocity Vg 75000000 m/s [1e5, 3e8]
Temperature T 300 K [0, 1e3]
Enhanced

Material gain No approximation Linear,
Lorentzian, No
Define if the material gain coefficient is approximation
calculated based on reference [1], a
linear or Lorentzian approximation.
Gain constant ao 2.78e-20 m^2 ]0, 100e-20]
Differential gain coefficient
Gain constant a2 2.9e-32 m^4 ]0, 50e-10]
Gain constant characterizing the gain-

peak shift
Carrier density at transparency nt 1.4e24 m^-3 ]0, 10e25]
Linear radiative recombination

coefficient
814

Gain peak wavelength λt 1605 nm [1000, 1800]
Peak wavelength at transparency
Gain bandwidth Δλ 122.5 nm [1, 800]
The 3 dB bandwidth of the linear gain

coefficient
me me 4.1e-032 kg [0, 1e-10]
Effective mass of electron in the

conduction band
mhh mhh 4.19e-031 kg [0, 1e-10]
Effective mass of a heavy hole in the

valence band
mhl mhl 5.06e-032 kg [0, 1e-10]
Effective mass of a light hole in the

valence band
Arad Arad 10000000 1/s [0, 1e15]

coefficient
Brad Brad 5e-16 m^-3/s [0, 1e-10]
Bimolecular radiative recombination

coefficient
Active refractive index n1 3.22 [1, 10]
dn1/dn dnr -1.8e-026 m^-3 [0, 1e50]
Differential of active refractive index with

respect to carrier density
neq0 neq 3.22 [1, 10]
Equivalent effective refractive index at

zero carrier density
dneq/dn dneg -1.8e-026 m^-3 [0, 1e50]
Differential of equivalent refractive index

at zero carrier density
Kg kg 9e-011 eVm [0, 1]
Bandgap shrinkage coefficient
Eg0 Eg0 0.77725 eV [0, 1e-3]
Bandgap energy with no injected carrier
Ko Ko 6200 m^-1 [0, 1e10]
Carrier independent absorption loss

coefficient
815

K1 K1 7.5e-021 m^2 [0, 1e25]
Carrier dependent absorption loss

coefficient
Numerical

Numerical model Dynamic Dynamic, Static
Defines whether the device will use a Dynamic or Static

algorithm to process the input signals

Max. number of iterations 150 [1, 1e8]

process
Resample input signals False [True, False]
Specifies if the electrical and optical input signals should be

resampled in accordance with Δt = Δz/vg
Simulation

Noise
816
Noise threshold -100 dB [0, +INF]
Minimum value for adaptation of noise

bins

bins

bins
Random Numbers

value range
The component simulates a traveling wave wideband semiconductor optical amplifier
model [1]. This SOA model is based on the numerical solution of a set of coupled
differential equations that describe the interaction between the carrier density and
photon rates.
The traveling-wave equations for the signal fields are described by
+
dE sk ( z )
- = ⎛ – j ⋅ β k + 1--- ( Γ ⋅ g m ( v k, n ) – α ( n ) )⎞ ⋅ E sk+ ( z )
-------------------- (1)
dz ⎝ 2 ⎠
–
dE sk ( z ) 1 (2)
------------------ = ⎛ j ⋅ β k – --- ( Γ ⋅ g m ( v k, n ) – α ( n ) )⎞ ⋅ E sk ( z )
–
dz ⎝ 2 ⎠
817
where
E+sk is a complex traveling wave, propagating in the positive z direction
E-sk is a complex traveling wave, propagating in the negative z direction
z lies along the amplifier axis with its origin at the input face
βk is the propagation coefficient
α is the material loss coefficient
g m (v k,n) is the material gain coefficient
Γ is the optical confinement factor
The signal amplification also depends on the amount of spontaneously emitted noise
from the amplifier. The traveling wave equations for the spontaneous emission are
given by
+
dN j ( z ) (3)
---------------------- = ( Γ ⋅ g m ( v j, n ) – α ( n ) ) ⋅ N j + ( z ) + R sp ( v j, n )
dz
–
dN j ( z ) – (4)
------------------ = – ( Γ ⋅ g m ( v k, n ) – α ( n ) ) ⋅ N j ( z ) + R sp ( v j, n )
dz
where
N+ j is the spontaneous emission photon rate traveling in the positive z direction
N- j is the spontaneous emission photon rate traveling in the negative z direction
Rsp is the emission noise coupled into N+j and N-j
The carrier density rate equation expresses the conservation of carriers inside the
active layer. It takes into account the current density and the net rate of carrier
generation and recombination averaged over the active layer.
The recombination rate includes the radiative and nonradiative components. The
nonradiative components take into account the Auger recombination, which is
generally the dominant nonradiative process in long wavelength lasers.
818
The carrier density at z obeys the rate equation
⎧ N ⎫
dn ( z ) I Γ ⎪ + – ⎪
------------- = --------------------------- – R ( n ( z ) ) – ------------ ⋅ ⎨ ∑ g m ( v k, n ( z ) ) ( N sk ( z ) + N sk ( z ) ) ⎬
dt q⋅d⋅L⋅W d⋅W ⎪ ⎪
⎩k = 1 ⎭
⎧ Nm – 1 ⎫
⎪ + – ⎪ (5)
– ⎨ ∑ g m ( v j, n ( z ) ) ⋅ ( N j ( z ) + N j ( z ) ) ⎬
⎪ ⎪
⎩ j=1 ⎭
where
I is the injected bias current
R is the recombination rate term
q is the electronic charge
Ns is the number of signals injected in the SOA.
N+sk is the photon rate of the wave in that direction
N-sk is the photon rate of the wave in that direction
Initially, equations 1 to 5 are solved numerically by splitting the amplifier into a number
of sections and considering the steady state condition (the numerical algorithm
presented in [1] is used).
After the step above the time evolution of carrier density rate will depend only on
current bias level and the input fluxes in each section of the SOA.
The material gain is calculated based on definition chose at the Material gain
parameter in accordance with [1]
c
2 2 ⋅ m e ⋅ m hh (6)
- ⋅ ⎛ -------------------------------------------------
g m ( v, n ) = ---------------------------------------------------- -⎞
3⁄2 2 2 ⎝ h/ ( 2 ⋅ π ) ⋅ ( m ⋅ m )⎠
4 ⋅ 2 ⋅ π n1 ⋅ τ ⋅ v e hh
Where c is the light speed constant, h is the Planck constant and τ is the radiative
recombination lifetime.
Linear - The material gain is calculated based on the linear approximation (See
Traveling Wave SOA component technical description).
819
Lorentzian - The material gain is calculated as having a Lorentzian lineshape [2]:
a0 ⋅ ( n – nt )
g m ( v, n ) = --------------------------------2 (7)
( λ – λN )
1 + ----------------------
2
-
Δλ
Where λ N is the spectral shift given by:
(8)
λN = λt – a2 ⋅ ( n – nt )
References
[1] Michael J. Connelly, "Wideband Semiconductor Optical Amplifier Steady-State Numerical
Model". IEEE Journal of Quantum Electonics, vol. 37, no. 3. March 2001.
[2] Mourad Menif, Pascal Lemieux, Walid Mathlouthi and Leslie Ann Rusch, " Incoherent-to-
Coherent Wavelength Conversion Using Semiconductor Optical Amplifier" . IEEE International
Conference on Communications (ICC) 2004.
820
REFLECTIVE SOA
Reflective SOA
The component simulates a reflective semiconductor optical amplifier including the

dynamic dependence between electric and optical input signals.
Ports

Electrical Input Input Electrical
Electrical Output Output Electrical
Parameters
Main

Input coupling loss η IN 3 dB [0, 100]
Output coupling loss ηo 3 dB [0, 100]
Input facet reflectivity R1 5e-5 [0, 5e-3]
Output facet reflectivity R2 5e-5 [0, 5e-3]
Physical

Active length L 700e-6 m [1e-8, 1e-2]
Active region length
821
REFLECTIVE SOA

Taper length 700e-6 m [1e-8, 1e-2]
Taper region length
Cross-section data False [True, False]
Defines whether the user will enter the

cross-section dimensions or the active
area of the device
Width w 0.4e-6 m [1e-8, 1e-2]
Active region width
Height h 0.4e-6 m [1e-8, 1e-2]
Active region thickness
Active area Aeff 1.6e-13 m^2 [1e-18,0.01]
The cross section area of the active

layer
Optical confinement factor Γ 0.45 [0, 1]
Recombination coefficient A A 360000000 1/s [0, 1e15]
Recombination coefficient B B 5.6e-016 m^3/s [0, 1e-10]
Recombination coefficient C C 3e-041 m^6/s [1e5, 3e8]
Group velocity Vg 75000000 m/s [1e5, 3e8]
Temperature T 300 K [0, 1e3]
Junction ideality factor T 2 [0, 100]
Enhanced

Material gain No approximation kg No approximation,
Linear, Lorentzian
Define if the material gain coefficient is
calculated based on reference [1], linear
or Lorentzian approximation
Gain constant ao a0 2.5e-20 m^2 ]0,100e-20]
Differential gain coefficient
822
REFLECTIVE SOA

Gain constant a2 a2 2.9e-32 m^4 ]0,50-10]
Gain constant characterizing the gain-

peak shift
Carrier density at transparency nt 1.4e24 m^-3 ]0, 10e25]
Transparent carrier density
Nonlinear gain parameter εnl 1.2e-22 m^3 ]0, 100e-15]

Gain peak wavelength λt 1639 nm [1000,1800]
Peak wavelength at transparency
Gain bandwidth Δλ 122.5 nm [1,800]
The 3 dB bandwidth of the linear gain

coefficient
me me 4.1e-032 kg [0, 1e-10]
Effective mass of electron in the

conduction band
mhh mhh 4.19e-031 kg [0, 1e-10]
Effective mass of a heavy hole in the

valence band
mhl mhl 5.06e-032 kg [0, 1e-10]
Effective mass of a light hole in the

valence band
Arad Arad 10000000 1/s [0, 1e15]

coefficient
Brad Brad 5e-16 m^3/s [0, 1e-10]
Bimolecular radiative recombination

coefficient
Active refractive index n1 3.22 [1, 10]
dn1/dn dnr -1.8e-026 m^-3 [0, 1e50]
Differential of active refractive index with

respect to carrier density
neq0 neq 3.22 [1, 10]

823
REFLECTIVE SOA

dneq/dn dneg -1.8e-026 m^-3 [0, 1e50]
Differential of equivalent refractive index

at zero carrier density
Kg kg 9e-011 eVm [0, 1]
Bandgap shrinkage coefficient
Eg0 Eg0 0.77725 eV [0, 1e-3]
Bandgap energy with no injected carrier
Ko Ko 6200 m^-1 [0, 1e10]
Carrier independent absorption loss

coefficient
K1 K1 7.5e-021 m^2 [0, 1e25]
Carrier dependent absorption loss

coefficient
Numerical


Max. number of iterations 150 [1, 1e8]

process
Resample input signals False [True, False]
Specifies if the electrical and optical input signals should be

resampled in accordance with Δt = Δz/vg
Simulation

824
REFLECTIVE SOA
Noise
Noise threshold -100 dB [0, +INF]

bins

bins

bins
Random Numbers

value range
The component simulates a reflective semiconductor optical amplifier (RSOA) model
with bulk material as the active element [1]. This SOA model is based on the
numerical solution of a set of coupled differential equations that describe the
interaction between the carrier density and photon rates along the active layer length.
The rate and propagation equations solved in this model are similar to the ones
described in the Wideband Traveling Wave SOA technical background, however the
value of the injection current here is considered as an input signal allowing the
modulation of the optical signal by the SOA.
This component also considers the possibility of sensing the differences in voltage
produced at the bias electrode of the single-section SOA. In this case the voltage
variation is defined by the following equation [2]:
825
REFLECTIVE SOA
K B T N bias ( z ) + N ( z ) (1)
Vφ = η j ---------- ln --------------------------------------
e N bias ( z )
References
[1] Michael J. Connelly, "Wideband Semiconductor Optical Amplifier Steady-State Numerical
Model". IEEE Journal of Quantum Electonics, vol. 37, no. 3. March 2001.
[2] Thierry Rampone, Hong-Wu Li, and Ammar Sharaiha. "Semiconductor Optical Amplifier Used
as an In-Line Detector with the Signal DC-Component Conservation". IEEE Journal of
Lightwave Technology, vol. 16, no. 7. July 1998.
826
REFLECTIVE SOA
Amplifiers Library
Electrical
• Limiting Amplifier
• Electrical Amplifier
• Transimpedance Amplifier
• AGC Amplifier
827
REFLECTIVE SOA
Notes:
828
LIMITING AMPLIFIER
Limiting Amplifier
This component is an electrical limiting amplifier. The minimum and maximum output signal values are
user-defined parameters.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Gain 10 dB [-1e+100,
1e+100]
Amplifier gain
Max. output voltage 0.5 Volt ]INF,+INF[
The maximum value of the output signal.
Min. output voltage -0.5 Volt ]INF,+INF[

The minimum value of the output signal.
Transition time 20 ps [1e-10,1e+10]
This value, that represents the rise/fall time, will limite the output
bandwidth.
Include noise Yes — —
PSD Yes — —
Determines whether the power is defined as PSD or the average

power in time
Noise power –60 dBm W, mW, dBm
829
LIMITING AMPLIFIER

value range
Enable DC block Yes — —
Add a DC block at the amplifier input
Simulation

value range
Enabled True —
Noise

value range
Add noise to signal Yes — —
Random numbers

value range
830
LIMITING AMPLIFIER
This component apply a gain in the input signals and compares the amplified
amplitude with the parameters Max. output voltage and Min. output voltage. If the
signal value is outside of the range between the min and max values, the signal will
be clipped. This component does not affect the noise amplitude, only the signal
amplitude, unless the option to include noise is enabled. A DC block can be applied
to the input signal if the parameter Enable DC block is checked.
831
LIMITING AMPLIFIER
832
ELECTRICAL AMPLIFIER
Electrical Amplifier
Electrical amplifier with additive thermal noise.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Gain 10 dB [-1e+100,
1e+100]
PSD Yes — —
Determines whether the power is defined as PSD or the average

power in time
Noise power –60 dBm W, mW, dBm

Simulation

value range
Enabled True —
833
ELECTRICAL AMPLIFIER
Noise

value range
Add noise to signal Yes — —
Random numbers

value range
834
TRANSIMPEDANCE AMPLIFIER
Transimpedance Amplifier
This component is an electrical transimpedance amplifier with user defined noise figure. It has linear gain
and additive thermal noise.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Voltage gain 600 Ohm, kOhm, [0,+INF[
dB
The linear gain of the amplifier.
Include Noise True — True, false

Defines whether the noise will included in the output
Noise equivalent bandwidth 0.8 * Bit rate Hz, MHz, GHz [0,+INF]
Frequency range of the noise power
Noise figure 6 dB [0,+INF]
Input noise density 4e-21 A/Hz-1, W/Hz, [0,+INF]

mW/Hz,
Minimum input noise
dBm/Hz
835
TRANSIMPEDANCE AMPLIFIER
Simulation

value range
Enabled True —
Noise

value range
PSD Yes — —

or the average power in time
Noise power –60 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1e+100,

1e+100]
Add noise to signal No — —
Random numbers

value range
This component amplifies the input electrical signal and adds thermal noise to the
signal output. The value of the thermal noise is calculated from the input SNR and the
user defined parameter Noise figure.
Since OptiSystem can have noiseless electrical signals, the parameter Input noise
density assures a minimum value for the noise floor at the input signal.
836
AGC AMPLIFIER
AGC Amplifier
This component is an electrical limiting amplifier with user defined noise figure. It has signal dependent
gain and additive thermal noise.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Output voltage 0.005 Volt [0,+INF[
The peak value of the output signal.
Include Noise False — True, false

Defines whether the noise will included in the output
Noise equivalent bandwidth 0.8 * Bit rate Hz, MHz, GHz [0,+INF]
Frequency range of the noise power
Noise figure 6 dB [0,+INF]

mW/Hz,
Minimum input noise
dBm/Hz
837
AGC AMPLIFIER
Simulation

value range
Enabled True —
Noise

value range
PSD Yes — —

or the average power in time
Noise power –60 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1e+100,

1e+100]
Add noise to signal No — —
Random numbers

value range
This component amplifies/attenuates the input electrical signal and adds thermal
noise to the signal output. The output signal will have a peak value defined by the
parameter Output voltage. The value of the thermal noise is calculated from the input
SNR and the user defined parameter Noise figure.
838
Filters Library
Optical
• Optical Digital Filter
• Optical IIR Filter (Obsolete)
• Measured Optical Filter
• Measured Group Delay Optical Filter
• Rectangle Optical Filter
• Trapezoidal Optical Filter
• Gaussian Optical Filter
• Butterworth Optical Filter
• Bessel Optical Filter
• Fabry Perot Optical Filter
• Acousto Optical Filter
• Mach-Zehnder Interferometer
• Inverted Optical Digital Filter
• Inverted Optical IIR Filter (Obsolete)
• Inverted Rectangle Optical Filter
• Inverted Trapezoidal Optical Filter
• Inverted Gaussian Optical Filter
• Inverted Butterworth Optical Filter
• Inverted Bessel Optical Filter
• Gain Flattening Filter
• Delay Interferometer
• Transmission Filter Bidirectional
• Reflective Filter Bidirectional
• 3-Port Filter Bidirectional
• Periodic Optical Filter
839
Notes:
840
OPTICAL IIR FILTER (OBSOLETE)
Optical IIR Filter (Obsolete)
Infinite impulse response filter (IIR) for optical signals.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Filter center frequency
Filter sample rate 1000 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, [1e-9,+INF[

nm
User-defined sample rate independent from the
signal sample rate
Additional loss 0 dB — [0,+INF[

Loss applied to the signal after filtering
Filter coefficients type Z domain — — Frequency

domain, Poles
Type of numerator and denominator coefficients
and zeros, Z
for the filter domain
Numerator coefficients

Numerator coefficients 3 — [1,+INF[
Number of numerator coefficients
Numerator[0].real 0.64 — ]-INF,+INF[
Numerator[0].imag 0 — ]-INF,+INF[
841

Denominator coefficients

Denominator coefficients 3 — [1,+INF[
Number of denominator coefficients
Denominator[0].real 5.05 — ]-INF,+INF[
Denominator[0].imag 0 — ]-INF,+INF[
Denominator[1].real –4.75 — ]-INF,+INF[
Simulation

value range

enabled


Digital filter False — — True, False
Determines whether or not the individual samples

filter is digital
842
Noise

value range

The infinite impulse response filter is a recursive digital filter. The transfer function can
be expressed in the z domain as:
N
α ∑ an z
–n
n=0
H ( z ) = -----------------------
M
-
∑b
–m
m z
m=0
where H(z) is the filter transfer function in the Z domain, α is the parameter for
Additional loss, N is the parameter number of Numerator coefficients, an are the
coefficients for the numerator, M is the parameter number of Denominator
coefficients, and bm are the coefficients for the denominator.
Also,
z = exp ( j2π ( f – f c ) ⁄ f s )
where fc is the filter center frequency defined by the parameter Frequency, fs is the
parameter Filter sample rate, and f is the frequency.
According to the parameter Filter coefficients type, the filter transfer function can be
given in the z (Z domain) or in the frequency domain. In the second case, the filter is
determined by the numerator and the denominator polynomial, which can be
expressed by their roots (Poles and zeros) or by the polynomial coefficients (in
Frequency domain).
Note: Individual samples require that the filter coefficients are given in the z domain.
843
Notes:
844
OPTICAL DIGITAL FILTER
Optical Digital Filter
Infinite impulse response filter (IIR) for optical signals.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range

nm
signal sample rate


domain, Poles
and zeros, Z
for the filter domain, Poles
and residues

value
Numerator coefficients 2 — [0, 10000]
Number of nominator coefficients that will be used in the calculation
845

value
Numerator coefficients real imag 2x2 — [-1e+100,1e+100]
Table with real and imaginary part of complex coefficients
Numerator coefficients filename Numerators.dat — —


Denominator coefficients 2 — [0, 10000]
Number of denominator coefficients that will be used in the
calculation
Denominator coefficients real imag 2x2 — [-

1e+100,1e+100
]
Denominator coefficients filename Denominator.dat — —
Simulation

value range

enabled

Digital filter False — — True, False

Determines whether or not the individual samples
filter is digital
Noise

value range
846

value range
N
α ∑ an z
–n
n=0
H ( z ) = -----------------------
M
-
∑b
–m
m z
m=0
where H(z) is the filter transfer function in the Z domain, α is the parameter for
Also,
z = exp ( j2π ( f – f c ) ⁄ f s )
expressed by their roots (Poles and zeros), by the polynomial coefficients or by its
poles and residues (in Frequency domain).
847
Notes:
848
MEASURED OPTICAL FILTER
Measured Optical Filter
Filter based on measurements.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
User-defined frequency True — — True, False
Determines whether you can define the filter
center frequency or use the value from the
measurements

User-defined filter center frequency
Measurements

value range
File frequency unit Hz — Hz, GHz, THz,
m, nm
File format Power — Power, Power

Phase, Real
Determines the format of the file with the measurements
Imag, phase
Linear scale True — ]-INF,+INF[
Determines whether the measured data is in linear scale or not
849

value range
Filter filename Filter.dat — —
Numerical

value range
Simulation

value range

enabled


Noise

value range
850
Graphs

Filter transmission - real part Frequency (Hz) Amplitude (a.u.)
Filter transmission - imag part Frequency (Hz) Amplitude (a.u.)
The input file is formatted containing two items per line — frequency and filter
measurement. The parameter File frequency unit determines the frequency or
wavelength unit of the first item. It can be in Hz, THz, m, or nm.
Power (Phase is set to zero, assuming frequency unit is THz)
193.10 0
193.11 0.5
193.12 0.5
193.13 0
...
Power Phase
193.10 0 0
193.11 0.5 3.14
193.12 0.5 3.14
193.13 0 0
...
851
Real Imag
193.10 0
193.11 –0.5 7.9e-4
193.12 –0.5 7.9e-4
193.13 0 0
...
193.10 0
193.11 3.14
193.12 3.14
193.13 0
...
The parameter User defined frequency determines if you can enter the center
frequency. This means that the filter data is shifted from the measured center
frequency to the user center frequency that you define in the parameter Frequency.
852
MEASURED GROUP DELAY OPTICAL FILTER
Measured Group Delay Optical Filter
Loads files with the filter amplitude and group delay ripple measurements. This FBG
was designed mainly for dispersion compensation.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Transmission Output Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
—
User-defined frequency True — True, False

measurements
Measurements

value range
—
File frequency unit m nm, m

—
Group delay unit ps s, pss
Determines the group delay unit of the file with the measurements
File format Delay — Power, Power

Delay, Delay
853

value range
Determines whether or not the measured data is in linear scale
Filename GroupDelay.dat — —
Reload file False — True, False
Defines whether the component should reload the filter data for each
run
Numerical

value range
Simulation

value range

enabled
Determines if the filter will down sample the

signal bandwidth to the filter sample rate
Sample rate 500 GHz Hz, GHz, THz [1e-9,+INF[
Noise

value range

854
Graphs

Filter transmission — Amplitude Wavelength (m) Amplitude (a.u.)
Filter transmission — Phase Wavelength (m) Phase (rad)
This model is a filter with measured group delay. The filter transfer function is
jφ ( f ) (1)
H(f) = e
where f is the frequency dependence phase of the filter.
The group delay is defined by Equation 1:
1 dφ
τ ( f ) = – ------ ------ (2)
2π df
Writing Equation 2 as a function of wavelength:
2
λ dφ (3)
τ ( λ ) = --------- ------
2πc dλ
where c is the speed of light.
You define τ by entering the table with the measurements.

Typically, this measurement looks like the graph in Figure 1, where X is the
wavelength in nm and Y is the group delay in ps:
855
Figure 1 Group delay measurement
Calculate the phase from this curve in order to calculate the filter transfer function.
Phase calculation
The phase is calculated with Equation 3:
1
φ = 2πc ∫ τ ( λ ) ----2- dλ (4)
λ
File format
The input file is formatted with two items per line — the wavelength and the filter
measurement. The parameter File frequency unit determines the wavelength unit of
the first item, and can be in m or in nm. The parameter Group delay unit determines
the group delay unit, and can be in s or in ps.
Delay) or two values (Power and Delay).
856
Example of input file:
Power (Delay is set to zero)
1551 0
1551.1 0.5
1551.2 0.5
1551.3 0
...
Power Delay
1551 0 0
1551.1 0.5 –10
1551.2 0.5 –20
1551.3 0 –30
...
Delay (Power is set to one)
1551 0
1551.1 –10
1551.2 –20
1551.3 –30
...
frequency to the user center frequency that you define in the parameter Frequency.
857
References
[1] Madsen, C. K. and Zhao, J H., Optical Filter Design and Analysis: A Signal Processing
Approach. John Wiley & Sons, USA, (1999).
858
RECTANGLE OPTICAL FILTER
Rectangle Optical Filter
Optical filter with a rectangle frequency transfer function.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Bandwidth 10 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, ]0,+INF[

nm
3 dB filter bandwidth
Insertion loss 0 dB — [0,+INF[
Depth 100 dB — [0,+INF[
Simulation

value range

enabled
859
RECTANGLE OPTICAL FILTER

value range

Noise

value range
The filter transfer function is:
⎧ α, ⎫ fc – B ⁄ 2 < f < fc + B ⁄ 2
H(f) = ⎨ ⎬
⎩ d, ⎭ otherwise
where H(f) is the filter transfer function, α is the parameter Insertion loss, d is the
parameter Depth, fc is the filter center frequency defined by the parameter Frequency,
B is the parameter Bandwidth, and f is the frequency.
860
TRAPEZOIDAL OPTICAL FILTER
Trapezoidal Optical Filter
Optical filter with a trapezoidal frequency transfer function.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Zero dB bandwidth 10 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, ]0,+INF[

nm
Filter bandwidth at 0 dB

nm
Filter bandwidth at cutoff magnitude
Cutoff magnitude 3 dB — [0,+INF[
Attenuation at the filter bandwidth
861
TRAPEZOIDAL OPTICAL FILTER
Simulation

value range

enabled


Noise

value range
The filter transfer function is:where
1–A
⎧ ------------------------------- ( f – f 2 )
10B – B 0dB f > f2
⎪ α.10 ,
⎪ f1 < fc < f2
H(f) = ⎨ α,
⎪ 1 – A - (f – f ) f < f1
⎪ ------------------------------
10B – B 0dB 1
⎩ α.10 ,
f 1 = f c – B 0dB ⁄ 2
f 2 = f c + B 0dB ⁄ 2
and H(f) is the filter transfer function, α is the parameter Insertion loss, fc is the filter
center frequency defined by the parameter Frequency, B is the parameter Bandwidth
at the cutoff magnitude, B0dB is the parameter Zero dB bandwidth, and f is the
frequency.
862
GAUSSIAN OPTICAL FILTER
Gaussian Optical Filter
Optical filter with a Gaussian frequency transfer function.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range

nm
Order 1 — — [1,100]
863
GAUSSIAN OPTICAL FILTER
Simulation

value range

enabled


Noise

value range
f – f 2N
– ln ( 2 ) ⎛ -----------c⎞
⎝ B ⁄ 2⎠
H ( f ) = αe
where H(f) is the filter transfer function, α is the parameter Insertion loss, fc is the filter
center frequency defined by the parameter Frequency, B is the parameter Bandwidth,
N is the parameter Order, and f is the frequency.
864
BUTTERWORTH OPTICAL FILTER
Butterworth Optical Filter
Optical filter with a Butterworth frequency transfer function.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range

nm
Order 1 — — [1,100]
865
BUTTERWORTH OPTICAL FILTER
Simulation

value range

enabled


Noise

value range
Butterworth filters are a class of all-pole filters with maximally flat frequency response.
N
α(B ⁄ 2)
H ( f ) = ------------------------------------------
N–1
∏ ( j ( f – fc ) – pk )
k=0
where
π 2k + 1
j --- ⎛ 1 + ---------------⎞
B 2⎝ N ⎠
p k = --- ⋅ e
2
and H(f) is the filter transfer function, α is the parameter Insertion loss, fc is the filter
866
BESSEL OPTICAL FILTER
Bessel Optical Filter
Optical filter with a Bessel frequency transfer function.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range

nm
Order 1 — — [1,100]
867
Simulation

value range

enabled


Noise

value range
868
Bessel filters have a transfer function of the form:
d0
H ( s ) = α --------------
BN ( s )
α is the parameter Insertion loss, N is the parameter Order, and

( 2N )!-
d 0 = ---------------
N
2 ⋅ N!
is a normalizing constant and BN(s) is an nth-order Bessel polynomial of the form

N
k
BN ( s ) = ∑ dk s
k=0
where
( 2N – k )! -
d k = --------------------------------------
N–k
2 ⋅ k! ( N – k )!
and
2 ( f – fc ) ⋅ wb
s = j ⎛ ------------------------------⎞
⎝ B ⎠
where fc is the filter center frequency defined by the parameter Frequency, B is the
parameter Bandwidth, and Wb denotes the normalized 3 dB bandwidth and can be
approximated by
w b ≈ ( 2N – 1 ) ⋅ ln 2
for N≥ 10
For N<10, a table of values for each Wb is used and the exact value of the bandwidth
is obtained.
869
Important: Previous versions older than OptiSystem 7.0 used a different equation to
estimate the 3 dB bandwidth. The following table provides the multiplication factor that
has to be multiplied by the current bandwidth in order to obtain the same results of
versions older than OptiSystem 7.0:
Filter order Multiplication factor
1 1.1989
2 0.9476
3 0.9476
4 0.9581
5 0.9791
6 0.9791
7 0.9895
8 0.9895
9 0.9895
10 0.9895
870
FABRY PEROT OPTICAL FILTER
Fabry Perot Optical Filter
Optical filter with a Fabry Perot frequency transfer function.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range

nm
Free spectral range 500 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, ]0,+INF[

nm
Free spectral range of the filter
871
FABRY PEROT OPTICAL FILTER
Simulation

value range

enabled


Noise

value range
1–R
H ( f ) = α ----------------------------------
(f – f )
-
c-
2πJ ----------------
FSR
1 – R∗ e
and f is the frequency.
where
πB 2 πB 2
2 + ⎛ -----------⎞ – ⎛ 2 + -----------⎞ – 4
⎝ FSR⎠ ⎝ FSR⎠
R = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
2
where FSR is the parameter Free spectral range.
872
ACOUSTO OPTICAL FILTER
Acousto Optical Filter
Optical filter with an Acousto optical frequency transfer function.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Transmission Ouput Optical
Reflection Output Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
nm

Channels

value range
Number of channels 4 — — [1,+INF[
Number of filter channels
Frequency[0] 193.1 THz Hz, THz, nm [0,+INF[
Filter center frequency 0
873

value range

Simulation

value range

enabled

Noise

value range
874
The filter transfer function is described using a sum of power transfer functions of the
type
sin ( k ( f – f c ) ⁄ B )
H n ( f ) = α ---------------------------------------
( k ( f – f nc ) ⁄ B )
where k=2.78311475, Hn(f) is the filter transfer function for each channel, α is the
parameter Insertion loss, fnc is the filter center frequency defined by the parameter
Frequency for each channel n, B is the parameter Bandwidth, and f is the frequency.
875
Notes:
876
MACH-ZEHNDER INTERFEROMETER
Mach-Zehnder Interferometer
Ports

Parameters
MainSimulation

value range
Delay 0 s s, ms, ns [1e-9,+INF[
Time delay of the first path
Coupling coefficient 0.5 — — [0,1]

Cross coupling coefficients
Loss applied to the signal at the output
Conjugate True — — True, False
Defines whether the component uses the complex

conjugate definition or not

value range
Discrete delay True — True, False
If the parameter Discrete delay is true, the delay is rounded to a

multiple of the sampling period, otherwise the time shift property of
the Fourier transform is applied using the exact delay value
877
MACH-ZEHNDER INTERFEROMETER
The Mach-Zehnder filter is tunable and consists of two couplers, which are connected
by two waveguides. The filter transfer function for such a case is defined by:
H ( f ) = H coupler ( f )H τ H coupler ( f )
where H(f) is the filter transfer function and f is the frequency.
with:
1 – α pj α
H coupler ( f ) =
pj α 1–α
where α is the parameter Coupling coefficient. If the parameter Conjugate is disabled,

p is positive (value = 1), and the coupler will use the definition of [1], otherwise p is
negative (value = -1) and the coupler will use the definition of [2].
– j2πfτ
e 0
Hτ ( f ) =
0 1
where t is the parameter time Delay.
References
[1] Gerd Keiser, “Optical Fiber Communications,” Third Edition, McGraw-Hill, Higher Education,
2000.
[2] Christi K. Madsen and Jian H. Zhao, "Optical Filter Design and Analysis, A Signal Processing
Approach", (John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1999).
878
INVERTED OPTICAL IIR FILTER (OBSOLETE)
Inverted Optical IIR Filter (Obsolete)
Inverted infinite impulse response filter (IIR) for optical signals.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range

nm
signal sample rate


domain, Poles
and zeros, Z
879


Simulation

value range
enabled

880
Noise

value range

The transfer function is of the form:
2
H ( f ) = α 1 – H IIR ( f )
where H(f) is the filter transfer function, α is the parameter Insertion loss, HIIR(f) is the
IIR filter transfer function (see Optical IIR Filter (Obsolete)), and f is the frequency.
881
Notes:
882
INVERTED OPTICAL DIGITAL FILTER
Inverted Optical Digital Filter
Inverted infinite impulse response filter (IIR) for optical signals.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range

nm
signal sample rate


domain, Poles
and zeros, Z
for the filter domain, Poles
and residues

value
883

value


calculation

1e+100,1e+100
]
Simulation

value range

enabled

Noise

value range
884
2
H ( f ) = α 1 – H IIR ( f )
where H(f) is the filter transfer function, α is the parameter Insertion loss, HIIR(f) is the
IIR filter transfer function (see Optical IIR Filter (Obsolete)), and f is the frequency.
885
Notes:
886
INVERTED RECTANGLE OPTICAL FILTER
Inverted Rectangle Optical Filter
Optical filter with an inverted rectangle frequency transfer function.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range

nm
Simulation

value range

enabled
887
INVERTED RECTANGLE OPTICAL FILTER

value range

Noise

value range
2
H ( f ) = α 1 – H Rect ( f )
where H(f) is the filter transfer function, α is the parameter Insertion loss, HRect(f) is
the rectangle filter transfer function (see Rectangle Optical Filter), and f is the
frequency.
888
INVERTED TRAPEZOIDAL OPTICAL FILTER
Inverted Trapezoidal Optical Filter
Optical filter with an inverted trapezoidal frequency transfer function.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Zero dB bandwidth 10 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, [1e-9,+INF[

nm
Bandwidth 100 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, [1e-9,+INF[

nm
Cutoff magnitude 3 dB — [0,+INF[
889
INVERTED TRAPEZOIDAL OPTICAL FILTER
Simulation

value range

enabled


Noise

value range
Noise threshold –100 dB ]-INF,0[
Noise dynamic 3 dB [0,+INF[
890
INVERTED GAUSSIAN OPTICAL FILTER
Inverted Gaussian Optical Filter
Optical filter with an inverted gaussian frequency transfer function.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range

nm
Order 1 — — [1,100]
891
INVERTED GAUSSIAN OPTICAL FILTER
Simulation

value range

enabled


Noise

value range
The transfer function is:
2
H ( f ) = α 1 – H Gauss ( f )
where H(f) is the filter transfer function, α is the parameter Insertion loss, HGauss(f) is
the filter transfer function (see Gaussian Optical Filter), and f is the frequency.
892
INVERTED BUTTERWORTH OPTICAL FILTER
Inverted Butterworth Optical Filter
Optical filter with an inverted Butterworth frequency transfer function.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range

nm
Order 1 — — [1,100]
893
INVERTED BUTTERWORTH OPTICAL FILTER
Simulation

value range

enabled


Noise

value range
2
H ( f ) = α 1 – HB ( f )
where H(f) is the filter transfer function, α is the parameter Insertion loss, HB(f) is the
filter transfer function (see Butterworth Optical Filter), and f is the frequency.
894
INVERTED BESSEL OPTICAL FILTER
Inverted Bessel Optical Filter
Optical filter with an inverted Bessel frequency transfer function.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range

nm
Order 1 — — [1,100]
895
INVERTED BESSEL OPTICAL FILTER
Simulation

value range

enabled


Noise

value range
2
H ( f ) = α 1 – HB ( f )
where H(f) is the filter transfer function, α is the parameter Insertion loss, HB(f) is the
filter transfer function (see Bessel Optical Filter), and f is the frequency.
896
GAIN FLATTENING FILTER
Gain Flattening Filter
This component is a filter the can be optimized for gain flattening filter or signal
equalization applications. It can be used alone or combined with OptiSystem
optimization engines.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Transmission Ouput Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Number of channels 4 — —
Number of points for the frequency and transmission parameters
Channels

value range
Frequency[0] 193.1 THz Hz, THz, nm [30,3e5]
Frequency for transmission value 0

897

value range
Transmission[0] 0 dB dB ]-INF,0]
Transmission value for frequency 0
Numerical

value range
Interpolation Cubic — Linear, Cubic
Graphs

value range
Define whether to calculate graphs or not
Number of points 100 — — [10,100e6]
From 1500 nm nm [100,2000]
Wavelength lower limit for the graph
To 1600 nm nm [100,2000]
Wavelength upper limit for the graph
898
Simulation

value range

enabled
Noise

value range
Graphs

Transmission Wavelength (m) Transmission (dB)
This component allows for easy access to the filter transmission properties. Users can
change the number of points by changing the parameter Number of channels. The
values for the frequency and transmission points define the filter transfer function.
For gain flattening applications for optical amplifiers, the values of the frequency
points typically are the same as the values for the input signal channel center
frequencies.
OptiSystem optimization engines can estimate the values for the transmission in
order to minimize the ration between minimum and maximum gain (ripple) between
two points in the system. The second output port provides the inverse transfer
function of the filter.
This component can also generate the graph for the filter transmission using a user
defined range and number of points. The graphs can be exported as a file, the user
can select between linear or cubic interpolation.
899
Notes:
900
DELAY INTERFEROMETER
Delay Interferometer
The component simulates a delay interferometer with wavelength dependence.
Ports

Parameter
Main
Name and description Symbol Default unit Units Value range

Delay Δt 25e-3 s, ms, ns [0, 1e100]
Time delay applied in one of the

interferometer arms
PDF ΔF 700 MHz [0, 1e100]
Polarization-dependent frequency shift
IL α IL 30 dB [0, 100]
Maximum ratio between the outputs

transmission IL = T1/T2
PDL α PDL 0.05 dB [0, 100]
Polarization-dependent loss
Additional loss α EL 0.35 dB [0, 100]
Excess loss
Reference wavelength λR 1550 Hz, THz, nm [1300, 1800]
Wavelength that will be referenced for

the time delay
901
DELAY INTERFEROMETER
The Delay Interferometer basically considers that difference between the two arms of
a fiber optic interferometer is wavelength dependent and polarization sensitive. Figure
1 shows a general schematic of the interferometer.
Figure 1 Interferometer schematic
where the phase delay difference between the arms, ΔΦ , is proportional to the signal
wavelength and its simulation is implemented by applying the Jones matrix to the
input signal. The Jones matrix is calculated based on the main parameters set by the
user.
902
TRANSMISSION FILTER BIDIRECTIONAL
Transmission Filter Bidirectional
This component is bidirectional filter.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Filter type Rectangle [Rectangle,
Gaussian,
Defines the filter shape Butterworth,
Bessel, Raised
cosine,
Trapezoidal]
Order 2 [1, 100]
Gaussian, Bessel or Butterworth filter order
Roll off factor 0.5 [0, 1]
Raised cosine filter roll off factor
Zero dB bandwidth 0.01 Hz, THz, nm [100, 2000]
Defines the trapezoidal filter zero dB bandwidth
Center wavelength 1550 Hz, THz, nm [100, 2000]
Defines the filter center wavelength
Bandwidth 0.1 Hz, GHz, THz, nm [0, 200]
Defines the filter bandwidth
903

Insertion loss 0 dB [0, +INF]
Component insertion loss at the operating wavelength
Max. insertion loss 100 dB [0, +INF]
Component insertion loss outside the operating bandwidth
Return loss 65 dB [0, +INF]
Component return loss at the operating wavelength
Phase shift 90 deg, rad [-INF, +INF]
Defines a phase delay for the signal resulting from the return
loss or reflection
Graphs

value range
From 1500 nm nm [100, 2000]
To 1600 nm nm [100, 2000]
Simulation

value range

enabled
Noise
Adaptive noise bins True [True, False]
Defines whether to adapt the noise bins

or not
904
Noise threshold -100 dB [-INF, +INF]

bins
Noise dynamic 3 dB [-INF +INF]

bins
Graphs

Transmission Wavelength (m) Transmission
The signal input electrical field for both polarizations for each output port is calculated
according to:
E Out1 = E In2 IL ( f )T ( f ) + E In 1
E Out2 = E In1 IL ( f )T ( f ) + E In 2 (1)
where T(f) is the filter transmission and RL is the return loss:
–--------
IL
20
T ( f ) = 10 H(f)
–---------
RL-
20
RL = 10
where IL is defined by the parameter Insertion loss and T(f) has the maximum value
defined by the parameter Max. insertion loss. RL is defined by the parameter Return
loss.
The parameter Filter type defines the calculation equation for H(f).
Filter H(f) from component Parameters

Rectangle Rectangle Optical Filter Center wavelength, Bandwidth
Gaussian Gaussian Optical Filter Center wavelength, Bandwidth, Order
Butterworth Band Pass Butterworth Filter Center wavelength, Bandwidth, Order
Raised cosine Raised Cosine Butterworth Filter Center wavelength, Bandwidth, Roll off
factor
Trapezoidal Trapezoidal Optical Filter Center wavelength, Bandwidth, Zero dB

bandwidth
905
If the parameter Calculate graphs is enabled, the component will generate graphs
with the filter transmission.
906
REFLECTIVE FILTER BIDIRECTIONAL
Reflective Filter Bidirectional
This component is bidirectional reflective filter. It can be used as a fiber brag-grating

filter.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Gaussian,
Bessel, Raised
cosine,
Trapezoidal]
Order 2 [1, 100]
907

Reflection 99 %, dB [0, 100]
Component reflection at the operating wavelength
Min. reflection 0.01 %, dB [0, 100]
Component reflection outside the operating bandwidth
loss or reflection
Graphs

value range
From 1500 nm nm [100, 2000]
To 1600 nm nm [100, 2000]
Simulation

value range
enabled
908
Noise

or not

bins

bins
Graphs

Reflection Wavelength (m) Reflection
according to:
E Out1 = E In2 IL ⋅ T ( f ) + R ( f )E In 1
E Out2 = E In1 IL ⋅ T ( f ) + R ( f )E In 2 (1)
where T(f) and R(f) are frequency/wavelength transmission and reflection,
respectively. IS is the insertion loss:
2
T(f) = R 1 – H(f)
R(f) = RH ( f )
–--------
IL
20
IL = 10
where IL is defined by the parameter Insertion loss. R is defined by the parameter
Reflection and R(f) has the minimum value defined by the parameter Min. reflection.
909
Notes:

factor

bandwidth
with the filter transmission and reflection.
910
3-PORT FILTER BIDIRECTIONAL
3-Port Filter Bidirectional
This component is 3-port bi-directional filter.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Gaussian,
Bessel, Raised
cosine,
Trapezoidal]
Order 2 [1, 100]
911

Insertion loss 1->2 0 dB [0, +INF]
Component insertion loss from port 1 to 2 at the operating

wavelength
Insertion loss 1->3 0 dB [0, +INF]
Component insertion loss from port 1 to 3 at the operating

wavelength
Max. insertion loss 1->2 100 dB [0, +INF]

from port 1 to 2
Max. insertion loss 1->3 100 dB [0, +INF]

from port 1 to 3
loss or reflection
Graphs

value range
From 1500 nm nm [100, 2000]
To 1600 nm nm [100, 2000]
912
Simulation

value range

enabled
Noise
Define whether to adapt the noise bins

or not

bins

bins
Graphs

Transmission 1->2 Wavelength (m) Transmission
Transmission 1->3 Wavelength (m) Transmission
according to:
E Out1 = E In2 T 12 ( f ) + E In3 T 13 ( f ) + E In1 RL

E Out2 = E In1 T 12 ( f ) + E In2 RL
E Out3 = E In1 T 13 ( f ) + E In3 RL
913
where T(f) is the filter transmission and RL is the return loss:
– IL 13
-------------
20
T 13 ( f ) = 10 H(f)
– IL 12
-------------
20 2
T 12 ( f ) = 10 1 – H(f)
–---------
RL-
20
RL = 10
where IL12 and IL12 are defined by the parameters Insertion loss 1->2 and 1->3. T12(f)
and T13(f) have the maximum values defined by the parameters Max. insertion loss
1->2 and 1->3. RL is defined by the parameter Return loss.

factor

bandwidth
If the parameter Calculate graphs is enable the component will generate graphs with
the filter transmission 1->2 and 1->3.
914
PERIODIC OPTICAL FILTER
Periodic Optical Filter
This component is a periodic optical filter with user defined shape and free spectral
range.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Frequency 193.1 Hz, THz, nm [30, 300000]
Bandwidth 10 Hz, GHz, THz, nm [0, 1e100]
Free spectral range 800 Hz, GHz, THz, nm [0, 1e100]
Free spectral range of the filter
Insertion loss 0 dB [0, 1e100]
Depth 100 dB [0, 1e100]

Filter type Gaussian Rectangle,

Gaussian, Bessel
Defines the filter shape
Filter order 2 [1, 100]
Gaussian or Bessel filter order
915
Simulation

value range

enabled


Noise

bins

bins
The central frequency of the internal filter is calculated according to:
( f – fc ) (1)
n = ----------------
FSR
(2)
f n = f c + n × FSR
Where f is the signal frequency, f c is the parameter Frequency and FSR is the free
spectral range. n calculated from (1) is an integer value. Using n the component
estimates the value of the internal filter according to (2).
916
The internal filter transmission is:
–--------
IL
20
T ( f ) = 10 H(f)
IL is the parameter insertion loss. The parameter Filter type defines the calculation
equation for H(f).

Rectangle Rectangle Optical Filter Frequency, Bandwidth
Gaussian Gaussian Optical Filter Frequency, Bandwidth, Order
Bessel Bessel Optical Filter Frequency, Bandwidth, Order
917
Notes:
918
Filters Library
Optical
FBG
• Fiber Bragg Grating (FBG)

• Uniform Fiber Bragg Grating
• Ideal Dispersion Compensation FBG
919
Notes:
920
FIBER BRAGG GRATING (FBG)
Fiber Bragg Grating (FBG)
Simulates an FBG.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Optical frequency of the center of the Fiber Bragg

Grating reflection spectrum
Effective index 1.45 — — [1,10]

Modal index of the optical fiber grating
Length 2 nm — [1e-6,1e3]
Length of the optical fiber grating
Apodization

Apodization function Uniform — Uniform,
Gaussian, Tanh,
Modulates the grating intensity over the grating length.
user-defined
Gauss parameter 0.5 — [0.01,100]
Apodization is defined by a Gaussian function using the

S parameter. See Technical Background for the definition.
921

Tanh parameter 0.5 — [0.01,100]
Apodization is defined by an hyperbolic tangent function using

the S parameter. See Technical Background for the definition.
Apodization filename Apodization.dat — —
You supply a file for the apodization. The ith element of this file
is applied as the local apodization for the ith segment of the
grating.
Modulation AC 0.00001 — ]0,1e3]
Index modulation when the apodization is unity. The product

of this number with the apodization function determines the
local index modulation.
Modulation DC 0 — ]0,1e3]
Modifies the modal index of the fiber in proportion to the

apodization function.
Chirp

Chirp function None — None, Linear,
Quadratic,
Period that the grating can be changed over the length of the
Square root,
fiber. Cubic root, user-
defined
Linear parameter 0.00001 μm [0.01,100]
Period varies in a linear way, as defined in the Technical

Background.
Quadratic parameter 0.00001 μm [0.01,100]
Period varies in a quadratic way, as defined in the Technical

Background.
Square root parameter 0.00001 μm [0.01,100]

Period varies as defined in the Technical Background.
Cubic root parameter 0.00001 μm [0.01,100]
Period varies as defined in the Technical Background.
Chirp filename ChirpPeriod.dat — —
In the user-defined file, the ith entry is used as the period for
the ith segment of the chirped grating.
922
Calculation

value range
Number of segments 101 — [1,1e9]
The non-uniform grating will be divided into this number of equal

length uniform segments to calculate the spectrum
Max. number of spectral points 1000 — [100,1e6]
Maximum nuber of points for the transmission and reflection complex

spectrum
Simulation

value range

enabled

Noise

value range

Noise calculation bandwidth 1 THz Hz, GHz, THz, [0, 1e+100]

nm
Calculation bandwidth — outside of this range,
calculation is replaced by the attenuation
923
The non-uniform (chirped and apodized) grating [1] is divided into Number of
Segments uniform gratings. The coupled mode theory is used to calculate the
scattering matrix of each uniform segment, and the spectral response of the whole
grating is found by connecting the uniform segments using the transfer matrix theory.
The apodization functions Gaussian and Hyperbolic tangent are defined with the
following parameters:
Gaussian
⎧ 2 ⋅ (z – L ⁄ 2) 2⎫
A ( z ) = exp ⎨ – ln 2 ⋅ ------------------------------- ⎬
⎩ s⋅L ⎭
Hyperbolic tangent
2
A ( z ) = tanh ( s ⋅ z ⁄ L ) ⋅ tanh [ s ⋅ ( 1 – z ⁄ L ) ] + 1 – tan h ( s ⁄ 2 )
When the parameter Apodization function is user-defined, you provide a file with the
data describing the apodization. The input file is formatted containing two items per
line — the length in μm and the apodization value.
0 7.99437714249507e-007
0.2 2.39785072153609e-006
0.4 3.99496320824255e-006
0.6 5.58995679966756e-006
0.8 7.18201727067935e-006
1.0 8.770334716246e-006
1.2 1.03541096905246e-005
924
The chirp functions depend on a parameter, Δ, which is used as follows:
Linear
z–L⁄2
Λ ( z ) = Λ 0 – ------------------ Δ Δ « Λ0
L
Quadratic
z 2 1
Λ ( z ) = Λ 0 – ⎛ ---⎞ + --- Δ Δ « Λ0
⎝ L⎠ 4
Square Root
z 1
Λ ( z ) = Λ0 – --- – ------- Δ Δ « Λ0
L 2
Cubic Root
1
Λ ( z ) = Λ0 – 3 --z- – ------- Δ Δ « Λ0
L 3 2
925
When the parameter Chirp function is user-defined, you provide a file with the data
describing the chirp. The input file is formatted containing two items per line — the
length in μm and the chirp value in μm.
0 0.53368353843689
0.2 0.53369003534317
0.4 0.533694565296173
0.6 0.533698260784149
0.8 0.533701419830322
1.0 0.533704221248627
1.2 0.533706843852997
References
[1] Erdogan, R., “Fiber Grating Spectra”, J. Light. Technol., 15, 1277-1294, (1997).
926
UNIFORM FIBER BRAGG GRATING
Uniform Fiber Bragg Grating
Simulates a Uniform FBG.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Optical frequency of the center of the Fiber Bragg

Grating reflection spectrum
Bandwidth 125 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, [0,+INF[

nm
Width of the reflection stop band of the Fiber
Bragg Grating
Reflectivity 0.99 — — [1e-100, 1]
Desired maximum reflectivity of the grating

(maximum is at the centre wavelength)
Simulation

value range

enabled
927
UNIFORM FIBER BRAGG GRATING

value range

Noise

value range
Noise calculation bandwidth 1 THz Hz, GHz, THz, [0, 1e+100]

nm
Calculation bandwidth, outside of this range
The solution to the coupled mode equations for a uniform grating is used. The
unknown parameters in the grating (grating period, grating modulation intensity) are
found by employing the information about maximum reflectivity and bandwidth. The
result is a module for the calculation of the reflection and transmission spectra [1].
References
928
IDEAL DISPERSION COMPENSATION FBG
Ideal Dispersion Compensation FBG
Approximation of an ideal chirped FBG designed for dispersion compensation.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range

nm
Dispersion 800 ps/nm ps/nm s/m ] -INF, +INF[
Group delay slope
929
Simulation

value range

enabled
Determines if the filter will down sample the

signal bandwidth to the filter sample rate
Noise

value range

This model is a filter with user-defined group delay. The filter transfer function is:
jφ ( f ) (1)
H(f) = e
where f is the frequency dependence phase of the filter.
The group delay is defined by [1]:
1 dφ
τ ( f ) = – ------ ------ (2)
2π df
Writing Equation 2 as a function of wavelength:
2
λ dφ (3)
τ ( λ ) = – --------- ------
2πc dλ
where c is the speed of light.
930
You define τ by entering the center wavelength λ c , bandwidth Δ λ , and the group
delay slope D in s/m:
⎧ τ0
⎪
τ ( λ ) = ⎨ D.λ
⎪τ λ ≤ λc – Δλ ⁄ 2
⎩ λc + Δ λ ⁄ 2
λc – Δλ ⁄ 2 < λ ≤ λc + Δλ ⁄ 2
λ > λc + Δλ ⁄ 2
This generates the following group delay curve:
Figure 1 Group delay
Calculate the phase from this curve to calculate the filter transfer function.
Phase calculation
The phase is calculated from Equation 3 and Equation 4:
1
φ = – 2πc ∫ τ ( λ ) ----2- dλ
λ
(4)
931
λ ≤ λc – Δλ ⁄ 2 :
λ
1 1 1
φ = – 2πcτ 0 ∫ ----2- dλ = 2πcτ 0 ⎛ --- – -----⎞
⎝ λ λ 1⎠
λ
λ
1
λ 1 = – ∞, τ 0 = 0
φ = 0
(5)
λc – Δλ ⁄ 2 < λ ≤ λc + Δλ ⁄ 2 :
λ
( λ – λ1 ) λ1
φ = 2πcD ∫ ------------------- dλ + φ λc – Δλ ⁄ 2 = 2πcD ln ( λ ) – 2πcD ----- + φ λ – Δ ⁄ 2
λ
2 λ c λ
λ1
φ λc – Δλ ⁄ 2 = 2πcD ln ( λ 1 ) – 2πcD ,λ 1 = ( λ c – Δ λ ⁄ 2 )
( λc – Δλ ⁄ 2 )
φ = 2πcD ln ( λ ) – 2πcD ----------------------------- + 2πcD ln ( λ c – Δ λ ⁄ 2 ) – 2πcD
λ
(6)
λ > λc + Δλ ⁄ 2 :
λ
1 1 1
φ = – 2πcτ λc – Δλ ⁄ 2 ∫ ----2- dλ + φ λc – Δλ ⁄ 2 = 2πcτ λc – Δλ ⁄ 2 ⎛ --- – -----⎞ + φ λc – Δλ ⁄ 2
⎝ λ λ 1⎠
λ
λ
1
λ 1 = ( λ c + Δ λ ⁄ 2 ) ,λ 2 = λ ,τ λc – Δ λ ⁄ 2 = – D ( Δ λ )
( λc – Δλ ⁄ 2 )
φ λc – Δ λ ⁄ 2 = 2πcD ln ( λ c + Δ λ ⁄ 2 ) – 2πcD ------------------------------ + 2πcD ln ( λ c – Δ λ ⁄ 2 ) – 2πcD
( λc + Δλ ⁄ 2 )
1 1
φ = – 2πcDΔ λ = ⎛ --- – ------------------------------⎞ +
⎝ λ ( λ c + Δ λ ⁄ 2 )⎠
( λc – Δλ ⁄ 2 )
⎛ 2πcD ln ( λ + Δ ⁄ 2 ) – 2πcD -----------------------------
- + 2πcD ln ( λ c – Δ λ ⁄ 2 ) – 2πcD⎞
⎝ c λ ( λc + Δλ ⁄ 2 ) ⎠
(7)
932
This generates the following typical phase curve (for D = – 0.8s ⁄ m :
Figure 2 Cumulative phase
References
[1] Madsen, C. K. and Zhao, J H., Optical Filter Design and Analysis: A Signal Processing
Approach. John Wiley & Sons, New York, (1999).
933
Notes:
934
Filters Library
Electrical
• Digital Filter
• IIR Filter (Obsolete)
• Low Pass Rectangle Filter
• Low Pass Gaussian Filter
• Low Pass Butterworth Filter
• Low Pass Bessel Filter
• Low Pass Chebyshev Filter
• Low Pass RC Filter
• Low Pass Raised Cosine Filter
• Low Pass Cosine Roll Off Filter
• Low Pass Squared Cosine Roll Off Filter
• Band Pass IIR Filter (Obsolete)
• Measured Filter
• Band Pass Rectangle Filter
• Band Pass Gaussian Filter
• Band Pass Butterworth Filter
• Band Pass Bessel Filter
• Band Pass Chebyshev Filter
• Band Pass RC Filter
• Band Pass Raised Cosine Filter
• Band Pass Cosine Roll Off Filter
• Band Pass Squared Cosine Roll Off Filter
• S Parameters Measured Filter
935
Notes:
936
IIR FILTER (OBSOLETE)
IIR Filter (Obsolete)
Infinite impulse response filter (IIR) for electrical signals.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Filter sample rate 10 GHz Hz, GHz [1e-9,+INF[
signal sample rate
Additional loss 0 dB dB [0,+INF[

domain, Poles
and zeros, Z
for the filter
domain

value range
937

value range

value range
Simulation

value range
Digital filter False — True, False
Determines whether or not the individual samples filter is digital
938
N
∑a z
–n
n
n=0
H ( z ) = α ----------------------
M
-
∑b
–m
m z
m=0
where H(z) is the filter transfer function in the Z domain, α is the parameter related to
Also
z = exp ( j2πf ⁄ f s )
where fs is the parameter Filter sample rate, and f is the frequency.
given in the z (z domain) or in the frequency domain. In the second case, the filter is
expressed by their roots (Poles and zeros) or by the polynomial coefficients (in
Frequency domain).
939
Notes:
940
DIGITAL FILTER
Digital Filter
Infinite impulse response filter (IIR) of finite response filter (FIR) for electrical signals
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
signal sample rate
Additional loss 0 dB dB [0,+INF[

domain, Poles
and zeros, Z
for the filter
domain, Poles
and residues

value
941
DIGITAL FILTER

value


calculation

1e+100,1e+100
]
Simulation

value range
942
DIGITAL FILTER
N
∑a z
–n
n
n=0
H ( z ) = α ----------------------
M
-
∑b
–m
m z
m=0
Also
z = exp ( j2πf ⁄ f s )
where fs is the parameter Filter sample rate, and f is the frequency.
given in the z (z domain) or in the frequency domain. In the second case, the filter is
expressed by their roots (Poles and zeros), by the polynomial coefficients or by its
poles and residues (in Frequency domain).
943
DIGITAL FILTER
Notes:
944
LOW PASS RECTANGLE FILTER
Low Pass Rectangle Filter
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Cutoff frequency 0.75 * bit rate Hz Hz, MHz, GHz [0,+INF[
Simulation

value range
945
LOW PASS RECTANGLE FILTER
⎧ α, 0 < f < fc
H(f) = ⎨
⎩ d, otherwise
where H(f) is the filter transfer function,α is the parameter Insertion loss, d is the
parameter Depth, fc is the cutoff frequency, and f is the frequency.
946
LOW PASS GAUSSIAN FILTER
Low Pass Gaussian Filter
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Order 1 — — [1, 100]
Simulation

value range
947
LOW PASS GAUSSIAN FILTER
2N
f
– ln ( 2 ) ⎛⎝ ---⎞⎠
fc
H ( f ) = αe
cutoff frequency, N is the parameter Order, and f is the frequency.
948
LOW PASS BUTTERWORTH FILTER
Low Pass Butterworth Filter
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Order 1 — — [1, 100]
Simulation

value range
949
LOW PASS BUTTERWORTH FILTER
In this case. the filter transfer function is:
N
( fc )
H ( f ) = α --------------------------------
N–1
∏ ( j ( f ) – pk )
k=0
where
π 2k + 1
j -- ⎛ 1 + --------------⎞
2⎝ N ⎠
pk = fc ⋅ e
cutoff frequency, N is the parameter Order, and f is the frequency.
950
LOW PASS BESSEL FILTER
Low Pass Bessel Filter
Filter with a Bessel frequency transfer function.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Order 4 — — [1, 100]
Simulation

value range
951
Bessel filters have the following transfer function:
d0
H ( s ) = α -------------
BN ( s )
where α is the parameter Insertion loss, N is the parameter Order, and
( 2N )!-
d 0 = ---------------
N
2 ⋅ N!
being a normalizing constant and BN(s) an nth-order Bessel polynomial of the form:
N
k
BN ( s ) = ∑ dk s
k=0
where
( 2N – k )! -
d k = ----------------------------------------
N–k
2 ⋅ k! ( N – k )!
and
f ⋅ wb
s = j ⎛⎝ ------------⎞⎠
fc
where fc is the filter cutoff frequency defined by the parameter Frequency and Wb
denotes the normalized 3 dB bandwidth and can be approximated by:
w b ≈ ( 2N – 1 ) ⋅ ln 2
for N≥ 10
952
is obtained.
1 1.1989
2 0.9476
3 0.9476
4 0.9581
5 0.9791
6 0.9791
7 0.9895
8 0.9895
9 0.9895
10 0.9895
953
Notes:
954
LOW PASS CHEBYSHEV FILTER
Low Pass Chebyshev Filter
Filter with a Chebyshev frequency transfer function.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Order 1 — — [1, 100]
Ripple factor 0.5 — — [0, 1]
Ripple parameters
Simulation

value range
955
LOW PASS CHEBYSHEV FILTER
Chebychev of order N filters have the following transfer function:
N–1
∏ sk
k=0
H ( s ) = – α ⋅ -------------------------
N–1
-
∏ ( s – sk )
k=0
where α is the parameter Insertion loss and N is the parameter Order.
Also
s = jf
and
s k = f c ⋅ ( sinh δ ⋅ cos β k + j ⋅ cosh δ ⋅ sin β k )
where fc is the filter cutoff frequency.
The parameters:
1 –1
δ = ---- ar sinh ( r )
N
and
π(2(k + 1) + N – 1)
β k = ------------------------------------------------
2N
where
1
r = ------------- –1
1 – rp
where rp is the parameter ripple factor.
956
LOW PASS RC FILTER
Low Pass RC Filter
Filter with an RC frequency transfer function.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Simulation

value range
957
LOW PASS RC FILTER
RC filter has the following transfer function:
1
H ( f ) = α ⋅ ---------------
f
1 + j ---
fc
where α is the parameter Insertion loss and fc is the filter cutoff frequency.
958
LOW PASS RAISED COSINE FILTER
Low Pass Raised Cosine Filter
Filter with a raised cosine frequency transfer function.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Roll-off factor 0.5 — — [0, 1]
Simulation

value range
959
LOW PASS RAISED COSINE FILTER
Raised cosine filter has the following transfer function:
( 1 – rp )
⎧ α f < ------------------ Δf
⎪ 2
⎪ π ( 1 – rp )
2
H ( f ) = ⎨ α ⋅ cos -------------- ( f ) – ------------------ Δf ( 1 – rp ) ( 1 + rp )
2r p Δf 2 ------------------ Δf ≤ f < ------------------ - Δf
⎪ 2 2
⎪
⎩ 0 ( 1 + rp )
------------------- Δf ≤ f
2
where
1
Δf = 2f c ⋅ ---------------------------------------------------------------------
1 – r p + 4 ⁄ π ⋅ r p ⋅ arc cos 4 2
where α is the parameter Insertion loss, fc is the filter cutoff frequency, and rp is the
parameter Roll off factor.
960
LOW PASS COSINE ROLL OFF FILTER
Low Pass Cosine Roll Off Filter
Filter with a cosine roll off frequency transfer function.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Roll off factor 0.5 — — [0, 1]
Simulation

value range
961
LOW PASS COSINE ROLL OFF FILTER
Cosine Roll Off Filter has the following transfer function:=
⎧ α f < f1
⎪
⎪ f – f1 f1 ≤ f < f2
H ( f ) = ⎨ 0.5 ⋅ α 2 ⋅ 1 + cos ⎛ ------------------------
- ⋅ π⎞
⎪ ⎝ r p ⋅ Δf FWHM
⎠
⎪ f2 ≤ f
⎩ 0
where a is the parameter Insertion loss, fc is the filter cutoff frequency, and rp is the
parameter Roll off factor.
The parameters f1 and f2 are:
f 1 = ( 1 – r p )f c 0 ≤ rp ≤ 1
and
f 2 = ( 1 + r p )f c 0 ≤ rp ≤ 1
962
LOW PASS SQUARED COSINE ROLL OFF FILTER
Low Pass Squared Cosine Roll Off Filter
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Simulation

value range
963
LOW PASS SQUARED COSINE ROLL OFF FILTER
Square cosine roll off filter has the following transfer function:
⎧ α f < f1
⎪
⎪ f –f f1 ≤ f < f2
H ( f ) = ⎨ 0.5 ⋅ α ⋅ 1 + cos ⎛ --------------1- ⋅ π⎞
⎪ ⎝ r p ⋅ Δf ⎠
⎪ f2 ≤ f
⎩ 0
where α is the parameter Insertion loss and rp is the roll off factor.
The parameter Δ f is related to the filter frequency cutoff by:
2f c
Δf = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2
1 + --- ⋅ arc cos ( 2 – 1 ) – 1 ⋅ r p
π
where fc is the filter cutoff frequency.
964
BAND PASS IIR FILTER (OBSOLETE)
Band Pass IIR Filter (Obsolete)
Infinite impulse response filter (IIR) for electrical signals.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Frequency 10 GHz Hz, MHz, GHz [0,+INF[

signal sample rate


domain, Poles
and zeros, Z
965

value range

value range
Denominator[2].imag3 0 — ]-INF,+INF[
Simulation

value range
966
N
–n
∑ an z
n=0
H ( z ) = α -----------------------
M
-
–m
∑ bm z
m=0
Also
z = exp ( j2π ( f – f c ) ⁄ f s )
expressed by their roots (Poles and zeros) or by the polynomial coefficients
(Frequency domain).
967
Notes:
968
MEASURED FILTER
Measured Filter
Filter based on measurements.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
measurements

Measurements

value range
File frequency unit Hz — Hz, THz
File format Power — Power, Power

Phase, Real
Imag, phase
Linear scale True — ]-INF,+INF[
Determines whether or not the measured data is in linear scale
969
MEASURED FILTER

value range
Filename Filter.dat — —
Numerical

value range
Simulation

value range
The input file is formatted containing two items per line, the frequency and filter
measurement. The parameter File frequency unit determines the frequency or
wavelength unit of the first item; It can be in Hz or THz.
According to the parameter File format the second item can be one value (Power or
970
MEASURED FILTER
Power (Phase is set to zero, assuming frequency unit is THz)
193.10 0
193.11 0.5
193.12 0.5
193.13 0
...
Power Phase
193.10 0 0
193.11 0.5 3.14
193.12 0.5 3.14
193.13 0 0
...
Real Imag
193.10 0
193.11 –0.5 7.9e-4
193.12 –0.5 7.9e-4
193.13 0 0
...
971
MEASURED FILTER
193.10 0
193.11 3.14
193.12 3.14
193.13 0
...
frequency.
From the measured data,
F c = ( Max + Min ) ⁄ 2
where F c is the center frequency of the loaded file, Max is the maximum frequency
of the file, and Min is the minimum frequency of the file. If the option 'User Defined
Frequency' is selected, then the center frequency of the loaded file becomes centered
at the user defined frequency.
972
BAND PASS RECTANGLE FILTER
Band Pass Rectangle Filter
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Bandwidth 1.5 * bit rate Hz Hz, MHz, GHz [0,+INF[
Simulation

value range
973
BAND PASS RECTANGLE FILTER
fc – B ⁄ 2 < f < fc + B ⁄ 2
otherwise
⎧ α,
H(f) = ⎨
⎩ d,
where H(f) is the filter transfer function, α is the parameter Insertion loss, d is the
parameter Depth, fc is the filter center frequency defined by the parameter Frequency,
B is the parameter Bandwidth, and f is the frequency.
974
BAND PASS GAUSSIAN FILTER
Band Pass Gaussian Filter
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Order 1 — — [1, 100]
Simulation

value range
975
BAND PASS GAUSSIAN FILTER
2N
⎛ ( f – fc) ⎞
– ln 2 ⎜ 2 ----------------------
-⎟
⎝ B ⎠
H ( f ) = αe
976
BAND PASS BUTTERWORTH FILTER
Band Pass Butterworth Filter
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Order 1 — — [1, 100]
Simulation

value range
977
BAND PASS BUTTERWORTH FILTER
N
(B ⁄ 2)
H ( f ) = α ------------------------------------------
N–1
∏ ( j ( f – fc ) – pk )
k=0
where
π 2k + 1
j --- ⎛⎝ 1 + ---------------⎞⎠
B 2 N
p k = --- ⋅ e
2
978
BAND PASS BESSEL FILTER
Band Pass Bessel Filter
Filter with a Bessel frequency transfer function.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Order 4 — — [1, 100]
Simulation

value range
979
Bessel filters have the following transfer function:
d0
H ( s ) = α -------------
BN ( s )
where α is the parameter Insertion loss, N is the parameter Order, and
( 2N )!-
d 0 = ---------------
N
2 ⋅ N!
is a normalizing constant and BN(s) is an nth-order Bessel polynomial of the form

N
k
BN ( s ) = ∑ dk s
k=0
where
( 2N – k )! -
d k = --------------------------------------
N–k
2 ⋅ k! ( N – k )!
and
( f – fc ) ⋅ wb
s = j ⎛ 2 ---------------------------⎞
⎝ B ⎠
where fc is the filter center frequency defined by the parameter Frequency, B is the
parameter Bandwidth, and Wb denotes the normalized 3 dB bandwidth and can be
approximated by:
w b ≈ ( 2N – 1 ) ⋅ ln 2
for N≥ 10
is obtained.
980
1 1.1989
2 0.9476
3 0.9476
4 0.9581
5 0.9791
6 0.9791
7 0.9895
8 0.9895
9 0.9895
10 0.9895
981
Notes:
982
BAND PASS CHEBYSHEV FILTER
Band Pass Chebyshev Filter
Filter with a Chebyshev frequency transfer function.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Order 1 — — [1, 100]
Ripple factor 0.01 — — [0, 1]
Bandpass ripple parameter
983
BAND PASS CHEBYSHEV FILTER
Simulation

value range
Chebychev of order N filters have the following transfer function:
N–1
∏ sk
k=0
H ( s ) = α ⋅ -------------------------
N–1
-
∏ ( s – sk )
k=0
where α is the parameter Insertion loss and N is the parameter Order.
with
s = j ( f – fc )
where fc is the filter center frequency defined by the parameter Frequency.
Here, Sk are the poles of the filter defined by:
B
s k = --- ⋅ ( sinh δ ⋅ cos β k + j ⋅ cosh δ ⋅ sin β k )
2
where B is the parameter Bandwidth.
and
1
r = ------------- –1
1 – rp
where rp is the parameter ripple factor.

1 –1
δ = ---- ar sinh ( r )
N
and
π(2(k + 1) + N – 1)
β k = ------------------------------------------------
2N
984
BAND PASS RC FILTER
Band Pass RC Filter
Filter with an RC frequency transfer function.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Simulation

value range
985
BAND PASS RC FILTER
RC filter has the following transfer function:
1
H ( f ) = α ⋅ --------------------------
f – fc
1 + j2 -----------
B
where α is the parameter Insertion loss, fc is the filter center frequency defined by the
parameter Frequency, and B is the parameter Bandwidth.
986
BAND PASS RAISED COSINE FILTER
Band Pass Raised Cosine Filter
Filter with a raised cosine frequency transfer function.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Simulation

value range
987
BAND PASS RAISED COSINE FILTER
Raised cosine filter has the following transfer function:
( 1 – rp )
f – f c < ------------------ Δf
2
( 1 – rp ) ( 1 + rp )
⎧ α ------------------ Δf ≤ f – f c < ------------------ - Δf
⎪ 2 2
⎪ 2 π ( 1 – rp )
H ( f ) = ⎨ α ⋅ cos -------------- ( f – f c ) – ------------------ Δf ( 1 + rp )
⎪ 2r p Δf 2 ------------------- Δf ≤ f – f c
⎪ 2
⎩ 0
where
1
Δf = B ⋅ ---------------------------------------------------------------------
1 – r p + 4 ⁄ π ⋅ r p ⋅ arc cos 4 2
parameter Frequency, B is the parameter Bandwidth, and rp is the parameter Roll off
factor.
988
BAND PASS COSINE ROLL OFF FILTER
Band Pass Cosine Roll Off Filter
Filter with a cosine roll off frequency transfer function.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Simulation

value range
989
BAND PASS COSINE ROLL OFF FILTER
Cosine Roll Off Filter has the following transfer function:
⎧ α f – fc < f 1
⎪ f1 ≤ f – fc < f2
⎪ f – fc – f1 ⎞
H ( f ) = ⎨ 0.5 ⋅ α 2 ⋅ 1 + cos ⎛ ------------------------
⎝ r p ⋅ Δf FWHM ⋅ π⎠
-
⎪ f2 ≤ f – fc
⎪
⎩ 0
parameter Frequency, B is the parameter Bandwidth, and rp is the parameter Roll off
factor.
The parameters f1 and f2 are:
1 – rp
f 1 = ------------- B 0 ≤ rp ≤ 1
2
and
1 + rp
f 1 = -------------- B 0 ≤ rp ≤ 1
2
990
BAND PASS SQUARED COSINE ROLL OFF FILTER
Band Pass Squared Cosine Roll Off Filter
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Simulation

value range
991
BAND PASS SQUARED COSINE ROLL OFF FILTER
Square cosine roll off filter has the following transfer function:
⎧ α
⎪ f – fc < f1
⎪ f – f – f
H ( f ) = ⎨ 0.5 ⋅ α ⋅ 1 + cos ⎛ -----------------------
c 1⎞
- ⋅ π f1 ≤ f – fc < f2
⎪ ⎝ r p ⋅ Δf ⎠
⎪ f2 ≤ f – fc
⎩ 0
parameter Frequency, and rp is the roll off factor.
The parameter Δ f is related to the filter bandwidth by:
B
Δf = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2
1 + --- ⋅ arc cos ( 2 – 1 ) – 1 ⋅ r p
π
(2)
where B is the parameter Bandwidth.
992
S PARAMETERS MEASURED FILTER
S Parameters Measured Filter
Loads files with S Parameter measurements. You can load files directly from
measurements by using the Touchstone (.s2p) format.
Ports

Transmission Output Electrical
Reflection Output Electrical
Parameters
Main

value range

measurements
Frequency 0 GHz Hz, MHz, GHz [0, 1e+100]

Measurements

value range
Filename (.s2p) Device.s2p — —
993
Numerical

value range
Simulation

value range
Graphs

Reflection - real part Frequency (Hz) Amplitude (a.u.)
Reflection - imag part Frequency (Hz) Amplitude (a.u.)
Transmission - real part Frequency (Hz) Amplitude (a.u.)
Transmission - imag part Frequency (Hz) Amplitude (a.u.)
The Touchstone Format is a common standard for S Parameter data. The model
expects the .s2p file to be in the following general format (lines starting with the
comment symbol '!' and blank lines are ignored):
# freq_unit param_type data_form term_type term_val
f1 s11a s11b s21a s21b s12a s12b s22a s22b
f2 s11a s11b s21a s21b s12a s12b s22a s22b
fn s11a s11b s21a s21b s12a s12b s22a s22b
where:
• freq_unit: Specifies the frequency units — can be Hz, kHz, MHz, or GHz.
• param_type: Usually set to S to indicate S Parameter file.
994
• data_form: Either RI (for real imaginary), MA (for magnitude & angle) or DB (for
magnitude in dB scale & angle). Indicates how the component should treat the
pair of S Parameter values.
• term_type: Termination type (R for real or Z for terminating impedance). Usually
R.
• term_val: Termination value (if R, then the value in Ohms, else a pair
representing the impedance).
The header is followed by the data. Each line has nine values — the frequency and
the eight values representing four S Parameters. This model loads only the S11 and
S21 (direct reflection and transmission).
The following example was generated by a network analyzer. The units are in Hz and
the data is in real and imaginary values.
! Network Analyzer
! Model 1
! 16 Dec 1999 15:02:50
!Frequency S11 S21 S12 S22
# HZ S RI R 50
3000 2.17788E-1 0.24215E-1 -5.69091E0 4.64843E-1 3.02257E-2 0.33741E-2 -6.33483E-1 0.40252E-1
30029850 1.72088E-1 -1.57524E-1 -5.98193E0 -1.68359E0 4.33025E-2 1.31721E-2 -4.84573E-1 1.45126E-1
60029700 0.49133E-1 -2.12097E-1 -7.35302E0 -2.20703E0 5.24978E-2 1.82323E-2 -3.78585E-1 1.96167E-1
90029550 -4.32815E-2 -2.02163E-1 -8.36279E0 -2.04736E0 5.92289E-2 1.87740E-2 -2.99804E-1 1.91909E-1
120029400 -9.79766E-2 -1.74827E-1 -8.99023E0 -1.67724E0 6.32743E-2 1.8013E-2 -2.49618E-1 1.72729E-1
frequency to the user center frequency that you define by the parameter Frequency.
995
Notes:
996
WDM Multiplexers Library
Add and Drop
• WDM Add
• WDM Drop
• WDM Add and Drop
997
Notes:
998
WDM ADD
WDM Add
Adds a WDM channel and a WDM signal.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range

nm
Insertion loss of the demux

Filter type Bessel — — Rectangle,

Gaussian,
Internal filter type
Bessel
Filter order 2 — — [1,1000]

Order of the function when using Gaussian or
Bessel filter type
999
WDM ADD
Simulation

value range

enabled


Noise

value range
1000
WDM ADD
The input signals are filtered by an optical filter and are combined in one signal. The
first signal is filtered by an inverse filter. The optical filters can be a Rectangle,
Gaussian, or Bessel optical filter. The subsystem is illustrated in Figure 1.
Figure 1 WDM Add subsystem
Defining crosstalk
The level of crosstalk for both MUX and DEMUX components, is defined by
bandwidth, ripple, and depth of the filter. These 3 factors will determine how much
power, from neighboring channels, will act as crosstalk terms when calculating the
performance of a specific channel. The most important parameter is depth, as it will
play the most significant role in determining the power levels of the neighboring
channels.
1001
WDM ADD
Notes:
1002
WDM DROP
WDM Drop
Drops a WDM channel from a WDM signal.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range

nm


Gaussian,
Bessel

Bessel filter type
1003
WDM DROP
Simulation

value range

enabled


Noise

value range
1004
WDM DROP
The input signal is split into two signals. Each signal is filtered by an optical filter. The
first signal is filtered by an inverse filter. The optical filters can be a Rectangle,
Gaussian, or Bessel optical filter. The subsystem is illustrated in Figure 1.
Figure 1 WDM Drop subsystem
Defining crosstalk
channels.
1005
WDM DROP
Notes:
1006
WDM ADD AND DROP
WDM Add and Drop
WDM Add and Drop multiplexer. Equivalent to a subsystem based on the WDM Add
and WDM Drop components.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Output (Drop) Output Optical
Input (Add) Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range

nm

Gaussian,
Internal filter type Bessel

Bessel filter type
1007
WDM ADD AND DROP
Simulation

value range

enabled


Noise

value range
1008
WDM ADD AND DROP
In the drop section, the input signal is divided in two signals. Each signal is filtered by
an optical filter. An inverse filter filters the first signal.
In the add section, the input signals are filtered by an optical filter and are combined
in one signal. An inverse filter filters the first signal.
The optical filters can be a Rectangle, Gaussian, or Bessel optical filter. The
subsystem is illustrated in Figure 1.
Figure 1 WDM Add and drop subsystem
Defining crosstalk
channels.
1009
WDM ADD AND DROP
Notes:
1010
WDM ADD AND DROP

Demultiplexers
• WDM Demux 1x2
• WDM Demux 1x4
• WDM Demux 1x8
• WDM Demux
• WDM Demux ES
• Ideal Demux
• WDM Interleaver Demux
1011
WDM ADD AND DROP
Notes:
1012
WDM DEMUX 1X2
WDM Demux 1x2
Demultiplexes two WDM signal channels.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
nm

Gaussian,
Bessel

Bessel filter type
1013
WDM DEMUX 1X2
Channels

value range
Filter center frequency for channel 0

Ripple

value range
Ripple[0] 0 dB ]-INF,+INF[
Additional loss of the filter for channel 0
Simulation

value range

enabled


Noise

value range
1014
WDM DEMUX 1X2
The input signal is split into two signals that are filtered by an optical filter. The optical
filter can be a Rectangle, Gaussian, or Bessel optical filter. The subsystem is
illustrated in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Demultiplexer subsystem
Defining crosstalk
channels.
1015
WDM DEMUX 1X2
Notes:
1016
WDM DEMUX 1X4
WDM Demux 1x4
Demultiplexes four WDM signal channels.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
nm


Gaussian,

Bessel filter type
1017
WDM DEMUX 1X4
Channels

value range

Ripple

value range
Simulation

value range

enabled


1018
WDM DEMUX 1X4
Noise

value range

1019
WDM DEMUX 1X4
The input signal is split into four signals that are filtered by an optical filter. The optical
Defining crosstalk
channels.
1020
WDM DEMUX 1X8
WDM Demux 1x8
Demultiplexes eight WDM signal channels.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
nm
1021
WDM DEMUX 1X8

value range
Gaussian,

Bessel filter type
Channels

value range
Ripple

value range
1022
WDM DEMUX 1X8

value range
Simulation

value range

enabled

Noise

value range

1023
WDM DEMUX 1X8
The input signal is split into eight signals that are filtered by an optical filter. The optical
Defining crosstalk
channels.
1024
WDM DEMUX
WDM Demux
Demultiplexes a user-defined number of WDM signal channels.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Number of output ports 8 — — [2, 1000]

nm

1025
WDM DEMUX

value range
Gaussian,

Bessel filter type
Channels

value range
Ripple

value range
1026
WDM DEMUX

value range
Simulation

value range

enabled

Noise

value range

1027
WDM DEMUX
The input signal is split into N signals, where N is the number of output ports. The
Signals are filtered by an optical filter. The optical filter can be a Rectangle, Gaussian,
or Bessel optical filter. The subsystem is illustrated in Figure 1.
Defining crosstalk
channels.
1028
WDM DEMUX ES
WDM Demux ES
Demultiplexes a user-defined number of WDM signal channels. The center

frequencies of the internal filters are equally spaced (ES).
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Center frequency of the first filter
Frequency spacing 100 GHz, THz, Hz, ]-INF,+INF[

nm
Frequency spacing between adjacent filters

nm
1029
WDM DEMUX ES

value range


Gaussian,
Bessel

Bessel filter type
Simulation

value range

enabled

Noise

value range

The WDM Demux ES is equivalent to the conventional WDM Demux component.
However, the WDM Demux ES is easier to set up for WDM systems, since it requires
only the filter center frequency and the spacing.
1030
WDM INTERLEAVER DEMUX
WDM Interleaver Demux
An Interleaver Demux is a periodic optical filter that separates a combination of dense

wavelength-division multiplexed (DWDM) signals.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Number of channels 8 [2, 1000]
Frequency 193.1 THz, Hz, nm [30, +INF]
Frequency spacing 100 GHz, THz, Hz, [-INF, +INF]

nm
Bandwidth 10 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, [0, +INF]

nm
3-dB filter bandwidth
Depth 100 dB [0, +INF]
Filter type Bessel [Rectangle,

Gaussian,
Bessel]
1031
WDM INTERLEAVER DEMUX

value range
Filter order 2 [1, 1000]

Bessel filter type
This component demultiplexes equally spaced channels into two new sets of equally
spaced channels.
It makes DWDM systems whose intervals of channels are narrower (such as 100 GHz
or 50 GHz) de-multiple into the systems whose intervals of channels are much thinner
(such as 200 GHz or 100 GHz) [1].
References
[1] S. Cao et all, "Interleaver Technology: Comparisons and Applications Requirements", OFC'03
Interleaver Workshop Review Paper, Formal Submission, JND ver 3.0, 062503, revised
091503.
1032
IDEAL DEMUX
Ideal Demux
Demultiplexes a user-defined number of output WDM signal channels. This model is

equivalent to an ideal splitter, since there is no power splitting and filtering.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
1033
IDEAL DEMUX
The input signal is duplicated and attenuated. The subsystem is illustrated in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Subsystem — duplicated and attenuated input signal
1034
IDEAL DEMUX

Multiplexers
• WDM Mux 2x1
• WDM Mux 4x1
• WDM Mux 8x1
• WDM Mux
• WDM Mux ES
• Ideal Mux
• Nx1 Mux Bidirectional
1035
IDEAL DEMUX
Notes:
1036
WDM MUX 2X1
WDM Mux 2x1
Multiplexes two WDM signal channels.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
nm

Gaussian,
Bessel

Bessel filter type
1037
WDM MUX 2X1
Channels

value range

Ripple

value range
Simulation

value range

enabled


Noise

value range
1038
WDM MUX 2X1
The two input signals are filtered by an optical filter and are combined in one signal.
The optical filter can be a Rectangle, Gaussian, or Bessel optical filter. The subsystem
is illustrated in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Multiplexer subsystem
Defining crosstalk
channels.
1039
WDM MUX 2X1
Notes:
1040
WDM MUX 4X1
WDM Mux 4x1
Multiplexes four WDM signal channels.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
nm

Gaussian,

Bessel filter type
1041
WDM MUX 4X1
Channels

value range

Ripple

value range
Simulation

value range
enabled

1042
WDM MUX 4X1
Noise

value range

1043
WDM MUX 4X1
The four input signals are filtered by an optical filter and are combined in one signal.
Defining crosstalk
channels.
1044
WDM MUX 8X1
WDM Mux 8x1
Multiplexes eight WDM signal channels.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
nm
1045
WDM MUX 8X1

value range
Gaussian,

Bessel filter type
Channels

value range
Ripple

value range
1046
WDM MUX 8X1

value range
Simulation

value range

enabled

Noise

value range

1047
WDM MUX 8X1
The eight input signals are filtered by an optical filter and are combined in one signal.
Defining crosstalk
channels.
1048
WDM MUX
WDM Mux
Multiplexes a user-defined number of input WDM signal channels.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Number of input ports 8 — — [2,1000]

nm

1049
WDM MUX

value range
Gaussian,

Bessel filter type
Channels

value range
Ripple

value range
1050
WDM MUX

value range
Simulation

value range

enabled

Noise

value range

1051
WDM MUX
The input signals are filtered by an optical filter and combined in one signal. The
optical filter can be a Rectangle, Gaussian, or Bessel optical filter. The subsystem is
Defining crosstalk
channels.
1052
WDM MUX ES
WDM Mux ES
This component multiplexes a user-defined number of WDM signal channels. The

center frequencies of the internal filters are equally spaced (ES).
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Number of input ports 8 — — [2,1000]
Frequency 193.1 — THz, HZ, nm [30,+INF[
Frequency spacing 100 — GHz, THz, Hz, ]-INF,+INF[

nm

nm
1053
WDM MUX ES

value range


Gaussian,
Bessel

Bessel filter type
Simulation

value range

enabled

Noise

value range

The WDM Mux ES is equivalent to the conventional WDM Mux component.
However, the WDM Mux ES is easier to set up for WDM systems, since it only
requires the filter center frequency and the spacing.
1054
IDEAL MUX
Ideal Mux
Multiplexers a user-defined number of input WDM signal channels. This model is equivalent to an ideal
adder, since there is no power splitting and filtering.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Number of input ports 2 — [2,1000]
Loss 0 dB [0,+INF]
1055
IDEAL MUX
The input signals are added and attenuated. The subsystem is illustrated in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Ideal Multiplexer subsystem
1056
NX1 MUX BIDIRECTIONAL
Nx1 Mux Bidirectional
This component is bi-directional multiplexer or demultiplexer. It has a trapezoidal filter

shape and arbitrary number of channels.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Output 1 Input Optical
Output 2 Input Optical
Parameters
Main
Name and description Default value — Value range

Number of input ports 2 [2, 1000]
Defines the number of output ports for the component
Defines the first filter center frequency
Frequency spacing 100 Hz, GHz, THz, nm [-10000, 10000]
Defines the spacing between frequency channels

1057
Name and description Default value — Value range


loss or reflection
Graphs

value range
From 1500 nm nm [100, 2000]
To 1600 nm nm [100, 2000]
Simulation

value range

enabled
Noise
or not

bins
1058

bins
Graphs

according to:
E Out = ∑ EIn Ti ( f ) + EIn RL

i
j=1
E Outi = E In T i ( f ) + E Ini RL, i = [ 1, N ]

where Ti(f) and is filter transmission for the input port i. N is the number of input ports.
The filter transmission and return loss are given by
–--------
IL
20
T i ( f ) = 10 H i 10
–---------
RL-
20
RL = 10
where IL is defined by the parameter Insertion loss and T(f) has the maximum value
loss.
The calculation equation for H(f) is the same used in the Trapezoidal Optical Filter
component.
If the parameter Calculate graphs is enabled, the component will generate a graph
with the component transmission.
1059
Notes:
1060

AWG
• AWG NxN
• AWG NxN Bidirectional
1061
1062
AWG NXN
AWG NxN
This component simulates an ideal arrayed waveguide grating (AWG) component

based on the use of optical filters to emulate the AWG response.
Ports

... Input Optical
... Output Optical
Parameters
Main

Size 8 [2, 1000]
Configuration Mux — Mux, Demux
Defines whether the component works as a multiplexer or as

a demultiplexer

Defines the reference center frequency for the filter in the first
port
Bandwidth 10 Hz, GHz, THz, nm [0, 200]
Frequency spacing -100 Hz, GHz, THz, nm [-10000, 10000]

Defines the channel spacing
1063
AWG NXN

component insertion loss
Depth 100 dB [0,+INF[

Filter type Bessel — Rectangle,

Gaussian, Bessel
Filter order 2 — [1,1000]
Order of the function when using Gaussian or Bessel filter

type
Simulation

value range

enabled
Noise

bins

bins
This component is based on the AWG NxN Bidirectional component. Parameter
Configuration defines the order of the input and output ports, defining if the
component works as a Mux or as a Demux.
1064
AWG NXN BIDIRECTIONAL
AWG NxN Bidirectional
This bidirectional component simulates an ideal arrayed waveguide grating (AWG)

component based on the use of optical filters to emulate the AWG response.
Ports

... Input Optical
... Output Optical
Parameters
Main

Size 8 [2, 1000]
Defines the number of input/output ports for the component
Defines the reference center frequency for the filter in the first
port

Frequency spacing -100 Hz, GHz, THz, nm [-10000, 10000]
Defines the channel spacing
component insertion loss
1065

component return loss
Depth 100 dB [0,+INF[

Filter type Gaussian — Rectangle,

Gaussian
Filter order 2 — [1,1000]
Order of the function when using the Gaussian filter type
Simulation

value range

enabled
Noise

bins

bins
The AWG is an optical device based on interferential phenomena, and it has a
periodic behavior in the wavelength domain. The input optical signals in each port are
routed to a specific output port depending on the signal wavelength and the input port
number. Upon the optical signals entering from a given input i and routed to an output
port j, the AWG behaves like a passing-band periodical filter, its power transfer
function having repeating at a fixed wavelength called free spectral range (FSR).
The transfer function from the input i+1 to a given output j has the same shape as the
previous transfer function of input i, but is shifted on the wavelength axis by an
wavelength interval Δλ , another shift Δλ separates this second transfer function
from the transfer function between the next input i+2 and the output j, and so on.
The FSR can be defined in this component by:
1066
(1)
FSR = N ⋅ Δλ
Where N is the AWG Size parameter and Δλ is the wavelength (frequency) spacing.
AWG can be fabricated which are able to act on "dense" comb of wavelengths, routing
more contiguous wavelengths of the comb as if they were a single one. An parameter
called coarseness C represents the number of contiguous wavelength channels
belonging to the wavelength interval, Δλ , routable to the same output port.
Considering i as the input port index, j as the output port index, and f as the channel
index. We can define the AWG routing function as [1]:
j = 1 + (i) (2)
i, j ∈ [ 1, M ]andf ∈ [ 1, ∞ ]
For example in case 1, we have four channels launched in input port 1 of an 4x4 AWG
(see Figure 1).
Figure 1 System layout case 1
The routing configuration in this case is:
Case 1 - N = 4 ; Coarseness = 1;
Signal at input port 1 and frequency 1, then
J = 1 + (1 - 1 + (1 - 1)/1) mod 4 = 1;
1067
J = 1 + (1 - 1 + (2 - 1)/1) mod 4 = 2;
J = 1 + (1 - 1 + (3 - 1)/1) mod 4 = 3;
J = 1 + (1 - 1 + (4 - 1)/1) mod 4 = 4;
The output results can be seen at the figure below:
Figure 2 Output signal at output port 1 (black), port 2 (red), port 3 (green), and port 4 (blue).
In another example in case 2, we have 2 channels launched in input port 1 and 4

channels launched in input port 4 of a 6x6 AWG (see Figure 3).
1068
Figure 3 System layout case 2.
The routing configuration in this case is:
Case 2 - N = 6 ; Coarseness = 2;
J = 1 + (1 - 1 + (13 - 1)/2) mod 6 = 1;
J = 1 + (1 - 1 + (14 - 1)/2) mod 6 = 1;
J = 1 + (4 - 1 + (1 - 1)/2) mod 6 = 4;
J = 1 + (4 - 1 + (2 - 1)/2) mod 6 = 4;
J = 1 + (4 - 1 + (3 - 1)/2) mod 6 = 5
J = 1 + (4 - 1 + (4 - 1)/2) mod 6 = 5;
1069
The output results can be seen at the figures below:
Figure 4 Output signal at (a) output port 1, (b) port 4, (c)port 5.
References
[1] Maier, G., Martinelli, M., Pattavina, A., and Salvadori, E.. "Design and cost performance of the
multistage WDM-PON access networks". IEEE J. of Lightwave Technology, 18:pp. 125-143.
1070
Network Library
Optical Switches
• Dynamic Y Select Nx1 Measured
• Dynamic Y Switch 1xN Measured
• Dynamic Y Switch 1xN
• Dynamic Y Select Nx1
• Dynamic Space Switch Matrix NxM Measured
• Dynamic Space Switch Matrix NxM
• Optical Switch
• Digital Optical Switch
• Optical Y Switch
• Optical Y Select
• Ideal Switch 2x2
• Ideal Y Switch
• Ideal Y Select
• Ideal Y Switch 1x4
• Ideal Y Select 4x1
• Ideal Y Switch 1x8
• Ideal Y Select 8x1
• Ideal Y Select Nx1
• Ideal Y Switch 1xN
• 2x2 Switch Bidirectional
1071
Notes:
1072
DYNAMIC Y SELECT NX1 MEASURED
Dynamic Y Select Nx1 Measured
Y select with a user-defined mapping table for different switching events.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Number of input ports 8 — — [2, 1000]
Time constant 50 ns s, ms, ns [0,+INF[
Switching time constant
Switching event time 50 ns s, ms, ns [0,+INF[
Time instant when the switching event occurs
Repeat events False — — True, False

Determines if the events will be repeated for each
event time
1073

value range
Mapping table filename Table.dat — — —
Static solution
The switch model allows for the selection of the number of input ports N.
For the input ports i = 1…N, you can select the complex values of a mapping table:
i=1 n1 + j × α1
i=2 n2 + j × α2
i=3 n3 + j × α3
.
i=N nN + j × αN
where
j = ( –1 )
If the light electric field complex amplitude entering the input port number 'i' is Ei, then
the electric field complex amplitude at the output port due to Ei is:
Output Input j ( n i + jα i )
E = Ei e
(1)
When all input ports of the switch are used, the output complex amplitude at the
output port is:
N
⎧ j ( n i + jα i ) ⎫
∑ ⎨⎩ Ei
Output Input
E = e ⎬
i=1
⎭
(2)
This sum includes all different wavelength contributions.
1074
Transients
This type of switch is characterized by switching time with a time constant.
Mathematically, a switching event is a replacement of one mapping table, T1, with a

different one, T2.
To a first order approximation, the change from { n i + j × α i } T1 to { n i + j × α i } T2

resembles a charging process of a linear capacitor through a linear resistor. It has an
exponential time behavior, with a time constant τ . The parameter time constant τ is
universal and is shared by all transient events.
For a switching event that takes place at time t0, the real part of a mapping matrix
element will change as:
ni ( t ) = ni T1
× exp ( – ( t – t 0 ) ⁄ τ ) + n i T2
× { 1 – exp ( – ( t – t 0 ) ⁄ τ ) }
(3)
t0 is the parameter Switching event time.
The parameter Repeat events allows you to generate multiple switching events. For
example, changing the map table from 1 to 2 and vice versa.
File format
The file format for the data with the map table is:
n1,1 α 1, 1 n1,2 α 1, 2
n2,1 α 2, 1 n2,2 α 2, 2
.
nN,1 α N, 1 nN,2 α N, 2
where the first index is the input port (row) and the second index is the table number
(1 or 2).
Assuming a component with 3 input ports, and transient from port 1 to 3:
0 0 0 10
0 10 0 10
0 10 0 0
1075
Notes:
1076
DYNAMIC Y SWITCH 1XN MEASURED
Dynamic Y Switch 1xN Measured
Y switch with user-defined mapping table for different switching events.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range

event time
1077

value range
Static solution
The switch model allows for the selection of the number of output ports N.
For the output ports i = 1…N, you can select the complex values of a mapping table:
i=1 n1 + j × α1
i=2 n2 + j × α2
i=3 n3 + j × α3
.
i=N nN + j × αN
where
j = ( –1 )
If the light electric field complex amplitude at the output port number 'i' is Ei, calculated
from the electric field complex amplitude at the input port, Ei is:
E = Ei e
(1)
Transients

different one, T2.

1078
ni ( t ) = ni T1
× exp ( – ( t – t 0 ) ⁄ τ ) + n i T2
× { 1 – exp ( – ( t – t 0 ) ⁄ τ ) }
(2)
File format
n1,1 α 1, 1 n1,2 α 1, 2
n2,1 α 2, 1 n2,2 α 2, 2
.
nN,1 α N, 1 nN,2 α N, 2
where the first index is the output port (row) and the second index is the table number
(1 or 2).
Assuming a component with 3 output ports, and transient from port 3 to 1:
0 0 0 10
0 10 0 10
0 10 0 0
1079
Notes:
1080
DYNAMIC Y SWITCH 1XN
Dynamic Y Switch 1xN
Y switch that allows you to control the different values for attenuation and phase
values with transient effects when switching from different input ports.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
—
Port before event 1 — [1, 1000]
Port number to use before the event
—
Port after event 2 — [1, 1000]
Port number to use after the event

event time
1081
Table

value range
Real coeff. at selected port 1e-006 — ]-INF,+INF[
Real coeff. equivalent to the phase at the selected port

—
Imag coeff. at selected port 1 ]-INF,+INF[
Imag coeff. equivalent to the attenuation at the selected port
—
Real coeff. at other ports 1e-006 ]-INF,+INF[
Real coeff. equivalent to the phase at other ports

—
Imag coeff. at other ports 1e-006 ]-INF,+INF[
Imag coeff. equivalent to the attenuation at other ports
Static solution
The switch model allows for the selection of the number of input ports N.
i=1 n1 + j × α1
i=2 n2 + j × α2
i=3 n3 + j × α3
.
i=N nN + j × αN
where
j = ( –1 )
E = Ei e
(1)
1082
When all input ports of the switch are used, the output complex amplitude at the
output port is:
N
⎧ Input j ( ni + jαi ) ⎫
∑ ⎨⎩ Ei e
Output
E = ⎬
i=1
⎭
(2)
Transients

different one, T2.

ni ( t ) = ni T1
× exp ( – ( t – t 0 ) ⁄ τ ) + n i T2
× { 1 – exp ( – ( t – t 0 ) ⁄ τ ) }
(3)
Mapping table
The mapping table is generated based on the values for the selected and unselected
ports. You can select the values of the real and imag coefficients for the selected port
and for the unselected ports. The models assumes that all unselected ports have the
same phase and attenuation. For arbitrary values for these coefficients, use the
equivalent measured component.
1083
Notes:
1084
DYNAMIC Y SELECT NX1
Dynamic Y Select Nx1
Y select that allows you to control the different values for attenuation and phase
values with transient effects when switching from different output ports.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
—
Port before event 1 — [1, 1000]

—
Port after event 2 — [1, 1000]

event time
1085
Table

Real coeff. equivalent to the phase at the selected port

—
Imag coeff. equivalent to the attenuation at the selected port
—

—
Static solution
The switch model allows for the selection of the number of output ports N.
i=1 n1 + j × α1
i=2 n2 + j × α2
i=3 n3 + j × α3
.
i=N nN + j × αN
where
j = ( –1 )
If the light electric field complex amplitude at the output port number 'i' is Ei, calculated
from the electric field complex amplitude at the input port, Ei is:
E = Ei e
(1)
1086
Transients

different one, T2.

ni ( t ) = ni T1
× exp ( – ( t – t 0 ) ⁄ τ ) + n i T2
× { 1 – exp ( – ( t – t 0 ) ⁄ τ ) }
(2)
Mapping table
and for the unselected ports. The models assume that all unselected ports have the
1087
Notes:
1088
DYNAMIC SPACE SWITCH MATRIX NXM MEASURED
Dynamic Space Switch Matrix NxM Measured
Space switch matrix with a user-defined mapping table for different switching events.
Ports

1089
Parameters
Main

value range


event time
1090
Static solution
The switch model allows for the selection of the number of input ports N and output
ports M.
i=1 n1 + j × α1
i=2 n2 + j × α2
i=3 n3 + j × α3
.
i=N nN + j × αN
where
j = ( –1 )
E = Ei e
(1)
When all input ports of the switch are used, the output complex amplitude at each
output port is:
N
⎧ j ( n i + jα i ) ⎫
∑ ⎨⎩ Ei
Output Input
E = e ⎬
i=1
⎭
(2)
1091
Transients

different one, T2.

ni ( t ) = ni T1
× exp ( – ( t – t 0 ) ⁄ τ ) + n i T2
× { 1 – exp ( – ( t – t 0 ) ⁄ τ ) }
(3)
File format
n1,1 α 1, 1 n1,2 α 1, 2 ... n1,1,M α 1, 1 , M n1,2,M α 1, 2, M

n2,1 α 2, 1 n2,2 α 2, 2 ... n2,1,M α 2, 1 , M n2,2,M α 2, 2, M
..
..
nN,1 α N, 1 nN,2 α N, 2 ... nN,1,M α N, 1 , M nN,2,M α N, 2, M
where the first index is the input port (row), the second index is the table number (1
or 2), and the third index is the output port. This means that there is one row for each
input port and 4 columns for each output port.
Assuming a component with 3 input and output ports, and transient from port 1 to 3:
0 0 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10
0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10
0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 0
1092
DYNAMIC SPACE SWITCH MATRIX NXM
Dynamic Space Switch Matrix NxM
Space switch matrix that allows you to control the different values for attenuation and
phase values with transient effects when switching from different input and output
ports.
Ports

1093
Parameters
Main

value range

—
Input port before event 1 — [1, 1000]
—
Input port after event 1 — [1, 1000]

—
Output port before event 2 — [1, 1000]

—
Output port after event 2 — [1, 1000]

event time
Table

Real coeff. equivalent to the phase at selected port

—
Imag coeff. equivalent to the attenuation at selected port

—
—
1094
Static solution
The switch model allows for the selection of the number of input ports N and output
ports M.
i=1 n1 + j × α1
i=2 n2 + j × α2
i=3 n3 + j × α3
.
i=N nN + j × αN
where
j = ( –1 )
E = Ei e
(1)
When all input ports of the switch are used, the output complex amplitude at each
output port is:
N
⎧ j ( n i + jα i ) ⎫
∑ ⎨⎩ Ei
Output Input
E = e ⎬
i=1
⎭
(2)
1095
Transients

different one, T2.

ni ( t ) = ni T1
× exp ( – ( t – t 0 ) ⁄ τ ) + n i T2
× { 1 – exp ( – ( t – t 0 ) ⁄ τ ) }
(3)
Mapping table
and for the unselected ports. The models assume that all unselected ports have the
1096
OPTICAL SWITCH
Optical Switch
Simulates a non-ideal switch 2x2.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Phase shift Zero — Zero, pi
Additional loss 0 dB [0, 1e100]
The optical switch routes the optical signals at input port 1 and 2 to the two output
ports, according to the parameter phase shift described as follows:
• If the phase shift is 0, then the optical signal at input 1 is passed to output 2 and
the optical signal at input 2 is passed to output 1 (see Figure 1).
1097
OPTICAL SWITCH
• If the phase shift is π , then the optical signal at input 2 is passed to output 2 and
the optical signal at input 1 is passed to output 1 (Figure 1).
Figure 1 Switch behavior
The following equations describe the switch behavior:
E 1out m 11 m 12 E 1in
= α⋅ ⋅
E 2out m 21 m 22 E 2in
where E1in and E2in are the input signals at input port 1 and 2 respectively.
m 11 = ( 1 – cc ) ⋅ exp ( j ⋅ φ ) – cc
(4)
m 12 = 1 – cc ⋅ j ⋅ cc ⋅ ( exp ( j ⋅ φ ) + 1 )
(5)
m 21 = 1 – cc ⋅ j ⋅ cc ⋅ ( exp ( j ⋅ φ ) + 1 )
(6)
m 22 = ( 1 – cc ) ⋅ – cc ⋅ exp ( j ⋅ φ )
(7)
where the coupling coefficient, cc, is 0.5, φ is the phase shift parameter, and α is the
additional loss.
1098
DIGITAL OPTICAL SWITCH
Digital Optical Switch
Simulates a non-ideal switch 2x2 with a control signal.
Ports

Control Input Binary
Parameters
Main

Additional loss 0 dB [0, 1e100]
1099
DIGITAL OPTICAL SWITCH
The digital optical switch routes the optical signals at input port 1 and 2 to the two
output ports, according to the control signal described as follows:
• If the control signal is 0, then the optical signal at input 1 is passed to output 1 and
the optical signal at input 2 is passed to output 2.
• If the control signal is 1, then the optical signal at input 2 is passed to output 1 and
the optical signal at input 1 is passed to output 2.
The working behavior of this component is similar to the optical switch component.
When the control signal is 0, internally the phase shift is set at π , and when the
control signal is 1, the phase shift is set at 0.
1100
OPTICAL Y SWITCH
Optical Y Switch
Simulates a non-ideal optical switch 1x2.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Crosstalk 1 30 dB [0, 1e100]
Phase shift 1 90 deg [-1e50, 1e50]
1101
OPTICAL Y SWITCH
The digital optical 1x2 switch routes the input signal to one of two output ports,
including crosstalk and phase shift between the two input signals. The parameters
responsible for crosstalk between the two output signals are crosstalk 1 and crosstalk
2. The phase shift is specified by phase shift 1 and phase shift 2.
This model has two modes of operation:

• If the control is 0, then the optical signal at input is routed to output 1 (see Figure
1).
• If the control is 1, then the optical signal at input is routed to output 2 (see Figure
1).
1102
OPTICAL Y SELECT
Optical Y Select
Simulates a non-ideal optical switch 2x1.
Ports

Parameters
Main

1103
OPTICAL Y SELECT
The digital optical 2x1 switch selects one of the two input signals and the route to the
output port, including crosstalk and phase shift between the two input signals. The
parameters responsible for crosstalk between the input signals are crosstalk 1 and
crosstalk 2. The phase shift is specified by phase shift 1 and phase shift 2.
This model has two modes of operation:

• If the control is 0, then the optical signal at input 1 is passed to the output (see
Figure 1).
Figure 1).
1104
IDEAL SWITCH 2X2
Ideal Switch 2x2
Simulates an ideal switch 2x2.
Ports

Parameters
Simulation

1105
IDEAL SWITCH 2X2
The ideal optical 2x2-switch routes the optical signals at input port 1 and 2 to the two
output ports according with the control signal.
The ideal 2x2 switch has two modes of operation:

• If the control is 0, then the optical signal at input 1 is passed to output 1 and the
optical signal at input 2 is passed to output 2 (see Figure 1).
• If the control is 1, then the optical signal at input 2 is passed to output 1 and the
optical signal at input 1 is passed to output 2 (see Figure 1).
1106
IDEAL Y SWITCH
Ideal Y Switch
Simulates an ideal optical 1x2 switch.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Simulation

1107
IDEAL Y SWITCH
The ideal optical 1x2 switch routes a signal in the input port to one of two output ports.
The ideal 2x1 switch has two modes of operation as follows:

• If the control is 0, then the optical signal at input 1 is passed to output 1 (see
Figure 1).
• If the control is 1, then the optical signal at input 2 is passed to output 2 (see
Figure 1).
1108
IDEAL Y SELECT
Ideal Y Select
Simulates an ideal optical select switch.
Ports

Parameters
Simulation

1109
IDEAL Y SELECT
The ideal Y select switch has two modes of operation:
Figure 1).
Figure 1).
1110
IDEAL Y SWITCH 1X4
Ideal Y Switch 1x4
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Simulation

1111
IDEAL Y SWITCH 1X4
The ideal optical 1x4 switch routes a signal in the input port to one of four output ports.
The ideal 1x4 switch has four states of operation, as follows:

• If the control is 00, then the optical signal at input is passed to output 1 (see Figure
1).
1).
1).
1).
Figure 1 Two possible working states of the 4x1 switch
1112
IDEAL Y SELECT 4X1
Ideal Y Select 4x1
Simulates an ideal optical switch 4x1.
Ports

Parameters
Simulation

1113
IDEAL Y SELECT 4X1
The ideal Y select 4x1 switch has four states of operation:
• If the control is 00, then the optical signal at input 1 is passed to out (see Figure 1).
Figure 1 Two possible working states of the 4x1 switch
1114
IDEAL Y SWITCH 1X8
Ideal Y Switch 1x8
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Simulation

1115
IDEAL Y SWITCH 1X8
The ideal optical 1x8-switch routes a signal in the input port to one of eight output
ports (see Figure 1).
Figure 1 One possible working state of the 1x8 switch
Table 1 displays the switching states for the eight output ports.
Table 1 Switching states — output ports
Control Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
000 X — — — — — — —
001 — X — — — — — —
010 — — X — — — — —
011 — — — X — — — —
100 — — — — X — — —
101 — — — — — X — —
110 — — — — — — X —
111 — — — — — — — X
1116
IDEAL Y SELECT 8X1
Ideal Y Select 8x1
Simulates an ideal optical switch 8x1.
Ports

Parameters
Simulation

1117
IDEAL Y SELECT 8X1
The ideal optical 8x1-switch routes one of the 8 input signals to the output port.
Figure 1 One possible working state of the 8x1 switch
Table 2 displays the switching states for the eight input ports.
Table 2 Switching states — input ports
Control Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

000 X — — — — — — —
001 — X — — — — — —
010 — — X — — — — —
011 — — — X — — — —
100 — — — — X — — —
101 — — — — — X — —
110 — — — — — — X —
111 — — — — — — — X
1118
IDEAL Y SELECT NX1
Ideal Y Select Nx1
Simulates an ideal optical switch with a variable number of input ports.
Ports

Parameters
Simulation

Number of input ports 2 — [2, 1000]
1119
IDEAL Y SELECT NX1
The number of input ports for the Nx1 switch is given by the number of input ports
parameter. The bit sequence length of control signals must be enough for the correct
use of the switch. The minimum number of bits is:
n b = log 2 ( N in )
where nb is the number of bits and Nin is the number of input ports.
The control signal specifies which input port will have the optical signal routed to the
output port.
1120
IDEAL Y SWITCH 1XN
Ideal Y Switch 1xN
Simulates an ideal optical 1xN switch with a variable number of output ports.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Simulation

1121
IDEAL Y SWITCH 1XN
The control signal must be long enough for the correct use of the switch. The
minimum number of bits is:
n b = log 2 ( N out )
where nb is the number of bits and Nout is the number of output ports.
The control signal specifies which output port will have the optical signal routed at the
input port.
1122
2X2 SWITCH BIDIRECTIONAL
2x2 Switch Bidirectional
This component is bi-directional optical 2x2 switch.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Switch state Bar [Bar, Cross]
Defines whether the component is using bar or cross mode
Isolation 0 dB [0, +INF]

Component isolation
Component insertion loss

Component return loss
loss or reflection
1123
Simulation

value range

enabled
The signal input electrical field for both polarizations for each output port calculation
depends on the parameter Switch state:
Bar:
E Out1 = E In3 IL + E In4 IS + E In1 RL

E Out2 = E In4 IL + E In3 IS + E In2 RL (1)
Cross:

E Out2 = E In3 IL + E In4 IS + E In2 RL (1)
where IL, IS and RL are the insertion loss, isolation and return losses, respectively.
–--------
IL
20
IL = 10
–-------
IS-
20
IS = 10
–---------
RL-
20
RL = 10
1124
Network Library
Frequency Conversion
• Ideal Frequency Converter
1125
Notes:
1126
IDEAL FREQUENCY CONVERTER
Ideal Frequency Converter
Simulates an ideal frequency converter.
Ports

Optical Input Optical
Optical Output Optical
Parameters
Main

Frequency offset 100 GHz [-1e6, 1e6 ]
Shift band True — True, False
Simulation

1127
IDEAL FREQUENCY CONVERTER
The ideal frequency converter shifts the optical signal spectrum by the amount Δf
(frequency offset). There are two modes of operation:
• If the shift band parameter is true, then the center frequency is changed and the
complex amplitude of the sampled electrical field remains unchanged (see Figure
1).
• If shift band parameter is false, a cyclic shift is performed (see Figure 1). The
complex amplitudes are changed according to:
E out ( t ) = E in ( t ) ⋅ exp ( 2 ⋅ π ⋅ Δf ⋅ t )
For parameterized and noise bins signals, there is only one mode of operation — shift
band true.
Figure 1 Ideal frequency converter behavior: (a) input signal, (b) output signal – shift band false and (c)
output signal – shift band true
1128
Passives Library
Electrical
• Electrical Phase Shift
• Electrical Signal Time Delay
1129
Notes:
1130
ELECTRICAL PHASE SHIFT
Electrical Phase Shift
Adds a time phase advance/delay to the optical signal input. The component also
allows the user to define a phase slope that is linear with frequency.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Phase shift 0 deg, rad ]-INF,+INF[
Phase shift to apply to the signal
Slope False — True, False
Determines whether or not the phase slope is enabled
Phase slope 0 deg/oct, rad/oct ]-INF,+INF[
Phase slope to apply to the signal
Start frequency Sample rate / 2 Hz, MHz, GHz [0, 1e100]
Phase slope will be applied to frequencies greater than the

start frequency value.
Simulation

1131
ELECTRICAL PHASE SHIFT
Notes:
1132
ELECTRICAL SIGNAL TIME DELAY
Electrical Signal Time Delay
Adds a time delay to the electrical signal input.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Delay 0 s s, ms, ns [0,+INF[
Simulation

value range

1133
Notes:
1134
Passives Library
Electrical
Attenuators
• Electrical Attenuator
1135
Notes:
1136
ELECTRICAL ATTENUATOR
Electrical Attenuator
Attenuates the electrical signal input.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Attenuation 0 dB dB [0,+INF[
Attenuation to apply to the signal input
Simulation

value range
1137
Notes:
1138
Passives Library
Electrical
Couplers
• 90 Degree Hybrid Coupler

• 180 Degree Hybrid Coupler
1139
Notes:
1140
90 DEGREE HYBRID COUPLER
90 Degree Hybrid Coupler
This component is a 90 degree hybrid coupler for combining electrical signals. It

allows the user to define gain and phase balance. Typical applications include mixers,
power combiners and modulators.
Ports

Output 1 Output Electrical
Parameters
Main

Loss 0 dB [0,1e100]
Loss applied to the signal after coupling
Gain balance 0 dB [-1e100, 1e100]
The difference in dB between the two output ports of the

coupler.
Phase balance 0 deg [-1e100, 1e100]
The additional phase difference between the two output ports

of the coupler
1141
The s-parameters for the coupler are:
S O1 I 1 = [ – 3dB – α + 0.5 × G ] ∠0° (1)
S O2 I 1 = [ – 3dB ( – α – 0.5 × G ) ] ∠( – 90° – φ ) (2)
Where α is the insertion loss (dB), G is the gain balance (dB) and φ is the phase
balance between output ports.
1142
180 Degree Hybrid Coupler
This component is a 180 degree hybrid coupler for combining electrical signals. It
allows the user to define gain and phase balance. Typical applications include mixers,
power combiners and modulators.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Loss 0 dB [0,1e100]
Gain balance 0 dB [-1e100, 1e100]
The difference in dB between the two output ports of the

coupler.
Phase balance 0 deg [-1e100, 1e100]
The additional phase difference between the two output ports

of the coupler
1143
The s-parameters for the coupler are:
S O1 I 1 = [ – 3dB – α + 0.5 × G ] ∠0° (1)
S O2 I 1 = [ – 3dB ( – α – 0.5 × G ) ] ∠( – 180° – φ ) (2)
Where α is the insertion loss (dB), G is the gain balance (dB) and φ is the phase
balance between output ports.
1144
Passives Library
Electrical
DC Blockers
• DC Block
1145
Notes:
1146
DC BLOCK
DC Block
This component blocks the DC voltage from the electrical input signal.
Ports

Parameters
Simulation

value range
This component blocks the DC component from the input signal by removing its mean
value.
1147
DC BLOCK
Notes:
1148
DC BLOCK
Passives Library
Electrical
Splitters
• Splitter 1x2
• Splitter 1xN
1149
DC BLOCK
Notes:
1150
SPLITTER 1X2
Splitter 1x2
This component splits evenly the signal input power to two output ports.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Loss 0 dB [0,+INF[
Additional loss applied to the signal
The s-parameters for the splitter are:
S Oi I 1 = [ – 3dB – α ] ∠0° (1)
Where α is the parameter insertion loss (dB) and i is the output port index.
1151
SPLITTER 1X2
Notes:
1152
SPLITTER 1XN
Splitter 1xN
This component splits evenly the signal input power to N output ports.
Ports

Parameters
Main

The number of output ports of the component
Loss 0 dB [0,+INF[
The s-parameters for the splitter are:
1- – α ∠0°
S Oi I1 = 10 log --- (1)
N
Where α is the parameter insertion loss (dB), N is the number of output ports and i is
the output port index.
1153
SPLITTER 1XN
Notes:
1154
SPLITTER 1XN
Passives Library
Electrical
Combiners
• Combiner 2x1
• Combiner Nx1
1155
SPLITTER 1XN
Notes:
1156
COMBINER 2X1
Combiner 2x1
This component combines evenly two input signals into a single output port.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Loss 0 dB [0,+INF[
The s-parameters for the combiner are:
S O1 I i = [ – 3dB – α ] ∠0° (1)
Where α is the parameter insertion loss (dB), N is the number of input ports and i is
the input port index.
1157
COMBINER 2X1
Notes:
1158
COMBINER NX1
Combiner Nx1
This component combines evenly N input signals into a single output port.
Ports

Parameters
Main

The number of input ports of the component
Loss 0 dB [0,+INF[
The s-parameters for the combiner are:
1- – α ∠0°
S O1 Ii = 10 log --- (1)
N
Where α is the parameter insertion loss (dB), N is the number of input ports and i is
the input port index.
1159
COMBINER NX1
Notes:
1160
COMBINER NX1
Passives Library
Electrical
Measured Components
• 1 Port S Parameters
1161
COMBINER NX1
Notes:
1162
1 PORT S PARAMETERS
1 Port S Parameters
This component loads a Touchstone type file containing 1 port s-parameters data.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Touchstone type file containing 1 port s-parameters data.
Numerical

Determines the interpolation algorithm for the data
Graphs

1163
1 PORT S PARAMETERS
Simulation

value range

Determines whether or not the component will use a digital filter to
process individual samples
Digital filter order 64 — [1, 100e6]
The numbers of coefficients for the time domain filter estimation
This component loads a file that describes the small signal scattering matrix, or s
parameters, of a device. Data structure of the Touchstone file consists of a header part
and a data part (Refer to S Parameters Measured Filter for a description of the file
format). The content of the file is text data, which is ready to be read with a general
text editor.
1164
2 PORT S PARAMETERS
2 Port S Parameters
This component loads a Touchstone type file containing 2 port s-parameters data,
including noise figure data.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Include Noise True — True, false
Defines whether the noise will be included in the output

mW/Hz, dBm/Hz
Minimum input noise
Numerical

1165
2 PORT S PARAMETERS
Graphs

Simulation

value range

Noise

value range
Add noise to signal False — — True, False
Determines whether or not the component will

add the signal and noise components
Random numbers

value range

1166
2 PORT S PARAMETERS
text editor.
This component adds thermal noise to the signal output. The value of the thermal
noise is calculated from the input SNR and the minimum noise figure from the
parameters provided in the s2p file
1167
2 PORT S PARAMETERS
Notes:
1168
3 PORT S PARAMETERS
3 Port S Parameters
Ports

Parameters
Main

Numerical

1169
3 PORT S PARAMETERS
Graphs

Simulation

value range

text editor.
1170
4 PORT S PARAMETERS
4 Port S Parameters
Ports

Parameters
Main

Numerical

1171
4 PORT S PARAMETERS
Graphs

Simulation

value range

text editor.
1172
4 PORT S PARAMETERS
Passives Library
Electrical
Transmission Lines
• Coaxial Cable
• Transmission Line
• Two Wire Cable
• RLCG Transmission Line
• Parallel Plate Transmission Line
1173
4 PORT S PARAMETERS
Notes:
1174
COAXIAL CABLE
Coaxial Cable
This component models a coaxial transmission line, using ABCD parameters which
correspond to frequency dependent S-parameters.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Reference impedance - real 50 Ohm [0,+INF]
Reference impedance - imag 0 Ohm [-INF,+INF]
Length 0.01 m [0,+INF]

Transmission line length
Inner radius 0.725 mm [0,+INF]
Radius of the core wire in the cable
Outer radius 2.57 mm [0,+INF]
Radius of the insulator
Relative permeability constant 1 - [1,+INF]

Permeability of the dielectric / permeability of free space
Relative permittivity constant 2.3 - [1,+INF]
Permittivity of the dielectric / permittivity of free space
Conductivity of the dielectric 0 S/m [0,+INF]
1175
COAXIAL CABLE

Conductivity of the conductor 10e9 S/m [0,+INF]
Simulation

value range
Cross section of a coaxial cable, where a is the inner radius and b is the outer radius
is depicted in Figure 1 [1]
Figure 1 Coaxial cable cross-section.
The wire jacket is used for physical protection of the wire. A foil shield is a thin layer
of foil surrounding the insulator and a braid shield is usually aluminum or copper, and
is grounded. Combined with the foil shied, this protects the conductor from
electromagnetic interference and radio frequency interference. The insulation is the
dielectric insulating the core wire and the conductor is the wire in the center of the
cable used to transmit the signal, usually made from copper. The attenuation of the
signal over long distances depends largely on the diameter (a) of the wire.
The ABCD parameters correspond to the S matrix which describes how the signal will
behave once it passes through the cable (Figure 2).
1176
COAXIAL CABLE
Figure 2 S Parameters.
S parameters are calculated from ABCD parameters:
A + B ⁄ Z R – CZR – D (1)
S 11 = ---------------------------------------------------
A + B ⁄ Z R + CZR + D
2 ( AD – BC ) (2)
S 12 = ---------------------------------------------------
A + B ⁄ Z R + CZR + D
2 (3)
S 21 = ---------------------------------------------------
A + B ⁄ Z R + CZR + D
– A + B ⁄ Z R – CZ R + D (4)
S 22 = -------------------------------------------------------
A + B ⁄ Z R + CZR + D
Z R is the parameter reference impedance and A, B C and D are calculated according

to [2]:
(5)
A = cos ( dk )
(6)
B = Z 0 sin ( dk )
1
D = ----- sin ( dk ) (7)
Z0
(8)
D = cos ( dk )
1177
COAXIAL CABLE
Where k and Z 0 are frequency dependent vectors and d is the length of the transition
line. k and Z0 are dependent on Resistance (R), Capacitance (C), Conductance (G),
and Inductance (L), per unit length:
R + j2πfL
Z0 = ------------------------- (9)
G + j2πfC
(10)
k = ( R + j2πfL ) ( G + j2πfC )
Coaxial cable parameters are used to calculate R, L, G and C values [3]:
πfμ c ⁄ σ c 1 1 (11)
R = ------------------------- ⎛ --- + ---⎞
2π ⎝ a b⎠
μ b
L = ------ ln ⎛⎝ ---⎞⎠ (12)
2π a
2πεμ
C = -------------- (13)
b
ln ⎛ ---⎞
⎝ a⎠
2πσ
G = -------------- (14)
b
ln ⎛ ---⎞
⎝ a⎠
Where σ is the conductivity of the dielectric, ε is the permittivity of the dielectric, μ

is the permeability of the dielectric, μ c is the permeability of the conductor and σ c is
the conductivity of the conductor.
1178
COAXIAL CABLE
References
[1] E. Wright, D. Reynders, Practical Telecommunications and Wireless Communications: For
Business and Industry, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 2004.
[2] D. M. Pozar, Microwave Engineering, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2005.
[3] F. T. Ulaby, Fundamentals of Applied Electromagnetics, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, New
Jersey, 2005.
1179
COAXIAL CABLE
Notes:
1180
TRANSMISSION LINE
Transmission Line
This component models a transmission line, using ABCD parameters which

Ports

Parameters
Main


Characteristic Impedance - real 50 Ohm [0,+INF]
Characteristic Impedance - imag 0 Ohm [-INF,+INF]
Phase velocity 299.792458e6 m/s [0,+INF]
Loss 0 dB/m [0,+INF]
1181
TRANSMISSION LINE
Simulation

value range
Enabled True True, False
A + B ⁄ Z R – CZR – D (1)
S 11 = ---------------------------------------------------
A + B ⁄ Z R + CZR + D
2 ( AD – BC ) (2)
S 12 = ---------------------------------------------------
A + B ⁄ Z R + CZR + D
2 (3)
S 21 = ---------------------------------------------------
A + B ⁄ Z R + CZR + D
– A + B ⁄ Z R – CZ R + D (4)
S 22 = -------------------------------------------------------
A + B ⁄ Z R + CZR + D

to [1]:
1182
TRANSMISSION LINE
(5)
A = cos ( dk )
(6)
B = Z 0 sin ( dk )
1
D = ----- sin ( dk ) (7)
Z0
(8)
D = cos ( dk )
Where Z 0 is the parameter characteristic impedance and d is the length of the

transition line. k is calculated according to [1]:
k = α a + iβ (9)
α ⁄ 20 (10)
α a = – ln 10
(11)
β = 2πf ⁄ V P
Where σ is the parameter loss, V P is the phase velocity.
References
1183
TRANSMISSION LINE
Notes:
1184
TWO WIRE CABLE
Two Wire Cable
This component models a two wire coaxial transmission line, using ABCD parameters
which correspond to frequency dependent S-parameters.
Ports

Parameters
Main


Wire radius 2 mm ]0,+INF]
Radius of the core wire in the cable
Wire separation 6 mm ]0,+INF]
Separation of the wires

1185
TWO WIRE CABLE

Conductivity of the conductor 10e9 S/m [0,+INF]
Simulation

value range
Two wire cable, where a is the inner radius and b is the wire separation is depicted in
Figure 1 [1]
Figure 1 Two wire cable.
1186
TWO WIRE CABLE
A + B ⁄ Z R – CZR – D (1)
S 11 = ---------------------------------------------------
A + B ⁄ Z R + CZR + D
2 ( AD – BC ) (2)
S 12 = ---------------------------------------------------
A + B ⁄ Z R + CZR + D
2 (3)
S 21 = ---------------------------------------------------
A + B ⁄ Z R + CZR + D
– A + B ⁄ Z R – CZ R + D (4)
S 22 = -------------------------------------------------------
A + B ⁄ Z R + CZR + D

to [2]:
(5)
A = cos ( dk )
(6)
B = Z 0 sin ( dk )
1
D = ----- sin ( dk ) (7)
Z0
(8)
D = cos ( dk )
R + j2πfL
Z0 = ------------------------- (9)
G + j2πfC
(10)
k = ( R + j2πfL ) ( G + j2πfC )
1187
TWO WIRE CABLE
Two wire cable parameters are used to calculate R, L, G and C values [3]:
πfμ c ⁄ σ c (11)
R = -------------------------
2πa
μ b b 2
L = --- ln ⎛⎝ ------ + ⎛⎝ ------⎞⎠ – 1⎞⎠ (12)
π 2a 2a
πε
C = --------------------------------------------------- (13)
b b 2
ln ⎛ ------ + ⎛ ------⎞ – 1⎞
⎝ 2a ⎝ 2a⎠ ⎠
πσ
G = --------------------------------------------------- (14)
b b 2
ln ⎛ ------ + ⎛ ------⎞ – 1⎞
⎝ 2a ⎝ 2a⎠ ⎠

1188
TWO WIRE CABLE
References
[1] F. M. Tesche, M. Lanoz, T. Karlsson, EMC analysis methods and computation models, Wiley-
Interscience, 1997.
Jersey, 2005.
1189
TWO WIRE CABLE
Notes:
1190
RLCG TRANSMISSION LINE
RLCG Transmission Line
This component models a transmission line using RLCG parameters, which

Ports

Parameters
Main


Resistance 2.322624 Ohm/m [0,+INF]
Resistance per length
Inductance 0.2530979e-6 H/m [0,+INF]
Inductance per length
Conductance 0 S/m [0,+INF]

Conductance per length
Capacitance 0.1011109e-009 F/m [0,+INF]
Capacitance per length
1191
Simulation

value range
A + B ⁄ Z R – CZR – D (1)
S 11 = ---------------------------------------------------
A + B ⁄ Z R + CZR + D
2 ( AD – BC ) (2)
S 12 = ---------------------------------------------------
A + B ⁄ Z R + CZR + D
2 (3)
S 21 = ---------------------------------------------------
A + B ⁄ Z R + CZR + D
– A + B ⁄ Z R – CZ R + D (4)
S 22 = -------------------------------------------------------
A + B ⁄ Z R + CZR + D

to [1]:
1192
(5)
A = cos ( dk )
(6)
B = Z 0 sin ( dk )
1
D = ----- sin ( dk ) (7)
Z0
(8)
D = cos ( dk )
R + j2πfL
Z0 = ------------------------- (9)
G + j2πfC
(10)
k = ( R + j2πfL ) ( G + j2πfC )
References
1193
Notes:
1194
PARALLEL PLATE TRANSMISSION LINE
Parallel Plate Transmission Line
This component models a parallel plate transmission line, using ABCD parameters
which correspond to frequency dependent S-parameters.
Ports

Parameters
Main


Plate width 0.5 mm ]0,+INF]
Width of the parallel plate
Plate separation 1 mm ]0,+INF]
Separation between the 2 parallel plates

1195

Conductivity of the conductor 99 S/m [0,+INF]
Simulation

value range
Parallel plate cable, where a is the plate separation and b is the plate width is depicted
in Figure 1 [1]
Figure 1 Parallel plate.
1196
A + B ⁄ Z R – CZR – D (1)
S 11 = ---------------------------------------------------
A + B ⁄ Z R + CZR + D
2 ( AD – BC ) (2)
S 12 = ---------------------------------------------------
A + B ⁄ Z R + CZR + D
2 (3)
S 21 = ---------------------------------------------------
A + B ⁄ Z R + CZR + D
– A + B ⁄ Z R – CZ R + D (4)
S 22 = -------------------------------------------------------
A + B ⁄ Z R + CZR + D

to [2]:
(5)
A = cos ( dk )
(6)
B = Z 0 sin ( dk )
1
D = ----- sin ( dk ) (7)
Z0
(8)
D = cos ( dk )
R + j2πfL
Z0 = ------------------------- (9)
G + j2πfC
(10)
k = ( R + j2πfL ) ( G + j2πfC )
1197
Coaxial cable parameters are used to calculate R, L, G and C values [3]:
2 πfμ c ⁄ σ c (11)
R = ----------------------------
b
μa
L = ------ (12)
b
bε
C = -----
a (13)
σb
G = ------
a (14)

1198
References
[1] K. Zhang, D. Li, Electromagnetic Theory for Microwaves and Optoelectronics, Springer, 2008.
Jersey, 2005.
1199
Notes:
1200
Passives Library
Optical
• Phase Shift
• Time Delay
1201
Notes:
1202
PHASE SHIFT
Phase Shift
Adds a time phase advance/delay to the optical signal input.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Phase shift 0 deg, rad ]-INF,+INF[
Phase shift to apply to the signal
Simulation

The phase shift component applies a phase shift to the optical input signal. The optical
output signal is given by:
E out ( t ) = E in ( t ) • exp ( jΔΦ )
1203
PHASE SHIFT
Figure 1 Phase shift change
1204
PHASE SHIFT
Notes:
1205
PHASE SHIFT
1206
TIME DELAY
Time Delay
Adds a time delay to the optical signal input.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Delay 0 s s, ms, ns [0,+INF[
Simulation

value range
Carrier phase shift True — True, False
Determines whether the carrier phase shift is included in the

calculation or not

1207
TIME DELAY
The Time delay component applies a time delay (Δt) to the optical input signal. The
optical output signal is given by
E out = E in ( t – Δt ) ⋅ exp ( jΔφ )
If the carrier phase shift parameter is enabled, or it is defined by
E out = E in ( t – Δt )
If the carrier phase shift parameter is not enabled.
Where Ein and Eout are the time envelopes for the input and output signals
respectively, and Δφ is the phase shift defined by the center frequency and time delay
Δφ = – ( 2πf ⋅ Δt )
1208
TIME DELAY
Notes:
1209
TIME DELAY
1210
TIME DELAY
Passives Library
Optical
Attenuators
• Optical Attenuator
• Attenuator Bidirectional
1211
TIME DELAY
Notes:
1212
OPTICAL ATTENUATOR
Optical Attenuator
Attenuates the optical signal power.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Attenuation 0 dB [0,+INF[
Power attenuation
Simulation

The signal input electrical field for both polarizations is attenuated as:
α-
–------
20 (4)
E OutX ,Y ( t ) = E InX ,Y ( t )10
where α is the power attenuation.
1213
OPTICAL ATTENUATOR
Notes:
1214
ATTENUATOR BIDIRECTIONAL
Attenuator Bidirectional
This component attenuates the optical signal. It is bidirectional, with wavelength

dependent attenuation and return loss.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Wavelength dependence Independent [Independent,
Dependent,
Defines the type of wavelength dependence for component Cosine]
parameters
Operating wavelength 1550 Hz, THz, nm [100, 2000]
Defines the central wavelength when using wavelength

dependent parameters
Defines the bandwidth when using wavelength dependent

parameters
Attenuation 0 dB [0, +INF]
Component attenuation at the operating wavelength
Max. attenuation 3 dB [0, +INF]
Component attenuation outside the operating bandwidth
1215

Min. return loss 60 dB [0, +INF]
Component return loss outside the operating bandwidth
loss or reflection
Graphs

value range
From 1500 nm nm [100, 2000]
Wavelength lower limit for the graphs
To 1600 nm nm [100, 2000]
Wavelength upper limit for the graphs
Simulation

value range

enabled
Noise

value range
Define whether to adapt the noise bins or not
1216

value range
Noise dynamic 3 dB [-INF, +INF]
Graphs

Attenuation Wavelength (m) Attenuation
Return loss Wavelength (m) Return loss
according to:
E Out1 = E In2 α ( f ) + E In 1 RL ( f )
E Out2 = E In1 α ( f ) + E In 2 RL ( f ) (1)
where (f) and RL(f) are frequency/wavelength dependent attenuation and return
losses respectively:
α-
–------
20
α ( f ) = 10 H(f)
– RL Min
-----------------
20 2
RL ( f ) = 10 1 – H(f)
where a is defined by the parameter Attenuation and α ( f ) has the maximum value
defined by the parameter Max. attenuation. RLMin is defined by the parameter Min.
return loss, and RL(f) has the maximum value defined by the parameter Return loss.
The parameter Wavelength dependence defines the calculation equation for H(f):
Wavelength Independent:
Wavelength Dependent:
1217
Cosine Dependent:
where
with the wavelength dependence of the attenuation and return loss.
1218
Passives Library
Optical
Connectors
• Connector
• Connector Bidirectional
• Spatial Connector
1219
Notes:
1220
CONNECTOR
Connector
This component is an optical connector.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Component insertion loss
Simulation

The signal input electrical field for both polarizations is attenuated as:
– IL
--------
20
E OutX, Y = E In X, Y 10
where IL is the connector Insertion Loss.
1221
CONNECTOR
Notes:
1222
CONNECTOR BIDIRECTIONAL
Connector Bidirectional
This component is an optical connector. It is bidirectional, with wavelength dependent

insertion loss and return loss.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Dependent,
parameters


parameters
1223

loss or reflection
Graphs

value range
From 1500 nm nm [100, 2000]
To 1600 nm nm [100, 2000]
Simulation

value range

enabled
Noise

value range
1224

value range
Graphs

Insertion loss Wavelength (m) Insertion loss
according to:
E Out1 = E In2 IL ( f ) + E In1 RL ( f )

E Out2 = E In1 IL ( f ) + E In2 RL ( f ) (1)
where IL(f) and RL(f) are frequency/wavelength dependent insertion and return
losses, respectively and are given by:
–--------
IL
20
IL ( f ) = 10 H(f)
– RL Min
-----------------
20 2
RL ( f ) = 10 1 – H(f)
where IL is defined by the parameter Insertion loss and IL(f) has the maximum value
defined by the parameter Max. insertion loss. RLMin is defined by the parameter Min.
1225
Cosine Dependent:
where
with the wavelength dependence of the insertion and return loss.
1226
SPATIAL CONNECTOR
Spatial Connector
This component connects signals with transverse mode profiles. Modes can be
translated and rotated, it also propagates the input signals in free-space.
Ports

Modes
Parameters
Main
Defines the connector insertion loss
Distance 0 um [0, 1e+100]
Defines the free-space distance of

propagation
Rotation 0 deg [-1e+100,

1e+100]
Defines the amount of rotation of the
mode profile around the Z-axis
X shift 0 um [-1e+100,
1e+100]
Defines the amount of translation of the
mode profile in the X-direction
Y shift 0 um [-1e+100,
1e+100]
Defines the amount of translation of the
mode profile in the Y-direction
X tilt 0 deg [-1e+100,

1e+100]
mode profile around the X-axis
1227
SPATIAL CONNECTOR
Y tilt 0 deg [-1e+100,
1e+100]
mode profile around the Y-axis
Numerical
Diffraction integral Fast Fourier Fast Fourier transform,
transform Direct integration
Defines the calculation type for the
diffraction integral
Geometrical loss Yes [YES, NO]
Defines whether the geometrical loss is

included in the calculation or not
Polarization
Spatial-temporal effect NO [YES, NO]
Defines whether the spatial and

temporal polarization effects are
enabled or not
Simulation

The spatial connector allows the user to specify a translational offset and rotation
between the two components that should be connected. The parameters X shift and
Y shift allow the user to add a transverse offset between the two components. The
parameter Distance specifies the free-space propagation distance (the shift in the Z-
axis).
The free-space propagation is applied using the transfer function of free space in the
frequency domain [1][2]. Parameter Diffraction integral defines whether the
calculation will use the Fast Fourier Transform or the direct integration of the
Rayleigh-Sommerfeld integral [3]. Propagation using the Fast Fourier Transform is
limited to tens of microns depending on the size of the spatial mesh, and it is
recommended for coupling between devices, such as lasers and fibers. For the same
1228
SPATIAL CONNECTOR
spatial mesh size, direct integration allows for longer propagation distances; however,
it requires more calculation time. Parameter Geometrical loss enables the calculation
of the losses if direct integration is selected.
The parameter Rotation defines the amount of rotation in the Z-axis, using a two-
dimensional interpolation technique to rotate the mode profile. The parameters X tilt
and Y tilt define the rotation about the X and Y-axis. The tilt in X or Y is applied as a
phase delay that is a linear function of the transverse coordinates.
The parameter Spatial-temporal effect defines whether the output signal of the
connector will store a second signal generated as a result of the coordinate
transformation between the two connected components.
References
[1] J. W. Goodman, Introduction to Fourier Optics, McGraw-Hill, New York, NY 1996.
[2] K. Matsushima, H. Schimmel, F.Wyrowski, Fast Calculation Method for Optical Diffraction on
Tilted Planes by use of the Angular Spectrum Plane Waves, Optical Society of America, Vol.
20, No. 9, September 2003.
[3] N. Delen and B. Hooker, "Free-space beam propagation between arbitrarily oriented planes
based on full diffraction theory: a fast Fourier transform approach," J. Opt. Soc. Am. A 15, 857-
867 (1998)
1229
SPATIAL CONNECTOR
1230
SPATIAL CONNECTOR
Passives Library
Optical
Reflectors
• Reflector Bidirectional
• Saturable Absorber
1231
SPATIAL CONNECTOR
Notes:
1232
REFLECTOR BIDIRECTIONAL
Reflector Bidirectional
This component is an optical reflector or mirror. It is bidirectional, with wavelength

dependent reflection and insertion loss.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Dependent,
parameters


parameters
Reflection 99 %, dB [0, 100]
Component reflection outside the operating bandwidth
Min. reflection 90 %, dB [0, 100]
Component reflection outside the operating wavelength
1233

loss or reflection
Graphs

value Unit range
Number of points for the graph
From 1500 nm nm [100, 2000]
To 1600 nm nm [100, 2000]
Simulation

value range
Noise

value range
1234

value range
Graphs

Reflection Wavelength (m) Reflection
according to:
E Out1 = E In2 IL ( f )T ( f ) + E In 1 R ( f )
E Out2 = E In1 IL ( f )T ( f ) + E In 2 R ( f ) (1)
where IS(f), T(f) and R(f) are frequency/wavelength dependent insertion loss,
transmission and reflection respectively, and are given by:
–--------
IL
20
IL ( f ) = 10 H(f)
2
T(f) = R 1 – H(f)
R(f) = RH ( f )
defined by the parameter Max. insertion loss. Where R is defined by the parameter
Reflection and R(f) has the minimum value defined by the parameter Min. reflection.
The parameter Wavelength dependence defines the calculation equation for H(f)
1235
Cosine Dependent:
where
with the wavelength dependence of transmission and reflection.
1236
SATURABLE ABSORBER
Saturable Absorber
This component is a saturable absorber mirror with infinitely fast response time.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Unsaturable reflectance 60 % [0, 100]
Defines the unsaturable reflectance
Saturable reflectance 30 % [0, 100
Defines the saturable reflectance
Saturation power 150 Hz, GHz, THz, nm [1e-100, 1e10]
Defines the saturation power
Simulation

value range
The saturable absorber is modeled by a reflectivity calculated according to:
R = R unsat + R sat ( 1 – 1 ⁄ ( 1 + P ⁄ P sat ) )
1237
SATURABLE ABSORBER
where Runsat is the unsaturable reflectance, Rsat is the saturable reflectance, Psat is
the saturation power and P is the instataneous pulse peak power.
1238
SATURABLE ABSORBER
Passives Library
Optical
Taps
• Tap Bidirectional
1239
SATURABLE ABSORBER
Notes:
1240
TAP BIDIRECTIONAL
Tap Bidirectional
This component is a tap. It is bidirectional, with wavelength dependent tap

percentage, insertion loss and return loss.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Wavelength dependence Dependent [Independent,
Dependent,
parameters


parameters
Tap percentage 5 % [0, 100]
Component tap percentage at the operating wavelength
1241
TAP BIDIRECTIONAL

Min. tap percentage 0 % [0, 100]
Component tap percentage outside the operating bandwidth
loss or reflection
Graphs

value Unit range
From 1500 nm nm [100, 2000]
To 1600 nm nm [100, s2000]
Simulation

value range
1242
TAP BIDIRECTIONAL
Noise

or not

bins

bins
Graphs

Coupling ratio 1-1 Wavelength (m) Coupling ratio
according to:
E Out1 = IL ( f ) ( E In2 C 11 ( f ) + E In3 C 12 ( f ) ) + E In1 RL ( f )

E Out2 = IL ( f )E In1 C 11 ( f ) + E In2 RL ( f )
E Out3 = IL ( f )E In1 C 12 ( f ) + E In3 RL ( f )
losses, respectively.
–--------
IL
20
IL ( f ) = 10 H(f)
– RL Min
-----------------
20 2
RL ( f ) = 10 1 – H(f)
1243
TAP BIDIRECTIONAL
C11(f) and C12(f) are given by:
where r is defined by the parameter Tap percentage and C11(f) and C12(f) have the
minimum values defined by the parameter Min. tap percentage.
Cosine Dependent:
where
with the wavelength dependence of the coupling ratios, insertion and return loss.
1244
TAP BIDIRECTIONAL
Passives Library
Optical
Measured Components
• Luna Technologies OVA Measurement

• Measured Component
1245
TAP BIDIRECTIONAL
Notes:
1246
LUNA TECHNOLOGIES OVA MEASUREMENT
Luna Technologies OVA Measurement
This component allows for the loading of measurements of the wavelength

dependence of the Jones matrix previously saved by Luna Technologies Optical
Vector Analyzer (OVA) software.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main
Name and description Default value Units Value

range
Filename data.bin — —
File name with the OVA measurements
Properties Start frequency: 195307.401924389 GHz

Sample frequency: 0.333433376455307 GHz
Read-only parameter with the properties of
Start wavelength: 1535 nm
the measurement data
End wavelength: 1542 nm
File format version: 3
Segment size: 2853
Measurement type: 1
Length of DUT: 6.5 m
Number of averages: 0
Pulse Compression parameters =

Average dispersion: 0 ps/nm
Reference wavelength: 1550 nm
Dispersion slope: 0 ps/nm2
Status: 0
Date and time stamp 0/0/0
Device Descriptor NONE
1247
Graphs

value Unit range
Number of points 100 — [10,100e6]

From 1500 nm nm [100,2000]
To 1600 nm nm [100,2000]
Simulation

value range
Noise

value range
Graphs

Insertion loss Wavelength (m) Insertion loss (dB)
Group delay Wavelength (m) Group delay (ps)
1248
This component allows for loading measurements of the wavelength dependence of
the Jones matrix [1] from a binary file previously saved by the Luna Optical Vector
Analyzer [2] user software (versions 3 and 3.2).
The Luna OVA is capable of capturing the complete Jones matrix with all the relative
phase information. These fundamental elements can then be used in their raw form
in OptiSystem for device and system modeling. The Jones matrix describes how the
device affects the amplitude, phase and polarization state of the light:
J 11 ( ω ) J 12 ( ω )
J(ω) = (1)
J 21 ( ω ) J 22 ( ω )
and
iφ kl ( ω )
J kl ( ω ) = m kl ( ω )e
where J kl is a complex number that represents the amplitude ( m ) and phase ( φ ) for
each element kl of the matrix.
The parameter Filename defines the measurement data. After loading the data the
parameter Properties will display the essential information describing the properties
of the measurement such as start and sample frequencies, start and end
wavelengths, file format version, segment size, measurement type, etc.
The user can also verify the filter insertion loss and group delay by enabling the
parameter Calculate graphs. If Calculate graphs is enabled, the graphs are
available in the Project Browser under the component graphs folder.
The insertion loss is calculated in dB according to:
2 2 2 2
⎛ J 11 + J 12 + J 21 + J 22 ⎞ (2)
IL = 10 log ⎜ ----------------------------------------------------------------------⎟
⎝ 2 ⎠
The group delay in seconds is calculated according to:
∠( J 11n + 1 J 11n∗ + J 12n + 1 J 12n∗ + J 21n + 1 J 21n∗ + J 22n + 1 J 22n∗ ) (3)

GD = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Δω
where Δω is the optical frequency increment between points.
1249
References
[1] D. S. Klieger, J. W. Lewis, C.E. Randall, Polarized Light in Optical and Spectroscopy, Academic
Press, 1990.
[2] http://www.lunatechnologies.com/products/
1250
MEASURED COMPONENT
Measured Component

the Jones matrix. It provides a transfer function that describes the amplitude, phase,
and polarization state of 1xN devices.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main
Name and description Default value Units Value

range
Filename measurement.txt — —
File name with the Jones matrix

measurement
Graphs

value Unit range
Number of points 100 — [10,100e6]
From 1500 nm nm [100,2000]
1251
MEASURED COMPONENT

value Unit range
To 1600 nm nm [100,2000]
Simulation

value range
Noise

value range
Graphs

Transmission Wavelength (m) Transmission (dB)
Group delay Wavelength (m) Group delay (ps)
the Jones matrix [1] from a text file. This text file can be generated by measurement
equipment such as the Agilent 81910A Photonic All-Parameter Analyzer [2],
Fiberwork OSPA (Optical Parameter Analyzer [3]), or directly by the user.
The Jones matrix describes how the device affects the amplitude, phase and
polarization state of the light:
J 11 ( ω ) J 12 ( ω )
J(ω) = (1)
J 21 ( ω ) J 22 ( ω )
1252
MEASURED COMPONENT
and
iφ kl ( ω )
J kl ( ω ) = m kl ( ω )e
where J kl is a complex number that represents the amplitude ( m ) and phase ( φ ) for
each element kl of the matrix.
The 81910A has only one output and one input, so it can only measure one channel
at a time. However there is the ability to combine multiple measurements (channels)
into one file. The Measured Component can load files with multiple measurement,
and for every channel it will generate one port. N measurements will generate N
output ports.
The first three rows of the file are used for the header or comments. Comments are
delimited by the character '%', for example:
%Agilent Technologies Photonic Foundation Library 2.60.09 (2)…
%Wavelength,Amp(j11),Phase(j11),Amp(j12),Phase(j12),Amp(j21),P
hase(j21),Amp(j22),…
%Channel_1 Tx, MeasurementChannel_1 Rx, Measurement…
Each measurement has 9 columns, the wavelength in meters, the magnitude

(amplitude) and phase (radians) of the 4 Jones terms:
Wavelength,Amp(J11),Arg(J11),Amp(J12),Arg(J12),Amp(J21),Arg(J21),Amp(J22),Ar
g(J22)…
For example:
1.541e6,0.0072341,2.9,0.0041225,2.9,0.0052406,2.9,0.0073904,2.
9…
1.542e6,0.0072341,2.9,0.0041225,2.9,0.0052406,2.9,0.0073904,2.
9…
Multiple measurements can be combined in the same file, for example, when
measuring the transmission and reflection of one component, the file will have 18
columns, 9 values for each measurement (Tx and Rx).
The user can also verify the filter insertion loss and group delay by enabling the
parameter Calculate graphs. If Calculate graphs is enabled, the graphs are
available in the Project Browser under the component graphs folder.
1253
MEASURED COMPONENT
The insertion loss is calculated in dB according to:
2 2 2 2
⎛ J 11 + J 12 + J 21 + J 22 ⎞ (2)
IL = 10 log ⎜ ----------------------------------------------------------------------⎟
⎝ 2 ⎠
The group delay in seconds is calculated according to:
∠( J 11n + 1 J 11n∗ + J 12n + 1 J 12n∗ + J 21n + 1 J 21n∗ + J 22n + 1 J 22n∗ ) (3)

GD = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Δω
where Δω is the optical frequency increment between points.
References
[1] D. S. Klieger, J. W. Lewis, C.E. Randall, Polarized Light in Optical and Spectroscopy, Academic
Press, 1990.
[2] http://www.agilent.com/
[3] http://www.fiberwork.com.br/
1254
MEASURED COMPONENT
Passives Library
Optical
Multimode
• Spatial Aperture
• Thin Lens
• Vortex Lens
1255
MEASURED COMPONENT
Notes:
1256
SPATIAL APERTURE
Spatial Aperture
This component applies a circular or square window to the transverse mode profiles.
Ports

Modes
Parameters
Main
Aperture type Circular [Circular, Square]
Defines the aperture type
Width 10 um [0, 1e+100]
Defines the width of the square aperture

or the diameter of the circular aperture
Simulation

The spatial aperture component truncates the incident optical field. The component
also attenuates the time-domain waveform of the signal. The attenuation is the power
lost in the aperture.
1257
SPATIAL APERTURE
Notes:
1258
THIN LENS
Thin Lens
This component applies a phase transformation to the transverse mode profiles,

affecting the focus of the signal beam.
Ports

Modes
Parameters
Main
Focal length 10 mm [1-e+100,
1e+100]
Defines the focal length
Aperture effects NO [YES, NO]
Defines whether the lens will cause

aperture effects or not
Lens diameter 5 mm [0, 1e+100]
Defines the width of the of the circular

aperture
Lens reflectance 0 % [0, 100]
Defines the lens reflectance
Outer reflectance 100 % [0, 100]
Defines the reflectance outside of the

lens diameter
1259
THIN LENS
Simulation

This component is an optical lens modeled using the thin lens approximation [1]. The
applied phase transformation is given by:
2 2
π(x + y )
T ( x, y ) = exp – j ------------------------- (1)
λf
where f is the focal length. Additionally, aperture effects can be modeled using the
parameter Lens diameter and the reflectance inside and outside of the lens.
References
[1] J. W. Goodman, “Introduction to Fourier Optics”, McGraw-Hill, New York, NY 1996.
1260
VORTEX LENS
Vortex Lens
This component is a combination of a parabolic lens and a phase vortex. Similar to

the thin lens component, it applies a phase transformation to the transverse mode
profiles, affecting the focus of the signal beam.
Ports

Modes
Parameters
Main
Vortex parameter 2 [1-e+100,
1e+100]
Defines the lens vortex parameter m
Refractive index 1 [1-e+100,

1e+100]
Defines the lens refractive index n
Focal length 10 mm [1-e+100,

1e+100]
Defines the focal length
Aperture effects NO [YES, NO]
Defines whether the lens will cause

aperture effects or not
Lens diameter 5 mm [0, 1e+100]
Defines the width of the of the circular

aperture
Lens reflectance 0 % [0, 100]
Defines the lens reflectance
1261
VORTEX LENS
Outer reflectance 100 % [0, 100]
Defines the reflectance outside of the

lens diameter
Simulation

This component is an optical lens modeled using the thin lens approximation [1]. The
applied phase transformation is given by:
2 2
πn ( x + y ) x
T ( x, y ) = exp – j ---------------------------- + m atan ⎛ --⎞ (1)
2λf ⎝ y⎠
Where f is the focal length, m is the vortex parameter and n is the refractive index.
Additionally, aperture effects can be modeled using the parameter Lens diameter and
the reflectance inside and outside of the lens.
References
[1] E. G. Johnson, J. Stack, C. Koehler, "Light Coupling by a Vortex Lens into Graded Index Fiber",
Journal of Lightwave Technology, VOL. 19, NO. 5, May 2001.
1262
VORTEX LENS
Passives Library
Optical
Couplers
• X Coupler
• Pump Coupler Co-Propagating
• Pump Coupler Counter-Propagating
• Coupler Bidirectional
• Pump Coupler Bidirectional
1263
VORTEX LENS
Notes:
1264
X COUPLER
X Coupler
Cross coupler for combining or splitting optical signals.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Coupling coefficient 0.5 — [0,1]
Coupling factor from port 1 to port 2
Additional loss 0 dB [0,+INF[
Conjugate True — True, False
Defines whether the component uses the complex conjugate

definition or not
1265
X COUPLER
The transmission matrix for the cross:
⎛ E 1OutX ,Y⎞ ⎛ 1–c pj c⎞ ⎛ E 1InX ,Y⎞

⎜ ⎟ = α⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟ (1)
⎝ E 2OutX ,Y⎠ ⎝ pj c 1 – c⎠ ⎝ E 2InX ,Y⎠
where p is the signal of the c is coupling coefficient and α is the additional loss. If the
parameter Conjugate is disabled, p is positive (value = 1), and the coupler will use the
definition of [1], otherwise p is negative (value = -1) and the coupler will use the
definition of [2].
References
[1] Gerd Keiser, “Optical Fiber Communications,” Third Edition, McGraw-Hill, Higher Education, 2000.
[2] Christi K. Madsen and Jian H. Zhao, "Optical Filter Design and Analysis, A Signal Processing
Approach", (John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1999).
1266
PUMP COUPLER CO-PROPAGATING
Pump Coupler Co-Propagating
Equivalent to a pump coupler subsystem where you can control the attenuation of the
signal and pump independently.
Ports

Signal Input Input Optical
Pump Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Signal attenuation 0 dB [0,+INF[
Signal power attenuation
Pump attenuation 0 dB [0,+INF[
Pump power attenuation
1267
PUMP COUPLER CO-PROPAGATING
The input signals are attenuated and combined. The subsystem is illustrated in Figure
1.
Figure 1 Pump coupler co-propagating subsystem
1268
PUMP COUPLER COUNTER-PROPAGATING
Pump Coupler Counter-Propagating
Equivalent to a subsystem where you can control the attenuation of the signal and
pump independently.
Ports

Signal Input Input Optical
Pump Input Input Optical
Pump Output Output Optical
Parameters
Main

Signal attenuation 0 dB [0,+INF[
Signal power attenuation
Pump attenuation 0 dB [0,+INF[
Pump power attenuation
1269
PUMP COUPLER COUNTER-PROPAGATING
The input signals are attenuated independently. The subsystem is illustrated in Figure
1.
Figure 1 Pump coupler counter-propagating subsystem
1270
COUPLER BIDIRECTIONAL
Coupler Bidirectional
This component is a cross-coupler for combining or splitting the optical signal. It is bi-
directional, with wavelength dependent coupling, insertion loss and return loss.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Dependent,
parameters


parameters
1271

Coupling ratio 50 % [0, 100]
Coupling ratio at the operating wavelength
Min. coupling ratio 0 % [0, 100]
Component coupling ratio at the operating wavelength
Conjugate True — True, False
Defines whether the component uses the complex conjugate

definition or not
loss or reflection
Graphs

value range
From 1500 nm nm [100, 2000]
To 1600 nm nm [100, 2000]
1272
Simulation

value range

enabled
Noise

value range
Graphs

1273
according to:
E Out1 = IL ( f ) ( E In3 C 11 ( f ) + jE In4 C 12 ( f ) ) + E In1 RL ( f )

E Out2 = IL ( f ) ( jE In3 C 12 ( f ) + E In4 C 11 ( f ) ) + E In2 RL ( f )
E Out3 = IL ( f ) ( E In1 C 11 ( f ) + jE In2 C 12 ( f ) ) + E In3 RL ( f )
E Out4 = IL ( f ) ( jE In1 C 12 ( f ) + E In2 C 11 ( f ) ) + E In4 RL ( f )
losses, respectively.
–--------
IL
20
IL ( f ) = 10 H(f)
– RL Min
-----------------
20 2
RL ( f ) = 10 1 – H(f)
C11(f) and C12(f) are given by:
where r is defined by the parameter Coupling ratio and C11(f) and C12(f) have the
minimum values defined by the parameter Min. coupling ratio.
1274
Cosine Dependent:
where
with the wavelength dependence of the coupling ratios, insertion and return loss.
Refer to the X Coupler component for the description of parameter Conjugate.
1275
Notes:
1276
PUMP COUPLER BIDIRECTIONAL
Pump Coupler Bidirectional
This component is a pump-coupler for combining signals and pumps. It is

bidirectional, with wavelength dependent isolation, insertion loss and return loss.
Ports

Parameters
Signal Input/Output

value range
Signal wavelength dependence Dependent [Independent,
Dependent,
parameters
Signal operating wavelength 1550 Hz, THz, nm [100, 2000]
Defines the central wavelength when using wavelength dependent

parameters
Signal operating bandwidth 130 Hz, GHz, THz, [0, 200]

nm
parameters
Signal insertion loss 0 dB [0, +INF]
Component isolation at the operating wavelength
1277

value range
Signal return loss 65 dB [0, +INF]
Min. signal return loss 60 dB [0, +INF]
Signal isolation 55 dB [0, +INF]
Component isolation at the operating wavelength
Defines a phase delay for the signal resulting from the return loss or
reflection
Pump Input/Output

value range
Pump wavelength dependence Dependent [Independent,
Dependent,
parameters
Pump operating wavelength 980 Hz, THz, nm [100, 2000]
Defines the central wavelength when using wavelength dependent

parameters
Pump operating bandwidth 50 Hz, GHz, THz, [0, 200]

nm
parameters
Pump insertion loss 0 dB [0, +INF]
Pump return loss 65 dB [0, +INF]
Min. pump return loss 60 dB [0, +INF]
Pump isolation 55 dB [0, +INF]
1278
Graphs

value range
From 1500 nm nm [100, 2000]
To 1600 nm nm [100, 2000]
Simulation

value range

enabled
Noise

value range
Graphs

Pump input/output insertion loss Wavelength (m) Insertion loss
Pump input/output return loss Wavelength (m) Return loss
Signal input/output insertion Wavelength (m) Insertion loss

loss
1279

Signal input/output return loss Wavelength (m) Return loss
according to:
E Out1 = E In3 IL S ( f ) + E In1 RL S ( f )

E Out2 = E In3 IL P ( f ) + E In2 RL P ( f )
E Out3 = E In1 IL S ( f ) + E In2 IL P ( f ) + E In3 IL s ( f ) + E In3 RL P ( f )
where ILS(f)/ILP(f) and RLS(f)/RLP(f) are frequency/wavelength dependent insertion
and return losses for signals and pumps.
– IL S
-----------
20
IL S ( f ) = 10 H(f)
– RL S Min
--------------------
20 2
RL S ( f ) = 10 1 – H(f)
where ILS is defined by the parameter Signal insertion loss and ILS(f) has the
maximum value defined by the parameter Signal isolation. RLSMin is defined by the
parameter Min. signal return loss, and RLS(f) has the maximum value defined by the
parameter Signal return loss.
– IL P
-----------
20
IL P ( f ) = 10 H(f)
– RL P Min
-------------------
-
20 2
RL P ( f ) = 10 1 – H(f)
where ILP is defined by the parameter Pump insertion loss and ILP(f) has the
maximum value defined by the parameter Pump isolation. RLPMin is defined by the
parameter Min. pump return loss, and RLP(f) has the maximum value defined by the
parameter Pump return loss.
1280
Cosine Dependent:
where
with the wavelength dependence of the insertion and return losses for the signal and
pump ranges.
1281
Notes:
1282
Passives Library
Optical
Power Splitters
• Power Splitter 1x2

• Power Splitter
• 1xN Splitter Bidirectional
1283
Notes:
1284
POWER SPLITTER 1X2
Power Splitter 1x2
Ideal power splitter — splits an optical input signal into two output signals.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Loss 0 dB [0,+INF[
Loss applied to the signal after splitting
The signal output for each port is attenuated by:
α-
–------
20
E InX ,Y ( t )10 (1)
E OutX ,Y ( t ) = ------------------------------
-
N
where α is the power attenuation and N is the number of output ports (N=2).
1285
POWER SPLITTER 1X2
Notes:
1286
POWER SPLITTER 1X4
Power Splitter 1x4
Ideal power splitter — splits an optical input signal in four output signals.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Loss 0 dB [0,+INF[
α-
–------
20
E InX ,Y ( t )10 (1)
E OutX ,Y ( t ) = ------------------------------
-
N
1287
POWER SPLITTER 1X4
Notes:
1288
POWER SPLITTER 1X8
Power Splitter 1x8
Ideal power splitter — splits an optical input signal in eight output signals.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Loss 0 dB [0,+INF[
1289
POWER SPLITTER 1X8
α-
–------
20
E InX ,Y ( t )10 (1)
E OutX ,Y ( t ) = ------------------------------
-
N
1290
POWER SPLITTER
Power Splitter
Ideal power splitter — splits an optical input signal into a user-defined number of
output signals.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Number of output ports 2 — [2,1000]
Loss 0 dB [0,+INF[
1291
POWER SPLITTER
α-
–------
20
E InX ,Y ( t )10 (1)
E OutX ,Y ( t ) = ------------------------------
-
N
where α is the power attenuation and N is the number of output ports.
1292
1XN SPLITTER BIDIRECTIONAL
1xN Splitter Bidirectional
This component is a power splitter and combiner with arbitrary number of input ports.
It is bidirectional, with wavelength dependent insertion loss and return loss.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Number of output ports 2 [2, 1000]

Dependent,
parameters


parameters
1293

loss or reflection
Graphs

value range
From 1500 nm nm [100, 2000]
To 1600 nm nm [100, 2000]
Simulation

value range

enabled
1294
Noise

or not

bins

bins
Graphs

according to:
N
1
E Out = IL ( f ) -------- ∑ E Ini + E In RL ( f )
N
i=1
1
E Outi = E In IL ( f ) -------- + E Ini RL ( f ) ,i = [ 1, N ]
N
losses, respectively and are given by:
–--------
IL
20
IL ( f ) = 10 H(f)
– RL Min
-----------------
20 2
RL ( f ) = 10 1 – H(f)
1295
N is the Number of output ports.
Cosine Dependent:
where
with the wavelength dependence of transmission and return loss.
1296
Passives Library
Optical
Power Combiners
• Power Combiner 2x1

• Power Combiner
1297
Notes:
1298
POWER COMBINER 2X1
Power Combiner 2x1
Ideal power combiner — combines two optical input signals.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Loss 0 dB [0,+INF[
α-
–------
N
20
10
E OutX ,Y ( t ) = ----------- ∑ E In ,NX ,Y ( t ) (1)
N
1
where α is the power attenuation and N is the number of input ports (N=2).
1299
POWER COMBINER 2X1
Notes:
1300
POWER COMBINER 4X1
Power Combiner 4x1
Ideal power combiner — combines four optical input signals.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Loss 0 dB [0,+INF[
α-
–------
N
20 (1)
10
E OutX ,Y ( t ) = ----------- ∑ E In ,NX ,Y ( t )
N
1
1301
POWER COMBINER 4X1
Notes:
1302
POWER COMBINER 8X1
Power Combiner 8x1
Ideal power combiner — combines eight optical input signals.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Loss 0 dB [0,+INF[
1303
POWER COMBINER 8X1
α-
–------
N
20
10 (1)
E OutX ,Y ( t ) = ----------- ∑ E In ,NX ,Y ( t )
N
1
1304
POWER COMBINER
Power Combiner
Ideal power combiner — combines a user-defined number of input signals.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Loss 0 dB [0,+INF[
α-
–------
N
20
10 (1)
E OutX ,Y ( t ) = ----------- ∑ E In ,NX ,Y ( t )
N
1
where α is the power attenuation and N is the number of input ports.
1305
POWER COMBINER
Notes:
1306
POWER COMBINER
Passives Library
Optical
Polarization
• Linear Polarizer
• Circular Polarizer
• Polarization Attenuator
• Polarization Delay
• Polarization Phase Shift
• Polarization Combiner
• Polarization Controller
• Polarization Rotator
• Polarization Splitter
• Time DelayPMD Emulator
• Polarization Combiner Bidirectional
• Polarization Waveplate
• Polarization Filter
1307
POWER COMBINER
Notes:
1308
LINEAR POLARIZER
Linear Polarizer
Simulates an ideal linear polarizer.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Device angle 0 deg [1e-50, 1e-50]
Simulation

1309
LINEAR POLARIZER
The ideal linear polarizer transmits the linear polarization component that coincides
with the transmission axis of the polarizer (given by device angle). The orthogonal
component removed.
The following Jones (1) and Mueller (2) matrices describe the polarization transfer
function of this model with an arbitrary device angle θ :
2
cos ( θ ) cos ( θ ) ⋅ sin ( θ ) (1)
2
cos ( θ ) ⋅ sin ( θ ) sin ( θ )
1 ⎛ cos ( 2θ ) ⎞⎛ sin ( 2θ ) ⎞ 0
⎜ 2 ⎟ ⎜ cos ( 2θ ) ⋅ sin ( 2θ )⎟
1--- cos ( 2θ ) ⎜ cos ( 2θ ) ⎟⎜ ⎟ 0 (2)
2 sin ( 2θ ) ⎜ cos ( 2θ ) ⋅ sin ( 2θ )⎟ ⎜ sin
2
( 2θ ) ⎟
⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟ 0
0 ⎝ 0 ⎠⎝ 0 ⎠ 0
The Jones matrix is used in sampled signals. The Mueller matrix is used for
parameterized and noise bins signals.
1310
CIRCULAR POLARIZER
Circular Polarizer
Simulates an ideal circular polarizer.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Circular type Right — Left, Right
Simulation

1311
CIRCULAR POLARIZER
The ideal circular polarizer transmits the circular polarization component of the input
signal. The input signal type coincides with the polarizer type (given by circular type).
The orthogonal circular polarized component is removed.
The following Jones and Mueller matrices describe the model:
1⁄2 –j ⁄ 2 1⁄2 j⁄2

(1)
j⁄2 0 –j ⁄ 2 0
Right Left
1⁄2 0 0 1⁄2 1⁄2 0 0 –1 ⁄ 2

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (2)
1⁄2 0 0 1⁄2 –1 ⁄ 2 0 0 1⁄2

Right Left
The Jones matrices are used in sampled signals. The Mueller matrices are used for
1312
POLARIZATION ATTENUATOR
Polarization Attenuator
Simulates a polarization attenuator.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Attenuation X 0 dB [0, 1e+050]
Attenuation Y 0 dB [0, 1e+050]
Simulation

1313
POLARIZATION ATTENUATOR
The polarization attenuator allows the attenuation of each polarization component by
multiplication with constant values. The parameters attenuation x and attenuation y
define the amount of attenuation the x polarization and the y polarization components
will be multiplied by.
The following Jones and Mueller matrices describe the transmission of the signal:
– α x ⁄ 20 0
10 (1)
– α y ⁄ 20
0 10
– α x ⁄ 10 – α y ⁄ 10 – α x ⁄ 10 – α y ⁄ 10
10 + 10 10 – 10 0 0
1--- 10 – α x ⁄ 10 – α y ⁄ 10 – α x ⁄ 10 – α y ⁄ 10 0 0
⋅ – 10 10 + 10 (2)
2 – α x ⁄ 20 – α y ⁄ 20 0
0 0 2 ⋅ 10 ⋅ 10
– α x ⁄ 20 – α y ⁄ 20
0 0 0 2 ⋅ 10 ⋅ 10
1314
POLARIZATION DELAY
Polarization Delay
Adds a time advance/delay to both of the optical signal polarizations.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Delay X 0 ns, ms, s [-1e100, 1e100]
Time delay to apply to signal polarization X
Delay Y 0 ns, ms, s [-1e100, 1e100]
Time delay to apply to signal polarization Y
Simulation

This component introduces a different time delay in each polarization component. The
parameters Delay x and Delay y define the amount of delay the x polarization and the
y polarization components will be delayed by.
This component does not affect parameterized signals and noise bins.
1315
POLARIZATION DELAY
Notes:
1316
POLARIZATION PHASE SHIFT
Polarization Phase Shift
Adds a time phase advance/delay to both of the optical signal polarizations.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Phase shift X 0 deg, rad [-1e100, 1e100]
Phase shift to apply to signal polarization X
Phase shift Y 0 deg, rad [-1e100, 1e100]
Phase shift to apply to signal polarization Y
Simulation

This component introduces a different phase shift in each polarization component.
The parameters Phase shift x and Phase shift y define the amount of phase the x
polarization and the y polarization components will be shifted by.
This component does not affect parameterized signals and noise bins.
1317
POLARIZATION PHASE SHIFT
Notes:
1318
POLARIZATION COMBINER
Polarization Combiner
Simulates a polarization combiner.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Device angle 0 deg [-1e-50, +1e-50 ]
Simulation

1319
POLARIZATION COMBINER
This model combines the two input signals to one output port. The polarization
combiner selects the appropriate polarization component of each signal at the input
ports and adds the selected polarization components. Figure 1 shows how this model
is implemented. There is a linear polarizer at each input port. The angle of each
polarizer is given by device angle. An angle of 90° is added to the device angle of the
polarizer at input port 2.
Figure 1 Polarizer Combiner
1320
POLARIZATION CONTROLLER
Polarization Controller
Simulates a polarization controller.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Azimuth 0 deg [ -90, 90 ]
Ellipticity 0 deg [ -45, 45 ]
Symmetry factor 0 — [ -1e100, 1e100 ]
Simulation

1321
POLARIZATION CONTROLLER
The polarization controller sets the input signal in an arbitrary polarization state. The
azimuth and ellipticity parameters define the polarization state of the output signal. In
this case, the output polarization is independent of the input signal polarization.
Considering Einx and Einy as the polarization components of the input signal, the
output signal is:
⎛ 1 – k ⋅ exp ( j ⋅ δ x ( t ) )⎞ 2 2
E out ( t ) = ⎜ ⎟⋅ E inx + E iny (1)
⎝ k ⋅ exp ( j ⋅ δ x ( t ) ) ⎠
where k is the power splitting ratio parameter and δ yx ( t ) is the phase difference
between the x and y components.
The splitting ratio is:
k = ( 1 – cos ( 2 ⋅ η ) ⋅ cos ( 2 ⋅ ε ) ) ⁄ 2 (2)
and the phase difference is:
sin ( 2 ⋅ ε )
δ yx = arc sin ⎛ -----------------------------------⎞ (3)
⎝ 2 ⋅ k ⋅ ( 1 – k )⎠
The x and y phase components are derived from:
δ x – δ inx (4)
sf = --------------------
δ y – δ iny
where sf is the symmetry factor.
For sampled signals, Equation 1, Equation 2, and Equation 3 describe the output
signal. The following Stokes representation describes parameterized and noise bins
signals:
= ( E inx + E iny ) cos ( 2 ⋅ ε ) ⋅ cos ( 2 ⋅ η )

2 2
S out (5)
cos ( 2 ⋅ ε ) ⋅ sin ( 2 ⋅ η )
sin ( 2 ⋅ ε )
1322
POLARIZATION ROTATOR
Polarization Rotator
Simulates a rotation of coordinate axes.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Rotation angle 0 deg [ 1e-50, 1e-50 ]
Simulation

1323
POLARIZATION ROTATOR
The polarization rotator performs a rotation of the coordinate axes system. The
parameter Device angle rotates the angle by φ counterclockwise.
The rotation is:
(1)
x o = x ⋅ cos ( φ ) + y ⋅ sin ( φ )
y o = – x ⋅ sin ( φ ) + y ⋅ cos ( φ ) (2)
Based on Equation 1 and Equation 2, the corresponding Jones matrix is defined as:
cos ( φ ) sin ( φ ) (3)

– sin ( φ ) cos ( φ )
The corresponding Mueller matrix is:
1 0 0 0
0 cos ( 2 ⋅ φ ) sin ( 2 ⋅ φ ) 0 (4)
0 – sin ( 2 ⋅ φ ) cos ( 2 ⋅ φ ) 0
0 0 0 1
1324
POLARIZATION SPLITTER
Polarization Splitter
Simulates a polarization splitter.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Device angle 0 deg [-1e-50, +1e-50 ]
Simulation

1325
POLARIZATION SPLITTER
This model splits the input signal to two output ports. The polarization splitter selects
the appropriate polarization component of the signal at the input port and each
polarization component for one of two output ports. Figure 1 shows how this model is
implemented.
Figure 1 Polarizer Splitter
1326
PMD EMULATOR
PMD Emulator
This component simulates the effects of first- and second-order PMD in a linear fiber.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Length L 50 km ]0,+INF[
Fiber length
Fiber attenuation coefficient
Dispersion D 17 ps / (nm - ]-INF, +INF[

km)
Dispersion at the frequency reference
Dispersion slope S 0.075 ps / (nm2 - ]-INF, +INF[

km)
Slope of the dispersion at the frequency reference
Frequency reference f 193.1 Hz, THz, ]-INF, +INF[

nm
Frequency of reference for the specified parameters
Differential group delay

Δτ 0 71 ps [0, +INF[
Polarization chromatic dispersion

Δτ' 1.3 ps/GHz,
ps/nm
]-INF, +INF[
Depolarization rate 2k 10.8 deg/Hz, ]-INF, +INF[

deg/GHz,
deg/nm
1327
PMD EMULATOR
Simulation

As bit rates increase to 10 Gbps and 40 Gbps, Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD)
becomes one of the leading causes of signal degradation in data transmission. A
physical phenomenon in optical fiber that is statistical in nature, PMD causes
dispersion, or spreading of pulses in time and distance, causing adjacent signal
pulses to overlap and produce bit errors. The PMD emulator component consists of
the PMD channel transfer function considering the first (frequency independent) and
second order (frequency dependent) PMD effects.
A linear dispersive fiber can be represented by a 2x2 transfer matrix of the form [1]:
(1)
T ( ω ) = exp ( ( – α – j ⋅ β ( ω ) ) ⋅ z ) ⋅ M ( ω )
where α is the fiber attenuation, β is the mean propagation constant, and M is the
unitary matrix that can be written as:
–1 (2)
M(ω) = R (ω) ⋅ D(ω) ⋅ R(ω)
R takes into account the rotation of the principal states of polarization (PSP):
R(ω) = cos ( k ⋅ ω ) sin ( k ⋅ ω )

– sin ( k ⋅ ω ) cos ( k ⋅ ω )
∂s
where the coefficient k is defined by the depolarization rate 2k = ------- .
∂ω
The parameter s is the direction of one of the two orthogonal eigenvectors.
D takes into account the different propagation speeds on the two PSPs, with the
expressions:
D(ω) = exp ( j ⋅ Δτ ⋅ ω ⁄ 2 ) 0
0 exp ( – j ⋅ Δτ ⋅ ω ⁄ 2 )
1328
PMD EMULATOR
In the second-order approximation the time difference between the two polarizations
is given by:
Δτ = Δτ 0 + Δτ'ω
Where Δτ 0 is frequency independent differential group delay, and the differential
group delay frequency dependency is represented by the depolarization rate Δτ' .
1329
PMD EMULATOR
Notes:
1330
POLARIZATION COMBINER BIDIRECTIONAL
Polarization Combiner Bidirectional
This component combines the input optical signals. It is bi-directional, with

wavelength dependent insertion loss.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Dependent,
parameters


parameters
1331

loss or reflection
Graphs

value range
From 1500 nm nm [100, 2000]
To 1600 nm nm [100, 2000]
Simulation

value range

enabled
Noise

or not

bins
1332

bins
Graphs

according to:
1
E Out1 = ------- E In 3 IL ( f ) + E In 1 RL
2
1
E Out2 = ------- E In 3 IL ( f ) + E In 2 RL
2
E Out3 = E In1 IL ( f ) + E In2 IL ( f ) + E In 3 RL (1)

where IL(f) is frequency/wavelength dependent insertion loss, and RL is the return
loss. – IL --------
20
IL ( f ) = 10 H(f)
–---------
RL-
20
RL = 10
loss.
1333
Cosine Dependent:
where
with the wavelength dependence of the transmission.
1334
POLARIZATION WAVEPLATE
Polarization Waveplate
This component offers control of the rotation angle and phase change of the
polarization of optical signals.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Phase change 0 deg, rad ]-INF, +INF[
Controls the polarization phase change
Rotation angle 0 deg, rad ]-INF, +INF[
Controls the polarization rotation angle
Simulation

value range

enabled
1335
POLARIZATION WAVEPLATE
The waveplate component works by shifting the phase of the optical signal between
two perpendicular polarization components. The corresponding Jones matrix that
describe the linear transformation of the ideal waveplate is defined as:
φ φ φ
cos ⎛ ---⎞ + j sin ⎛ ---⎞ cos ( 2φ ) – j sin ⎛ ---⎞ sin ( 2φ )
⎝ 2⎠ ⎝ 2⎠ ⎝ 2⎠
(1)
φ φ φ
– j sin ⎛ ---⎞ sin ( 2φ ) – j sin ⎛ ---⎞ cos ( 2φ ) + cos ⎛ ---⎞
⎝ 2⎠ ⎝ 2⎠ ⎝ 2⎠
Where the rotation angle φ is used to take into account any physical rotation of the
waveplate.
1336
POLARIZATION FILTER
Polarization Filter
This component filters the polarization X or Y of an optical signal.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Polarization filter None - None, X, Y
Controls the polarization phase change
Simulation

value range

enabled
The polarization filter component works by removing polarization X or Y from the input
signal.
1337
POLARIZATION FILTER
Notes:
1338
POLARIZATION FILTER
Passives Library
Optical
Isolators
• Isolator
• Ideal Isolator
• Isolator Bidirectional
1339
POLARIZATION FILTER
Notes:
1340
ISOLATOR
Isolator
Optical isolator. You can control insertion loss, return loss, and isolation.
Ports

Input 1 (forward) Input Optical
Output 2 (forward) Output Optical
Input 2 (backward) Input Optical
Output 1 (backward) Output Optical
Parameters
Main

Attenuation between Input 1 – Output 2
Return loss 60 dB [0,+INF[
Return loss between Input 1 – Output 1, and Input 2 – Output

2
Isolation 60 dB [0,+INF[
Isolation between Input 2 – Output 1
1341
ISOLATOR
The subsystem is illustrated in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Isolator subsystem
1342
IDEAL ISOLATOR
Ideal Isolator
Ideal optical isolator. You can control insertion loss — there is no return loss or ideal
isolation.
Ports

Input 1 (forward) Input Optical
Output 1 (forward) Output Optical
Input 2 (backward) Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Attenuation between Input 1 – Output 1
1343
IDEAL ISOLATOR
Figure 1 Ideal Isolator subsystem
1344
ISOLATOR BIDIRECTIONAL
Isolator Bidirectional
This component is an isolator. It is bidirectional, with wavelength dependent isolation,

Ports

Parameters
Main

Dependent,
parameters


parameters
Min. isolation 45 dB [0, +INF]
Component isolation outside the operating bandwidth
1345

loss or reflection
Graphs

value range
From 1500 nm nm [100, 2000]
To 1600 nm nm [100, 2000]
Simulation

value range

enabled
1346
Noise

or not

bins

bins
Graphs

Isolation Wavelength (m) Isolation
according to:
E Out1 = E In2 IS ( f ) + E In 1 RL ( f )
E Out2 = E In1 IL ( f ) + E In2 RL ( f )
where IL(f), IS(f) and RL(f) are frequency/wavelength dependent insertion loss,
isolation and return losses, respectively, and are given by:
–--------
IL
20
IL ( f ) = 10 H(f)
– IS Min
---------------
20 2
IS ( f ) = 10 1 – H(f)
– RL Min
-----------------
20 2
RL ( f ) = 10 1 – H(f)
defined by the parameter Max. insertion loss. ISMin is defined by the parameter Min.
isolation, and IS(f) has the maximum value defined by the parameter Isolation. RLMin
1347
is defined by the parameter Min. return loss, and RL(f) has the maximum value
defined by the parameter Return loss.
Cosine Dependent:
where
with the wavelength dependence of the insertion, isolation and return loss.
1348
Passives Library
Optical
Circulators
• Circulator
• Ideal Circulator
• Circulator Bidirectional
1349
Notes:
1350
CIRCULATOR
Circulator
Optical circulator. You can control insertion loss, return loss, and isolation.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Attenuation between Input 1 – Output 2, Input 2 – Output 3,
and Input 3 – Output 1
Return loss 60 dB [0,+INF[
Return loss between Input 1 – Output 1, Input 2 – Output 2,

Isolation 60 dB [0,+INF[
Isolation between Input 3 – Output 2, Input 1 – Output 3, and

Input 2 – Output 1
1351
CIRCULATOR
Figure 1 Circulator subsystem
1352
IDEAL CIRCULATOR
Ideal Circulator
Ideal optical isolator. User can control the insertion loss only— there is no return loss
or isolation.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Attenuation between Input 1 – Output 2, Input 2 – Output 3,
1353
IDEAL CIRCULATOR
Figure 1 Ideal Circulator subsystem
1354
CIRCULATOR BIDIRECTIONAL
Circulator Bidirectional
This component is a circulator. It is bidirectional, with wavelength dependent isolation,

Ports

Parameters
Main

Dependent,
parameters


parameters
1355

Min. isolation 45 dB [0, +INF]
Component isolation outside the operating bandwidth
loss or reflection
Graphs

value range
From 1500 nm nm [100, 2000]
To 1600 nm nm [100, 2000]
Simulation

value range

enabled
1356
Noise

or not

bins

bins
Graphs

Isolation Wavelength (m) Isolation
according to:
E Out1 = E In3 IL ( f ) + E In2 IS ( f ) + E In 1 RL

where IL(f), IS(f) and RL(f) are frequency/wavelength dependent insertion loss,
isolation and return losses respectively, and are given by:
–--------
IL
20
IL ( f ) = 10 H(f)
– IS Min
---------------
20 2
IS ( f ) = 10 1 – H(f)
– RL Min
-----------------
20 2
RL ( f ) = 10 1 – H(f)
1357
defined by the parameter Max. insertion loss. ISMin is defined by the parameter Min.
isolation, and IS(f) has the maximum value defined by the parameter Isolation. RLMin
is defined by the parameter Min. return loss, and RL(f) has the maximum value
defined by the parameter Return loss.
Wavelength Dependent;
Cosine Dependent:
where
with the wavelength dependence of the insertion loss, isolation and return loss.
1358
Signal Processing Library
Arithmetic
Electrical
• Electrical Gain
• Electrical Adder
• Electrical Subtractor
• Electrical Multiplier
• Electrical Bias
• Electrical Norm
• Electrical Differentiator
• Electrical Integrator
• Electrical Rescale
• Electrical Reciprocal
• Electrical Abs
• Electrical Sgn
1359
Notes:
1360
ELECTRICAL GAIN
Electrical Gain
Ideal gain element.
Ports

Output = Input * Gain Output Electrical
Parameters
Main

Gain to apply to the signal port
Simulation

1361
ELECTRICAL GAIN
Notes:
1362
ELECTRICAL ADDER
Electrical Adder
Adds the input electrical signals.
Ports

Output = (Input 1) + (Input 2) Output Electrical
1363
ELECTRICAL ADDER
Notes:
1364
ELECTRICAL SUBTRACTOR
Electrical Subtractor
Subtracts the input electrical signals.
Ports

Output = (Input 1) – (Input 2) Output Electrical
1365
ELECTRICAL SUBTRACTOR
Notes:
1366
ELECTRICAL MULTIPLIER
Electrical Multiplier
Multiplies the input electrical signals.
Ports

Output = (Input 1) * (Input 2) Output Electrical
1367
ELECTRICAL MULTIPLIER
Notes:
1368
ELECTRICAL BIAS
Electrical Bias
Adds a constant value to the input signal.
Ports

Output = Input + Bias Output Electrical
Parameters
Main

Constant value to add to the input signal
Simulation

1369
ELECTRICAL BIAS
Notes:
1370
ELECTRICAL NORM
Electrical Norm
Calculates the equivalent power value of the electrical signal.
Ports

Output = Input * Input Output Electrical
Parameters
Simulation

1371
ELECTRICAL NORM
Notes:
1372
ELECTRICAL DIFFERENTIATOR
Electrical Differentiator
Calculates the time derivative of the input signal. It can be used in frequency
demodulators.
Ports

Output = d(Input) / dt Output Electrical
Parameters
Simulation

This component calculates the derivative of the input electrical signal according to:
dv in ( t )
v out ( t ) = ---------------- , where v in is the input electrical signal.
dt
1373
ELECTRICAL DIFFERENTIATOR
Notes:
1374
ELECTRICAL INTEGRATOR
Electrical Integrator
Calculates the time integral of the input signal over a user defined time period.
Ports

Output = Integ(Input) Output Electrical
Parameters
Main

Integration period Time window s, ms, ns [0,+INF[
The integral is performed over this time period
Simulation

Calculates the integral of the input electrical signal according to:
T
v out ( t ) = ∫0 vin ( t ) dt ,
where v in is the input electrical signal and T is the integration period. The
integration period allows this component to be used to integrate a signal for each bit
period. The value of the integral is reset before the next period.
1375
ELECTRICAL INTEGRATOR
Notes:
1376
ELECTRICAL RESCALE
Electrical Rescale
Scales the minimum and maximum values of the input signal to user-defined minimum and maximum
values.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Minimum amplitude 0 a.u. ]-INF,+INF[
The minimum value of the signal output
Maximum amplitude 1 a.u. ]-INF,+INF[
The maximum value of the signal output
Simulation

1377
ELECTRICAL RESCALE
This model estimates the minimum and maximum values of the input signal and
calculates the scale and bias factor according to the user defined values. The output
signal is scaled according to:
v out ( t ) = av in ( t ) + b , where v in is the input electrical signal.

a and b are calculated according to:
Min out – Max out
a = ----------------------------------------
Min in – Max in
Max out Min in – Max in Min out
b = -----------------------------------------------------------------------
Min in – Max in
where Max and Min are the maximum and minimum values for the signal input and
output.
1378
ELECTRICAL RECIPROCAL
Electrical Reciprocal
Calculates the reciprocal (1/x) of the input signal.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Minimum value 0 a.u. ]-INF,+INF[
The minimum value of the signal output
Simulation

1379
ELECTRICAL RECIPROCAL
This component calculates the reciprocal of the input signal according to Equation 1,
where v min is the parameter Minimum value:
::
⎧
⎪ v 1-
⎪ out = ----- , v > v min
v in in (1)
⎨
⎪ v 1
⎪ out = --------
-, v ≤ v min
v min in
⎩
1380
ELECTRICAL ABS
Electrical Abs
This component calculates the absolute value of the input signal.
Ports

Parameters
Simulation

1381
ELECTRICAL ABS
Notes:
1382
ELECTRICAL SGN
Electrical Sgn
This component calculates the sign of the input signal.
Ports

Parameters
Simulation

This component calculates the sign of the input signal according to Equation 1:
⎧
⎪ v out = 1, v > 0
⎪ in
(1)
⎨ v out = 0, v = 0
⎪ in
⎪ v out = – 1, v < 0
⎩ in
1383
ELECTRICAL SGN
Notes:
1384
ELECTRICAL SGN

Arithmetic
Optical
• Optical Gain
• Optical Adder
• Optical Subtractor
• Optical Bias
• Optical Multiplier
• Optical Hard Limiter
1385
ELECTRICAL SGN
Notes:
1386
OPTICAL GAIN
Optical Gain
Ideal gain element.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Output = Input * Gain Output Optical
Parameters
Main

Gain to apply to the signal port
Simulation

1387
OPTICAL GAIN
Notes:
1388
OPTICAL ADDER
Optical Adder
Adds the input optical signals.
Ports

Output = (Input 1) + (Input 2) Output Optical
1389
OPTICAL ADDER
Notes:
1390
OPTICAL SUBTRACTOR
Optical Subtractor
Subtracts the input optical signals.
Ports

Output = (Input 1) – (Input 2) Output Optical
1391
OPTICAL SUBTRACTOR
Notes:
1392
OPTICAL BIAS
Optical Bias
Adds a constant value to the input signal.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Output = Input + Bias Output Optical
Parameters
Main

Constant value to add to the input signal
Simulation

1393
OPTICAL BIAS
Notes:
1394
OPTICAL MULTIPLIER
Optical Multiplier
Multiplies the input optical signals.
Ports

Output = (Input 1) * (Input 2) Output Optical
1395
OPTICAL MULTIPLIER
Notes:
1396
OPTICAL HARD LIMITER
Optical Hard Limiter
This component limits the level of the output signal to a user defined range.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Power threshold 1 W, mW, dBm ]0,+INF[
Threshold level
Lower output level 1 W, mW, dBm ]0,+INF[
Output power if signal is bellow threshold
Upper output level 2 W, mW, dBm ]0,+INF[
Output level is signal is above threshold
Numerical

Lower calculation limit 1200 nm ]0,+INF[
Wavelength that defines the lower calculation limit
Upper calculation limit 1700 nm ]0,+INF[

Wavelength that defines the upper calculation limit
1397
Simulation

Noise
Random numbers

value range
This component limits the input signal to a range between the lower and upper power
output levels. The output signal is calculated to Equation 1:
⎧
⎪ P out = P , P < P
⎪ Low in Threshold
(1)
⎨ P out = P , P
Threshold ≤ P in ≤ P Threshold
⎪ In
⎪ P out = P , P > P
⎩ High in Threshold
Where P Low is the parameter Lower output level, P High is the parameter Upper
output level and P Threshold is the parameter Power threshold.
1398

Tools
Electrical
• Convert To Electrical Individual Samples

• Convert From Electrical Individual Samples
• Electrical Downsampler
1399
Notes:
1400
CONVERT TO ELECTRICAL INDIVIDUAL SAMPLES
Convert To Electrical Individual Samples
This component converts an electrical signal band into multiple individual samples in
time domain.
Ports

Parameters
Simulation
The individual sample representation of the signal is convenient for applications that
require time-driven simulation with closed loops and feedback.
This component will convert an electrical sampled signal into multiple individual
samples. The global parameters Time window and Sample rate will define the number
of samples at the component output. The input signal will be resampled using the
global Sample rate.
Refer to the tutorial lesson: Working with individual samples.
1401
CONVERT TO ELECTRICAL INDIVIDUAL SAMPLES
Notes:
1402
CONVERT FROM ELECTRICAL INDIVIDUAL SAMPLES
Convert From Electrical Individual Samples
This component combines multiple individual samples into one electrical signal band.
Ports

Parameters
Simulation
However, Visualizer and a number of other components do not support individual

samples.
This component converts the multiple individual samples into a sampled signal band.
Therefore, it is a complementary tool that works together with the “Convert To
Electrical Individual Samples” tool.
1403
CONVERT FROM ELECTRICAL INDIVIDUAL SAMPLES
Notes:
1404
ELECTRICAL DOWNSAMPLER
Electrical Downsampler
This component resamples the input signal to a user defined Sample rate either in
frequency domain or time domain.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value unit range
Operation mode Frequency - - Frequency,
Time
Defines whether the downsampling is performed in
Frequency domain or time domain
Sample rate Sample rate Hz Hz, GHz, [1e-3,+INF[

THz
Simulation
If the operation mode is set to frequency domain, then an electrical rectangle filter with
a bandwidth equals to half of the component parameter “Sample rate“ is applied to the
input signal.
If the operation mode is set to time domain, then every nth (n is the proportion between
the component parameter “Sample rate” and the sampling rate of input signal)
sampling point from the input signal is picked and sent to the output.
1405
Notes:
1406

Tools
Optical
• Convert To Optical Individual Samples

• Convert From Optical Individual Samples
• Merge Optical Signal Bands
• Convert to Parameterized
• Convert to Noise Bins
• Convert To Sampled Signals
• Signal Type Selector
• Optical Downsampler
• Channel Attacher
1407
Notes:
1408
MERGE OPTICAL SIGNAL BANDS
Merge Optical Signal Bands
Merges multiple sampled signals into one signal.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Simulation

1409
MERGE OPTICAL SIGNAL BANDS
Notes:
1410
CONVERT TO PARAMETERIZED
Convert to Parameterized
This component converts sampled signals and noise bins to parameterized signals.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Signal type Sampled signals — Sampled signals,
Noise bins,
Defines the input signal type to be converted to parameterized Sampled signals
signals
and Noise bins
Simulation

1411
CONVERT TO PARAMETERIZED
This component converts sampled signals and noise bins to parameterized signals.
The user selects the type of signals to be converted by using the parameter Signal
type. By default only sampled signals will be converted to parameterized signals.
Sampled signal channels are converted to parameterized in the frequency domain.

The total power for each channel per polarization is translated to a parameterized
signal. The same approach is used for noise bins, where the total power for each
noise bin is translated to a parameterized signal.
1412
CONVERT TO NOISE BINS
Convert to Noise Bins
This component converts sampled signals and parameterized signals to noise bins.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Signal type Sampled signals — Sampled signals,
Parameterized
Defines the input signal type to be converted to noise bins signals, Sampled
and Parameterized
signals
Simulation

1413
CONVERT TO NOISE BINS
Notes:
1414
CONVERT TO OPTICAL INDIVIDUAL SAMPLES
Convert To Optical Individual Samples
This component converts an optical signal with one or more bands into multiple
individual samples in time domain.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Simulation
This component will convert an optical sampled signal into multiple individual
samples. The global parameters Time window and Sample rate will define the number
of samples at the component output. The input signal will be resampled using the
global Sample rate.
If a WDM signal with multiple sample bands is available at the component input, each
band will be represented by a sequence of multiple individual samples. Therefore, the
center frequency of each channel is a property of each individual sample.
1415
CONVERT TO OPTICAL INDIVIDUAL SAMPLES
Notes:
1416
CONVERT FROM OPTICAL INDIVIDUAL SAMPLES
Convert From Optical Individual Samples
This component combines multiple individual samples into one or more optical signal
bands.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Simulation
However, Visualizer and a number of other components do not support individual

samples.
This component converts the multiple individual samples into a sampled signal band.
Therefore, it is a complementary tool that works together with the “Convert To Optical
Individual Samples”.
If a WDM signal composed by individual samples is converted into multiple sampled

signals, each signal will have a different center frequency and the global parameter
Sample rate.
1417
CONVERT FROM OPTICAL INDIVIDUAL SAMPLES
Notes:
1418
OPTICAL DOWNSAMPLER
Optical Downsampler
This component resamples the input signal to user defined frequency limits.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value unit range
Determines whether the resampling will be centered at

the maximum amplitude of the signal or if it will be user-
defined
User-defined center frequency for the resampling
Sample rate Sample rate Hz Hz, GHz, [1e-3,+INF[

THz, nm
Simulation
1419
OPTICAL DOWNSAMPLER
Notes:
1420
SIGNAL TYPE SELECTOR
Signal Type Selector
This component filters different signal types from the input signal.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main
Signal type All All, Sampled signals,
Noise bins,
Selects the signal type that will reach the Parameterized signals
component output.
Simulation

1421
SIGNAL TYPE SELECTOR
Notes:
1422
CONVERT TO SAMPLED SIGNALS
Convert To Sampled Signals
This component converts parameterized signals or noise bins into sampled signals.

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Signal type Parameterized — Parameterized signals,
signals Noise bins,
Defines the input signal type to be converted to sampled
signals
Center frequency for noise bins conversion
Sample rate Sample rate Hz, GHz, [1, +INF[

THz
Sampled signal sample rate
Simulation

1423
CONVERT TO SAMPLED SIGNALS
Notes:
1424
CHANNEL ATTACHER
Channel Attacher
This component attaches a frequency channel label to the input signal.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main
Frequency 193.1 Thz Hz, THz, [30, 300000]
nm
Channel frequency.
Simulation

1425
CHANNEL ATTACHER
Notes:
1426
CHANNEL ATTACHER

Tools
Binary
• Convert To Individual Bits

• Convert From Individual Bits
• Serial To Parallel Converter
• Serial To Parallel Converter 1xN
• Parallel To Serial Converter
• Parallel To Serial Converter Nx1
1427
CHANNEL ATTACHER
Notes:
1428
CONVERT TO INDIVIDUAL BITS
Convert To Individual Bits
This component converts a binary signal into multiple individual bits.
Ports

Input Input Binary
Output Output Binary
Parameters
Simulation
The individual bit representation of the signal is convenient for applications that
require simulations with closed loops and feedback.
This component will convert a binary signal into multiple individual bits.
1429
CONVERT TO INDIVIDUAL BITS
Notes:
1430
CONVERT FROM INDIVIDUAL BITS
Convert From Individual Bits
This component combines multiple individual bits into one binary signal.
Ports

Input Input Binary
Parameters
Main
User defined bit rate NO [YES, NO]
Determines whether or not to use a user

defined bit rate
Bit rate Bit rate [0, 1e12]
The bit rate of the output signal
Sequence length Sequence length [0, 10e6]
The sequence length of the output

signal
Simulation
The individual bit representation of the signal is convenient for applications that
require closed loops and feedback.
1431
CONVERT FROM INDIVIDUAL BITS
This component converts the multiple individual bits into a binary signal. Therefore, it
is a complementary tool that works together with the “Convert To Individual Bits” tool.
Parameters Sequence length defines the number of bits for the binary signal at the
component output. If User defined bit rate parameter is enabled, the output bit rate
will be defined by the parameter Bit rate.
1432
SERIAL TO PARALLEL CONVERTER
Serial To Parallel Converter
Converts the input sequence at bit rate R into two output sequences at R/2 bit rate.
Ports

Input Input Binary
Output 1 Output Binary
1433
SERIAL TO PARALLEL CONVERTER
Notes:
1434
SERIAL TO PARALLEL CONVERTER 1XN
Serial To Parallel Converter 1xN
Converts the input sequence at bit rate R into N output sequences at R/N bit rate.
Ports

Input Input Binary
Parameters
Main
Number of output ports 2 - - [2, 1000]
1435
SERIAL TO PARALLEL CONVERTER 1XN
Notes:
1436
PARALLEL TO SERIAL CONVERTER
Parallel To Serial Converter
Combine 2 input sequences at bit rate R into one output sequence at 2R bit rate.
Ports

Input 1 Input Binary
1437
PARALLEL TO SERIAL CONVERTER
Notes:
1438
PARALLEL TO SERIAL CONVERTER NX1
Parallel To Serial Converter Nx1
Combine N input sequences at bit rate R into one output sequence at N x R bit rate.
Ports

Parameters
Main
Number of input ports 2 - - [2, 1000]
1439
Notes:
1440

Logic
Binary
• Binary NOT
• Binary AND
• Binary OR
• Binary XOR
• Binary NAND
• Binary NOR
• Binary XNOR
• Delay
• Duobinary Precoder
• 4-DPSK Precoder
1441
Notes:
1442
BINARY NOT
Binary NOT
Logic NOT operator.
Ports

Input Input Binary
Parameters
Simulation

1443
BINARY NOT
Notes:
1444
BINARY AND
Binary AND
Logic AND operator.
Ports

Output = (Input 1) AND (Input 2) Output Binary
1445
BINARY AND
Notes:
1446
BINARY OR
Binary OR
Logic OR operator
Ports

Output = (Input 1) OR (Input 2) Output Binary
1447
BINARY OR
Notes:
1448
BINARY XOR
Binary XOR
Logic XOR operator.
Ports

Output = (Input 1) XOR (Input 2) Output Binary
1449
BINARY XOR
Notes:
1450
BINARY NAND
Binary NAND
Logic NAND operator.
Ports

Output = (Input 1) NAND (Input 2) Output Binary
1451
BINARY NAND
Notes:
1452
BINARY NOR
Binary NOR
Logic NOR operator.
Ports

Output = (Input 1) NOR (Input 2) Output Binary
1453
BINARY NOR
Notes:
1454
BINARY XNOR
Binary XNOR
Logic XNOR operator.
Ports

Output = (Input 1) XNOR (Input 2) Output Binary
1455
BINARY XNOR
Notes:
1456
DELAY
Delay
Adds a time delay in number of bits to the binary signal input.
Ports

Input Input Binary
Parameters
Main

Delay 1 — [0, 1e+009]
Simulation

1457
DELAY
Notes:
1458
DUOBINARY PRECODER
Duobinary Precoder
This component simulates a precoder generally utilized in a duobinary modulation.
Ports

Input1 Input Binary
Output1 Output Binary
Parameters
Main

Delay 1 bits [1, +INF]
Simulation

Normally, an optical duobinary system requires a precoder in order to avoid recursive
decoding in the receiver, error propagation and reduce hardware complexity. The
precoder is composed on an exclusive-or gate with a delayed feedback path.
The precoding rule for this is: bk = dk ⊕ bk – d
where d k is the transmitted binary data sequence, b k is the precoded binary

sequence, d is the number of delayed bits, and ⊕ represents the logic instruction
1459
DUOBINARY PRECODER
exclusive-or “XOR”. Due to the use of the precoder in a transmitter, decoding in the
receiver is simple.
Figure 1 shows a diagram detailing the precoder. You can specify the number of bits
delayed in the feedback path. When k – d ≤ 0 , then b k – d = 1 .
Figure 1 Duobinary precoder
1460
4-DPSK PRECODER
4-DPSK Precoder
This component simulates a precoder for 4-DPSK modulation utilized for serial or
parallel transmitter configuration
Ports

Input1 Input Binary
Parameters
Main

Transmitter configuration Serial - Serial, Parallel
Determines if the precoder will be used in a serial or parallel

transmitter configuration
Simulation

Normally, an optical 4-DPSK system requires a precoder in order to avoid recursive
decoding in the receiver, error propagating and to reduce hardware complexity.
Figure 1 shows a diagram detailing the precoder. Mathematically, the precoder
operation can be described by the following set of equations:
Serial configuration
1461
4-DPSK PRECODER
Ii = ( Qi – 1 ⊕ Ii – 1 ) ( di ⊕ Ii – 1 ) + ( Qi – 1 ⊕ Ii – 1 ) ( gi ⊕ Ii – 1 )
Qi = ( Qi – 1 ⊕ Ii – 1 ) ( gi ⊕ Ii – 1 ) + ( Qi – 1 ⊕ Ii – 1 ) ( di ⊕ Ii – 1 )
Parallel configuration
Ii = ( di ⊕ gi ) ⋅ ( gi ⊕ Ii – 1 ) + ( di ⊕ gi ) ⋅ ( gi ⊕ Qi – 1 )
Qi = ( di ⊕ gi ) ⋅ ( gi ⊕ Qi – 1 ) + ( di ⊕ gi ) ⋅ ( gi ⊕ Ii – 1 )
Figure 1 4-DPSK precoder
1462
4-DPSK PRECODER

Logic
Electrical
• Electrical NOT
• Electrical AND
• Electrical OR
• Electrical XOR
• Electrical NAND
• Electrical NOR
• Electrical XNOR
• T Flip-Flop
• D Flip-Flop
• JK Flip-Flop
• RS Flip-Flop
• RS NOR Latch
• RS NAND Latch
• Clocked RS NAND Latch
1463
4-DPSK PRECODER
Notes:
1464
ELECTRICAL NOT
Electrical NOT
This component is a logical “NOT” operator.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Threshold 0.5 [-INF, +INF]
Threshold used to decide whether the input signal is “low” or

“high”
High level output 1 [-INF, +INF]
Output signal amplitude for level “high”
Low level output 0 [-INF, +INF]
Output signal amplitude for level “low”
Simulation

value range
enabled
1465
ELECTRICAL NOT
The electrical input signal is converted to level 1 or 0 depending on the parameter
Threshold. The output signal level is defined by the parameters Low level output and
High level output and by the operator NOT:
Input Output
1 Low level output
0 High level output
1466
ELECTRICAL AND
Electrical AND
This component is a logical “AND” operator.
Ports

Parameters
Main


“high”
1467
ELECTRICAL AND
The electrical input signal is converted to level “1” or “0” depending on the parameter
High level output and by the operator AND:
Input 1 Input 2 Output

0 0 Low level output
1 1 High level output
1468
ELECTRICAL OR
Electrical OR
This component is a logical “OR” operator.
Ports

Parameters
Main


“high”
1469
ELECTRICAL OR
High level output and by the operator OR:

1470
ELECTRICAL XOR
Electrical XOR
This component is a logical “XOR” operator.
Ports

Parameters
Main


“high”
1471
ELECTRICAL XOR
High level output and by the operator XOR:

1472
ELECTRICAL NAND
Electrical NAND
This component is a logical “NAND” operator.
Ports

Parameters
Main


“high”
1473
ELECTRICAL NAND
High level output and by the operator NAND:

1474
ELECTRICAL NOR
Electrical NOR
This component is a logical “NOR” operator.
Ports

Parameters
Main


“high”
1475
ELECTRICAL NOR
High level output and by the operator AND:

1476
ELECTRICAL XNOR
Electrical XNOR
This component is a logical “XNOR” operator.
Ports

Parameters
Main


“high”
1477
ELECTRICAL XNOR
High level output and by the operator XNOR:

1478
T FLIP-FLOP
T Flip-Flop
This component simulates a T flip-flop.
Ports

T Input Electrical
Q Output Electrical
NOT Q Output Electrical
Parameters
Main


“high”
1479
T FLIP-FLOP
The T or "toggle" flip-flop changes its output on a clock edge, giving an output which
is half the frequency of the signal to the T input:
Figure 1 T Flip-Flop
1480
D FLIP-FLOP
D Flip-Flop
This component simulates a D flip-flop.
Ports

D Input Electrical
CLK Input Electrical
Q Output Electrical
Parameters
Main


“high”
1481
D FLIP-FLOP
In this flip-flop, the Q output always takes on the state of the D input at the moment
the falling clock edge and never at any other time. The following figure represents the
D flip-flop using logical gates.
Figure 1 D Flip-Flop
1482
JK FLIP-FLOP
JK Flip-Flop
This component simulates a JK flip-flop.
Ports

J Input Electrical
K Input Electrical
Q Output Electrical
Parameters
Main


“high”
1483
JK FLIP-FLOP
The JK flip-flop behaves just like the RS flip-flop. The Q and NOT Q outputs will only
change state on the falling edge of the CLK signal, and the J and K inputs will control
the future output state. However, there are some differences.
Since one of the two logic inputs is always disabled according to the output state of
the overall flip-flop, the master latch cannot change state back and forth while the CLK
input is at logic 1. Instead, the enabled input can change the state of the master latch
once, after which this latch will not change again.
If both the J and K inputs are held at logic 1 and the CLK signal continues to change,
the Q and NOT Q outputs will simply change state with each falling edge of the CLK
signal. (The master latch circuit will change state with each rising edge of CLK). The
figure below shows the JK circuit.
Figure 1 JK Flip-Flop
J K QNext
0 0 QPrev
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 NOT QPrev
1484
RS FLIP-FLOP
RS Flip-Flop
This component simulates an edge-triggered reset-set flip-flop.
Ports

R Input Electrical
S Input Electrical
Q Output Electrical
Parameters
Main


“high”
1485
RS FLIP-FLOP
The edge-triggered RS flip-flop actually consists of two identical RS NAND latch
circuits, as shown in figure 1. However, the inverter connected between the two CLK
inputs ensures that the two sections will be enabled during opposite half-cycles of the
clock signal.
Starting with the CLK input at logic 0, the S and R inputs are disconnected from the
input latch. Therefore, any changes in the input signals cannot affect the state of the
final outputs.
When the CLK signal goes to logic 1, the S and R inputs are able to control the state
of the input latch. However, at the same time the inverted CLK signal applied to the
output (slave) latch prevents the state of the input latch from having any effect here.
Therefore, any changes in the R and S input signals are tracked by the input latch
while CLK is at logic 1, but are not reflected at the Q and NOT Q outputs.
When CLK falls again to logic 0, the S and R inputs are again isolated from the input
latch. At the same time, the inverted CLK signal now allows the current state of the
input latch to reach the output latch. Therefore, the Q and NOT Q outputs can only
change state when the CLK signal falls from a logic 1 to logic 0.
Figure 1 RS Flip-Flop
R S Q
0 0 QPrev
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 1*
*Note that it is forbidden to have both inputs at a logic 1 level at the same time. That state will force both
outputs to a logic 1, overriding the feedback latching action.
1486
RS NOR LATCH
RS NOR Latch
This component simulates a reset-set latch using NOR gates.
Ports

R Input Electrical
S Input Electrical
Q Output Electrical
Parameters
Main


“high”
1487
RS NOR LATCH
It is constructed from a pair of cross-coupled NOR logic gates. The stored bit is
present on the output marked Q.
Normally, in storage mode, the S and R inputs are both low, and feedback maintains
the Q and Q outputs in a constant state, with Q the complement of Q. If S (Set) is
pulsed high while R is held low, then the Q output is forced high, and stays high even
after S returns low; similarly, if R (Reset) is pulsed high while S is held low, then the
Q output is forced low, and stays low even after R returns low.
Figure 1 RS NOT Latch
1488
RS NAND LATCH
RS NAND Latch
This component simulates a reset-set latch using NAND gates.
Ports

R Input Electrical
S Input Electrical
Q Output Electrical
Parameters
Main


“high”
1489
RS NAND LATCH
It is constructed from a pair of cross-coupled NAND logic gates. The stored bit is
present on the output marked Q.
Normally, in storage mode, the S and R inputs are both low, and feedback maintains
the Q and Q outputs in a constant state, with Q the complement of Q. If S (Set) is
pulsed high while R is held low, then the Q output is forced high, and stays high even
after S returns low; similarly, if R (Reset) is pulsed high while S is held low, then the
Q output is forced low, and stays low even after R returns low.
Figure 1 RS NAND Latch
1490
CLOCKED RS NAND LATCH
Clocked RS NAND Latch
This component simulates a clocked reset-set latch using NAND gates.
Ports

R Input Electrical
S Input Electrical
Q Output Electrical
Parameters
Main


“high”
1491
CLOCKED RS NAND LATCH
The clocked RS NAND latch circuit is similar in operation to the RS NAND latch
component. The S and R inputs are normally at logic 0, and must be changed to logic
1 to change the state of the latch, however with a third input. This input is CLK, which
is used to synchronize these latch circuits with each other. The output can only
change state while the CLK input is a logic 1. When CLK is a logic 0, the S and R
inputs will have no effect.
Figure 1 Clocked RS NAND Latch
1492
Tools Library
• Switch
• Select
• Fork 1x2
• Loop Control
• Ground
• Buffer Selector
• Fork 1xN
• Binary Null
• Optical Null
• Electrical Null
• Binary Delay
• Optical Delay
• Electrical Delay
• Optical Ring Controller
• Electrical Ring Controller
• Duplicator
• Limiter
• Initializer
• Save to file
• Load from file
• Command Line Application
• Swap Horiz.
1493
Notes:
1494
SWITCH
Switch
This component is a switch. The signal entering the input port will be send to one of
the output ports.
Ports

Input Input All types
Output 1 Output All types
Main
Selection 1 — — [1 - number of
Selects the signal output port output ports]
1495
SWITCH
The signal entering the input port will go to the selected output port. This component
is used to sweep components. The user can define the signal path by changing the
parameter Selection.
The following block diagram shows an example where 4 types of filters are used with
a system:
In this project, the user can sweep the Selection parameter from the Switch and the
Select components from 1 to 4. By changing these parameters, a different filter will
be used for each sweep iteration.
1496
SELECT
Select
This component is a select switch. One of the signals entering the input ports will be
sent to the output port.
Ports

Input 1 Input All types
Output Output All types
Main
Selection 1 — — [1 - number of
Selects the signal output port output ports]
1497
SELECT
One of the signals entering the input ports will go to the output port. This component
is used to sweep components. The user can define the input signal and the signal
path by changing the parameter Selection.
The following block diagram shows an example where 4 types of filters are used with
a system:
In this project, the user can sweep the Selection parameter from the Switch and the
Select components from 1 to 4. By changing these parameters, a different filter will
be used for each sweep iteration.
1498
FORK 1X2
Fork 1x2
Copies the input signal into two output signals. This tool allows you to duplicate
component output ports.
Ports

1499
FORK 1X2
Notes:
1500
LOOP CONTROL
Loop Control
Allows you to build systems using loop structures.
Ports

Loop Input Input All types
Loop Output Output All types
Parameters
Main

Number of loops 0 — [0,+INF[
Number of iterations in the loop
Simulation

The loop topology starts at the Loop output port and terminates at the Loop input port.
The signal enters the Input port and circulates in the loop N times, where N is defined
by the parameter Number of Loops.
1501
LOOP CONTROL
Notes:
1502
GROUND
Ground
Ground
Ports

modes
Input Input Any type Binary, M-Ary,
Electrical, Optical
1503
GROUND
Notes:
1504
BUFFER SELECTOR
Buffer Selector
Allows you to select one of the signals from the input buffer.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Selection 0 — [0,+INF[
Index of the signal buffer
Simulation

Iterations Iterations — [1,1e9]
Maximum number of signals in the input buffer
1505
BUFFER SELECTOR
Notes:
1506
FORK 1XN
Fork 1xN
Copies the input signal into a user-defined number of output signals. Allows you to
duplicate component output ports.
Ports

Parameters
Main

1507
FORK 1XN
Notes:
1508
BINARY NULL
Binary Null
Generates a zero-value binary signal.
Ports

Parameters
Simulation

1509
BINARY NULL
Notes:
1510
OPTICAL NULL
Optical Null
Generates a zero-value optical signal.
Ports

Parameters
Simulation

1511
OPTICAL NULL
Notes:
1512
ELECTRICAL NULL
Electrical Null
Generates a zero-value electrical signal.
Ports

Parameters
Simulation

1513
ELECTRICAL NULL
Notes:
1514
BINARY DELAY
Binary Delay
Generates binary signal delays. The delay is added by sending a NULL signal to the
output port.
Ports

Input Input Binary
Parameters
Main

Delay 1 — [0,+INF[
Number of delay signals
Simulation

1515
BINARY DELAY
Notes:
1516
OPTICAL DELAY
Optical Delay
Generates optical signal delays. The delay is added by sending NULL signals to the
output port.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Simulation

1517
OPTICAL DELAY
Notes:
1518
ELECTRICAL DELAY
Electrical Delay
Generates electrical signal delays. The delay is added by sending NULL signals to
the output port.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Simulation

1519
ELECTRICAL DELAY
Notes:
1520
OPTICAL RING CONTROLLER
Optical Ring Controller
This component allows the user to build systems using ring structures with optical
signals.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Number of loops 0 — [0, 1e+009]
Simulation

1521
OPTICAL RING CONTROLLER
The signal enters the Input port and circulates through the ring N times, where N is
defined by the parameter Number of Loops. The ring is initialized by a null optical
signal.
The block diagram of this component is:
1522
ELECTRICAL RING CONTROLLER
Electrical Ring Controller
This component allows the user to build systems using ring structures with electrical
signals.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Number of loops 0 — [0, 1e+009]
Simulation

1523
ELECTRICAL RING CONTROLLER
The signal enters the Input port and circulates through the ring N times, where N is
defined by the parameter Number of Loops. The ring is initialized by a null electrical
signal.
The block diagram of this component is:
1524
DUPLICATOR
Duplicator
Ports

Parameters
Simulation

1525
DUPLICATOR
Notes:
1526
LIMITER
Limiter
This component controls the number of signals passing from the input to the output
port. It can be used as a ring controller module.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Number of loops 1 — [0,+INF[
Number of iterations in the loop ring
Simulation

This component counts the number of signals passing from the input to the output
port. It will interrupt the signal propagation when the number of signals is equal to the
parameter Number of loops.
The Limiter is used for ring controlling, since a signal can enter the input port and
circulate through the ring the number of times dictated by the parameter Number of
loops.
1527
LIMITER
Notes:
1528
INITIALIZER
Initializer
This component is a select switch. The signal entering the first input port is sent to the
output a user-defined number of times.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Number of signals 1 — [0,+INF[
Number of signals from the first input port to be sent to the

output port
1529
INITIALIZER
The signal entering the first input port goes to the output port N times, where N is
defined by the parameter Number of signals. After that, signals from the second
input port go to the output port.
The Initializer is used to initialize ring structures, as it allows the user to specify the
initial signal to circulate in the ring.
The block diagram below shows an optical ring controller using the Initializer
component instead of the Optical Delay tool.
1530
SAVE TO FILE
Save to file
Saves the input signal to a file.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Save signal mode All signals — First signal, All
signals, Last
Select if you want to save all signals, only the first signal, or
signal
the last signal from the signal buffer
Filename — — —
Filename for the saved data
1531
SAVE TO FILE
Notes:
1532
LOAD FROM FILE
Load from file
Loads the input signal from a file.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Filename Signal.ods — —
Filename to load the data
Number of signals to skip 0 — [0, 1e+009]
Number of signal to skip when loading a file with multiple

signals
Simulation

1533
LOAD FROM FILE
Notes:
1534
COMMAND LINE APPLICATION
Command Line Application
This component can create a process with user defined command line parameters. It
can be used to call any Windows application. It requires a signal at the input port to
trigger the calculation.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Application
The name of the program to be called
Command line arguments

List of command line arguments available
Simulation

1535
This component allows the user to run another program or application during the
simulation process. Command Line Application will run the application with the user
defined command line arguments. The component only runs if there is a signal of any
type in the input port. After closing the application the component will generate a
trigger signal at the output. The trigger signal will be the same signal at the input port.
The component will only finish the calculation when the application is closed, this
means that if you run Notepad, for example, only when you close notepad the
calculation of other components will continue.
Typically this component is used for cosimulation with EDA tools, together with
triggered load and save modules from the EDA cosimulation library (see Figure 1 and
Figure 2).
1536
Figure 1 Cosimulation using command line application
1537
Figure 2 Command line arguments for the application
1538
Notes:
1539
1540
SWAP HORIZ.
Swap Horiz.
This component is a layout tool used to swap a connection when connecting

bidirectional and flipped components.
Ports

Input 1 Input Any type
Output 1 Output Any type
Input 2 Input Any type
Output 2 Output Any type
Parameters
Main
Invert ports NO [YES, NO]

have inverted ports
When designing a bidirectional system using flipped components, this component will
help to improve the layout presentation.
For example, Figure 1 presents one layout in which the connections between the fiber
and pump coupler and between the pump couple and isolator are twisted.
There is nothing wrong with this design. However, Figure 2 presents the same design
using the Swap Horiz. tool.
The first component has the parameter Invert ports disabled. The second component
has the parameter Invert ports enabled.
1541
SWAP HORIZ.
Figure 1 Example without the Swap Horiz. tool
Figure 2 Example using the Swap Horiz. tool
1542
Optiwave Software Tools
• OptiAmplifier
• OptiGrating
• WDM_Phasar Demux 1xN
• WDM_Phasar Mux Nx1
• OptiBPM Component NxM
• Save Transverse Mode
• OptiSPICE Output
• OptiSPICE NetList
1543
Notes:
1544
OPTIAMPLIFIER
OptiAmplifier
OptiSystem can call Optiwave’s OptiAmplifier software to design optical fiber amplifiers and lasers.
Since the amplifier performance depends on the input signal, OptiSystem calls the OptiAmplifier engine
to simulate the amplifier (see Figure 1).
Figure 1 OptiAmplifier
1545
OPTIAMPLIFIER
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

OptiAmplifier Project — — —
Filename with the OptiAmplifier project
Show project after calculation False — True, False
Determines if the amplifier layout will appear after the

calculation ends
Polarization

Polarization X,
Determines the polarization filter type
Polarization Y
Simulation

1546
OPTIAMPLIFIER
Noise

Noise dynamic 3 dB [0,+INF]

Convert noise bins Convert noise — True, False

bins
Determines if the generated noise bins are incorporated into
the signal
Random numbers

From the OptiAmplifier icon, you can create a new project file, open an existing project
file, show the layout of the current project, or access the component properties and
parameters (see Figure 2).
Figure 2 OptiAmplifier open menu
You can enter component parameters in the Properties dialog box (see Figure 3).
1547
OPTIAMPLIFIER
Figure 3 OptiAmplifier component properties dialog box
A new OptiAmplifier file opens in OptiAmplifier Main Layout. You can use
OptiAmplifier to design the amplifier (see Figure 4).
1548
OPTIAMPLIFIER
Figure 4 OptiAmplifier software
OptiAmplifier receives signals from OptiSystem using the input and output ports.
OptiAmplifier calculates the layout and sends the output signal back to OptiSystem
(see Figure 5).
1549
OPTIAMPLIFIER
Figure 5 OptiAmplifier and OptiSystem integration
You can close OptiAmplifier and open it later by selecting Open Layout from the
OptiAmplifier Component dialog box. You can also load an existing OptiAmplifier
project by selecting Open OptiAmplifier File from the OptiAmplifier component
dialog box (see Figure 6).
1550
OPTIAMPLIFIER
Figure 6 Loading OptiAmplifier files
1551
OPTIAMPLIFIER
Notes:
1552
OPTIGRATING
OptiGrating
Loads Optiwave’s OptiGrating or IFO_Grating complex spectrum files. OptiGrating is an Integrated and
Fiber Optical Gratings Design Software which can export the results to OptiSystem. This component can
also be used to load measured data from files.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
User-defined frequency False — — True, False
measurements
FBG filename FBG.txt — — —
Simulation

value range

enabled
1553
OPTIGRATING

value range

Noise

value range
Graphs

Filter reflection - real part Frequency (Hz) Amplitude (a.u.)
Filter reflection - imag part Frequency (Hz) Amplitude (a.u.)
Filter transmission - real part Frequency (Hz) Amplitude (a.u.)
Filter transmission - imag part Frequency (Hz) Amplitude (a.u.)
1554
OPTIGRATING
The input file is formatted containing three items per line — the wavelength in
microns, a complex value transmission, and a complex value for the reflection.
1.5465000-0.95054476 0.31058130 0.0019538914 0.00030748692
1.5465047-0.83933357 -0.54361247 -0.00053900650 0.0020880603
1.5465093-0.10532500 -0.99443599 -0.0017730023 -0.00074527952
1.5465140 0.70683493- 0.70737604 0.0012775158 -0.0013700226
1.5465187 0.99451620 0.10456029 0.0012534218 0.0017631583
1.5465233 0.54426584 0.83891013 -0.0018252456 0.0010779574
1.5465280-0.30982698 0.95079110 -0.00049861026- 0.0018114039
frequency. This means that the filter data is shifted from the grating center frequency
to the user center frequency that you define in the parameter Frequency.
This file can be generated by OptiGrating using the Export Complex Spectrum tool
(see Figure 1).
1555
OPTIGRATING
Figure 1 Exporting results from OptiGrating to OptiSystem
1556
WDM_PHASAR DEMUX 1XN
WDM_Phasar Demux 1xN
Loads Optiwave’s WDM_Phasar PIW files. WDM_Phasar is Phased Array WDM Device Design Software
which can export the results to OptiSystem. This components can also be used to load measured data
from files.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Filename WDM_Phasar.piw — —
Filename with the .piw data
Simulation

Noise

Noise threshold -100 dB ]-INF,+INF[
1557
WDM_PHASAR DEMUX 1XN

Graphs

Filter transmission Frequency (Hz) Amplitude (a.u.)
The PIW file contains the file header, number of wavelength points, and number of
wavelength channels.
BCF2DMC
121 6
[wl ][ -4.564250E+001] [ -3.258100E+001] [ -1.954000E+001] [ -6.511500E+000] [ 6.510500E+000] [

1.953900E+001] [ 3.258000E+001] [ 4.564150E+001]
1.546000E+000 9.689700E-005 8.340647E-005 7.325889E-006 5.303238E-005 3.161631E-005 7.236055E-005
1.546075E+000 1.293506E-004 8.015659E-005 2.596500E-005 1.780735E-005 4.972572E-005 2.968608E-005
1.546150E+000 1.690047E-004 7.332815E-005 3.134233E-005 1.449511E-005 4.502246E-005 3.533981E-006
1.546225E+000 1.238766E-004 7.758708E-005 9.527608E-006 2.024385E-005 1.532031E-005 3.790632E-006
1.546300E+000 6.985230E-005 7.710248E-005 1.613273E-006 1.720816E-005 4.933527E-007 1.170849E-005
OptiSystem skips the first four lines of the file. The resulting file is:
1.546000E+000 9.689700E-005 8.340647E-005 7.325889E-006 5.303238E-005 3.161631E-005 7.236055E-005
1.546075E+000 1.293506E-004 8.015659E-005 2.596500E-005 1.780735E-005 4.972572E-005 2.968608E-005
1.546150E+000 1.690047E-004 7.332815E-005 3.134233E-005 1.449511E-005 4.502246E-005 3.533981E-006
1.546225E+000 1.238766E-004 7.758708E-005 9.527608E-006 2.024385E-005 1.532031E-005 3.790632E-006
1.546300E+000 6.985230E-005 7.710248E-005 1.613273E-006 1.720816E-005 4.933527E-007 1.170849E-005
The first column is the transmission wavelength in microns. The other columns are
the transmission power for each channel. OptiSystem recognizes the number of
columns and associates each one to an internal filter and an output port.
1558
WDM_PHASAR MUX NX1
WDM_Phasar Mux Nx1
Loads Optiwave’s WDM_Phasar PIW files. WDM_Phasar is Phased Array WDM Device Design Software
which can export the results to OptiSystem. This component can also be used to load measured data
from files.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Filename WDM_Phasar.piw — —
Filename with the .piw data
Simulation

1559
WDM_PHASAR MUX NX1
Noise


Graphs

Filter transmission Frequency (Hz) Amplitude (a.u.)
1560
WDM_PHASAR MUX NX1
The PIW file contains the file header, number of wavelength points, and number of
wavelength channels.
BCF2DMC
121 6
[wl ][ -4.564250E+001] [ -3.258100E+001] [ -1.954000E+001] [ -6.511500E+000] [ 6.510500E+000] [

1.953900E+001] [ 3.258000E+001] [ 4.564150E+001]
1.546000E+000 9.689700E-005 8.340647E-005 7.325889E-006 5.303238E-005 3.161631E-005 7.236055E-005
1.546075E+000 1.293506E-004 8.015659E-005 2.596500E-005 1.780735E-005 4.972572E-005 2.968608E-005
1.546150E+000 1.690047E-004 7.332815E-005 3.134233E-005 1.449511E-005 4.502246E-005 3.533981E-006
1.546225E+000 1.238766E-004 7.758708E-005 9.527608E-006 2.024385E-005 1.532031E-005 3.790632E-006
1.546300E+000 6.985230E-005 7.710248E-005 1.613273E-006 1.720816E-005 4.933527E-007 1.170849E-005
OptiSystem skips the first four lines of the file. The resulting file is:
1.546000E+000 9.689700E-005 8.340647E-005 7.325889E-006 5.303238E-005 3.161631E-005 7.236055E-005
1.546075E+000 1.293506E-004 8.015659E-005 2.596500E-005 1.780735E-005 4.972572E-005 2.968608E-005
1.546150E+000 1.690047E-004 7.332815E-005 3.134233E-005 1.449511E-005 4.502246E-005 3.533981E-006
1.546225E+000 1.238766E-004 7.758708E-005 9.527608E-006 2.024385E-005 1.532031E-005 3.790632E-006
1.546300E+000 6.985230E-005 7.710248E-005 1.613273E-006 1.720816E-005 4.933527E-007 1.170849E-005
The first column is the transmission wavelength in microns. The other columns are
the transmission power for each channel. OptiSystem recognizes the number of
columns and associates each one to an internal filter and an output port.
1561
WDM_PHASAR MUX NX1
Notes:
1562
OPTIBPM COMPONENT NXM
OptiBPM Component NxM
This component loads Optiwave's OptiBPM 's' files. OptiBPM is a software suite for
the design of a variety of integrated and fiber optic guided problems, which can export
the results to OptiSystem. This component can also be used to load measured data
from files.
Ports

1563
Parameters
Main

File format Real Imag — Real Imag,
Amplitude Phase
Defines the format of the file with the ‘s’ data.
Filename(s) OptiBPM.s — —
Filename with the ‘s’ data
Vertical flip False — True, False

Defines whether or not the vertical flip is enabled.
Enhanced

Central wavelength approximation False — True, False
Defines whether or not the central wavelength approximation

is enabled.
Length 100 μm ]0,+INF[
Waveguide length
Reference index (real) 1 — ]0,+INF[
Real part of the complex reference index.
Reference index (imag) 0 — ]-INF,+INF[
Imaginary part of the complex reference index.
Simulation

Noise

Minimum value for adaptation of noise bins.
Threshold ratio for adaptation of noise bins.
1564
The first line of the 's' file contains the number of inputs and outputs, the consecutive
lines have the wavelength in microns and the complex values of the amplitude
transmission between each input x output port. The parameter File format defines
whether the complex values are defined by the real and imaginary parts, or amplitude
and phase.
Ninputs Noutputs
λ l(1) S11(1) S12(1) … S1M(1) S21(1) S22(1) S2M(1) … SN1(1) SN2(1) … SNM(1)
λ (2) S11(2) S12(2) … S1M(2) S21(2) S22(2) S2M(2) … SN1(2) SN2(2) … SNM(2)
.
λ (L) S11(L) S12(L) … S1M(L) S21(L) S22(L) S2M(L) … SN1(L) SN2(L) … SNM(L)
Where Sij(k) is a complex number, i is the input port index, j is the output port index
and k is the row index. The complex number is represented by two real numbers: real
and imaginary.
The total number of elements in each row is the number of inputs times the number
of outputs times 2 (real/amplitude and imaginary/phase parts) plus one (wavelength).
Example with 2 inputs and 2 outputs:
Example with 1 input and 2 outputs:
1565
Example with 3 inputs and 1 output:
Central wavelength approximation

The approximation uses the following expression:
1 1
S' 11 ( λ ) = S 11 ( λ 0 ) ⋅ exp j2πn 0 L ⎛⎝ ----- – --- ⎞⎠
λ0 λ
where λ 0 is the central wavelength, n 0 is the reference index and L is the length.
The simulation was done with only one wavelength, which is considered to be the
central one.
1566
SAVE TRANSVERSE MODE
Save Transverse Mode
This component saves to a file each transverse mode profile attached to the input
signal. The measured profiles are saved to a file using the BCF3DCX format.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main

Filename begin “Mode” — —
Filenames beginning with this string will be generated by the

component.
Path “c:\” — —
Files will be saved into the folder defined by the path
File list ““ — —
The list of files generated by the component after the

calculation
Simulation

The save transverse mode component exports mode profiles from the input signal
into a user defined folder. The filenames will begin with the string defined by the
parameter Filename begin followed by the mode polarization, number and signal
1567
index. Using parameter sweep with Filename begin allows for exporting modes with
different names for each sweep iteration.
The parameter Path defines the destination folder for the files. Parameter File list is
generated after the calculation and is a list with the filename and correspondent mode
properties.
The files will have the complex data file format BCF3DCX. Files that follow this format
can be loaded from the Measured Transverse Mode Generator component from
OptiSystem and other Optiwave software tools such as Opti3DViewer
. Complex Data 3D File Format: BCF3DCX

This format applies to input and output files that contain complex data as text. The file
contains the file header, number of x and y data points, mesh widths in x and y, and
the complex z (x,y) data points. The data points are presented in one column with the
order determined by scanning the x and y coordinates.
BCF3DCX - file header
NX NY - number of x and y data points
WX WY - mesh widths in x and y
Z1 - complex number z data point with coordinates (xmin, ymin)
Z2 - complex number z data point with coordinates (xmin+dx,

ymin)
Z3 - complex number z data point with coordinates (xmin+2dx,

ymin)
. . .
ZNX - complex number z data point with coordinates (xmax, ymin)
ZNX+1 - complex number z data point with coordinates (xmin,

ymin+dy)
. . .
ZN - last complex number z data point with coordinates (xmax,

ymax), N=NXxNY
where dx = (xmax-xmin)/(nx-1) and dy = (ymax-ymin)/(ny-1).
Example: Complex field (end of propagation) in BPM 3D [*.f3d]

In this example, the number of data points is 100 and equals to the number of mesh
points. The transverse mesh extends from -5.000000E+000 to 5.000000E+000
microns giving the mesh width 1.000000E+001 microns.
BCF3DCX
100 100
1568
1.000000E+001 1.100000E+001
-4.582487025358980E-004, -2.411965546811583E-002
1.813879122411751E-004, -2.322439514101689E-002
8.864140535377826E-004, -2.245463661588051E-002
. . .
-1.004141897700716E-002, 7.709994296904761E-003
-9.736326254112302E-003, 8.732395427319460E-003
-9.270032367315658E-003, 9.686774052240091E-003
1569
Notes:
1570
OPTISPICE OUTPUT
OptiSPICE Output
This component loads transient time domain signals from OptiSPICE. OptiSPICE is
the first circuit design software for analysis of integrated circuits including interactions
of optical and electronic components. It allows for the design and simulation of opto-
electronic circuits at the transistor level, from laser drivers to transimpedance
amplifiers, optical interconnects and electronic equalizers.
Parameters
Main

Filename “OptiSPICE.orx.g — —
z”
Filename pointing to OptiSPICE transient time domain data
Simulation

Sweep iteration 1 — [1,+INF[
Transient time domain data sweep iteration number
Iterations Iterations — [1,+INF[
Sample rate Sample rate Hz, GHz, THz [1, 1e+100]

Output signal sample rate
Output horizontal spatial simulation window
Space width y Space width Y um [1e-100, 1e+100]
Output vertical spatial simulation window
1571
OPTISPICE OUTPUT
This component loads OptiSPICE transient time domain signals. OptiSPICE
generates electrical and optical signals. For each OptiSPICE monitor probe a port is
created. When loading the file for the first time, the component will create the output
ports. The transient data is loaded when the component is calculated. Optical signals
can have transverse mode profiles. Parameter Sample rate defines the sample rate
of the signal output. Space window defines the output spatial simulation window for
the mode profiles. Since OptiSPICE can create signals from multiple parameter
sweeps, parameter Sweep iteration defines the iteration that should be loaded by the
component.
1572
OPTISPICE NETLIST
OptiSPICE NetList
This component calls the OptiSPICE simulator executable directly from OptiSystem.
It allows the cosimulation of OptiSystem software and OptiSPICE software.
Parameters
Main

Filename “OptiSPICE.sp” — —
Filename pointing to the OptiSPICE netlist file
Dealy 0 s, ms, ns [0, 1e+100]
Delay to be applied to the signal coming from OptiSPICE
Simulation

Iterations Iterations — [1,+INF[
Sample rate Sample rate Hz, GHz, THz [1, 1e+100]
Output horizontal spatial simulation window
Output vertical spatial simulation window
OptiSPICE netlist component connects OptiSystem projects to optoelectronic circuits
designed with OptiSPICE (by using netlist files).
1573
OPTISPICE NETLIST
Time domain signals, defined as sampled signals in OptiSystem, are transferred

between OptiSystem and OptiSPICE as electrical or optical signals. OptiSpice will
receive the electrical signals as current or voltage depending on the input port defined
at OptiSPICE ("Electrical Input - Isource" or "Electrical Input - Vsource" components),
while optical sampled signals will be received in OptiSPICE by using the "Optical
Input" component.
To run the cosimulation, the circuit to be cosimulated is uploaded into the OptiSPICE
netlist component, then the number of input and output ports in this component is
defined. Once the component ports are connected, the system can be calculated. The
user in this case has to verify if the time window defined in OptiSystem and OptiSPICE
are matched. When the project calculation starts, OptiSystem runs the simulation and
transfer signals to OptiSPICE, then the netlist circuit is simulated using OptiSPICE
simulator. After OptiSPICE finishes the calculation, the signals are transfered back to
OptiSystem and OptiSystem simulations continues.
Please check the tutorial lessons for more information about OptiSystem/OptiSPICE
cosimulation.
1574
MATLAB Library
• MATLAB Filter Component
• MATLAB Optical Filter Component
• MATLAB Component
1575
Notes:
1576
MATLAB FILTER COMPONENT
MATLAB Filter Component
Simulates an electrical filter using MATLAB.
Ports

Parameters
Main
Name and Default value Defaul Unit Value

description t unit s range
Convert units True — — True,
False
Frequency 0 GHz Hz, [30,+INF[

MHz,
Filter center
GHz
frequency
Bandwidth 3.5 GHz Hz, [0,+INF[

MHz,
Filter bandwidth GHz
Run command Order = 1 — — —
MATLAB
Factor =
command to
execute during the (( Frequency - CenterFrequency )/( Bandwidth / 2.0 ) ).^(2.0 * Order)
calculation
TransferFunction =
exp( -0.5 * 0.693147180559945309417 * Factor )
1577
MATLAB

MATLAB search path — — —
Path to add to the MATLAB search path
Run MATLAB as shared True — True or False

Defines whether start a MATLAB server to run in a shared or
dedicated mode
Simulation

1578
When the MATLAB filter component is active, it opens the MATLAB program. The
MATLAB filter component performs a co-simulation with the MATLAB.
At the beginning of the simulation, the MATLAB adds the path (defined by the matlab
search path parameter) to the MATLAB search path. This is where you put the
created MATLAB files that will be used in the simulation.
Next, OptiSystem puts the following frequencies into the MATLAB workspace:
• Vector Frequency with whole frequencies of the electrical signal spectrum
• Variable CenterFrequency with center frequency of the MATLAB filter defined
by the Frequency parameter
• Variable Bandwidth with the 3 dB bandwidth of filter defined by Bandwidth
parameter (see Figure 1).
Figure 1 MATLAB workspace in OptiSystem
OptiSystem executes the command defined by the Run command in MATLAB. This
parameter can contain a command, a file name, or a sequence of commands, such
as the default run command.
1579
Note: Your program must be able to handle the frequency vector, center
frequency, and 3 dB frequency bandwidth to successfully perform the transfer
function of the electrical filter (see Figure 2).
Figure 2 MATLAB workspace after generation of the transfer function for OptiSystem
1580
MATLAB OPTICAL FILTER COMPONENT
MATLAB Optical Filter Component
Simulates an optical filter using MATLAB.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Parameters
Main
Name and Default value Defaul Unit Value

description t unit s range
Frequency 193.1 THz Hz [30,+INF[
THz
Filter center nm
frequency
Bandwidth 10 GHz Hz [0,+INF[

GHz
Filter bandwidth
THz
nm
Run command Order = 1 — — —
MATLAB
Factor =
command to
execute during the (( Frequency - CenterFrequency )/( Bandwidth / 2.0 ) ).^(2.0 * Order)
calculation
TransferFunction =
exp( -0.5 * 0.693147180559945309417 * Factor )
1581
MATLAB

value range

dedicated mode
Simulation

value range

enabled

Noise

value range
Noise calculation bandwidth 0.5 THz Hz, GHz, THz, ]0,+INF[

nm
Calculation bandwidth, outside of this range
1582
When the MATLAB optical filter component is active, it opens the MATLAB program.
The MATLAB optical filter component performs a co-simulation with the MATLAB.
At the beginning of the simulation, the MATLAB adds the path (defined by the matlab
search path parameter) to the MATLAB search path. This is where you put the
created MATLAB files that will be used in the simulation.
Next, OptiSystem puts the following frequencies into the MATLAB workspace:
• Vector Frequency with whole frequencies of the optical signal spectrum
• Variable CenterFrequency with center frequency of the filter defined by the
Frequency parameter
• Variable Bandwidth with the 3 dB bandwidth of filter defined by Bandwidth
parameter (see Figure 1).
Figure 1 MATLAB workspace in OptiSystem
OptiSystem executes the command defined by the Run command in MATLAB. This
parameter can contain a command, a file name, or a sequence of commands, such
as the default run command.
1583
Note: Your program must be able to handle the frequency vector, center
frequency, and 3 dB frequency bandwidth to successfully perform the transfer
function of the optical filter (see Figure 2).
Figure 2 MATLAB workspace after generation of the transfer function for OptiSystem
1584
MATLAB COMPONENT
MATLAB Component
Enables the utilization of components created in MATLAB.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Load MATLAB False — True or False
Defines whether MATLAB should be loaded before the

calculation starts and kept open after the simulation is
completed.

dedicated mode
Run command OutputPort1 = — —

InputPort1
MATLAB command to execute during calculation
Sampled signal domain Frequency — Frequency, Time

Signal domain when transferring signal to MATLAB
Spatial mode domain Space — Frequency, Space
Spatial domain when transferring spatial modes to MATLAB
Resize True — True, False
Determines whether or not to allow component resizing
1585
MATLAB COMPONENT

User defined image False — True, False
Determines whether or not to load a user defined icon from a

file
Image Filename Icon.bmp — —
The filename containing a user defined 32x32 pixels image
Inputs

Specify the number of input ports
Signal type (Input 1) Optical — Optical, Electrical,

Binary, M-ary
Specify signal type for Input Port 1
Outputs

Specify the number of output ports
Signal type (Output 1) Optical — Optical, Electrical,

Binary, M-ary
Specify signal type for Output Port 1
Simulation

Random numbers


1586
MATLAB COMPONENT
By selecting Load MATLAB, the MATLAB software is loaded before the calculation
starts. It will stay open after the calculation is completed. Use this option when you
want to display graphs and calculated results from MATLAB. By default, MATLAB is
loaded and closed during the calculations.
In this model, you define the number of input ports and output ports and the signal
type (optical, electrical, binary or M-ary) of each port. For each input port, OptiSystem
assembles a structure with the signal and puts this structure into the MATLAB
workspace.
Optical signal
For an optical signal at InputPort1, the following structure is launched in the
workspace:
InputPort1
TypeSignal Optical
Sampled [ struct ]
Parameterized [ struct ]
Noise [ struct ]
IndividualSample [ struct ]
Channels [ channels array ]
The field Channel is a double array containing the wavelengths of each channel at
InputPort1. As the optical signal can be presented in four formats (sampled,
individual sample, parameterized, and noise bins), the structure for the optical signal
contains fields for each format. Figure 1 shows examples of optical signals launched
in the workspace.
1587
MATLAB COMPONENT
Figure 1 Examples of optical signals launched in the MATLAB workspace
The field Sampled indicates if the input signal at InputPort1 has optical sampled
signals. The structure is defined by:
InputPort1.Sampled
Signal [ Ex; Ey ]
CentralFrequency Central frequency
Frequency | Time [ frequency array ] | [ time array ]
Spatial [ struct ]
If Signal contains an electrical field, it can be a vector 1xN (one polarization

component) or a matrix 2xN (two polarization components) of complex numbers. N is
the number of samples in the signal. Figure 2 shows examples of structures for the
sampled signal. If the signal has spatial properties (multimode signal), the struct
Spatial will have the properties of the signal mode attached to the signal.
1588
MATLAB COMPONENT
Figure 2 Structures of optical sampled signals in the MATLAB workspace
The field CentralFrequency indicates the central frequency of the frequency window
for the signal. Depending on the parameter Sampled domain, the sampled signal will
be in the time or frequency domain. The default value of the Sampled domain
parameter is frequency domain. Figure 3 shows an example of a signal in time
domain.
For spatial signals, the field Spatial indicates whether the input signal has spatial
modes. The structure is defined by:
InputPort1.Sampled.Spatial
ModeX [ struct ]
ModeY [ struct ]
The structure Mode is defined by:
InputPort1.Sampled.Spatial.ModeX
Amplitude Ex(x,y)
Properties String
DeltaSpaceX | DeltaFrequencyX Discretization in space (m) | Discretization in frequency (1/m)
DeltaSpaceY | DeltaFrequencyY Discretization in space (m) | Discretization in frequency (1/m)
Amplitude contains an electrical field of the spatial mode, it is a NxM matrix of

complex numbers. N and M are the dimensions of the mesh. DeltaSpace is the
discretization in space in meters. DeltaFrequency is the discretization in frequency.
Properties is a string that describes the mode.
Figure 3 Structure of optical sampled signal (time domain) in the MATLAB workspace
If the signal is IndividualSample, the signal will be in time domain and the structure
is the same as the structure for sampled signals. The signal will contain an electrical
field, it can be a value 1x1 (one polarization component) or a vector 2x1 (two
polarization components) of complex numbers.
1589
MATLAB COMPONENT
The field Parameterized indicates if the InputPort1 signal has optical parameterized
signals. The structure is defined by:
InputPort1.Parameterized
Power [ power ]
Frequency [ frequency ]
SplittingRatio [ sr ]
Phase [ phase ]
The field Power indicates the total power of each parameterized signal in the input
port. SplittingRatio gives the ratio between the power of the polarization components
and the total power. Phase shows the phase difference between the x and y
components. The Frequency field indicates the frequency of each parameterized
channel. Figure 4 shows two examples of a parameterized signal structure.
Figure 4 Structure of optical parameterized signals in the MATLAB workspace
The field Noise indicates if the InputPort1 signal has optical noise bins. The structure
is defined by:
InputPort1.Noise
Power [ powerX, powerY ]
LowerFrequency [ lowfrequency ]
UpperFrequency [ upfrequency ]
Phase [ phase ]
The optical noise structure represents a set of noise bins. The field Power contains a
vector or matrix with the power of each noise bin for each polarization state. The
LowerFrequency and UpperFrequency fields define the range of each noise bin.
The central frequency of each noise bin can be defined as:
CentralFrequency = (InputPort1.Noise.UpperFrequency +
InputPort1.Noise.LowerFrequency)/2
The frequency slot of each noise bin can be defined as:
FrequencySlot = InputPort1.Noise.UpperFrequency - InputPort1.Noise.LowerFrequency
Figure 5 shows an example of optical noise structure.
1590
MATLAB COMPONENT
Figure 5 Structure of an optical noise signal in the MATLAB workspace
Electrical signal
The structure for electrical signals is simpler than for optical signals. For an electrical
signal at InputPort1, the following structure is launched in the workspace:
InputPort1
TypeSignal Electrical
Sampled [ struct ]
Noise [ struct ]
IndividualSample [ struct ]
The electrical signal has three structures inside, one for the signal (Sampled) , one
for individual samples (IndividualSample) and the other for noise (Noise). Figure 6
shows an example of an electrical signal launched in the workspace.
Figure 6 Structure of an electrical sampled signal in the MATLAB workspace
The field Sampled indicates if the InputPort1 signal has electrical sampled signals.
It is defined by:
InputPort1.Sampled
Signal [E]
Frequency | Time Frequency | time
As with the optical sampled signal, the user can select the domain (time domain or
frequency domain) of the electrical sampled signal through the parameter Sampled
domain. Figure 7 shows two examples of electrical signals. If the signal is
IndividualSample, the signal will be in time domain and the structure is the same as
the structure for the sampled signal.
1591
MATLAB COMPONENT
Figure 7 Structures of an electrical sampled signal in the MATLAB workspace
The field Noise indicates if the InputPort1 signal has electrical noise. The structure
is defined by:
InputPort1.Noise
Signal [E]
Frequency | Time Frequency | time
The structure found is equal to the sampled signal and has the same time domain
options. Figure 8 shows two examples of noise signals in different signal domains.
Figure 8 Structures of an electrical noise signal in the MATLAB workspace
Binary signals
The structure for a Binary signal is characterized by the bit sequence and the bit rate.
For a binary signal at InputPort1, the following structure is launched in the
workspace:
InputPort1
TypeSignal Binary
Sequence [ Sequence of bits ]
BitRate bitrate
Figure 9 is an example of a binary structure.
1592
MATLAB COMPONENT
Figure 9 Structure of a binary signal in the MATLAB workspace
Output Ports
After OptiSystem puts the input signals in the MATLAB workspace, OptiSystem
executes the command defined by the Run command parameter in MATLAB. This
parameter can contain a command, a file name, or a sequence of commands.
Note: Your program must be able to handle the structures for each input port to
successfully obtain the output signals. For each output port, you must create a
structure according to the signal type.
OptiSystem loads the output signal for the appropriate output port and continues the
simulation.
Example: Designing an optical amplitude modulator

To design an optical amplitude modulator using a MATLAB component, the
component has to be able to handle an optical and electrical signal input to generate
an optical signal output. The input and output tab parameters are shown in Figure 10.
Figure 10 Input and Output parameters
As we use some MATLAB files to model the amplitude modulator, all files are located
in the ‘c:\temp’ folder, and the parameter Matlab search path has to point to it (see
Figure 11).
1593
MATLAB COMPONENT
The file that contains the program utilized by OptiSystem is

AmplitudeModulatorComponent, and is specified by the parameter Run
command. Because this example modulates an optical signal in time, the parameter
Sampled domain is set to Time (see Figure 11).
Figure 11 MATLAB component Main tab for amplitude modulator model
The equation describing the behaviour of this model is similar to that found in the
Amplitude modulator - Transmitters library. An amplitude modulator parameter
Modulation index is necessary to make the MATLAB model work in a manner similar
to the original amplitude modulator. Parameter0 on the User Parameters tab is
defined as our Modulation index (see Figure 12).
Note: Refer to Adding new parameters to the layout or Adding new parameters
to a subsystem in the User Reference manual for the steps to add a parameter to
the MATLAB component.
Figure 12 MATLAB component User Parameters tab for amplitude modulator model
With the parameters of the MATLAB components already defined, the MATLAB code
that handles the OptiSystem signals must be generated. In accordance with the Run
command parameter, the file AmplitudeModulatorComponent is executed (the
code can be seen in Figure 13).
The functions of this file are to:

• count the number of sampled signals
• count the number of parameterized signals
• count the number of noise signals
• call the corresponding routine to calculate the output signals for each existing
signal (sample, parameterized, and noise)
• verify the other polarization component, in the case of sampled signals
1594
MATLAB COMPONENT
This example shows how generic code can be made to handle all the possibilities of
the OptiSystem signals. Users have to be aware of all these possibilities.
Figure 13 Code of the AmplitudeModulatorComponent file
The following MATLAB files are used to handle different kinds of signals:
• Figure 14 is for optical sampled signals
• Figure 15 is for parameterized signals
• Figure 16 is for noise bin signals
1595
MATLAB COMPONENT
Figure 14 Optical sampled signals
Figure 15 Parameterized signals
Figure 16 Noise bin signals
1596
MATLAB COMPONENT
The system shown in Figure 17 demonstrates how this component works. The
MATLAB component modulates the two optical signals in accordance with the
electrical modulation signal. One of the optical signals is parameterized, and the other
is sampled. Both have noise bins. The modulation index (Parameter0) is defined as
1.
Figure 17 Amplitude modulator system
1597
MATLAB COMPONENT
Notes:
1598
MATLAB COMPONENT
Scilab Library
• Scilab Component
1599
MATLAB COMPONENT
Notes:
1600
SCILAB COMPONENT
Scilab Component
Enables the utilization of components created in Scilab.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Run command OutputPort1 = — —
InputPort1
Scilab command to execute during calculation
Scilab search path — — —
Path to add to the Scilab search path
Sampled signal domain Frequency — Frequency, Time
Signal domain when transferring signal to Scilab
Spatial mode domain Space — Frequency, Space
Spatial domain when transferring spatial modes to Scilab
Resize True — True, False

Determines whether or not to allow component resizing
User defined image False — True, False
Determines whether or not to load a user defined icon from a

file
Image Filename Icon.bmp — —

The filename containing a user defined 32x32 pixels image
1601
SCILAB COMPONENT
Inputs

Specify the number of input ports
Signal type (Input 1) Optical — Optical, Electrical,

Binary, M-ary
Specify signal type for Input Port 1
Outputs

Specify the number of output ports
Signal type (Output 1) Optical — Optical, Electrical,

Binary, M-ary
Specify signal type for Output Port 1
Simulation

Random numbers

1602
SCILAB COMPONENT
This component allows co-simulation in time, frequency and spatial domain with
Scilab. Since both Scilab and MATLAB components use the same data structures and
parameters, please refer to the MATLAB component technical background.
1603
SCILAB COMPONENT
Notes:
1604
EDA Cosimulation Library
• Save ADS File
• Load ADS File
• Save Spice Stimulus File
• Load Spice CSDF File
• Triggered Save Spice Stimulus File
• Triggered Load Spice CSDF File
1605
Notes:
1606
SAVE ADS FILE
Save ADS File
This component can save files in the 'TIM' format. The .tim and files are signal data
files in Agilent EEsoft ADS, MDIF format. They contain time-domain waveform data
for defining the signals associated with certain sources.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Output data Signal and noise Signal
The signal type to save to the file Signal and Noise
Noise
File type TIM MDIF
Type of file to be saved
Filename (.tim) Signal_2.tim

File name with the electrical signal in time domain with
TIM format
Reference resistance 50 Ohm [0,+INF[
The resistance to be added to the output file
1607
SAVE ADS FILE
Random numbers

Generate random seed YES Yes, No

User-defined seed index for signal generation
The .tim files are signal data files in Agilent EEsoft ADS, MDIF format. They contain
time-domain waveform data for defining the signals associated with certain sources.
The general .tim file format is:
An exclamation point (!) at the beginning of a line makes it a comment line. Characters
following the ! are ignored by the program. The TIMEDATA data block is required. The
option line format is the following:
# T ( [ SEC / MSEC / USEC / NSEC / PSEC ] V/MV R xx ) where
# = Delimiter that tells the program you are specifying these

parameters
T = Time
SEC / MSEC / USEC / NSEC = Your choice of Seconds, Milliseconds, Microseconds,

/ PSEC Nanoseconds, or Picoseconds
V/MV = Your choice of Volts or Millivolts
R = Reference resistance, default is 50.0
xx = User-specified value for reference resistance
1608
SAVE ADS FILE
The Format line is: % t v
where
% = Delimiter that tells the program you are specifying
t = time
v = voltage
By design of the program, the syntax t and v in the Format line are completely
arbitrary. These values can be whatever you prefer. For example, an option line such
as: % time voltage.
1609
SAVE ADS FILE
Notes:
1610
LOAD ADS FILE
Load ADS File
This component can load files in the 'TIM' format. The .tim and files are signal data
files in Agilent EEsoft ADS, MDIF format. They contain time-domain waveform data
for defining the signals associated with certain sources.
Ports

Parameters
Main

File type TIM MDIF
Type of file to be loaded
Filename (.tim) Signal.tim
File name with the electrical signal in time domain with

TIM format
Reload file no — True, false
Defines whether the component should reload the signal

for each run.
Numerical

1611
LOAD ADS FILE
Simulation

Iterations Iterations — —
Sample rate Hz Hz, GHz, THz
The .tim and files are signal data files in Agilent EEsoft ADS, MDIF format. They
contain time-domain waveform data for defining the signals associated with certain
sources.
The general .tim file format is:
he ! are ignored by the program. The TIMEDATA data block is required. The option
line format is the following:
# T ( [ SEC / MSEC / USEC / NSEC / PSEC ] V/MV R xx )
where
# = Delimiter that tells the program you are specifying these

parameters
T = Time
SEC / MSEC / USEC / NSEC = Your choice of Seconds, Milliseconds, Microseconds,

/ PSEC Nanoseconds, or Picoseconds
V/MV = Your choice of Volts or Millivolts
R = Reference resistance, default is 50.0
1612
LOAD ADS FILE
xx = User-specified value for reference resistance
The Format line is the following: % t v
where
% = Delimiter that tells the program you are specifying
t = time
v = voltage
By design of the program, the syntax t and v in the Format line are completely
arbitrary. These values can be whatever you prefer. For example, an option line such
as:
% time voltage
1613
LOAD ADS FILE
Notes:
1614
SAVE SPICE STIMULUS FILE
Save Spice Stimulus File
This component can save ASCII files in a user define format. By default the file has
the PSpice Stimulus data format .stl. The .stl files are signal data files used in
PSpice. They contain time-domain waveform data, based on a piece-wise linear
algorithm, for defining the signals associated with certain sources and nodes.
Ports

Parameters
Main

The signal type to save to the file Signal and noise
Noise
Filename (.stl) Signal.stl
File name with the electrical signal in time domain
File format

File comment *
Character string for comments in the file
File begin .STIMULUS

SIGNAL PWL
Character string to be added to the first line of the file
File end
Character string to be added to the last line of the file
1615

File line begin +(
Character string to be added to the beginning of each line of

data
File line end )
Character string to be added to the end of each line
File delimiter ,
Character string to be used in each line of data, to separate

multiple values
Random numbers

User-defined seed index for signal generation
This component can save the data in a user defined file format. The parameters in the
File format tab define the additional format information to be added to the signal data.
The general file format is:
COMMENT Written by OptiSystem 3.0
COMMENT EDA Cosimulation Library
COMMENT Save Spice Stimulus File Component
BEGIN
LINE BEGIN time1 DELIMITER amplitude1 LINE END
LINE BEGIN time2 DELIMITER amplitude2 LINE END
LINE BEGIN time… DELIMITER amplitude… LINE END
END
By default, the signal will be saved using the .stl format, e.g. after a source:
* Written by OptiSystem 3.0
* EDA Cosimulation Library
1616
* Save Spice Stimulus File Component
.STIMULUS SIGNAL PWL
+ (0,1)
+ (6.25e-012, 1)
+ (1.25e-011, 1)
+ (1.875e-011, 1)
+ (2.5e-011, 1)
+ (3.125e-011, 1)
+ (5.119375e-008, 1)
In this case, the parameter Comment is "*", the Begin is ".STIMULUS SIGNAL
PWL", the Line Begin is "+(", the Delimiter is ",", the Line End is ")", there is
no format for the End, and the value is "".
Typically this component is used after an electrical pulse generator in the transmitter
stage, or after the photodetectors, in the receiver stage. The electrical signals are
exported to a file and processed by a circuit simulator such as PSpice.
1617
Figure 1 Exporting data using Save Spice Stimulus File
Figure 2 Formatting the file using Stimulus format
After the simulation, a text file ‘NRZ.stl’ is generated by OptiSystem. Figure 3 shows
the file data using the Stimulus format.
1618
Figure 3 NRZ.stl STIMULUS file
The signal can be loaded into a Stimulus editor, and then compared with the original
signal from OptiSystem. Figure 4 shows the same signals in OptiSystem and in the
Stimulus editor:
Figure 4 OptiSystem and Stimulus editor signals
1619
Notes:
1620
LOAD SPICE CSDF FILE
Load Spice CSDF File
This component can load Common Simulation Data Format (CSDF) files from EDA
tools that can export PROBE results into CSDF file format. The .csd files are signal
data files exported from circuit simulators such as PSpice.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Node name V (0)
Name of the circuit node. The signal at this node will be

extracted from the file.
Filename (.stl) Signal.csd
File name with the data signal in time domain with CDSF
format
Reload file no — True, false
Defines whether the component should reload the signal

for each run
Simulation

Iterations Iterations — —

1621
The .csd files are signal data files exported from circuit simulators such as PSpice.
They are used for post-processing and waveform analysis. They contain time-domain
waveform data for defining the signals associated with certain nodes in the circuit.
Usually the data is voltage, current, or digital levels (1 or 0).
Circuit simulators can export PROBE data using CSDF option. In the following
example, a RLC filter is used to filter a 2.5 GB/s signal. The simulation circuit file and
the result is displayed in Figure 1 and Figure 2.
Figure 1 Spice circuit file will generate the PROBE data using CSDF option
1622
Figure 2 Simulation results after filtering a NRZ signal using a RLC filter
The following figure (Figure 3) shows OptiSystem loading the file using Load Spice
CSDF File component, after the simulation the results will be displayed in the
Oscilloscope Visualizer (Figure 4).
1623
Figure 3 OptiSystem project that loads a .csd file
Figure 4 Signal from circuit simulator in OptiSystem visualizer
1624
TRIGGERED SAVE SPICE STIMULUS FILE
Triggered Save Spice Stimulus File
This component has the same engine as the Save Spice Stimulus File component. It
will copy the input signal to the output signal. The output port can be connected to
other component to be used as a signal trigger.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Noise

File format

File comment *

SIGNAL PWL
File end
1625

File line begin +(

data
File line end )
File delimiter ,

multiple values
Random numbers

Refer to the Technical background of the Save Spice Stimulus File component for
additional information. Additionally this component can generate a signal trigger after
saving the signal. It can be used together with the Command Line Application
component, from the Tools component library. This module can save the signal into a
file, then triggers the command line component to open another application that can
load the saved file.
triggered load component from the EDA cosimulation library. Figure 1 shows one
example of application, the file will be saved with a 2.5 GB/s signal, the file format is
Spice PWL, with a source named Vsupply. The file name will be NRZ25.stl, and it will
be loaded as a voltage source into the circuit simulation (Figure 2).
The file data after the simulation is presented in Figure 3. After saving the file a signal
trigger will be send to the Command Line Application component, that will perform its
own calculation.
1626
Figure 1 Cosimulation using Triggered Save Spice Stimulus File component
1627
Figure 2 Triggered Save Spice Stimulus file parameter for the file header
1628
Figure 3 NRZ25.stl file generated from OptiSystem
1629
1630
TRIGGERED LOAD SPICE CSDF FILE
Triggered Load Spice CSDF File
This component has the same engine as the Load Spice CSDF File component. It will
run only if there is a signal at the input port. The signal can be off any type and it will
work as a trigger.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Noise
File format

File comment *

SIGNAL PWL
File end
1631

File line begin +(

data
File line end )
File delimiter ,

multiple values
Simulation

Refer to the Technical background of the Load Spice CSDF File component for
additional information. Additionally, this component can generate a signal trigger after
loading the signal. It can be used together with the Command Line Application
component, from the Tools component library. This module can load the simulation
results into OptiSystem after receiving a signal trigger at the input port.
triggered save component from the EDA cosimulation library. Figure 1 shows one
example of application, the file will be saved with a 2.5 GB/s signal, the file format is
Spice PWL, with a source named Vsupply. The file name will be NRZ25.stl, and it will
be loaded as a voltage source into the circuit simulation (Figure 2).
The Command Line Application component will call the application, in this case,
PSpice, that will perform the simulation and generate a .csd file. This component will
load the signal at node V(2) into OptiSystem.
1632
Figure 1 Cosimulation using Triggered Load Spice CSDF file component
Figure 2 Triggered Load Spice CSDF file parameters: selected CSDF file data
1633
Notes:
1634
Analog/Digital Library
Carrier Generators
• Carrier Generator
• Carrier Generator Measured
1635
Notes:
1636
CARRIER GENERATOR
Carrier Generator
This component generates a user-defined number of carriers. The output is a sum of

sinusoidal electrical signals with constant amplitude. The phase can be constant or
random.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Number of channels 2 — [1,+INF[
Number of output signal carriers
Frequency 50 Hz, MHz, [0,+INF[

GHz
Frequency of the first carrier
Frequency spacing 3.5 Hz, MHz, [0,+INF[

GHz
Spacing between adjacent carriers
Output signal amplitude of each

carrier

DC bias
Random phase Yes — True, false
Defines whether the phase of the

output carriers will be random or
user defined
Phase 0 deg ]-INF,+INF[
Constant phase
1637
CARRIER GENERATOR

Disable channels False — True, false
Defines whether disable channels

or not
List of channels — —
List of channels that should be

disabled
Simulation

value range

enabled
Random numbers

value range

This component generates a sum of sinusoidal carriers with the same zero peak
amplitude according to:
v out = ∑ vi ( t ) + vbias , where v i is the signal for each carrier, N is the

i=1
parameter Number of channels and vbias is the parameter Bias.
1638
CARRIER GENERATOR
Each carrier is defined by:
v i = A sin ( 2πf i + φ i ) , where f i is the frequency of each carrier.

The phase can be defined as random, or user-defined. The user-defined phase is the
same for all the carriers. The user can remove carriers from the sum by selecting
Disable channels parameter and providing the list of channels or carriers.
1639
CARRIER GENERATOR
Notes:
1640
CARRIER GENERATOR MEASURED
Carrier Generator Measured
This component loads a file with the list of frequency, amplitude and phase of each
carrier, and generates a sum of sinusoidal electrical signals.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Frequency amplitude phase 50e6 1 0 Hz, a.u.,
(Hz a.u. deg) deg
58e6 1 0
Table with the carrier data
Amplitude and phase file Carriers.dat — —

name
File name with the list of carriers.
Carrier data gain
DC bias
Random phase False — True, false
Defines whether the phase of the

output carriers will be random or
user defined
Phase 0 deg ]-INF,+INF[
Constant phase
Disable channels False — True, false

Defines whether disable channels
or not
1641

List of channels — —
List of channels that should be

disabled
Simulation

value range
enabled
This component generates a sum of sinusoidal carriers according to:
v out = G ∑ v i ( t ) + v bias , where v i is the signal for each carrier, N is the number
i=1
of channels,G is the parameter Gain, and Vbias is the parameter Bias.
Each carrier is defined by:
v i = A i sin ( 2πf i t + φ i ) , where A i , f i , and φ i are the amplitude, frequency and

phase of each carrier.The phase can be defined as random, or user-defined. The
user-defined phase is the same for all the carriers. The user can remove carriers from
the sum by selecting Disable channels parameter and providing the list of channels
or carriers.
The user can provide the measurements in the parameter Frequency amplitude
phase (Hz a.u. deg); alternatively the measurements can be loaded from a file using
the parameter Amplitude and phase file name. The amplitude and phase curves must
be provided in the file containing three columns, where the first one refers to the
frequency specified in [Hz] units; the second one gives the amplitude curve in [a.u.]
units, and the last one gives the phase in [deg] units.
Standard broadcast files (NTSC, PAL GB and L) are available under the folder
\Components\Data\Broadcast Standards.
1642
Transmitters
Modulators
• Electrical Amplitude Modulator (AM)

• Electrical Frequency Modulator (FM)
• Electrical Phase Modulator (PM)
• Quadrature Modulator
• PAM Modulator
• QAM Modulator
• PSK Modulator
• DPSK Modulator
• OQPSK Modulator
• MSK Modulator
• FSK Modulator
• CPFSK Modulator
• OFDM Modulator
• OFDM Modulator Measured
• Burst Modulator
1643
Notes:
1644
ELECTRICAL AMPLITUDE MODULATOR (AM)
Electrical Amplitude Modulator (AM)
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Frequency 50 MHz, Hz, GHz, [0,+INF[
Thz
Frequency of the input signal carrier
Gain 1 ]-INF,+INF[
Phase 0 deg,rad ]-INF,+INF[
Phase of the input signal carrier
Simulation

The Electrical Amplitude Modulator implements an analog amplitude modulator. The
output signal is modulated according to:
1645
ELECTRICAL AMPLITUDE MODULATOR (AM)
v out ( t ) = Gv in ( t ) cos ( 2πf c t + φ c ) + b

where v in is the input electrical signal, G is the parameter gain, b is the bias, f c is
the carrier frequency, and φ c is the phase of the carrier.
Figure 1 shows the block diagram of this component.
Figure 1 Electrical Amplitude Modulator block diagram
1646
ELECTRICAL FREQUENCY MODULATOR (FM)
Electrical Frequency Modulator (FM)
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Thz

Modulation constant 1 Hz, kHz, Mhz, ]-INF,+INF[

GHz
Frequency change relative to the input signal amplitude
Simulation

1647
ELECTRICAL FREQUENCY MODULATOR (FM)
The Electrical Frequency Modulator implements an analog frequency modulator. The
output signal is modulated according to:
v out ( t ) = A cos ( 2 πf c t + 2π m∫ v in ( t ) dt + φ c ) + b
where v in is the input electrical signal, m is the modulation constant, A is the

parameter Amplitude, b is the Bias, f c is the carrier frequency, and φ c is the phase
of the carrier.
1648
ELECTRICAL PHASE MODULATOR (PM)
Electrical Phase Modulator (PM)
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Thz

Modulation constant 1 deg, rad ]-INF,+INF[
Phase change relative to the input signal amplitude
Simulation

1649
ELECTRICAL PHASE MODULATOR (PM)
The Electrical Phase Modulator implements an analog phase modulator. The output
signal is modulated according to:
v out ( t ) = A cos ( 2πf c t + mv in ( t ) + φ c ) + b
where v in is the input electrical signal, m is the modulation constant, A is the

parameter Amplitude, b is the Bias, f c is the carrier frequency, and φ c is the phase
of the carrier.
1650
QUADRATURE MODULATOR
Quadrature Modulator
Ports

Input-I Input Electrical
Input-Q Input Electrical
Parameters
Main

value range
Thz
Gain 1 ]-INF,+INF[
Simulation

1651
QUADRATURE MODULATOR
The Quadrature Modulator implements a quadrature analog amplitude modulator.
The output signal is modulated according to:
v out ( t ) = G [ I ( t ) cos ( 2πf c t + φ c ) – Q ( t ) sin ( 2πf c t + φ c ) ] + b

where I and Q are the input electrical signals, G is the parameter Gain, b is the
Bias, f c is the carrier frequency, and φ c is the phase of the carrier.
Figure 1 Quadrature Modulator block diagram
References
[1] Benedetto, S., Biglieri, E., Castellani, V., Digital Transmission Theory. Prentice-Hall, N.Y.,
(1987).
1652
PAM MODULATOR
PAM Modulator
Encodes and modulates binary signal to an electrical signal using pulse amplitude
modulation (PAM).
Ports

Bit Sequence Input Binary
Parameters
Main

value range
Thz
Bits per symbol 2 [0,100]
Number of bits per symbol used in the coding
Position 0 bit
Gray code False True, False
1653
PAM MODULATOR
Simulation

value units range

enabled
The PAM Modulator implements a PAM modulator [1].
Figure 1 shows a block diagram of the component.
Figure 1 PAM Modulator block diagram
References
(1987).
1654
QAM MODULATOR
QAM Modulator
Encodes and modulates a binary signal to an electrical signal using quadrature

amplitude modulation (QAM).
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Thz
Amplitude
Position 0 bit
1655
QAM MODULATOR
Simulation

value units range

enabled
The QAM Modulator implements a QAM Modulator [1].
Figure 1 shows a block diagram of this component.
Figure 1 QAM Modulator block diagram
References
(1987).
1656
PSK MODULATOR
PSK Modulator
Encodes and modulates a binary signal to an electrical signal using phase shift keying
modulation (PSK).
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Thz
Amplitude
Phase offset 45 deg, rad ]-INF,+INF[
Defines whether to use Gray coding or not

1657
PSK MODULATOR
Simulation

value units range

enabled
The PSK Modulator implements a PSK modulator [1].
Figure 1 PSK Modulator block diagram
References
(1987).
1658
DPSK MODULATOR
DPSK Modulator
Encodes and modulates a binary signal to an electrical signal using differential phase
shift keying modulation (DPSK).
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Thz
Amplitude

1659
DPSK MODULATOR
Simulation

value units range

enabled
Figure 1 shows a block diagram of the DPSK modulator [1]:
Figure 1 DPSK Modulator block diagram
References
(1987).
1660
OQPSK MODULATOR
OQPSK Modulator
Encodes and modulates a binary signal to an electrical signal using offset quadrature
phase shift keying modulation (OQPSK).
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Thz
Amplitude
1661
OQPSK MODULATOR
Simulation

value units range

enabled
Figure 1 shows a block diagram of the OQPSK modulator [1]:
Figure 1 OQPSK Modulator block diagram
References
(1987).
1662
MSK MODULATOR
MSK Modulator
Encodes and modulates a binary signal to an electrical signal using minimum shift
keying modulation (MSK).
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Thz
Amplitude
1663
MSK MODULATOR
Simulation

value units range

enabled
Figure 1 shows a block diagram of the MSK modulator [1]:
Figure 1 MSK Modulator block diagram
References
(1987).
1664
FSK MODULATOR
FSK Modulator
Encodes and modulates a binary signal to an electrical signal using frequency shift
keying modulation (FSK).
Ports

Input Input Binary
Parameters
Main

value range
Thz
Amplitude
Frequency separation 1 Hz, MHz, GHz, [0,+INF[

THz
Frequency separation between symbols

1665
FSK MODULATOR
Simulation

value units range

enabled
The FSK Modulator implements a FSK modulator [1].
When transmitting information, we can vary the frequency of a signal according to the
source symbols. The frequency values takes information from the set of amplitudes
[1]:
a i = f s ( 2i – 1 – M ), i = 1, 2, ...M
where f s is the frequency separation, M is the number of possible sequences of
binary digits, calculated according to:
h
M = 2
where h is the number of bits per symbol.
v out ( t ) = A cos ( 2πf c t + 2πa i + φ c ) + b
where A is the parameter amplitude, b is the bias, f c is the carrier frequency, and
φ c is the phase of the carrier.
References
(1987).
1666
CPFSK MODULATOR
CPFSK Modulator
Encodes and modulates a binary signal to an electrical signal using continuous phase
frequency shift keying modulation (CPFSK).
Ports

Input Input Binary
Parameters
Main

value range
Thz
Amplitude
Frequency separation 1 Hz, MHz, GHz, [0,+INF[

THz
Frequency separation between symbols

1667
CPFSK MODULATOR
Simulation

value units range

enabled
The CPFSK Modulator implements a CPFSK modulator [1].
When transmitting information, we can vary the frequency of a signal according to the
source symbols. The frequency values takes information from the set of amplitudes
[1]:
a i = f s ( 2i – 1 – M ), i = 1, 2, ...M
where f s is the frequency separation, M is the number of possible sequences of
binary digits, calculated according to:
h
M = 2
v out ( t ) = A cos ( 2πf c t + 2πa i + φ c ) + b
where A is the parameter amplitude, b is the bias, f c is the carrier frequency, and
φ c is the phase of the carrier.
In this model, because the phase transitions are constant, a single oscillator with a
modulated frequency modulated is used. The absence of abrupt phase transitions
results in a narrower spectrum.
References
(1987)
1668
OFDM MODULATOR
OFDM Modulator
This component modulates a digital signal into multiple orthogonal subcarriers.
Ports

Input - I 1 Input M-ary
Input - Q 1 Input M-ary
Output - I Output Electrical
Output - Q Output Electrical
Parameters
Main

value range
Number of input ports 1 - [1,1000]
Define the number of Users for the OFDM modulator
Number of subcarriers 4 - [1,100e6]
Number of subcarriers used for transmission by each user
User defined position False - True, False

If True each user can define the position of its initial subcarrier
Position array 30 - [0,100e6]
Array containing the initial subcarrier positions for each user
Number of IFFT points 64 - [1,100e6]
Number of points used in the IFFT
1669
OFDM MODULATOR

value range
Symmetric spectrum False - True, False
Defines if the input vector to the IFFT is constrained to have

hermetian symmetry
Cyclic prefix Symbol - Symbol

extension extension, Zero
Defines which guard period will be used
values
Number of prefix points 0 - [0,100e6]

Defines the number of points used in the guard period
DAC

value units range
Interpolation Cubic - - Linear, Cubic,
Step
Defines the type of interpolation that will be used
Smoothing filter False - - True, False
Determines whether or not the smoothing filter is

enabled
Simulation

value units range
Sample rate Sample rate Hz Hz, GHz, THz [0,+INF[

enabled
Graphs

OFDM FFT Frequency (Hz) Amplitude (a.u.)
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing [1] is a multicarrier transmission
technique, which divides the available spectrum into many carriers, each one being
modulated by a low rate data stream. The following diagram describes the different
parts of the OFDM modulator component.
1670
OFDM MODULATOR
Figure 1 OFDM modulator diagram
The input data can be in different modulations formats, for example: BPSK, QPSK,
QAM, etc. This input serial symbol stream is shifted into a parallel format. Then the
data is transmitted in parallel by assigning each symbol to one carrier in the
transmission.
After mapping the spectrum, an inverse Fourier transform is used to find the
corresponding time waveform. The cyclic prefix (guard period) can then be added to
start each symbol.
The component allows the introduction of a cyclic extension of the symbol transmitted
or a guard time with zero transmission. The parameter Number of prefix points will
define how many points will be used in the guard period.
Different interpolation techniques (Step, Linear, and Cubic) can be used to function as
the digital-to-analog converter. After the DAC, the parallel data is shifted back into the
serial symbol stream. An internal smoothing filer is applied depending on whether the
parameter “Smoothing filter” is enabled or not.
The figure below presents an example of OFDM transmitter using the OFDM
modulator.
1671
OFDM MODULATOR
Figure 2 OFDM transmitter - System configuration
Figure 2 shows the coding of 10 Gbps data to 4-QAM symbols. The 4-QAM symbols
are then mapped to 4 subcarriers defined in the OFDM modulator. Finally, I and Q
generated analog waveforms are converted to real-valued waveforms by mixing with
a RF carrier. In this example, the OFDM modulator presents the following parameters:
Number of users = 1;
Number of subcarriers = 4;
Initial Position of the subcarriers in the spectrum = 17;
Number of IFFT points = 32;
Number of prefix points = 0;
The subcarrier frequencies are integer multiples of 1/Tsymbol, where Tsymbol is the
duration of an OFDM symbol, and in this case the frequency is 1.25 GHz. Since the
initial position defined by the OFDM modulator is 17 (position “Number of IFFT points
/ 2 = 16“ stands for a subcarrier frequency of 0), the initial subcarrier will be allocated
at 1.25 GHz, and the subsequent subcarriers will be at 2.5 GHz, 3.75 GHz, and 5
GHz, respectively. The allocation of subcarriers, as shown in Figure 3, can also be
visualized from the “Graphs“ property of OFDM Modulator in project browser. Figure
4 shows the spectrum of the In-phase signal at the OFDM output as well as the up-
converted OFDM signal spectrum.
1672
OFDM MODULATOR
Figure 3 Allocation of OFDM subcarriers
Figure 4 (a) OFDM output (In-phase) (b) Up-converted OFDM output
(a) (b)
The time-domain In-phase signal at the OFDM output is shown in Figure 5, with
“Interpolation” set to Step, Linear, and Cubic, respectively.
1673
OFDM MODULATOR
Figure 5 OFDM time-domain output (In-phase) with “Interpolation” set to (a) Step, (b) Linear, and (c) Cubic,
respectively.
(a) (b) (c)
In the simulation results presented above, no guard period was added to the
simulation.
In the next simulation, the OFDM transmitter used was the same as presented above,
however, different guard periods (no guard period, symbol extension with 16 points,
and zero transmission guard time with 16 points) were added to the OFDM symbol.
The time-domain In-phase signal at the OFDM output is presented in Figure 6.
1674
OFDM MODULATOR
Figure 6 Time-domain In-phase signal at the OFDM output with different type of guard periods
No
guard period
Symbol extension
guard period
Zero transmission
guard period
1675
OFDM MODULATOR
References
[1] Armstrong, J. , “OFDM for Optical Communications”, J. Lightwave Technology, vol. 27, pp. 189-
204, Feb 2009.
1676
OFDM MODULATOR MEASURED
OFDM Modulator Measured
This is an OFDM Modulator Measured component which modulates a digital signal

into multiple orthogonal subcarriers.
Ports

Modes
Input - I 1 Input M-Ary -
Input - Q 1 Input M-Ary -
Output - I Output Electrical -
Output - Q Output Electrical -
Parameters
Main
Subcarrier index 64 x 1 - - -
Table with the subcarrier index data
Subcarrier index file name Subcarriers.dat - - -
File name of the subcarrier index data
Symmetric spectrum False - - [True, False]
Defines if the input vector to the IFFT is

constrained to have hermetian
symmetry
Cyclic prefix Symbol extension - - Symbol

extension, Zero
Defines which guard period will be used values
Number of prefix points 0 - - [ 0, 1e+008 ]
Defines the number of points used in the

guard period
1677
DAC
Interpolation Cubic - - Linear, Cubic,
Step
Defines the type of interpolation that will
be used
Smoothing filter False - - [True, False]

smoothing filter is enabled
Simulation
Sample rate Sample rate Hz Hz, GHz, THz [ 1, 1e+100 ]
Enabled True - - [True, False]

Graphs

Results
Name and description Unit

Number of FFT points -
Number of subcarriers -
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing [1] is a multicarrier transmission
technique, which divides the available spectrum into many carriers, each one being
modulated by a low rate data stream. The following diagram describes the different
parts of the OFDM Modulator Measured component.
1678
Figure 1 OFDM modulator diagram
The input data can be in different modulations formats, for example: BPSK, QPSK,
QAM, etc. This input serial symbol stream is shifted into a parallel format. Then the
data is transmitted in parallel by assigning each symbol to one carrier in the
transmission.
After mapping the spectrum, an inverse Fourier transform is used to find the
corresponding time waveform. The cyclic prefix (guard period) can then be added to
start each symbol.
The component allows the introduction of a cyclic extension of the symbol transmitted
or a guard time with zero transmission. The parameter Number of prefix points defines
how many points will be used in the guard period.
Different interpolation techniques (Step, Linear, and Cubic) can be used to function as
the digital-to-analog converter. After the DAC, the parallel data is shifted back into the
serial symbol stream. An internal smoothing filer is applied depending on whether the
parameter “Smoothing filter” is enabled or not.
The figure below presents an example of OFDM transmitter using the OFDM
Modulator Measured.
1679
Figure 2 OFDM transmitter - System configuration
Figure 2 shows the coding of 10 Gbps data to 4-QAM symbols. The 4-QAM symbols
are then mapped to 4 subcarriers defined in the OFDM Modulator Measured. Finally,
I and Q generated analog waveforms are converted to real-valued waveforms by
mixing with a RF carrier.
In this example, the Number of prefix points = 0, and the subcarrier information are
defined by the parameter “Subcarrier index”, which uses a N x 1 table. The data in the
tabel is visualized in Figure 3(a), with x-axis representing the row number of the table,
and y-axis representing the values in the corresponding table cells. The table has 32
rows, which means “Number of IFFT points = 32“. For the table cell values, there are
four “1”s (all other are “0”s), which means “Number of subcarriers = 4”.
Once we know the number of subcarriers, we can calculate the subcarrier

frequencies. The subcarrier frequencies are integer multiples of 1/Tsymbol, where
Tsymbol is the duration of an OFDM symbol, and in this case the frequency is 1.25
GHz.
For the position of subcarriers, the definition here is slightly different from the
component “OFDM Modulator”. Since the numbering of rows starts from 1, not 0,
here row number “Number of IFFT points / 2 + 1 = 17“ stands for a subcarrier
frequency of 0. In the table, the value of the cells located at row 18, 19, 20, and 21 is
“1”, so the subcarriers are located at 1.25 GHz, 2.5 GHz, 3.75 GHz, and 5 GHz,
respectively.
1680
Figure 3 (a) Loaded table data (b) Allocation of OFDM subcarriers
(a)
(b)
The allocation of subcarriers, as shown in Figure 3(b), can be visualized from the
“Graphs“ property of OFDM Modulator Measured in project browser. Figure 4 shows
the spectrum of the In-phase signal at the OFDM output as well as the up-converted
OFDM signal spectrum.
The time-domain In-phase signal at the OFDM output is shown in Figure 5, with
“Interpolation” set to Step, Linear, and Cubic, respectively.
1681
Figure 4 (a) OFDM output (In-phase) (b) Up-converted OFDM output
(a) (b)
Figure 5 OFDM time-domain output (In-phase) with “Interpolation” set to (a) Step, (b) Linear, and (c) Cubic,
respectively.
(a) (b) (c)
In the next simulation, the OFDM transmitter used was the same as presented before,
however, different guard periods (no guard period, symbol extension with 16 points,
and zero transmission guard time with 16 points) were added to the OFDM symbol.
The time-domain In-phase signal at the OFDM output is presented in Figure 6.
1682
Figure 6 Time-domain In-phase signal at the OFDM output with different type of guard periods
No
guard period
Symbol extension
guard period
Zero transmission
guard period
1683
The format of the file for the loaded subcarrier index data can be seen as follows:
Figure 7 Example of the file for the loaded subcarrier index data
References
204, Feb 2009.
1684
BURST MODULATOR
Burst Modulator
This component modulates an input signal into a signal with multiple bursts,
modulated by a control signal.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Threshold 0.5 - ]-INF, +INF[
Control signal threshold value
Simulation

This component modulates an input signal into a signal with multiple bursts, and the
time slots for the bursts are determined by the control signal.
Figure 1 is an example showing how to connect this component.
1685
BURST MODULATOR
Figure 1 Burst modulator - Layout
The basic principle of the Burst Modulator is illustrated in Figure 2. As we can see, for
each time slot when the control signal is above the threshold level, the input signal will
be transmitted to the output as bursts.
Figure 2 Burst modulator - Principle
Input
Signal
Control
Signal
Output
Signal
1686
BURST MODULATOR
Transmitters
Pulse generators
• PAM Pulse Generator

• QAM Pulse Generator
• PSK Pulse Generator
• DPSK Pulse Generator
• OQPSK Pulse Generator
• MSK Pulse Generator
1687
BURST MODULATOR
Notes:
1688
PAM PULSE GENERATOR
PAM Pulse Generator
Generates a M-ary electrical signal from binary signals using pulse amplitude
modulation (PAM).
Ports

PAM Pulses Output Electrical
Parameters
Main

value range

Position 0 bit
Simulation

value units range
enabled
1689
PAM PULSE GENERATOR
When transmitting information, we can vary the amplitude of a signal according to the
source symbols. The amplitude values are taken from the set of amplitudes [1]:
a i = ( 2i – 1 – M ), i = 1, 2, ...M
where M is the number of possible sequences of binary digits, calculated according
to:
h
M = 2
Using Gray code, the adjacent signal amplitudes that correspond to the binary
sequences will differ by only one digit.
⎧
⎪ 0, 0 ≤ t < t 1
⎪
v k – out = ⎨ a k, t 1 ≤ t < t 1 + t c
⎪
⎪ 0, t 1 + t c ≤ t < T
⎩
where a k is the amplitude of the signal k , T is the bit period, t c is the duty cycle, and
t 1 is the pulse position.
Figure 1 PAM Pulse Generator block diagram
References
[1] Benedetto, S., Biglieri, E., Castellani, V., Digital Transmission Theory. Prentice-Hall, N.Y., (1987).
1690
QAM PULSE GENERATOR
QAM Pulse Generator
Generates two parallel M-ary electrical signals from binary signals using quadrature
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Position 0 bit

1691
QAM PULSE GENERATOR
Simulation

value units range

enabled
With the QAM sequence generator, the bit sequence is split into two parallel
subsequences, each transmitted in two quadrature carriers when building a QAM
modulator. This is done by using a serial to parallel converter.
source symbols.
For each output port, the value of the amplitude takes value from the set of
amplitudes [1]
a 1 = ( 2i – 1 – M ), i = 1, 2, ..., M
where M is the number of possible sequence of binary digits, calculated according to:
h⁄2
M = 2
where h is the number of bits per symbol. The equivalent QAM set is given by the
square of M .
This means:
If h = 2 , M = 2 , then we have a 4-QAM. If h = 4 , M = 4 , then we have a 16-

QAM.
If h = 6 , M = 8 , then we have a 64-QAM. If h = 8 , M = 16 , then we have a

256-QAM.
1692
QAM PULSE GENERATOR

⎧
⎪ 0, 0 ≤ t < t 1
⎪
v k – out ( t ) = ⎨ a k, t 1 ≤ t < t 1 + t c
⎪
⎪ 0, t 1 + t c ≤ t < T
⎩
where a k is the amplitude of the signal k , T is the bit period, t c is the duty cycle, and
t 1 is the pulse position.
Figure 1 represents the block diagram of this component.
Figure 1 QAM Pulse Generator block diagram
1693
QAM PULSE GENERATOR
References
1694
PSK PULSE GENERATOR
PSK Pulse Generator
Generates two parallel M-ary electrical signals from binary signals using phase shift
keying modulation (PSK).
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Initial phase offset
Simulation

value units range
enabled
1695
PSK PULSE GENERATOR
When transmitting information, we can vary the phase of a signal according to the
source symbols. The phase values are taken from the set of angles [1]:
2π
ϕ i = ⎛ ------ ( i – 1 ) + φ⎞ , i = 1, 2, ...M
⎝M ⎠
h
M = 2
where h is the number of bits per symbol, and φ is the phase offset. The in-phase
and the quadrature-channel will have amplitudes according to:
I i = cos ( ϕ i ), i = 1, 2, ...M
Q i = sin ( ϕ i ), i = 1, 2, ...M
I k – out ( t ) = I k , 0 ≤ t < T
Q k – out ( t ) = Q k , 0 ≤ t < T
where I k and Q k are the amplitudes of the output signals k and T is the bit period.
Figure 1 PSK Pulse Generator block diagram
References
1696
DPSK PULSE GENERATOR
DPSK Pulse Generator
Generates two parallel M-ary electrical signals from binary signals using differential
phase shift keying modulation (DPSK).
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Simulation

value units range
enabled
1697
DPSK PULSE GENERATOR
source symbols. The phase values are taken from the set of angles [1], [2]:
2π
ϕ ki = ϕ k – 1 + ⎛ ------ ( i – 1 ) + φ⎞ , i = 1, 2, ...M
⎝M ⎠
where ϕ ki is the phase value for the current symbol, and ϕ k – 1 is the phase value for
the previous symbol. M is the number of possible sequence of binary digits,
calculated according to:
h
M = 2
I ki = cos ( ϕ ki ), i = 1, 2, ...M
Q ki = sin ( ϕ ki ), i = 1, 2, ...M
I k – out ( t ) = I k , 0 ≤ t < T
Q k – out ( t ) = Q k , 0 ≤ t < T
where I k and Q k are the amplitudes of the output signals k and T is the bit period.
Figure 1 DPSK Pulse Generator block diagram
References
[2] Pawula, R.F., “On M-ary DPSK Transmission Over Terrestrial and Satellite Channels”,
IEEE Trans. on Commun. COM-32, 752-761, (July 1984).
1698
OQPSK PULSE GENERATOR
OQPSK Pulse Generator
Ports
Parameters
Main


Simulation
Name and description Default value Default units Unit Value range

enabled

1699
OQPSK PULSE GENERATOR
When transmitting information, we can vary the phase of a signal according to the source
symbols. The phase values take the values in the set of angles [1]:
2π
ϕ i = ⎛⎝ ------ ( i – 1 ) + φ⎞⎠ , i = 1, 2, ...M
M
where M is the number of possible sequence of binary digits, when using quadrature phase
shift keying (QPSK), this number is equal to 4, and φ is the phase offset. A reduction of the
signal fluctuations is possible by delaying the Q channel by one bit period. The bit period is
calculated from the input binary signal.
The in-phase and the quadrature-channel will have amplitudes according to:
I i = cos ( ϕ i ), i = 1, 2, ...M
Q i = sin ( ϕ i ), i = 1, 2, ...M
Using Gray code, the adjacent signal amplitudes that correspond to the binary sequences will
differ by only one digit.
I k – out ( t ) = I k , 0 ≤ t < T
Q k – out ( t ) = Q k , Ts ≤ t < T + Ts
where k is the amplitude of the signal I , T is the bit period, and Ts is the input bit period.
Figure 1 OQPSK Pulse Generator block diagram
References
1700
MSK PULSE GENERATOR
MSK Pulse Generator
Generates two parallel M-ary symbol sequences from binary signals using minimum shift
keying modulation (MSK).
Ports
Parameters
Main


Simulation
Name and description Default value Default units Unit Value range

enabled

1701
MSK PULSE GENERATOR
When transmitting information, we can vary the phase of a signal according to the source
symbols. The phase values take the values in the set of angles [1]:
2π
ϕ i = ⎛⎝ ------ ( i – 1 ) + φ⎞⎠ , i = 1, 2, ...M
M
where M is the number of possible sequence of binary digits, when using quadrature phase
shift keying (QPSK), this number is equal to 4, and φ is the phase offset. A reduction of the
signal fluctuations is possible by delaying the Q channel by one bit period. The bit period is
calculated from the input binary signal. The MSK is a special case of OQPSK in which a
sinusoidal pulse replaces the rectangular waveform.
The in-phase and the quadrature-channel will have amplitudes according to:
I i = cos ( ϕ i ), i = 1, 2, ...M
Q i = sin ( ϕ i ), i = 1, 2, ...M
Using Gray code, the adjacent signal amplitudes that correspond to the binary sequences will

πt
I k – out ( t ) = I k sin ⎛ ---------⎞ , 0 ≤ t < T
⎝ 2Ts⎠
πt
Q k – out ( t ) = Q k cos ⎛⎝ ---------⎞⎠ , Ts ≤ t < T + Ts
2Ts
where k is the amplitude of the signal I , T is the bit period, and Ts is the input bit period.
1702
MSK PULSE GENERATOR
Figure 1 MSK Pulse Generator block diagram
1703
MSK PULSE GENERATOR
References
1704
MSK PULSE GENERATOR
Transmitters
Sequence generators
• PAM Sequence Generator

• QAM Sequence Generator
• PSK Sequence Generator
• DPSK Sequence Generator
• PPM Sequence Generator
• DPIM Sequence Generator
• 4B5B Sequence Generator
• NRZI Sequence Generator
• AMI Sequence Generator
• Manchester Sequence Generator
• 4B3T Sequence Generator
• 8B10B Sequence Generator
1705
MSK PULSE GENERATOR
Notes:
1706
PAM SEQUENCE GENERATOR
PAM Sequence Generator
Generates a M-ary symbol sequence from binary signals using pulse amplitude
modulation (PAM).
Ports

PAM sequence Output M-ary
Parameters
Main

Simulation

value range

enabled
1707
source symbols. The value of the amplitude takes value from the set of amplitudes [1]:
a 1 = ( 2i – 1 – M ), i = 1, 2, ..., M
h
M = 2
If bits per symbol ( h ) equals 2, M is equal to 8, and values of a and i will be:
Bit sequence i ai
00 1 -3
01 2 -1
10 3 1
11 4 3
If bits per symbol ( h ) equals 3, M is equal to 8, and values of a and i will be:
Bit sequence i ai
000 1 -7
001 2 -5
010 3 -3
011 4 -1
100 5 1
101 6 3
110 7 5
111 8 7
1708
In the case of bits per symbol ( h ) equals 3, M is equal to 8, with Gray code, and the
values of a will be:
Bit sequence ai
000 -7
001 -5
101 -3
100 -1
110 1
111 3
011 5
010 7
1709
References
1710
QAM SEQUENCE GENERATOR
QAM Sequence Generator
Generates two parallel M-ary symbol sequences from binary signals using quadrature
Ports

Output - I Output M-ary
Output - Q Output M-ary
Parameters
Main

Bits per symbol 2 Hz, THz, nm [0,100]
Simulation

value range

enabled
1711
With the QAM sequence generator, the bit sequence is split into two parallel
subsequences, each can be transmitted in two quadrature carriers when building a
QAM modulator. This is achieved by using a serial to parallel converter.
source symbols.
For each output port, the amplitude takes one of the values from the set of
amplitudes [1]:
a 1 = ( 2i – 1 – M ), i = 1, 2, ..., M
h⁄2
M = 2
square of M .
This means:

QAM.

256-QAM.
If bits per symbol ( h ) are equal to 4, we have a 16-QAM that requires 2 consecutive
bits from the input sequence for each subsequence:
Sequence Subsequence I/i a Subsequence Q / a

i
0000 00 / 1 -3 00 / 1 -3
0001 00 / 1 -3 01 / 2 -1
0010 00 / 1 -3 10 / 3 1
0011 00 / 1 -3 11 / 4 3
0100 01 / 2 -1 00 / 1 -3
0101 01 / 2 -1 01 / 2 -1
0110 01 / 2 -1 10 / 3 1
0111 01 / 2 -1 11 / 4 3
1000 10 / 3 1 00 / 1 -3
1001 10 / 3 1 01 / 2 -1
1010 10 / 3 1 10 / 3 1
1712

i
1011 10 / 3 1 11 / 4 3
1100 11 / 4 3 00 / 1 -3
1101 11 / 4 3 01 / 2 -1
1110 11 / 4 3 10 / 3 1
1111 11 / 4 3 11 / 4 3
1713
References
1714
PSK SEQUENCE GENERATOR
PSK Sequence Generator
Generates two parallel M-ary symbol sequences from binary signals using phase shift
keying modulation (PSK).
Ports

Parameters
Main

Phase offset 45 deg, rad ]-INF, +INF[
Simulation

value range
enabled
1715
2π
ϕ i = ⎛ ------ ( i – 1 ) + φ⎞ , i = 1, 2, ...M
⎝M ⎠
h
M = 2
I i = cos ( ϕ i ), i = 1, 2, ...M
Q i = sin ( ϕ i ), i = 1, 2, ...M
Assuming φ = 0 , if bits per symbol ( h ) equals 2, M equals 4, the values of I and
Q will be:
Bit sequence I Q
00 1 0
01 0 1
10 -1 0
11 0 -1

Q will be:
Bit sequence I Q
000 1 0
001
------2- ------2-
2 2
010 0 1
1716
Bit sequence I Q
011
2
– ------- ------2-
2 2
100 -1 0
101
2 2
– ------- – -------
2 2
110 0 -1
111
------2- 2
– -------
2 2
1717
References
1718
DPSK SEQUENCE GENERATOR
DPSK Sequence Generator
Generates two parallel M-ary symbol sequences from binary signals using differential
phase shift keying modulation (DPSK).
Ports

Parameters
Main

Simulation

value range
enabled
1719
2π
ϕ ki = ϕ k – 1 + ⎛ ------ ( i – 1 ) + φ⎞ , i = 1, 2, ...M
⎝M ⎠
where ϕ ki is the phase value for the current symbol, and ϕ k – 1 is phase value for the
previous symbol. M is the number of possible sequence of binary digits, calculated
according to:
h
M = 2
I ki = cos ( ϕ ki ), i = 1, 2, ...M
Q ki = sin ( ϕ ki ), i = 1, 2, ...M
Q will be:
k Bit sequence I Q
0 00 1 0
1 01 0 1
2 10 -1 0
3 11 0 -1

Q will be:
k Bit sequence I Q
0 000 1 0
1 001
------2- ------2-
2 2
1720
k Bit sequence I Q
2 010 0 1
3 011
2
– ------- ------2-
2 2
4 100 -1 0
5 101
2 2
– ------- – -------
2 2
6 110 0 -1
7 111
------2- 2
– -------
2 2
1721
References
1722
PPM SEQUENCE GENERATOR
PPM Sequence Generator
Generates a sequence of bits using pulse position modulation (PPM).
Ports

PPM Sequence Output Binary
Parameters
Main

Bits per symbol 2 - [0,100]
Simulation

With the PPM sequence generator, the signal is split up into one of N possible
L
symbols, with L bits per symbol, where N = 2 [1]. The position of the symbol
varies depending on what the original bit sequence was, which is mapped to it.
1723
PPM SEQUENCE GENERATOR
2
For instance, given the sequence 00011011 and 2 bits per symbol, there will be 2
possible symbols, and the bits will be mapped as follows:
Bit sequence Decimal Value N

00 0 1000
01 1 0100
10 2 0010
11 3 0001
3
For the sequence 101 011 110 111 000 and 3 bits per symbol, there will be 2
possible symbols, and the bits will be mapped as follows:

101 5 0000 0100
011 3 0001 0000
110 6 0000 0010
111 7 0000 0001
000 0 1000 0000
References
[1] Z. Ghassemlooy, A. R. Hayes, “Digital pulse interval modulation for IR communication systems-a
review”, Int. J. Commun. Syst, vol 13, pp 519-536, Nov 2000.
1724
DPIM SEQUENCE GENERATOR
DPIM Sequence Generator
Generates a sequence of bits using digital pulse interval modulation (DPIM).
Ports

DPIM Sequence Output Binary
Parameters
Main

Simulation

In each PPM symbol, the empty slots following a pulse are essentially redundant, and
it is this redundancy which is removed when adopting digital pulse interval modulation
(DPIM). In DPIM, information is encoded by varying the number of empty slots
between adjacent pulses [1].
1725
DPIM SEQUENCE GENERATOR
For instance, given the sequence 00011011 and 2 bits per symbol, the encoded
sequence is:

00 0 10
01 1 100
10 2 1000
11 3 10000
For the sequence 101 110 001 010 111 and 3 bits per symbol, the encoded sequence
is:

101 5 1000000
110 6 10000000
001 1 100
010 2 1000
111 7 100000000
References
1726
4B5B SEQUENCE GENERATOR
4B5B Sequence Generator
Generates a sequence of bits by mapping 4-bit symbols to specific 5-bit symbols

(4B5B).
Ports

4B5B Sequence Output Binary
Parameters
Simulation

With the 4B/5B sequence generator, the signal is split up into 4-Bit symbols. The
symbols are then mapped to specific 5-Bit symbols, so that there are never more than
3 consecutive 0’s (the 5-Bit symbols do not have more than 1 leading 0 and more than
2 trailing 0’s) [1].
The table of symbols for the 16 possible 4-bit combinations is:
4-Bit Symbol Decimal Value 5-Bit Symbol

0000 0 11110
0001 1 01001
0010 2 10100
0011 3 10101
1727
4-Bit Symbol Decimal Value 5-Bit Symbol

0100 4 01010
0101 5 01011
0110 6 01110
0111 7 01111
1000 8 10010
1001 9 10011
1010 10 10110
1011 11 10111
1100 12 11010
1101 13 11011
1110 14 11100
1111 15 11101
References
[1] B. A. Forouzan, Data Communications and Networking, McGraw-Hill Science, 2003.
1728
NRZI SEQUENCE GENERATOR
NRZI Sequence Generator
Generates a sequence of bits using non-return-to-zero inverted encoding (NRZI).
Ports

NRZI Sequence Output Binary
Parameters
Simulation

With the NRZI [1] sequence generator, the signal is mapped in such a way that a
logical ‘1’ represents a transition, and a logical ‘0’ does not. For instance, for the
sequence 10010110101101, the NRZI encoded sequence is 11100100110110.
References
1729
NRZI SEQUENCE GENERATOR
Notes:
1730
AMI SEQUENCE GENERATOR
AMI Sequence Generator
Generates an m-ary symbol sequence from binary signals using alternate mark
inversion (AMI).
Ports

AMI Sequence Output M-ary
Parameters
Main

Encoding type Bipolar - Bipolar, B8ZS,
B6ZS, B3ZS,
HDB3
Simulation

With the AMI code is generated by inverting alternate 1s or marks [1] [2], This process
removes the DC component. Different encoding types are available:
1731
Bipolar
This is the default AMI mode. For every mark in the original sequence, it alternates
between positive and negative values, starting with the positive, for the modified
sequence.
Sequence Bipolar AMI sequence

100111101 +00-+-+0-
011001111 0+-00+-+-
B8ZS
This mode of the AMI scans the original code and looks for eight consecutive zeros,
when it finds them it replaces them with 000-+0+- or 000+-0-+ depending on the bit
right before the eight zeros.
Sequence Bipolar AMI Value of B8ZS AMI

sequence preceding bit sequence
10100000000110 +0-00000000+-0 - +0-000-+0+-+-0
10000000011011 +00000000-+0-+ + +000+-0-+-+0-+
B6ZS
This mode of the AMI is the exact same as the B8ZS, except it looks for six
consecutive zeros, and the patterns are 0-+0+- and 0+-0-+.
Sequence Bipolar AMI Value of B6ZS AMI

sequence preceding bit sequence
101000000110 +0-000000+-0 - +0-0-+0+-+-0
100000011011 +000000-+0-+ + +0+-0-+-+0-+
1732
B3ZS
This mode scans for three consecutive zeros, however the pattern it replaces them
with depends not only on the preceding bit, but also on the number of non-zero bits
there were since the last substitution (without counting the first bit of the sequence),
the possible patterns are: 00-, 00+, -0-, +0+. .
Sequence Bipolar AMI Value of Sequence Value of B3ZS AMI

sequence preceding after first preceding bit sequence
bit for first substitution for second
substitution substitution
1010001101000 +0-000+-0+000 -, ODD +0-00-+-0+000 +, ODD +0-00-+-0+00+
101100011000 +0-+000+-000 +, EVEN +0-+-0-+-000 -, EVEN +0-+-0-+-+0+
HDB3
This mode is the exact same as the B3ZS, except it searches for four consecutive
zeros, and the patters are: 000-, 000+, +00+, -00-..
Sequence Bipolar AMI Value of Sequence Value of B3ZS AMI

sequence preceding after first preceding bit sequence
bit for first substitution for second
substitution substitution
101000011010000 +0-0000+-0+000 -, ODD +0-000-+-0+0000 +, ODD +0-000-+-0+000+
10110000110000 +0-+0000+-0000 +, EVEN +0-+-00-+-0000 -, EVEN +0-+-00-+-+00+
References
[1] W. Stallings, Data and Computer Communications, Prentice Hall, 2006.
[2] D. R. Smith, Digital Transmission Systems, Springer, 2003.
1733
1734
MANCHESTER SEQUENCE GENERATOR
Manchester Sequence Generator
Generates a sequence of bits using Manchester encoding.
Ports

Manchester Sequence Output Binary
Parameters
Simulation

The Manchester sequence generator encodes a signal by generating a 1->0
transition for a 1 symbol and a 0->1 transition for a 0 symbol [1] . The bandwidth of
the encoded signal is two times the original bandwidth.
Sequence Manchester sequence

10011011 1001011010011010
11011110 1010011010101001
References
1735
MANCHESTER SEQUENCE GENERATOR
Notes:
1736
4B3T SEQUENCE GENERATOR
4B3T Sequence Generator
Generates a sequence of bits by mapping 4-bit symbols to specific 3-bit ternary

symbols (4B3T).
Ports

4B3T Sequence Output Binary
Parameters
Main

Zero padding False - True, False
Determines whether or not to add zeroes at the end of the

sequence
Simulation

This mapping from 4 bits to 3 ternary states is given in a table known as Modified
Monitoring State 43 (MMS43) [1] [2].
1737
4B3T SEQUENCE GENERATOR
References
[1] D. J. Morris, Pulse Code Formats for Fiber Optical Data Communication, CRC, 1983.
1738
8B10B Sequence Generator
Generates a sequence of bits by mapping a 8-bits symbol to a specific 10-bits symbol

(8B10B).
Ports

8B10B Sequence Output Binary
Parameters
Simulation

Described in [1] in detail, 8B10B coding decomposes each 8-bits into two blocks of 5
bits and 3 bits, converting them to 6-bit and 4-bit equivalents, respectively. Each
consecutive blocks exhibit a total average of zero (DC-balanced).
References
[1] A. X. Widmer, P. A. Franaszek, “A DC-Balanced, Partitioned-Block, 8B/10B Transmission Code”,
IBM Journal of Research and Development, Vol 27, No 5, pp 440, 1983.
1739
Notes:
1740
Receivers
Demodulators
• Electrical Amplitude Demodulator

• Electrical Phase Demodulator
• Electrical Frequency Demodulator
• Quadrature Demodulator
• OFDM Demodulator
• OFDM Demodulator Measured
• Burst Demodulator
1741
Notes:
1742
ELECTRICAL AMPLITUDE DEMODULATOR
Electrical Amplitude Demodulator
A coherent amplitude demodulator.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value
Frequency 50 MHz, Hz, GHz, Thz [0,+INF[
Frequency of the input signal carriert
Phase 0 deg, rad ]-INF,+INF[
Gain 1 ]-INF,+INF[
Low Pass Filter

value
Cut off frequency 50 MHz, Hz, GHz, Thz [0,+INF[
3 dB cut off frequency of the filter
Filter type Cosine Roll Rectangular,

Off Cosine Roll Off,
Squared Cosine
Roll Off
Roll Off factor 0.2 [0.1]
1743
ELECTRICAL AMPLITUDE DEMODULATOR
Simulation

The component implements an analog demodulator for amplitude-modulated signals.
The output signal is demodulated according to:
v out ( t ) = [ Gv in ( t ) cos ( 2πf c t + φ c ) ]∗ h low ( t ),

where v in is the input electrical signal, G is the parameter gain, f c is the carrier
frequency,
φ c is the phase of the carrier, and h low is the time response of the low pass filter.
The filter type is described according to filter components in the Electrical Filters
library:
• rectangle
• cosine roll off
• squared cosine roll off
Figure 1 Electrical amplitude demodulator block diagram
1744
ELECTRICAL PHASE DEMODULATOR
Electrical Phase Demodulator
A coherent phase demodulator.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value
Peak to peak amplitude 1 ]-INF,+INF[
Peak to peak output signal
Low Pass Filter

value

Squared Cosine
Roll Off
1745
ELECTRICAL PHASE DEMODULATOR
Simulation

This component implements an analog demodulator for phase-modulated signals.
The output signal is demodulated using a frequency discriminator followed by an
integrator according to:
d
v d ( t ) = ----- v in ( t )
dt
v ( t ) = ∫ v d ( t ) dt
v out ( t ) = [ v ( t ) cos ( 2πf c t + φ c ) ]∗ h low ( t )
where v in is the input electrical signal, f c is the carrier frequency, φ c is the phase of
the carrier, and h low is the time response of the low pass filter. The signal is then
scaled to the user-defined peak-to-peak amplitude.
The filter type is described according to filter components in the Electrical Filters
library:
• rectangle
• cosine roll off
Figure 1 Electrical phase demodulator block diagram
1746
ELECTRICAL FREQUENCY DEMODULATOR
Electrical Frequency Demodulator
Frequency demodulator based on a frequency discriminator.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value
Peak to peak amplitude 1 ]-INF,+INF[
Peak to peak output signal
Low Pass Filter

value

Internal filter type Squared Cosine
Roll Off
1747
ELECTRICAL FREQUENCY DEMODULATOR
Simulation

This component implements an analog demodulator for frequency-modulated
signals. The output signal is demodulated using a frequency discriminator according
to:
d
v d ( t ) = ----- v in ( t )
dt
v out ( t ) = [ v d ( t ) cos ( 2πf c t + φ c ) ]∗ h low ( t ).

where v in is the input electrical signal, f c is the carrier frequency, φ c is the phase of
the
carrier, and h low is the time response of the low pass filter. The signal is then scaled
to the user-defined peak-to-peak amplitude.
The filter type is described according to filter components in the Electric Filters library:
• rectangle
• cosine roll off
Figure 1 Electrical frequency demodulator block diagram
1748
QUADRATURE DEMODULATOR
Quadrature Demodulator
A coherent amplitude demodulator for quadrature components (I and Q).
Ports

Output-I Output Electrical
Output-Q Output Electrical
Parameters
Main

value
Gain 1 ]-INF,+INF[
Low Pass Filter

value

Squared Cosine
Roll Off
1749
QUADRATURE DEMODULATOR
Simulation

This component implements an analog demodulator using a carrier generator for Q
and I quadrature components. The output signal is demodulated according to:
v I ( t ) = [ Gv in ( t ) cos ( 2πf c t + φ c ) ]∗ h low ( t )
v Q ( t ) = [ – G v in ( t ) sin ( 2πf c t + φ c ) ]∗ h low ( t )

where v in is the input electrical signal, G is the parameter gain, f c is the carrier
frequency,
φ c is the phase of the carrier, and h low is the time response of the low pass filter.
The filter type is described according to filter components in the Electric Filters library:
• rectangle
• cosine roll off
Figure 1 Quadrature demodulator block diagram
1750
OFDM DEMODULATOR
OFDM Demodulator
This component demodulates the OFDM signal into a digital signal.
Ports

Input - I Input Electrical
Input - Q Input Electrical
Output - I 1 Output M-ary
Output - Q 1 Output M-ary
Parameters
Main

value range
Reference bit rate Bit rate Bits/s, MBits/s, [1,1e12]
GBits/s
Bit rate of the transmitted signal
Delay compensation 0 ns, ms, s ]-INF,+INF[
Delay to apply to the input signal
Number of output ports 1 - [1,1000]

Define the number of Users for the OFDM demodulator
Number of subcarriers 4 - [1,100e6]
Number of subcarriers used in the transmission by each user
User defined position False - True, False
If True each user can define the position of its initial subcarrier
Position array 30 - [0,100e6]

Array containing the initial subcarrier positions for each user
1751
OFDM DEMODULATOR

value range
Number of FFT points 64 - [1,100e6]
Number of points used in the FFT
Symmetric spectrum False - True, False

Defines if the input vector to the IFFT is constrained to have
Hermetian symmetry
Number of prefix points 0 - [0,100e6]
Defines the number of points used in the guard period
Simulation

value units range

enabled
Random numbers

value range
Graphs

The OFDM [1] DeModulator basically does the reverse operation of the OFDM
Modulator, the guard period is removed. The FFT of each OFDM symbol is then taken
to find the original transmitted spectrum. The phase angle of each transmission
carrier is then evaluated and converted back to the data word by demodulating the
received phase.
1752
OFDM DEMODULATOR
The reference bit rate parameter refers to the original bit rate of the digital signal
transmitted, while the delay compensation parameter is used to synchronize the
received signal.
References
204, Feb 2009.
1753
OFDM DEMODULATOR
Notes:
1754
OFDM DEMODULATOR MEASURED
OFDM Demodulator Measured
This component demodulates the OFDM signal into a digital signal.
Ports

Modes
Input - I Input Electrical -
Input - Q Input Electrical -
Output - I 1 Output M-Ary -
Output - Q 1 Output M-Ary -
Parameters
Main
Reference bit rate Bit rate Bits/s Bits/s, MBits/s, [ 0, 1e+012 ]
GBits/s
Bit rate of the transmitted signal
Delay compensation 0 s s, ms, ns [ -1e+100,

1e+100 ]
Delay to apply to the input signal
Subcarrier index 64 x 1 - - -
Table of the subcarrier index data
Subcarrier index file name Subcarriers.dat - - -
File name of the subcarrier index data
Symmetric spectrum False - - [True, False]
Defines if the input vector to the IFFT is

constrained to have Hermetian
symmetry
1755
Number of prefix points 0 - - [ 0, 1e+008 ]
Defines the number of points used in the

guard period
Equalizer
Equalizer False - - [True, False]
Defines whether or not the equalizer is

enabled
Equalizer coefficients 64 x 2 - - -
Table of the equalizer coefficients data
Equalizer coefficients file name Equalizer.dat - - -
File name of the equalizer coefficients

data
Simulation
Enabled True - - [True, False]

Random numbers
Generate random seed True - - [True, False]

defined and unique
Random seed index 0 - - [ 0, 4999 ]
User-defined random seed index
1756
Graphs

Results

Number of FFT points -
Number of subcarriers -
The OFDM Demodulator Measured [1] basically does the reverse operation of the
OFDM Modulator Measured.
Figure 1 OFDM DeModulator Measured diagram
The reference bit rate parameter refers to the original bit rate of the digital signal
transmitted, while the delay compensation parameter is used to synchronize the
received signal.
The format of the file for loaded subcarrier index data is the same as defined in OFDM
Modulator Measured.
After the FFT, a single tap equalizer (defined by the parameter “Equalizer
coefficients”) can be applied to the subcarriers data to compensate for channel
distortions. If the Equalizer coefficients data is defined by uploading a file, the format
of the file must be similar to the following (the first column stands for the real part and
the second column stands for the imaginary part):
1757
Figure 2 Example of a file loaded for the equalizer data
References
204, Feb 2009.
1758
BURST DEMODULATOR
Burst Demodulator
This component demodulates bursts from an input signal according to a control

signal.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Threshold 0.5 ]-INF, +INF[
Control signal threshold value
Simulation

Enabled True True, False
This component demodulates bursts from an input signal, and the locations of the
bursts are defined by the control signal.
Figure 1 is an example showing how to connect the Burst Demodulator.
1759
BURST DEMODULATOR
Figure 1 Burst demodulator - Layout
Figure 2 Burst demodulator - Principle
Signal to
Burst
Modulator
Control
Signal
After Burst
Modulator
After Burst
Demodulator
The basic principle of the Burst demodulator is illustrated in Figure 2. As we can see,
whenever the control signal is above the threshold level, the Burst demodulator will
demodulate the burst into output signal.
1760
BURST DEMODULATOR
Receivers
Decoders
• PAM Sequence Decoder

• QAM Sequence Decoder
• PSK Sequence Decoder
• DPSK Sequence Decoder
• PPM Sequence Decoder
• DPIM Sequence Decoder
• 4B5B Sequence Decoder
• NRZI Sequence Decoder
• AMI Sequence Decoder
• Manchester Sequence Decoder
• 4B3T Sequence Decoder
• 8B10B Sequence Decoder
1761
BURST DEMODULATOR
Notes:
1762
PAM SEQUENCE DECODER
PAM Sequence Decoder
Decodes a PAM M-ary symbol sequence to a binary signal.
Ports

PAM sequence Input M-ary
Parameters
Main

Simulation

value range

enabled
1763
source symbols. The amplitude values are taken from the set of amplitudes [1]:
a i = ( 2i – 1 – M ), i = 1, 2, ...M
M is the number of possible sequence of binary digits, calculated according
h
to: M = 2
where h is the number of bits per symbol. φ . The PAM decoder will calculate the
value of i for each amplitude of the signal k :
i = ( a k + 1 + M ) ⁄ 2 and convert the values of i to the equivalent binary sequence.
If bits per symbol ( h ) equals 2, M equals 4, the values of a and i will be:
Bit sequence i ai
00 1 -3
01 2 -1
10 3 1
11 4 3
If bits per symbol ( h ) equals 3, M equals 8, the values of a and i will be:
Bit sequence i ai
000 1 -7
001 2 -5
010 3 -3
011 4 -1
100 5 1
101 6 3
110 7 5
111 8 7
1764
sequences will differ by only one digit. In the case where bits per symbol ( h ) equals
3, M equals 8, with Gray code, the values of a will be:
Bit sequence ai
000 -7
001 -5
101 -3
100 -1
110 1
111 3
011 5
010 7
References
1765
Notes:
1766
QAM SEQUENCE DECODER
QAM Sequence Decoder
Decodes two parallel QAM M-ary symbol sequences to a binary signal.
Ports

Input - I Input M-ary
Input - Q Input M-ary
Parameters
Main

Simulation

value range

enabled
1767
In the QAM sequence decoder, the bit sequence is split into two parallel
subsequences, each can be transmitted in two quadrature carriers when building a
QAM modulator. This is achieved by using a serial to parallel converter.
source symbols.
For each output port, the value of the amplitude takes value from the set of
amplitudes [1]
a 1 = ( 2i – 1 – M ), i = 1, 2, ..., M
h⁄2
M = 2
square of M .
This means:

QAM.

256-QAM.
The QAM decoder calculates the value of i for the amplitude of each signal input k :
i = ( ak + 1 + M ) ⁄ 2
and convert the values of i to the equivalent binary sequence.
If bits per symbol ( h ) equals 4, we have a 16-QAM that requires 2 consecutive bits
from the input sequence for each subsequence:

i
0000 00 / 1 -3 00 / 1 -3
0001 00 / 1 -3 01 / 2 -1
0010 00 / 1 -3 10 / 3 1
0011 00 / 1 -3 11 / 4 3
0100 01 / 2 -1 00 / 1 -3
0101 01 / 2 -1 01 / 2 -1
0110 01 / 2 -1 10 / 3 1
0111 01 / 2 -1 11 / 4 3
1768

i
1000 10 / 3 1 00 / 1 -3
1001 10 / 3 1 01 / 2 -1
1010 10 / 3 1 10 / 3 1
1011 10 / 3 1 11 / 4 3
1100 11 / 4 3 00 / 1 -3
1101 11 / 4 3 01 / 2 -1
1110 11 / 4 3 10 / 3 1
1111 11 / 4 3 11 / 4 3
Using Gray code, adjacent signal amplitudes that correspond to binary sequences will
1769
References
1770
PSK SEQUENCE DECODER
PSK Sequence Decoder
Ports

Parameters
Main

Simulation

value range
enabled
1771
2π
ϕ i = ⎛ ------ ( i – 1 ) + φ⎞ , i = 1, 2, ...M
⎝M ⎠
h
M = 2
and the quadrature channel will have amplitudes according to:
I i = cos ( ϕ i ), i = 1, 2, ...M
Q i = sin ( ϕ i ), i = 1, 2, ...M
The PSK decoder will calculate the value of i for the phase of each signal input k :
ϕ k = arc tan ( Q k ⁄ I k )
( ϕ k – ϕ )M
i = ------------------------- + 1
2π
and convert the values of i to the equivalent binary sequence.
Assuming ϕ = 0 , if bits per symbol ( h ) equals 2, and M = 4 , then the values for
I and Q will be:
Bit sequence I Q
00 1 0
01 0 1
10 -1 0
11 0 -1
1772
Assuming ϕ = 0 , if bits per symbol ( h ) equals 3, and M = 8 , then the values for
I and Q will be
Bit sequence I Q
000 1 0
001
------2- ------2-
2 2
010 0 1
011
2
– ------- ------2-
2 2
100 -1 0
101
2 2
– ------- – -------
2 2
110 0 -1
111
------2- 2
– -------
2 2
1773
References
1774
DPSK SEQUENCE DECODER
DPSK Sequence Decoder
Decodes two parallel DPSK M-ary symbol sequences to binary signals.
Ports

Parameters
Main

Simulation

value range
enabled
1775
2π
ϕ ki = ϕ k – 1 + ⎛ ------ ( i – 1 ) + φ⎞ , i = 1, 2, ...M
⎝M ⎠
where ϕ ki is the phase value for the current symbol, and ϕ k – 1 is phase value for
the previous symbol.
M is the number of possible sequence of binary digits, calculated according to:

h
M = 2
I ki = cos ( ϕ ki ), i = 1, 2, ...M
Q ki = sin ( ϕ ki ), i = 1, 2, ...M
The DPSK decoder will calculate the value of i from the phase difference between
consecutive signals k and k – 1 :
ϕ k = arc tan ( Q k ⁄ I k )
( ϕ k – ϕ k – 1 – φ )M
i = ------------------------------------------- + 1
2π
Q will be:
k Bit sequence I Q
0 00 1 0
1 01 0 1
2 10 -1 0
3 11 0 -1
1776

Q will be:
k Bit sequence I Q
0 000 1 0
1 001
------2- ------2-
2 2
2 010 0 1
3 011
2
– ------- ------2-
2 2
4 100 -1 0
5 101
2 2
– ------- – -------
2 2
6 110 0 -1
7 111
------2- 2
– -------
2 2
1777
References
1778
PPM SEQUENCE DECODER
PPM Sequence Decoder
Decodes a pulse position modulation (PPM) symbol sequence to a binary signal.
Ports

PPM Sequence Input Binary
Parameters
Main

Simulation

The decoder reads the sequence of symbols from the input port and converts them
back into binary code [1].
For instance, given the symbol sequence 0000 0100 0001 0000 0000 0010 0000
0001 1000 0000, with 3 bits per symbol, the original bit sequence is
Symbols Position Bit sequence

0000 0100 5 101
0001 0000 3 011
1779
PPM SEQUENCE DECODER

0000 0010 6 110
0000 0001 7 111
1000 0000 0 000
References
1780
DPIM SEQUENCE DECODER
DPIM Sequence Decoder
Decodes a digital pulse interval modulation (DPIM) symbol sequence to a binary

signal.
Ports

DPIM Sequence Input Binary
Parameters
Main

Simulation

The decoder reads the sequence of symbols from the input port and converts them
back into binary code [1].
For instance, given the symbol sequence 10 100 1000 10000, with 2 bits per symbol,
the original bit sequence is

10 1 00
1781
DPIM SEQUENCE DECODER

100 2 01
1000 3 10
10000 4 11
If the symbol sequence is 1000 10 100 100 100000, with 3 bits per symbol, the original
bit sequence is

1000 3 010
10 1 000
100 4 001
100 2 001
100000 5 100
References
1782
4B5B SEQUENCE DECODER
4B5B Sequence Decoder
Decodes a 4B/5B symbol sequence to a binary signal.
Ports

4B5B Sequence Input Binary
Parameters
Simulation

The decoder reads the sequence of 4B/5B symbols from the input port and converts
them back into binary code [1]. The decoder reads the 5-Bit symbols, matches them
to corresponding 4-Bit symbols, and returns the original signal.
References
1783
Notes:
1784
NRZI SEQUENCE DECODER
NRZI Sequence Decoder
Decodes a non-return to zero inverted (NRZI) symbol sequence to a binary signal.
Ports

NRZI Sequence Input Binary
Parameters
Simulation

The decoder reads the sequence of NRZI symbols from the input port and converts
them back into binary code [1]. If 10111011100 is an NRZI bit sequence, then the
original signal is 11100110010.
References
1785
NRZI SEQUENCE DECODER
1786
AMI SEQUENCE DECODER
AMI Sequence Decoder
Decodes an alternate mark inversion (AMI) symbol sequence to a binary signal.
Ports

AMI Sequence Input Binary
Parameters
Main

Encoding type Bipolar - Bipolar, B8ZS,
B6ZS, B3ZS,
HDB3
Simulation

Different decoding types are available [1] [2]:
Bipolar
Converts an M-ary AMI sequence of +’s, 0’s and –‘s into 1’s and 0’s, where a + or a –
represent a 1, and a 0 represents 0.
Bipolar AMI sequence Sequence

+00-+-+0- 100111101
1787
Bipolar AMI sequence Sequence

0+-00+-+- 011001111
B8ZS
Searches for the following patters: 000-+0+- or 000+-0-+, and replaces them with 0’s.
B8ZS AMI sequence Bipolar AMI sequence Sequence

+0-000-+0+-+-0 +0-00000000+-0 10100000000110
+000+-0-+-+0-+ +00000000-+0-+ 10000000011011
B6ZS
This mode is the exact same as the B8ZS, except it searches for 0-+0+- and 0+-0-+.
B6ZS AMI sequence Bipolar AMI sequence Sequence

+0-0-+0+-+-0 +0-000000+-0 101000000110
+0+-0-+-+0-+ +000000-+0-+ 100000011011
B3ZS
This mode scans for the following patterns: 00-, 00+, -0-, +0+, and replaces each one
with three zeros, depending on the preceding bit and on the number of non-zero bits
there were since the last substitution.
B3ZS AMI Sequence Sequence

+0-00-+-0+00+ 1010001101000
+0-+-0-+-+0+ 101100011000
HDB3
This mode is the exact same as the B3ZS, except the patters are: 000-, 000+, +00+,
-00-.
HDB3 AMI Sequence Sequence

+0-000-+-0+000+ 101000011010000
+0-+-00-+-+00+ 10110000110000
1788
References
[1] W. Stallings, Data and Computer Communications, Prentice Hall, 2006.
1789
Notes:
1790
MANCHESTER SEQUENCE DECODER
Manchester Sequence Decoder
Decodes a Manchester symbol sequence to a binary signal.
Ports

Manchester sequence Input Binary
Parameters
Simulation

The component decodes a sequence by generating a 1 symbol for a 1->0 transition
and a 0 symbol for a 0->1 transition The bandwidth of the decoded signal is half the
original bandwidth [1]..
Sequence Manchester sequence

1001100110011001 10101010
1010100101011001 11100010
References
1791
MANCHESTER SEQUENCE DECODER
Notes:
1792
4B3T SEQUENCE DECODER
4B3T Sequence Decoder
Decodes a 4B3T symbol sequence to a binary signal.
Ports

4B3T sequence Input Binary
Parameters
Simulation

This mapping from 4 bits to 3 ternary states is given in a table known as Modified
Monitoring State 43 (MMS43) [1] [2]. Because the each block of three ternary symbols
is uniquely associated with one block of four bits, the decoder can directly map the
ternary symbol back to information bits by table lookup.
References
[1] D. J. Morris, Pulse Code Formats for Fiber Optical Data Communication, CRC, 1983.
1793
4B3T SEQUENCE DECODER
Notes:
1794
8B10B Sequence Decoder
Decodes a 8B10B symbol sequence to a binary signal.
Ports

8B10B sequence Input Binary
Parameters
Simulation

Described in [1] in detail, 8B10B coding decomposes each 8-bits into two blocks of 5
bits and 3 bits, converting them to 6-bit and 4-bit equivalents, respectively. Each
consecutive blocks exhibit a total average of zero (DC-balanced).
References
[1] A. X. Widmer, P. A. Franaszek, “A DC-Balanced, Partitioned-Block, 8B/10B Transmission Code”,
IBM Journal of Research and Development, Vol 27, No 5, pp 440, 1983.
1795
Notes:
1796
Receivers
Detectors
• M-Ary Threshold Detector
1797
Notes:
1798
M-ARY THRESHOLD DETECTOR
M-Ary Threshold Detector
Decodes multilevel pulses to a M-ary signal output.
Ports

Output Output M-ary
Parameters
Main

instant calculation
GBits/s
Threshold amplitudes -5, -3.5, -1.5, 0 a.u. ]-INF,+INF[
List of threshold levels for decision 1.5, 3.5, 5

Output amplitudes -7, -5, -3, -1, 1, 3, a.u. ]-INF,+INF[

5, 7
List of multilevel symbols for the output
M-ary sequence
1799
M-ARY THRESHOLD DETECTOR
Simulation

value range
Random numbers

value range
This model compares the electrical signal at a user-defined decision instant with a list
of threshold levels. The comparison generates an index used to generate the output
amplitude.
For example, if the signal input has a value of -3.3, the output level will be -3, since -
3.3 is between -3.5 and -1.5.
The delay compensation parameter allows the user to compensate delay occurred
during the signal propagation. The number of output levels must be greater than the
number of threshold levels.
By selecting ‘parameter enable’ to false, the module will generate the levels at the
decision instant without comparison and decision based on the output levels. This
means the user can access the values at decision instant before the quantization.
1800
Visualizer Library
Optical
• Optical Spectrum Analyzer (OSA)
• Optical Time Domain Visualizer (OTDV)
• Optical Power Meter
• Polarization Meter
• Polarization Analyzer
• WDM Analyzer (WDMA)
• Dual Port WDM Analyzer (DPWDMA)
• Spatial Visualizer
• Encircled Flux Analyzer
1801
Notes:
1802
OPTICAL SPECTRUM ANALYZER (OSA)
Optical Spectrum Analyzer (OSA)
This visualizer allows the user to calculate and display optical signals in the frequency
domain. It can display the signal intensity, power spectral density, phase, group delay
and dispersion for polarizations X and Y.
Ports

Parameters
Resolution bandwidth

value range
Resolution bandwidth Off — On, Off
Determines whether or not the resolution filter is enabled
Filter type Rectangle — Rectangle,

Gaussian,
Determines the type of resolution filter Butterworth
Bandwidth 0.01 nm [0, 1e+100]
Resolution filter bandwidth
Graphs

value range
Power unit dBm — dBm, W
Power unit for the vertical axis
Minimum value –100 dBm [-1e+100,

1e+100]
Minimum value for power when using units in dBm
1803

value range
Scale factor 0 dB [-1e+100,
1e+100]
Vertical axis scale factor
Power spectral density False — True, False
Determines whether or not to calculate the power spectral density for

the vertical axis
Frequency unit m — m, Hz
Frequency unit for the horizontal axis
Calculate phase False — True, False
Determines whether or not to calculate the phase graphs
Unwrap phase True — True, False
Determines whether or not to remove the phase discontinuity
Calculate group delay False — True, False
Determines whether or not to calculate group delay graphs
Calculate dispersion False — True, False
Determines whether or not to calculate dispersion graphs
Limit number of points True — True, False
Determines if you can enter the maximum number of points to display
Max. number of points 128000 — [100, 1e+008]
Maximum number of points displayed per graph
Invert colors False — True, False
Determines whether or not to invert the colors of the display
Simulation

value range
1804
Graphs
Sampled signals

Sampled signal spectrum Wavelength (m) Power (dBm)
Sampled signal spectrum X Wavelength (m) Power (dBm)
Sampled signal spectrum Y Wavelength (m) Power (dBm)
Sampled signal phase X Wavelength (m) Phase (rad)
Sampled signal phase Y Wavelength (m) Phase (rad)
Sampled signal group delay X Wavelength (m) Delay (s)
Sampled signal group delay Y Wavelength (m) Delay (s)
Sampled signal dispersion X Wavelength (m) Dispersion (ps/nm)
Sampled signal dispersion Y Wavelength (m) Dispersion (ps/nm)
Parameterized signals

Parameterized signal spectrum Wavelength (m) Power (dBm)
Parameterized signal spectrum X Wavelength (m) Power (dBm)
Parameterized signal spectrum Y Wavelength (m) Power (dBm)
Noise bins

Noise bins signal spectrum Wavelength (m) Power (dBm)
Noise bins signal spectrum X Wavelength (m) Power (dBm)
Noise bins signal spectrum Y Wavelength (m) Power (dBm)
1805
After you run a simulation, the visualizers in the project generate graphs and results
based on the signal input. You can access the graphs and results from the Project
Browser (see Figure 1), from the Component Viewer, or by double-clicking a
visualizer in the Main Layout.
Figure 1 Project browser
Access the Optical Spectrum Analyzer (OSA) parameters, graphs, and results from
the simulation (see Figure 2).
1806
Figure 2 OSA display
Use the signal index to select the signal to display from the signal buffer.
Use the tabs on the left side of the graph to select the representation that you want to
view (see Figure 3).
• Signal
• Noise
• Signal + Noise
• All
Figure 3 Multiple signal types display
Use the tabs at the bottom of the graph to access the optical signal polarization (see
Figure 4).
• Power: Total power
1807
• Power X: Power from polarization X

• Power Y: Power from polarization Y
Figure 4 Signal polarization display
1808
OPTICAL TIME DOMAIN VISUALIZER (OTDV)
Optical Time Domain Visualizer (OTDV)
This visualizer allows the user to calculate and display optical signals in the time
domain. It can display the signal intensity, frequency, phase and alpha parameter for
polarizations X and Y. It also provides enhanced features to characterize ultra short
pulses such as autocorrelation and Frequency Resolved Optical Gating (FROG).
Ports

Parameters
Graphs

value range
Plot individual mode False - - True, False
Determines whether or not to plot a individual

mode
Individual mode number 0 - - [0, 1e+008]

The individual mode number
Time unit s - - s, bits
Time unit for the horizontal axis
Reference bit rate Bit rate Bits/s Bits/s [0, 1e+012]
Reference bit rate to use when the time unit is Bit MBits/s
period
GBits/s
Retracing False - - True, False
Time window 1/(Bit rate) s - ]0, +INF[
Defines the retracing time window
Autocorrelation Off - - Off, Field,

Intensity
Determines the type of calculation for the
autocorrelation graphs
1809

value range
Calculate phase and chirp False - - True, False
Determines whether or not to calculate phase and

chirp graphs
Phase unit deg - - deg, rad
Phase unit for the vertical axis
Unwrap phase True - - True, False
Determines whether or not to remove the phase

discontinuity
Calculate alpha parameter False - - True, False
Determines whether or not to calculate alpha

parameter graphs
Power unit W - - W, dBm
Minimum value –100 dBm - [-1e+100,

1e+100]
Limit number of points True - - True, False
Determines if you can enter the maximum number

of points to display
Max. number of points 128,000 - - [100, 1e+008]
Invert colors False - - True, False
Determines whether or not to invert the colors of

the display
Enable color grade False - - True, False

Determines whether or not to color grade the
displayed graphs
Number of color bins 500 - - [10, 5000]
Number of vertical and horizontal bins of the

display
Color grade palette Default - - Default,

Agilent, Gray,
Determines the color grade palette
Black, Red,
Green,Blue,
Agilent red,
Agilent blue,
Agilent green,
Agilent yellow
1810
Downsampling
Name and description Default Default unit Default unit Value

value range

or if it will be user-defined
Sample rate 5*(Sample rate) THz Hz, GHz, THz, [1, 1e+100]
nm
Bandwidth of the internal filter
Enhanced
Name and description Default value Default unit Value

range
Calculate FROG False - True, False
Determines whether or not to calculate the Frequency Resolved

Optical Gating (FROG) graph
FROG polarization X - X, Y
Determines the signal polarization for the FROG analysis
Add noise to FROG signal True - True, False
Determines whether or not to convert and add noise bins to the

signal
FROG frequency range Sample rate Hz [0, 1e100]
Frequency range for the vertical axis
FROG delay range Time window / 2 s [0, 1e100]

Delay range for the horizontal axis
Number of FROG delay points 128 - True, False
Number of points for the horizontal axis
Simulation

value range
Signal access option Index - Index, Average
1811
Random numbers

value range

Graphs
Signal

Signal power Time (s) Power (W)
Signal power X Time (s) Power (W)
Signal power Y Time (s) Power (W)
Signal phase X Time (s) Phase (deg)
Signal phase Y Time (s) Phase (deg)
Signal chirp X Time (s) Frequency (Hz)
Signal chirp Y Time (s) Frequency (Hz)
Signal autocorrelation X Delay (s) Intensity (a.u.)
Signal autocorrelation Y Delay (s) Intensity (a.u.)
Signal alpha parameter X Time (s) Alpha (ratio)
Signal alpha parameter Y Time (s) Alpha (ratio)
Noise

Noise power Time (s) Power (W)
Noise power X Time (s) Power (W)
Noise power Y Time (s) Power (W)
Noise phase X Time (s) Phase (deg)
Noise phase Y Time (s) Phase (deg)
Noise chirp X Time (s) Frequency (Hz)
Noise chirp Y Time (s) Frequency (Hz)
1812

Noise autocorrelation X Delay (s) Intensity (a.u.)
Noise autocorrelation Y Delay (s) Intensity (a.u.)
Noise alpha parameter X Time (s) Alpha (ratio)
Noise alpha parameter Y Time (s) Alpha (ratio)
Signal + Noise

Signal + Noise power Time (s) Power (W)
Signal + Noise power X Time (s) Power (W)
Signal + Noise power Y Time (s) Power (W)
Signal + Noise phase X Time (s) Phase (deg)
Signal + Noise phase Y Time (s) Phase (deg)
Signal + Noise chirp X Time (s) Frequency (Hz)
Signal + Noise chirp Y Time (s) Frequency (Hz)
Signal + Noise autocorrelation X Delay (s) Intensity (a.u.)
Signal + Noise autocorrelation Y Delay (s) Intensity (a.u.)
Signal + Noise alpha parameter X Time (s) Alpha (ratio)
Signal + Noise alpha parameter Y Time (s) Alpha (ratio)
3D Graphs

FROG 3D Graph Delay (ns) Frequency (THz) Intensity (a.u.)
1813
The Optical Time Domain Visualizer (OTDV) is an Oscilloscope for optical signals.
Access the OTDV parameters, graphs, and results from the simulation (see Figure 2).
1814
Figure 2 OTDV display.
• Signal
• Noise
• Signal + Noise
• All
1815
Use the tabs at the bottom of the graph to access the optical signal polarization (see
Figure 4).
• Power: Total power
• Power X: Power from polarization X
• Power Y: Power from polarization Y
Figure 4 Signal polarization display
When you select Power X or Power Y, you can access the signal phase and chirp by
selecting the Analysis option.
1816
OPTICAL POWER METER
Optical Power Meter
This visualizer allows the user to calculate and display the average power of optical
signals. It can also calculate the power for polarizations X and Y.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
1e+100]
Simulation

value range
1817
OPTICAL POWER METER
Results

Total power dBm
Total power W
Total power X dBm
Total power X W
Total power Y dBm
Total power Y W
Signal power dBm
Signal power W
Signal power X dBm
Signal power X W
Signal power Y dBm
Signal power Y W
Sampled signal power dBm
Sampled signal power W
Sampled signal power X dBm
Sampled signal power X W
Sampled signal power Y dBm
Sampled signal power Y W
Parameterized signal power dBm
Parameterized signal power W
Parameterized signal power X dBm
Parameterized signal power X dBm
Parameterized signal power Y W
Parameterized signal power Y W
Noise power dBm
Noise power W
Noise power X dBm
Noise power X W
Noise power Y dBm
1818
OPTICAL POWER METER

Noise power Y W
Access the Optical Power Meter (OPM) parameters, graphs, and results from the
simulation (see Figure 2).
1819
OPTICAL POWER METER
Figure 2 OPM display
You can select the total signal power to display for each signal type. When you select
the signal power, the result is the sum of the sampled and parameterized signals.
1820
POLARIZATION METER
Polarization Meter
This visualizer allows the user to calculate the average polarization state of the optical
signal, including the degree of polarization (DOP), differential group delay (DGD),
Stokes parameters, azimuth and ellipticity.
Ports

Parameters
Main
Name and description Default Default Value range

value unit
Bandwidth 100 Hz, GHz, [0, 1e100]

THz, nm
Minimum value –100 dBm [-1e+100, 1e100]

DGD reference Polarization X - Polarization X,

Polarization Y
The reference used to calculate the delay between polarizations X
and Y
Downsampling
Name and description Default Default unit Default unit Value

value range
Sample rate 5*(Sample rate) THz Hz, GHz, THz, [1, 1e+100]
nm
Bandwidth of the internal filter
1821
POLARIZATION METER
Simulation

value range
Noise
Convert noise bins True [True, False]
Random Numbers

defined and unique

generation
Results

S0 dBm
S0 W
S1 dBm
S1 W
S2 dBm
S2 W
S3 dBm
S3 W
s1 ratio
s2 ratio
s3 ratio
1822
POLARIZATION METER

DOP %
DGD s
Azimuth deg
Ellipticity deg
Sampled signal power X W
Sampled Signal S0 dBm
Sampled Signal S0 W
Sampled Signal S1 W
Sampled Signal S2 W
Sampled Signal S3 W
Sampled Signal s1 ratio
Sampled Signal DOP %
Sampled Signal DGD s
Sampled Signal Azimuth deg
Sampled Signal Ellipticity deg
Parameterized Signal S0 dBm
Parameterized Signal S0 W
Parameterized Signal s1 ratio
1823
POLARIZATION METER

Parameterized Signal DOP %
Parameterized Signal DGD s
Parameterized Signal Azimuth deg
Parameterized Signal Ellipticity deg
Figure 1 Project browser displaying the Polarization Meter
1824
POLARIZATION METER
Use the Polarization Meter display to access the key results from the simulation (see
Figure 2).
Figure 2 Polarization Meter display
By default, the total signal power is displayed in the visualizer (the sum of the sampled
and parameterized signals). The polarization properties are measured at the user
defined frequency and bandwidth.
The differential group delay is measured by the correlation between polarization

states and its signal depends on the parameter DGD reference.
1825
POLARIZATION METER
Notes:
1826
POLARIZATION ANALYZER
Polarization Analyzer
This visualizer allows the user to calculate and display different properties of the
signal polarization, including the polarization ellipse and the Poincaré sphere.
Ports

Modes
Noise bins,
Parameterized
signals
Parameters
Main
Lower frequency limit 185 THz Hz, THz, nm [30, 300000]
Defines the lower limit of the calculation

range
Upper frequency limit 200 THz Hz, THz, nm [30, 300000]
Defines the upper limit of the calculation

range
Reference frequency 193.1 THz Hz, THz, nm [30, 300000]
Defines the reference, or marker,

frequency used to calculate the results
Graphs
Minimum value -100 dBm [-1e+100,
1e+100]
Minimum value for power when
displaying S0
1827
Frequency unit Hz [m, Hz]
Frequency unit for the graphs
Limit number of points True True, False
Determines if the user can enter the

maximum number of points
Max. number of points 128000 [100, 1e+008]
Maximum number of points displayed

per graph
Invert colors False True, False
Determines whether or not to invert the

colors of the display
Export
Save Stokes parameters False [True, False]
Defines whether to export the Stokes

parameters to a file
MATLAB format False [True, False]
Defines whether to use MATLAB format

for the file
Filename Sphere.dat
Export data destination file name
Simulation
Determines whether the component is

enabled
Dynamic update True [True, False]
Noise
Convert noise bins True [True, False]

1828
Random Numbers

defined and unique

generation
Graphs

Sampled signal S0 Wavelength (m) Power (dBm)
Sampled signal s1 Wavelength (m) s1 (ratio)
Sampled signal azimuth Wavelength (m) Phase (deg)
Sampled signal ellipticity Wavelength (m) Phase (deg)
Parameterized signal S0 Wavelength (m) Power (deg)
Parameterized signal s1 Wavelength (m) s1 (ratio)
Parameterized signal azimuth Wavelength (m) Phase (deg)
Parameterized signal ellipticity Wavelength (m) Phase (deg)
Sampled signal elliptical display Polarization X Polarization Y
Parameterized signal elliptical Polarization X Polarization Y

display
Results

Sampled signal frequency (Hz)
Sampled signal wavelength (nm)
Sampled signal S0 (dBm)
Sampled signal s1 (ratio)
1829

Sampled signal azimuth (deg)
Sampled signal ellipticity (deg)
Parameterized signal frequency (Hz)
Parameterized signal wavelength (nm)
Parameterized signal S0 (dBm)
Parameterized signal s1 (ratio)
Parameterized signal azimuth (deg)
Parameterized signal ellipticity (deg)
This visualizer is a Polarization Analyzer [1]. It calculates the Stokes and Jones
parameters in a range defined by the parameters Lower limit calculation range and
Upper limit calculation range.
Additionally, the user can specify a Reference frequency that makes the analyzer
display the polarization elliptical display and the Stokes parameters S0, s1, s2 and s3,
and the signal azimuth and ellipticity.
The user can access the graphs by double-clicking directly on the visualizer icon
(Figure 1), from the Component Viewer, or from the project browser (Figure 2).
1830
Figure 1 Polarization analyzer
1831
The first two tabs are the Stokes parameters and polarization state versus frequency
graphs (Figure 3 and Figure 4).
1832
Figure 3 Stokes graphs
Figure 4 Polarization state graph
The polarization ellipse displays the polarization state at the reference frequency
(Figure 5).
1833
Figure 5 Elliptical display at the reference frequency
The Poincaré sphere is calculated using the Stokes parameters. The color palette
represents the power calculated from S0. The marker allows the user to identify the
Stokes parameters at the reference frequency (Figure 1).
References
[1] “Polarization Measurements of Signals and Components”, Product Note 8509-1, Agilent
Technologies.
1834
WDM ANALYZER (WDMA)
WDM Analyzer (WDMA)
This visualizer automatically detects, calculates and displays the optical power, noise,
OSNR, frequency and wavelength for each WDM channel at the visualizer input.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Lower frequency limit 185 Hz, THz, and [30,+INF[
nm
Defines the lower frequency limit for the calculation bandwidth
Upper frequency limit 200 Hz, THz, and [30,+INF[

nm
Defines the upper frequency limit for the calculation bandwidth
Resolution bandwidth 0.1 nm [0,+INF[

Minimum value –100 dBm ]-INF,+INF[
Extended scan False True, False
Determines whether or not to scan for additional WDM channels
Max. number of additional channels 10 [1,100]

Defines the maximum number of additional channels
Precision 5 [1,20]
Number of decimal places used to compare two channel frequencies
Peak threshold 10 dB [0,100]
Peaks with amplitudes below this value, relative to the max power
peak, will not be included in the channel count
1835
WDM ANALYZER (WDMA)

value range
Peak excursion 15 dB [0,100]
This is the level the signal has to go up and down for a spectral
feature to be considered a peak, or a WDM channel.
Pit excursion 15 dB [0,100]
Maximum excursion from the lowest point between adjacent channels

(pit).
Interpolation

value range
Noise interpolation Auto — On, Off, Auto
Determines if the noise will be estimated by using the signal
Interpolation offset 0.5 nm [0,+INF[
Spacing between the signal maximum and the signal value used as
noise value
Graphs

value range
Frequency unit nm — nm, m, Hz, THz
Simulation

value range
1836
WDM ANALYZER (WDMA)
Graphs

Signal spectrum Wavelength (nm) Power (dBm)
Noise spectrum Wavelength (nm) Power (dBm)
Results
Signal

Min. signal power dBm
Min. signal power W
Frequency at min. signal power Hz
Wavelength at min. signal power nm
Max. signal power dBm
Max. signal power W
Frequency at max. signal power Hz
Wavelength at max. signal power nm
Total signal power dBm
Total signal power W
Ratio max/min signal power dB
Ratio max/min signal power —
Noise

Min. noise power dBm
Min. noise power W
Frequency at min. noise power Hz
Wavelength at min. noise power nm
Max. noise power dBm
Max. noise power W
Frequency at max. noise power Hz
Wavelength at max. noise power nm
1837
WDM ANALYZER (WDMA)

Total noise power dBm
Total noise power W
Ratio max/min noise power dB
Ratio max/min noise power —
OSNR

Min. OSNR dB
Frequency at min. OSNR Hz
Wavelength at min. OSNR nm
Max. OSNR dB
Frequency at max. OSNR Hz
Wavelength at max. OSNR nm
Ratio max/min OSNR dB
The WDMA estimates the signal and the noise power for each optical signal channel
based on the resolution bandwidth. Click the Analysis tab to view results such as
frequency, power, noise, and OSNR.(see Figure 2).
1838
WDM ANALYZER (WDMA)
1839
WDM ANALYZER (WDMA)
Figure 2 WDMA analysis tab
Click the Details tab to view the detailed analysis of the results, such as the minimum
and maximum values for the signals (see Figure 3).
Figure 3 WDMA details tab
1840
DUAL PORT WDM ANALYZER (DPWDMA)
Dual Port WDM Analyzer (DPWDMA)
This visualizer automatically detects, calculates and displays the optical power, noise,
OSNR, Gain, noise figure, frequency and wavelength for each WDM channel at the
visualizer inputs.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Lower frequency limit 185 Hz, THz, and [30,+INF[
nm
Defines the lower frequency limit for the calculation bandwidth
Upper frequency limit 200 Hz, THz, and [30,+INF[

nm
Defines the upper frequency limit for the calculation bandwidth
Resolution bandwidth 0.1 nm [0,+INF[
Minimum value –100 dBm ]-INF,+INF[
Extended scan False True, False

Determines whether or not to scan for additional WDM channels
Max. number of additional channels 10 [1,100]
Defines the maximum number of additional channels
Precision 5 [1,20]
Number of decimal places used to compare two channel frequencies
1841

value range
Peak threshold 10 dB [0,100]
Peaks with amplitudes below this value, relative to the max power
peak, will not be included in the channel count
Peak excursion 15 dB [0,100]
This is the level the signal has to go up and down for a spectral
feature to be considered a peak, or a WDM channel.
Pit excursion 15 dB [0,100]

Maximum excursion from the lowest point between adjacent channels
(pit).
Interpolation

value range
Noise interpolation Off — On, Off, Auto
Determines if the noise will be estimated by using the signal
Interpolation offset 0.1 nm [0,+INF[
Spacing between the signal maximum and the signal value used as
noise value
Graphs

value range
Frequency unit nm — nm, m, Hz, THz
Simulation

value range
1842
Graphs

Input signal spectrum Wavelength (nm) Power (dBm)
Input noise spectrum Wavelength (nm) Power (dBm)
Output signal spectrum Wavelength (nm) Power (dBm)
Output noise spectrum Wavelength (nm) Power (dBm)
Gain Wavelength (nm) Gain (dB)
Noise figure Wavelength (nm) NF (dB)
Results
Input signal

Input: Min. signal power dBm
Input: Min. signal power W
Input: Frequency at min. signal power Hz
Input: Wavelength at min. signal power nm
Input: Max. signal power dBm
Input: Max. signal power W
Input: Frequency at max. signal power Hz
Input: Wavelength at max. signal power nm
Input: Total signal power dBm
Input: Total signal power W
Input: Ratio max/min signal power dB
Input: Ratio max/min signal power —
Input noise

Input: Min. noise power dBm
Input: Min. noise power W
Input: Frequency at min. noise power Hz
Input: Wavelength at min. noise power nm
1843

Input: Max. noise power dBm
Input: Max. noise power W
Input: Frequency at max. noise power Hz
Input: Wavelength at max. noise power nm
Input: Total noise power dBm
Input: Total noise power W
Input: Ratio max/min noise power dB
Input: Ratio max/min noise power —
Input OSNR

Input: Min. OSNR dB
Input: Frequency at max. OSNR Hz
Input: Wavelength at max. OSNR nm
Input: Max. OSNR dB
Input: Frequency at min. OSNR Hz
Input: Wavelength at min. OSNR nm
Input: Ratio max/min OSNR dB
1844
Output signal

Output: Min. signal power dBm
Output: Min. signal power W
Output: Frequency at min. signal power Hz
Output: Wavelength at min. signal power nm
Output: Max. signal power dBm
Output: Max. signal power W
Output: Frequency at max. signal power Hz
Output: Wavelength at max. signal power nm
Output: Total signal power dBm
Output: Total signal power W
Output: Ratio max/min signal power dB
Output: Ratio max/min signal power —
Output noise

Output: Min. noise power dBm
Output: Min. noise power W
Output: Frequency at min. noise power Hz
Output: Wavelength at min. noise power nm
Output: Max. noise power dBm
Output: Max. noise power W
Output: Frequency at max. noise power Hz
Output: Wavelength at max. noise power nm
Output: Total noise power dBm
Output: Total noise power W
Output: Ratio max/min noise power dB
Output: Ratio max/min noise power —
1845
Output OSNR

Output: Min. OSNR dB
Output: Frequency at min. OSNR Hz
Output: Wavelength at min. OSNR nm
Output: Max. OSNR dB
Output: Frequency at max. OSNR Hz
Output: Wavelength at max. OSNR nm
Output: Ratio max/min OSNR dB
Details
Gain

Min. gain dB
Frequency at min. gain Hz
Wavelength at min. gain nm
Max. gain dB
Frequency at max. gain Hz
Wavelength at max. gain nm
Total gain dB
Ratio max/min gain dB
Noise figure

Min. noise figure dB
Frequency at min. noise figure Hz
Wavelength at min. noise figure nm
Max. noise figure dB
Frequency at max. noise figure Hz
Wavelength at max. noise figure nm
Ratio max/min noise figure dB
1846
The Dual Port WDM Analyzer (DPWDMA) estimates the signal and the noise power
for each optical signal channel based on the resolution bandwidth for each input port.
Click the Analysis tab to view the results (such as gain and noise figure) comparing
the signal from the two input ports (see Figure 2).
1847
Figure 2 DPWDMA analysis tab
Click the Details tab to view the detailed analysis for the results, such as the minimum
and maximum values for the signals (see Figure 3).
Figure 3 DPWDMA details tab
1848
DIFFERENTIAL MODE DELAY ANALYZER
Differential Mode Delay Analyzer
This component is a test set that measures the differential mode delay (DMD) of a
fiber. It encapsulates an optical pulse generator, a spatial connector and a plotter into
one tool, allowing for DMD and pulse width measurements.
Ports

Modes
To DUT input Output Optical
From DUT output Input Optical Sample signals
Parameters
Main
Emission frequency
Power 0 dBm W, mW, dBm [-1000, 1000]
Output power
Width 5e-011 s [0, 1e+100]
Pulse width
Spot size 5 um [1e-100, 1e+100]
Transverse mode spot size
Setup
Number of steps 10 [1, 1000]
Number of radial steps
1849
Max. radial shift 25 um [0, 1e+100]
Maximum radial shift
Reference length 300 m [0, 1e+100]
The length of the fiber under analysis
Min. signal power -10 dBm [-1e+100,

1e+100]
The minimum signal power level to be
considered for analysis
Graphs
Unscaled DMD graph True [True, False]
Defines whether the unscaled DMD

graph will be calculated or not
Bandwidth graph True [True, False]
Defines whether the bandwidth graph

will be calculated or not
Max. bandwidth 20000 MHz.km MHz.km [10, 1e+9]
Defines upper bandwidth limit for the

transfer function graph
Cut off magnitude 3 dB dB [0, 100]
Defines cut off magnitude for bandwidth

calculation
Simulation
1850
Graphs

Differential mode delay Time (ps/m) Radial offset (um)
Unscaled differential mode delay Time (ps/m) Radial offset (um)
DMD Radial offset (um) Time (ps)
Pulse width Radial offset (um) Time (ps)
Transfer function Frequency (MHz.km) Transmission (dB)
Bandwidth Radial offset (um) Bandwidth (MHz.km)
This component measures the DMD[1][2] by launching a temporal pulse into the fiber
and measuring the output time-domain waveform (Figure 1). The launching position
starts at the center of the fiber and it is radially shifted across the face of the fiber.
Figure 1 Using the DMD Analyzer
For each position an output waveform is stored. At the end of the radial sweep, the
group of waveforms are analyzed.
The parameters Frequency, Power and Width define the center frequency, peak
power and the width of the pulse generated by the internal optical pulse generator.
The Spot size is the spot size of a Laguerre-Gaussian mode (0,0) attached to the
polarization X of the pulse.
The setup parameters define the maximum radial shift (starting from the center of the
fiber) and the number of steps. The fiber length under analysis should be provided in
1851
order to scale the propagation delays by the propagation distance. Signals with power
values below the parameter Min. signal power are not considered for analysis.
At the end of the sweep, three types of graphs are generated. The first graph is a
waterfall graph with the pulses versus radial shift.
The second graph is the DMD versus the radial shift. The DMD is measured by the
total spread in time between the earliest rising edge and the latest falling edge of all
output pulses. The rising/falling edge is defined at 25% of the peak value.
The third graph is the pulse width versus radial shift, measured for each pulse at 25%
of peak value between rising/falling edges.
Graphs are available in the Project Browser under the component graphs folder
(Figure 2) or in the Component Viewer of OptiSystem.
The user can also see the output pulses (raw data) by enabling the parameter
Unscaled DMD graph. Additionally, the transfer function of the fiber and the bandwidth
can be calculated by enabling the parameter Bandwidth graphs.
Figure 2 DMD analyzer graphs from project browser
References
[1] FOTP-220, “Differential Mode Delay Measurements of Multimode Fiber in the Time Domain”.
TIA Standard - TIA/EIA-455-220, 2002.
[2] P. Pepeljugoski et all, "Development of System Specification for Laser-Optimized 50-mm
Multimode Fiber for Multigigabit Short-Wavelength LANs", IEEE Journal of Lightwave
Technology, pp. 1256-1274, Vol. 21, No. 5, May 2003.
1852
SPATIAL VISUALIZER
Spatial Visualizer
Spatial visualizer presents the transverse mode profiles of optical signals. It also
calculates and lists the power, label and wavelength for each transverse mode profile.
Ports

Modes
Parameters
Graphs
Polarization X and Y dBm X and Y, X, Y
Defines the polarization type when

calculating the mode profile graphs
Format Power and Phase [Power and

Phase, Real and
Defines whether to calculate the graphs Imag]
Orthogonal modes True [True, False]
Defines whether the input modes are

orthogonal or not
Weighted mode profile False [True, False]
Defines whether to calculate and plot

the weighted mode profile
Sum of mode profiles False [True, False]

the sum of mode profiles
Individual mode profile True [True, False]

the individual mode profile
1853
SPATIAL VISUALIZER
Individual mode number 0 [0, 1e+008]
The individual mode number used to

select and plot the mode profile
Centered at max power True [True, False]
Defines whether the analysis will be

done at the wavelength of signal with
maximum power or it will be user defined
Center wavelength for the analysis of

the mode profiles under test
Reduce field False [True, False]
Defines whether the mode profile will be

reduced or not
Minimum outer value -50 dB [-10000, 10]
Minimum outer value for the spatial

mode profile
Limit number of points True [True, False]
Determines if the user can enter the

maximum number of points
Max. number of points 128000 [128, 1e+008]
Maximum number of points displayed

per graph
Results
Generate report True [True, False]

component will generate a report with
the power for each wavelength, mode
number and polarization
Report
Report with the power for each
wavelength, mode number and
polarization
Minimum value -100 dBm [-1e100, +1e100]
Minimum value for power when using

units in dBm
1854
SPATIAL VISUALIZER
Simulation

1855
SPATIAL VISUALIZER
Graphs

Spatial Ex profile - individual a X (m) Y (m)
Spatial Ex profile - individual b X (m) Y (m)
Spatial Ey profile - individual a X (m) Y (m)
Spatial Ey profile - individual b X (m) Y (m)
Spatial Ex profile - sum a X (m) Y (m)
Spatial Ex profile - sum b X (m) Y (m)
Spatial Ey profile - sum a X (m) Y (m)
Spatial Ey profile - sum b X (m) Y (m)
Spatial Ex profile - weighted a X (m) Y (m)
Spatial Ex profile - weighted b X (m) Y (m)
Spatial Ey profile - weighted a X (m) Y (m)
Spatial Ey profile - weighted b X (m) Y (m)
Results

Frequency (Hz)
Wavelength (nm)
Power (dBm)
Power (W)
Power X (dBm)
Power X (W)
Power Y (dBm)
Power Y (W)
After running a simulation, this visualizer component will generate 3D graphs with the
transverse mode profiles of an optical signal. You can access the graphs by double-
clicking directly on the visualizer icon (Figure 1) or from the project browser (Figure 2).
The Spatial visualizer can generate graphs of an individual mode, the sum of all
modes and the weighted sum of all modes according to:
1856
SPATIAL VISUALIZER
E Sum (x,y) = ∑ Φi (x,y) (1)

i=1 N
E Weighted (x,y) = ∑ Ei Φi (x,y)

i=1
where Φ i is the normalized profile of a mode of index i and Ei is the field amplitude.
A total of 12 different graphs can be generated, depending of the selection to display
polarization and format. When using the project browser, the graphs are labeled with
“a” and “b” according to the format selection.
If the format is “Power and Phase”, “a” is power and “b” is phase. If the format is “Real
and Imag” then “a” is the real and “b” is the imaginary part. The parameter Mode
number affects the display of the individual spatial mode.
Figure 1 Spatial Visualizer
1857
SPATIAL VISUALIZER
Figure 2 Project browser displaying the Spatial Visualizer
Parameter Report (Figure 3) allow the user to visualize the power for each mode,
including its polarization, wavelength, and label.
1858
SPATIAL VISUALIZER
Figure 3 Report
1859
SPATIAL VISUALIZER
Notes:
1860
ENCIRCLED FLUX ANALYZER
Encircled Flux Analyzer
This component measures the percentage of optical power that falls within a given
radial distance from the center of a fiber.
Ports

Modes
Parameters
Graphs
Centered at max power True [True, False]
Defines whether the analysis will be

done at the wavelength of signal with
maximum power or it will be user defined
Center wavelength for the analysis of

the mode profiles under test
Analysis radius 25 um [0, 10000]
Analysis radius for the mode profiles

under test
Number of points 20 [5, 100000]
Simulation
Grid spacing X Grid spacing X um [1e-100, 1e+100]
Horizontal grid spacing
1861
Grid spacing Y Grid spacing Y um [1e-100, 1e+100]
Horizontal grid spacing

Graphs

Encircled flux Radius (m) Encircled flux (%)
Average radial intensity Radius (m) Average intensity
After running a simulation, this visualizer will measure the percentage of optical power
that falls within a given radial distance from the center of a fiber, know as encircled
flux graph [1].
You can access the graphs by double-clicking directly on the visualizer icon (Figure
1) or from the project browser (Figure 3). The encircled flux analyzer will generate two
graphs: the encircled flux and the average radial intensity (Figure 2).
Figure 1 Encircled Flux Visualizer - Encircled Flux tab
1862
Figure 2 Encircled Flux Visualizer - Average Intensity tab
The encircled flux is calculated according to:
γ
1
EF ( r ) = ------ 2π ∫ r I ( r )dr (1)
PT
0
where PT is the guided power contained in the entire fiber, from zero to the parameter
Analysis radius. I(r) is the radial intensity profile. The average radial intensity is the
radial derivative of the encircled flux.
1863
Figure 3 Project browser displaying the Encircled Flux Analyzer
References
[1] P. Pepeljugoski et all, "Development of System Specification for Laser-Optimized 50-mm
Multimode Fiber for Multigigabit Short-Wavelength LANs", IEEE Journal of Lightwave
Technology, pp. 1256-1274, Vol. 21, No. 5, May 2003.
1864
Visualizer Library
Optical
Test Sets
• Differential Mode Delay Analyzer

• Optical Filter Analyzer
• Photonic All-parameter Analyzer
• Convergence Monitor
1865
Notes:
1866
OPTICAL FILTER ANALYZER
Optical Filter Analyzer
The Optical Filter Analyzer is a test set that measures the transmission of an optical
component, or the device under test (DUT), using frequency or time domain methods.
Ports

From DUT output Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Frequency 193.1 THz Hz, THz, nm [0,3e5[
Output signal center frequency
Frequency range 100 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, [0,+INF[

nm
Output signal bandwidth or sample rate
Setup

value range
Cutoff magnitude 3 dB [0,100]
Reference cutoff magnitude for bandwidth result calculation
Save to file False — True, False

Determines if the filter transmission will be saved as a file
Filename with the filter data
1867
Graphs

value range
Frequency unit nm — — nm, m, Hz, THz
Unit scale for the graphs
Linear scale False — — True, False

Determines whether or not the graph is in linear
scale
Minimum value –100 dBm — ]-INF,+INF[
Minimum value when using log scale
Unwrap phase False — — True, False

discontinuity
Time domain False — — True, False
Determines whether or not to calculate the

transmission of the device using the power
impulse response
1868
Graphs

Transmission function Frequency (Hz) Power (dB)
Transmission of the DUT
Transmission Phase X Frequency (Hz) Phase (rad)
Phase at the polarization X
Power impulse response Time (s) Power (ratio)

Impulse response of the DUT
Results

Frequency at Max. Transmission Hz
Filter Bandwidth (BandPass) at Cut off Hz
Frequency at Max. Transmission nm
Filter Bandwidth (BandPass) at Cut off nm
Frequency at Min. Transmission Hz
Filter Bandwidth (Band-Reject) at Cut off Hz
Frequency at Min. Transmission nm
Filter Bandwidth (Band-Reject) at Cut off nm
The Optical Filter Analyzer uses a broadband optical source that produces a signal
over parameter Frequency range, centered at parameter Frequency. By default, the
optical field frequency response of the device is calculated in the frequency domain
according to:
I(f)
H ( f ) = -----------
O(f)
Where I(f) is the signal received from the DUT output, and O(f) is the signal send to
the DUT input.
1869
If the user selects Time domain, the power impulse response of the device is
calculated first, and the Fourier transform is used to calculate the frequency transfer
function of the device:
H(f) = F(p(t))
Where p(t) is the power impulse response of the DUT, and F is the Fourier transform.
1870
PHOTONIC ALL-PARAMETER ANALYZER
Photonic All-parameter Analyzer
The Photonic All-parameter Analyzer measures polarization mode dispersion (PMD)

and records multiple traces simultaneously. It can measure insertion loss (IL),
differential group delay (DGD), polarization chromatic dispersion (PDC),
depolarization rate, dispersion, dispersion slope and group delay (GD).
Ports

From DUT output Input Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Output signal center frequency
Output signal power
Frequency range 100 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, ]0,1e100]

nm
Output signal bandwidth or sample rate
1871
Setup

value range
Reference length 1 m, km [0, 100000]
The length of the device under analysis, used to calculate the PMD
coefficient.
Dispersion graph polarization X — X, Y

Determines the polarization used to calculate dispersion graphs
(phase, group delay, dispersion, etc.)
Graphs

value range
Parameter unit s/Hz — — ps/nm, s/m,
s/Hz, ps/GHz,
Parameter unit for the vertical axis
Frequency unit nm — — nm, m, Hz, THz

scale
Phase unit deg — — deg, rad

discontinuity
Unwrap phase True — — True, False

discontinuity
1872
Graphs

Differential group delay Frequency (Hz) Delay (s)
Polarization chromatic dispersion Frequency (Hz) Dispersion (s/Hz)
Depolarization rate Frequency (Hz) Rate (rad/Hz)
Transmission Frequency (Hz) Power (dB)
Phase Frequency (Hz) Phase (rad)
Dispersion Frequency (Hz) Dispersion (s/Hz)
Dispersion slope Frequency (Hz) Dispersion (s/Hz^2)
Group delay Frequency (Hz) Delay (s)
Results

PMD Coefficient ps/sqrt(km)
The Photonic All-parameter Analyzer uses a broadband optical source that produces
two signals with orthogonal polarization over parameter Frequency range, centered
at parameter Frequency. The output signals from the device under test are then
analyzed. Polarization graphs and the PMD coefficient are calculated using the Jones
matrix method [1].
Additionally, the analyzer can also calculate the transmission, phase, group delay,
dispersion and dispersion slope graphs.
References
[1] D. Derickson, "Fiber Optic Test and Measurement," Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1998.
1873
Notes:
1874
CONVERGENCE MONITOR
Convergence Monitor
The Convergence Monitor measures and monitors signal power over successive
iterations. The simulation can be stopped when the calculated relative error is below
the threshold value.
Ports

Input Input Optical
Output = Input Output Optical
Parameters
Main

value range
Monitor center frequency
Frequency range 100 GHz Hz, GHz, THz, ]0,1e100]

nm
Monitor bandwidth or sample rate
Synchronize monitors False - - True, False
Defines whether to synchronize multiple monitors

or not
Relative error 1 % % ]0,100]

Defines the threshold level for the relative error
Error averaging size 2 - - ]0,1e100]
The number of successive iterations used to

calculate relative error
Min. number of iterations 4 - - ]0,1e100]

Mininum number of iterations that will be
calculated
1875
CONVERGENCE MONITOR

value range
Max. number of iterations 1000 - - ]0,1e100]
Maximum number of iterations that will be

calculated
Simulation

value range
Defines whether this component is enabled or not
Graphs

Convergence Iteration Relative error (%)
Power Iteration Power (W)
Results

Iteration Number -
Relative Error %
Power W
This component measures and monitors signal power (the sum of parameterized
signal, noise bins, and sampled signal) within a certain frequency band (defined by
the parameter “Frequency” and “Frequency range”) over successive iterations. The
global parameter “Iterations” is usually set to a value equals to or larger than
the component parameter “Max. number of iterations”.
If the parameter “Error averaging size” is set to N, then the Relative error is calculated
as follows:
Relative error = abs ( CurrentValue - PreviousValue ) / PreviousValue
where CurrentValue is the averaged power for the N/2 iterations counting backwards
(n, n-1, ..., n-N/2+1) from the current iteration (n is used here to stand for the current
iteration), and PreviousValue is the averaged power for the N/2 iterations counting
backwards (n-N/2, n-N/2-1, ..., n-N+1) from the (n-N/2)th iteration.
1876
CONVERGENCE MONITOR
The iteration number, the power, and the calculated relative error are updated
dynamically as component results after each iteration.
The threshold level for the relative error is defined by the component parameter
“Relative error”. If the parameter “Synchronize monitors” is disabled, the simulation
will be stopped once this convergence monitor detects that the calculated relative
error is below the threshold level. If the parameter “Synchronize monitors” is enabled,
the simulation won’t be stopped until all the synchronized monitors reach the
condition that calculated relative error is below the threshold level.
1877
CONVERGENCE MONITOR
Notes:
1878
CONVERGENCE MONITOR
Visualizer Library
Electrical
• Oscilloscope Visualizer
• RF Spectrum Analyzer (RFSA)
• Eye Diagram Analyzer
• BER Analyzer
• Electrical Power Meter
• Electrical Carrier Analyzer (ECAN)
• Dual Port Electrical Carrier Analyzer
• Electrical Constellation Visualizer
1879
CONVERGENCE MONITOR
Notes:
1880
OSCILLOSCOPE VISUALIZER
Oscilloscope Visualizer
This visualizer allows the user to calculate and display electrical signals in the time
domain. It can display the signal amplitude and autocorrelation.
Ports

modes
Input Input Electrical Sampled
signals
Parameters
Graphs

value range
Reference bit rate Bit rate Bits/s Bits/s [0, 1e+012]
Reference bit rate to use when the time unit is Bit MBits/s
period
GBits/s
Retracing False - - True, False
Time window 1/(Bit rate) s - ]0, +INF[
Defines the retracing time window
Calculate autocorrelation False - - True, False
Determines whether or not to calculate

autocorrelation graphs
Limit number of points True - - True, False

Determines if you can enter the maximum number
of points to display
Max. number of points 128,000 - - [100, 1e+008]
1881

value range

the display
Enable color grade False - - True, False
Determines whether or not to color grade the

displayed graphs
Number of color bins 500 - - [10, 5000]

Number of vertical and horizontal bins of the
display
Color grade palette Default - - Default,

Agilent, Gray,
Determines the color grade palette Black, Red,
Green,Blue,
Agilent red,
Agilent blue,
Agilent green,
Agilent yellow
Simulation

value range
Random numbers

value range
1882
Graphs

Signal amplitude Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
Noise amplitude Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
Signal + noise amplitude Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
Signal autocorrelation Delay (s) Intensity (a.u.)
Noise autocorrelation Delay (s) Intensity (a.u.)
Signal + noise autocorrelation Delay (s) Intensity (a.u.)
Access the Oscilloscope parameters, graphs, and results from the simulation (see
Figure 2).
1883
Figure 2 Oscilloscope display
• Signal
• Noise
• Signal + Noise
• All
1884
RF SPECTRUM ANALYZER (RFSA)
RF Spectrum Analyzer (RFSA)
This visualizer allows the user to calculate and display electrical signals in the
frequency domain. It can display the signal intensity, power spectral density and
phase.
Ports

Electrical Input Electrical
Parameters
Resolution bandwidth

value range
Resolution bandwidth Off — On, Off
Filter type Rectangle — Rectangle,

Gaussian,
Determines the type for the resolution filter Butterworth
Bandwidth 10 MHz [0,+INF[
Graphs

value range
Power unit dB — dBm, W

1e+100]
1885

value range
Scale factor 0 dB [-1e+100,
1e+100]
Vertical axis scale factor (for an impedance of 50 ohms, use a scale
of 16.9897, for voltage input, and a scale of -16.898 for current input)
Power spectral density False — True, False
Determines whether or not to calculate the power spectral density for

the vertical axis
Calculate phase False — True, False
Determines whether or not to calculate the phase graphs
Unwrap phase True — True, False

Determines whether or not to remove the phase discontinuity
Negative frequencies False — True, False
Determines whether or not the negative frequencies are displayed
Invert colors False — True, False
Simulation

value range
Random numbers

value range
1886
Graphs

Signal spectrum Frequency (GHz) Power (dBm)
Noise spectrum Frequency (GHz) Power (dBm)
Signal + noise spectrum Frequency (GHz) Power (dBm)
Signal phase Frequency (GHz) Phase (rad)
Noise phase Frequency (GHz) Phase (rad)
Signal + noise phase Frequency (GHz) Phase (rad)
1887
Access the RF Spectrum Analyzer (RFSA) parameters, graphs, and results from the
Figure 2 RFSA display
• Signal
• Noise
• Signal + Noise
• All
1888
EYE DIAGRAM ANALYZER
Eye Diagram Analyzer
This visualizer allows the user to calculate and display the electrical signal eye
diagram automatically. It can calculate different metrics from the eye diagram, such
as Q factor, eye opening, eye closure, extinction ratio, eye height, mask violation ratio,
etc. It can also display histograms and standard eye masks.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Time window 1.5 bit [1,3]
Time window for the eye diagram display
Ignore start bits 1 bits [0,+INF[
Number of start bits to be ignored in the eye diagram
Ignore end bits 1 bits [0,+INF[
Number of end bits to be ignored in the eye diagram
Clock

value range
Clock recovery On — On, Off
Determines if the delay compensation between the reference and the
received signal will be applied
1889
Threshold

value range
Threshold mode Relative — Relative,
Absolute
Determines the value mode for the user-defined threshold
Absolute threshold 0 (a.u.) ]–INF,+INF[

Amplitude value for the threshold
Relative threshold 50 % [0,100]
Relative value for the threshold, relative to the average values of 1s

and 0s
Decision instant 0.5 Bit [0,1]

The user-defined decision instant for the eye analysis
Graphs

value range
Time unit Bit period — s, Bit period
Ratio unit dB — none, dB, %
Ratio unit for the vertical axis
Invert colors False — [100, 1e+008]
Enable color grade False — True, False
Determines whether or not to color grade the displayed graphs
Number of color bins 500 — [100, 1e+008]

Number of vertical and horizontal bins of the display
Color grade palette Default — Default,

Agilent, Gray,
Determines the color grade palette
Black, Red,
Green,Blue,
Agilent red,
Agilent blue,
Agilent green,
Agilent yellow
1890

value range
Smoothness 10 % [0, 1000]
Determines how smooth is the transition between color grades
Histograms

value range
Calculate histograms False — True, False
Determines whether to calculate histograms or not
Number of X bins 500 — [10, 5000]

Number of horizontal histogram bins
Number of Y bins 500 — [10, 5000]
Number of vertical histogram bins
Region 1 X0 0 — [-1e100,1e100]
Determines the first point along the horizontal axis for the region
Region 1 X1 0 — [-1e100,1e100]
Determines the second point along the horizontal axis for the region
Region 1 Y0 0 a.u. [-1e100,1e100]
Determines the first point along the vertical axis for the region
Region 1 Y1 0 a.u. [-1e100,1e100]
Determines the second point along the vertical axis for the region
Region 2 X0 0 — [-1e100,1e100]
Region 2 X1 0 — [-1e100,1e100]
Region 2 Y0 0 a.u. [-1e100,1e100]
Region 2 Y1 0 a.u. [-1e100,1e100]
Region 3 X0 0 — [-1e100,1e100]
Region 3 X1 0 — [-1e100,1e100]
Region 3 Y0 0 a.u. [-1e100,1e100]
1891

value range
Region 3 Y1 0 a.u. [-1e100,1e100]
Region 4 X0 0 — [-1e100,1e100]
Region 4 X1 0 — [-1e100,1e100]
Region 4 Y0 0 a.u. [-1e100,1e100]
Region 4 Y1 0 a.u. [-1e100,1e100]

Mask

value range
Calculate mask False — True, False
Determines whether or not to display the eye mask
Mask filename Eye.msk — —
The file which contains the mask data
Mask horizontal shift 0 Bit period [-1e100,1e100]
User defined mask horizontal shift
Mask vertical shift 0 a.u. [-1e100,1e100]
User defined mask vertical shift
Mask margin 0 % [-100,100]

Mask margins are used to determine the margin of compliance for a
standard or scaled mask. You can use positive mask margins to
determine how much larger you will be able to increase the size of the
mask before violations will occur or negative margins to determine
how much smaller you have to decrease the size of the mask before
violations no longer occur
Simulation

value range
1892
Noise

value range
Add noise to signal True — True, False
Random numbers

value range
1893
Graphs

Eye diagram Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
Min. BER Time (s) log (BER)
Q-factor Time (s) Q
Threshold at min. BER Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
Eye Height Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
Eye Amplitude Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
Eye Closure Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
Eye Opening Factor Time (s) Ratio (dB)
Eye Extinction Ratio Time (s) Ratio (dB)
Histogram Region 1 Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
Vertical Histogram 1 Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
Horizontal Histogram 1 Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
Eye Mask Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
Results

Total Power dBm
Total Power W
Signal Power dBm
Signal Power W
1894

Noise Power dBm
Noise Power W
Signal Delay s
Signal Delay samples
Bit Rate Bits/s
Max. Q Factor —
Min. BER —
Min. log of BER —
Max. Eye Height a.u.
Threshold at Min. BER a.u.
Decision Instant at Min. BER Bit period
Max. Eye Amplitude a.u.
Max. Eye Closure a.u.
Max. Eye Opening Factor dB
Max. Eye Opening Factor —
Max. Eye Opening Factor %
Extinction Ratio at Min. BER dB
Extinction Ratio at Min. BER —
Extinction Ratio at Min. BER %
Q Factor at User Defined Decision Instant —
Eye Height at User Defined Decision Instant a.u.
Min. BER at User Defined Decision Instant —
Min. log of BER at User Defined Decision Instant —
BER at User Defined Threshold —
BER at User Defined Decision Instant and Threshold —
log of BER at User Defined Threshold —
log of BER at User Defined Decision Instant and Threshold —
Eye Amplitude at User Defined Decision Instant a.u.
Eye Closure at User Defined Decision Instant a.u
Eye Opening Factor at User Defined Decision Instant dB
Eye Opening Factor at User Defined Decision Instant —
1895

Eye Opening Factor at User Defined Decision Instant %
Extinction Ratio at User Defined Decision Instant dB
Extinction Ratio at User Defined Decision Instant —
Extinction Ratio at User Defined Decision Instant %
Vertical Histogram 1 Mean —
Vertical Histogram 1 Standard Deviation —
Vertical Histogram 1 Range —
Horizontal Histogram 1 Mean —
Horizontal Histogram 1 Standard Deviation —
Horizontal Histogram 1 Range —
Eye Mask Violation Ratio %
1896
1897
The Eye Diagram Analyzer generates eye diagrams and BER analysis. Double-click
the Eye Diagram Analyzer to access the parameters, graphs, and results from the
Figure 2 Eye diagram display
The available results in the display are:

• Max Q-factor: Maximum value for the Q-factor in the eye time window.
• Min BER: Minimum value for the bit error rate in the eye time window.
• Eye height: Maximum value for the eye height in the eye time window.
• Threshold: Value of the threshold at the decision instant for the maximum Q-
factor / minimum BER.
• Decision inst: Value of the decision instant for the maximum Q-factor/minimum
BER.
Note: For additional results and graphs, you should use the Project Browser or
the Component Viewer.
1898
Figure 3 Eye diagram analysis
1899
BER and Q-Factor estimation

The BER estimation method in this visualizer compare the bits generated by a binary
signal and the signal received.
Assuming Gaussian noise with the standard deviations σ 0 and σ 1 the BER is [1]:
M N (2)
P e = --------------- P e0 + --------------- P e1
N+M N+M
where P0 and P1 are the probabilities of the symbols, M is the number of samples for
the logical 0, and N is the number of samples for the logical 1.
Pe0 and Pe1 are:
1 ⎛ S – μ 0⎞
P e0 = --- erfc ⎜ --------------⎟ , (3)
2 ⎝ 2σ ⎠ 0
1 ⎛ μ 1 – S⎞ (4)
P e1 = --- erfc ⎜ --------------⎟
2 ⎝ 2σ ⎠ 1
where μ 0 , μ 1 , σ 0 , and σ 1 are average values and standard deviations of the

sampled values respectively, and S is the threshold value.
The Q-factor is calculated by:
μ1 – μ0
Q = -------------------- (5)
σ1 + σ0
The eye height is calculated by [2]
(6)
E H = ( μ 1 – 3σ 1 ) – ( μ 0 + 3σ 0 )
The eye amplitude is calculated by:
EA = μ1 – μ0 (7)
1900
The eye closure is calculated by:
E c = min ( V 1 ) – max ( V 0 ) (8)
where min(V1) is the minimum value of the amplitude for the marks and max(V0) is
the maximum value for the amplitude of the spaces.
The eye-opening factor is calculated by:
( μ1 – σ1 ) – ( μ0 – σ0 )
E 0 = --------------------------------------------------- (9)
( μ1 – μ0 )
The extinction ratio is:
μ1
E R = ----- (10)
μ0
Histograms
The Histogram tab enables the histogram calculation feature of the Eye Analyzer. The
user can select up to four regions for analysis. Simply select the region of interest and
click on Calculate Histogram button. The user can display the region of interest,
vertical and horizontal histograms (Figure 4).
1901
Figure 4 Histograms
The statistical properties of the histograms are displayed in the Statistics grid.The
available results in the grid are:
• H. Mean: The mean value of the horizontal histogram.
• H. Std. Dev.: The standard deviation of the horizontal histogram.
• H. Range: The difference between the maximum and minimum values of the
horizontal histogram.
• V. Mean: The mean value of the vertical histogram.
• V. Std. Dev.: The standard deviation of the vertical histogram.
• V. Range: The difference between the maximum and minimum values of the
vertical histogram.
Note: If you are changing the dimensions of a given region, you must click
Calculate Histograms in order to update the visualizer graphs and the results.
Eye Masks
Parameter Calculate mask allows the user to display a standard eye mask and
calculate the mask margin for a given eye diagram. You can copy and modify the
standard mask files located on the folder \Components\Data\Eye Mask, or create your
own mask file from scratch. Figure 5 shows the eye diagram and the eye mask using
the Component Viewer feature of OptiSystem.
1902
The following mask files are available with OptiSystem:
Standard Filename
OTU-1, 2.66 Gb/s OTU-1.msk
OTU-2, 10.71 Gb/s OTU-2.msk
STM0/OC1, 51.8 Mb/s STM000_OC1.msk
STM16/OC48, 2.488 Gb/s STM016_OC48.msk
STM64/OC192, 9.953 Gb/s STM064_OC192.msk
XFP MSA Point C' XFI_RX_OUT.msk
XFP MSA Point B' XFI_TX_IN.msk
OptiSystem eye mask file follows the convention from Agilent Infiniium DCAs.These
files have several elements that contain necessary information for the visualizer to
display the mask properly.
Note: You will have to use the Project Browser or the Component Viewer in order
to visualize the Eye Mask
1903
Figure 5 Eye mask from Component Viewer
Any mask files you edit or create should retain these elements as specified in the
following descriptions:
Mask File Identifier: The mask file identifier is the first line in a mask file. When you
load a mask file, OptiSystem checks the first line of the file for the following:
MASK_FILE_OPTISYSTEM6
Mask Title: The mask title is a quoted string. Change this title to reflect the name of
the mask you are creating. An example mask title is:
"OTU-1, 2.66 Gb/s"
Region Number: The region number is an integer that defines a mask violation area
(or polygon). The region number can be further identified with a commented line
describing the region number location, for example: /* Top Region */.
You can specify 1 to a maximum of 8 regions in a mask file.
Region Type: You can define three types of regions for each region number you have
specified:
• STD defines the actual mask region.
• MARGIN_MAX defines the maximum margin area when test margins are set to
100%.
1904
• MARGIN_MIN defines the minimum margin area when test margins are set to -
100%.
Note: If no MARGIN_MAX or MARGIN_MIN regions are defined, the mask

margin calculation will not work.
Number of Vertices: The number of vertices is an integer that specifies the quantity
of X and Y coordinates needed to define a mask region or polygon.
You can define a mask region or polygon with a minimum of 3 vertices.
X and Y Coordinates: These are the floating-point numbers that define the locations
of the mask polygon vertices for each region and region type defined in the mask file.
For Y values, the special value MIN automatically defines the bottom of the display,
and MAX automatically defines the top of the display.
The X-coordinate values are referenced to the eye crossing points; the first or left
crossing point X-value is 0.0, and the second or right crossing point X-value is 1.0.
The Y-coordinate values are referenced in the same manner with respect to the eye
zero and one levels; the eye zero level Y-value is 0.0 while the eye one level Y-value
is 1.0.
References
[1] G.P. Agrawal, "Fiber Optic Communication Systems," John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1997.
1905
Notes:
1906
BER ANALYZER
BER Analyzer
This visualizer allows the user to calculate and display the bit error rate (BER) of an
electrical signal automatically. It can estimate the BER using different algorithms such
as Gaussian and Chi-Squared and derive different metrics from the eye diagram,
such as Q factor, eye opening, eye closure, extinction ratio, eye height, jitter, etc. It
can also take in account Forward Error Correction (FEC), plot BER patterns and
estimate system penalties and margins.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Algorithm Gaussian — Gaussian,
Average
Determines the algorithm used to estimate the BER
Gaussian,
Gaussian
Worse Case,
Chi-Squared,
Average Chi-
Squared, Chi-
Squared Worst
Case,
Measured
Time window 1.5 bit [1, 3]
Time window for the eye diagram display
Ignore start bits 1 bits [0,+INF[
Number of start bits to be ignored in the eye diagram
1907
BER ANALYZER

value range
Ignore end bits 1 bits [0,+INF[
Number of end bits to be ignored in the eye diagram
Lower calculation limit 0 Bit period [0,1.5]

Defines the lower calculation limit for the time window
Upper calculation limit 1 Bit period [0,1.5]
Defines the upper calculation limit for the time window
Eye must be open True — True, False
Define whether the eye is considered open only if marks are above
spaces or not.
Eye opening tolerance 2 % [0,100]
The tolerance used to estimate the eye opening. The eye is

considered open if this percentage of spaces is above the marks.
Clock

value range
Clock recovery On — On, Off
Determines if the delay compensation between the reference and the

received signal will be applied
Enhanced

value range
Enabled FEC gain estimation False — True, False
FEC estimation type Analytical — Analytical,

Measured
Measured FEC filename FEC.dat — —
Threshold

value range
Threshold mode Relative — Relative,
Absolute
Determines the value mode for the user-defined threshold
Absolute threshold 0 (a.u.) ]–INF,+INF[
Amplitude value for the threshold
1908
BER ANALYZER

value range
Relative threshold 50 % [0,100]
Relative value for the threshold, relative to the average values of 1s

and 0s
Load threshold from file False — True, false
Defines whether the threshold will be loaded from a file or not
Measured threshold filename Threshold.dat — —
Threshold file name
Reload before calculation False — True, false

Defines whether the file should be reloaded when the calculation
starts
Decision instant 0.5 Bit period [0,100]
The user-defined decision instant for the eye analysis, jitter

calculation, histogram and probability graphs
Graphs

value range
Time unit Bit period — s, Bit period
Ratio unit dB — none, dB, %
Ratio unit for the vertical axis
Invert colors False — [100, 1e+008]

Enable color grade False — True, False
Number of color bins 500 — [100, 1e+008]
1909
BER ANALYZER

value range
Color grade palette Default — Default,
Agilent, Gray,
Green,Blue,
Agilent red,
Agilent blue,
Agilent green,
Agilent yellow

BER patterns

value range
Calculate patterns False — True, False
Determines whether or not the component will generate BER patterns
Number of points 16 — [10, 1e+008]
Number of vertical points for the patterns
BER for pattern 1 1e-012 — [0,1]
Calculate 3D graph False — True, False

Determines whether or not the component generates a 3D graph with
the BER
1910
BER ANALYZER
Penalty calculations

Reference values setup User-defined — User defined, First
sweep iteration,
Current sweep
iteration
Total power –1000 dBm [-1e+100, 1e+100]
Signal power –1000 dBm [-1e+100, 1e+100]
Noise power –1000 dBm [-1e+100, 1e+100]
Min. BER 1 — [0, 1]
Q factor from min. BER 0 — [0, 1000]
Max. Q factor 0 — [0, 1000]
Max. eye height 0 a.u. [-1e+100, 1e+100]
Max. eye amplitude 0 a.u. [-1e+100, 1e+100]
Max. eye closure 0 a.u. [-1e+100, 1e+100]
Max. eye opening factor 0 dB [-1e+100, 1e+100]
Extinction ratio at min. BER 0 dB [-1e+100, 1e+100]
Min. BER at user defined decision instant 1 — [0, 1]
Q factor from min. BER at user defined decision 0 — [0, 1000]

instant
Q factor at user defined decision instant 0 — [0, 1000]
BER at user-defined threshold 1 — [0, 1]
Q factor from BER at user defined threshold 0 — [0, 1000]
BER at user defined decision instant and 1 — [0, 1]

threshold
Q factor from BER at user defined decision instant 0 — [0, 1000]

and threshold
Eye height at user defined decision instant 0 a.u. [-1e+100, 1e+100]
Eye amplitude at user defined decision instant 0 a.u. [-1e+100, 1e+100]
Eye closure at user defined decision instant 0 a.u. [-1e+100, 1e+100]
Eye opening factor at user defined decision 0 dB [-1e+100, 1e+100]

instant
Extinction ratio at user defined decision instant 0 dB [-1e+100, 1e+100]
1911
BER ANALYZER
Simulation

value range
Noise

value range
Add noise to signal True — True, False
Random numbers

value range
1912
BER ANALYZER
Graphs

Amplitude Histogram Amplitude Amplitude (a.u.)
Amplitude Probability Amplitude Amplitude (a.u.)
Eye diagram Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
Min. BER Time (s) log of BER
Q-factor Time (s) Q
Threshold at min. BER Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
Eye height Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
Eye Amplitude Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
Eye Closure Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
Eye Opening Factor Time (s) Ratio (dB)
Eye Extinction Ratio Time (s) Ratio (dB)
BER pattern 1 Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
BER pattern 3D graph Amplitude (a.u.) Time (s)
Measured Threshold Time (Bit period) Amplitude (a.u.)
BER at Measured Threshold Time (s) log of BER
Amplitude Histogram Amplitude Amplitude (a.u.)
Amplitude Probability Amplitude Amplitude (a.u.)
Results

Total Power dBm
Total Power W
Signal Power dBm
Signal Power W
Noise Power dBm
1913
BER ANALYZER

Noise Power W
Signal Delay s
Signal Delay samples
Bit Rate Bits/s
Max. Q Factor —
Q Factor from Min. BER —
Min. BER —
Min. log of BER —
Max. Eye Height a.u.
Threshold at Min. BER a.u.
Decision Instant at Min. BER Bit period
Max. Eye Amplitude a.u.
Max. Eye Closure a.u.
Max. Eye Opening Factor dB
Max. Eye Opening Factor —
Max. Eye Opening Factor %
Extinction Ratio at Min. BER dB
Extinction Ratio at Min. BER —
Extinction Ratio at Min. BER %
Q Factor at User Defined Decision Instant —
Eye Height at User Defined Decision Instant a.u.
Min. BER at User Defined Decision Instant —
Q Factor from Min. BER at User Defined Decision Instant —
Min. log of BER at User Defined Decision Instant —
BER at User Defined Threshold —
BER at User Defined Decision Instant and Threshold —
Q Factor from BER at User Defined Threshold —
Q Factor from BER at User Defined Decision Instant and Threshold —
log of BER at User Defined Threshold —
log of BER at User Defined Decision Instant and Threshold —
Eye Amplitude at User Defined Decision Instant a.u.
1914
BER ANALYZER

Eye Closure at User Defined Decision Instant a.u.
Eye Opening Factor at User Defined Decision Instant dB
Eye Opening Factor at User Defined Decision Instant —
Eye Opening Factor at User Defined Decision Instant %
Extinction Ratio at User Defined Decision Instant dB
Extinction Ratio at User Defined Decision Instant —
Extinction Ratio at User Defined Decision Instant %
Penalty: Total Power dB
Penalty: Signal Power dB
Penalty: Noise Power dB
Penalty: Max. Q Factor dB
Penalty: Q Factor from Min. BER dB
Penalty: Min. BER dB
Penalty: Max. Eye Height dB
Penalty: Max. Eye Amplitude dB
Penalty: Max. Eye Closure dB
Penalty: Max. Eye Opening Factor dB
Penalty: Extinction Ratio at Min. BER dB
Penalty: Q Factor at User Defined Decision Instant dB
Penalty: Eye Height at User Defined Decision Instant dB
Penalty: Min. BER at User Defined Decision Instant dB
Penalty: Q Factor from Min. BER at User Defined Decision Instant dB
Penalty: BER at User Defined Threshold dB
Penalty: BER at User Defined Decision Instant and Threshold dB
Penalty: Q Factor from BER at User Defined Threshold dB
Penalty: Q Factor from BER at User Defined Decision Instant and dB

Threshold
Penalty: Eye Amplitude at User Defined Decision Instant dB
Penalty: Eye Closure at User Defined Decision Instant dB
Penalty: Eye Opening Factor at User Defined Decision Instant dB
Penalty: Extinction Ratio at User Defined Decision Instant dB
1915
BER ANALYZER

Min. BER after FEC —
Min. log of BER after FEC —
Min. BER after FEC at User Defined Decision Instant —
Min. log of BER after FEC at User Defined Decision Instant —
BER after FEC at User Defined Threshold —
BER after FEC at User Defined Decision Instant and Threshold —
log of BER after FEC at User Defined Threshold —
log of BER after FEC at User Defined Decision Instant and Threshold —
Peak to Peak Jitter at User Defined Threshold UI
RMS Jitter at User Defined Threshold UI
Number of Bits —
1916
BER ANALYZER
The BER Analyzer estimates and analyzes the BER of the signal received. Double-
click the BER Analyzer to access the parameters, graphs, and results from the
Figure 2 BER Analyzer display
Use the signal index to select the signal to display from the signal buffer (see Figure
3).
The available results are:

• Max Q-factor: Maximum value for the Q-factor in the eye time window.
• Min BER: Minimum value for the bit error rate in the eye time window.
• Eye height: Maximum value for the eye height in the eye time window.
• Threshold: Value of the threshold at the decision instant for the maximum Q-
factor / minimum BER.
• Decision inst: Value of the decision instant for the maximum Q-factor/minimum
BER.
Note: For additional results and graphs, you should use the Project Browser or
the Component Viewer.
1917
BER ANALYZER
Figure 3 BER analysis
When the parameter Calculate 3D graph is enabled, you can visualize a 3D graph that
shows the values of BER versus the decision instant and threshold (see Figure 4).
1918
BER ANALYZER
Figure 4 3D BER graph
1919
BER ANALYZER
BER and Q-factor estimation

The parameter Algorithm defines the numerical method to use for the BER estimation.
Gaussian
Assuming Gaussian noise with the standard deviations σ 0 and σ 1 , the BER is [1]:
M N (1)
P e = --------------- P e0 + --------------- P e1
N+M N+M
where P0 and P1 are the probabilities of the symbols, M is the number of samples for
the logical 0, and N is the number of samples for the logical 1.
Also, Pe0 and Pe1 are:
1 ⎛ S – μ 0⎞
P e0 = --- erfc ⎜ --------------⎟ , (2)
2 ⎝ 2σ ⎠ 0
1 ⎛ μ 1 – S⎞
P e1 = --- erfc ⎜ --------------⎟ (3)
2 ⎝ 2σ ⎠ 1
where μ 0 , μ 1 , σ 0 , and σ 1 are average values and standard deviations of the

sampled values respectively, and S is the threshold value.
Average Gaussian
An enhancement of the simple Gaussian approximation can be achieved by
averaging the separately estimated BERs for different sampled symbols [2]. For M
sampled values for the logical 0 and N sampled values for the logical 1, the
corresponding error rates are:
N
1 ⎛ μ 1i – S⎞
P e1 = ------- ∑ erfc ⎜ ----------------⎟ (1)
2N ⎝ 2σ 1i ⎠
i=1
1920
BER ANALYZER
M
1 ⎛ S – μ 0i⎞
P e0 = -------- ∑ erfc ⎜ ----------------⎟ (2)
2M ⎝ 2σ 0i ⎠
i=1
If the signal is mixed with the noise, the Average Gaussian method is modified to
calculate the average error patterns. The detailed description is [4]:
8
NP ⎛ μ i – S⎞
∑ N ⎜⎝ -------------
(3)
Pe = -----
- erfc ⎟
2σ ⎠ i
i=1
where NP is the number of one occurrence of any pattern, N is the total number of
patterns, μ i and σ i are average values and standard deviations of the sampled
values for each pattern respectively, and S is the threshold value.
Worst-case Gaussian
Since the Average Gaussian method can estimate the BER per bit or per pattern, the
Worst-case Gaussian searches for the min BER for each bit or pattern instead of
calculating the average values.
Chi-Squared
The Chi-Squared estimator is adequate for received signals with non-Gaussian
statistics [5][6][7]. The analyzer will estimate the Chi-squared parameters after
statistical analysis of the received signal. The probability of error is calculated
according to:
∞ S
M N
P e = --------------- ∫ f 2 ( x 0 ) + --------------- ∫ fχ ( x 1 )
(4)
2
N+M χ N+M
S –∞
The model can also calculate the average error pattern and the worst case pattern.
Measured
The measured method will count the errors directly. E.g. the total number of marks
bellow spaces divided by the total number of bits.
Calculated results
There are two modes to calculate the Q-Factor:
1921
BER ANALYZER
The Q-Factor from BER is calculated numerically by:
1 Q
P e = --- erfc ⎛ -------⎞ (1)
2 ⎝ 2⎠
where the Q-factor is calculated
μ1 – μ0
Q = -------------------- (2)
σ1 + σ0
The eye height is calculated by [2]:
(3)
E H = ( μ 1 – 3σ 1 ) – ( μ 0 + 3σ 0 )
The eye amplitude is calculated by:
EA = μ1 – μ0 (4)
The eye closure is calculated by:
(5)
E c = min ( V 1 ) – max ( V 0 )
where min(V1) is the minimum value of the amplitude for the marks and max(V0) is
the maximum value for the amplitude of the spaces.
The eye-opening factor is calculated by:
( μ1 – σ1 ) – ( μ0 – σ0 ) (6)
E 0 = ---------------------------------------------------
( μ1 – μ0 )
1922
BER ANALYZER
The extinction ratio is calculated by:
μ1 (7)
E R = -----
μ0
For the user defined threshold, the input file, given by the parameter
Measured threshold filename, is formatted with two items per line, the time and
threshold amplitude. Time is given in ratio of the bit period, and amplitude is given in
arbitrary units (voltage or current)
As an example of input file, we have:
0 0.5
0.1 0.5
0.2 0.5
...
0.9 0.5
FEC estimation
Parameter Enable FEC gain estimation allows the user to select between an
analytical FEC estimation [8] or to use measurements. For the measured FEC, the
input file, given by the parameter Measured FEC filename, is formatted with two items
per line, the current BER (before FEC), and the BER after FEC gain.
As an example of input file, we have:
1.0e-2 2.0e-3
1.0e-3 2.0e-4
1.0e-4 2.0e-5
... ...
References
[1] G.P. Agrawal, "Fiber Optic Communication Systems," John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1997.
[2] J.C. Cartledge, G.S. Burley, "The Effect of Laser Chirping on Lightwave System Performance,"
Journal of Lightwave Technology, Vol. 7, No. 3, 1989, S. 568-573.
1923
BER ANALYZER
[4] C.J. Anderson, J.A. Lyle, “Technique for evaluation of systems performance using Q in
numerical simulation exhibiting intersymbol interference,” Electronic Letters, Vol. 30, No. 1,
1994, S. 71-72.
[5] P. A. Humblet, "On the Bit Error Rate of Lightwave Systems with Optical Amplifiers", Journal of
Lightwave Technology, Vol. 9, No. 11, pp. 1576–1582, November 1991.
[6] D. Marcuse, "Calculation of Bit-Error Probability for a Lightwave System with Optical Amplifiers
and Post-Detection Gaussian Noise", Journal of Lightwave Technology, Vol. 9, No. 4, pp. 505–
513, April 1991
[7] D. Marcuse, "Derivation of Analytical Expressions for the Bit-Error Probability in Lightwave
Systems with Optical Amplifiers", Journal of Lightwave Technology, Vol. 8, No. 12, pp. 1816–
1823, December 1990.
[8] Keang-Po Ho, Chinlon Lin, “Performance analysis of optical transmission system with
polarization-mode dispersion and forward error correction”, Photonics Technology Letters, Vol.
9, No. 9, pp. 1288-1290, September 1997.
1924
ELECTRICAL POWER METER
Electrical Power Meter
This visualizer allows the user to calculate and display the average power of electrical
signals. It can also calculate the AC and DC power.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Minimum value -100 dBm -
Minimum value for power when using units in dBm.
Scale factor 0 dB -
Factor used for scaling.
Simulation

value range
1925
Results

Total Power dBm
Total Power W
Signal Power dBm
Signal Power W
Noise Power dBm
Noise Power W
Total Power AC dBm
Total Power AC W
Signal Power AC dBm
Signal Power AC W
Noise Power AC dBm
Noise Power AC W
Total Power DC dBm
Total Power DC W
Signal Power DC dBm
Signal Power DC W
Noise Power DC dBm
Noise Power DC W
Browser, from the Component Viewer, or by double-clicking a visualizer in the Main
Layout.
1926
Figure 1 Project Browser
Figure 2 EPMV Display
1927
Notes:
1928
ELECTRICAL CARRIER ANALYZER (ECAN)
Electrical Carrier Analyzer (ECAN)
The Electrical Carrier Analyzer (ECAN) measures and compares different results in
two different frequencies. It can also calculate carrier to noise ratio.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
Frequency 1 50 MHz, Hz, kHz, [0,+INF[
THz
Center frequency of the first filter.
Bandwidth 1 10 MHz, Hz, kHz, [0,+INF[

GHz
Bandwidth of the first filter.

THz
Center frequency of the second filter.

GHz
Bandwidth of the second filter.
Filter type Gaussian - Gaussian,

Rectangle
Filter order 1 - [1,+INF[

Order of the Gaussian filter.
Scale factor 0 dB ]-INF,+INF[
1929
Simulation

value range
Results
Frequency 1

Total Power1 dBm
Total Power1 W
Signal Power1 dBm
Signal Power1 W
Noise Power1 dBm
Noise Power1 W
SNR1 dB
Frequency 2

Total Power2 dBm
Total Power2 W
Signal Power2 dBm
Signal Power2 W
Noise Power2 dBm
Noise Power2 W
SNR2 dB
1930
Details
Total Power

Min. Total Power dBm
Min. Total Power W
Frequency at Max. Total Power Hz
Max. Total Power dBm
Max. Total Power W
Frequency at Min. Signal Power Hz
Ratio Max/Min Signal Power dB
Ratio Max/Min Signal Power —
Signal

Min. Total Power W
Max. Total Power W
Noise

Min. Total Power W
Max. Total Power W
1931

SNR

Min. SNR dB
Frequency at Min. SNR Hz
Max. SNR dB
Frequency at Max. SNR Hz
Ratio Max/Min SNR dB
Browser, from the Component Viewer, or by double-clicking a visualizer in the Main
Layout.
1932
The ECAN will estimate the signal and the noise power for each electrical signal
channel based on the central frequency of the internal filters. The analysis tab
displays results such as frequency, power, noise, and SNR.
1933
Figure 2 Analysis tab
The Details tab displays the detailed analysis for the results shown in the Analysis tab,
including the minimum and maximum values for the signals.
Figure 3 Details tab
1934
DUAL PORT ELECTRICAL CARRIER ANALYZER
Dual Port Electrical Carrier Analyzer
The Dual Port Electrical Carrier Analyzer measures and compares different results in
two different frequencies.
Ports

Parameters
Main

value range
THz
Center frequency of the first filter.

GHz
Bandwidth of the first filter.

THz
Center frequency of the second filter.

GHz
Bandwidth of the second filter.
Filter type Gaussian - Gaussian,

Rectangle
Filter order 1 - [1,+INF[
Order of the Gaussian filter.
Scale factor 0 dB ]-INF,+INF[

1935
Simulation

value range
Results
Frequency 1
Input and Output

Total Power1 dBm
Total Power1 W
Signal Power1 dBm
Signal Power1 W
Noise Power1 dBm
Noise Power1 W
SNR1 dB
Frequency 2
Input and Output

Total Power2 dBm
Total Power2 W
Signal Power2 dBm
Signal Power2 W
Noise Power2 dBm
Noise Power2 W
SNR2 dB
1936
Details
Gain

Min. Gain dBm
Frequency at Min. Gain Hz
Max. Gain dBm
Frequency at Max. Gain Hz
Ratio Max/Min Gain dB
Noise Figure

Min. Noise Figure dBm
Frequency at Min. Noise Figure Hz
Max. Noise Figure dBm
Frequency at Max. Noise Figure Hz
Ratio Max/Min Noise Figure dB
Total Power
Input and Output

Min. Total Power W
Max. Total Power W
Signa
1937
Input and Outputl

Min. Total Power W
Frequency at Min. Total Power Hz
Max. Total Power W
Frequency at Max. Signal Power Hz
Noise
Input and Output

Min. Noise Power dBm
Min. Noise Power W
Frequency at Min. Noise Power Hz
Max. Noise Power dBm
Max. Noise Power W
Frequency at Max. Noise Power Hz
Ratio Max/Min Noise Power dB
Ratio Max/Min Noise Power —
SNR
Input and Output

Min. SNR dB
Frequency at Min. SNR Hz
Max. SNR dB
Frequency at Max. SNR Hz
Ratio Max/Min SNR dB
1938
After you run a simulation, the visualizers in the project generate results based on the
signal input and output. You can access the results from the Project Browser, from
the Component Viewer, or by double-clicking a visualizer in the Main Layout.
The Dual Port Electrical Carrier Analyzer will estimate the signal and the noise power
for each electrical signal channel based on the central frequency of the internal filters
and on the resolution bandwidth. The analysis tab displays results such as gain and
noise figure.
1939
Figure 2 Analysis tab
The Details tab displays the detailed analysis for the results shown in the Analysis tab,
including the minimum and maximum values for the signals.
Figure 3 Details tab
1940
ELECTRICAL CONSTELLATION VISUALIZER
Electrical Constellation Visualizer
Displays the In-Phase and Quadrature-Phase electrical signals in a constellation

diagram. It can also display the polar diagram and estimate the probability of symbol
error for M-ary signals.
Ports

Electrical - I Input Electrical
Electrical - Q Input Electrical
Parameters
Main

value range
Polar diagram False - True, False
Defines whether to display the detected symbols or the polar diagram
Reference bit rate Bit rate Bits/s, MBits/s [0, 1e12]

GBits/s
Reference bit rate to use when calculating bit period
Delay compensation I 0 s [-1e100, 1e100]
Delay to apply to the In-Phase signal input
Delay compensation Q 0 s [-1e100, 1e100]
Delay to apply to the Quadrature-Phase signal input

Value for the decision instant to use when recovering the symbols
Ignore start symbols 0 symbols [0, +INF[
Ignore end symbols 0 symbols [0, +INF[
Estimate symbol error False - True, False

Defines whether to calculate symbol error or not
1941

value range
Targets (a.u.) 64x3 - -
Circular decision regions used to calculate symbol error probability
Targets file name QAM64.dat - -

Filename with the targets data
Distance scale 1 a.u. [-1e100, 1e100]
Distance or radius scale factor to be applied to the decision region
I target shift 0 a.u. [-1e100, 1e100]
Horizontal shift to be applied to the decision region
Q target shift 0 a.u. [-1e100, 1e100]

Vertical shift to be applied to the decision region
I target scale 1 a.u. [-1e100, 1e100]
Horizontal scale factor to be applied to the decision regions
Q target scale 1 a.u. [-1e100, 1e100]
Vertical scale factor to be applied to the decision regions
Phase offset 0 deg [-1e100, 1e100]
Rotation offset to be applied to the decision regions
Graphs

value range
Limit number of points True - [0, +INF[
Defines whether you can enter the maximum number of points to be

displayed.
Maximum number of points 128,000 -
Maximum number of points that can be displayed in a graph.
Invert colors False - [100, 1e+008]
Enable color grade False - True, False

Number of color bins 500 - [100, 1e+008]
1942

value range
Color grade palette Default - Default,
Agilent, Gray,
Green,Blue,
Agilent red,
Agilent blue,
Agilent green,
Agilent yellow

Simulation

value range
Random numbers

value range
Defines whether the seed is automatically defined and unique.
User defined seed index for noise generation.
1943
Graphs

Signal Amplitude Amplitude - I (a.u.) Amplitude - Q (a.u.)
Noise Amplitude Amplitude - I (a.u.) Amplitude - Q (a.u.)
Signal + Noise Amplitude Amplitude - I (a.u.) Amplitude - Q (a.u.)
Targets Amplitude - I (a.u.) Amplitude - Q (a.u.)
Results

log of Symbol Error at User Defined Decision Instant -
Symbol Error at User Defined Decision Instant -
Q Factor from Symbol Error at User Defined Decision Instant -
Error Vector Magnitude at User Defined Decision Instant -
1944
Figure 1 Project Browser displaying the Constellation Visualizer
1945
Figure 2 Constellation display
You can select the signal to be displayed from the signal buffer by selecting the signal
index. The vertical tab gives access to the signal types:
• Signal
• Noise
• Signal and Noise
1946
Symbol error estimation

If Estimate symbol error is enabled, the symbol error is calculated according to [1]:
M M
1--- Q kl
Pe = ∑ Pm [ k ] ∑ erfc ⎛ --------⎞ (1)
2 ⎝ 2⎠
k=1 l = 1, l ≠ k
where M is the number of received symbols, P m [ k ] is the probability of occurrence

of symbol k, calculated from the total number of symbols and the number of symbols
contained in region k. Q kl is calculated according to: :
d kl
Q kl = --------------------- (2)
σ kl + σ lk
where d kl is the distance between the centers of mass of regions k and l, σ kl and
σ lk are the standard deviations of regions k and l respectively.
The Q-Factor from BER is calculated by numerically isolating Q from:
1 Q
P e = --- erfc ⎛ -------⎞
(3)
2 ⎝ 2⎠
The Error Vector Magnitude (EVM) [2][3] is calculated according to:
M 2 1
⎛ d kl⎞ --2-
⎜ ∑ ------⎟
⎜ M⎟
EVM = ⎜ = 1, l ≠ k
l--------------------------⎟ (4)
⎜ M 2⎟
⎜ dk ⎟
⎜ ∑ ---- -⎟
⎝ l = 1, l ≠ k M ⎠
where d k is the reference distance of region k.

Parameter Targets defines the contour regions used to calculate the statistical
properties of a given symbol in the constellation diagram. Figure 4 shows the
constellation diagram and the target regions using the Component Viewer feature of
OptiSystem.
Note: You will have to use the Project Browser or the Component Viewer in order
to visualize the target regions.
1947
Figure 4 Target regions from Component Viewer
References
(1987).
[2] IEEE Standard for Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)
Specifications: High-Speed Physical Layer in the 5 GHz Band, IEEE Standard 802.11aTM-
1999.
[3] IEEE Standard for Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer
(PHY)Specifications: Higher-Speed Physical Layer Extension in the 2.4 GHz Band, IEEE
Standard 802.11b-1999.
1948
Visualizer Library
Electrical
Test Sets
• Electrical Filter Analyzer

• S Parameter Extractor
1949
Notes:
1950
ELECTRICAL FILTER ANALYZER
Electrical Filter Analyzer
The Electrical Filter Analyzer is a test set that measures the transmission of an
electrical component, or the device under test (DUT), using a frequency domain
method.
Ports

From DUT output Input Electrical
To DUT input Output Electrical
Parameters
Main

value range
Frequency range 100 GHz Hz, GHz, THz [0,+INF[
Electrical signal bandwidth or sample rate
Setup

value range
Cutoff magnitude 3 dB [0,100]
Reference cutoff magnitude for bandwidth result calculation
Save to file False — True, False

Determines if the filter transmission will be saved as a file
Filename with the filter data
1951
ELECTRICAL FILTER ANALYZER
Graphs

value range
Frequency unit Hz — — Hz, THz
Unit scale for the graphs

scale
Unwrap phase False — — True, False

discontinuity
Graphs

Transmission function Frequency (Hz) Power (dB)
Results

Frequency at Max. Transmission Hz
Filter Bandwidth (BandPass) at Cut off Hz
Frequency at Min. Transmission Hz
Filter Bandwidth (Band-Reject) at Cut off Hz
The Electrical Filter Analyzer uses a broadband electrical source that produces a
signal over parameter Frequency range.The electrical field frequency response of the
device is calculated in the frequency domain according to:
I(f)
H ( f ) = -----------
O(f)
the DUT input.
1952
S PARAMETER EXTRACTOR
S Parameter Extractor
This component allows for electronic component or subsystem characterization. The

signal characteristics from an electrical transmitter input and receiver output can be
extracted and exported into an industry standard Touchstone format for s-
parameters. It also allows the user to export the impulse response of the device under
test as a list of FIR coefficients.
Ports

From DUT input Input Electrical
From DUT output Input Electrical
Parameters
Main

value range
Filename (.s2p) Device.s2p - -
The data destination filename for the calculated S parameters
Reference resistance 50 Ohm -
FIR

value range
Export FIR coefficients False - True, False
Determines if the equivalent FIR coefficients will be saved as a file
User defined sample rate False - True, False
Determines whether or not to use the default input sample rate
Sample rate 10 Hz, GHz, THz [0, 1e100]

The sample rate used to calculate the FIR coefficients
1953

value range
Digital filter order 64 - [1,1e7]
The number of FIR coefficients
FIR filename FIR.dat - -

Export FIR data destination file name
Numerical

value range
Reverse response False - - True, False
Defines whether or not to reverse the response of
the FIR coefficients and the S parameters data
Negative frequencies False - - True, False
Repeat S21 False - - True, False
Simulation

value range
Graphs

S21 - angle Frequency (Hz) Phase (deg)
S21 - magnitude Frequency (Hz) Amplitude (a.u.)
The S Parameter Extractor requires two input signals. The first one is a copy of the
signal that is connected to the device under test input (DUT) input. The second signal
is the output from the DUT. The electrical field frequency response of the device is
calculated in the frequency domain according to:
I(f)
H ( f ) = -----------
O(f)
1954
the DUT input. This component exports a Touchstone format file containing the S-
parameters for the input frequency range.
If Export FIR coefficients is enable, the impulse response is calculated from H(f). For
the FIR coefficients, User defined sample rate parameter controls the frequency
range of H(f).
1955
Notes:
1956
Visualizer Library
Binary
• Binary Sequence Visualizer
• M-ary Sequence Visualizer
1957
Notes:
1958
BINARY SEQUENCE VISUALIZER
Binary Sequence Visualizer
This visualizer allows the user to calculate and display binary signals in the time
domain.
Ports

modes
Input Input Binary Binary signals
Parameters
Graphs

value range

the display
Export

value range
Export False - True, False
Determines whether or not to save the signal to a file
Filename Sequence.dat - -
Destination file name
1959
Simulation

value range
Enabled True - [True, False]
Graphs

Amplitude Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
Access the visualizer parameters, graphs, and results from the simulation (see Figure
2).
1960
Figure 2 Binary Visualizer display
1961
Notes:
1962
M-ARY SEQUENCE VISUALIZER
M-ary Sequence Visualizer
This visualizer allows the user to calculate and display m-ary signals in the time
domain.
Ports

modes
Input Input M-ary M-ary signals
Parameters
Graphs

value range

the display
Export

value range
Export False - True, False
Determines whether or not to save the signal to a file
Destination file name
1963
Simulation

value range
Graphs

Amplitude Time (s) Amplitude (a.u.)
Access the visualizer parameters, graphs, and results from the simulation (see Figure
2).
1964
Figure 2 M-ary Visualizer display
1965
Notes:
1966
Visualizer Library
Binary
Test Sets
• BER Test Set
1967
Notes:
1968
BER TEST SET
BER Test Set
This component generates a large bit sequence, transmits the bit sequence to DUT,
and then compares the bit sequence it received from DUT to the transmitted bit
sequence.
Ports

To DUT input Output Binary
From DUT output Input Binary
Parameters
Main

value range
Bit rate Bit rate Bits/s, MBits/s, [0, +INF[
GBits/s
Truncate sequence False - True, False

If disabled, the sequence length to be simulated is determined by the
global parameter “Sequence length”; if enabled, the sequence length
to be simulated is determined by the component parameter
“Sequence length”
Sequence length 8192 Bits [1, +INF[
The length of the bit sequence to be simulated
Operation mode Order - Order,

Measured
The operation mode of the sequence generator
Order log(Sequence - -
length) / log(2)
The file which contains the user-defined bit sequence
1969
BER TEST SET

value range
Number of repeating bits 3 - -
Number of repeating bits added to the beginning and end of each

block signal
Number of leading zeros 1 - -
Number of leading zeros added to each block signal
Number of trailing zeros 1 - -
Number of trailing zeros added to each block signal
Iterations 0 - -
The number of iterations calculated from the component parameters
(read only)
Output sequence length 0 - -
The total sequence length (after adding repeating bits and

leading/trailing zeors) calculated from the component parameters
(read only)
Sequence length per iteration 0 Bits -
The sequence length per iteration calculated from the component

parameters (read only)
Enhanced

value range
Single iteration False - True, False
Determines whether or not to calculate a single, user defined iteration
Iteration 1 - [ 1, +INF [
The index of user-defined single iteration
Export sequence to file False - True, False
Determines whether or not to save the input (received) and output

(generated) sequences to files
Output sequence filename Sequence - -

Destination file for the generated sequence Out.dat
Input sequence filename Sequence - -

In.dat
Destination file for the received sequence
1970
BER TEST SET
Random numbers

value

User-defined seed index for bit generation
Results

BER -
Input Sequence Length -
Iteration Number -
Log of BER -
This component can be used for large-scale simulaiton which requires millions of bits.
It divides the bit sequence into blocks (block length is constrained by global parameter
“Time Window”), transmits the bit sequence to the DUT block by block (multiple
iterations), and then performs cumulative direct-error-counting after it receives each
block from the DUT. It is important that the bit pattern the BER Test Set received
has to be synchronized to the bit pattern that it transmitted.
Below is an example illustrating how to set up this component.
Figure 1 BER Test Set - System layout
In this example, global parameter “Bit rate” = 10 GBits/s and “Sequence length” = 32
Bits (which means the time window can only accomodate 32 bits for a 10 GBits/s
signal). For the BER Test Set, the parameters are shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3.
1971
BER TEST SET
Figure 2 BER Test Set - Parameters (Main)
Figure 3 BER Test Set - Parameters (Enhanced)
The sequence length to be simulated is 64 Bits, which is determined by the

component parameter “Sequence length”. The bit sequence is defined by uploading
an external file, and the format of the file is shown in Figure 4.
1972
BER TEST SET
Figure 4 Format of the file for uploaded bit sequence
As can be seen from Figure 2, the number of repeating bits is set to 5 (which means
there are 5 repeating bits added to the beginning and end of each block separately),
and the number of leading/trailing zeros is set to 3 (which means there are 3 zeros
added to the beginning and end of each block separately).
Considering the Time Window in the simulation can only accomodate 32 bits, it is
calculated such that:
1 Number of effective bits per block = 32 (sequence length per block as determined by
Time Window) - 3 (number of leading zeros) - 5 (number of leading repeating bits) - 5
(number of trailing repeating bits) - 3 (number of trailing zeros) = 16.
2 “Iterations” = 64 (number of bits the user wants to simulate, as defined by component
parameter “Sequence length”) / 16 (Number of effective bits per block) = 4. The
global parameter “Iterations” has to be set to the same vaule as this
component parameter “Iterations”.
3 “Output sequence length” = 128 (total number of bits after adding repeating bits and
leading/trailing zeros).
4 “Sequence length per iteration” = 32 (as constrained by global parameter Time
Window).
To understand the calculation process, it is important to know that:

1 The leading repeating bits comes from the last 5 effective bits in previous block.
2 The trailing repeating bits comes from the first 5 effective bits in next block.
The parameter “Number of repeating bits” is set according to the channel memory.
For example, if the link has a dispersion of 1000 ps/nm, then for a 10 Gbps signal
which has ~ 1 nm bandwidth, the pulse spreading can go as far as 1000 ps, which is
the duration of 10 bits. Correspondingly, we should set the “Number of repeating bits”
to 10. In this example, we have set the “Number of repeating bits” to 5.
The calculation process can be visualized from Figure 5 and is also explained as
follows:
1 The uploaded 64 bits is shown in Figure 5 (a). The first step is to divide these 64 bits
into multiple blocks. As we have already know from the calculations above, the
number of effective bits per block is 16.
1973
BER TEST SET
— For the first block, it doesn’t know what is the leading repeating bits. Hence,
5 (number of leading repeating bits) + 16 (number of effective bits per block)
= 21 bits are truncated from the original 64 bits sequence.
— For both of the second and third block, 16 bits are truncated from the original
bit sequence directly.
— For the last block, it doesn’t know what is the trailing repeating bits. Hence,
16 (number of effective bits per block) + 5 (number of trailing repeating bits)
= 21 bits are required. However, there are only 64 -21 - 16 - 16 = 11 bits left
from the original 64 bits sequence, so the uploaded 64 bits sequence has to
be repeated in order for the fourth block to get enough bits (as visualized in
Figure 5 (b)).
2 After dividing the bit sequence into blocks, the next step is to add leading/trailing zeros
and repeating bits ( as illustrated in Figure 5 (c)).
Figure 5 (a) Uploaded bit sequence (b) Bit sequence divided into blocks (c) Add leading/trailing zeros and
repeating bits
(a)
(b)
(c)
After dividing the 64 bits into 4 blocks and adding leading/trailing zeros and repeating
bits, the bit sequence sent from the BER Test Set to the DUT is visualized in Figure
6 (a).
The procedure for the simulation is as follows:

1 For the first iteration: The first block is sent to the DUT. When BER Test Set receives
the first block of signal from the DUT, it calculates the number of bits simulated and
the BER (the leading/trailing zeros and repeating bits are removed before the
calculation of BER).
2 For the second iteration: the second block of signal is sent to the DUT. Once the BER
Test Set receives this block of signal from the DUT, it updates the accumulated
1974
BER TEST SET
number of bits simulated as well as the accumulated BER (again, leading/trailing

zeros and repeating bits are removed before the BER calculation).
3 ...
Once the simulation is finished, the user can observe the Sequence Out and
Seuqence In data, as shown in Figure 6, if parameter “Export sequence to file” is
enabled.
Figure 6 (a) Bit sequence from BER Test Set to DUT (b) Bit sequence from DUT to BER Test Set
(a)
(b)
If the user wants to use PRBS which is generated internally, parameter “Operation
mode” need to be changed to order.
If the user wants to run a single iteration to calibrate the DUT, parameter “Single
iteration” can be enabled. This is useful for synchronizing the bit pattern which the
BER Test Set transmitted and received.
1975
BER TEST SET
Notes:
1976
Optiwave
7 Capella Court
Ottawa, Ontario, K2E 7X1, Canada
Tel.: 1.613.224.4700
Fax: 1.613.224.4706
E-mail: support@optiwave.com
URL: www.optiwave.com

OptiSystem Component Library PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiSystem Component Library PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiSystem

Copyright © 2012 Optiwave

Cybernet Systems Co., Ltd. Japan

Optiwave Europe Europe

Pulse Generators ...................................................................................................... 1

Donut Transverse Mode Generator .......................................................................275

Optical Fibers Library.................................................................................. 297

Optical fiber ............................................................................................................299

Free Space Optics Library .......................................................................... 425

FSO Channel .........................................................................................................427

Receivers Library......................................................................................... 439

Multimode .............................................................................................................. 439

Amplifiers Library ........................................................................................ 531

Optical .................................................................................................................... 531

Filters Library ............................................................................................... 839

Optical .................................................................................................................... 839

WDM Multiplexers Library........................................................................... 997

Add and Drop ........................................................................................................ 997

Network Library.......................................................................................... 1071

Optical Switches ................................................................................................. 1071

Passives Library ........................................................................................ 1129

Electrical .............................................................................................................. 1129

Signal Processing Library......................................................................... 1359

Arithmetic ............................................................................................................ 1359

Tools Library .............................................................................................. 1493

Optiwave Software Tools .......................................................................... 1543

MATLAB Library......................................................................................... 1575

MATLAB Filter Component ..................................................................................1577

Scilab Library ............................................................................................. 1599

Save ADS File......................................................................................................1607

Analog/Digital Library................................................................................ 1635

Carrier Generators .............................................................................................. 1635

Visualizer Library ....................................................................................... 1801

Optical .................................................................................................................. 1801

• Duobinary Pulse Generator

Duobinary Pulse Generator

Used for duobinary modulation schemes. It is equivalent to a subsystem based on an

Name and description Port type Signal type

Clock Input Binary

Output Output Electrical

Name and description Default value Units Value range

Figure 1 Duobinary Pulse Generator subsystem

Inserts jitter in the input signal.

Name and description Port type Signal type

Clock Input Binary

Output Output Electrical

Name and description Default Default unit Units Value

Jitter amplitude 0.1 UI - [0,+INF[

Jitter amplitude range

Random jitter amplitude 0 UI - [0,+INF[

rms Random jitter

Name and description Default Units Value

Source of thermal noise.

Name and description Port type Signal type

Name and description Default Default unit Units Value

Determines whether the power is defined as PSD

Noise Power –60 dBm W, mW, dBm ]-INF,+INF[

Value of the PSD or the average power

Name and description Default Default unit Units Value

Determines whether or not the component is

Iterations Iterations — — [1,+INF[

Sample rate Sample rate Hz Hz, GHz, THz ]0,+INF[

Frequency simulation window